0% found this document useful (0 votes)

194 views1,107 pages

EMI Test Receiver - ESR7

Uploaded by

이민재

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

194 views1,107 pages

EMI Test Receiver - ESR7

Uploaded by

이민재

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 1107

R&S®ESR

EMI Test Receiver

User Manual

(;ÙÔÒ2)
1175.7068.02 ─ 10
Test & Measurement

User Manual
This manual covers the following products:
● R&S ESR3 (1316.3003.03)
● R&S ESR7 (1316.3003.07)
● R&S ESR26 (1316.3003.26)
● R&S FSV-B9
● R&S ESR-B50 (1316.3584.02)
● R&S ESR-K53 (1316.3590.02)
● R&S ESR-K56 (1316.3610.02)

The contents of this manual correspond to firmware version 2.27 or higher.

The software contained in this product makes use of several valuable open source software packages. For information, see the
"Open Source Acknowledgment" on the user documentation CD-ROM (included in delivery).
Rohde & Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing.

© 2015 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG

Mühldorfstr. 15, 81671 München, Germany
Phone: +49 89 41 29 - 0
Fax: +49 89 41 29 12 164
Email: [email protected]
Internet: www.rohde-schwarz.com
Subject to change – Data without tolerance limits is not binding.
R&S® is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.

The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual: R&S®ESR is abbreviated as R&S ESR.
Basic Safety Instructions
Always read through and comply with the following safety instructions!
All plants and locations of the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety
standards of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety. Our
products and the auxiliary equipment they require are designed, built and tested in accordance with the
safety standards that apply in each case. Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by
our quality assurance system. The product described here has been designed, built and tested in
accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer’s plant in a condition fully
complying with safety standards. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation, you must
observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual. If you have any questions regarding these
safety instructions, the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer them.
Furthermore, it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner. This product is designed
for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or, if expressly permitted, also in the field and must
not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage. You are responsible if the
product is used for any purpose other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer's
instructions. The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product.
The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation
and within its performance limits (see data sheet, documentation, the following safety instructions). Using
the product requires technical skills and, in some cases, a basic knowledge of English. It is therefore
essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills be
allowed to use the product. If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde & Schwarz products, this
will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation. Keep the basic safety instructions
and the product documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users.
Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by
dangerous situations. Therefore, carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions
before and when using the product. It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety
instructions on personal safety, for example, that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation. In
these safety instructions, the word "product" refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde &
Schwarz group of companies, including instruments, systems and all accessories. For product-specific
information, see the data sheet and the product documentation.

Safety labels on products

The following safety labels are used on products to warn against risks and dangers.

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning

Notice, general danger location ON/OFF Power

Observe product documentation

Caution when handling heavy equipment Standby indication

Danger of electric shock Direct current (DC)

1171.0000.42 - 08 Page 1
Basic Safety Instructions

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning

Caution ! Hot surface Alternating current (AC)

Protective conductor terminal Direct/alternating current (DC/AC)

To identify any terminal which is intended for
connection to an external conductor for
protection against electric shock in case of a
fault, or the terminal of a protective earth

Earth (Ground) Class II Equipment

to identify equipment meeting the safety
requirements specified for Class II equipment
(device protected by double or reinforced
insulation)

Frame or chassis Ground terminal EU labeling for batteries and accumulators

For additional information, see section "Waste

disposal/Environmental protection", item 1.

Be careful when handling electrostatic sensitive EU labeling for separate collection of electrical
devices and electronic devices

For additional information, see section "Waste

disposal/Environmental protection", item 2.

Warning! Laser radiation

For additional information, see section

"Operation", item 7.

Signal words and their meaning

The following signal words are used in the product documentation in order to warn the reader about risks
and dangers.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
Indicates information considered important, but not hazard-related, e.g.
messages relating to property damage.
In the product documentation, the word ATTENTION is used synonymously.
These signal words are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European
Economic Area. Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic
areas or military applications. It is therefore essential to make sure that the signal words described here
are always used only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product. The
use of signal words in connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation
and in personal injury or material damage.

1171.0000.42 - 08 Page 2
Basic Safety Instructions

Operating states and operating positions

The product may be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the
manufacturer, without the product's ventilation being obstructed. If the manufacturer's specifications are
not observed, this can result in electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or death. Applicable local
or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work
performed.
1. Unless otherwise specified, the following requirements apply to Rohde & Schwarz products:
predefined operating position is always with the housing floor facing down, IP protection 2X, use only
indoors, max. operating altitude 2000 m above sea level, max. transport altitude 4500 m above sea
level. A tolerance of ±10 % shall apply to the nominal voltage and ±5 % to the nominal frequency,
overvoltage category 2, pollution degree 2.
2. Do not place the product on surfaces, vehicles, cabinets or tables that for reasons of weight or stability
are unsuitable for this purpose. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when
installing the product and fastening it to objects or structures (e.g. walls and shelves). An installation
that is not carried out as described in the product documentation could result in personal injury or
even death.
3. Do not place the product on heat-generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters. The ambient
temperature must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the product documentation or in
the data sheet. Product overheating can cause electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or
even death.

Electrical safety
If the information on electrical safety is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary, electric shock,
fire and/or serious personal injury or death may occur.
1. Prior to switching on the product, always ensure that the nominal voltage setting on the product
matches the nominal voltage of the mains-supply network. If a different voltage is to be set, the power
fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly.
2. In the case of products of safety class I with movable power cord and connector, operation is
permitted only on sockets with a protective conductor contact and protective conductor.
3. Intentionally breaking the protective conductor either in the feed line or in the product itself is not
permitted. Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product. If extension cords
or connector strips are implemented, they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that they are
safe to use.
4. If there is no power switch for disconnecting the product from the mains, or if the power switch is not
suitable for this purpose, use the plug of the connecting cable to disconnect the product from the
mains. In such cases, always ensure that the power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all
times. For example, if the power plug is the disconnecting device, the length of the connecting cable
must not exceed 3 m. Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing disconnection
from the AC supply network. If products without power switches are integrated into racks or systems,
the disconnecting device must be provided at the system level.
5. Never use the product if the power cable is damaged. Check the power cables on a regular basis to
ensure that they are in proper operating condition. By taking appropriate safety measures and
carefully laying the power cable, ensure that the cable cannot be damaged and that no one can be
hurt by, for example, tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock.

1171.0000.42 - 08 Page 3
Basic Safety Instructions

6. The product may be operated only from TN/TT supply networks fuse-protected with max. 16 A (higher
fuse only after consulting with the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies).
7. Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty. Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the
socket provided for this purpose. Otherwise, sparks that result in fire and/or injuries may occur.
8. Do not overload any sockets, extension cords or connector strips; doing so can cause fire or electric
shocks.
9. For measurements in circuits with voltages Vrms > 30 V, suitable measures (e.g. appropriate
measuring equipment, fuse protection, current limiting, electrical separation, insulation) should be
taken to avoid any hazards.
10. Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment, e.g. PCs or other industrial
computers, comply with the IEC 60950-1 / EN 60950-1 or IEC 61010-1 / EN 61010-1 standards that
apply in each case.
11. Unless expressly permitted, never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product is in
operation. Doing so will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries, fire or damage to the
product.
12. If a product is to be permanently installed, the connection between the protective conductor terminal
on site and the product's protective conductor must be made first before any other connection is
made. The product may be installed and connected only by a licensed electrician.
13. For permanently installed equipment without built-in fuses, circuit breakers or similar protective
devices, the supply circuit must be fuse-protected in such a way that anyone who has access to the
product, as well as the product itself, is adequately protected from injury or damage.
14. Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a bolt of
lightning) can reach the product. Otherwise, the person operating the product will be exposed to the
danger of an electric shock.
15. Any object that is not designed to be placed in the openings of the housing must not be used for this
purpose. Doing so can cause short circuits inside the product and/or electric shocks, fire or injuries.
16. Unless specified otherwise, products are not liquid-proof (see also section "Operating states and
operating positions", item 1). Therefore, the equipment must be protected against penetration by
liquids. If the necessary precautions are not taken, the user may suffer electric shock or the product
itself may be damaged, which can also lead to personal injury.
17. Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can form in or on the
product, e.g. if the product has been moved from a cold to a warm environment. Penetration by water
increases the risk of electric shock.
18. Prior to cleaning the product, disconnect it completely from the power supply (e.g. AC supply network
or battery). Use a soft, non-linting cloth to clean the product. Never use chemical cleaning agents such
as alcohol, acetone or diluents for cellulose lacquers.

Operation
1. Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration. Make sure that persons
who use the products are physically, mentally and emotionally fit enough to do so; otherwise, injuries
or material damage may occur. It is the responsibility of the employer/operator to select suitable
personnel for operating the products.

1171.0000.42 - 08 Page 4
Basic Safety Instructions

2. Before you move or transport the product, read and observe the section titled "Transport".
3. As with all industrially manufactured goods, the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction
(allergens) such as nickel cannot be generally excluded. If you develop an allergic reaction (such as a
skin rash, frequent sneezing, red eyes or respiratory difficulties) when using a Rohde & Schwarz
product, consult a physician immediately to determine the cause and to prevent health problems or
stress.
4. Before you start processing the product mechanically and/or thermally, or before you take it apart, be
sure to read and pay special attention to the section titled "Waste disposal/Environmental protection",
item 1.
5. Depending on the function, certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated
level of electromagnetic radiation. Considering that unborn babies require increased protection,
pregnant women must be protected by appropriate measures. Persons with pacemakers may also be
exposed to risks from electromagnetic radiation. The employer/operator must evaluate workplaces
where there is a special risk of exposure to radiation and, if necessary, take measures to avert the
potential danger.
6. Should a fire occur, the product may release hazardous substances (gases, fluids, etc.) that can
cause health problems. Therefore, suitable measures must be taken, e.g. protective masks and
protective clothing must be worn.
7. Laser products are given warning labels that are standardized according to their laser class. Lasers
can cause biological harm due to the properties of their radiation and due to their extremely
concentrated electromagnetic power. If a laser product (e.g. a CD/DVD drive) is integrated into a
Rohde & Schwarz product, absolutely no other settings or functions may be used as described in the
product documentation. The objective is to prevent personal injury (e.g. due to laser beams).
8. EMC classes (in line with EN 55011/CISPR 11, and analogously with EN 55022/CISPR 22,
EN 55032/CISPR 32)
 Class A equipment:
Equipment suitable for use in all environments except residential environments and environments
that are directly connected to a low-voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings
Note: Class A equipment is intended for use in an industrial environment. This equipment may
cause radio disturbances in residential environments, due to possible conducted as well as
radiated disturbances. In this case, the operator may be required to take appropriate measures to
eliminate these disturbances.
 Class B equipment:
Equipment suitable for use in residential environments and environments that are directly
connected to a low-voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings

Repair and service

1. The product may be opened only by authorized, specially trained personnel. Before any work is
performed on the product or before the product is opened, it must be disconnected from the AC supply
network. Otherwise, personnel will be exposed to the risk of an electric shock.

1171.0000.42 - 08 Page 5
Basic Safety Instructions

2. Adjustments, replacement of parts, maintenance and repair may be performed only by electrical
experts authorized by Rohde & Schwarz. Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant
to safety (e.g. power switches, power transformers, fuses). A safety test must always be performed
after parts relevant to safety have been replaced (visual inspection, protective conductor test,
insulation resistance measurement, leakage current measurement, functional test). This helps ensure
the continued safety of the product.

Batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells

If the information regarding batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells is not observed either at all or to the
extent necessary, product users may be exposed to the risk of explosions, fire and/or serious personal
injury, and, in some cases, death. Batteries and rechargeable batteries with alkaline electrolytes (e.g.
lithium cells) must be handled in accordance with the EN 62133 standard.
1. Cells must not be taken apart or crushed.
2. Cells or batteries must not be exposed to heat or fire. Storage in direct sunlight must be avoided.
Keep cells and batteries clean and dry. Clean soiled connectors using a dry, clean cloth.
3. Cells or batteries must not be short-circuited. Cells or batteries must not be stored in a box or in a
drawer where they can short-circuit each other, or where they can be short-circuited by other
conductive materials. Cells and batteries must not be removed from their original packaging until they
are ready to be used.
4. Cells and batteries must not be exposed to any mechanical shocks that are stronger than permitted.
5. If a cell develops a leak, the fluid must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin or eyes. If
contact occurs, wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical aid.
6. Improperly replacing or charging cells or batteries that contain alkaline electrolytes (e.g. lithium cells)
can cause explosions. Replace cells or batteries only with the matching Rohde & Schwarz type (see
parts list) in order to ensure the safety of the product.
7. Cells and batteries must be recycled and kept separate from residual waste. Rechargeable batteries
and normal batteries that contain lead, mercury or cadmium are hazardous waste. Observe the
national regulations regarding waste disposal and recycling.

Transport
1. The product may be very heavy. Therefore, the product must be handled with care. In some cases,
the user may require a suitable means of lifting or moving the product (e.g. with a lift-truck) to avoid
back or other physical injuries.
2. Handles on the products are designed exclusively to enable personnel to transport the product. It is
therefore not permissible to use handles to fasten the product to or on transport equipment such as
cranes, fork lifts, wagons, etc. The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the
means of transport or lifting. Observe the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of
transport or lifting. Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage.
3. If you use the product in a vehicle, it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely
and properly. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions. Never use the
product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle. Adequately secure the
product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident.

1171.0000.42 - 08 Page 6
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

Waste disposal/Environmental protection

1. Specially marked equipment has a battery or accumulator that must not be disposed of with unsorted
municipal waste, but must be collected separately. It may only be disposed of at a suitable collection
point or via a Rohde & Schwarz customer service center.
2. Waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of with unsorted municipal waste, but
must be collected separately.
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG has developed a disposal concept and takes full responsibility for
take-back obligations and disposal obligations for manufacturers within the EU. Contact your
Rohde & Schwarz customer service center for environmentally responsible disposal of the product.
3. If products or their components are mechanically and/or thermally processed in a manner that goes
beyond their intended use, hazardous substances (heavy-metal dust such as lead, beryllium, nickel)
may be released. For this reason, the product may only be disassembled by specially trained
personnel. Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health. National waste disposal
regulations must be observed.
4. If handling the product releases hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special
way, e.g. coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly, the safety instructions of the
manufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal
regulations must be observed. Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the product
documentation. The improper disposal of hazardous substances or fuels can cause health problems
and lead to environmental damage.
For additional information about environmental protection, visit the Rohde & Schwarz website.

Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

¡Es imprescindible leer y cumplir las siguientes instrucciones e informaciones de seguridad!
El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde & Schwarz consiste en tener nuestros productos siempre al día
con los estándares de seguridad y de ofrecer a nuestros clientes el máximo grado de seguridad. Nuestros
productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados según las normas de
seguridad vigentes. Nuestro sistema de garantía de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas
estas normas. El presente producto ha sido fabricado y examinado según el certificado de conformidad
de la UE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable según los estándares técnicos de seguridad.
Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento libre de peligros, el usuario deberá
atenerse a todas las indicaciones, informaciones de seguridad y notas de alerta. El grupo de empresas
Rohde & Schwarz está siempre a su disposición en caso de que tengan preguntas referentes a estas
informaciones de seguridad.
Además queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida. Este producto
está destinado exclusivamente al uso en la industria y el laboratorio o, si ha sido expresamente
autorizado, para aplicaciones de campo y de ninguna manera deberá ser utilizado de modo que alguna
persona/cosa pueda sufrir daño. El uso del producto fuera de sus fines definidos o sin tener en cuenta las
instrucciones del fabricante queda en la responsabilidad del usuario. El fabricante no se hace en ninguna
forma responsable de consecuencias a causa del mal uso del producto.

1171.0000.42 - 08 Page 7
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado conforme a las
indicaciones de la correspondiente documentación del producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento
definido (ver hoja de datos, documentación, informaciones de seguridad que siguen). El uso del producto
hace necesarios conocimientos técnicos y ciertos conocimientos del idioma inglés. Por eso se debe tener
en cuenta que el producto solo pueda ser operado por personal especializado o personas instruidas en
profundidad con las capacidades correspondientes. Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de seguridad para el
uso de productos de Rohde & Schwarz, encontraría la información debida en la documentación del
producto en el capítulo correspondiente. Guarde bien las informaciones de seguridad elementales, así
como la documentación del producto, y entréguelas a usuarios posteriores.
Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para evitar en lo posible lesiones o daños por
peligros de toda clase. Por eso es imprescindible leer detalladamente y comprender por completo las
siguientes informaciones de seguridad antes de usar el producto, y respetarlas durante el uso del
producto. Deberán tenerse en cuenta todas las demás informaciones de seguridad, como p. ej. las
referentes a la protección de personas, que encontrarán en el capítulo correspondiente de la
documentación del producto y que también son de obligado cumplimiento. En las presentes
informaciones de seguridad se recogen todos los objetos que distribuye el grupo de empresas
Rohde & Schwarz bajo la denominación de "producto", entre ellos también aparatos, instalaciones así
como toda clase de accesorios. Los datos específicos del producto figuran en la hoja de datos y en la
documentación del producto.

Señalización de seguridad de los productos

Las siguientes señales de seguridad se utilizan en los productos para advertir sobre riesgos y peligros.

Símbolo Significado Símbolo Significado

Aviso: punto de peligro general Tensión de alimentación de PUESTA EN

MARCHA / PARADA
Observar la documentación del producto

Atención en el manejo de dispositivos de peso Indicación de estado de espera (standby)

elevado

Peligro de choque eléctrico Corriente continua (DC)

Advertencia: superficie caliente Corriente alterna (AC)

Conexión a conductor de protección Corriente continua / Corriente alterna (DC/AC)

Conexión a tierra El aparato está protegido en su totalidad por un

aislamiento doble (reforzado)

Conexión a masa Distintivo de la UE para baterías y

acumuladores

Más información en la sección

"Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente",
punto 1.

1171.0000.42 - 08 Page 8
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

Símbolo Significado Símbolo Significado

Aviso: Cuidado en el manejo de dispositivos Distintivo de la UE para la eliminación por

sensibles a la electrostática (ESD) separado de dispositivos eléctricos y
electrónicos

Más información en la sección

"Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente",
punto 2.

Advertencia: rayo láser

Más información en la sección

"Funcionamiento", punto 7.

Palabras de señal y su significado

En la documentación del producto se utilizan las siguientes palabras de señal con el fin de advertir contra
riesgos y peligros.
Indica una situación de peligro que, si no se evita, causa lesiones
graves o incluso la muerte.
Indica una situación de peligro que, si no se evita, puede causar
lesiones graves o incluso la muerte.
Indica una situación de peligro que, si no se evita, puede causar
lesiones leves o moderadas.
Indica información que se considera importante, pero no en relación
con situaciones de peligro; p. ej., avisos sobre posibles daños
materiales.
En la documentación del producto se emplea de forma sinónima el
término CUIDADO.

Las palabras de señal corresponden a la definición habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el área
económica europea. Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definición en otras áreas económicas o
en aplicaciones militares. Por eso se deberá tener en cuenta que las palabras de señal aquí descritas
sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinación con la correspondiente documentación del producto y
solamente en combinación con el producto correspondiente. La utilización de las palabras de señal en
combinación con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a interpretaciones
equivocadas y tener por consecuencia daños en personas u objetos.

Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento

El producto solamente debe ser utilizado según lo indicado por el fabricante respecto a los estados
operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento sin que se obstruya la ventilación. Si no se siguen las
indicaciones del fabricante, pueden producirse choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con
posible consecuencia de muerte. En todos los trabajos deberán ser tenidas en cuenta las normas
nacionales y locales de seguridad del trabajo y de prevención de accidentes.

1171.0000.42 - 08 Page 9
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

1. Si no se convino de otra manera, es para los productos Rohde & Schwarz válido lo que sigue:
como posición de funcionamiento se define por principio la posición con el suelo de la caja para
abajo, modo de protección IP 2X, uso solamente en estancias interiores, utilización hasta 2000 m
sobre el nivel del mar, transporte hasta 4500 m sobre el nivel del mar. Se aplicará una tolerancia de
±10 % sobre el voltaje nominal y de ±5 % sobre la frecuencia nominal. Categoría de sobrecarga
eléctrica 2, índice de suciedad 2.
2. No sitúe el producto encima de superficies, vehículos, estantes o mesas, que por sus características
de peso o de estabilidad no sean aptos para él. Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalación del
fabricante cuando instale y asegure el producto en objetos o estructuras (p. ej. paredes y estantes). Si
se realiza la instalación de modo distinto al indicado en la documentación del producto, se pueden
causar lesiones o, en determinadas circunstancias, incluso la muerte.
3. No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que generen calor (p. ej. radiadores o calefactores). La
temperatura ambiente no debe superar la temperatura máxima especificada en la documentación del
producto o en la hoja de datos. En caso de sobrecalentamiento del producto, pueden producirse
choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte.

Seguridad eléctrica
Si no se siguen (o se siguen de modo insuficiente) las indicaciones del fabricante en cuanto a seguridad
eléctrica, pueden producirse choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia
de muerte.
1. Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se deberá comprobar siempre que la tensión
preseleccionada en el producto coincida con la de la red de alimentación eléctrica. Si es necesario
modificar el ajuste de tensión, también se deberán cambiar en caso dado los fusibles
correspondientes del producto.
2. Los productos de la clase de protección I con alimentación móvil y enchufe individual solamente
podrán enchufarse a tomas de corriente con contacto de seguridad y con conductor de protección
conectado.
3. Queda prohibida la interrupción intencionada del conductor de protección, tanto en la toma de
corriente como en el mismo producto. La interrupción puede tener como consecuencia el riesgo de
que el producto sea fuente de choques eléctricos. Si se utilizan cables alargadores o regletas de
enchufe, deberá garantizarse la realización de un examen regular de los mismos en cuanto a su
estado técnico de seguridad.
4. Si el producto no está equipado con un interruptor para desconectarlo de la red, o bien si el
interruptor existente no resulta apropiado para la desconexión de la red, el enchufe del cable de
conexión se deberá considerar como un dispositivo de desconexión.
El dispositivo de desconexión se debe poder alcanzar fácilmente y debe estar siempre bien accesible.
Si, p. ej., el enchufe de conexión a la red es el dispositivo de desconexión, la longitud del cable de
conexión no debe superar 3 m).
Los interruptores selectores o electrónicos no son aptos para el corte de la red eléctrica. Si se
integran productos sin interruptor en bastidores o instalaciones, se deberá colocar el interruptor en el
nivel de la instalación.
5. No utilice nunca el producto si está dañado el cable de conexión a red. Compruebe regularmente el
correcto estado de los cables de conexión a red. Asegúrese, mediante las medidas de protección y
de instalación adecuadas, de que el cable de conexión a red no pueda ser dañado o de que nadie
pueda ser dañado por él, p. ej. al tropezar o por un choque eléctrico.

1171.0000.42 - 08 Page 10
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

6. Solamente está permitido el funcionamiento en redes de alimentación TN/TT aseguradas con fusibles
de 16 A como máximo (utilización de fusibles de mayor amperaje solo previa consulta con el grupo de
empresas Rohde & Schwarz).
7. Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de corriente sucias o llenas de polvo. Introduzca el enchufe por
completo y fuertemente en la toma de corriente. La no observación de estas medidas puede provocar
chispas, fuego y/o lesiones.
8. No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente, los cables alargadores o las regletas de enchufe ya que esto
podría causar fuego o choques eléctricos.
9. En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente con una tensión U eff > 30 V se deberán tomar las medidas
apropiadas para impedir cualquier peligro (p. ej. medios de medición adecuados, seguros, limitación
de tensión, corte protector, aislamiento etc.).
10. Para la conexión con dispositivos informáticos como un PC o un ordenador industrial, debe
comprobarse que éstos cumplan los estándares IEC60950-1/EN60950-1 o IEC61010-1/EN 61010-1
válidos en cada caso.
11. A menos que esté permitido expresamente, no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la carcasa
mientras el producto esté en servicio. Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes eléctricos y
puede causar lesiones, fuego o daños en el producto.
12. Si un producto se instala en un lugar fijo, se deberá primero conectar el conductor de protección fijo
con el conductor de protección del producto antes de hacer cualquier otra conexión. La instalación y
la conexión deberán ser efectuadas por un electricista especializado.
13. En el caso de dispositivos fijos que no estén provistos de fusibles, interruptor automático ni otros
mecanismos de seguridad similares, el circuito de alimentación debe estar protegido de modo que
todas las personas que puedan acceder al producto, así como el producto mismo, estén a salvo de
posibles daños.
14. Todo producto debe estar protegido contra sobretensión (debida p. ej. a una caída del rayo) mediante
los correspondientes sistemas de protección. Si no, el personal que lo utilice quedará expuesto al
peligro de choque eléctrico.
15. No debe introducirse en los orificios de la caja del aparato ningún objeto que no esté destinado a ello.
Esto puede producir cortocircuitos en el producto y/o puede causar choques eléctricos, fuego o
lesiones.
16. Salvo indicación contraria, los productos no están impermeabilizados (ver también el capítulo
"Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento", punto 1). Por eso es necesario tomar las
medidas necesarias para evitar la entrada de líquidos. En caso contrario, existe peligro de choque
eléctrico para el usuario o de daños en el producto, que también pueden redundar en peligro para las
personas.
17. No utilice el producto en condiciones en las que pueda producirse o ya se hayan producido
condensaciones sobre el producto o en el interior de éste, como p. ej. al desplazarlo de un lugar frío a
otro caliente. La entrada de agua aumenta el riesgo de choque eléctrico.
18. Antes de la limpieza, desconecte por completo el producto de la alimentación de tensión (p. ej. red de
alimentación o batería). Realice la limpieza de los aparatos con un paño suave, que no se deshilache.
No utilice bajo ningún concepto productos de limpieza químicos como alcohol, acetona o diluyentes
para lacas nitrocelulósicas.

1171.0000.42 - 08 Page 11
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

Funcionamiento
1. El uso del producto requiere instrucciones especiales y una alta concentración durante el manejo.
Debe asegurarse que las personas que manejen el producto estén a la altura de los requerimientos
necesarios en cuanto a aptitudes físicas, psíquicas y emocionales, ya que de otra manera no se
pueden excluir lesiones o daños de objetos. El empresario u operador es responsable de seleccionar
el personal usuario apto para el manejo del producto.
2. Antes de desplazar o transportar el producto, lea y tenga en cuenta el capítulo "Transporte".
3. Como con todo producto de fabricación industrial no puede quedar excluida en general la posibilidad
de que se produzcan alergias provocadas por algunos materiales empleados ―los llamados
alérgenos (p. ej. el níquel)―. Si durante el manejo de productos Rohde & Schwarz se producen
reacciones alérgicas, como p. ej. irritaciones cutáneas, estornudos continuos, enrojecimiento de la
conjuntiva o dificultades respiratorias, debe avisarse inmediatamente a un médico para investigar las
causas y evitar cualquier molestia o daño a la salud.
4. Antes de la manipulación mecánica y/o térmica o el desmontaje del producto, debe tenerse en cuenta
imprescindiblemente el capítulo "Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente", punto 1.
5. Ciertos productos, como p. ej. las instalaciones de radiocomunicación RF, pueden a causa de su
función natural, emitir una radiación electromagnética aumentada. Deben tomarse todas las medidas
necesarias para la protección de las mujeres embarazadas. También las personas con marcapasos
pueden correr peligro a causa de la radiación electromagnética. El empresario/operador tiene la
obligación de evaluar y señalizar las áreas de trabajo en las que exista un riesgo elevado de
exposición a radiaciones.
6. Tenga en cuenta que en caso de incendio pueden desprenderse del producto sustancias tóxicas
(gases, líquidos etc.) que pueden generar daños a la salud. Por eso, en caso de incendio deben
usarse medidas adecuadas, como p. ej. máscaras antigás e indumentaria de protección.
7. Los productos con láser están provistos de indicaciones de advertencia normalizadas en función de la
clase de láser del que se trate. Los rayos láser pueden provocar daños de tipo biológico a causa de
las propiedades de su radiación y debido a su concentración extrema de potencia electromagnética.
En caso de que un producto Rohde & Schwarz contenga un producto láser (p. ej. un lector de
CD/DVD), no debe usarse ninguna otra configuración o función aparte de las descritas en la
documentación del producto, a fin de evitar lesiones (p. ej. debidas a irradiación láser).
8. Clases de compatibilidad electromagnética (conforme a EN 55011 / CISPR 11; y en analogía con EN
55022 / CISPR 22, EN 55032 / CISPR 32)
 Aparato de clase A:
Aparato adecuado para su uso en todos los entornos excepto en los residenciales y en aquellos
conectados directamente a una red de distribución de baja tensión que suministra corriente a
edificios residenciales.
Nota: Los aparatos de clase A están destinados al uso en entornos industriales. Estos aparatos
pueden causar perturbaciones radioeléctricas en entornos residenciales debido a posibles
perturbaciones guiadas o radiadas. En este caso, se le podrá solicitar al operador que tome las
medidas adecuadas para eliminar estas perturbaciones.
 Aparato de clase B:
Aparato adecuado para su uso en entornos residenciales, así como en aquellos conectados
directamente a una red de distribución de baja tensión que suministra corriente a edificios
residenciales.

1171.0000.42 - 08 Page 12
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

Reparación y mantenimiento
1. El producto solamente debe ser abierto por personal especializado con autorización para ello. Antes
de manipular el producto o abrirlo, es obligatorio desconectarlo de la tensión de alimentación, para
evitar toda posibilidad de choque eléctrico.
2. El ajuste, el cambio de partes, el mantenimiento y la reparación deberán ser efectuadas solamente
por electricistas autorizados por Rohde & Schwarz. Si se reponen partes con importancia para los
aspectos de seguridad (p. ej. el enchufe, los transformadores o los fusibles), solamente podrán ser
sustituidos por partes originales. Después de cada cambio de partes relevantes para la seguridad
deberá realizarse un control de seguridad (control a primera vista, control del conductor de
protección, medición de resistencia de aislamiento, medición de la corriente de fuga, control de
funcionamiento). Con esto queda garantizada la seguridad del producto.

Baterías y acumuladores o celdas

Si no se siguen (o se siguen de modo insuficiente) las indicaciones en cuanto a las baterías y
acumuladores o celdas, pueden producirse explosiones, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible
consecuencia de muerte. El manejo de baterías y acumuladores con electrolitos alcalinos (p. ej. celdas de
litio) debe seguir el estándar EN 62133.
1. No deben desmontarse, abrirse ni triturarse las celdas.
2. Las celdas o baterías no deben someterse a calor ni fuego. Debe evitarse el almacenamiento a la luz
directa del sol. Las celdas y baterías deben mantenerse limpias y secas. Limpiar las conexiones
sucias con un paño seco y limpio.
3. Las celdas o baterías no deben cortocircuitarse. Es peligroso almacenar las celdas o baterías en
estuches o cajones en cuyo interior puedan cortocircuitarse por contacto recíproco o por contacto con
otros materiales conductores. No deben extraerse las celdas o baterías de sus embalajes originales
hasta el momento en que vayan a utilizarse.
4. Las celdas o baterías no deben someterse a impactos mecánicos fuertes indebidos.
5. En caso de falta de estanqueidad de una celda, el líquido vertido no debe entrar en contacto con la
piel ni los ojos. Si se produce contacto, lavar con agua abundante la zona afectada y avisar a un
médico.
6. En caso de cambio o recarga inadecuados, las celdas o baterías que contienen electrolitos alcalinos
(p. ej. las celdas de litio) pueden explotar. Para garantizar la seguridad del producto, las celdas o
baterías solo deben ser sustituidas por el tipo Rohde & Schwarz correspondiente (ver lista de
recambios).
7. Las baterías y celdas deben reciclarse y no deben tirarse a la basura doméstica. Las baterías o
acumuladores que contienen plomo, mercurio o cadmio deben tratarse como residuos especiales.
Respete en esta relación las normas nacionales de eliminación y reciclaje.

Transporte
1. El producto puede tener un peso elevado. Por eso es necesario desplazarlo o transportarlo con
precaución y, si es necesario, usando un sistema de elevación adecuado (p. ej. una carretilla
elevadora), a fin de evitar lesiones en la espalda u otros daños personales.

1171.0000.42 - 08 Page 13
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

2. Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven solamente de ayuda para el transporte del producto por
personas. Por eso no está permitido utilizar las asas para la sujeción en o sobre medios de transporte
como p. ej. grúas, carretillas elevadoras de horquilla, carros etc. Es responsabilidad suya fijar los
productos de manera segura a los medios de transporte o elevación. Para evitar daños personales o
daños en el producto, siga las instrucciones de seguridad del fabricante del medio de transporte o
elevación utilizado.
3. Si se utiliza el producto dentro de un vehículo, recae de manera exclusiva en el conductor la
responsabilidad de conducir el vehículo de manera segura y adecuada. El fabricante no asumirá
ninguna responsabilidad por accidentes o colisiones. No utilice nunca el producto dentro de un
vehículo en movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al conductor. Asegure el producto dentro del vehículo
debidamente para evitar, en caso de un accidente, lesiones u otra clase de daños.

Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente

1. Los dispositivos marcados contienen una batería o un acumulador que no se debe desechar con los
residuos domésticos sin clasificar, sino que debe ser recogido por separado. La eliminación se debe
efectuar exclusivamente a través de un punto de recogida apropiado o del servicio de atención al
cliente de Rohde & Schwarz.
2. Los dispositivos eléctricos usados no se deben desechar con los residuos domésticos sin clasificar,
sino que deben ser recogidos por separado.
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co.KG ha elaborado un concepto de eliminación de residuos y asume
plenamente los deberes de recogida y eliminación para los fabricantes dentro de la UE. Para
desechar el producto de manera respetuosa con el medio ambiente, diríjase a su servicio de atención
al cliente de Rohde & Schwarz.
3. Si se trabaja de manera mecánica y/o térmica cualquier producto o componente más allá del
funcionamiento previsto, pueden liberarse sustancias peligrosas (polvos con contenido de metales
pesados como p. ej. plomo, berilio o níquel). Por eso el producto solo debe ser desmontado por
personal especializado con formación adecuada. Un desmontaje inadecuado puede ocasionar daños
para la salud. Se deben tener en cuenta las directivas nacionales referentes a la eliminación de
residuos.
4. En caso de que durante el trato del producto se formen sustancias peligrosas o combustibles que
deban tratarse como residuos especiales (p. ej. refrigerantes o aceites de motor con intervalos de
cambio definidos), deben tenerse en cuenta las indicaciones de seguridad del fabricante de dichas
sustancias y las normas regionales de eliminación de residuos. Tenga en cuenta también en caso
necesario las indicaciones de seguridad especiales contenidas en la documentación del producto. La
eliminación incorrecta de sustancias peligrosas o combustibles puede causar daños a la salud o
daños al medio ambiente.
Se puede encontrar más información sobre la protección del medio ambiente en la página web de
Rohde & Schwarz.

1171.0000.42 - 08 Page 14
Quality management Certified Quality System

ISO 9001
and environmental Certified Environmental System

management ISO 14001

Sehr geehrter Kunde, Dear customer, Cher client,

Sie haben sich für den Kauf You have decided to buy a Vous avez choisi d’acheter un
eines Rohde & Schwarz Produk- Rohde & Schwarz product. This produit Rohde & Schwarz. Vous
tes entschieden. Sie erhalten product has been manufactured disposez donc d’un produit
damit ein nach modernsten Fer- using the most advanced meth- fabriqué d’après les méthodes
tigungsmethoden hergestelltes ods. It was developed, manufac- les plus avancées. Le dévelop-
Produkt. Es wurde nach den tured and tested in compliance pement, la fabrication et les
Regeln unserer Qualitäts- und with our quality management tests de ce produit ont été effec-
Umweltmanagementsysteme and environmental manage- tués selon nos systèmes de
entwickelt, gefertigt und geprüft. ment systems. Rohde & Schwarz management de qualité et de
Rohde & Schwarz ist unter ande- has been certified, for exam- management environnemental.
rem nach den Managementsys- ple, according to the ISO 9001 La société Rohde & Schwarz a
temen ISO 9001 und ISO 14001 and ISO 14001 management été homologuée, entre autres,
zertifiziert. systems. conformément aux systèmes
de management ISO 9001 et
Der Umwelt verpflichtet Environmental commitment ISO 14001.
❙❙ Energie-effiziente, ❙❙ Energy-efficient products
RoHS-konforme Produkte ❙❙ Continuous improvement in Engagement écologique
❙❙ Kontinuierliche environmental sustainability ❙❙ Produits à efficience
Weiterentwicklung nachhaltiger ❙❙ ISO 14001-certified énergétique
Umweltkonzepte environmental management ❙❙ Amélioration continue de la
❙❙ ISO 14001-zertifiziertes system durabilité environnementale
Umweltmanagementsystem ❙❙ Système de management
environnemental certifié selon
ISO 14001
1171.0200.11 V 05.01

Contents
1 Preface.................................................................................................. 19
1.1 Documentation Overview........................................................................................... 19
1.2 Conventions Used in the Documentation.................................................................20
1.2.1 Typographical Conventions...........................................................................................20
1.2.2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions.......................................................................21
1.2.3 Notes on Screenshots...................................................................................................21
1.3 How to Use the Help System......................................................................................21

7.4.5 Normalization.............................................................................................................. 503

10.16.4 Measuring the Channel and Adjacent Channel Power............................................... 980

10.16.5 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement............................................................................ 983
10.16.6 Time Domain Power Measurement.............................................................................983
10.16.7 Fast Power Measurement on Power Ramps.............................................................. 984
10.16.7.1 Power Measurement with Multi-Summary Marker...................................................... 984
10.16.7.2 Multi-Burst Power Measurement.................................................................................986
10.16.8 Fast Level Measurement Using Frequency Lists........................................................ 988
10.16.9 Level Correction of Transducers................................................................................. 989
10.16.10 Measuring the Magnitude and Phase of a Signal....................................................... 990
10.16.11 Reading and Writing Files........................................................................................... 992
10.16.11.1 Reading a File from the Instrument.............................................................................992
10.16.11.2 Creating a File on the Instrument................................................................................993
10.16.12 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement.....................................................................994
10.16.12.1 Using Predefined Standard Wibro...............................................................................994
10.16.12.2 Defining 5 Ranges with all Parameters....................................................................... 995
10.16.13 Spurious Emissions Measurement..............................................................................998
10.16.14 Averaging I/Q Data....................................................................................................1000
10.16.15 Using IQ Gating.........................................................................................................1001
10.16.16 Usage of Four Spectrum Instances...........................................................................1007
10.17 GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E.............. 1009
10.17.1 GPIB Languages.......................................................................................................1009
10.17.2 Command Set of Models 8560E, 8561E, 8562E, 8563E, 8564E, 8565E, 8566A/B,
8568A/B, 8591E, 8594E, 71100C, 71200C, and 71209A......................................... 1011
10.17.3 Special Features of the Syntax Parsing Algorithms for 8566A and 8568A Models.. 1034
10.17.4 Special Behavior of Commands................................................................................1035
10.17.5 Model-Dependent Default Settings........................................................................... 1036
10.17.6 Data Output Formats.................................................................................................1037
10.17.7 Trace Data Output Formats...................................................................................... 1037
10.17.8 Trace Data Input Formats......................................................................................... 1038
10.17.9 GPIB Status Reporting..............................................................................................1038

11 Maintenance..................................................................................... 1039
11.1 Storing and Packing............................................................................................... 1039
11.2 List of Available Power Cables.............................................................................. 1039

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 17

R&S®ESR Contents

12 Error Messages................................................................................ 1041

13 Appendix: LAN Interface................................................................. 1043

13.1 Configuring the Network........................................................................................ 1043
13.1.1 Changing the Computer Name................................................................................. 1044
13.1.2 Changing the Domain or Workgroup.........................................................................1044
13.1.3 Operating the Instrument Without a Network............................................................ 1045
13.1.4 Creating Users.......................................................................................................... 1045
13.1.5 Changing the User Password................................................................................... 1046
13.1.6 Logging on to the Network........................................................................................ 1046
13.1.7 The Automatic Login Function.................................................................................. 1047
13.1.8 Mapping Network Drives........................................................................................... 1048
13.1.9 Sharing Directories (only with Microsoft Networks)...................................................1049
13.2 Operation with Windows Remote Desktop ..........................................................1050
13.2.1 Configuring the R&S ESR for Remote Operation..................................................... 1050
13.2.2 Configuring the Controller......................................................................................... 1051
13.3 Operation with a VNC Client.................................................................................. 1053
13.4 Starting and Terminating Remote Operation....................................................... 1054
13.5 Deactivating the R&S ESR via Remote Operation............................................... 1055

List of Commands............................................................................1057

Index..................................................................................................1074

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 18

R&S®ESR Preface
Documentation Overview

1 Preface

1.1 Documentation Overview

The user documentation for the R&S ESR is divided as follows:
● Quick Start Guide
● Operating Manuals for base unit and options
● Service Manual
● Online Help
● Release Notes

Quick Start Guide

This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the
CD. It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument.
Basic operations and basic measurements are described. Also a brief introduction to
remote control is given. The manual includes general information (e.g. Safety Instruc-
tions) and the following chapters:

Chapter 1 Introduction, General information

Chapter 2 Front and Rear Panel

Chapter 3 Preparing for Use

Chapter 4 Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware Options

Chapter 5 Basic Operations

Chapter 6 Basic Measurement Examples

Chapter 7 Brief Introduction to Remote Control

Appendix Printer Interface

Appendix LAN Interface

Operating Manuals
The Operating Manuals are a supplement to the Quick Start Guide. Operating Manuals
are provided for the base unit and each additional (software) option.
The Operating Manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the
R&S ESR in general, and the "Spectrum" mode in particular. Furthermore, the software
options that enhance the basic functionality for various measurement modes are
described here. The set of measurement examples in the Quick Start Guide is expan-
ded by more advanced measurement examples. In addition to the brief introduction to
remote control in the Quick Start Guide, a description of the basic analyzer commands
and programming examples is given. Information on maintenance, instrument interfa-
ces and error messages is also provided.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 19

R&S®ESR Preface
Conventions Used in the Documentation

In the individual option manuals, the specific instrument functions of the option are
described in detail. For additional information on default settings and parameters, refer
to the data sheets. Basic information on operating the R&S ESR is not included in the
option manuals.
These manuals are available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument.

Service Manual
This manual is available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument. It
describes how to check compliance with rated specifications, instrument function,
repair, troubleshooting and fault elimination. It contains all information required for
repairing the R&S ESR by replacing modules. The manual includes the following chap-
ters:

Chapter 1 Performance Test

Chapter 2 Adjustment

Chapter 3 Repair

Chapter 4 Software Update / Installing Options

Chapter 5 Documents

Release Notes
The release notes describe the installation of the firmware, new and modified func-
tions, eliminated problems, and last minute changes to the documentation. The corre-
sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes. The cur-
rent release notes are provided in the Internet.

1.2 Conventions Used in the Documentation

1.2.1 Typographical Conventions

The following text markers are used throughout this documentation:

Convention Description

"Graphical user interface ele- All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen, such as
ments" dialog boxes, menus, options, buttons, and softkeys are enclosed by
quotation marks.

KEYS Key names are written in capital letters.

File names, commands, File names, commands, coding samples and screen output are distin-
program code guished by their font.

Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 20

R&S®ESR Preface
How to Use the Help System

Convention Description

Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font.

"References" References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota-

tion marks.

1.2.2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions

When describing how to operate the instrument, several alternative methods may be
available to perform the same task. In this case, the procedure using the touchscreen
is described. Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using
an additionally connected mouse. The alternative procedure using the keys on the
instrument or the on-screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard
operating procedures.
The term "select" may refer to any of the described methods, i.e. using a finger on the
touchscreen, a mouse pointer in the display, or a key on the instrument or on a key-
board.

1.2.3 Notes on Screenshots

When describing the functions of the product, we use sample screenshots. These
screenshots are meant to illustrate as much as possible of the provided functions and
possible interdependencies between parameters.
The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product, that is: with all options instal-
led. Thus, some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par-
ticular product configuration.

1.3 How to Use the Help System

Calling context-sensitive and general help

► To display the general help dialog box, press the HELP key on the front panel.
The help dialog box "View" tab is displayed. A topic containing information about
the current menu or the currently opened dialog box and its function is displayed.

For standard Windows dialog boxes (e.g. File Properties, Print dialog etc.), no context-
sensitive help is available.

► If the help is already displayed, press the softkey for which you want to display
help.
A topic containing information about the softkey and its function is displayed.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 21

R&S®ESR Preface
How to Use the Help System

If a softkey opens a submenu and you press the softkey a second time, the submenu
of the softkey is displayed.

Contents of the help dialog box

The help dialog box contains four tabs:
● "Contents" - contains a table of help contents
● "View" - contains a specific help topic
● "Index" - contains index entries to search for help topics
● "Zoom" - contains zoom functions for the help display
To change between these tabs, press the tab on the touchscreen.

Navigating in the table of contents

● To move through the displayed contents entries, use the UP ARROW and DOWN
ARROW keys. Entries that contain further entries are marked with a plus sign.
● To display a help topic, press the ENTER key. The "View" tab with the correspond-
ing help topic is displayed.
● To change to the next tab, press the tab on the touchscreen.

Navigating in the help topics

● To scroll through a page, use the rotary knob or the UP ARROW and DOWN
ARROW keys.
● To jump to the linked topic, press the link text on the touchscreen.

Searching for a topic

1. Change to the "Index" tab.

2. Enter the first characters of the topic you are interested in. The entries starting with
these characters are displayed.

3. Change the focus by pressing the ENTER key.

4. Select the suitable keyword by using the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW keys or
the rotary knob.

5. Press the ENTER key to display the help topic.

The "View" tab with the corresponding help topic is displayed.

Changing the zoom

1. Change to the "Zoom" tab.

2. Set the zoom using the rotary knob. Four settings are available: 1-4. The smallest
size is selected by number 1, the largest size is selected by number 4.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 22

R&S®ESR Preface
How to Use the Help System

Closing the help window

► Press the ESC key or a function key on the front panel.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 23

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Front and Rear Panel View

2 Quick Start
Note: the following chapters are identical to those in the printed R&S ESR Quick Start
Guide.
● Front and Rear Panel View..................................................................................... 24
● Preparing for Use.................................................................................................... 35
● Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware Options.......................................... 68
● Basic Operations.....................................................................................................70
● Basic Measurement Examples................................................................................99
● Brief Introduction to Remote Control.....................................................................127

2.1 Front and Rear Panel View

2.1.1 Front Panel View

The front panel of the R&S ESR is shown in figure 2-1. Each element (function keys
and connectors) is described in more detail in the subsequent sections.

Fig. 2-1: Front panel of the R&S ESR

No. Description See

1 General device functions e.g. Change chapter 2.1.1.1, "Function Keys on the Front Panel",
mode, Setup, Default Settings, Help. on page 25

2 USB connector for external devices, e.g. chapter 2.1.1.3, "Connectors on the Front Panel",
keyboard, mouse on page 29

3 ON/OFF switch chapter 2.2.1.7, "Switching the Instrument On and Off",

on page 41

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 24

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Front and Rear Panel View

No. Description See

4 Touchscreen; display area for measure- chapter 2.1.1.2, "Touchscreen Display", on page 28
ment results

5 Auxiliary functions to display Windows chapter 2.1.1.1, "Function Keys on the Front Panel",
Start menu or on-screen keyboard on page 25

6 Display options for screen chapter 2.4.4, "Changing the Display", on page 91

7 Navigation options for screen menu chapter 2.4.2.6, "Arrow Keys, UNDO/REDO Keys",
on page 82

8 Measurement control settings, e.g. fre- chapter 2.1.1.1, "Function Keys on the Front Panel",
quency, levels on page 25

9 Marker functions chapter 2.1.1.1, "Function Keys on the Front Panel",

on page 25

10 Measurement configuration chapter 2.1.1.1, "Function Keys on the Front Panel",

on page 25

11 Measurement start chapter 2.1.1.1, "Function Keys on the Front Panel",

on page 25

12 Numeric keyboard, units and data entry chapter 2.4.2.4, "Keypad", on page 81
keys

13 Rotary knob chapter 2.4.2.5, "Rotary Knob", on page 82

14 Arrow keys chapter 2.4.2.6, "Arrow Keys, UNDO/REDO Keys",

on page 82

15 Undo/redo functions chapter 2.4.2.6, "Arrow Keys, UNDO/REDO Keys",

on page 82

16 AF output with volume control chapter 2.1.1.4, "Optional Front Panel Connectors",
on page 31

17 Noise source control chapter 2.1.1.3, "Connectors on the Front Panel",

on page 29

18 Supply voltage for measurement acces- chapter 2.1.1.4, "Optional Front Panel Connectors",
sories on page 31

19 Probe power connector (supply voltage chapter 2.1.1.3, "Connectors on the Front Panel",
for measurement accessories) on page 29

20 Tracking generator output, optional chapter 2.1.1.4, "Optional Front Panel Connectors",
on page 31

21 RF input 2 chapter 2.1.1.4, "Optional Front Panel Connectors",

on page 31

22 RF input 1 chapter 2.1.1.3, "Connectors on the Front Panel",

on page 29

2.1.1.1 Function Keys on the Front Panel

A detailed description of the corresponding menus and the other function keys is provi-
ded in chapter 6 "Instrument Functions" of the Operating Manual.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 25

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Front and Rear Panel View

Table 2-1: Function keys

Turns the instrument on and off.

Restores the default configuration of the R&S ESR.

Provides functionality to save, restore and manage instrument settings and other
files.

Provides functionality for general instrument configuration, for example:

● to configure the display
● to set the date and time
● to establish a LAN connection

Provides functionality to configure printers and hardcopys.

Displays the online help.

Selects the operating mode or firmware application.

Opens the Windows "Start" menu

Turns the on-screen keyboard on and off. Repeatedly pressing the key changes
the position of the keyboard (top or bottom of the display).

Selects alphanumeric characters.

Opens a dialog box to turn screen elements on or off.

Switches between maximized and split display of focus area.

Switches focus area between table and diagram.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 26

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Front and Rear Panel View

Allows you to define and use softkeys to load custom configurations.

Opens the root menu of the current application.

FREQ (CHANNEL) Provides functionality to define frequency parameters, for example:

● the center or receiver frequency
● the frequency offset
(CHANNEL is for special applications)

SPAN Provides functionality to configure the frequency span.

In the realtime application, the span is coupled to the RBW and restricted to
40 MHz.

AMPT (SCALE) Provides functionality to configure amplitude or level characteristics, for example:
● the reference level
● the attenuation
● the input impedance
● the scale of the level axis
● the preamplifier

AUTO SET Provides functionality to automatically define various parameters like the level or
frequency.

BW Provides functionality to define the resolution and video bandwidth.

In the realtime application, the RBW is coupled to the span. Video bandwidth is
not available.

SWEEP Provides functionality to configure the sweep, for example:

● the measurement time
● the number of measurement points
● the measurement mode (single or continuous measurements)
In the realtime application, the number of measurement points is a fix value (801
points).

TRACE Provides functionality to configure data acquisition and analyze measured data,
for example:
● the trace mode
● the detector

TRIG Provides functionality to configure triggered and gated measurements, for exam-
ple:

MKR Provides functionality to activate and position absolute and relative markers
(markers and delta markers).

PEAK SEARCH Performs a peak search for active markers.

If no marker is active, Marker 1 is activated and the peak search is performed for
it.

MKR FUNC Provides additional analysis functions of the measurement markers, for example:
● the frequency counter
● the noise measurement
● the phase noise measurement
● the AM/FM audio demodulator
In the realtime application, marker functions are not available.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 27

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Front and Rear Panel View

MKR➙ Provides functionality to position and control markers, for example:

● to position the marker on the center frequency
● to define the marker search area
● to configure the peak excursion

MEAS Provides the measurement functions, for example:

● the bargraph measurement (in Receiver mode)
● the scan and final measurement (in Receiver mode)
● the AF demodulation (in Receiver mode)
● IF analysis (in Receiver mode with option R&S ESR-K56)
● the realtime spectrum (in Realtime mode)
● the spectrogram measurement (in Realtime mode)
● the persistence spectrum (in Realtime mode)
● the channel power and ACLR measurement (in Spectrum mode)
● the occupied bandwidth measurement (in Spectrum mode)
● the Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurement (in spectrum mode)
● the spurious emission measurement (in spectrum mode)
● the signal statistics (in spectrum mode)

MEAS CONFIG Provides functionality to configure the measurement.

LINES Provides functionality to control display and limit lines.

INPUT/OUTPUT Provides functionality to configure inputs and outputs.

RUN SINGLE Starts a single measurement.

RUN CONT Starts a continuous measurement.

UNDO Reverts the last operation.

REDO Repeats previously reverted operation.

2.1.1.2 Touchscreen Display

All measurement results are displayed in the screen on the front panel. Additionally,
the screen display provides status and setting information and allows you to switch
between various measurement tasks. The screen is touch-sensitive, offering an alter-
native means of user interaction for quick and easy handling of the device.

Risk of touchscreen damage during operation

The touchscreen may be damaged by inappropriate tools or excessive force.
Observe the following instructions when operating or cleaning the touchscreen:
● Never touch the screen with ball point pens or other pointed objects with sharp
edges.
● It is recommended that you operate the touchscreen by finger only.
As an alternative, you may use a stylus pen with a smooth soft tip.
● Never apply excessive force to the screen. Touch it gently.
● Never scratch the screen surface, for example with a finger nail.
Never rub it strongly, for example with a dust cloth.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 28

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Front and Rear Panel View

The figure 2-2 shows the touchscreen display of the R&S ESR. The individual ele-
ments are described in more detail in chapter 2.4, "Basic Operations", on page 70.

Fig. 2-2: Touchscreen elements

1 = Toolbar with standard application functions, e.g. print, save/open file etc.
2 = Tabs for individual measurement tasks
3 = Channel information bar for current measurement settings
4 = Diagram header with diagram-specific (trace) information
5 = Measurement results area
6 = Diagram footer with diagram-specific information, depending on measurement mode
7 = Error indicator
8 = Error message, if available
9 = Device status
10 = Progress bar for measurement
11 = Date and time display
12 = Softkeys for menu access

2.1.1.3 Connectors on the Front Panel

This section describes the front connectors and interfaces of the R&S ESR. Optional
connectors and interfaces are indicated by the option name in brackets. Most connec-
tors on the front panel (except for USB) are located at the bottom right-hand side.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 29

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Front and Rear Panel View

EMI impact on measurement results

Electromagnetic interference (EMI) may affect the measurement results.
To suppress generated electromagnetic interference (EMI):
● Use suitable shielded cables of high quality. For example, use double-shielded RF
and LAN cables.
● Always terminate open cable ends.
● Note the EMC classification in the data sheet.

USB
The front panel provides two female USB connectors to connect devices like an exter-
nal keyboard or mouse. You can also connect a memory stick to save and restore
instrument settings and measurement data.

NOISE SOURCE CONTROL

The noise source control female connector is used to provide the supply voltage for an
external noise source, for example to measure the noise figure and gain of amplifiers
and frequency converting DUTs.
Conventional noise sources require a voltage of +28 V in order to be switched on and
0 V to be switched off. The output supports a maximum load of 100 mA.

RF INPUT 50Ω
The R&S ESR provides two RF inputs for connection of a device under test (DUT) to
the R&S ESR. The DUT is connected to the RF Input via cable and an approriate con-
nector (for example a male N connector).
The first RF Input supports a frequency range from 9 kHz to fmax and an attenuation
range from 0 dB to 75 dB. The second RF Input supports a frequency range from
9 kHz to 1 GHz and an attenuation range from 10 dB to 75 dB. Attenuation levels
smaller than 10 dB are not possible at RF Input 2.
With option R&S ESR-B29, the minimum frequency is extended to 10 Hz at both RF
inputs.

Risk of instrument damage

Do not overload the input. For maximum allowed values, see the data sheet.
For AC-coupling, a DC input voltage of 50 V must never be exceeded. For DC-cou-
pling, DC voltage must not be applied at the input. In both cases, noncompliance will
destroy the input mixers.
When measuring unknown signals, do not use a 0 dB attenuation level. Otherwise, the
input mixer may be damaged or destroyed.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 30

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Front and Rear Panel View

PROBE POWER
The R&S ESR provides two connectors to supply accessories like transducers or
probes with power.
The probe power connector on the left supports supply voltages of ±10 V and ground.
The maximum permissible current is 200 mA. This probe power connector is suitable,
for example, for transducers from Rohde & Schwarz.
The probe power connector on the right supports supply voltages from +15 V to
-12.6 V and ground. The maximum permissible current is 150 mA. This probe power
connector is suitable, for example, for high-impedance probes from Agilent.

AF OUTPUT
Headphones equipped with a miniature jack plug can be connected to the AF output
female connector. The internal impedance is 10 Ω. The output voltage can be set by
using the volume control to the right of the female connector. If a plug is connected, the
internal loudspeaker is automatically switched off.

Risk of hearing damage

To protect your hearing, make sure that the volume setting is not too high before put-
ting on the headphones.

2.1.1.4 Optional Front Panel Connectors

Tracking Generator Output (GEN OUTPUT 50 Ω, Option R&S FSV-B9)

The R&S ESR is equipped with an optional tracking generator and therefore provides a
tracking generator output connector.
The output of the tracking generator is connected to the DUT via a cable equipped with
a male N connector. The female connector is available only with the tracking generator
option (R&S FSV-B9).

Risk of damaging the tracking generator

To avoid damaging the tracking generator, make sure that the reverse power (i.e. input
power caused, for example, by reflections in the test setup) never exceeds 1 W RF
power. Do not apply a DC voltage at the output.
For details, refer to the data sheet.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 31

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Front and Rear Panel View

Sensitive DUTs concerning matching

For DUTs with sensitive RF characteristics with regard to matching (VSWR) at the
input, insert a 10 dB attenuator between the DUT and the tracking generator.

2.1.2 Rear Panel View

The rear panel of the R&S ESR is shown in figure 2-3. Each element is described in
more detail in the subsequent sections.

Fig. 2-3: R&S ESR rear panel

1 = LAN
2 = TRIGGER OUTPUT
3 = IF/VIDEO
4 = USB
5 = AUX PORT
6 = EXT TRIGGER / GATE IN
7 = MONITOR (VGA)
8 = REF IN
9 = REF OUT
10 = GPIB interface
11 = AC Power Supply Connection and Main Power Switch with fuse

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 32

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Front and Rear Panel View

2.1.2.1 Standard Rear Panel Connectors

EMI impact on measurement results

Electromagnetic interference (EMI) can affect the measurement results. To avoid any
impact, make sure that the following conditions are met:
● Use suitable double-shielded cables.
● Do not use USB connecting cables exceeding 1 m in length.
● Use only USB devices that remain within the permissible EMI limits.
● Always terminate any connected IEC-bus cables with an instrument or controller.

AC Power Supply Connection and Main Power Switch

The AC power supply connector and main power switch are located in a unit on the
rear panel of the instrument.
The main power switch works as follows.
● Position "O": The instrument is disconnected from the AC power supply.
● Position "1": The instrument is supplied with power and in operation.
For more information see chapter 2.2.1.7, "Switching the Instrument On and Off",
on page 41.

Warm-up time for OCXO

When the instrument is switched on, the OCXO requires an extended warm-up time
(see data sheet). No warm-up time is required when starting from standby mode.

LAN
The LAN interface can be used to connect the R&S ESR to a local network for remote
control, printouts and data transfer. The assignment of the RJ-45 connector supports
twisted-pair category 5 UTP/STP cables in a star configuration (UTP stands for
unshielded twisted pair, and STP for shielded twisted pair).

MONITOR (VGA)
The female VGA connector is used to connect an external monitor. Instructions on how
to connect an external monitor are provided in chapter 2.2.3, "Connecting an External
Monitor", on page 45.

EXT TRIGGER / GATE IN

The female connector for external trigger/gate input is used to control the measure-
ment by means of an external signal. The voltage levels can range from 0.5 to 3.5 V.
The default value is 1.4 V. The typical input impedance is 10 kΩ.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 33

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Front and Rear Panel View

REF IN
As a reference signal, you can either use the internal reference, or connect an external
one. The setup menu is used to switch between the internal and an external reference.
The REF IN female connector is used as an input for a 1-20 MHz reference signal. The
required input level is 0-10 dBm.

REF OUT
This connector can be used to provide an external reference signal (e.g. the OCXO) to
other devices that are connected to this instrument. The REF OUT female connector
can output a 10 MHz reference signal with an output level of 0 dBm.

GPIB Interface
The GPIB interface is in compliance with IEEE488 and SCPI. A computer for remote
control can be connected via this interface. To set up the connection, a shielded cable
is recommended.
For more information refer to the User Manual, chapter 7 "Remote Control Basics".

TRIGGER OUTPUT
The female BNC connector can be used to provide a signal to another device. The sig-
nal is TTL compatible (0 V / 5 V).
You can control the trigger output with the functionality provided in the "In-/Output"
menu (INPUT/OUTPUT key).
The trigger output also controls signals by the frequency mask trigger available in real-
time mode (R&S ESR-K55).

IF/VIDEO
The female BNC connector can be used for various outputs:
● Intermediate frequency (IF) output of 32 MHz
● Video output (1 V)
You can select between IF and video output with the functionality provided in the "In-/
Output" menu (INPUT/OUTPUT key).

USB
The rear panel provides two female USB connectors to connect devices like an exter-
nal keyboard or mouse. You can also connect a memory stick to save and restore
instrument settings and measurement data.

AUX PORT
The 9 pole SUB-D male connector provides control signals for controlling external devi-
ces. The voltage levels are of the TTL type (5 V).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 34

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

Pin Signal Description

1 +5 V / max. 250 mA Supply voltage for external circuits

2 I/O Control Phase N

3 I/O Controls the 150 kHz highpass filter

4 I/O Controls Phase L3

5 I/O not used

6 I/O Controls Phase L1

7 I/O Controls Phase L2

8 GND Ground

9 READY FOR TRIGGER Signal indicating that the instrument is ready to

receive a trigger signal (Low active = 0 V)

Short-circuit hazard
Always observe the designated pin assignment. A short-circuit may damage the instru-
ment.

2.1.2.2 Optional Rear Panel Connectors

OCXO option (R&S FSV-B4)

This option generates a very precise 10 MHz reference signal. If installed, this signal is
used as an internal reference. It can also be used to synchronize other connected devi-
ces via the REF OUT connector.

Warm-up time for OCXO

When the instrument is switched on, the OCXO requires an extended warm-up time
(see data sheet). No warm-up time is required when starting from standby mode.

2.2 Preparing for Use

2.2.1 Putting into Operation

This section describes the basic steps to be taken when setting up the R&S ESR for
the first time.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 35

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

Risk of injury and instrument damage

The instrument must be used in an appropriate manner to prevent electric shock, fire,
personal injury, or damage.
● Do not open the instrument casing.
● Read and observe the "Basic Safety Instructions" at the beginning of this manual or
on the documentation CD-ROM, in addition to the safety instructions in the follow-
ing sections. Notice that the data sheet may specify additional operating condi-
tions.

Risk of instrument damage

Note that the general safety instructions also contain information on operating condi-
tions that will prevent damage to the instrument. The instrument's data sheet may con-
tain additional operating conditions.

Risk of instrument damage during operation

An unsuitable operating site or test setup can cause damage to the instrument and to
connected devices. Ensure the following operating conditions before you switch on the
instrument:
● All fan openings are unobstructed and the airflow perforations are unimpeded. The
minimum distance from the wall is 10 cm.
● The instrument is dry and shows no sign of condensation.
● The instrument is positioned as described in the following sections.
● The ambient temperature does not exceed the range specified in the data sheet.
● Signal levels at the input connectors are all within the specified ranges.
● Signal outputs are correctly connected and are not overloaded.

Risk of electrostatic discharge (ESD)

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to the electronic components of the
instrument and the device under test (DUT). ESD is most likely to occur when you con-
nect or disconnect a DUT or test fixture to the instrument's test ports. To prevent ESD,
use a wrist strap and cord and connect yourself to the ground, or use a conductive
floor mat and heel strap combination.
For details, refer to the safety instructions delivered in electronic format on the docu-
mentation CD-ROM.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 36

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

EMI impact on measurement results

2.2.1.1 Unpacking and Checking the Instrument

To remove the instrument from its packaging and check the equipment for complete-
ness, proceed as follows:
1. Pull off the polyethylene protection pads from the instrument's rear feet and then
carefully remove the pads from the instrument handles at the front.

2. Pull off the corrugated cardboard cover that protects the rear of the instrument.

3. Carefully unthread the corrugated cardboard cover at the front that protects the
instrument handles and remove it.

4. Check the equipment for completeness using the delivery note and the accessory
lists for the various items.

5. Check the instrument for any damage. If there is damage, immediately contact the
carrier who delivered the instrument. Make sure not to discard the box and packing
material.

Packing material
Retain the original packing material. If the instrument needs to be transported or ship-
ped at a later date, you can use the material to protect the control elements and con-
nectors.

2.2.1.2 Accessory List

The instrument comes with the following accessories:

● Power cable
● Quick Start Guide
● CD "R&S ESR EMI Test Receiver User Documentation"

2.2.1.3 Placing or Mounting the Instrument

The R&S ESR is designed for use under laboratory conditions, either on a bench top or
in a rack.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 37

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

Bench Top Operation

If the R&S ESR is operated on a bench top, the surface should be flat. The instrument
can be used in horizontal position, standing on its feet, or with the support feet on the
bottom extended.

Risk of injury if feet are folded out

The feet may fold in if they are not folded out completely or if the instrument is shifted.
This may cause damage or injury.
● Fold the feet completely in or completely out to ensure stability of the instrument.
Never shift the instrument when the feet are folded out.
● When the feet are folded out, do not work under the instrument or place anything
underneath.
● The feet can break if they are overloaded. The overall load on the folded-out feet
must not exceed 500 N.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 38

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

Risk of injury and instrument damage if stacking instruments

A stack of instruments may tilt over and cause injury. Furthermore, the instruments at
the bottom of the stack may be damaged due to the load imposed by the instruments
on top.
Observe the following instructions when stacking instruments:
● Never stack more than three instruments. If you need to stack more than three
instruments, install them in a rack.
● The overall load imposed on the lowest instrument must not exceed 500 N.
● All instruments must have the same dimensions (width and length).
● If the instruments have foldable feet, fold them in completely.

Rackmounting
The R&S ESR can be installed in a rack using a rack adapter kit (for the order no., see
data sheet). The installation instructions are part of the adapter kit.

Risk of instrument damage in a rack

An insufficient airflow can cause the instrument to overheat, which may disturb the
operation and even cause damage.
Make sure that all fan openings are unobstructed, that the airflow perforations are
unimpeded, and that the minimum distance from the wall is 10 cm.

2.2.1.4 Connecting the AC Power

The R&S ESR is equipped with an AC power supply connector. The R&S ESR can be
used with different AC power voltages and adapts itself automatically to it. Refer to the
datasheet for the requirements of voltage and frequency. The AC power connector is
located on the rear panel of the instrument.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 39

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

► Connect the R&S ESR to the AC power supply using the supplied power cable.
Since the instrument is assembled in line with the specifications for safety class
EN61010, it may only be connected to an outlet that has a ground contact.

2.2.1.5 Changing the AC Supply Fuse

Only fuses of the type IEC 60 127-T6.3H/250 V should be used. Those fuses are used
for all of the specified nominal AC supply voltages.

Changing the AC supply fuses:

1. Disconnect the power cable.

2. Open the flap covering the voltage selector using a small screwdriver (or similar).

3. Remove the cylinder labelled with the nominal voltages. Remove both fuses and
install the new ones. Reinsert the cylinder so that the value visible through the hole
in the cover flap is the same nominal voltage as before.

4. Close the flap.

2.2.1.6 Using an Optional DC Power Supply

When only DC power is available, for example from a battery or in a vehicle, an

optional DC power supply adapter (R&S FSV-B30) can be connected to the R&S ESR
to operate the instrument with a DC voltage of 10 V to 15 V. Two different types of bat-
tery packs are available as separate options for the R&S ESR. Depending on which
battery pack option is used, different cables are provided to connect it to the DC power
supply adapter.
For installation instructions see the option's installation guide.

Shock hazard due to power supply

The used power supply (SELV) must fulfill the requirements for reinforced/double insu-
lation for main supply circuits in accordance with DIN/EN/IEC 61010 (UL 3111, CSA
C22.2 No. 1010.1) or DIN/EN/IEC 60950 (UL 1950, CSA C22.2 No. 950) . Current limi-
tation must be provided in accordance with DIN EN 61010‑1 Appendix F2.1.
Before switching on the instrument check the connection for correct polarity to avoid
the risk of electric shock.

Before switching on the R&S ESR, switch on the DC power supply:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 40

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

Switching the DC power supply on

1. Connect the R&S ESR DC power supply device to the DC power source (e.g. bat-
tery pack or vehicle) as described in the option's installation guide.

2. Set the switch on the DC power supply to "I". A green LED indicates that the DC
power supply is ready for operation.

3. In the case of overvoltage or undervoltage, the DC power supply switches off auto-
matically. This state is indicated by means of a red LED and a buzzer.

4. Set the power switch on the rear panel to "I".

5. Press the ON/OFF key on the front panel. A green LED above the ON/OFF key
indicates that the instrument is ready for operation.

Switching the DC power supply off

1. Press the ON/OFF key on the front panel and wait until the instrument has shut
down.

2. Switch off the power switch on the rear panel.

3. Switch off the DC power supply.

2.2.1.7 Switching the Instrument On and Off

Switching the instrument on

If an optional DC power supply (R&S FSV-B30) is used, you must switch on these
devices first; see chapter 2.2.1.6, "Using an Optional DC Power Supply", on page 40.
1. Press the AC power switch on the rear panel to position "I".
The instrument is supplied with AC power.

2. Press the ON/OFF key on the front panel.

After booting, the instrument is ready for operation. A green LED above the
ON/OFF key indicates this.

Warm-up time for OCXO

When the instrument is switched on, the OCXO requires an extended warm-up time
(see data sheet). No warm-up time is required when starting from standby mode.

Switching the instrument off

1. Press the ON/OFF key on the front panel.

2. Change the AC power switch on the rear panel to position "O", or disconnect the
instrument from the AC power supply.
The R&S ESR changes into off mode.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 41

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

Risk of losing data

If you switch off the running instrument using the rear panel switch or by disconnecting
the power cord, the instrument loses its current settings. Furthermore, program data
may be lost.
Press the ON/STANDBY key first to shut down the application properly.

2.2.1.8 Maintenance

The R&S ESR does not require regular maintenance. Maintenance is essentially
restricted to cleaning the R&S ESR. It is however advisable to check the nominal data
from time to time.

Instrument damage caused by cleaning agents

Cleaning agents contain substances that may damage the instrument. For example,
cleaning agents that contain a solvent may damage the front panel labeling, plastic
parts, or the display.
Never use cleaning agents such as solvents (thinners, acetone, etc), acids, bases, or
other substances.
The outside of the instrument can be cleaned sufficiently using a soft, lint-free dust
cloth.

The storage temperature range for the R&S ESR is specified in the data sheet. The
instrument must be protected against dust if it is to be stored for a long period.
When transporting or shipping the instrument, it is advisable to use the original packing
material (especially the two protective covers for the front and rear panel).

2.2.1.9 Performing a Self Alignment and a Self Test

Operating temperature
Before performing this functional test, make sure that the instrument has reached its
operating temperature (for details, refer to the data sheet).

Performing a self alignment

1. Press the SETUP key.

2. Press the "Alignment" softkey.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 42

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

3. Press the "Self Alignment" softkey.

Once the system correction values have been calculated successfully, a message
is displayed.

To display the alignment results again later

● Press the SETUP key.
● Press the "Alignment" softkey.
● Press the "Show Align Results" softkey.

Performing a self test

The self test does not need to be repeated every time the instrument is switched on. It
is only necessary when instrument malfunction is suspected.
1. Press the SETUP key.

2. Press the "More" softkey.

3. Press the "Service" softkey.

4. Press the "Selftest" softkey.

Once the instrument modules have been checked successfully, a message is dis-
played.

2.2.1.10 Checking the Supplied Options

The instrument may be equipped with both hardware and firmware options. In order to
check whether the installed options correspond to the options indicated on the delivery
note, proceed as follows.

1. Press the SETUP key.

2. Press the "System Info" softkey.

3. Press the "Versions + Options" softkey.

A list with hardware and firmware information is displayed.

4. Check the availability of the hardware options as indicated in the delivery note.
For an overview of the available options, refer to the datasheet.

2.2.2 Connecting USB Devices

The USB interfaces of the R&S ESR allow you to connect USB devices directly to the
instrument. This number can be increased as necessary by using USB hubs. Due to
the large number of available USB devices, there is almost no limit to the expansions
that are possible with the R&S ESR.
The following list shows various USB devices that can be useful:
● Memory stick for easy transfer of data to/from a computer (e.g. firmware updates)

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 43

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

● CD-ROM drives for easy installation of firmware applications

● Keyboard or mouse to simplify the entry of data, comments, file names, etc.
● Printer for printing out measurement results
● Power sensors, e.g. of the NRP Zxy family
Installing USB devices is easy under Windows, because all USB devices are
plug&play. After a device is connected to the USB interface, the operating system
automatically searches for a suitable device driver.
If Windows does not find a suitable driver, it will prompt you to specify a directory that
contains the driver software. If the driver software is on a CD, connect a USB CD-ROM
drive to the instrument before proceeding.
When a USB device is subsequently disconnected from the R&S ESR, Windows
immediately detects the change in hardware configuration and deactivates the corre-
sponding driver.
All USB devices can be connected to or disconnected from the instrument during oper-
ation.

Connecting a memory stick or CD-ROM drive

If installation of a memory stick or CD-ROM drive is successful, Windows informs you
that the device is ready to use. The device is made available as a new drive and is dis-
played in Windows Explorer. The name of the drive depends on the manufacturer.

Connecting a keyboard
The keyboard is detected automatically when it is connected. The default input lan-
guage is English – US.
Select "Start > Control Panel > Clock, Language, and Region > Change keyboards or
other input methods" to configure the keyboard properties. To access the Windows
operating system, press the Windows key on the external keyboard.

Connecting a mouse
The mouse is detected automatically when it is connected.
Select "Start > Control Panel > Devices and Printers > Mouse" to configure the mouse
properties. To access the Windows operating system, press the Windows key on the
external keyboard.

Connecting a printer
When printing a file, the instrument checks whether a printer is connected and turned
on and whether the appropriate printer driver is installed. If required, printer driver
installation is initiated. A printer driver needs to be installed only once.
To install a printer, select "Start > Control Panel > Devices and Printers > Add a
printer". To access the Windows operating system, press the Windows key on the
external keyboard.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 44

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

You can load updated and improved driver versions or new drivers from an installation
disk, USB memory stick or another external storage medium. If the instrument is inte-
grated in a network, you can also install driver data stored in a network directory.
Select "Start > Control Panel > Devices and Printers > Device Manager > Update
Device drivers" to install the driver.

2.2.3 Connecting an External Monitor

You can connect an external monitor to the "MONITOR" connector on the instrument's
rear panel.
For details on the connector refer to "MONITOR (VGA)" on page 33.

1. Connect the external monitor to the R&S ESR.

2. Press the SETUP key.

3. Press the "General Setup" softkey.

4. Press the "More" softkey.

5. Press the "Configure Monitor" softkey.

The configuration of the connected monitor is determined and displayed in the
standard Windows configuration dialog box.

6. In the configuration dialog box, you can switch from the internal monitor (laptop
icon) to the external monitor (monitor icon), or both (double monitor icon).
If the external monitor is selected, the R&S ESR display is disabled. The screen
content (measurement screen) formerly displayed on the R&S ESR is displayed on
the external screen. If you select both monitors, the R&S ESR screen and the
external screen are both active.

2.2.4 R&S ESR Setup

This section describes how to setup the instrument. It includes the following topics:
● Selecting the Frequency Reference Signal.............................................................45
● Setting the Date and Time...................................................................................... 46
● Aligning the Touchscreen........................................................................................47
● Setting the Screen Colors....................................................................................... 47
● Setting the Display Power Save Function............................................................... 50
● Selecting and Configuring Printers..........................................................................51

2.2.4.1 Selecting the Frequency Reference Signal

You can switch the reference signal for frequency processing of the R&S ESR between
the internal reference and an external reference signal at 10 MHz as follows:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 45

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

1. Press the SETUP key.

2. Press the "Reference Int/Ext" softkey until it is in the desired state.

External reference signal

It is important that the external reference signal is deactivated when switching from
external to internal reference to avoid interactions with the internal reference signal.

Remote commands:
ROSC:SOUR EXT
ROSC:EXT:FREQ 20

2.2.4.2 Setting the Date and Time

You can set the date and time for the internal real time clock as follows:

Opening the Date and Time Properties dialog box

1. Press the SETUP key.

2. Press the "General Setup" softkey.

3. Press the "Time + Date" softkey to open the "Date and Time Properties" dialog
box.
The "Date & Time" tab is displayed.

Changing the date

1. Press the arrow on the "Month" field to display the list.

2. Select the month from the list.

3. Select the year by clicking on the up and down arrow buttons next to the "Year"
field.

4. Select the day in the calendar display or enter the date via the keyboard.

5. Click "OK".
Remote command
SYST:DATE 2008,10,1

Changing the time

You can change hours, minutes and seconds independently of each other.
1. Select the hour, minute or seconds area of the "Time" field.

2. Enter the required setting via the keyboard or rotary knob.

3. Repeat these steps until the hour, minute and second settings are correct.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 46

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

4. Click "OK".
Remote command
SYST:TIME 12,30,30

Changing the time zone

1. Select the "Time Zone" tab.

2. Press the arrow on the "Time Zone" field to display the list.

3. Select the required time zone from the list.

4. Optionally, select the "Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes"
check box.

5. Click "OK".

2.2.4.3 Aligning the Touchscreen

When the device is delivered, the touchscreen is initially aligned. However, it may
become necessary to adjust the alignment later, e.g. after an image update or after
exchanging a hard disk. If you notice that touching a specific point on the screen does
not achieve the correct response, try adjusting the alignment.

If the touchscreen is so out of order that you cannot navigate properly, connect an
external mouse to the R&S ESR and follow the steps described below to start re-align-
ment.

1. Press the SETUP key.

2. Press the "General Setup" softkey.

3. Press the "Alignment" softkey.

4. Press the "Touchscreen Alignment" softkey.

5. Using a finger or any other pointing device, press the 4 markers on the screen.
The touchscreen is aligned according to the executed pointing operations.

2.2.4.4 Setting the Screen Colors

To change the colors of the displayed objects, two default color settings are provided.
Alternatively, you can change the color of objects individually using predefined colors
or using colors of your own definition.

Some color settings are defined by the selected theme, see chapter 2.4.4.9, "Selecting
a Theme", on page 98, and cannot be changed individually.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 47

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

Displaying the Screen Colors Submenu

1. Press the SETUP key.

2. Press the "Display Setup" softkey.

3. Press the "More" softkey.

4. Press the "Screen Colors" softkey.

The "Screen Colors" submenu is displayed.

Using the Default Color Settings

To select the default setting for brightness, tint and color saturation of all screen
objects:
1. In the "Screen Colors" submenu (see "Displaying the Screen Colors Submenu"
on page 48), press the "Set to Default" softkey.
The "Set User Colors to Default" dialog box is displayed.

2. Select one of the default color sets. The color schemes are selected in such a
manner that all screen elements are visible optimally regardless whether viewed
from above or below. In the instrument's default setting, "Default Colors 1" is
active.
Remote commands:
DISP:CMAP:DEF1
DISP:CMAP:DEF2

Using the Predefined Color Set

1. In the screen colors submenu (see "Displaying the Screen Colors Submenu"
on page 48), press the "Select Screen Color Set" softkey.
The "Select Screen Color Set" dialog box is displayed.

2. Select the "User Defined Colors" option.

3. In the screen colors submenu, press the "Select Object" softkey.

The "Screen Color Setup" dialog box is displayed.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 48

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

4. Press the arrow on the "Selected Object" list and select the object for which you
want to change the color setting.

5. Select the color you want to use for the object. The defined color is displayed in the
"Preview" box.

6. Repeat the steps for all objects that you want to change in color.

7. To change to user-defined colors, press the "Userdefined Colors" softkey. For

details refer to"Defining and Using a User-Defined Color Set" on page 49.

8. Click "OK" to accept the new settings and to close the dialog box.
Remote command:
DISP:CMAP1 ... 41:PDEF <color>

Defining and Using a User-Defined Color Set

1. In the screen colors submenu (see "Displaying the Screen Colors Submenu"
on page 48), press the "Select Screen Color Set" softkey.
The "Select Screen Color Set" dialog box is displayed.

2. Select the "User Defined Colors" option.

3. In the "Screen Colors" submenu, press the "Select Object" softkey.

The "Screen Color Setup" dialog box is displayed.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 49

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

4. Press the arrow on the "Selected Object" list and select the object for which you
want to change the color setting.

5. In the color palette, select the color you want to use for the object, or enter values
for tint, saturation and brightness.
The defined color is displayed in the "Preview" box.
Note: In the continuous color spectrum ("Tint") red is represented by 0% and blue
by 100%.
6. Repeat the steps for all objects for which you want to change the color.

7. To change to predefined colors, press the "Predefined Colors" softkey. For details
refer to "Using the Predefined Color Set" on page 48.

8. Click "OK" to accept the new settings and to close the dialog box.
Remote command:
DISP:CMAP1 ... 41:HSL <hue>,<sat>,<lum>

2.2.4.5 Setting the Display Power Save Function

The R&S ESR provides a feature for automatically switching off its screen after a user-
defined period of time. The background lighting is disabled if no entries are made from
the front panel after the selected response time (key, softkey and rotary knob).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 50

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

Activating display power save

1. Press the SETUP key.

2. Press the "Display Setup" softkey.

3. Press the "More" softkey.

4. Press the "Display Pwr Save On/Off" softkey.

The power save mode is activated ("On" is highlighted), and the dialog box to enter
the response time is displayed.

5. Enter the desired response time in minutes and confirm the entry with the ENTER
key.
The screen is disabled (turns dark) after the selected period of time.

Deactivating Display Power Save

► In the "Display Setup" submenu, press the "Display Pwr Save On/Off" softkey
again.
"Off" is highlighted and the power save mode is switched off.

2.2.4.6 Selecting and Configuring Printers

You can printout your measurement results using a local printer or a network printer.
The instrument supports two independent printout settings. This allows you to quickly
switch between output to a file and a printer.

Configuring the Printer and the Printout

1. Press the PRINT key.

2. Press the "Device Setup" softkey.

The "Hardcopy Setup" dialog box is displayed.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 51

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

3. To change the tab in order to define the second print setting, press the tab on the
screen.

4. Define the output by selecting the required options.

● To save the hardcopy in an image file, select one of the image types. Depend-
ing on the image type, the color depth varies (e.g. 4-bit for BMP, 24-bit for PNG
and JPEG).
● To copy the image to the clipboard, select the "Clipboard" option.
● To use a preconfigured network printer, select the "Printer" option.
Note: The "Name", "Print to File" and "Orientation" fields are only available if the
"Printer" option is selected. You can perform the following steps only with the
"Printer" option selected.
5. In the "Name" field, select the desired printer type.

6. To redirect the output to a postscript file rather than a printer, select the "Print to
file" option.

7. In the "Orientation" field, select the desired orientation.

8. Optionally, activate the "Print Date and Time" option to add this information to the
printout.

9. Click "OK" to accept the settings and to close the dialog box.

Selecting the Printout Colors

1. Press the PRINT key.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 52

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

2. Press the "Colors" softkey.

3. To print in color, press the "Select Print Color Set" softkey to select the color set.
The "Select Print Color Set" dialog box is displayed.

4. Select the color set by using the arrow keys and confirm your selection by pressing
the ENTER key.
● "Screen Colors (Print)" option: The current screen colors are used for the print-
out. Independently of the current screen colors, the background is printed in
white and the grid in black.
Remote command: HCOP:CMAP:DEF1
● "Optimized Colors" option: This setting improves the color clarity of the printout.
Trace 1 is printed in blue, trace 2 in black, trace 3 in bright green, trace 4 in
pink, trace 5 in sea green, trace 6 in dark red, and the markers in sky blue. The
background is printed in white and the grid in black. The other colors corre-
spond to the screen colors of the default color setting of the "Setup" menu.
Remote command: HCOP:CMAP:DEF2
● "User Defined Colors" option: You define and use your own color set for the
printout. For details how to proceed refer to "Defining and Using a User-
Defined Color Set" on page 49.
Remote command: HCOP:CMAP:DEF3
● "Screen Colors (Hardcopy)" option: The current screen colors without any
changes for a hardcopy. For details on the output format see"Configuring the
Printer and the Printout" on page 51 .
Remote command: HCOP:CMAP:DEF4

5. If you want a black-and-white printout, press the "Color On/Off" softkey to switch off
the color. In the black-and-white printout, all background colors are printed out in
white and all color lines in black. This allows you to improve contrast on the print-
out.
Remote command: HCOP:DEV:COL ON

2.2.5 Windows Operating System

The instrument contains the Microsoft Windows operating system which has been con-
figured according to the instrument's features and needs. Changes in the system setup
are only required when peripherals like keyboard or a printer are installed or if the net-
work configuration does not comply with the default settings. After the R&S ESR is
started, the operating system boots and the instrument firmware is started automati-
cally.
To ensure that the instrument software functions properly, certain rules must be
adhered to concerning the operating system.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 53

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

Risk of causing instrument unusability

The instrument is equipped with the Microsoft Windows operating system. Additional
software can therefore be installed on the instrument. The use and installation of addi-
tional software may impair instrument function. Thus, run only programs that Rohde &
Schwarz has tested for compatibility with the instrument software.
The drivers and programs used on the instrument under Microsoft Windows have been
adapted to the instrument. Existing instrument software must always be modified using
only update software released by Rohde & Schwarz.

The following program packages have been tested:

● Symantec Endpoint Security – Virus-protection software
● FileShredder - for reliable deletion of files on the hard disk

2.2.5.1 Virus Protection

Users must take appropriate steps to protect their instruments from infection. Beside
the use of strong firewall settings and regularly scanning any removable storage device
used with a Rohde & Schwarz instrument, it is also recommended that anti-virus soft-
ware be installed on the instrument. While Rohde & Schwarz does NOT recommend
running anti-virus software in the background ("on- access" mode) on Windows-based
instruments, due to potentially degrading instrument performance, it does recommend
running it during non-critical hours.
For details and recommendations, see the Rohde & Schwarz White Papers "1DC01:
Malware Protection" or "1EF73: Malware Protection" (for Windows XP).

2.2.5.2 Service Packs and Updates

Microsoft regularly creates security updates and other patches to protect Windows-
based operating systems. These are released through the Microsoft Update website
and associated update server. Instruments using Windows, especially those that con-
nect to a network, should be updated regularly.
For details and recommendations on configuring automatic updates, see the Rohde &
Schwarz White Papers "1DC01: Malware Protection" or "1EF73: Malware Protection"
(for Windows XP).

2.2.5.3 Login

Microsoft Windows requires that users identify themselves by entering a user name
and password in a login window. By default, the R&S ESR provides two user accounts:
● "Instrument": an administrator account with unrestricted access to the computer/
domain
● "NormalUser": a standard user account with limited access

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 54

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

Automatic login
For the administrator account, an automatic login function is active by default. If activa-
ted, login is carried out automatically for the administrator (with full access) in the back-
ground when the R&S ESR is started, without having to enter a password. This func-
tion is active until you explicitely deactivate it or change the password.
For information on how to deactivate or re-activate the automatic login, refer to "The
Automatic Login Function" on page 55.

Passwords
For all default user accounts, the initial password is 894129. Note that this password is
very weak, and it is recommended that you change the password for both users after
initial login. You can change the password in Windows 7 for any user at any time via
"Start > Control Panel > User Accounts".

Changing the password and use of auto-login function

Note that when you change the default passwords, the default auto-login function no
longer works! You must reactivate it manually as described in "Reactivating the auto-
matic login function" on page 56.

The Automatic Login Function

When shipped, the instrument is already configured to automatically log on under
Microsoft Windows using the default administrator account ("Instrument") and pass-
word.

Deactivating the automatic login function

To deactivate the automatic login function, perform the following steps:
1.

Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system of the
R&S ESR (see also chapter 2.2.5.4, "Accessing the Start Menu", on page 56).

2. In the "Start" menu, select "Run".

The "Run" dialog box is displayed.

3. Enter the command C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\NO_AUTOLOGIN.REG.

4. Press the ENTER key to confirm.

The automatic login function is deactivated. The next time you switch on the instru-
ment, you are prompted to enter your user name and password before the firm-
ware is started.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 55

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

Adapting the automatic login function to a new password

If you change the "Instrument" user's (administrator's) password, which is used during
automatic login, this function no longer works. You must then adapt the settings for the
command that activates the auto login function first.
1. Open the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\NO_AUTOLOGIN.REG file in any text editor (e.g.
Notepad).

2. In the line "DefaultPassword"="894129", replace the default password

(894129) by the new password which is to be used for automatic login.

3. Save the changes to the file.

Reactivating the automatic login function

1. In the "Start" menu, select "Run".
The "Run" dialog box is displayed.

2. Enter the command C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\AUTOLOGIN.REG.

3. Press the ENTER key to confirm.

The automatic login function is reactivated. It will be applied the next time the
instrument is rebooted.

Switching users when using the automatic login function

Which user account is used is defined during login. However, you can also switch the
user account to be used when the automatic login function is active.
► In the "Start" menu, select the arrow next to the "Shut down" button and then "Log
off".
The "Login" dialog box is displayed, in which you can enter the different user
account name and password.

2.2.5.4 Accessing the Start Menu

The Windows "Start Menu" provides access to the Microsoft Windows functionality and
other installed programs.
► Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar.
The R&S ESR opens the "Start Menu". In addition, the task bar becomes visible.
When you connect an external keyboard, you can acces the "Start Menu" with the
"Windows" key or the Ctrl-Esc key combination.

All necessary system settings can be defined in the "Start > Control Panel" menu (for
required settings refer to the Microsoft Windows documentation and to the hardware
description).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 56

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

2.2.5.5 Accessing the Windows Task Bar

The Windows task bar also provides quick access to commonly used programs, for
example Paint or Wordpad, but also IECWIN, the auxiliary remote control tool provided
free of charge and installed by Rohde & Schwarz.

For details on the IECWIN tool, see the "Remote Control Basics" chapter of the
R&S ESR User Manual.

To open the task bar, press the "Windows" key or the CTRL + ESC key combination on
your keyboard.

2.2.6 Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection

The R&S ESR is equipped with a network interface and can be connected to an Ether-
net LAN (local area network). Provided the appropriate rights have been assigned by
the network administrator and the Windows firewall configuration is adapted accord-
ingly, the interface can be used, for example:
● To transfer data between a controlling device and the test device, e.g. in order to
run a remote control program.
See chapter "Remote Control" in the R&S ESR User Manual.
See chapter "Remote Control"
● To access or control the measurement from a remote computer using the "Remote
Desktop" application (or a similar tool)
● To connect external network devices (e.g. printers)
● To transfer data from a remote computer and back, e.g. using network folders
This section describes how to configure the LAN interface. It includes the following top-
ics:
● chapter 2.2.6.1, "Connecting the Instrument to the Network", on page 57
● chapter 2.2.6.2, "Assigning the IP Address", on page 58
Note that only user accounts with administrator rights can configure LAN networks.

LXI
The R&S ESR complies with LXI Class C. LXI gives you direct access to the LAN set-
tings described below.

For further information on the LXI interface refer to the "LXI Configuration".

2.2.6.1 Connecting the Instrument to the Network

There are two methods to establish a LAN connection to the instrument:

● A non-dedicated network (Ethernet) connection from the instrument to an existing
network made with an ordinary RJ-45 network cable. The instrument is assigned

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 57

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

an IP address and can coexist with a computer and with other hosts on the same
network.
● A dedicated network connection (Point-to-point connection) between the instru-
ment and a single computer made with a (crossover) RJ-45 network cable. The
computer must be equipped with a network adapter and is directly connected to the
instrument. The use of hubs, switches, or gateways is not required, however, data
transfer is still performed using the TCP/IP protocol. An IP address has to be
assigned to the instrument and the computer, see chapter 2.2.6.2, "Assigning the
IP Address", on page 58.
Note: As the R&S ESR uses a 1 GBit LAN, a crossover cable is not necessary
(due to Auto-MDI(X) functionality).

Risk of network failure

Before connecting the instrument to the network or configuring the network, consult
your network administrator. Errors may affect the entire network.

► To establish a non-dedicated network connection, connect a commercial RJ-45

cable to one of the LAN ports.
To establish a dedicated connection, connect a (crossover) RJ-45 cable between
the instrument and a single PC.

If the instrument is connected to the LAN, Windows automatically detects the network
connection and activates the required drivers.
The network card can be operated with a 1 GBit Ethernet IEEE 802.3u interface.

2.2.6.2 Assigning the IP Address

Depending on the network capacities, the TCP/IP address information for the instru-
ment can be obtained in different ways.
● If the network supports dynamic TCP/IP configuration using the Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP), all address information can be assigned automati-
cally.
● If the network does not support DHCP, or if the instrument is set to use alternate
TCP/IP configuration, the addresses must be set manually.
By default, the instrument is configured to use dynamic TCP/IP configuration and
obtain all address information automatically. This means that it is safe to establish a
physical connection to the LAN without any previous instrument configuration.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 58

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

Risk of network errors

Connection errors can affect the entire network. If your network does not support
DHCP, or if you choose to disable dynamic TCP/IP configuration, you must assign
valid address information before connecting the instrument to the LAN. Contact your
network administrator to obtain a valid IP address.

Assigning the IP address on the instrument

1. Press the SETUP key.

2. Press the "General Setup" softkey.

3. Press the "Network Address" softkey.

The submenu is displayed.

4. Toggle the "DHCP On/Off" softkey to the required mode.

If DHCP is "Off", you must enter the IP address manually, as described in the fol-
lowing steps.
Note: When DHCP is changed from "On" to "Off", the previously set IP address
and subnet mask are retrieved.
If DHCP is "On", the IP address of the DHCP server is obtained automatically. The
configuration is saved, and you are prompted to restart the instrument. You can
skip the remaining steps.
Note: When a DHCP server is used, a new IP address may be assigned each time
the instrument is restarted. This address must first be determined on the instrument
itself. Thus, when using a DHCP server, it is recommended that you use the per-
manent computer name, which determines the address via the DNS server (see
"Using a DNS server to determine the IP address" on page 60 and chap-
ter 2.2.6.3, "Using computer names", on page 61). R&S ESR.

5. Press the "IP Address" softkey and enter the IP address, for example 192.0.2.0.
The IP address consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Every block con-
tains 3 numbers in maximum.

6. Press the "Subnet Mask" softkey and enter the subnet mask, for example
255.255.255.0. The subnet mask consists of four number blocks separated by
dots. Every block contains 3 numbers in maximum.
If you have entered an invalid IP address or subnet mask, the message "out of
range" is displayed in the status line. The "Edit" dialog box remains open, and you
can start again. If the settings are correct, the configuration is saved, and you are
prompted to restart the instrument.

7. Confirm the displayed message ("Yes" button) to restart the instrument.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 59

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

Using a DNS server to determine the IP address

In a LAN that uses a DNS server (Domain Name System server), each PC or instru-
ment connected in the LAN can be accessed via an unambiguous computer name
instead of the IP address. The DNS server translates the host name to the IP address.
This is especially useful when a DHCP server is used, as a new IP address may be
assigned each time the instrument is restarted.
Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name, but this name can be
changed.
1. Obtain the name of your DNS domain and the IP addresses of the DNS and WINS
servers on your network.

2. Press the "Windows" key on the external keyboard or the CTRL + ESC key combi-
nation on your keyboard to access the operating system.

3. Select "Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Cen-
ter".

4. Select "Local Area Connection".

5. In the "Local Area Connection Status" dialog box, select the "Properties" button.
The items used by the LAN connection are displayed.

6. Tap the entry named "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)" to highlight it.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 60

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

7. Select the "Properties" button.

8. On the "General" tab, select "Use the following DNS server addresses" and enter
your own DNS addresses.
For more information refer to the Windows Help.

2.2.6.3 Using computer names

In a LAN that uses a DNS server (Domain Name System server), each PC or instru-
ment connected in the LAN can be accessed via an unambiguous computer name
instead of the IP address. The DNS server translates the host name to the IP address.
This is especially useful when a DHCP server is used, as a new IP address may be
assigned each time the instrument is restarted.
Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name, but this name can be
changed.
The default instrument name is a non-case-sensitive string with the following syntax:
<Type><variant>-<serial_number>
The serial number can be found on the rear panel of the instrument. It is the third part
of the device ID printed on the bar code sticker:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 61

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

To change the computer name

1. Press the SETUP key and select "General setup" > "Computer name".
The current computer name is displayed here.

2. Enter the new computer name and confirm the entry.

2.2.6.4 Changing the Windows Firewall Settings

A firewall protects an instrument by preventing unauthorized users from gaining access

to it through a network. Rohde & Schwarz highly recommends the use of the firewall on
your instrument. Rohde & Schwarz instruments are shipped with the Windows firewall
enabled and preconfigured in such a way that all ports and connections for remote
control are enabled.
For more details on firewall configuration, see the Rohde & Schwarz White Papers
"1DC01: Malware Protection" or "1EF73: Malware Protection" (for Windows XP).
Note that changing firewall settings requires administrator rights.

2.2.7 LXI Configuration

LAN eXtensions for Instrumentation (LXI) is an instrumentation platform for measuring

instruments and test systems that is based on standard Ethernet technology. LXI is
intended to be the LAN-based successor to GPIB, combining the advantages of Ether-
net with the simplicity and familiarity of GPIB.

Restrictions
Only user accounts with administrator rights can make use of the LXI functionality. For
details see the note in chapter 2.2.5, "Windows Operating System", on page 53.

LXI Classes and LXI functionality

LXI-compliant instruments are divided into three classes, A, B and C, with the function-
ality of the classes hierarchically based one upon the other:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 62

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

● Class C instruments are characterized by a common LAN implementation, includ-

ing an ICMP ping responder for diagnostics. The instruments can be configured via
a web browser; a LAN Configuration Initialize (LCI) mechanism resets the LAN
configuration. The LXI Class C instruments shall also support automatic detection
in a LAN via the VXI-11 discovery protocol and programming by means of IVI driv-
ers.
● Class B adds IEEE 1588 Precision Time Protocol (PTP) and peer-to-peer commu-
nication to the base class. IEEE 1588 allows all instruments on the same network
to automatically synchronize to the most accurate clock available and then provide
time stamps or time-based synchronization signals to all instruments with excep-
tional accuracy.
● Class A instruments are additionally equipped with the eight-channel hardware
trigger bus (LVDS interface) defined in the LXI standard.

For information about the LXI standard refer to the LXI website at http://www.lxistan-
dard.org. See also the article at the Rohde&Schwarz website: http://www2.rohde-
schwarz.com/en/technologies/connectivity/LXI/information/.

Instruments of classes A and B can generate and receive software triggers via LAN
messages and communicate with each other without involving the controller.
The R&S ESR complies with LXI Class C. In addition to the general class C features
described above, it provides the following LXI-related functionality:
● Integrated "LXI Configuration" dialog box for LXI activation and reset of the LAN
configuration (LAN Configuration Initialize, LCI).

Firmware update
After a firmware update, shut-down and re-start the instrument in order to enable the
full LXI functionality.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 63

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

2.2.7.1 LXI Configuration Dialog Box

This dialog box provides basic LXI functions for the R&S ESR. "LXI Configuration" is a
tab of the "System > System Configuration" dialog box.

● "LXI Status Enabled" switches the LXI logo in the status bar on or off.
● "LAN Config Initialize" initiates the network configuration reset mechanism (LCI) for
the instrument.

Default state of the network settings

According to the LXI standard, an LCI must set the following parameters to a default
state.

Parameter Value

TCP/IP Mode DHCP + Auto IP Address

Dynamic DNS Enabled

ICMP Ping Enabled

Password for LAN configuration LxiWebIfc

The LCI for the R&S ESR also resets the following parameters:

Parameter Value

Hostname <Instrument-specific name>

Description Signal Analysis R&S ESR

Negotiation Auto Detect

VXI-11 Discovery Enabled

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 64

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

The LAN settings are configured using the instrument's LXI Browser Interface.

2.2.7.2 LXI Browser Interface

The instrument's LXI browser interface works correctly with all W3C compliant brows-
ers. Typing the instrument's host name or IP address in the address field of the
browser on your PC, e.g. http://10.113.10.203, opens the "Instrument Home Page"
(welcome page).

To check the instrument name select SETUP > "General setup" > "Computer name".
To check the instrument's IP address select SETUP > "General setup" > "IP address".

The "Instrument Home Page" displays the device information required by the LXI
standard including the VISA resource string in read-only format.

► Press the "Device Indicator" toggle button to activate or deactivate the LXI status
indication in the status bar of the R&S ESR. If it is active, the LXI logo blinks in the
status bar. A green LXI status symbol indicates that a LAN connection has been

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 65

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

established; a red symbol indicates that no LAN cable is connected. The "Device
Indicator" setting is not password-protected.

The navigation pane of the browser interface contains the following control elements:
● "LAN Configuration" opens the LAN Configuration page.
● "LXI Glossary" opens a document with a glossary of terms related to the LXI stand-
ard.
● "Status" displays information about the LXI status of the instrument.

2.2.7.3 LAN Configuration

The "LAN Configuration" web page displays all mandatory LAN parameters and allows
their modification.
The "TCP/IP Mode" configuration field controls how the IP address for the instrument
gets assigned (see also chapter 2.2.6.2, "Assigning the IP Address", on page 58). For
the manual configuration mode, the static IP address, subnet mask, and default gate-
way are used to configure the LAN. The automatic configuration mode uses DHCP
server or Dynamic Link Local Addressing (Automatic IP) to obtain the instrument IP
address.

Changing the LAN configuration is password-protected. The password is LxiWebIfc

(notice upper and lower case characters). This password cannot be changed in the
current firmware version.

The links at the bottom of the "LAN Configuration" page open other pages:
● Advanced LAN Configuration provides LAN settings that are not declared manda-
tory by the LXI standard.
● Ping provides the ping utility to verify the connection between the instrument and
other devices.

Advanced LAN Configuration

The "Advanced LAN Configuration" parameters are used as follows:
● The "Negotiation" configuration field provides different Ethernet speed and duplex
mode settings. In general, the "Auto Detect" mode is sufficient.
● "ICMP Ping" must be enabled to use the ping utility.
● "VXI-11" is the protocol that is used to detect the instrument in the LAN. According
to the standard, LXI devices must use VXI-11 to provide a detection mechanism;
other additional detection mechanisms are permitted.

Ping
The instrument includes a ping server and a ping client. The ping client can be used to
verify the connection between instrument and another device. The ping command uses

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 66

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Preparing for Use

the ICMP echo request and echo reply packets to determine whether the LAN connec-
tion is functional. Ping is useful for diagnosing IP network or router failures. The ping
utility is not password-protected.
To initiate a ping between the LXI-compliant instrument and a second connected
device:

1. Enable "ICMP Ping" on the "Advanced LAN Configuration" page (enabled after an
LCI).

2. Enter the IP address of the second device without the ping command and with-
out any further parameters into the "Destination Address" field (e.g.
10.113.10.203).

3. Click "Submit".
The result of the echo request is displayed if the connection was established.

2.2.8 Configuring the GPIB Interface

A GPIB interface is integrated on the rear panel of the instrument. You can set the
GPIB address and the ID response string. The GPIB language is set as SCPI by
default and cannot be changed for the R&S ESR.
For details on the GPIB interface see "GPIB Interface" on page 34).

Displaying the GPIB submenu

1. Press the SETUP key.

2. Press the "General Setup" softkey.

3. Press the "GPIB" softkey.

The submenu for setting the parameters of the remote control interface is dis-
played.

Setting the GPIB address

► In the "GPIB" menu, press the "GPIB Address" softkey.
The edit dialog box for the GPIB address is displayed. The setting range is from 0
to 30. If SCPI is selected as the GPIB language, the default address is 20.
Remote command:
SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 20

Setting the default ID response string

► In the "GPIB" menu, press the "ID String Factory" softkey to select the default
response to the *IDN? command.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 67

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware Options

Setting a user-defined ID response string

► In the "GPIB" menu, press the "ID String User" softkey to enter a user-defined
response to the *IDN? command. The maximum length of the output string is 36
characters.

2.3 Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware

Options
This chapter describes how to update the firmware and how to activate optional firm-
ware packages.

Updating the firmware or installing optional firmware requires administrator rights (see
chapter 2.2.5.3, "Login", on page 54).

2.3.1 Firmware Update

You can install a new firmware version using one of the following methods:
● Copying the files to the instrument using USB devices (e.g. a memory stick), GPIB,
or LAN
● Using the "Remote Installation" feature in a LAN network

Copying the files to the instrument

1. Press the SETUP key.

2. Press the "More" softkey.

3. Press the "Firmware Update" softkey.

The "Firmware Update" dialog box is displayed.

4. Enter the drive name and directory via the keypad.

Example: The installation files are stored on a memory stick in the Update direc-
tory. After you insert the memory stick, it will be detected as drive D:. Therefore,
the required path specification is D:\UPDATE.

5. If you install via LAN using the Remote Desktop application, enter the drive name
and directory or press the "Browse" button to locate the directory:
a) In the displayed dialog box, select the drive.
b) On the selected drive, select the folder that contains the installation file (*.exe).
c) Press the "Select" button to confirm your selection and go back to the "Firm-
ware Update" dialog box.

6. Press "Execute"
The installation program will guide you through the installation.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 68

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware Options

7. After the firmware update, the "UNCAL" status display indicates the necessity of a
self alignment. Perform a self alignment (for details refer to chapter 2.2.1.9, "Per-
forming a Self Alignment and a Self Test", on page 42).
Remote command: SYST:FIRM:UPD 'D:\FW_UPDATE'

Performing a remote installation from a Windows PC

This method requires a LAN connection from the instrument to a Windows PC (see
chapter 2.2.6, "Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection", on page 57).
1. Run FSVSetup.exe on your PC.

2. Select "Remote Installation" and click the "Next" button.

3. Select the packages you want to install and click the "Next" button.

4. Your LAN subnet is scanned and all found instruments are listed.
Note: The FSVSetup.exe command communicates with the instrument via LAN,
which means the command must pass the firewall. Therefore, add the command to
your firewall rules, then restart the scan by clicking "Rescan".
5. Select the instruments you want to update. You can select up to 5 instruments to
update at the same time.
Note: All instruments in your LAN structure are included in the list. Make sure you
select the correct instruments!
To display further options, click the "Options" button.
6. Start installation by clicking "Install".

7. Confirm that you want to reboot the instrument in order to activate the firmware
update. The instrument restarts automatically.

2.3.2 Activating Firmware Options

Firmware options are enabled by entering license keys as described here.

To activate firmware options

1. Press the SETUP key.

2. Press the "More" softkey.

3. Press the "Option Licenses" softkey.

4. Press the "Install Option" softkey.

An edit dialog box is displayed.

5. Enter the option key number using the keypad.

6. Press the ENTER key.

If validation is successful, the message "option key valid" is displayed. If the valida-
tion fails, the option software is not installed.

7. Reboot the instrument.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 69

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

With time-limited licenses, a message box appears if an option is about to expire.

Press the "OK" button to resume using the R&S ESR. If an option has already expired,
a message box appears for you to confirm. In this case, all instrument functions are
unavailable (including remote control) until the R&S ESR is rebooted.

Alternatively, you can activate options using an XML file.

To activate firmware options using an XML file

1. Press the SETUP key.

2. Press the "More" softkey.

3. Press the "Option Licenses" softkey.

4. Press the "Install Option by XML" softkey.

An edit dialog box is displayed.

5. Enter or browse for the name of an XML file on the instrument that contains the
option key.

6. Press "Select."
If validation is successful, the message "option key valid" is displayed. If the valida-
tion fails, the option software is not installed.

7. Reboot the instrument.

2.4 Basic Operations

This chapter gives an overview on how to work with the R&S ESR. It describes what
kind of information is displayed in the diagram area, how to operate the R&S ESR via
the front panel keys and other interaction methods, and how to use the Online Help.

Note the Conventions Used in the Documentation concerning procedure descriptions

and terminology described at the beginning of this manual.

2.4.1 Information in the Diagram Area

The following figure shows a measurement diagram during analyzer operation. All dif-
ferent information areas are labeled. They are explained in more detail in the following
sections.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 70

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

1 = Operation mode tabs

2 = Hardware information
3 = Header of the result display containing trace information
4 = Result display
5 = Footer of the result display containing general measurement settings
6 = Calibration status
7 = Error messages
8 = Measurement status information
9 = Measurement progress bar
10 = Date and time
11 = Softkeys

2.4.1.1 Channel Display

Using the R&S ESR you can handle several different measurement tasks (channels) at
the same time (although they can only be performed asynchronously). For each chan-
nel, a separate tab is displayed on the screen. In order to switch from one channel dis-
play to another, simply press the corresponding tab.

The icon on the tab label indicates that the displayed trace no longer matches the
current instrument settings. This may be the case, for example, if a trace is frozen and
the instrument settings are changed. As soon as a new measurement is performed, the
icon disappears.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 71

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

To start a new channel

1. Click the icon in the toolbar at the top of the screen (see also chapter 2.4.2.1,
"Toolbar", on page 78 on how to display the toolbar).

2. Select the softkey for the required measurement mode.

A new tab is displayed for the new channel.

2.4.1.2 Display of Hardware Settings

Information on hardware settings are displayed in the channel bar above the diagram.

Invalid settings
A bullet next to the hardware setting indicates that user-defined settings are used, not
automatic settings. A green bullet indicates this setting is valid and the measurement is
correct. A red bullet indicates an invalid setting that does not provide useful results.
It is the user's responsibility to remedy such a situation.

Editing settings in the channel bar

All settings that are displayed in the channel bar can easily be edited by touching the
setting in the display (with a finger or mouse pointer). The corresponding (edit) dialog
box is displayed where you can edit the setting.

In receiver mode, the R&S ESR shows the following settings:

Demod Active AF demodulation.

Input Number of the RF Input and the type of coupling currently used.

RBW Resolution bandwidth currently used.

Att Current (RF) attenuation level.

MT Measurement time currently used.

Preamp Current preamplification level.

SGL Current scan count.

Step Current frequency step mode.

no label Active transducer factor.

no label Active LISN.

In spectrum mode, the R&S ESR shows the following settings:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 72

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

Ref Level Reference level

Att RF attenuation level.

Ref Offset Reference level offset

SWT Sweep time that has been set.

If the sweep time does not correspond to the value for automatic coupling,
a bullet is displayed in front of the field. The color of the bullet turns red if
the sweep time is set below the value for automatic coupling. In addition,
the UNCAL flag is shown. In this case, the sweep time must be increased.

RBW Resolution bandwidth that has been set.

If the bandwidth does not correspond to the value for automatic coupling,
a green bullet appears in front of the field.

VBW Video bandwidth that has been set.

If the bandwidth does not correspond to the value for automatic coupling,
a green bullet is displayed in front of the field.

Compatible Compatible device mode (FSP, FSU, default; default not displayed)

Mode Indicates which sweep mode type is selected:

● "Auto FFT": automatically selected FFT sweep mode
● "Auto sweep": automatically selected swept sweep mode
● "FFT": manually selected FFT sweep mode
● "Sweep": manually selected swept sweep mode

2.4.1.3 Measurement Settings Information

In addition to the common hardware settings, the channel bar above the diagram also
displays information on instrument settings that affect the measurement results even
though this is not immediately apparent from the display of the measured values. This
information is displayed in gray font and only when applicable for the current measure-
ment, as opposed to the common hardware settings that are always displayed.

In Receiver mode, the R&S ESR shows the following information.

TRG Trigger source

(for details see trigger settings in the "TRIG" menu in the Operating manual)
● EXT: External
● VID: Video

75 Ω The input impedance of the instrument is set to 75 Ω.

In Spectrum mode, the following types of information may be displayed, if applicable.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 73

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

Label Description

SGL The sweep is set to single sweep mode.

Sweep Count The current signal count for measurement tasks that involve a specific number of subse-
quent sweeps
(see "Sweep Count" setting in "Sweep" menu in the Operating manual)

TRG Trigger source

(for details see trigger settings in the "TRIG" menu in the Operating manual)
● EXT: External
● VID: Video
● RFP: RF power
● IFP: IF power
● TIM: Time
● SQL: Squelch

6dB/RRC/CHN Filter type for sweep bandwidth

(see BW menu in the Operating manual)

PA The preamplifier is activated.

GAT The frequency sweep is controlled via the EXT TRIG/GATE IN connector.

TDF A transducer factor is activated.

75 Ω The input impedance of the instrument is set to 75 Ω.

FRQ A frequency offset ≠ 0 Hz is set.

DC/AC An external DC or AC calibration signal is in use.

Inp Input source: digital I/Q (option R&S FSV-B17 only)

2.4.1.4 Diagram-specific and Trace Information

Diagram-specific information, e.g. concerning traces, is indicated in the diagram

header and footer.

Trace information in diagram header

The diagram header (above the diagram) contains the following trace information:

The header may contain a user-defined introductory title, see chapter 2.4.4.7, "Adding
a Title to the Diagram Header", on page 97.

Editing settings in the diagram header

All settings that are displayed in the diagram header can easily be edited by selecting
the setting in the display (by tapping or clicking). The corresponding (edit) dialog box is
displayed in which you can edit the setting.

Norm/NCor
Correction data is not used.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 74

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

Trace color Color of trace display in diagram

Trace no. Trace number (1 to 6)

Detector Selected detector:

AP AUTOPEAK detector

Pk MAX PEAK detector

Mi MIN PEAK detector

Sa SAMPLE detector

Av AVERAGE detector

Rm RMS detector

QP QUASIPEAK detector

CA CISPR Average detector

RA RMS Average detector

Trace Mode Sweep mode:

Clrw CLEAR/WRITE

Max MAX HOLD

Min MIN HOLD

Avg AVERAGE (Lin/Log/Pwr)

View VIEW

Marker information in Diagram Grid

The x and y axis positions of the last 2 markers or delta markers that were set, as well
as their index, are displayed within the diagram grid, if available. The value in the
square brackets after the index indicates the trace to which the marker is assigned.
(Example: M1[1] defines marker 1 on trace 1.) For more than 2 markers, a separate
marker table is displayed beneath the diagram.
The marker function information is not available in realtime mode.
If applicable, the active measurement function for the marker and its main results are
indicated, as well. The functions are indicated with the following abbreviations:

FXD Reference fixed marker active

PHNoise Phase noise measurement active

CNT Frequency counter active

TRK Signal track active

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 75

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

NOIse Noise measurement active

MDepth Measurement of the AM modulation depth active

TOI TOI measurement active

Marker Information in Marker Table

In addition to the marker information displayed within the diagram grid, a separate
marker table may be displayed beneath the diagram. This table provides the following
information for all active markers:

Type Marker type: N (normal), D (delta), T (temporary, internal), PWR (power sensor)

Dgr Diagram number

Trc Trace to which the marker is assigned

Stimulus x-value of the marker

Response y-value of the marker

Func Activated marker or measurement function

Func .Result Result of the active marker or measurement function

Mode-dependant Information in Diagram Footer

The diagram footer (beneath the diagram) contains the following information, depend-
ing on the current mode:

Mode Label Information

FREQ CF Center frequency (between start and stop)

Span Frequency span

SPAN CF (1.0 ms/) Zero span

For most modes, the number of sweep points shown in the display are indicated in the
diagram footer. In zoom mode, the (rounded) number of currently displayed points are
indicated.
The diagram footer can be removed from the display temporarily, see chapter 2.4.4.8,
"Removing the Diagram Footer", on page 97.

2.4.1.5 Instrument and Status Information

Global instrument settings, the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in
the status bar beneath the diagram.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 76

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

Hiding the status bar

You can hide the status bar display, e.g. in order to enlarge the display area for the
measurement results.

1. Press the DISPLAY key.

2. In the "Display Settings" dialog box, select "Status Bar State: Off".
The status bar is no longer displayed.

● To display the status bar again, select "Status Bar State: On".
SCPI command:
DISP:SBAR:STAT OFF
The following information is displayed:

Instrument status

The instrument is configured for operation with an external reference.

Error information
If errors or irregularities are detected, a keyword and an error message, if available,
are displayed in the status bar.

The following keywords are used:

UNCAL One of the following conditions applies:

● Correction data has been switched off.
● No correction values are available. This occurs, for example, if a firmware
update is performed followed by a cold start of the instrument.
● Record the correction data by performing a self alignment

OVLD Overload of the input mixer.

● Increase the RF attenuation (for RF input).
● Reduce the input level (for digital input)

IFOVL Overload of the IF signal path after the input mixer.

● Increase the reference level.

LOUNL Error in the instrument's frequency processing hardware was detected.

NO REF Instrument was set to an external reference but no signal was detected on the refer-
ence input.

OVEN OCXO reference frequency (option R&S FSV-B4) has not yet reached its operating
temperature. The message usually disappears a few minutes after power has beeen
switched on.

Progress
The progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 77

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

Date and time

The date and time settings of the instrument are displayed in the status bar.

2.4.2 Means of User Interaction

The instrument provides a user interface for operation that does not require an external
keyboard, using the following means of interaction:
● chapter 2.4.2.1, "Toolbar", on page 78
● chapter 2.4.2.2, "Touchscreen", on page 79
● chapter 2.4.2.3, "On-screen Keyboard", on page 80
● chapter 2.4.2.5, "Rotary Knob", on page 82
● chapter 2.4.2.6, "Arrow Keys, UNDO/REDO Keys", on page 82
● chapter 2.4.2.7, "Softkeys", on page 83
● chapter 2.4.2.9, "Dialog Boxes", on page 85
All tasks necessary to operate the instrument can be performed using this user inter-
face. Apart from instrument specific keys, all other keys that correspond to an external
keyboard (e.g. arrow keys, ENTER key) operate conform to Microsoft.
For most tasks, there are at least 2 alternative methods to perform them:
● Using the touchscreen
● Using other elements provided by the front panel, e.g. the keypad, rotary knob, or
arrow and position keys

2.4.2.1 Toolbar

Standard functions can be performed via the icons in the toolbar at the top of the
screen, if available (see chapter 2.4, "Basic Operations", on page 70). By default, this
toolbar is not displayed.

Displaying the toolbar

► Press the "Toolbar" icon to the right of the tabs in the display to toggle the toolbar
on or off.

Alternatively:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 78

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

1. Press the SETUP key.

2. Press the "Display Setup" softkey.

3. Press the "Tool Bar State On/Off" softkey.

Or:

4. Press the DISPLAY key.

5. In the "Display Settings" dialog box, select "Tool Bar State: On".
The toolbar is displayed at the top of the screen.

Remote:
DISP:TBAR:STAT ON
The following functions are available:
Table 2-2: Standard Application Functions in the Toolbar

Icon Description

Opens the "Select Mode" menu (see chapter 2.4.1.1, "Channel Display", on page 71)

Opens an existing measurement (settings) file

Stores the current measurement file

Prints the current measurement screen

Saves the current measurement screen as a file (screenshot)

Reverts last operation.

Repeats previously reverted operation.

Selection mode: the cursor can be used to select (and move) markers in a zoomed display

Zoom mode: displays a dotted rectangle in the diagram that can be expanded to define the
zoom area. Can be repeated several times.

Zoom off: the diagram is displayed in its original size

2.4.2.2 Touchscreen

A touchscreen is a screen that is touch-sensitive, i.e. it reacts in a specified way when

a particular element on the screen is tapped by a finger or a pointing device, for exam-
ple. Any user interface elements that can be clicked on by a mouse pointer can also be
tapped on the screen to trigger the same behavior, and vice versa. Using the touch-
screen, the following tasks (amoung others) can be performed by the tap of your finger:
● Changing a setting
● Changing the display
● Moving a marker
● Zooming into a diagram
● Saving or printing results and settings

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 79

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

To imitate a right-click by mouse using the touchscreen, for example to open a context-
sensitive menu for a specific item, press the screen for about 1 second.

Deactivating and Activating the Touchscreen Function

The touchscreen function can be deactivated, e.g. when the instrument is being used
for demonstration purposes and tapping the screen should not provoke an action.

1. Press the DISPLAY key.

2. In the dialog box, select one of the following options:

● "Touchscreen ON": touchscreen function is active for the entire screen
● "Touchscreen OFF": touchscreen is deactivated for the entire screen
● "DIAGRAM TOUCH OFF": touchscreen is deactivated for the diagram area of
the screen, but active for the surrounding softkeys, toolbars and menus.

SCPI command:
DISP:TOUCh:STAT OFF

2.4.2.3 On-screen Keyboard

The on-screen keyboard is an additional means of interacting with the instrument with-
out having to connect an external keyboard.

The on-screen keyboard display can be switched on and off as desired using the "On-
Screen Keyboard" function key beneath the screen.

When you press this key, the display switches between the following options:
● Keyboard displayed at the top of the screen
● Keyboard displayed at the bottom of the screen
● No keyboard displayed

You can use the TAB key on the on-screen keyboard to move the focus from one field
to another in dialog boxes.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 80

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

2.4.2.4 Keypad

The keypad is used to enter alphanumeric parameters. It contains the

following keys:
● Alphanumeric keys
Enters numbers and (special) characters in edit dialog boxes. For
details refer to chapter 2.4.3.1, "Entering Numeric Parameters",
on page 86 and chapter 2.4.3.2, "Entering Alphanumeric
Parameters", on page 86.
● Decimal point
Inserts a decimal point "." at the cursor position.

● Sign key
Changes the sign of a numeric parameter. In the case of an alphanumeric parame-
ter, inserts a "-" at the cursor position.
● Unit keys (GHz/-dBm MHz/dBm, kHz/dB and Hz/dB)
These keys add the selected unit to the entered numeric value and complete the
entry.
In the case of level entries (e.g. in dB) or dimensionless values, all units have the
value "1" as mulitplying factor. Thus, they have the same function as an ENTER
key. The same is true for an alphanumeric entry.
● ESC key
Closes all kinds of dialog boxes, if the edit mode is not active. Quits the edit mode,
if the edit mode is active. In dialog boxes that contain a "Cancel" button it activates
that button.
For "Edit" dialog boxes the following mechanism is used:
– If data entry has been started, it retains the original value and closes the dialog
box.
– If data entry has not been started or has been completed, it closes the dialog
box.
● BACKSPACE key
– If an alphanumeric entry has already been started, this key deletes the charac-
ter to the left of the cursor.
– If no input field is currently active, the most recently entered value is undone,
i.e. the previous value is retrieved. Thus, you can toggle between two values
(e.g. spans).
● ENTER key
– Concludes the entry of dimensionless entries. The new value is accepted.
– With other entries, this key can be used instead of the "Hz/dB" unit key.
– In a dialog box, presses the default or focused button.
– In a dialog box, activates the edit mode for the focused area, if available. For
details on the edit mode refer to chapter 2.4.3.3, "Navigating in Dialog Boxes",
on page 88.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 81

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

– In a dialog box, activates or deactivates the selected option of the focused

area, if the edit mode is active.

2.4.2.5 Rotary Knob

The rotary knob has several functions:

● Increments (clockwise direction) or decrements (counter-clockwise direc-
tion) the instrument parameter at a defined step width in the case of a
numeric entry.
● Shifts the selection bar within focused areas (e.g. lists), if the edit mode is
activated.
● Shifts markers, limit lines, etc on the screen.
● Acts like the ENTER key, when it is pressed. For details refer to chap-
ter 2.4.3.3, "Navigating in Dialog Boxes", on page 88.
● Moves the scroll bar vertically, if the scroll bar is focused and the edit
mode is activated.
For details on the edit mode refer to chapter 2.4.3.3, "Navigating in Dialog
Boxes", on page 88.

2.4.2.6 Arrow Keys, UNDO/REDO Keys

The arrow keys are used for navigation. The UNDO/REDO keys support you during
input.

UPARROW/DNARROW keys
The UPARROW or DNARROW keys do the following:
● In a numeric edit dialog box, increase or decrease the instrument parameter.
● In a list, scroll forward and backward through the list entries.
● In a table, move the selection bar vertically.
● In windows or dialog boxes with vertical scroll bar, move the scroll bar.

LEFTARROW/RIGHTARROW keys
The LEFTARROW or RIGHTARROW keys do the following:
● In an alphanumeric edit dialog box, move the cursor.
● In a list, scroll forward and backward through the list entries.
● In a table, move the selection bar horizontally.
● In windows or dialog boxes with horizontal scroll bar, move the scroll bar.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 82

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

UNDO/REDO keys
● The UNDO key reverts the previously performed action, i.e. the status before the
previous action is retrieved.
The undo function is useful, for example, if you are performing a zero span mea-
surement with several markers and a limit line defined and accidentally click the
"ACP" softkey. In this case, very many settings would be lost. However, if you
press UNDO immediately afterwards, the previous status is retrieved, i.e. the zero
span measurement and all settings.
● The REDO key repeats the previously reverted action, i.e. the most recently per-
formed action is repeated.

The UNDO function is not available after a PRESET or "RECALL" operation. When
these functions are used, the history of previous actions is deleted.

2.4.2.7 Softkeys

Softkeys are virtual keys provided by the software. Thus, more functions can be provi-
ded than those that can be accessed directly via the function keys on the device. Soft-
keys are dynamic, i.e. depending on the selected function key, a different list of soft-
keys is displayed on the right side of the screen
A list of softkeys for a certain function key is also called a menu. Each softkey can
either represent a specific function, or a submenu that in turn represents several soft-
keys.

Selecting softkeys

► A particular softkey is selected by pressing the key on the screen with a finger,
mouse pointer or other pointing device.

Softkeys can only be operated via the screen, there are (usually) no corresponding
function keys.

Navigating in softkey menus

● The "More" softkey indicates that the menu contains more softkeys than can be
displayed at once on the screen. When pressed, it displays the next set of soft-
keys.
● If the softkey label contains a ">" symbol, it represents a submenu of further soft-
keys. When you press it, the submenu is displayed.
● The "Up" key switches to the next higher level of the menu.
● The start menu of the current measurement mode is accessed directly by pressing
the HOME key on the front panel.

Softkey actions
A softkey performs one of the following actions when pressed:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 83

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

● Opens a dialog box to enter data.

● Switches a function on or off.
● Opens a submenu (only softkeys with a ">" symbol).

Recognizing the softkey status by color

In the factory configuration, a softkey is highlighted orange when a corresponding dia-
log box is open. If it is a toggle softkey, the current state is highlighted blue. If an instru-
ment function is not available temporarily due to a specific setting, the associated soft-
key is deactivated and its text is colored gray.
Some softkeys belong to a certain (firmware) option. If this option is not implemented in
your device, the associated softkeys are not displayed.

Hiding softkeys
You can hide the softkey display, e.g. when using remote control, in order to enlarge
the display area for the measurement results. When you press a function key on the
front panel, the softkeys are displayed temporarily, enabling you to perform a certain
task with the softkeys. They are then automatically hidden again when they have not
been used for a specified time. Any edit dialog boxes required for entry remain in the
display.

1. Press the DISPLAY key.

2. In the "Display Settings" dialog box, select "Softkey Bar State: Off".
The softkeys are no longer displayed.

► To display the softkeys again, select "Softkey Bar State: On".

Remote:
DISP:SKEY:STAT OFF

2.4.2.8 Context-sensitive Menus

Markers and traces in the display, as well as the information in the channel bar, have
context-sensitive menus. If you right-click on a marker or trace in the display, or infor-
mation in the channel bar (or touch it for about 1 second), a menu is displayed which
contains the same functions as the corresponding softkey. This is useful, for example,
when the softkey display is hidden (see chapter 2.4.2.7, "Softkeys", on page 83).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 84

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

If a menu entry contains an arrow to the right of it, a submenu is available for that
entry.

► To close the menu, press the ESC key or click in the display outside of the menu.

2.4.2.9 Dialog Boxes

In most cases, the R&S ESR dialog boxes are designed to enter a numeric value. In
the documentation, these dialog boxes are called "edit dialog boxes". Dialog boxes that
are not only designed for parameter entry have a more complex structure and, in the
documentation, are called "dialog boxes". The navigation in Windows dialog boxes dif-
fers in some aspects from the navigation in R&S ESR dialog boxes. For details, see
chapter 2.4.3.3, "Navigating in Dialog Boxes", on page 88.
The following figure shows an example of a edit dialog box:

Fig. 2-4: Edit dialog box for parameter entry

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 85

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

The title bar shows the name of the parameter that was selected. The entry is per-
formed in the editing line. When the dialog box is displayed, the focus is on the editing
line and it contains the currently used parameter value and its unit. The optional third
line shows status and error messages which always refer to the current entry.

2.4.3 Setting Parameters

This section describes how to perform the following basic tasks in the R&S ESR:
● chapter 2.4.3.1, "Entering Numeric Parameters", on page 86
● chapter 2.4.3.2, "Entering Alphanumeric Parameters", on page 86
● chapter 2.4.3.3, "Navigating in Dialog Boxes", on page 88

2.4.3.1 Entering Numeric Parameters

If a field requires numeric input, the keypad provides only numbers.

1. Enter the parameter value using the keypad, or change the currently used parame-
ter value by using the rotary knob (small steps) or the UPARROW or DNARROW
keys (large steps).

2. After entering the numeric value via keypad, press the corresponding unit key.
The unit is added to the entry.

3. If the parameter does not require a unit, confirm the entered value by pressing the
ENTER key or one of the unit keys.
The editing line is highlighted in order to confirm the entry.

2.4.3.2 Entering Alphanumeric Parameters

If a field requires alphanumeric input, you can use the on-screen keyboard to enter
numbers and (special) characters (see also chapter 2.4.2.3, "On-screen Keyboard",
on page 80).

Fig. 2-5: On-screen keyboard

Alternatively, you can use the keypad. Every alphanumeric key provides several char-
acters and one number. The decimal point key (.) provides special characters, and the

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 86

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

sign key (-) toggles between capital and small letters. For the assignment refer to
table 2-3.

Entering numbers and (special) characters via the keypad

1. Press the key once to enter the first possible value.

2. All characters available via this key are displayed.

3. To choose another value provided by this key, press the key again, until your
desired value is displayed.

4. With every key stroke the next possible value of this key is displayed. If all possible
values have been displayed, the series starts with the first value again. For infor-
mation on the series refer to table 2-3.

5. To change from capital to small letters and vice versa, press the sign key (-).

6. When you have chosen the desired value, wait for 2 seconds (to use the same key
again), or start the next entry by pressing another key.

Entering a blank

► Press the "Space" bar, or press the "0" key and wait 2 seconds.

Correcting an entry:

1. Using the arrow keys, move the cursor to the right of the entry you want to delete.

2. Press the BACKSPACE key.

3. The entry to the left of the cursor is deleted.

4. Enter your correction.

Completing the entry

► Press the ENTER key or the rotary knob.

Aborting the entry

► Press the ESC key.

The dialog box is closed without changing the settings.

Table 2-3: Keys for alphanumeric parameters

Key name Series of (special) characters and number provided

(upper inscription)

7 7µΩ°€¥$¢

8 A B C 8 Ä ÆÅ Ç

9 DEF9É

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 87

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

Key name Series of (special) characters and number provided

(upper inscription)

4 GHI4

5 JKL5

6 MNO6ŇÖ

1 PQRS1

2 TUV2Ü

3 WXYZ3

0 <blank> 0 – @ + / \ < > = % &

. .*:_,;"'?()#

– <toggles between capital and small letters>

2.4.3.3 Navigating in Dialog Boxes

Some of the dialog boxes are not only for parameter entry, and therefore have a more
complex structure. The following figure shows an example.

Changing the focus

The focus on the graphical user interface is moved by pressing an element on the
screen, or via the rotary knob. The focused area is marked with a blue frame (see fig-
ure 2-6). If this area consists of more than one element, e.g. lists of options or tables,

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 88

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

you must first switch to the edit mode in order to make changes. A focused area in the
edit mode is marked with a dashed blue frame (see figure 2-7).

Fig. 2-6: Focused area

Fig. 2-7: Focused area in edit mode

Edit mode
When using the touchscreen for focus changes, all focused areas are in the edit mode
automatically, if available. Otherwise, you must switch to edit mode manually.

Switching to edit mode

1. Press the ENTER key.

2. To quit the edit mode, press the ESC key.

Working in dialog boxes

● To edit alphanumeric parameters, use the keypad or the on-screen keyboard. For
details see chapter 2.4.3.1, "Entering Numeric Parameters", on page 86 and chap-
ter 2.4.3.2, "Entering Alphanumeric Parameters", on page 86. If you edit fields, the
edit mode is activated automatically when you start typing.
● To move the focus to the next interface element (e.g. field, option, list), press it on
the screen, or turn the rotary knob.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 89

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

● To select or deselect an option, press the option on the screen.

Alternatively:
– If the focused area consists of more than one option and the edit mode is not
active, change into the edit mode.
– Scroll through the list of options using the arrow keys or the rotary knob (only
for vertical direction) until the option you want to activate or deactivate is high-
lighted.
– Press the rotary knob or the ENTER key to confirm your selection.
The option is activated or deactivated, depending on its previous setting.
– To leave the edit mode, press the ESC key.
● To open a drop-down list, press the arrow next to the list. Alternatively, press the
ENTER key or the rotary knob. When opened, the list is in edit mode.
● To select an entry without opening a drop-down list, use the arrow keys to browse
through the list entries.
● To select a list entry, press the entry on the screen.
Alternatively:
– If the edit mode is not active, change into the edit mode.
– Scroll through the list using the arrow keys or the rotary knob until the list entry
you want to select is highlighted.
– Confirm your choice by pressing the rotary knob or the ENTER key.
If a drop-down list was opened, it is closed.
● To change from one tab to the next, press the tab on the screen.
● To press a button in a dialog box, press the button on the screen.
Alternatively:
– Place the focus on the desired button using the rotary knob.
– Confirm your choice by pressing the rotary knob or the ENTER key.
● To close the dialog box and accept the changes, press the "OK" button.
● To close the dialog box without accepting the changes, press the ESC key or the
"Cancel" button.

Particularities in Windows dialog boxes

In some cases, e.g. if you want to install a printer, original Windows dialog boxes are
used. In these dialog boxes, the navigation behavior is different to the one you are
used to from R&S ESR applications. In the following, the important differences and
useful tips are listed:
● The rotary knob and function keys do not work. Do not use them. Use the touch-
screen instead.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 90

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

2.4.4 Changing the Display

2.4.4.1 Changing the Focus

Any selected function is always performed on the currently focussed element in the
display, e.g. a dialog field, diagram, or table row. Which element is focussed is indica-
ted by a blue frame (diagram, window, table) or is otherwise highlighted (softkey,
marker etc.). Moving the focus is most easily done by tapping on the element on the
touchscreen. Alternatively, use the "Tab" key on the on-screen keyboard or the rotary
knob to move the focus from one element to the next on the display.

To move the focus on the screen between any displayed diagrams or tables, press the
"Change focus" function key on the front panel. The focus moves from the diagram to
the first table to the next table etc. and then back to the diagram.

2.4.4.2 Switching between Split and Maximized Display

In some measurement modes, a table with markers or measurement results is dis-

played beneath the diagram. In this case, you may wish to maximize the diagram
or table display in order to see more details.

Press the SPLIT/MAXIMIZE key on the front panel to switch between a split screen
and a full screen (maximized display). In maximized display, the table or diagram cur-
rently focused is maximized. In split display, both the diagram and any available tables
are displayed in one screen.

SCPI command:
DISP:WIND:SIZE
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<m>]:SIZE on page 951

2.4.4.3 Soft and Mini Soft Front Panel Display

When working with an external monitor or operating via remote control on a computer,
it is useful to be able to interact with the R&S ESR without requiring the keypad and
keys located on the front panel of the instrument. Therefore, a "Soft Front Panel" dis-
play is available, which simulates the entire front panel of the instrument (except for the
external connectors) on the screen. You can switch between "normal" screen display
and extended display. In the extended display, the keys and other hardware controls of
the instrument are simulated on the screen.
If you require a Soft Front Panel but do not want to lose too much space for results in
the display area, a mini soft Front Panel is available. The mini version displays only the
hardkeys in a separate window in the display area. This window can be closed auto-
matically after pressing a key, or remain open, as desired. Using the Mini Front Panel,

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 91

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

the R&S ESR interface is fully operable from a monitor with a resolution of 1024x768
pixels.

Switching to soft Front Panel display

1. Press the SETUP key.

2. Press the "General Setup" softkey.

3. Press the "More" softkey.

4. Press the "Soft Front Panel" softkey.

Alternatively:

5. Press the DISPLAY key.

6. In the "Display Settings" dialog box, select "Front Panel State: On".
The extended display appears on the screen.

Using the F6 key you can toggle the Front Panel display on and off.

Remote: SYST:DISP:FPAN:STAT ON

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 92

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

Working with the Soft Front Panel

Basic operation with the soft Front Panel is identical to normal operation. To activate a
key, either press the key on the touchscreen, or click on it with the mouse pointer. To
simulate the use of the rotary knob, use the additional keys displayed between the key-
pad and the arrow keys:

Icon Function

Turn left

Enter

Turn right

Switching to Mini Front Panel display

1. Press the DISPLAY key.

2. In the "Display Settings" dialog box, select "Mini Front Panel State: On".
The "Mini Front Panel" window appears on the screen. It can be moved anywhere
on the screen where it does not interfere with your current task.

Using the key combination ALT + M you can toggle the Mini Front Panel display on and
off.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 93

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

Auto close option

By default, the "Auto close" option is activated and the Mini Front Panel window closes
automatically after you select a key. This is useful if you only require the Front Panel
display to press a single function key.
If you want the window to remain open, deactivate the "Auto close" option. You can
close the window manually by clicking "Close Panel" or the key combination ALT + M.

2.4.4.4 Enlarging the Display Area

You can enlarge the screen display area if you are using an external monitor or the
Soft and Mini Soft Frontpanel display (see chapter 2.4.4.3, "Soft and Mini Soft
Front Panel Display", on page 91). To do so, drag the lower right corner of the win-
dow to the required size. In standard display, a small icon is displayed in the lower
right corner of the screen.

2.4.4.5 Displaying the Toolbar

Standard file functions can be performed via the icons in the toolbar at the top of the
screen (see the chapter 2.4.2.1, "Toolbar", on page 78). By default, this toolbar is not
displayed.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 94

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

To display the toolbar:

1. Press the DISPLAY key.

2. Under "Select Tool Bar State", select "On".

Alternatively:

1. Press the SETUP key.

2. Press the "Display Setup" softkey.

3. Press the "Tool Bar State On/Off" softkey.

The toolbar is displayed at the top of the screen.

2.4.4.6 Zooming into the Diagram

You can zoom into the diagram to visualize the measurement results in greater detail.
Using the touchscreen or a mouse pointer you can easily define the area to be
enlarged.

Zoom and the number of sweep points

Note that zooming is merely a visual tool, it does not change any measurement set-
tings, such as the number of sweep points!
You should increase the number of sweep points before zooming, as otherwise the
function has no real effect (see the "Sweep Points" softkey, described in the Operating
Manual and online help).

To zoom into the diagram

1. Display the toolbar as described in chapter 2.4.4.5, "Displaying the Toolbar",

on page 94.

2.
Click on the "Zoom On" icon in the toolbar.
A dotted rectangle is displayed in the diagram.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 95

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

3. Drag the lower right corner of the rectangle (either via touchscreen or a mouse
pointer) to define the area in the diagram to be enlarged.

4. Repeat these steps, if necessary, to enlarge the diagram further.

Scrolling in the zoomed display

You can scroll the diagram area to display the entire diagram using the scrollbars at
the right and at the bottom of the diagram.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 96

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

To return to selection mode in the diagram

While you are in zoom mode, touching the screen changes the zoom area. In order to
select or move a trace or marker, you must switch back to selection mode:

► Click on the "Selection mode" icon in the toolbar.

To return to original display

► Click on the "Zoom Off" icon in the toolbar.

A dotted rectangle is displayed in the diagram.

Remote commands:

1. Activate the zoom mode:

DISP:ZOOM ON

2. Define the zoom area:

DISP:ZOOM:AREA 5,30,20,100

3. Hide the overview window:

DISP:ZOOM:OVER OFF

2.4.4.7 Adding a Title to the Diagram Header

You can add an introductory title to the trace information in the diagram header.

1. Press the SETUP key.

2. Press the "Display Setup" softkey.

3. Press the "Screen Title On/Off" softkey.

An edit dialog box is displayed.

4. Enter the title and press "ENTER".

The title is displayed at the beginning of the diagram header.

2.4.4.8 Removing the Diagram Footer

Some additional diagram-specific information is displayed in the diagram footer (see

chapter 2.4.1.4, "Diagram-specific and Trace Information", on page 74). This footer can
be removed from display if necessary.

1. Press the SETUP key.

2. Press the "Display Setup" softkey.

3. Press the "Annotation On/Off" softkey.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 97

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Operations

The footer is displayed beneath the diagram or removed from display.

2.4.4.9 Selecting a Theme

You can select a theme for the screen display. The theme defines the colors used for
keys and screen elements, for example. The default theme is "BlueOcean".

Selecting a theme

1. Press the SETUP key.

2. Press the "Display Setup" softkey.

3. Press the "More" softkey.

4. Press the "Theme Selection" softkey. A list of available themes is displayed.

5. Select the desired theme from the list.

The screen display changes according to the selected theme.

SCPI command:
DISPlay:THEMe:SELect

2.4.4.10 Displaying and Setting the Date and Time

You can switch the date and time display in the diagram footer on or off. By default, it
is displayed. You can also switch between German and US format.

Switching the date and time display off

1. Press the SETUP key.

2. Press the "Display Setup" softkey.

3. Press the "Time+Date" softkey to "Off".

Changing the format

1. Press the SETUP key.

2. Press the "Display Setup" softkey.

3. Press the "Time+Date Format" softkey until the required format is selected.

Setting the date and time

To set the date and time, click on the date and time display in the diagram footer. The
standard Windows "Date and Time Properties" dialog is displayed and you can set the
correct date and time.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 98

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

2.4.4.11 Changing the Display Update Rate

When performance is poor due to slow data transfer (for example during remote con-
trol), it may be helpful to decrease the frequency with which the screen display is upda-
ted.

To descrease the display update rate

1. Press the DISPLAY key.
The "Display Settings" dialog box is opened.

2. Under "Display Update Rate", select "Slow".

The display is updated less frequently, and performance for measurements should
improve. When data transfer is no longer a problem, you can set the update rate
back to "Fast" in the same way.

2.5 Basic Measurement Examples

The following measurement examples are intended as an introduction to operating the
R&S ESR. The User Manual contains additional and more advanced examples. Refer
to chapter "Advanced Measurement Examples" to find the following topics:
● High-Sensitivity Harmonics Measurements
● Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth
● Intermodulation Measurements
● Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise
● Measuring Noise Power Density
● Measurement of Noise Power within a Transmission Channel
● Measuring Phase Noise
● Measuring Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power
For a more detailed description of the basic operating steps, e.g. selecting menus and
setting parameters, refer to chapter 2.4, "Basic Operations", on page 70.

2.5.1 Measuring a Sinusoidal Signal

One of the most common measurement tasks that can be handled by using a signal
analyzer is determining the level and frequency of a signal. When measuring an
unknown signal, you can usually start with the presettings.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 99

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

High input values

If levels higher than +30 dBm (=1 W) are expected or are possible, a power attenuator
must be inserted before the RF input of the analyzer. If this is not done, signal levels
exceeding 30 dBm can damage the RF attenuator or the input mixer. The total power
of all occuring signals must be taken into account.

Test setup
● Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of R&S ESR.
Table 2-4: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMU)

Frequency 128 MHz

Level -30 dBm

2.5.1.1 Measuring the Level and Frequency Using Markers

The level and frequency of a sinusoidal signal can be measured easily by using the
marker function. The R&S ESR always displays its amplitude and frequency at the
marker position. The frequency measurement uncertainty is determined by the fre-
quency reference of the R&S ESR, the resolution of the marker frequency display and
the number of sweep points.

1. Reset the instrument by pressing the PRESET key.

2. Select "Spectrum" mode.

3. Connect the signal to be measured to the RF INPUT analyzer input on the instru-
ment front panel.

4. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz.

a) Press the FREQ key.
The dialog box for the center frequency is displayed.
b) In the dialog box, enter 128 using the numeric keypad and confirm the entry
with the MHz key.

5. Reduce the frequency span to 1 MHz.

a) Press the SPAN key.
b) In the dialog box, enter 1 using the numeric keypad and confirm the entry by
pressing the MHZ key.
Note: Coupled settings. When the frequency span is defined, the resolution band-
width, the video bandwidth and the sweep time are automatically adjusted,
because these functions are defined as coupled functions in the presettings.
6. Measure the level and frequency using the marker by pressing the MKR key.
The marker is activated and automatically set on the maximum of the trace.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 100

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

The level and frequency values measured by the marker are displayed in the
marker field at the top edge of the screen. They can be taken as the measurement
result.

M1[1] -30.00 dBm

128.00000 MHz

The field header indicates the number of the marker (Marker 1) and the trace on
which the marker is located ([1] = Trace 1).
Note: Performing a peak search. When a marker is initially activated, it automati-
cally performs the peak search function (as shown in the example).
If a marker was already active, you have to press the PEAK SEARCH key on the
front panel or the "Peak" softkey in the MKR > menu in order to set the currently
active marker to the maximum of the displayed signal.

Increasing the Frequency Resolution

The frequency resolution of the marker is predefined by the pixel resolution of the
trace. A trace uses 691 pixels, i.e. if the frequency span is 1 MHz, each pixel corre-
sponds to a span of approx. 1.4 kHz. This corresponds to a maximum uncertainty of +/-
0.7 kHz.
You can increase the pixel resolution of the trace by reducing the frequency span.

Reducing the frequency span to 10 kHz

1. Press the SPAN key.

2. Using the numeric keypad, enter 10 in the dialog box and confirm the entry with the
KHZ key.

The generator signal is measured using a span of 10 kHz. The pixel resolution of the
trace is now approx. 14 Hz (10 kHz span / 691 pixels) , i.e. the precision of the marker
frequency display increases to approx. ±7 Hz.

Setting the Reference Level

With signal analyzers, the reference level is the level at the upper limit of the diagram.
To achieve the widest dynamic range possible for a spectrum measurement, use the
entire level span of the signal analyzer. In other words, the highest level that occurs in
the signal should be located at the top edge of the diagram (=reference level) or imme-
diately below it.

Low Reference Levels

If the selected reference level is lower than the highest signal that occurs in the spec-
trum, the signal path in the R&S ESR is overloaded.
In this case, the message "IFOVL" is displayed in the error message field.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 101

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

In the presettings, the value of the reference level is -10 dBm. If the input signal is
-30 dBm, the reference level can be reduced by 20 dB without causing the signal path
to be overloaded.

Reducing the reference level by 20 dB

1. Press the AMPT key.
The amplitude menu is displayed. The "Ref Level" softkey is highlighted in red to
indicate that it is activated for data entry. The dialog box for the reference level is
also opened.

2. Using the numeric keypad, enter 30 and confirm the entry with the - DBM key.
The reference level is set to -30 dBm. The maximum of the trace is near the maxi-
mum of the measurement diagram. However, the increase in the displayed noise is
not substantial. Thus, the distance between the signal maximum and the noise dis-
play (=dynamic range) has increased.

Setting the marker level equal to the reference level

The marker can also be used to shift the maximum value of the trace directly to the top
edge of the diagram. If the marker is located at the maximum level of the trace (as in
this example), the reference level can be moved to the marker level as follows:
1. Press the MKR key.

2. Press the "Ref Lvl = Mkr Lvl" softkey.

The reference level is set equal to the measured level where the marker is located.
Thus, setting the reference level is reduced to two keystrokes.

2.5.1.2 Measuring the Signal Frequency Using the Frequency Counter

The built-in frequency counter allows you to measure the frequency more accurately
than measuring it with the marker. The frequency sweep is stopped at the marker, and
the R&S ESR measures the frequency of the signal at the marker position.
In the following example, the frequency of the generator at 128 MHz is shown by using
the marker.

Prerequisite
In this example, a precise frequency measurement is to be performed. Therefore, con-
nect the signal generator's "Ref OUT" connector to the analyzer's "Ref IN" connector.

1. Set the signal analyzer to the default state by pressing the PRESET key.
The R&S ESR is set to its default state.

2. Select "Spectrum" mode.

3. Set the center frequency and the span.

a) Press the FREQ key and enter 128 MHz.
The center frequency of the R&S ESR is set to 128 MHz.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 102

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

b) Press the SPAN key and enter 1 MHz.

The frequency span of the R&S ESR is set to 1 MHz.

4. In the "Setup" menu, select "Reference Ext".

5. Activate the marker by pressing the MKR key.

The marker is activated and set to the signal maximum. The level and the fre-
quency of the marker are displayed in the marker field (diagram header or marker
table).

6. Activate the frequency counter by pressing the "Sig Count On/Off" softkey in the
"MKR FUNC" menu.
The result of frequency counting is displayed in the selected resolution in the
marker field.

Fig. 2-8: Measurement of the frequency with the frequency counter

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 103

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

Prerequisites for using the internal frequency counter

In order to obtain a correct result when measuring the frequency with the internal fre-
quency counter, an RF sinusoidal signal or a spectral line must be available. The
marker must be located more than 25 dB above the noise level to ensure that the
specified measurement accuracy is adhered to.

2.5.2 Measuring Harmonics of Sinusoidal Signals

Measuring the harmonics of a signal is a very common task that can be performed
optimally by using a Signal and Spectrum Analyzer.
In the following example, the generator signal with 128 MHz and -20 dBm is used
again.

Measuring the Suppression of the First and Second Harmonic of an Input Signal
1. Set the signal analyzer to the default state by pressing the PRESET key.
The R&S ESR is in the default state.

2. Select "Spectrum" mode.

3. Set the start frequency to 100 MHz and the stop frequency to 400 MHz.
a) Press the FREQ key.
b) Press the "Start" softkey and enter 100 MHz.
c) Press the "Stop" softkey and enter 400 MHz.
The R&S ESR displays the fundamental and the first and second harmonics of
the input signal.

4. To average (smooth) the noise, reduce the video bandwidth.

a) Press the BW key.
b) Press the "Video BW Manual" softkey and enter 100 kHz.

5. Set the attenuation to 0 dB.

a) Press the AMPT key.
b) Press the "RF Atten Manual" softkey.
c) Enter 0 dB in the edit dialog box.

6. Activate the marker by pressing the MKR key.

"Marker 1" is activated and positioned to the signal maximum (fundamental at 128
MHz). The level and frequency of the marker is displayed in the marker field.

7. Activate the delta marker and measure the harmonic suppression.

a) In the "MKR" menu, press the "Marker 2" softkey.
"Marker 2" is activated as a delta marker ("D2 [1]"). It is automatically set on
the largest harmonic of the signal. The frequency offset and level offset from
marker 1 are displayed in the channel information bar.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 104

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

b) In the "MKR" menu, press the "Marker 3" softkey.

"Marker 3" is activated as a delta marker ("D3 [1]"). It is automatically set on
the next largest harmonic of the signal. The frequency offset and level offset
from marker 1 on the fundamental are displayed in the channel information bar
(see figure 2-9).

Fig. 2-9: Measuring the harmonic suppression of the internal reference generator.

Delta markers D2 [1] and D3 [1] show the offset of the first and second harmonics from
the fundamental.

Reducing Noise
The signal analyzer offers three methods to differentiate the harmonics of a signal from
the noise effectively:
● Reducing the video bandwidth
● Averaging the trace
● Reducing the resolution bandwidth
Reducing the video bandwidth and averaging the traces cause the noise from the ana-
lyzer or the DUT to be reduced, depending on which component is larger. Both averag-
ing methods reduce the measurement uncertainty, particularly in the case of small sig-
nal-to-noise ratios, because the measurement signal is also separated from the noise.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 105

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

Reducing the noise by reducing the video bandwidth

1. Press the BW key.

2. Press the "Video BW Manual" softkey.

3. Reduce the video bandwidth to 1 kHz (for example), by entering 1 kHz.

This smoothes the noise significantly, and the sweep time is increased to 200 ms.
In other words, the measurement will take significantly more time. The video band-
width that is displayed is marked with a bullet to indicate that it is no longer coupled
to the resolution bandwidth (see figure 2-10).

Fig. 2-10: Suppression of noise during harmonics measurement by reducing video bandwidth

4. Recouple the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth.

a) Press the BW key.
b) Press the "Video BW Auto" softkey.

Reducing the noise by averaging the trace

1. Press the TRACE key.

2. Press the "Trace Wizard" softkey.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 106

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

3. For "Trace 1", press the button in the "Trace Mode" column and select "Average"
from the list.
The noise component of the trace is smoothed by averaging 10 successive traces.

4. Switch off trace averaging by pressing the button in the "Trace Mode" column and
selecting "Clear Write" from the list.

Reducing the noise by reducing the measurement bandwidth

The noise is reduced in proportion to the bandwidth by reducing the resolution band-
width, i.e. reducing the resolution bandwidth by a factor of 10 also reduces the noise by
a factor of 10 (which corresponds to 10 dB). The amplitude of sinusoidal signals is not
affected by reducing the resolution bandwidth.
1. Set the resolution bandwidth to 10 kHz.
a) Press the BW key.
b) Press the "Res BW Manual" softkey and enter 10 kHz.
The noise decreases by approx. 25 dB compared to the previous setting. Since
the video bandwidth is coupled to the resolution bandwidth, it is reduced to 30
kHz in proportion to the resolution bandwidth. This causes the sweep time to
increase to 3.0 seconds.

2. Reset the resolution bandwidth (couple it to the span) by pressing the "Res BW
Auto" softkey in the "BW" menu.

2.5.3 Measuring Signal Spectra with Multiple Signals

2.5.3.1 Separating Signals by Selecting the Resolution Bandwidth

A basic feature of a Signal and Spectrum Analyzer is the ability to separate the spec-
tral components of a mixture of signals. The resolution at which the individual compo-
nents can be separated is determined by the resolution bandwidth. Selecting a resolu-
tion bandwidth that is too large may make it impossible to distinguish between spectral
components, i.e. they are displayed as a single component.
An RF sinusoidal signal is displayed using the passband characteristic of the defined
resolution filter (RBW). Its specified bandwidth is the 3 dB bandwidth of the filter.
Two signals with the same amplitude can be resolved if the resolution bandwidth is
smaller than or equal to the frequency spacing of the signal. If the resolution bandwidth
is equal to the frequency spacing, the spectrum display shows a level drop of 3 dB pre-
cisely in the center of the two signals. Decreasing the resolution bandwidth makes the
level drop larger, which thus makes the individual signals clearer.
Higher spectral resolution at a narrower bandwidth is accomplished through longer
sweep times at the same span. Reducing the resolution bandwidth by a factor of 3
increases the sweep time by a factor of 9.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 107

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

Example:
Separating Two Signals

The two signals have a level of -30 dBm each at a frequency spacing of 30 kHz

Table 2-5: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMU)

Level Frequency

Signal generator 1 -30 dBm 128,00 MHz

Signal generator 2 -30 dBm 128,03 MHz

1. Set the signal analyzer to the default state by pressing the PRESET key.
The R&S ESR is set to its default state.

2. Select "Spectrum" mode.

3. Set the center frequency to 128.015 MHz and the frequency span to 300 kHz.
a) Press the FREQ key and enter 128.015 MHz.
b) Press the SPAN key and enter 300 kHz.

4. Set the resolution bandwidth to 30 kHz and the video bandwidth to 1 kHz.
a) Press the BW key
b) Press the "Res BW Manual" softkey and enter 30 kHz.
c) Press the "Video BW Manual" softkey and enter 1 kHz.
Note: Larger video bandwidths. The video bandwidth is set to 1 kHz in order to
make the level drop in the center of the two signals clearly visible. At larger video
bandwidths, the video voltage that results from envelope detection is not suffi-
ciently suppressed. This produces additional voltages, which are visible in the
trace, in the transition area between the two signals.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 108

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

Fig. 2-11: Measurement of two equally-leveled RF sinusoidal signals with the resolution band-
width which corresponds to the frequency spacing of the signals

Matching generator and R&S ESR frequencies

The level drop is located exactly in the center of the screen only if the generator
frequencies match the frequency display of the R&S ESR exactly. To achieve
exact matching, the frequencies of the generators and the R&S ESR must be
synchronized.
5. Set the resolution bandwidth to 100 kHz. To do so, in the bandwidth menu, press
the "Res BW Manual" softkey and enter 100 kHz.
It is no longer possible to clearly distinguish the two generator signals.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 109

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

Fig. 2-12: Measurement of two equally-leveled RF sinusoidal signals with a resolution bandwidth
which is larger than their frequency spacing

Note: Reducing the resolution bandwidth. The resolution bandwidth (RBW) can be
reduced again by turning the rotary knob counterclockwise, thus yielding a higher
frequency resolution.
6. Set the resolution bandwidth to 1 kHz. To do so, in the bandwidth menu, press the
"Res BW Manual" softkey and enter 1 kHz.
The two generator signals are shown with high resolution. However, the sweep
time becomes longer. At smaller bandwidths, the noise display decreases simulta-
neously (10 dB decrease in noise floor for a decrease in bandwidth by a factor of
10).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 110

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

Fig. 2-13: Measurement of two equally-leveled RF sinusoidal signals with a resolution bandwidth
(1 kHz) which is significantly smaller than their frequency spacing

2.5.3.2 Measuring the Modulation Depth of an AM-Modulated Carrier (Span > 0)

In the frequency range display, the AM side bands can be resolved with a narrow
bandwidth and measured separately. The modulation depth of a carrier modulated with
a sinusoidal signal can then be measured. Since the dynamic range of a signal ana-
lyzer is very large, extremely small modulation depths can also be measured precisely.
For this purpose, the R&S ESR provides measurement routines that output the modu-
lation depth numerically in % directly.
Test setup

Table 2-6: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMU)

Frequency 128 MHz

Level -30 dBm

Modulation 50 % AM, 10 kHz AF

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 111

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

1. Set the signal analyzer to the default state by pressing the PRESET key.
The R&S ESR is set to its default state.

2. Select "Spectrum" mode.

3. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz and span to 50 kHz.

a) Press the FREQ key and enter 128 MHz.
b) Press the SPAN key and enter 50 kHz.

4. Activate the marker function for measuring the AM modulation depth.

a) Press the MEAS key.
b) Press the "More" key.
c) Press the "AM Mod Depth" softkey.
The R&S ESR automatically sets a marker to the carrier signal in the center of
the diagram and one delta marker each to the upper and lower AM sidebands.
The R&S ESR calculates the AM modulation depth from the level differences of
the delta markers to the main marker and outputs the numeric value in the
marker field.

Fig. 2-14: Measurement of the AM modulation depth

The modulation depth is displayed as "MDepth". The frequency of the AF signal can be
obtained from the frequency display of the delta marker.

2.5.3.3 Measuring AM-Modulated Signals

The signal analyzer rectifies the RF input signal and displays it as a magnitude spec-
trum. The rectification also demodulates AM-modulated signals. The AF voltage can be
displayed in zero span if the modulation sidebands fall within the resolution bandwidth.
Displaying the AF of an AM-modulated signal (Zero Span)
Test setup

Table 2-7: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMU)

Frequency 128 MHz

Level -30 dBm

Modulation 50 % AM, 1 kHz AF

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 112

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

1. Set the signal analyzer to the default state by pressing the PRESET key.
The R&S ESR is set to its default state.

2. Select "Spectrum" mode.

3. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz and the span to 0 Hz.
a) Press the FREQ key and enter 128 MHz.
b) Press the SPAN key and enter 0 Hz or press the "Zero Span" softkey.

4. Set the sweep time to 2.5 ms.

a) Press the SWEEP key.
b) Press the "Sweeptime Manual" softkey.
c) Enter 2.5 ms.

5. Set the reference level to +6 dBm and the display range to linear.
a) Press the AMPT key and enter 6 dBm.
b) Press the "Range" softkey.
c) Press the "Range Linear %" softkey.

6. Set triggering in response to the AF signal by using the video trigger to produce a
static image.
a) Press the TRIG key.
b) Press the "Trg/Gate Source" softkey and select "Video" using the arrow keys.
c) Press the "Trg/Gate Level" softkey and enter 50%.
The trigger level is displayed as a horizontal line across the entire measure-
ment diagram. The R&S ESR displays the 1 kHz AF signal as a static image in
zero span. Use a headset to listen to the AF.

7. Activate the internal AM demodulator.

a) Press the MKR FUNC key.
b) Press the "Marker Demod" softkey.
The R&S ESR automatically switches on the AM audio demodulator. A 1 kHz
tone can be heard over headset. If necessary, use the volume control knob for
AF OUTPUT on the front panel to turn up the volume.

2.5.4 Measurements in Zero Span

For radio transmission systems that use the TDMA method (e.g. GSM or IS136), trans-
mission quality is determined not only by spectral characteristics but also by character-
istics in zero span. A timeslot is assigned to each user since several users share the
same frequency. Smooth operation is ensured only if all users adhere exactly to their
assigned timeslots.
Both the power during the send phase as well as the timing and duration of the TDMA
burst, and rise and fall times of the burst, are important.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 113

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

2.5.4.1 Measuring the Power Characteristic of Burst Signals

To measure power in zero span, the R&S ESR offers easy-to-use functions that mea-
sure the power over a predefined time.

Measuring the Power of a GSM Burst During the Activation Phase

Test setup

Table 2-8: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMU)

Frequency 890 MHz

Level 0 dBm

Modulation GSM, one timeslot activated

1. Set the signal analyzer to the default state by pressing the PRESET key.
The R&S ESR is set to its default state.

2. Select "Spectrum" mode.

3. Set the center frequency to 890 MHz, the span to 0 Hz and the resolution band-
width to 1 MHz.
a) Press the FREQ key and enter 890 MHz.
b) Press the SPAN key and enter 0 Hz, or press the "Zero Span" softkey.

4. Set the reference level of the R&S ESR to 10 dBm (= level of the signal generator
+10 dB) and set the attenuation to 20 dB.
a) Press the AMPT key.
b) Enter 10 dBm.
c) Press the "Rf Atten Manual" softkey.
d) Enter 20 dB.

5. Set the sweep time to 1 ms.

a) Press the SWEEP key.
b) Press the "Sweeptime Manual" softkey and enter 1 ms.
The R&S ESR shows the GSM burst continuously across the display.

6. By using the video trigger, set triggering on the rising edge of the burst.
a) Press the TRIG key.
b) Press the "Trg/Gate Source" softkey and select "Video" using the arrow keys.
c) Press the "Trg/Gate Level" softkey and enter 70%.
The R&S ESR shows a static image with the GSM burst at the start of the
trace. The trigger level is displayed as a horizontal line labeled with the abso-
lute level for the trigger threshold in the measurement diagram.

7. Configure power measurement in zero span.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 114

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

a) Press the MEAS key.

b) Press the "Time Domain Power" softkey to open the submenu.
c) Switch the "Limits" softkey to "On."
d) Press the "Left Limit" softkey.
e) By turning the rotary knob clockwise, move the vertical line to the start of the
burst.
f) Press the "Right Limit" softkey.
g) By turning the rotary knob counterclockwise, set the second vertical line to the
end of the burst.

The R&S ESR displays the average (mean) power during the activation phase of the
burst.

Fig. 2-15: Measurement of the average power during the burst of a GSM signal

Measuring the Edges of a GSM Burst with High Time Resolution

Because of the high time resolution of the R&S ESR at the 0 Hz display range, the
edges of TDMA bursts can be measured precisely. The edges can be shifted to the
screen area by using the trigger offset.
Test setup

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 115

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

Table 2-9: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMU)

Frequency 890 MHz

Level 0 dBm

Modulation GSM, one timeslot activated

The measurement is based on the setting in the example above for measuring the
power of the GSM during the activation phase.
1. Switch off the power measurement.
a) Press the MEAS key.
b) Press the "All Functions Off" softkey.

2. Increase the time resolution to 100 µs.

a) Press the SWEEP key.
b) Press the "Sweeptime Manual" softkey and enter 100 µs.

3. Using the trigger softkey, shift the rising edge of the GSM burst to the center of the
screen.
a) Press the TRIG key.
b) Press the "Trigger Offset" softkey.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 116

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

c) By turning the rotary knob counterclockwise, move the trigger offset until the
burst edge can be seen in the center of the screen, or enter -50 µs.
The R&S ESR displays the rising edge of the GSM burst.

Fig. 2-16: Rising edge of the GSM burst displayed with high time resolution

4. Using the trigger offset, move the falling edge of the burst to the center of the
screen. To do so, switch the "Trg/Gate Polarity" softkey to "Neg".
The R&S ESR displays the falling edge of the GSM burst.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 117

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

Fig. 2-17: Falling edge of the GSM burst displayed with high time resolution

2.5.4.2 Measuring the Signal-to-Noise Ratio of Burst Signals

When TDMA transmission methods are used, the signal-to-noise ratio or the deactiva-
tion dynamic range can be measured by comparing the power values during the activa-
tion phase and the deactivation phase of the transmission burst. For this purpose, the
R&S ESR provides the function for measuring absolute and relative power in zero
span. In the following example, the measurement is performed using a GSM burst.
Signal-to-Noise Ratio of a GSM Signal
Test setup

Table 2-10: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMU)

Frequency 890 MHz

Level 0 dBm

Modulation GSM, one time slot is switched on

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 118

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

1. Set the signal analyzer to the default state by pressing the PRESET key.
The R&S ESR is set to its default state.

2. Select "Spectrum" mode.

3. Set the center frequency to 890 MHz, the span to 0 Hz and the resolution band-
width to 1 MHz.
a) Press the FREQ key and enter 890 MHz.
b) Press the SPAN key and enter 0 Hz or press the "Zero Span" softkey.
c) Press the BW key.
d) Press the "Res BW Manual" softkey and enter 1 MHz.

4. Set the reference level of the R&S ESR to 0 dBm (= level of the signal generator)
by pressing the AMPT key and entering 0 dBm.

5. Set the sweep time to 2 ms.

a) Press the SWEEP key.
b) Press the "Sweeptime Manual" softkey and enter 2 ms.
The R&S ESR shows the GSM burst continuously across the display.

6. Use the trigger source "Video" and the trigger polarity "Pos" to trigger on the rising
edge of the burst and shift the start of burst to the center of the screen.
a) Press the TRIG key.
b) Press the "Trg/Gate Source" softkey and select "Video" using the arrow keys.
c) Press the "Trg/Gate Level" softkey and enter 70%.
The R&S ESR shows a static image with the GSM burst at the start of the
trace.
d) Press the "Trigger Offset" softkey and enter -1 ms.
The R&S ESR shows the GSM burst in the right half of the measurement dia-
gram.

7. Configure the power measurement in zero span.

a) Press the MEAS key.
b) Press the "Time Domain Power" softkey to open the submenu.
c) Switch the "Limits" softkey to "On."
d) Press the "Left Limit" softkey.
e) Using the rotary knob, move the vertical line to the start of the burst.
f) Press the "Right Limit" softkey.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 119

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

g) Using the rotary knob, move the second vertical line to the end of the burst.
The R&S ESR displays the power during the activation phase of the burst.

Fig. 2-18: Power measurement during the activation phase of the burst

8. Measure the power during the deactivation phase of the burst.

a) Press the TRIG key.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 120

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

b) Switch the "Trg/Gate Polarity" softkey to "Neg."

The R&S ESR initiates triggering in response to the falling edge of the burst.
This shifts the burst to the left-hand half of the measurement diagram. The
power is measured in the deactivation phase. The start of the burst is shifted to
the center of the screen and the power during the deactivation phase is mea-
sured.

Fig. 2-19: Measurement of the signal-to-noise ratio of a GSM burst signal in zero span.

2.5.4.3 Measuring FM-Modulated Signals

Since signal analyzers can display only the magnitude of the measurement signal by
using the envelope detector, the modulation of FM-modulated signals cannot be mea-
sured directly as in the case of AM-modulated signals. The voltage at the output of the
envelope detector remains constant for FM-modulated signals as long as the fre-
quency deviation of the signal is located within the flat part of the passband character-
istic of the employed resolution filter. Amplitude variation occurs only if the instantane-
ous frequency extends into a falling edge of the filter curve. This behavior can be used
to demodulate FM-modulated signals. The center frequency of the analyzer is set in
such a manner that the nominal frequency of the measurement signal is located on a
filter edge (below or above the center frequency). The resolution bandwidth and the
frequency offset must be selected in such a manner that the instantaneous frequency
is located in the linear part of the filter edge. As a result, the frequency variation of the
FM-modulated signal is transformed into an amplitude variation that can be displayed
on screen in zero span.
Displaying the AF of an FM-Modulated Carrier

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 121

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

Test setup

Table 2-11: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMU)

Frequency 128 MHz

Level -20 dBm

Modulation FM 0 kHz deviation (i.e. FM modulation is deactiva-

ted), 1 kHz AF

1. Set the signal analyzer to the default state by pressing the PRESET key.
The R&S ESR is set to its default state.

2. Select "Spectrum" mode.

3. Set the center frequency to 127.50 MHz and the span to 300 kHz.
a) Press the FREQ key and enter 127.50 MHz.
b) Press the SPAN key and enter 300 kHz.

4. Set the resolution bandwidth to 300 kHz.

a) Press the BW key.
b) Press the "Res BW Manual" softkey and enter 300 kHz.
c) Press the "Video BW Manual" softkey and enter 30 kHz.

5. Set the display range to 20 dB and shift the filter trace to the center of the screen.
a) Press the AMPT key.
b) Press the "Range" softkey
c) Press the "Range Log Manual" softkey and enter 20 dB.
d) Press the "Up↑" softkey.
e) Press the "More" softkey.
f) Switch the "Grid" softkey to "Rel".
g) Press the "Up↑" softkey.
h) Press the "Ref Level" softkey.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 122

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

i) Using the rotary knob, set the reference level such that the filter edge at the
center frequency intersects the -10 dB level line.
The filter edge of the 300 kHz filter is displayed. This corresponds to the
demodulator characteristic for FM signals with a steepness of approx. 18
dB/140 kHz. This can be verified using the marker and delta marker.

Fig. 2-20: Display of the filter edge of the 300 kHz filter as an FM discriminator characteristic

6. Set the FM deviation to 50 kHz on the signal generator.

7. Set the span to 0 Hz on the R&S ESR.

a) Press the SPAN key.
b) Press the "Zero Span" softkey.
The demodulated FM signal is displayed. The signal crosses the screen contin-
uously.

8. Establish a stable display using video triggering.

a) Press the TRIG key.
b) Press the "Trg/Gate Source" softkey and select "Video" using the arrow keys.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 123

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

c) Press the "Trg/Gate Level" softkey and enter 50%.

A static image for the FM AF signal is produced.
Result: (-10 ( 5) dB; this yields a deviation of 100 kHz when the steepness of
the demodulator characteristic is 5 dB/100 kHz.

Fig. 2-21: Demodulated FM signal

9. Determine the deviation.

a) Press the MKR key.
Marker 1 is activated and placed on the peak of the curve.
b) Press the "Marker 2" softkey.
c) Press the MKR key.
d) Press the "More" softkey.
e) Press the "Min" softkey.
Marker 2 (delta marker) is placed on the minimum of the curve. The level differ-
ence is 13.3 dB, which corresponds to the peak-to-peak deviation. With the fil-
ter slope of 18 dB/140 kHz, the deviation can be calculated as follows:

2.5.5 Storing and Loading Instrument Settings

The R&S ESR can store complete instrument settings together with instrument config-
urations and measurement data in a settings file. The data is stored on the built-in hard

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 124

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

disk or - if selected - on a USB device (e.g. memory stick) or on a network drive. The
hard disk has the drive letter C:.
In the default state, the current settings are stored. This includes the settings of the
measurement functions, the activated limit lines and the active transducer factor.

2.5.5.1 Storing an Instrument Configuration (without Traces)

1. Press the SAVE/RCL key.

2. Press the "Save" softkey.

The dialog box for instrument configurations is displayed. The File Name field is
in edit mode and contains a suggestion for a new name.

3. To change the suggested name, enter a name for the settings file to be stored.
The name may contain letters and digits. For details on alphanumeric entries see
chapter 2.4.3.2, "Entering Alphanumeric Parameters", on page 86.

4. To store the file in a directory different to the default directory, select the required
path in the Files area.
If the path is not changed, the default path for the instrument configurations
(C:\R_S\Instr\user) is used.
Note: The selected directory is automatically used for any further save and recall
operations.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 125

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Basic Measurement Examples

5. Press the "Save File" softkey.

The settings file is stored and the dialog box is closed.

2.5.5.2 Storing Traces

Before you can store traces, you must first select the corresponding item entry. To do
so, proceed as follows:
1. Press the SAVE/RCL key.

2. Press the "Save" softkey.

3. To change the suggested name, enter a file name.

4. Select the "All Traces" option.

5. Press the "SAVE" button.

2.5.5.3 Loading an Instrument Configuration (with Traces)

1. Press the SAVE/RCL key.

2. Press the "Recall" softkey.

3. If necessary, select the path under which the file to be loaded is stored.

4. Define the settings file to be loaded. One of the following ways is possible:
● Click in the File Name field and enter the file name via the keyboard or key-
pad.
● Select the file from the selection list using the touchscreen or mouse.
Alternatively:
a) Press the "Select File" softkey.
The focus is set on the files list.
b) Using the rotary knob or arrow keys, focus the settings file to be loaded and
confirm by pressing the rotary knob or the ENTER key.

5. To load traces, select the "All Traces" option.

Note: The "All Traces" option is only available if the selected file contains traces.
6. Press the "Recall" button in the dialog box, or the "Recall File" softkey.
The settings file is loaded. During loading, the R&S ESR detects which items the
selected settings file contains and, if applicable, ignores any items that were
selected but are not available.

2.5.5.4 Configuring Automatic Loading

If the R&S ESR is switched on in the factory default state, it loads the instrument set-
tings that it had when switched off (provided that it was switched off using the ON /

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 126

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Brief Introduction to Remote Control

OFF key on the front panel; see chapter 2.2.1.7, "Switching the Instrument On and
Off", on page 41. If the instrument is preset, it loads the presettings.

You can alter these settings and define a settings file to be loaded. This requires per-
forming the following procedure. Be aware that the chosen settings file is loaded both
while booting and presetting.
1. Press the SAVE/RCL key.

2. Press the "Startup Recall" softkey.

3. Press the "Startup Recall (On/Off)" softkey to activate the recall function.

4. Press the "Select Dataset" softkey.

The "Startup Recall" dialog box is displayed.

5. If necessary, select the path under which the file to be loaded is stored.

6. Select the settings file to be loaded (DFL file).

7. Press the "Select" button in the dialog box.

2.6 Brief Introduction to Remote Control

The instrument can be remote-controlled via the network (LAN interface). For details
on configuring the LAN interface see chapter 2.2.6, "Setting Up a Network (LAN) Con-
nection", on page 57.
For details on setting the interface see chapter 2.2.8, "Configuring the GPIB Interface",
on page 67.
The following programming examples are structured hierarchically, i.e. the later exam-
ples are based on the preceding ones. This allows you to easily assemble a well-func-
tioning program by using the modules of the program examples. More complex exam-
ples are provided in the User Manual, chapter "Remote Control - Programming Exam-
ples"

2.6.1 Basic Steps in Remote Control Programming

The following examples explain how to program the instrument and can be used as a
basis for solving enhanced programming tasks.
Visual Basic was used as the programming language. However, the programs can be
implemented in other languages as well.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 127

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Brief Introduction to Remote Control

Using backslashes
In programming languages such as C, C++ or programs such as MATLAB or NI Inter-
active Control, a backslash starts an escape sequence (e.g. "\n" is used to start a new
line). In these programming languages and programs, two backslashes instead of one
must be used in remote commands, e.g. in "Storing Instrument Settings" on page 144
instead of MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,'C:\USER\DATA\TEST1'
use MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,'C:\\USER\\DATA\\TEST1'

2.6.1.1 Linking the Remote Control Library for Visual Basic

Programming notes:
● Outputting text using the print function
Using the print method, this example displays the value of the variable MyVar in
the "Immediate" window of the Visual Basic development environment. Note that
the print method only applies to objects that can display text.
Debug.Print MyVar
● Accessing the functions of the VISA32.DLL
To enable users to create Visual Basic control applications, the VISA32.BAS file
must be added to a project so that functions of the VISA32.DLL can be called. In
addition, the VPPTYPE.BAS file must be added to the project. This file contains
constants and definitions for error handling, timeout values, etc.

The modules visa32.bas and vpptype.bas can be found under

<VXIpnpPath>\WinNT\include (typically C:\VXIpnp\WinNt\include).
As an alternative, a reference to the VISA32.DLL can be added to the project.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 128

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Brief Introduction to Remote Control

● Creating a response buffer

Since the DLL returns zero-terminated strings in responses, a string of sufficient
length must be created before the functions InstrRead() and ilrd() are called,
because Visual Basic inserts a length specification in front of the strings and this
specification is not updated by the DLL. The following two means of creating the
length specification for a string are provided:
Dim Rd as String * 100
Dim Rd as String
Rd = Space$(100)
● Creating Wrapper Procedures for Writing and Reading
Since the "VISA" functions require command and response strings and their corre-
sponding length in two separate parameters, the main program code is easier to
read and maintain if the read and write functions are encapsulated. Here, the pro-
cedure InstrWrite() encapsulates the function viWrite() and InstrRead()
encapsulates viRead(). In addition, these wrappers include status checking:
Public Sub InstrWrite(ByVal vi As Long, ByVal Cmd As String)
Dim status As Long
Dim retCount As Long
'Send command to instrument and check for status
status = viWrite(vi, Cmd, Len(Cmd), retCount)
'Check for errors - this will raise an error if status is not VI_SUCCESS
CALL CheckError(vi, status)
End Sub

Public Sub InstrRead(ByVal vi As Long, Response As String, _

ByVal count As Long, retCount As Long)
Dim status As Long
'Initialize response string
Response = Space(count)
'...and read
status = viRead(vi, Response, count, retCount)
'Check for errors - this will raise an error if status is not VI_SUCCESS
CALL CheckError(vi, status)

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 129

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Brief Introduction to Remote Control

'adjust string length

Response = Left(Response, retCount)
End Sub

The following function illustrates status/error checking. The procedure raises an excep-
tion when a VISA error occurs:
Public Sub CheckError(ByVal vi As Long, status As Long)
Dim ErrorMessage As String * 1024

'Initialize error message string

ErrorMessage = ""
If (status < 0) Then
'Query the error message from VISA
If (viStatusDesc(vi, status, ErrorMessage) = VI_SUCCESS) Then
Err.Description = ErrorMessage
End If
Err.Raise (status)
End If
End Sub

2.6.1.2 Initialization and Default State

At the start of each program, the global variables used by all subroutines must be cre-
ated. The remote control and the instrument settings will then be changed to a defined
default state. The two subroutines InitController and InitDevice are used for this.

Creating Global Variables

In Visual Basic, global variables are stored in modules (data extension .BAS). Thus, at
least one module (e.g. GLOBALS.BAS) must be created that contains the variables
used by all subroutines, e.g. the variables for device addresses used by the remote
control driver.
For all example programs shown below, the file must contain the following instructions:
Global analyzer As Long
Global defaultRM As Long

Initializing the Remote Control Session

REM ------------ Initializing the remote control session -------------------
Public SUB Initialize()
Dim status As Long
'CALL viOpenDefaultRM to get the resource manager handle
'Store this handle in defaultRM. The function viStatusDesc
'returns a text description of the status code returned by viOpenDefaultRM
status = viOpenDefaultRM(defaultRM)
status = viStatusDesc(defaultRM, status, Response)
'Open the connection to the device and store the handle
'Note: The timeout value in viOpen() applies only for opening the interface
'For setting the communication timeout, set the VI_ATTR_TMO_VALUE attribute

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 130

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Brief Introduction to Remote Control

'timeout values are in milliseconds

'This example assumes the instrument IP address 10.0.0.10
'If the network provides a name resolution mechanism, the hostname of
'the instrument can be used instead of the numeric IP address
'the resource string for GPIB would be "GPIB::20::INSTR''
status = viOpen(defaultRM, "TCPIP::10.0.0.10::INSTR'', 0, 1000, analyzer)
'status = viOpen(defaultRM, "TCPIP::<hostname>::INSTR'', 0, 1000, analyzer)
'status = viOpen(defaultRM, "GPIB::20::INSTR'', 0, 1000, analyzer)
'Set timeout value - here 5s
status = viSetAttribute(vi, VI_ATTR_TMO_VALUE, 5000)
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************

Initializing the Instrument

Set the remote control status registers and instrument settings to the default state.
REM ------------ Initializing the instrument -------------------------------
Public SUB InitDevice()
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "*CLS") 'Reset status register
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "*RST") 'Reset instrument
END SUB
REM*************************************************************************

Switching the Screen Display On and Off

In the default setting, all remote control commands are carried out with the screen dis-
play switched off in order to attain optimum measurement speed. During the develop-
ment phase of remote control programs, however, the screen display is required in
order to visually check both the programming of the settings and the measurement
results.
The following examples show functions with which the screen display can be switched
on or off during remote control operation.
REM ------------ Switching on the screen display ---------------------------
Public SUB DisplayOn()
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "SYST:DISP:UPD ON")
'Switch on screen display
END SUB
REM*************************************************************************
REM ------------ Switching off the screen display --------------------------
Public SUB DisplayOff()
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "SYST:DISP:UPD OFF")
'Switch off screen display
END SUB
REM*************************************************************************

Configuring the Power Save Function for the Display

During remote control operation, it is often unnecessary to display the measurement
results on screen. Although the command SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate OFF switches
off the display of the measurement results, thus significantly improving speed in remote

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 131

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Brief Introduction to Remote Control

control operation, the display itself and the background lighting in particular remain
switched on.
If you also want to switch off the display itself, you must use the power save function
by setting the response time in minutes prior to activation.

The display is reactivated immediately when you press a key on the instrument's front
panel.

Public SUB PowerSave()

CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff 1")
'Set response time to 1 minute
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "DISPlay:PSAVe ON")
'Switch on Power Save function

2.6.1.3 Sending Simple Instrument Setting Commands

This example shows how the center frequency, span and reference level of the instru-
ment are set.
REM -------- Instrument setting commands -----------------------------------
PUBLIC SUB SimpleSettings()
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "FREQUENCY:CENTER 128MHz")
'Center frequency 128 MHz
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "FREQUENCY:SPAN 10MHZ")
'Set span to 10 MHz
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "DISPLAY:TRACE:Y:RLEVEL -10dBm")
'Set reference level to -10dBm
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

2.6.1.4 Switching to Manual Operation

REM -------- Switching instrument to manual operation ----------------------

CALL viGpibControlREN(analyzer, VI_GPIB_REN_ADDRESS_GTL)
'Set instrument to Local state
REM ************************************************************************

2.6.1.5 Reading Out Instrument Settings

The settings made above can now be read out. To do so, the abbreviated commands
are used.
REM --------- Reading out instrument settings ------------------------------
PUBLIC SUB ReadSettings()
Dim retCount as Long
CFfrequency$ = SPACE$(20) 'Provide text variable (20 characters)
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "FREQ:CENT?")
'Request center frequency

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 132

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Brief Introduction to Remote Control

CALL InstrRead(analyzer, CFfrequency$, 20, retCount)

'Read value
CR&S FSVan$ = SPACE$(20) 'Provide text variable (20 characters)
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "FREQ:SPAN?")
'Request span
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, CR&S FSVan$, 20, retCount)
'Read value
RLlevel$ = SPACE$(20) 'Provide text variable (20 characters)
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV?")
'Request ref level setting
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, RLlevel$, 20, retCount)
'Read value
REM --------- Displaying values in the Immediate window --------------------
Debug.Print "Center frequency: "; CFfrequency$,
Debug.Print "Span: "; CR&S FSVan$,
Debug.Print "Reference level: "; RLlevel$,
END SUB
REM*************************************************************************

2.6.1.6 Marker Positioning and Readout

REM -------- Example of marker function -----------------------------------

PUBLIC SUB ReadMarker()
Dim retCount as Long
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "CALC:MARKER ON;MARKER:MAX")
'Activate marker 1 and search for peak
MKmark$ = SPACE$(30) 'Provide text variable (30 characters)
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "CALC:MARK:X?;Y?")
'Query frequency and level
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, MKmark$, 30, retCount)
'Read value
REM --------- Displaying values in the Immediate window -------------------
Debug.Print "Marker frequency/level "; MKmark$,
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

2.6.1.7 Command Synchronization

The synchronization methods used in the following example are described in the Oper-
ating Manual on CD, chapter "Remote Control - Basics", section "Command Sequence
and Command Synchronization".
REM --------- Commands for command synchronization ------------------------
PUBLIC SUB SweepSync()
Dim retCount as Long
Dim SRQWaitTimeout As Long
Dim eventType As Long
Dim eventVi As Long
REM The command INITiate[:IMMediate] starts a single sweep if the

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 133

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Brief Introduction to Remote Control

REM command INIT:CONT OFF has already been sent. The next command
REM must not be carried out until a full sweep has been completed.
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "INIT:CONT OFF")
REM --------- First method: Using *WAI ------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "ABOR;INIT:IMM; *WAI")
REM --------- Second method: Using *OPC? ----------------------------------
OpcOk$ = SPACE$(2) 'Provide space for *OPC? response
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "ABOR;INIT:IMM; *OPC?")
REM --------- In this case, the controller can use other instruments ------
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, OpcOk$, 2, retCount)
'Wait for "1" from *OPC?
REM --------- Third method: Using *OPC ------------------------------------
REM In order for the Service Request function to be used with a GPIB
REM driver from National Instruments, the setting "Disable
REM Auto Serial Poll" must be set to "yes" with IBCONF!
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "*SRE 32") 'Enable Service Request for ESR
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "*ESE 1") 'Set event enable bit for operation
'complete bit
CALL viEnableEvent(vi, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, VI_QUEUE, 0)
'Enable the event for service request
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "ABOR;INIT:IMM; *OPC")
'Start sweep with Synchronization to OPC
SRQWaitTimeout = 5000 'Allow 5s for sweep completion
'Now wait for the service request
CALL viWaitOnEvent(vi, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, SRQWaitTimeout, _
eventType, eventVi)
CALL viClose(eventVi) 'Close the context before continuing
CALL viDisableEvent(vi, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, VI_QUEUE)
'Disable subsequent events
REM Resume main program here.
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

Reading Output Buffers

REM --------- Subroutine for the individual STB bits -----------------------
Public SUB Outputqueue() 'Reading the output queue
Dim retCount as Long
result$ = SPACE$(100) 'Create space for response
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$, 100, retCount)
Debug.Print "Contents of Output Queue : "; result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

Reading Error Messages

REM --------- Subroutine for evaluating the error queue --------------------
Public SUB ErrorQueueHandler()
Dim retCount as Long
ERROR$ = SPACE$(100) Subroutine for evaluating the error queue
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "SYSTEM:ERROR?")

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 134

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Brief Introduction to Remote Control

CALL InstrRead(analyzer, ERROR$, 100, retCount)

Debug.Print "Error Description : "; ERROR$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

2.6.2 Detailed Programming Examples

In the following sections, typical programming examples for setting measurement

parameters and functions, general settings, printout and data management are provi-
ded.

2.6.2.1 Default Setting of the R&S ESR

The following settings provide typical examples of how to change the default setting of
the R&S ESR.
Note that only some of the settings are necessary depending on the application exam-
ple. In many cases, it is not necessary to set resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth
and sweep time since these parameters are automatically calculated in the default set-
ting when the span is changed. Likewise, the input attenuation is automatically calcula-
ted in the default setting as a function of the reference level. Last of all, the level detec-
tors are linked to the selected trace mode in the default setting.
The settings automatically calculated in the default setting are indicated with an aster-
isk (*) in the following program example.

Setting the Remote Control Status Registers

REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub SetupStatusReg()

'--------- IEEE 488.2 status register --------------------------------------

CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"*CLS") 'Reset status registers
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"*SRE 168") 'Enable Service Request for
'STAT:OPER-,STAT:QUES- and ESR-Register
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"*ESE 61") 'Set event enable bit for:
'operation complete 'command-, execution-,
'device dependent- and query error
'--------- SCPI status register --------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"STAT:OPER:ENAB 0")
'Disable OPERation Status reg
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"STAT:QUES:ENAB 0")
'Disable questionable Statusreg
End Sub
REM ************************************************************************

Default Settings for Measurements

REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub SetupInstrument()

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 135

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Brief Introduction to Remote Control

'--------- Default setting f the R&S FSV ---------------------------------

CALL SetupStatusReg 'Configure status registers
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"*RST") 'Reset instrument
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"SYST:DISP:UPD ON")
'ON: screen display on
'OFF: off (improved performance)
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT:CONT OFF")
'Single sweep mode
'--------- Frequency setting -----------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"FREQUENCY:CENTER 100MHz")
'Center frequency
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"FREQ:SPAN 1 MHz")
'Span
'--------- Level setting ---------------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV -20dBm")
'Reference level
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INP:ATT 10dB")
'Input attenuation (*)
'--------- Level scaling ---------------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC LOG")
'Log level axis
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SCAL 100dB")
'Level range
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SCAL:MODE ABS")
'Absolute scaling
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:UNIT:POW DBM")
'y meas. unit
'--------- Trace and detector setting --------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DISP:TRAC1:MODE AVER")
'Trace1 average
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"AVER:TYPE VID")
'Average mode video; "LIN" for linear
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"SWE:COUN 10")
'Sweep count
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DISP:TRAC2 OFF")
'Trace2 blank
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DISP:TRAC3 OFF")
'Trace3 blank
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DISP:TRAC4 OFF")
'Trace4 blank
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DISP:TRAC5 OFF")
'Trace5 blank
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DISP:TRAC6 OFF")
'Trace6 blank
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MATH:STAT OFF")
'Trace difference off
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DET1 RMS")
'Detector Trace1 (*)
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DET2:AUTO ON")

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 136

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Brief Introduction to Remote Control

'Detector Trace2 (*)

CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DET3:AUTO ON")
'Detector Trace3 (*)
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DET4:AUTO ON")
'Detector Trace4 (*)
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DET5:AUTO ON")
'Detector Trace5 (*)
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DET6:AUTO ON")
'Detector Trace6 (*)
'--------- Bandwidths and sweep time ---------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"BAND:RES 100KHz")
'Resolution bandwidth (*)
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"BAND:VID 1MHz")
'Video bandwidth (*)
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"SWE:TIME 100ms")
'Sweep time (*)
END SUB

2.6.2.2 Using Markers and Delta Markers

The markers are used for marking points on traces, reading out measurement results
and for selecting a display area quickly.

Marker Search Functions, Restricting the Search Range

The following example is based on an AM-modulated signal at 100 MHz that has the
following characteristics:

Carrier signal level -30 dBm

AF frequency 100 kHz

Modulation depth 50 %

Marker 1 and then delta marker 2 are set to the largest maximum points on the trace.
The frequency and level are then read. In the following measurements, the instru-
ment's default setting can be used for measurements (SetupInstrument).
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub MarkerSearch()
Dim retCount as Long
result$ = Space$(100)
CALL SetupInstrument 'Default Setting
'--------- Peak search without search range limits--------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT:CONT OFF")
'Switch to single sweep
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:PEXC 6DB")
'Define peak excursion
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:STAT ON")
'Enable marker 1
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:TRAC 1")

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 137

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Brief Introduction to Remote Control

'Set marker 1 to trace 1

CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:MAX;X?;Y?")
'Marker to peak; read frequency and level
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$, 100, retCount)
Debug.Print "Marker 1: ";result$
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:DELT2:STAT ON;MAX;MAX:LEFT")
'Activate delta marker 2,
'set to peak and then to next peak left
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:DELT2:X?;Y?")
'Read delta marker 2 frequency and level
result$ = Space$(100)
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$, 100, retCount)
Debug.Print "Delta 2: ";result$
'--------- Peak search with search range limit in x direction --------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:STAT ON;LEFT _
0Hz;RIGHt 100.05MHz")
'Activate search limit,
'set at right below AF
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:DELT3:STAT ON;MAX;MAX:RIGHt")
'Activate delta marker 3,
'set to peak and then to next peak right
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:DELT3:X:REL?;:CALC:DELT3:Y?")
'Read delta marker 3 frequency and level;
'both must have a value of 0
result$ = Space$(100)
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$, 100, retCount)
Print "Delta 3: ";result$
'--------- Peak search with search range limit in y direction --------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:THR:STAT ON")
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:THR -35DBM")
'Activate threshold and set it above the AF
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:DELT3:STAT ON;MAX;MAX:NEXT")
'Activate delta marker 3,
'set to peak and then to next peak
'=> is not found
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:DELT3:X:REL?;:CALC:DELT3:Y?")
'Query and read delta marker 3
'frequency and level;
'both must have a value of 0
result$ = Space$(100)
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$, 100, retCount)
Debug.Print "Delta 3: ";result$
'---- Setting center frequency and reference level with markers ------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK2:FUNC:CENT")
'Delta marker 2 -> marker and
'center frequency = marker 2
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK2:FUNC:REF")
'Ref level = marker 2
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT;*WAI") 'Sweep with sync

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 138

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Brief Introduction to Remote Control

END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************

Frequency Counting
The following example is based on a signal at 100 MHz with a level of -30 dBm. Again,
the instrument's default setting can be used (SetupInstrument). The purpose of fre-
quency counting is to determine the exact frequency of the signal at 100 MHz.
REM *************************************************************************
Public Sub MarkerCount()
Dim retCount as Long
CALL SetupInstrument 'Default setting
'--------- Defining signal frequency with frequency counter ----------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT:CONT OFF")
'Switch to single sweep
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:PEXC 6DB")
'Define peak excursion
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:STAT ON")
'Activate marker 1
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:TRAC 1")
'Set marker 1 to trace 1
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:X 100MHz")
'Set marker 1 to 100 MHz
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:COUNT ON")
'Activate frequency counter
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:COUNT:FREQ?")
'Query and read measured frequency
result$ = Space$(100)
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$, 100, retCount)
Debug.Print "Marker Count Freq: ";result$
END SUB
REM *************************************************************************

Working with a Fixed Reference Point

The following example is based on a signal at 100 MHz with a level of -20 dBm. Thus,
the harmonics of the signal are located at 200 MHz, 300 MHz, etc. For high-quality sig-
nal sources, these harmonics may be located outside the dynamic range of the
R&S ESR. Nevertheless, to measure the harmonic suppression, the level setting must
be changed to higher sensitivity when measuring the harmonics. In this case, it may be
necessary to suppress the carrier by using a notch filter in order to prevent the RF
input of the R&S ESR from being overloaded.
Thus, two measurements with different level settings are performed in the following
example. First, a high reference level is used on the carrier frequency, and then a low
reference level is used on the frequency of the third harmonic.
The default setting of the R&S ESR for measurements ("SetupInstrument") is also
used as a starting point here, after which adaptations for the measurement are carried
out.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 139

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Brief Introduction to Remote Control

REM *************************************************************************
Public Sub RefFixed()
Dim retCount as Long
CALL SetupInstrument 'Default setting
'--------- Measuring the reference point ----------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT:CONT OFF")
'Switch to single sweep
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:PEXC 6DB")
'Define peak excursion
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:STAT ON")
'Activate marker 1
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:TRAC 1")
'Set marker 1 to trace 1
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:MAX")
'Set marker 1 to 100 MHz
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX ON")
'Define reference point
'----- Setting frequency, level and bandwidth for measuring harmonics ------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"FREQ:CENT 400MHz;Span 1MHz")
'Set freq of 3rd harmonic
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"BAND:RES 1kHz")
'Set suitable RBW
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"SWEEP:TIME:AUTO ON")
'Couple sweep time
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INP:ATT:AUTO ON")
'Select more sensitive level setting
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV -50dBm")
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:DELT:MAX;X:REL?;Y?")
'Read delta marker
result$ = Space$(100)
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$, 100, retCount)
'Read frequency and level
Debug.Print "Deltamarker 1: "; result$
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************

Measuring Noise and Phase Noise

When phase noise is measured, the noise power related to a bandwidth of 1 Hz is set
in relation to the power of an adjacent carrier signal. A commonly used offset between
the measured frequency and the carrier frequency is 10 kHz.
When noise is measured, the measured absolute level is related to a bandwidth of 1
Hz.
The following example is also based on a signal at 100 MHz with a level of -30 dBm.
Two markers are used to determine both the noise and the phase noise at a 10 kHz
offset from the carrier signal.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 140

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Brief Introduction to Remote Control

REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub Noise()
Dim retCount as Long
'--------- Default setting of the R&S FSV --------------------------------
CALL SetupStatusReg 'Configure status register
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"*RST") 'Reset instrument
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT:CONT OFF")
'Single sweep mode
'--------- Setting the frequency ------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"FREQUENCY:CENTER 100MHz")
'Center frequency
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"FREQ:SPAN 100 kHz")
'Span
'--------- Setting the level ----------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV -20dBm")
'Reference level
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync
'--------- Setting the reference point ------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:PEXC 6DB")
'Define peak excursion
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:STAT ON")
'Activate marker 1
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:TRAC 1")
'Set marker 1 to trace 1
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:MAX")
'Set marker 1 to 100 MHz
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO ON")
'Define reference point for phase noise
'--------- Measuring the phase noise --------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:DELT:X 10kHz")
'Position delta marker
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO:RES?")
'Query and output phase noise result
result$ = Space$(100)
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$, 100, retCount)
Debug.Print "Phase Noise [dBc/Hz]: "; result$
'--------- Measuring the noise --------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:X 99.96MHz")
'Position marker 1
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:NOIS:RES?")
'Query and output result
result$ = Space$(100)
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$, 100, retCount)
Print "Noise [dBm/Hz]: "; result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 141

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Brief Introduction to Remote Control

2.6.2.3 Reading Out Trace Data

In the following example, the trace data obtained with the default setting is read from
the instrument and displayed in a list on the screen. Readout occurs first in binary for-
mat and then in ASCII format, once with the span > 0 and once with the span = 0.
In binary format, the header of the message with the length specification is evaluated
and used to calculate the x-axis values.
In ASCII format, merely the list of level values is output.

Binary data is read out in three steps:

1. The number of digits in the length specification is read out.

2. The length specification itself is read out.

3. The trace data itself is read out.

The procedure is required for programming languages that only support structures with
data types of the same type (arrays, such as with Visual Basic), because the data
types of the header and data sections are different in binary data.
The "VISA" library provides only a mechanism for reading into string buffers. In order to
convert the data into an array of single precision values, the string contents must be
copied into a buffer of that type. The following example uses an operating system func-
tion for the copy operation. The function declaration must be added to a module (.bas)
as follows:

Array dimensions
The arrays for the measured data are dimensioned so they provide sufficient space for
trace data of the R&S ESR (691 measurement points).

REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub ReadTrace()
'--------- Creating variables ----------------------------------------------
Dim traceData(1400) As Single 'Buffer for floating point binary data
Dim digits As Byte 'Number of characters in
'length specification
Dim traceBytes As Integer 'Len. of trace data in bytes
Dim traceValues As Integer 'No. of meas. values in buff.
Dim BinBuffer as String * 5600 'String buffer for binary data
Dim retCount as Long
asciiResult$ = Space$(28000) 'Buffer for ASCII trace data
result$ = Space$(100) 'Buffer for simple results
startFreq$ = Space$(100) 'Buffer for start frequency
span$ = Space$(100) 'Buffer for span
'--------- Default setting of the R&S FSV ---------------------------------
CALL SetupInstrument 'Default setting
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT:CONT OFF")
'Switch to single sweep

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 142

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Brief Introduction to Remote Control

CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync

'--------- Defining the frequency range for output -------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"FREQ:STARt?") 'Read start frequency
CALL InstrRead(analyzer,startFreq$, 100, retCount)
startFreq = Val(startFreq$)
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"FREQ:SPAN?") 'Read span
CALL InstrRead(analyzer,span$, 100, retCount)
span = Val(span$)
'--------- Reading out in binary format ------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "FORMAT REAL,32")
'Set binary format
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "TRAC1? TRACE1")
'Read trace 1
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$, 2, retCount)
'Read and store length
digits = Val(Mid$(result$, 2, 1)) 'spec. for number of characters
result$ = Space$(100) 'Reinitialize buffer
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$, digits, retCount)
'Read and store length
traceBytes = Val(Left$(result$, digits))
'specification
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, BinBuffer, traceBytes, retCount)
'Read trace data into buffer
CopyMemory traceData(0), ByVal BinBuffer, traceBytes
'Copy data into float array
'--------- Outputting binary data as frequency/level pairs -----------------
traceValues = traceBytes/4 'Single precision = 4 bytes
stepsize = span/traceValues 'Calculate frequency step size
For i = 0 To traceValues - 1
Debug.Print "Value["; i; "] = "; startFreq+stepsize*i; ", "; traceData(i)
Next i
'--------- Default setting of zero span ------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"FREQ:SPAN 0Hz")
'Switch to zero span
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync
'--------- Reading out in ASCII format -------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"FORMAT ASCII")
'Set ASCII format
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"TRAC1? TRACE1")
'Read and output
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, asciiResult$)
Print "Contents of Trace1: ",asciiResult$ 'trace 1
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

2.6.2.4 Storing and Loading Instrument Settings

Settings and measured data can be stored and loaded. You can define which data set
is loaded when the instrument is preset or started.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 143

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Brief Introduction to Remote Control

Storing Instrument Settings

In the following example, the settings/measured data to be stored are defined initially,
in which case only the hardware settings are stored. However, the selection com-
mands for the other settings are specified with the state "OFF" for the sake of com-
pleteness.
REM ***********************************************************************
Public Sub StoreSettings()
'This subroutine selects the settings to be stored and creates the
'data record "TEST1" in the directory C:\R_S\Instr\user. It uses the default
'setting and resets the instrument after the setting is stored.
'--------- Default settings of the R&S FSV ------------------------------
CALL SetupInstrument
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT:CONT OFF")
'Change to single sweep
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync
'--------- Selection of settings to be stored ----------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"MMEM:SEL:HWS ON")
'Store hardware settings
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"MMEM:SEL:TRAC OFF")
'Do not store any traces
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"MMEM:SEL:LIN:ALL OFF")
'Store only the activated limit lines
'--------- Storing on the instrument -------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,'C:\R_S\Instr\user\TEST1'")
'--------- Resetting the instrument --------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"*RST")
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************

Loading Instrument Settings

In the following example, the TEST1 data record stored under C:\R_S\Instr\user
is loaded by the instrument:
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub LoadSettings()
'This subroutine loads the TEST1 data record in the directory
'C:\R_S\Instr\user.
'--------- Default setting of the status register --------------------------
CALL SetupStatusReg 'Configure status register
'--------- Loading the data record -----------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,'C:\R_S\Instr\user\TEST1'")
'--------- Perform measurement using loaded data record --------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DISP:TRAC1:MODE WRIT")
'Set trace to Clr/Write
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT;*WAI") 'Start sweep
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 144

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Brief Introduction to Remote Control

Setting the Data Record for Startup Recall

In the following example, the first step is to change the R&S ESR to the default state.
In the next step, the TEST1 data record stored under C:\R_S\Instr\user is
selected for the startup recall function, i.e. the data record is then set after each *RST,
presetting and each time the instrument is started. For demonstration purposes, the
command *RST is carried out again.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub StartupRecallSettings()
'--------- Resetting the R&S FSV ------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"*RST")
'--------- Default setting of the status register --------------------------
CALL SetupStatusReg 'Configure status register
'--------- Selecting the startup recall data record ------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"MMEM:LOAD:AUTO 1,'C:\R_S\Instr\user\TEST1'")
'--------- Activating the startup recall data record -----------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"*RST")
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

2.6.2.5 Configuring and Starting a Printout

The following example shows how to configure the output format and output device for
printing out a measurement screen. The procedure is as follows:
1. Set the measurement you want for the printout.

2. Check which output devices are available on the instrument.

3. Select an output device.

4. Select the output interface.

5. Configure the output format.

6. Start the printout with synchronization to completion.

It is assumed that the desired setting is a signal at 100 MHz with a power of -20 dBm.
It is also assumed that the sixth printer out of the available printers that are listed is the
one you want. The printout is first output to the selected printer and then to a file.
REM ***********************************************************************
Public Sub HCopy()
Dim retCount as Long
Dim SRQWaitTimeout As Long
Dim eventType As Long
Dim eventVi As Long
Dim statusSRQ As Long
DIM Devices(100) as string 'Create buffer for printer name
FOR i = 0 TO 49
Devices$(i) = Space$(50) 'Preallocate buffer for printer name

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 145

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Brief Introduction to Remote Control

NEXT i
'--------- Default setting of the R&S FSV -------------------------------
CALL SetupStatusReg 'Configure status register
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"*RST") 'Reset instrument
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT:CONT OFF")
'Single sweep mode
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"SYST:DISP:UPD ON")
'Screen display on
'--------- Measurement settings ------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"FREQ:CENT 100MHz;SPAN 10MHz")
'Frequency setting
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV -10dBm")
'Reference level
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT;*WAI") 'Perform measurement
'--------- Querying the available output devices -------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"SYST:COMM:PRIN:ENUM:FIRSt?")
'Read out and display first output device
CALL InstrRead(analyzer,Devices$(0), 50, retCount)
Debug.Print "Printer 0: "+Devices$(0)
For i = 1 to 99
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"SYST:COMM:PRIN:ENUM:NEXT?")
'Read out next printer name
CALL InstrRead(analyzer,Devices$(i)
IF Left$(Devices$(i),2) = "''" THEN GOTO SelectDevice
'Stop at end of list
Debug.Print "Printer"+Str$(i)+": " Devices$(i)
'Display printer name
NEXT i
SelectDevice:
'---- Selection of output device, printer language and output interface ----
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"SYST:COMM:PRIN:SEL "+ Devices(6))
'Printer selection #6
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"HCOP:DEST 'SYST:COMM:PRIN'")
'Configuration: "Printout to
'printer interface"
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"HCOP:DEV:LANG GDI")
'Printers require printer language 'GDI'
'----- Selection of orientation (portrait/landscape) and colour/BW ---------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"HCOP:PAGE:ORI PORT")
'Portrait orientation
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"HCOP:DEV:COL OFF")
'Black-and-white printout
'----- Configuring and starting the printout -------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"HCOP:ITEM:ALL")
'All screen contents
'CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"HCOP:ITEM:TRAC:STAT ON")
'Alternative: only traces
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"*CLS") 'Reset status registers
CALL viEnableEvent(vi, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, VI_QUEUE, 0)
'Enable the event for service request

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 146

R&S®ESR Quick Start
Brief Introduction to Remote Control

CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"HCOP;*OPC")
'Start printout
SRQWaitTimeout = 5000 'Allow 5s for completion
'Now wait for the service request
statusSRQ = viWaitOnEvent(vi, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, SRQWaitTimeout, _
eventType, eventVi)
CALL viClose(eventVi) 'Close the context before continuing
CALL viDisableEvent(vi, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, VI_QUEUE)
'Disable subsequent events
IF NOT(statusSRQ = 0) THEN CALL Srq 'If SRQ not detected =>
'Subroutine for evaluation
'---- Printout in WMF format (BMP format) to file --------------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"HCOP:DEST 'MMEM'")
'Configuration: "Printout to file"
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"HCOP:DEV:LANG WMF")
'WMF file format
'CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"HCOP:DEV:LANG BMP")
'BMP file format
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"MMEM:NAME 'C:\R_S\Instr\user\PRINT1.WMF'")
'Define file name
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"*CLS") 'Reset Status registers
CALL viEnableEvent(vi, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, VI_QUEUE, 0)
'Enable the event for service request
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"HCOP:IMMediate;*OPC")
'Start printout
SRQWaitTimeout = 5000 'Allow 5s for completion
' Now wait for the service request
statusSRQ = viWaitOnEvent(vi, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, SRQWaitTimeout, _
eventType, eventVi)
CALL viClose(eventVi) 'Close the context before continuing
CALL viDisableEvent(vi, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, VI_QUEUE)
'Disable subsequent events
IF NOT(statusSRQ = 0) THEN CALL Srq 'If SRQ not detected =>
'Subroutine for evaluation
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 147

R&S®ESR Measurement Modes
Receiver Mode

3 Measurement Modes
The R&S ESR provides several measurement modes for different analysis tasks.
When you activate a measurement mode, a new measurement channel is created. The
channel determines the settings for that measurement mode. Each channel is dis-
played in a separate tab on the screen.
SCPI command:
INSTrument[:SELect] on page 605

To change the measurement mode

1. Press the MODE key.

A menu with the currently available measurement modes is displayed.

2. To activate a different mode, press the corresponding softkey.

3.1 Receiver Mode

In Receiver mode, the R&S ESR measures the signal level at a particular frequency. It
also provides tools (e.g. detectors or bandwidths) necessary to measure the signal
according to EMC standards. The Receiver mode is the default mode of the R&S ESR.
The R&S ESR also provides function for IF analysis if you have equipped your
R&S ESR with firmware application R&S ESR-K53. IF analysis is not a separate mea-
surement mode but is integrated into the Receiver mode.
For more information on functionality available for the Receiver mode see chapter 4,
"Receiver Mode", on page 150.
SCPI command:
INST REC

3.2 Spectrum Mode

In Spectrum mode the provided functions correspond to those of a conventional spec-
trum analyzer. The analyzer measures the frequency spectrum of the RF input signal
over the selected frequency range with the selected resolution and sweep time, or, for
a fixed frequency, displays the waveform of the video signal.
The Spectrum mode also provides spectrogram measurements. The spectrogram is
not a separate measurement mode, but rather a trace evaluation mode. Note also that
the Spectrogram available in Spectrum mode is independent of that available in real
time mode. It provides similar functionality but uses different data acquisition methods.
For more information on functionality available for the Spectrum mode see chapter 5,
"Spectrum Measurements", on page 230.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 148

R&S®ESR Measurement Modes
I/Q Analyzer Mode

SCPI command:
INST SAN

3.3 I/Q Analyzer Mode

The I/Q Analyzer mode provides measurement and display functions for digital I/Q sig-
nals.
For more information on functionality available for the I/Q Analyzer see chapter 6, "I/Q
Analyzer", on page 468.
SCPI command:
TRACe<n>:IQ[:STATe] on page 868

3.4 Real Time Mode

In Real Time mode, the R&S ESR performs measurements in the frequency spectrum
of a test signal without losing any signal data. You can evaluate the measurement
results in several result displays that are designed for the realtime analysis and com-
plement one another.
Real Time analysis is available with firmware application R&S ESR-K55 and hardware
option R&S ESR-B50.
For more information on functionality available for the Real Time mode see the sepa-
rate User Manual available for download on the internet (http://www2.rohde-
schwarz.com/product/ESR.html).
SCPI command:
INST RTIM

3.5 Measurement Mode Root Menus (HOME Key)

The HOME key provides a quick access to the root menu of the current measurement
mode.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 149

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurements and Result Displays

4 Receiver Mode
In receiver mode, the R&S ESR measures the level at the set frequency with a
selected bandwidth and measurement time. Signal weighting is by means of detectors.
A frequency scan can be performed after setting the start and stop frequency and the
step width. Scan subranges are defined in a table.
Functions for data reduction and the control of line impedance simulating network are
available.
Preselection is always switched on in receiver mode.

4.1 Measurements and Result Displays

The R&S ESR provides several types of measurements.
● The bargraph result display shows the signal level on a single frequency.
● Fast prescans together with several data reduction methods are used to reduce the
amount of data in the final measurements. The final measurement is then per-
formed only on frequencies that have a high interferer level.
● The final measurement may be either automatic or in interactive mode. Automatic
control functions for line impedance stabilization networks (LISN) are available.
● Time domain scans (option R&S ESR-K53) reduce the required overall measure-
ment times enormously by using fast fourier transform (FFT) of frequency sections.
Time domain scan may even eliminate the need for preliminary measurements.
● Fixed frequency mode for click analysis and IF spectrum analysis mode for manual
tuning are available.
● The spectrogramm result display provides an additional data evaluation method by
showing the signals over time.
● Bargraph Measurement........................................................................................ 150
● IF Spectrum Analysis............................................................................................ 151
● Scans.................................................................................................................... 152
● Peak List and Data Reduction...............................................................................156
● Final Measurement............................................................................................... 158
● Spectrogram..........................................................................................................159
● Measurement Control............................................................................................164

4.1.1 Bargraph Measurement

The bargraph result display shows the signal level on a single frequency. It is a basic
result display that indicates the signal level numerically and graphically.
The length of the bar represents the signal level at the current receiver frequency eval-
uated with the currently selected detector.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 150

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurements and Result Displays

Up to four bargraphs with different detector weighting can be displayed simultaneously.

The R&S ESR assigns a different color to each detector. This provides an easy way to
compare the signal level with different weighting factors.

1 = current level unit

2 = current receiver frequency
3 = detectors
4 = measured levels (numerically)
5 = measured levels (graphically)

The results in the bargraph are shown upon entering the receiver mode. Either single
or continuous measurement can be selected. The level range is always 100 dB, the
unit of the displayed signal level can be selected.
An enabled maxhold function shows the maximum level that has been measured for
each active detector in addition to the live results. If a new maximum has been found,
the result indication is updated accordingly. The display keeps the overall maximum
level even after changing the frequency until a reset of the maxhold function.

1 = maximum levels; note that the maximum and quasipeak peaks have been measured at frequency differ-
ent to the current receiver frequency

4.1.2 IF Spectrum Analysis

The IF spectrum analysis is a very comfortable means for exact frequency tuning of the
receiver and for identification of signals and of their bandwidth.
In IF spectrum analysis, the spectrum of the RF input signal is displayed in the vicinity
of the receiver frequency. The center frequency of the displayed spectrum is always
the current receive frequency.
The IF analysis provides a fast overview of the assignment of the spectrum adjacent to
the measuring channel proper, or, with a large resolution bandwidth, the spectral distri-
bution of a modulated signal in the channel. Interference of the received useful signal
can also be detected quickly, whether it is CW interference appearing as unmodulated
carrier or pulse-like interference which is represented in the form of narrow horizontal
lines on the screen.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 151

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurements and Result Displays

The accuracy of the frequency axis corresponds to the reference used (internal or
external). The frequency display range (span) can be selected between 1 kHz and
10 MHz in steps of 1, 2 and 5. With the bandwidths 10 Hz to 100 kHz in steps of 1, 3,
10 the frequency resolution can be matched to the span.
In contrast to normal spectrum analyzer operation, the measured values are deter-
mined using FFT from samples recorded from the A/D-converter. Thus the receiver
stays tuned to the center frequency. It may continue to measure with the selected mea-
surement time and display the signal level with the bargraph. For example, the quasi-
peak level measured with one second measurement time may be displayed in the
upper half of the display while in the lower half the spectrum may be refreshed every
few milliseconds.
The measurement time of the bargraph may be longer than the measurement time of
the IF analysis. If the measurement time of the bargraph is set to a smaller value then
the measurement time of the IF analysis, the bargraph will as often be refreshed as the
display of the IF analysis.
The level display of the IF analysis is unweighted. It is independent of the selected
detector for the bargraph measurement, e.g. average or quasi peak. A maximum of
three traces can be displayed in parallel. The display mode "Clear / Write", "Max Hold",
"Min Hold", "Average", "View" or "Blank" may be selected independent for each trace.

The displayed level values do have the full accuracy of the instrument only at the cen-
ter frequency. At all other frequencies, the level is typically lower due to the frequency
response of the IF filter and the preselector.

The IF display does switch on the 6 dB EMI resolution bandwidth filters for the bar-
graph measurement. 3 dB or channel filters are not possible in the IF analysis mode.
The maximum span for the IF analysis is limited to ten times the selected resolution
bandwidth for the bar graph measurement. This is due to the dynamic range of the bar
graph measurement.

4.1.3 Scans

In scan mode, the R&S ESR measures in a predefined frequency range with selectable
step width and measurement time for each frequency.
A scan is either based on the current receiver settings or on the settings defined in the
"Scan Table" (see chapter 4.1.3.3, "The Scan Table", on page 154).
Transducer factors or transducer sets and limit lines can be defined and displayed sep-
arately and are not part of the scan data record.
The scanned frequency range is defined by the start and stop frequency set independ-
ently of the scan table. A scan table can thus be defined for each measurement task.
The scan can be performed as a single scan or continuously. In the case of single scan
it is stopped when the stop frequency is reached. The continuous scan can be interrup-
ted or terminated any time.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 152

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurements and Result Displays

The maximal number of measured frequencies is limited to 4.000.000 per detector.

The data can be stored for postprocessing. If the scan subranges are defined so that
more than the possible values would be measured, a respective message is output
upon the scan start. Afterwards the scan is performed up to the maximum value.

Fig. 4-1: Scan on selected frequencies showing gaps in the trace

The R&S ESR offers three types of scans:

● Stepped scan in the frequency domain
In stepped scan mode, step width and frequency spacing (step mode) can be
selected.
● Time domain scan in the frequency domain
In time domain measurement systems, up to 30 MHz of the spectrum at the
receiver input are measured in parallel by using fast fourier transform (FFT) of fre-
quency sections. Time Domain scans require options R&S ESR-K53 and
R&S ESR-B50.
● Fixed frequency scan on a single frequency
This scan is carried out on a fixed frequency. It is used to examine the time charac-
teristics of interferences, e.g. click analysis.
● Stepped Scans in the Frequency Domain.............................................................153
● Time Domain Scans in the Frequency Domain.....................................................154
● The Scan Table.....................................................................................................154
● Scan on a Fixed Frequency.................................................................................. 156

4.1.3.1 Stepped Scans in the Frequency Domain

In stepped scan mode, the step width and the frequency spacing (step mode) can be
selected. Linear, logarithmic or automatic frequency spacing is available. In automatic
mode, the step width is selected so that it is always smaller than the bandwidth.
EMI measurements may involve much time. Time saving procedures are explained in
chapter 4.1.4, "Peak List and Data Reduction", on page 156. They reduced the total
measurement time by reducing the number of quasipeak measurements to a minimum.
Nevertheless, this time is still very long, often in the order of hours, especially for the
CISPR radiated emissions tests. A way out of this situation can be time-domain mea-

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 153

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurements and Result Displays

surements, see chapter 4.1.3.2, "Time Domain Scans in the Frequency Domain",
on page 154.

4.1.3.2 Time Domain Scans in the Frequency Domain

Time Domain scan are available with firmware application R&S ESR-K53 and hard-
ware option R&S ESR-B50. Measurement results fully comply with CISPR 16-1-1
standards.
Time domain scan reduce the overall measurement time enormously. For applications
like voltage tests, no preliminary measurement for data reduction is required, because
the final measurement with the quasipeak detector is already fast enough. For more
time consuming tests like field strength test with mast and turn table, prescans are still
recommended. However, due to the increased measurement speed both in prescan
and final scan, the overall measurement still is considerably reduced.
Whereas in conventional EMI measurement systems, only the spectrum within the
measurement bandwidth can be measured during a certain measurement time of e.g.
100 ms, in this measurement systems, large parts of the spectrum at the receiver input
can be measured in parallel using fast fourier transform (FFT) of frequency sections.
For measurements with prescan, the prescan is used to get a detailed overview of the
emission spectrum. The prescan result is then analyzed and the critical frequencies
can be determined. On the critical frequencies, if further maximization with antenna
mast and turntable movement is needed, the R&S ESR can be used in its conventional
measurement function with quasipeak and/or average detection.

4.1.3.3 The Scan Table

Either the current receiver settings or the settings defined in the Scan table are used
for stepped or time domain scans.
In the scan table, up to 10 subranges can be defined within one scan. They need not
be next to each other. The subranges are then scanned by R&S ESR one after the
other. Measurement ranges should not overlap. The parameters to be measured in
each subrange can be selected independently. For more information on the available
range parameters see chapter 4.3.7.2, "Scan Table", on page 198.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 154

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurements and Result Displays

Example:
The graph below shows a scan performed in four subranges. The scan start at the start
frequency of subrange 1. Between subrange 2 and 3 is a frequency gap, where no
measurement is performed. In subrange 4, the part of the frequency range that is out-
side the overall scan range is also not considered for the scan results.

Range Start = Start frequency of the scan range. To avoid overlapping scan ranges, the stop frequency of
the previous scan range is adjusted if necessary.
Range Stop = Stop frequency of the scan range. To avoid overlapping scan ranges, the start range of the
next scan range is adjusted if necessary.
Stepsize = Frequency stepsize within the scan range. If you define a stepsize that is larger than the
range itself, the R&S ESR only measures the start and stop frequencies of the scan range.
The step size is available if the Step Mode is either linear or logarithmic. If the step mode is
linear, the step size is a value in Hz. If the step mode is logarithmic, the step size is a per-
centage.
Res BW = Measurement bandwidth used within the scan range, see chapter 4.2.1, "Measurement
Bandwidth", on page 174
Meas Time = Measurement time for the scan range, see chapter 4.2.2, "Measurement Time",
on page 175
Auto Ranging = Turns automatic selection of the input attenuation on and off, see Auto Range (On Off)

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 155

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurements and Result Displays

RF Attenua- = Attenuation level at the RF input.

tion
Preamplifier = Turns the preamplifier on and off. If you select "Auto", the preamplifier is also considered in
the auto ranging process.
RF Input = Selects the RF input.

4.1.3.4 Scan on a Fixed Frequency

Fixed frequency scans are scans in the time domain, i.e. at a fixed frequency. Time
domain analysis is generally used to examine the time characteristics of interferences.
Evaluating the detected voltage with an oscilloscope is useful in order to correctly set
the receiver measurement time. By doing so, you can determine whether and how
strongly a narrowband interference fluctuates and whether it is amplitude-modulated or
pulsed. You can also determine the pulse rate of a broadband interference. You can
set the measurement time to a value that is greater than or equal to the reciprocal of
the pulse rate.

Click rate analysis

A special application for fixed frequency scans is click rate analysis. Clicks are short
and occasional interferences or pulses that usually occur in thermostat-controlled, soft-
ware-controlled or other electrically controlled devices like washing machines or air
conditioning devices.
The click characteristics of such a device are subject to the occurrence of successive
pulses whose individual pulse heights cannot be assigned exactly by using the time
constants of quasipeak weighting. This can be critical for these measurements,
because it can lead to limits being exceeded. Using time domain analysis, you are able
to determine the length, repetition rate and level of the clicks.
Because of their irregularity, different limits have to be applied than for periodic interfer-
ences. These limits are defined by the CISPR 14-1 and EN 55014-1 standards. Both
standards define limits for RFI voltage with click rate weighting in the range from
150 kHz to 30 MHz.
You can perform this task according to the standards with the R&S ESR. It meets the
requirements of the standards regarding the accuracy of pulse length measurements
with pulse lengths of 10 ms or more. With a memory capacity of 2 million values per
trace, it also has a large enough memory to completely record maximum peak and
quasipeak data for at least 2 hours with a measurement time of 5 ms for each value
that has been measured.

4.1.4 Peak List and Data Reduction

Peak List
The Peak Search function of the R&S ESR can be used to create a peak list containing
only the measurement values of high interferers. In a fast prescan the signal is mea-
sured against a limit line, and the level values above the set margin are written into the

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 156

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurements and Result Displays

peak list. The resulting peak list then is used for the final measurement where only the
frequencies in the peak list are measured with the required detector.
If the scan uses the detector stipulated by the specifications, the peak list already pro-
vides the final measurement data.

Data Reduction using the Peak List

EMI measurements may involve much time because the time constants of up to 160
ms prescribed by the standard for the quasipeak weighting lead to long measurement
times per each value. In addition, some standards stipulate procedures for finding local
EMI maxima such as shifting the absorbing clamp, variation of the test antenna height
and rotating the DUT. Measuring with quasipeak weighting at each frequency and for
each setting of the test configuration would lead to unacceptably long measurement
times. For this reason, a method is used which reduces the time-consuming measure-
ments to a minimum with an optimum reliability of detection.
The interference spectrum is first pre-analyzed in a fast prescan to optimize the dura-
tion of the measurement. Data reduction follows so that the time-consuming final mea-
surement is performed only at critical frequencies.
Several data reduction methods are used:
● Generating subrange maxima (search method "Subranges").
The whole frequency range is divided into equidistant frequency subranges. A
selectable number of subrange maxima are determined for each subrange. In the
final measurement, the interference spectrum is further analyzed at frequencies
with the highest interference level of a frequency subrange.

1 = Subrange
2 = Subrange maximum
3 = Limit line
● Determination of a specific number of peak values relative to the limit lines with the
level values being independent of their frequency spectral distribution (search
method "Peaks").
Determining the level maxima irrespective of their distribution in the frequency
spectrum is suitable for measurement regulations that demand determination of the
relatively highest level irrespective of the distribution in the measured frequency
range, e.g. FCC.
If the prescan is performed in parallel with several detectors, typically Peak and Aver-
age, the maxima are determined separately for the two detectors so that the distribu-
tion of narrowband and wideband sources of interference can be taken into account.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 157

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurements and Result Displays

For example, the frequency of the maximum determined with the average detector can
be used for the final measurement performed with the CISPR Avg detector and the fre-
quency found in the prescan carried out with the peak detector is taken for the final
measurement using the quasipeak detector.
Consideration of the limit lines ensures that the final measurement is not performed at
frequencies at which the inference level is far below the limit value. A margin below the
limit line can be defined (in dB). Peak values measured in the margin area are also
considered in the final measurement. The margin is valid for all limit lines. Each limit
line is allocated to a trace, i.e. different limit lines are taken for the different detectors.
If no limit lines are activated, the measurement procedure is as if all measured values
would exceed the limit line.

Data Reduction by Editing the Peak List

As an alternative method, it is possible to preset a list of frequencies at which the final
measurements are performed. A typical application is, for example, the statistical
analysis of several units.
The peak list can be either edited manually or can be filled with desired values by
adopting the marker values.

4.1.5 Final Measurement

A final measurement is performed after data reduction, thus reducing the overall mea-
surement time.
The final measurement analyzes only the data that still remains after the preliminary
measurement stages, in other words those frequencies that have been collected in the
peak list. Detectors defined for the final measurement replace those that have been
used during preliminary measurements.
Because the peak list contains a manageable set of frequencies only, the final mea-
surement is also usable in combination with a configuration that requires long mea-
surement times. It is then still possible to perform the measurement in a reasonable
time frame.
During the final measurement, the R&S ESR performs a measurement on each fre-
quency in the peak list. When done, it updates the preliminary results in the peak list
with those found during the final measurement.

Automatic vs interactive final measurements

The R&S ESR provides two methods to perform a final measurement: an automatic
and interactive final measurement.
An automatic final measurement measures all frequencies in the peak list automati-
cally. The measurement can be interrupted or aborted, or the measurement mode can
be switched to interactive. Measurement settings can not be changed. The advantage
is that the measurement runs on its own.
Control of the final measurement is possible in interactive final measurement mode.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 158

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurements and Result Displays

In interactive final measurement mode, the R&S ESR stops on each frequency of the
peak list. If required, the frequency can be fine tuned, e.g. if the interferer has shifted.
For fine tuning, the bargraph display can be used to find the new peak value. The level
measurement is performed only after initialization by the user.
It is possible to start with an automatic measurement and later change into interactive
mode. Likewise, it is possible to start measuring in interactive mode and later change
into automatic mode.

4.1.6 Spectrogram

In receiver mode, the R&S ESR provides a spectrogram result display for scans and
for IF analysis. For both result displays, the spectrogram allows you to view and evalu-
ate the signal characteristics over time.

4.1.6.1 How a Spectrogram Works

A spectrogram shows the spectral density of a signal in the frequency domain and over
time simultaneously. It provides an overview of the spectrum over time and so allows
for an easy detection of anomalies and interfering signals.
The horizontal axis represents the frequency span. The vertical axis represents time.
Time in the spectrogram runs chronologically from top to bottom. Therefore, the top of
the diagram is the most recently recorded data. A spectrogram also shows the power
levels that have been measured. To display the level information, the R&S ESR maps
different colors to each power level that has been measured.
Creating a spectrogram consists of several stages.
● Data acquisition based on the scan or the IF analysis
● Result coloring
● Data processing
The stages occur simultaneously.

Data acquisition
The spectrogram uses the traces of the scan or the IF analysis as its data basis. The
data capture process is therefore the same as that of these two measurements.
Note that if you use the Scan or IF Analysis result displays, the R&S ESR saves spec-
trogram data even if the spectrogram result display is off.
After the data has been captured, the R&S ESR transforms the data of the traces into
the spectrogram result display.

Result coloring
To get the final looks of the spectrogram, the R&S ESR applies colors to visualize the
power levels in a two dimensional diagram.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 159

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurements and Result Displays

Each color in the spectrogram corresponds to a particular power level that is shown in
the color map in the title bar of the result display. The color the R&S ESR assigns to
each power level depends on:
● the color scheme you have selected
● the (customized) color mapping settings
In the default configuration, the R&S ESR displays low power levels in 'cold' colors
(blue, green etc.) and higher power levels in 'warm' colors (red, yellow etc.).
For more information, see chapter 4.1.6.2, "Color Map", on page 160.

Data processing
Now that the data is available, the R&S ESR processes the data to display it in the
spectrogram result display.
To understand the structure and contents of the spectrogram, it is best to look at it in
combination with the scan or IF analysis result display. The data that is shown in the
spectrogram is always based on the data of the scan or IF analysis trace.
The spectrogram is made up out of a number of horizontal lines, each one a pixel high,
that are called (time) frames.
● When you use a spectrogram in combination with a scan, each frame corresponds
to a single sweep of the frequency range you are scanning.
● When you use a spectrogram in combination with IF analysis, a single sweep may
consist of several frames. The exact number of frames depends on the measure-
ment time of the bargraph.
In the default state, a frame is added to the spectrogram after a sweep is done. As the
spectrogram in the R&S ESR runs from top to bottom, the outdated frame(s) move
down one position, so that the most recently recorded frame is always on top of the
diagram.
The number of frames the R&S ESR can display simultaneously is only limited by the
vertical screen size. The number of frames the R&S ESR stores in its memory is big-
ger. The maximum number of frames you can record is 100.000. The actual number,
however, depends on the measurement configuration. With markers, you can navigate
to any frame that has been saved.
Note that the contents of the spectrograms for scan and IF analysis are independent
from one another: the R&S ESR saves the data you have already recorded and the
current configuration when you switch to another result display. It keeps the data until
you start a new measurement or the capture buffer is full.

4.1.6.2 Color Map

Colors are an important part of the spectrogram. Therefore, the R&S ESR provides
various ways to customize the display for best viewing results.
You can access the Color Mapping dialog via the "Color Mapping" softkey or by tap-
ping on the color map. For the spectrogram the R&S ESR maps power levels (dBm).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 160

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurements and Result Displays

Selecting the color scheme

Before adjusting the details of the color map, you should select the color scheme you
are most comfortable with. You can select from four different color schemes:
●

The "Hot" color scheme shows the results in colors ranging from blue to red. Blue
colors indicate low probabilities or levels respectively. Red colors indicate high
ones.
●

The "Cold" color scheme shows the results in colors ranging from red to blue. Red
colors indicate low probabilities or levels respectively. Blue colors indicate high
ones.
The "Cold" color scheme is the inverse "Hot" color scheme.
●

The "Radar" color scheme shows the colors ranging from black over green to light
turquoise with shades of green in between. Dark colors indicate low probabilities or
levels respectively. Light colors indicate high ones.
●

The "Grayscale" color scheme shows the results in shades of gray. Dark grays
indicate low probabilities or levels respectively. Light grays indicate high ones.
If a result lies outside the defined range of the color map, it is colored in black at the
lower end of the color range. On the upper end of the color range it is always the light-
est color possible, regardless of differences in amplitude (e.g. black and blue in case of
the "Cold" scheme).

Defining the Range of the Color Map

The current configuration could be a color map that you can optimize for better visuali-
zation of the measured signal, for example if the results cover only a small part of the
color map. In the resulting trace, it would be hard to distinguish between values that
are close together.
There are several ways to optimize the distribution of the colors over the results and
then get the best viewing results.
Note that the following examples are based on the "Hot" color scheme.
The easiest way to adjust the colors is to use the color range sliders in the "Color Map-
ping" dialog.
In the histogram that is in the background of the color curve pane (grey bars), you can
observe the distribution of measurement results. If no significant shifts in result distribu-
tion occur after evaluating this for a time, you can adjust the color map to the overall
shape of the measurement results. To do so and still cover the whole signal, move the
sliders in a way that the first and last bar of the histogram are still inside the range. You
can optimize the display further, if you suppress the noise by excluding the lower 10 to

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 161

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurements and Result Displays

20 dB of the distribution. Note that the color map has to cover at least 10% of the
range of the horizontal axis.

Alternatively, you can set the range in the numeric input field. In that field, you have to
enter the distance from the right and left border as a percentage.

Example:
The color map starts at -100 dBm and ends at 0 dBm (i.e. a range of 100 dB). You,
however, want the color map to start at -90 dBm. To do so, you have to enter 10% in
the Start field. The R&S ESR shifts the start point 10% to the right, to -90 dBm.

In the spectrogram, cutting the range as far as possible is also a good way if you want
to observe and put the focus on signals with a certain amplitude only. Then, only those
signal amplitudes that you really want see are displayed. The rest of the display
remains dark (or light, depending on the color scheme). It is also a good way to elimi-
nate noise from the display. In the spectrogram you can do this easily by excluding the
corresponding power levels at the low end of the power level distribution.

Fig. 4-2: Spectrogram that shows the peaks of a pulsed signal only

Adjusting the reference level and level range

Changing the reference level and level range also affects the color scheme in the
spectrogram.
Make sure, however, that you never adjust in a way that could overload the R&S ESR.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 162

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurements and Result Displays

Defining the shape of the color curve

Now that the color scheme and range of the color map suit your needs, you can
improve the color map even more by changing the shape of the color curve.
The color curve is a tool to shift the focus of the color distribution on the color map. By
default, the color curve is linear. The color curve is linear, i.e. the colors on the color
map are distributed evenly. If you shift the curve to the left or right, the distribution
becomes non-linear. The slope of the color curve increases or decreases. One end of
the color palette then covers a large amount results while the the other end distributes
a lot of colors on relatively small result range.
You can use this feature to put the focus on a particular region in the diagram and to
be able to detect small variations of the signal.

Example:

Fig. 4-3: Linear color curve shape = 0

The color map above is based on a linear color curve. Colors are distributed evenly
over the complete result range.

Fig. 4-4: Non-linear color curve shape = -0.5

After shifting the color curve to the left (negative value), more colors cover the range
from -105.5 dBm to -60 dBm (blue, green and yellow). In the color map based on the
linear color curve, the same range is covered by blue and a few shades of green only.
The range from -60 dBm to -20 dBm on the other hand is dominated by various shades
of red, but no other colors. In the linear color map, the same range is covered by red,
yellow and a few shades of green.

The result of shifting the color curve is that results in a particular result range (power
levels in case of the spectrogram and densities in the case of the spectral histogram)
become more differentiated.
You can adjust the color curve by moving the middle slider in the color curve pane to a
place you want it to be. Moving the slider to the left shifts the focus in the direction of
low values. Most of the colors in the color map are then concentrated on the low power
levels (spectrogram) or densities (histogram), while only a few colors cover the upper
end of the color map or high power levels or densities. Moving the slider to the right
shifts the focus to the higher amplitudes or densities.
Alternatively, you can enter the shape of the color curve in the corresponding input
field below the color curve pane. A value of 0 corresponds to a linear shape, negative
values up to -1 shift the curve to the left, positive values up to 1 shift the curve to the
right.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 163

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurements and Result Displays

4.1.7 Measurement Control

Measurements in receiver mode allow you to control the course of the measurement.
This way, you can make use of the automated test sequences but still be able to
change the setup once the test sequence is already running.
● Running Scans and Measurements...................................................................... 164
● Selecting the Result Display................................................................................. 164
● Bargraph Control...................................................................................................165
● Scan Control......................................................................................................... 166
● Final Measurement Control...................................................................................168
● Measurement Settings.......................................................................................... 170
● Spectrogram Configuration................................................................................... 172

4.1.7.1 Running Scans and Measurements

The RUN SINGLE and RUN CONT hardkeys initiate scans and measurements.
● RUN SINGLE starts a single scan or measurement. A single measurement lasts
until the defined frequency range has been measured once under the configured
conditions. When it has finished, the measurement stops.
In case of measurements in the time domain, a single measurement lasts until the
defined measurement time has passed.
● RUN CONT starts a continuous scan or measurement. A continuous measurement
lasts until it is interrupted or stopped.
SCPI command:
INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 609
INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] on page 610

4.1.7.2 Selecting the Result Display

The R&S ESR allows you to display the results in various combinations.
You can display up to three results simultaneously, for example the Bargraph, the
Scan diagram and the Spectrogram.
The "Meas" menu contains the basic measurement settings and the selection of result
displays.

► Press the MEAS key.

The R&S ESR opens the "Meas" menu.

► Press the "More Display Options" softkey.

The submenu contains more result displays.

Note that the Spectrogram is available for the Scan display and the IF Analysis. To add
the Spectrogram, either Scan or IF Analysis have to be turned on already. If you are
using the Scan and IF Analysis simultaneously, the Spectrogram is unavailable.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 164

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurements and Result Displays

The Spectrogram of the Scan is independent of the Spectrogram available for IF

Analysis and vice versa. Therefore you should regard the two Spectrograms as sepa-
rate result displays. For more information see chapter 4.1.6, "Spectrogram",
on page 159.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:FEED on page 606

Bargraph + Scan
Shows the Bargraph and Scan result displays.

Bargraph + IF Analysis
Shows the Bargraph and IF Analysis result displays.

Bargraph
Turns the Bargraph result display on and off.

IF Analysis
Turns the IF Analysis result display on and off.

Scan
Turns the Scan result display on and off.

Spectrogram
Turns the Spectrogram result display on and off.

4.1.7.3 Bargraph Control

The "Measurement Configuration" menu contains functionality to configure the bar-

graph.
SCPI commands:
Querying the signal level:
"Querying bargraph results" on page 613
Querying the upper and lower value of the bargraph scale:
DISPlay:BARGraph:LEVel:LOWer? on page 606
DISPlay:BARGraph:LEVel:UPPer? on page 607
Continuous Bargraph / Single Bargraph..................................................................... 165
Bargraph Maxhold.......................................................................................................166
Maxhold Reset............................................................................................................ 166

Continuous Bargraph / Single Bargraph

Selects single or continuous bargraph measurements.
Continuous bargraph measurements continuously evaluate the signal level at the
receiver frequency.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 165

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurements and Result Displays

A single bargraph measurement evaluates the signal level at the receiver frequency
once and then stops.
Remote command:
INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 609

Bargraph Maxhold
Turns the maxhold bargraph on and off. The maxhold bargraph shows the highest level
that has been measured.
Remote command:
DISPlay:BARGraph:PHOLd[:STATe] on page 607

Maxhold Reset
Resets the maxhold bargraph.
After reset, collection of maximum values starts again.
Remote command:
DISPlay:BARGraph:PHOLd:RESet on page 607

4.1.7.4 Scan Control

At the start of a scan, the R&S ESR opens a softkey menu to control the measure-
ment.

Interrupting a scan
The R&S ESR allows to interrupt a scan any time. If you interrupt it, the scan stops
immediately. The scan stops at the frequency at which it was interrupted until it is con-
tinued. While the scan is stopped, the receiver settings can be changed, e.g. for a
detailed analysis of the recorded trace. You have two options to continue the scan or
you can abort it.
● Continue at a set receiver frequency - "Continue at Rec Frequency".
The receiver frequency can be set to a frequency that was already measured. As
soon as the "Continue at Rec Frequency" softkey is pressed, the scan restarts at
this frequency. This function can be used repeat part of the measurement.
● Continue at the hold frequency - "Continue at Hold"
Resumes the scan at the frequency it has been interrupted.
● Continue at a spectrogram frame - "Continue at Frame"
Resumes the scan at a spectrogram frame that was already recorded.
● Stop the scan - "Abort Scan"
Aborts the scan.
Hold Scan....................................................................................................................167
Continue at Rec Frequency........................................................................................ 167
Continue at Hold......................................................................................................... 167
Continue at Frame...................................................................................................... 167
Stop Scan....................................................................................................................167

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 166

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurements and Result Displays

Hold Scan
Interrupts the scan and opens a submenu that contains functionality to control the
scan.
Data that has already been collected is kept in the memory.
Remote command:
HOLD on page 609

Continue at Rec Frequency

Resumes the scan at a set receiver frequency.
After "Hold", the receiver frequency can be set to a frequency that was already mea-
sured, i.e. which is lower than the frequency at which the scan was interrupted. As
soon as the "Continue at Rec Frequency" softkey is pressed, the scan restarts at this
frequency. This function can be used repeat part of the measurement.
If a frequency is set that is higher than the frequency at which the scan was interrupted
the scan continues at the frequency at which it was interrupted.
The scan is continued with the settings in the scan table.
Remote command:
HOLD on page 609
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer on page 634
INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] on page 610

Continue at Hold
Resumes the scan at the frequency it was interrupted.
The scan is continued with the settings in the scan table.
Remote command:
INITiate<n>:CONMeas on page 609

Continue at Frame
Resumes the scan at a previously recorded spectrogram frame.
The data recorded between the selected frame and the current frame is recorded
again, including minimum and maximum hold information.
Available for scans that are combined with a spectrogram measurement and the mini-
mum or maximum hold trace mode.
Remote command:
not supported

Stop Scan
Aborts the scan.
Data that has already been collected is lost.
Remote command:
ABORt on page 608

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 167

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurements and Result Displays

4.1.7.5 Final Measurement Control

The final measurement is started in the "Test Automation" menu . The R&S ESR pro-
vides two methods to perform a final measurement: an automatic and interactive final
measurement.
At the start of a final measurement, the R&S ESR opens a softkey menu to control the
measurement.
The measurement configuration is as defined in the scan table.

Sequence for automatic final measurements

Generally, the automatic final measurements requires no interactions. however, the
measurement can be interrupted, e.g. to change the mode or to analyze the signal in
detail.
► Press the "Hold Final Measurement" softkey.
The R&S ESR interrupts the measurement. While the measurement is interrupted,
the receiver settings can be changed in order to examine the signal in detail.

The interruption also changes the contents of the "Measurement" menu. Several
actions are available:
● Switch the mode of the final measurement ("Automatic" or "Interactive").
● Resume the final measurement ("Measure").
The final measurement starts or continues at the next entry of the peak list.
● Abort the final measurement ("Stop Final Measurement").
The collected data is lost.
After all frequencies in the peak list have been measured, the R&S ESR opens the
"Final Peak List" with the results for the final measurement.

Sequence for interactive final measurements

For an interactive final measurement, the R&S ESR initiates the following sequence.
1. The R&S ESR tunes to the first frequency in the peak list (or the next frequency).

2. The R&S ESR stops the measurement and positions a marker on the frequency.

3. If required, the frequency can be fine tuned, e.g. if the interferer has shifted. For
fine tuning, the bargraph display can be used to find the new peak value.
In addition, you have several options:
● Skip the current frequency ("Skip Frequency")
Positions the marker on the next frequency in the peak list without performing a
final measurement on the current frequency.
● Get maxhold result for the current frequency ("Get Maxhold")
Writes the maximum level that has been measured on this frequency during the
prescan to the final peak list without performing a final measurement.
● Stop the final measurement ("Stop Final Meas")

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 168

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurements and Result Displays

4. The level measurement on the current frequency is initiated after you press the
"Measure" softkey.

5. After the final measurement on the current frequency is done, the R&S ESR repla-
ces the scan result in the peak list with the result of the final measurement. If the
frequency has drifted compared to the one of the prescan, it also updates the fre-
quency in the peak list.

6. The R&S ESR moves to the next frequency in the peak list, positions the marker
on that frequency etc.

7. After all frequencies in the peak list are finished, the R&S ESR opens the "Final
Peak List" with the results for the final measurement.

Note that it is possible to start with an automatic measurement and later change into
interactive mode. Likewise, it is possible to start measuring in interactive mode and
later change into automatic mode.

Hold Final Measurement............................................................................................. 169

Automatic Final........................................................................................................... 169
Interactive Final...........................................................................................................169
Skip Frequency........................................................................................................... 169
Get Maxhold................................................................................................................170
Measure...................................................................................................................... 170
Stop Final Measurement............................................................................................. 170

Hold Final Measurement

Interrupts the final measurement and opens a submenu that contains functionality to
control the final measurement.
Data that has already been collected is kept in the memory.
Remote command:
HOLD on page 609

Automatic Final
Selects an automatic final measurement.
See also chapter 4.1.5, "Final Measurement", on page 158.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FMEasurement:AUTO on page 612

Interactive Final
Selects interactive final measurements.
See also chapter 4.1.5, "Final Measurement", on page 158.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FMEasurement:AUTO on page 612

Skip Frequency
Skips the peak list entry the final measurement is due to measure next and proceeds
with the next peak.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 169

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurements and Result Displays

Available for interactive final measurements.

Remote command:
-

Get Maxhold
Uses the highest level that was measured during the scan for the final results instead
of the signal level measured during the final measurement.
Remote command:
-

Measure
Initiates a final measurement on the current peak.
Available for interactive final measurements.
Remote command:
-

Stop Final Measurement

Aborts the final measurement.
Data that has already been collected is lost.
Remote command:
ABORt on page 608

4.1.7.6 Measurement Settings

The "Meas" menu contains the basic measurement settings and the selection of result
displays (chapter 4.1.7.2, "Selecting the Result Display", on page 164).

► Press the MEAS key.

The R&S ESR opens the "Measurement" menu.

Receiver Frequency.................................................................................................... 170

Bargraph Detector.......................................................................................................171
└ Couple to Scan Trace................................................................................... 171
Measurement Time..................................................................................................... 171
Demod.........................................................................................................................171
└ Demod (On Off)............................................................................................ 171
└ AM / FM........................................................................................................ 171
└ Squelch......................................................................................................... 171
Add To Peak List.........................................................................................................172
Test Automation.......................................................................................................... 172

Receiver Frequency
Defines the receiver frequency.
The tuning frequency has to be set to at least twice the IF bandwidth.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 170

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurements and Result Displays

When the tuning frequency is lower than twice the IF bandwidth, the IF bandwidth is
automatically reduced so that this condition is met again.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer on page 634

Bargraph Detector
Opens a submenu to select the detector for the bargraph result display.
Each detector you select adds another bargraph to the result display. Up to four bar-
graphs at the same time are possible.
For more information see chapter 4.2.3, "Detectors", on page 176.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] on page 607

Couple to Scan Trace ← Bargraph Detector

Couples or decouples the bargraph detector and scan detectors.
If on, the R&S ESR does as follows.
● Turns on a scan detector for every active bargraph.
If you add a new bargraph detector, the corresponding scan trace is automatically
turned on.
● Matches the scan trace number to the number of the bargraph.
● Matches the color of the scan trace to a particular bargraph detector.
If you couple bargraph and scan trace, the R&S ESR replaces the detectors of all other
active scan traces with the new detector type.
Remote command:
DISPlay:BARGraph:TCOupling[:STATe] on page 607

Measurement Time
Defines the measurement time for a scan and the bargraph.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME on page 608

Demod
Opens a submenu to configure AM or FM demodulation.

Demod (On Off) ← Demod

Turns demodulation at the receiver frequency on and off.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]DEMod on page 617

AM / FM ← Demod
Selects AM or FM demodulation.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]DEMod on page 617

Squelch ← Demod
Defines the minimum level for the signal to be demodulated.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 171

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurements and Result Displays

For more information see chapter 4.2.5, "AF Demodulation", on page 182.
Remote command:
Turning on the squelch:
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe] on page 617
Defining a squelch level:
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch:LEVel on page 617

Add To Peak List

Adds the current receiver frequency to the peak list.
Remote command:
-

Test Automation
Opens a dialog box to configure automated test sequences.
For more information see chapter 4.3.7, "Test Automation", on page 196.
Remote command:
-

4.1.7.7 Spectrogram Configuration

The "MeasConfig" menu contains functionality to configure the spectrogram.

The R&S ESR provides two spectrograms in receiver mode: one for scans and one for
IF analysis. You can configure the spectrograms independently from one another. The
R&S ESR saves the settings accordingly.

► Press the MEAS CONFIG key.

The R&S ESR opens the "MeasConfig" menu.

Clear Spectrogram...................................................................................................... 172

History Depth.............................................................................................................. 172
Color Mapping.............................................................................................................173
Trace to Spectrogram................................................................................................. 173

Clear Spectrogram
Clears the contents of the spectrogram.
If you clear the spectrogram of either scan or IF analysis, the other one remains in the
internal memory of the R&S ESR.

History Depth
Defines the amount of frames that the R&S ESR is able to store in its memory.
The R&S ESR can store a maximum of 100.000 frames. However, the actual size of
the history buffer depends on the measurement configuration.
Using markers, you can recall the traces to any of the frames in the history buffer. The
R&S ESR shows the trace to the frame the marker is currently on.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 172

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurement Basics

Color Mapping
Opens a dialog box to define the color map of the spectrogram.
For more information see chapter 4.1.6.2, "Color Map", on page 160.

1 = Color map: shows the current color distribution

2 = Preview pane: shows a preview of the spectrogram with any changes that you make to the color
scheme
3 = Color curve pane: graphic representation of all settings available to customize the color scheme
4 = Color range start and stop sliders: define the range of the color map (amplitudes for the spectrogram)
5 = Color curve slider: adjusts the focus of the color curve
6 = Histogram: shows the distribution of measured values
7 = Color range start and stop: numerical input to define the range of the color map
8 = Color curve: numerical input to define the shape of the color curve
9 = Color scheme selection
10 = Auto button: automatically sets the value range of the color map
11 = Default button: resets the color settings
12 = Close button: closes the dialog box

Remote command:
See "Configuring Spectrograms" on page 618

Trace to Spectrogram
Selects the trace the spectrogram is coupled to.
The availability depends on how many traces you are have turned on in the scan or IF
analysis. You cannot assign a spectrogram to a "Blank" trace.
Remote command:
CALCulate:SGRam:TRACe on page 620

4.2 Measurement Basics

Measurement basics explain various terms and principles used in the context of EMI
measurements. They also assist you in finding the right configuration for your mea-
surement tasks.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 173

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurement Basics

● Measurement Bandwidth...................................................................................... 174

● Measurement Time............................................................................................... 175
● Detectors...............................................................................................................176
● Trace Modes......................................................................................................... 180
● AF Demodulation.................................................................................................. 182
● V-Networks Control (LISN)....................................................................................182
● Transducers.......................................................................................................... 184
● Preamplifier........................................................................................................... 185
● Exported Peak List................................................................................................ 185
● Formats for Returned Values: ASCII Format and Binary Format..........................186

4.2.1 Measurement Bandwidth

The measurement bandwidth ("RES BW") defines the bandwidth of the resolution filter.
The RF signal is evaluated and displayed according to the bandpass characteristics of
the resolution filter.
The receiver mode supports the following types of resolution filter.
● Filters with a 3 dB bandwidth (normal filters).
The R&S ESR provides bandwidths from 10 Hz to 10 MHz with a stepsize of
1-2-3-5-10-...
● Filters with a 6 dB bandwidth (EMI filters).
The 6 dB bandwidths are designed and required for EMI tests and measurements.
The R&S ESR provides the following bandwidths that comply to commercial and
military standards:
– 10 Hz (with option R&S ESR-B29)
– 100 Hz (with option R&S ESR-B29)
– 200 Hz (CISPR bandwidth)
– 1 kHz (with option R&S ESR-B29)
– 9 kHz (CISPR bandwidth)
– 100 kHz (with option R&S ESR-B29)
– 120 kHz (CISPR bandwidth)
– 1 MHz (CISPR bandwidth)
Note that the available bandwidth is limited by the current receiver frequency. The
measurement bandwidth must be less than or equal to half of the current receiver fre-
quency:
BW ≤ fin / 2

Additional 6 dB bandwidths
Installing option R&S ESR-B29 adds additional 6 dB bandwidths that are specified for
and comply to MIL, DO and automotive standards.

The resolution filters are implemented as digital Gaussian bandpass filters. Concerning
the attenuation characteristic, the filters behave like analog filters, but their measure-

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 174

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurement Basics

ment speed is much higher than the measurement speed of comparable analog filters.
This is due to the fact that the transient response can be compensated because the
filters have an accurately defined behavior.
The highest sensitivity is obtained at the smallest bandwidth (10 Hz). If the bandwidth
is increased, the reduction in sensitivity is proportional to the change in bandwidth.
Increasing the bandwidth by a factor of 3 increases the displayed noise by approx.
5 dB (4.77 dB precisely). If the bandwidth is increased by a factor of 10, the displayed
noise increases by a factor of 10, i.e. 10 dB.
The higher spectral resolution with smaller bandwidths leads to longer measurement
times at each frequency, because the measurement time has to allow the resolution fil-
ters to settle during a sweep at all signal levels and frequencies to be displayed.
For large measurement bandwidths, signal parts that are very far away (e.g. from a dif-
ferent signal) are considered in the measurement and distort the results. The displayed
noise increases.
For small measurement bandwidths, the measurement time increases.

Bandwidths and detectors

If you use the Quasipeak, CISPR Average or RMS Average detector, the R&S ESR by
default couples the resolution bandwidth to the receiver frequency.
If you need a different bandwidth, you can decouple the bandwidth from the frequency.
When decoupled, you can select any of the supported CISPR bandwidths.

4.2.2 Measurement Time

The measurement time is the time during which the R&S ESR measures the input sig-
nal and forms a measurement result weighted by the selected detector. The measure-
ment time does not include settling times of the synthesizer and the IF filter. The
R&S ESR automatically waits until transients are over.
The measurement time can be set in the range from 50 µs to 100 s.
The measurement time has the following restrictions.
● When you use the Quasipeak detector, the minimum measurement time is 0.5 ms.
● When you use the CISPR Average or RMS Average detector, the minimum mea-
surement time depends on the CISPR band.
– 50 ms for Band A
– 1 ms for Band B
– 100 µs for Bands C/D/E
● When you use the Max Peak, Min Peak, Average or RMS detectors, the minimum
measurement time depends on the selected resolution bandwidth.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 175

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurement Basics

Table 4-1: Smallest possible measurement time for Max Peak, min Peak, Average or RMS detectors

Bandwidth Max and Min Peak Average and RMS

≤ 100 Hz 10 ms 1s

100 Hz 1 ms 100 ms

200 Hz to 500 Hz 1 ms 50 ms

1 kHz to 5 kHz 100 µs 10 ms

9 kHz to 50 kHz 100 µs 1 ms

≥ 100 kHz 50 µs 100 µs

Measurement time for time domain scans in the frequency domain

The available measurement times for time domain scans depend on the resolution
bandwidth.
Table 4-2: Possible measurement times for time domain scans

Resolution bandwidth Min. measurement time Max. measurement time

10 Hz to 50 Hz 10 ms 100 s

100 Hz to 500 Hz 1 ms 100 s

1 kHz to 30 kHz 100 µs 100 s

50 kHz 100 µs 50 s

100 kHz to 120 kHz 10 µs 30 s

200 kHz 10 µs 16 s

300 kHz 10 µs 10 s

500 kHz 10 µs 6s

1 MHz 10 µs 3s

4.2.3 Detectors

The task of the detector is to determine which of the samples that have been recorded
are displayed for each sweep point. The result obtained from the selected detector for
a sweep point is displayed as the signal level at this frequency point in the trace.
The detectors of the R&S ESR are implemented as digital devices. All detectors work
in parallel in the background, which means that the measurement speed is independ-
ent of the detector combination used for different traces.
The receiver mode of the R&S ESR provides several detectors, including detectors
that are especially designed for and required by EMI applications.
You can use several detectors at the same time. The combined use of several detec-
tors (multiple detection) is important for EMI measurements. This is due to specifica-
tions in the standards, for example commercial standards specifiy limits for quasipeak
and average values. In that case, multiple detection requires only one measurement.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 176

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurement Basics

The R&S ESR allows you to use different detectors for the bargraph, scan and final
measurement.

Maximum and Minimum peak detector

The max/min detector yields the maximum/minimum level occurred during the set mea-
surement time. The peak detector is reset at the beginning of each measurement.
Regarding measurement time,
● unmodulated signals can be measured with the shortest possible measurement
time.
● for pulses, the selected measurement time must be long enough for at least one
pulse to occur during the measurement time.
The peak detectors are digital detectors. Therefore, discharging is irrelevant even with
long measurement times.

Average detector
The average detector yields the average level of the samples of the samples measured
during the set measurement time.
With average detection selected, the video voltage (envelope of IF signal) is averaged
during the measurement time. Averaging is digital, i.e. the digitized values of the video
voltage are summed up and divided by the number of samples at the end of the mea-
surement time. This corresponds to a filtering with a rectangular window in the time
domain and a filtering with sin x/x characteristic in the frequency domain.
With modulated signals the measurement time is determined by the lowest modulation
frequency to be averaged. With pulse signals, the selected measurement time should
be long enough for sufficient number of pulses (>10) to occur in the measurement win-
dow for averaging.
Regarding measurement time,
● with unmodulated signals the shortest possible measurement time can be selected.
● with modulated signals the measurement time is determined by the lowest modula-
tion frequency to be averaged.
● with pulse signals, the selected measurement time should be long enough for suffi-
cient number of pulses (>10) to occur in the measurement window for averaging.

Average and RMS detector in Time Domain Scan

Note that it is not possible to use the Average detector and the RMS detector at the
same time when performing a Time Domain Scan.

RMS detector
The RMS detector evaluates the root mean square (RMS) value over the specified
measurement time and displays the resulting value. The integration time is the speci-
fied measurement time.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 177

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurement Basics

Regarding measurement time,

● with unmodulated signals the shortest possible measurement time can be selected.
● with modulated signals the measurement time is determined by the lowest modula-
tion frequency to be averaged.
● with pulse signals, the selected measurement time should be long enough for suffi-
cient number of pulses (>10) to occur in the measurement window for averaging.

RMS detector and VBW

If the RMS detector is selected, the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed.
Thus, duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS detector no longer occurs.
However, the VBW is still considered when calculating the measurement time. This
leads to a longer sweep time for small VBW values. Thus, you can reduce the VBW
value to achieve more stable trace curves even when using an RMS detector. Nor-
mally, if the RMS detector is used the measurement time should be increased to get
more stable traces.

Sample detector
The sample detector displays the instantaneous value of the level at a pixel. It routes
through the sampled data without any further evaluation.
The sample detector is used for IF analysis and for noise or phase noise marker calcu-
lation in analyzer mode. However, it is unreliable if the displayed span is much wider
than the resolution bandwidth or if the tuning steps of the local oscillator are too large.

Quasipeak detector
The quasipeak detector yields the maximum detected value weighted to CISPR 16-1-1
that was detected during the measurement time.
Depending on the set frequency, the R&S ESR automatically selects the detectors and
IF bandwidths defined for bands A, B and C/D listed in the following table:

Band A Band B Band C/D

Frequency range < 150 kHz 150 kHz to 30 MHz > 30 MHz

Resolution bandwidth 200 Hz 9 kHz 120 kHz

Charge time constant 45 ms 1 ms 1 ms

Discharge time constant 500 ms 160 ms 550 ms

Time constant of the 160 ms 160 ms 100 ms

mechanical device

The coupling of the resolution bandwidth to the frequency range with activated quasi-
peak detector can be cancelled using the "CISPR RBW uncoupled" softkey.
Regarding measurement time, the relatively long time constants used with quasipeak
detectors entail long measurement times to obtain correct results.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 178

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurement Basics

● With unknown signals the measurement time should be at least 1 s. This ensures
correct weighting of pulses down to a pulse frequency of 5 Hz.
● With known signals much shorter measurement times can be used.
After internal switching, the R&S ESRwaits until the measurement result has stabi-
lized before it starts the actual measurement. Since the level does not change dur-
ing a frequency scan, known signals (e.g. broadband RFI) can be correctly mea-
sured with a much shorter measurement time.

CISPR Average detector

The CISPR Average detector yields a weighted average signal level according to
CISPR 16-1-1. The average value according to CISPR 16-1-1 is the maximum value of
the linear average during the set measurement time.
The detector is used, for example, to measure pulsed sinusoidal signals with a low
pulse frequency. It is calibrated with the rms value of an unmodulated sinusoidal sig-
nal. Averaging is with lowpass filters of the 2nd order (simulation of a mechanical
instrument).
The lowpass time constants and the IF bandwidths are fixed depending on the fre-
quency. The main parameters are listed in the following table:

Band A Band B Band C/D Band E

Frequency range < 150 kHz 150 kHz to 30 MHz 30 MHz to 1 GHz > 1 GHz

Resolution band- 200 Hz 9 kHz 120 kHz 1 MHz

width

Time constant of 160 ms 160 ms 100 ms 100 ms

the mechanical
device

The coupling of the resolution bandwidth to the frequency range with activated CISPR
average detector can be cancelled using the "CISPR RBW uncoupled" softkey.
Regarding measurement time, the relatively long time constants used with CISPR
average and RMS average detector result in long measurement times in order to
obtain a correct measurement result.
● With unknown signals the measurement time should be at least 1 s. This ensures
correct weighting of pulses down to a pulse frequency of 5 Hz.
● With unmodulated sinusoidal signals as well as signals with high modulation fre-
quency much shorter measurement times can be used.
● Slowly fluctuating signals or pulse signals require longer measurement times.

Measurement times shorter than 20 ms

With measurement times shorter than 20 ms the detector weighting changes to plain
average weighting.

When you change the receiver frequency or the attenuation, the R&S ESR waits until
the the lowpass filter has settled before starting the measurement. The measurement

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 179

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurement Basics

time in that case depends on the resolution bandwidth and the characteristics of the
signal.

RMS Average detector

The RMS Average detector is a combination of the RMS detector (for pulse repetition
frequencies above a corner frequency) and the Average detector (for pulse repetition
frequencies below the corner frequency). It thus achieves a pulse response curve with
the following characteristics: 10 dB/decade above the corner frequency and 20 dB/
decade below the corner frequency. The average value is determined by lowpass fil-
ters of the 2nd order (simulation of a mechanical instrument).
The detector is used, for example, to measure broadband emissions and may replace
the quasipeak detector in the future.
The filter bandwidth and time constants of the detector are coupled to the receiver fre-
quency.
Table 4-3: RMS Average detector

Band A Band B Band C/D Band E

Frequency range < 150 kHz 150 kHz to 30 MHz 30 MHz to 1 GHz > 1 GHz

Resolution band- 200 Hz 9 kHz 120 kHz 1 MHz

width

Time constant of 160 ms 160 ms 100 ms 100 ms

the mechanical
device

Corner frequency 10 Hz 100 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz

Regarding measurement time, see CISPR Average detector.

Measurement times shorter than 20 ms

With measurement times shorter than 20 ms the detector weighting changes to plain
RMS weighting.

4.2.4 Trace Modes

The traces can be activated individually for a measurement or frozen after a measure-
ment has been performed. Traces that are not active are not visible. Each time the
trace mode is changed, the selected trace memory is cleared.
Note that in Spectrum mode, the Max Hold and Min Hold modes are unavailable for
statistics measurements.

Clear Write
Overwrite mode: the trace is overwritten by each sweep. This is the default setting.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 180

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurement Basics

All available detectors can be selected.

Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE WRIT, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE
on page 652

Max Hold
The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed. The R&S ESR
saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the
previous one.
This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals. The signal spectrum
is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of enve-
lope.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE MAXH, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE
on page 652

Min Hold
The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed. The
R&S ESR saves the smallest of the previously stored/currently measured values in the
trace memory.
This mode is useful e.g. for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visi-
ble. Noise, interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW
signal is recognized by its constant level.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE MINH, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE
on page 652

View
The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed.
Note: If a trace is frozen, the instrument settings, apart from level range and reference
level (see below), can be changed without impact on the displayed trace. The fact that
the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the
icon on the tab label.
If the level range or reference level is changed, the R&S ESR automatically adapts the
measured data to the changed display range. This allows an amplitude zoom to be
made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE VIEW, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE
on page 652

Blank
Hides the selected trace.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC OFF, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe] on page 820

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 181

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurement Basics

4.2.5 AF Demodulation

Risk of hearing damage when using headphones

To protect your hearing, make sure that the volume setting is not too high before put-
ting on the headphones.
The volume for the headphones is controlled using the rotary knob next to the "AF Out-
put" interface on the front panel of the instrument or with the SYSTem:SPEaker:
VOLume command.

The R&S ESR provides demodulators for AM and FM signals. With these demodula-
tors, a displayed signal can be identified and monitor acoustically through the use of
the internal loudspeaker or with headphones.
The R&S ESR demodulates the signal on the receiver frequency in a bandwidth corre-
sponding to the resolution bandwidth to the audio output.
A squelch function that is linked to the video trigger defines the level that the signal
must at least have to be demodulated. If you turn the squelch on, the R&S ESR auto-
matically turns on the video trigger. The squelch level and trigger level are the same.

4.2.6 V-Networks Control (LISN)

For measurements with power lines, the R&S ESR provides functionality to directly
control a line impedance stabilization network (LISN). The configuration is then taken
into account in the scan and final measurement.
You can connect the LISN with an adapter (R&S EZ-27, order no. 1142.8271.02) to the
userport that controls the phases during the scan and the final measurement. The
R&S ESR supports several V-networks.
● Four-line V-networks
– R&S ESH2-Z5
– R&S ENV4200
– R&S ENV432
● Two-line V-networks
– R&S ESH3-Z5
– R&S ENV216
For the R&S ENV216 network, a 150 kHz high pass filter is available for protection of
the input.
After selecting the type of network, you can define the phase you want to test for inter-
ferences. Phase N and L1 are available for two-line networks. Four-line networks in
addition have access to phase L2 and L3.
● During scans, you can control several phases simultaneously.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 182

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurement Basics

● During final measurements the R&S ESR supports the control of several phases.
When you select more than one phase, the R&S ESR measures all phase combi-
nations and determines the maximum value.
For an automatic phase selection with the networks, a connection between the
R&S ESR and network has to be established with a control line. To connect the control
line to the R&S ESR, adapter R&S EZ-27 is required. The following illustrations show
the right PIN assignment.
R&S Receiver Adapter Pin ESH2-Z5
Pin (9-pol  25-pol) Filter Pin
N 2 14 46 N
L1 6 15 21 L1
L2 7 16 22 L2
L3 4 17 23 L3
GND 8 12 50 GND
PE fl 3 18 47 PE fl
+5 V 1 13 48 +5 V

Fig. 4-5: Connection from R&S ESR to R&S ESH2-Z5

R&S Receiver Adapter Pin ESH3-Z5

Pin (9-pol  25-pol) Filter Pin
N 2 14 2 N
L 6 15 6 L
PE fl 3 18 3 PE flo
DGND 8 12 8 DGND
+5 V 1 13 1 +5 V

Fig. 4-6: Connection from R&S ESR to R&S ESH3-Z5

R&S Receiver Adapter Pin ENV216

Pin (9-pol  25-pol) Filter Pin
N 2 14 14 N
L 6 15 15 L
PE fl 3 18 18 PE flo
DGND 8 12 12 DGND
+5 V 1 13 13 +5 V

Fig. 4-7: Connection from R&S ESR to R&S ESH216

R&S Receiver Adapter Pin ENV4200 / ENV432

Pin (9-pol  25-pol) Filter Pin
N 2 14 14 N
L1 6 15 15 L1
L2 7 16 16 L2
L3 4 17 17 L3
GND 8 12 12 GND
+5 V 1 13 13 +5 V

Fig. 4-8: Connection from R&S ESR to R&S ENV4200 or R&S ENV432

To control the phase selection and PE simulating network of the V-Networks

R&S ESH2-Z5, R&S ESH3-Z5, R&S ENV4200 and R&S ENV432, the +5 V supply volt-
age and some control lines have to be routed through the wall of the shielded room.
You can also use a direct connection without a filter, e.g. when you use the R&S ESR
in a shielded room. In that case, you can use the following cables.
● R&S ESH2-Z5: EZ-5, EZ-13, EZ14

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 183

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurement Basics

● R&S ESH3-Z5: EZ-6, EZ-14

● R&S ENV216: EZ14
● R&S ENV4200 and R&S ENV432: EZ-14, EZ-21

4.2.7 Transducers

A transducer is often connected ahead of the R&S ESR both during the measurement
of useful signals and EMI and converts the useful or interference variable such as field
strength, current or RFI voltage into a voltage across 50 Ω. Because most transducers
such as antennas, probes or current probes have a characteristic frequency response,
it is necessary to correct the measurement results by the frequency characteristics of
the transducer. These characteristics are defined in a transducer factor or transducer
sets. The transducer factor can be stored in the R&S ESR and automatically has the
correct unit during level measurement.
If a transducer is switched on it is considered as part of the unit during the measure-
ment, i.e. the measured values are displayed in the correct unit and magnitude. When
working with two measurement windows, the transducer is always assigned to two win-
dows.
The R&S ESR distinguishes between transducer factor and transducer set.
A transducer factor takes the frequency response of a single transfer element, e.g. an
antenna into consideration. A transducer set can summarize different transducer fac-
tors in several subranges (several transducer factors at the same time), e.g. an
antenna, a cable and a diplexer.

Transducer factors
A transducer factor takes the frequency response of a single transfer element into
account. It consists of a series of reference values defined with frequency, transducer
factor and the unit. For the measurement between frequency values linear or logarith-
mic interpolation of the transducer factor can be chosen. The transducer factor may
consist of up to 625 reference values.

Transducer sets
Several transducer factors can be compiled in a transducer set provided that all factors
have the same unit or unit "dB". The frequency range covered by a set can be subdivi-
ded into max. 10 subranges (each with up to 4 transducer factors) which follow each
other without a gap, i.e. the stop frequency of a subrange is the start frequency of the
next subrange.
The transducer factors used in a subrange have to fully cover the subrange.
The definition of a transducer set is recommended if different transducers are used in
the frequency range to be measured or if a cable attenuation or an amplifier has to be
taken into consideration.
If a transducer set is defined during a frequency sweep, the latter can be stopped at
the interface between two transducer ranges and the user is asked to exchange the
transducer.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 184

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurement Basics

A message informs that the limit has been reached. It is possible either to continue the
sweep by confirming the message or to switch off the transducer. With the automatic
switchover of the transducer used, the frequency sweep is not interrupted.

Transducer management
The R&S ESR provides functionality to store and use the transducer factors during a
measurement.
For more information on creating and managing transducer factors see "Transducer"
on page 516.

4.2.8 Preamplifier

Switching on the preamplifer reduces the noise figure of the R&S ESR, thus increasing
the sensitivity. The preamplifier follows the preselection filters so that the risk of an
overload by strong out-of-band signals is reduced to a minimum. For frequencies
between 100 Hz to 7 GHz, the signal level of the subsequent mixer is 20 dB higher so
that the maximum input level is reduced by the gain of the preamplifier. For frequen-
cies above 7 GHz, the gain is 30 dB.
The use of the preamplifier is recommended when measurements with a maximum
sensitivity are to be performed. If the measurement should be performed at maximum
dynamic range, the preamplifier should be switched off.
The gain of the preamplifier is automatically considered in the level display. The disad-
vantage of a poorer large-signal immunity (intermodulation) is reduced by the connec-
ted preselector.

4.2.9 Exported Peak List

When you export the (final) peak list, the results are saved in an ASCII file. The con-
tents of the file are split into several section.
● The header contains general information about the measurement and instrument
settings and characteristics.
It consists of three columns, separated by a semicolon: parameter name; numeric
value; unit
● The data section contains information about the evaluation of the data and the con-
tents of the peak list.
The data section always starts with Trace <n> [Final]:.
Table 4-4: Example of an exported peak list with a description of the contents

Type;ESR-7; instrument model and type

Version;1.76; Firmware version

Date;07.May 12; Date of the export

Mode;Receiver; Operating mode

Start;150000.000000;Hz Start frequency

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 185

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurement Basics

Stop;1000000000.000000;Hz Stop frequency

x-axis;log; X-axis scaling

Scan count;1; Number of scans in a single measurement

Transducer;Antenna;;;;;;; Active transducer(s)

Scan <x>: Results for scan range <x>

Start;150000.000000;Hz Start frequency of scan range <x>

Stop;30000000.000000;Hz Stop frequency of scan range <x>

Step;4000.000000;Hz Frequency stepsize in scan range <x>

RBW;9000.000000;Hz Resolution bandwidth in scan range <x>

Meas time;0.001000;s Measurement time in scan range <x>

Auto ranging;OFF; Autoranging state for scn range <x>

RF Att;10.000000;dB RF attenuation level in scan range <x>

Auto Preamp;OFF; Auto preamplification state for scan range <x>

Preamp;0.000000;dB Preamplification state for scan range <x>

TRACE <x> FINAL Peak list contents for trace <x> after scan [or final
measurement]

Trace Mode;CLR/WRITE; Trace mode for trace <x>

Detector;QUASI PEAK; Detector for trace <x>

x-Unit;Hz; Unit of the x-axis

y-Unit;dBµV; Unit of the y-axis

Final Meas Time;1.000000;s Final measurement time

Margin;6.000000;dB Margin of the peaks

Value;26; Number of result values

1;2150000.000000;84.210000;;; Peak list entries:

1;6150000.000000;84.210000;;; <Trace>;<Frequency>;<Level>;<DeltaLi-
mit>;<Phase>;<Unused>

etc.

4.2.10 Formats for Returned Values: ASCII Format and Binary Format

ASCII Format (FORMat ASCII)

The command reads out a list of comma separated values (CSV) of the measured val-
ues in floating point format.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 186

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Measurement Basics

Reading out data in binary format is quicker than in ASCII format. Thus, binary format
is recommended for large amounts of data.

Binary Format (FORMat REAL,32)

The command reads out binary data (Definite Length Block Data according to IEEE
488.2), each measurement value being formatted in 32 Bit IEEE 754 Floating-Point-
Format.
Depending on the number of samples to be transferred, 2 different kinds of syntax are
used:
For <1010 samples:
The schema of the result string is as follows:
#<NoOfDigits><NoOfDataBytes><value1><value2>…<value n>, with

# Header prefix, 1 byte

<NoOfDigits> Number of digits of the following number of data bytes (= 4 in the example), 1 byte

<NoOfDataBytes> Number of following data bytes in decimal form (= 1024 in the example), 1...9 bytes

<Value> Data values, each one is a 4-byte floating point value

Example:
#41024<value1><value2>…<value 256>
4: the following number of data bytes has 4 digits
1024: 1024 Bytes of following data; float: 4 Bytes / value => 1024 / 4 = 256 values (128
I and 128 Q values)
<value x>: 4 Byte values, must be interpreted as float
For ≧1010 samples:
The schema of the result string is as follows:
#(<NoOfDataBytes>)<value1><value2>…<value n>, with

# Header prefix, 1 byte

( 1 byte

<NoOfDataBytes> number of following data bytes (= 1024 in the example), 10 bytes

) 1 byte

<Value> Data values, each one is a 4-byte floating point value

Example:
#(1677721600)<value 1><value 2> ... <value 419430400>
(1677721600): 1677721600 Bytes of following data; float: 4 Bytes / value ==>
1677721600/ 4 = 419430400 values (200Ms I and 200Ms Q values)

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 187

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Measurement Settings

<value x>: 4 Byte values, must be interpreted as float

4.3 Common Measurement Settings

● Defining the Frequency and Span.........................................................................188
● Configuring the Level Display and the RF Input....................................................190
● Selecting the Bandwidth........................................................................................193
● Configuring the Scan.............................................................................................194
● Configuring the Trigger ........................................................................................ 195
● Controlling Inputs and Outputs..............................................................................196
● Test Automation.................................................................................................... 196

4.3.1 Defining the Frequency and Span

The frequency and span settings define the scope of the signal to be analyzed. The
settings are available in the FREQ and SPAN menus.
Span settings and signal tracking are only available for IF Analysis (firmware applica-
tion R&S ESR-K56).
Receiver Frequency.................................................................................................... 188
Stepsize...................................................................................................................... 188
Start / Stop Frequency................................................................................................ 189
IF Span Manual...........................................................................................................189
Full Span..................................................................................................................... 189
Last Span.................................................................................................................... 190
Signal Track................................................................................................................ 190

Receiver Frequency
Defines the receiver frequency.
The tuning frequency has to be set to at least twice the IF bandwidth.
When the tuning frequency is lower than twice the IF bandwidth, the IF bandwidth is
automatically reduced so that this condition is met again.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer on page 634

Stepsize
Opens a submenu to define the receiver frequency step size.
By default, the frequency step size is coupled to the receiver frequency. Alternatively,
you can define a custom step size.
"Auto Coarse" The step size is coupled to the receiver frequency.
When you change the frequency with the rotary knob, the R&S ESR
increases or decreases the 4th digit of the receiver frequency.
When you change the frequency with the cursor keys, the R&S ESR
increases or decreases the 2nd digit of the receiver frequency.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 188

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Measurement Settings

"Auto Fine" The step size is coupled to the receiver frequency.

When you change the frequency with the rotary knob, the R&S ESR
increases or decreases the 7th digit of the receiver frequency.
When you change the frequency with the cursor keys, the R&S ESR
increases or decreases the 5th digit of the receiver frequency.
"Stepsize Man- The step size is a fixed custom value.
ual" When you change the frequency with the rotary knob, the R&S ESR
increases or decreases the frequency by 1 % of the manual step size.
When you change the frequency with the cursor keys, the R&S ESR
increases or decreases the frequency by the manual step size.
"Stepsize = The step size is equal to the current receiver frequency.
Freq" Defining a step size equal to the receiver frequency is useful during
measurements of the harmonic content of a signal. Each change of
the receiver frequency with the cursor key or the rotary knob selects
the next harmonic.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP on page 634

Start / Stop Frequency

Defines the start and stop frequency for the scan.
The range for the start frequency is fmin to (fmax - 10 Hz).
The range for the stop frequency is (fmin + 10 Hz) to fmax.
fmin and fmax are defined in the datasheet.
Remote command:
Start frequency:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt on page 635
Stop frequency:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP on page 636

IF Span Manual
Defines the span for IF spectrum analysis.
The receiver (center) frequency is kept constant. Possible span values are in the range
from 10 kHz to 10 MHz.
Available for IF Analysis (firmware application R&S ESR-K56).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN on page 795

Full Span
Restores the span to the full available frequency range.
The full span is specified in the data sheet.
In receiver mode, full span is available for IF Analysis and is limited to 10 MHz.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL on page 795

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 189

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Measurement Settings

Last Span
Sets the span to the previous value. With this function e.g. a fast change between
overview measurement and detailed measurement is possible.
Remote command:
-

Signal Track
Opens a submenu to define and enable the signal tracking:
● search bandwidth
● threshold value
● trace
Signal tracking is available for IF analysis and is defined in the FREQ menu. After each
sweep the center frequency is set to the maximum signal found within the searched
bandwidth. If no maximum signal above the set threshold value is found in the
searched bandwidth, the track mechanism stops.
For a description of the softkeys of the submenu, see "Signal Track (span > 0)"
on page 356.

4.3.2 Configuring the Level Display and the RF Input

The settings to define the level display range for the scan and to configure the RF input
are available in the AMPT menu.
RF Atten Manual......................................................................................................... 190
Preamp On/Off............................................................................................................ 191
10 dB Min.................................................................................................................... 191
Auto Range (On Off)................................................................................................... 191
Auto Preamp (On Off)................................................................................................. 191
Unit..............................................................................................................................192
└ dBx/MHz....................................................................................................... 192
Grid Range / Grid Min Level........................................................................................192
Input 50 Ω/75 Ω ..........................................................................................................193

RF Atten Manual
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the attenuation.
The RF attenuation defines the level at the input mixer according to the formula:
levelmixer = levelinput – RF attenuation + RF preamplifier gain
You can attenuate the signal in 5 dB steps. The range is specified in the data sheet.
Note that receiver mode, an attenuation of 10 dB or less is possible only if you turn 10
dB Min off.
Note: The maximum mixer level allowed is 0 dBm. Mixer levels above this value may
lead to incorrect measurement results, which are indicated by the "OVLD" status dis-
play. The increased mixer level allows for an improved signal, but also increases the
risk of overloading the instrument.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 190

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Measurement Settings

When measuring spurious emissions in spectrum mode, this softkey automatically

opens the "Sweep List" dialog box, see "Sweep List dialog box" on page 298.
Remote command:
INPut:ATTenuation on page 637

Preamp On/Off
Switches the preamplifier on and off.
Remote command:
INPut:GAIN:STATe on page 638

10 dB Min
Determines whether the 10 dB setting of the attenuator may be used in the manual or
automatic setting of the attenuator.
If on, the attenuation level is always at least 10 dB to protect the input mixer and avoid
accidental setting of 0 dB, especially if you measure DUTs with high RFI voltage.
"10dB Min" ON is the default value, i.e. an RF attenuation of at least 10 dB is always
set on the R&S ESR to protect the input mixer.
An attenuation of 0 dB cannot be set manually either. This avoids 0 dB being switched
on inadvertently, particularly when DUTs with high RFI voltage are measured.
Remote command:
INPut:ATTenuation:PROTection[:STATe] on page 638

Auto Range (On Off)

Turns automatic configuration of the attenuation level on and off.
If off, the R&S ESR uses the manual RF attenuation that you have defined.
If on, the R&S ESR defines an attenuation level that results in a good S/N ration with-
out overloading the receiver stages. Note that it is possible that the R&S ESR does not
utilize the maximum possible dynamic range. However, measurement results are still
valid in that case, because it is ensured that performing scans does not result in an
overload.
NOTICE! Risk of damage to the input mixer. If you apply a 0 dB RF attenuation in com-
bination with auto ranging, make sure that the signal level at the RF input does not
exceed the allowed limits.
Exceeding the limit might damage the input mixer.
Do not use a 0 dB attenuation under any circumstances when you measure RFI volt-
age (or unknown signals) in combination with an artificial network, because such a test
setup generates very high pulses during phase switching.
Remote command:
INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO on page 638

Auto Preamp (On Off)

Turns automatic selection of the preamplifier state on and off.
If on, the R&S ESR considers the preamplifier in the autorange process.The preampli-
fier is cut in when the RF attenuation is reduced to the minimum settable value.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 191

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Measurement Settings

If off, the preamplifier is not considered in the autorange procedure.

Remote command:
INPut:GAIN:AUTO on page 638

Unit
Selects the unit displayed on the vertical axis.
The unit on the vertical axis represents the unit the results are evaluated in. You can
select one of the following units: dBm, dBµV, dBpW, dBµA, dBmV, dBpT.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer on page 636

dBx/MHz ← Unit
Turns the display of results in units relative to a 1 MHz bandwidth on and off.
You can normalize the following units to 1 MHz.

Unit Relative unit

dBµV dBµV/MHz

dBµV/m dBµV/mMHz
(Available for active transducers only.)

dBmV dBmV/MHz

dBµA dBµA/MHz

dBµA/m dBµA/mMHz
(Available for active transducers only.)

dBpW dBpW/MHz

dBpT dBpT/MHz

The conversion to 1 MHz bandwidth is realized via the pulse bandwidth of the selected
resolution bandwidth.

Example:
Conversion example for dbµV:

 B imp [MHz] 
P[dBµV/MHz]  P[dBµV]  20  log  

 1MHz 
P = Displayed level
Bimp = Pulse bandwidth of the selected RBW

If you are using another unit, replace "dBµV" with the corresponding unit.

The conversion is also possible when a transducer defines the used unit.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer on page 636

Grid Range / Grid Min Level

Defines the scale of the vertical diagram axis.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 192

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Measurement Settings

The display ranges go from 10 to 200 dB in 10-dB steps. Invalid entries are rounded off
to the nearest valid value.
"Grid Range" Defines the level display range for the scan diagram.
"Grid Min Defines the minimum level of the display range.
Level"
Remote command:
Defining the range of the grid:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe] on page 814
Defining the minimum level displayed on the axis:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:BOTTom on page 636

Input 50 Ω/75 Ω
Uses 50 Ω or 75 Ω as reference impedance for the measured levels. Default setting is
50 Ω.
The setting 75 Ω should be selected if the 50 Ω input impedance is transformed to a
higher impedance using a 75 Ω adapter of the RAZ type (= 25 Ω in series to the input
impedance of the instrument). The correction value in this case is 1.76 dB = 10 log (75
Ω/50 Ω).
All levels specified in this Operating Manual refer to the default setting of the instru-
ment (50 Ω).
Remote command:
INPut:IMPedance on page 639

4.3.3 Selecting the Bandwidth

The bandwith settings are available in the BW menu.

Res BW Manual.......................................................................................................... 193
CISPR RBW Uncoupled..............................................................................................193
Filter Type................................................................................................................... 194
IF Analysis RBW......................................................................................................... 194

Res BW Manual
Opens an input field to define the measurement or resolution bandwidth.
The R&S ESR supports a selected set of resolution bandwidths. If you enter a number
that is not supported, the R&S ESR rounds the value up to next available bandwidth.
You can also select some bandwidths directly with the corresponding softkeys in the
"Bandwidth" menu.
For more information see chapter 4.2.1, "Measurement Bandwidth", on page 174.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] on page 639

CISPR RBW Uncoupled

Cancels the coupling of the IF bandwidth to the frequency range with the activated
quasipeak detector, CISPR Average or RMS average detector.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 193

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Measurement Settings

4.3.4 Configuring the Scan

The following settings for configuring the scan are available in the SWEEP menu.
Functions to configure measurements described described elsewhere:
● "Fixed Frequency" on page 198

Run Continuous / Run Single......................................................................................194

Edit Scan Table...........................................................................................................195
Freq Axis (Lin Log)......................................................................................................195

Run Continuous / Run Single

Initiates a continuous or single measurement.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 194

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Measurement Settings

See also chapter 4.1.7.1, "Running Scans and Measurements", on page 164.
Remote command:
Selecting single and continuous measurements:
INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 609
Initiating a measurement:
INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] on page 610

Edit Scan Table

Opens a dialog box to create or edit a scan table.
For more information see chapter 4.1.3.3, "The Scan Table", on page 154

Freq Axis (Lin Log)

Switches between linear and logarithmic frequency axis.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X:SPACing on page 634

4.3.5 Configuring the Trigger

The trigger settings are available in the TRIG menu.

External....................................................................................................................... 195
Free Run..................................................................................................................... 195
Video........................................................................................................................... 195
Trigger Polarity............................................................................................................196

External
Selects an external trigger source.
The external trigger source is a TTL signal fed in at the EXT TRIG/GATE IN interface
on the rear panel.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 809

Free Run
Selects free run mode. In free run mode, a measurement is not triggered. Once a mea-
surement is completed, another is started immediately.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 809

Video
Selects the video trigger. The trigger event is a certain voltage level.
For the video triggering mode, a level line showing the trigger threshold is displayed.
Using the level line, the threshold can be adjusted between 0% and100% of the dia-
gram height.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 195

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Measurement Settings

Video mode is only available in the time domain.

Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 809
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo on page 808

Trigger Polarity
Selects the polarity of the trigger source.
The scan starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal. The default set-
ting is "Pos".
The trigger polarity is unavailable for the free run trigger source.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe on page 809

4.3.6 Controlling Inputs and Outputs

The input/output settings are available in the INPUT/OUTPUT menu.

For information on the LISN control see chapter 4.3.7.6, "LISN Settings", on page 205.
Input (AC/DC)..............................................................................................................196
Input (1 2)....................................................................................................................196

Input (AC/DC)
Toggles the RF input of the R&S ESR between AC and DC coupling.
Remote command:
INPut:COUPling on page 641

Input (1 2)
Selects the RF input the signal is applied to.
The first RF Input supports a frequency range from 9 kHz to fmax and an attenuation
range from 0 dB to 75 dB. The second RF Input is a pulse-resistant input. It supports a
frequency range from 9 kHz to 1 GHz and an attenuation range from 10 dB to 75 dB.
Attenuation levels smaller than 10 dB are not possible at RF Input 2.
With option R&S ESR-B29, the minimum frequency is extended to 20 Hz at both RF
inputs.
Remote command:
INPut:TYPE on page 641

4.3.7 Test Automation

The test automation settings are availbale in the MEAS and MEAS CONFIG menu.
The Test Automation dialog box contains functionality to configure automated test
sequences.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 196

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Measurement Settings

It is made up of several tabs, each of which contains the settings for one of the stages
in an automated test sequence (see alsochapter 4.1, "Measurements and Result Dis-
plays", on page 150).
The "Peak Search" and "Run Final Test" buttons at the bottom of each of the tabs ini-
tiate the corresponding measurement function.
SCPI command:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch[:IMMediate] on page 649
INITiate<n>:FMEasurement on page 611

Peak Search
In addition to the "Peak Search" button, you can initiate a peak search with the PEAK
SEARCH key on the R&S ESR front panel.

4.3.7.1 Overview

The "Overview" tab in the "Test Automation" dialog box contains general functions to
configure automated test sequences.

The main part of the "Overview" tab represents a complete test sequence (scan, peak
search and final measurement).
● The item opens the Scan Table tab.
● The item includes (blue state) or excludes (grey state) the peak search and later
stages from the test sequence.
● The item opens the Peak Search tab.
● The item includes (blue state) or excludes (grey state) the final measurement
from the test sequence. Note that if you include the final measurement, the
R&S ESR automatically includes the peak search in the test sequence.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 197

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Measurement Settings

● The item opens the Trace / Final Meas tab.

● The item opens the peak list after the scan or the final measurement.
Below the diagram, frequency domain or time domain analysis is selected, the source
for the scan parameter settings is determined, and the number of scans set.

Fixed Frequency
Selects time domain analysis (fixed frequency measurement mode, see also chap-
ter 4.1.3.4, "Scan on a Fixed Frequency", on page 156).
The overall measurement time for time domain analysis can be defined in a data entry
field. The range is 10 µs to 10.000 s. The value entered is rounded to next integer that
is a multiple of the measurement time of a single bar graph measurement. The mini-
mum value also depends on the set measurement time of a single bar graph measure-
ment and is at least twice this value.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:MODE on page 635
[SENSe:]SCAN:TDOMain on page 616

Scan Count
Defines the number of scans performed in a single scan or the number of scans inclu-
ded in calculating the moving average in a continuous scan.
Remote command:
Defining the scan count:
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt on page 642
Querying the number of started scans:
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt:CURRent on page 642

Scan Parameter
Selects the configuration the scan is based on.
"Scan Table" The scan is performed based on the settings defineds of the scan
table.
"Current" The scan is performed based on the current setting of the R&S ESR.
Remote command:
not supported

4.3.7.2 Scan Table

The "Scan Table" tab in the "Test Automation" dialog box contains the scan table were
parameters for the individual subranges can be set.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 198

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Measurement Settings

Start / Stop Frequency................................................................................................ 199

Step Mode...................................................................................................................199
Time Domain Scan (On Off)........................................................................................200
Adjust Axis.................................................................................................................. 200
Insert Range Before / After......................................................................................... 200
Delete Range.............................................................................................................. 200
Range 1 to 10..............................................................................................................200
Prev / Next Range.......................................................................................................201

Start / Stop Frequency

Step Mode
Selects the mode for frequency steps.
Note that the frequency stepsize for time domain scans (R&S ESR-K53) is always
selected automatically.
"AUTO" Linear frequency steps.
The stepsize is coupled to the current resolution bandwidth and is
about a third of the resolution bandwidth. In this way, the probability
to detect all signals in the scan range is very good.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 199

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Measurement Settings

"LIN" Linear frequency steps.

The stepsize is fix and depends on the Stepsize.
"LOG" Logarithmic frequency steps.
The stepsize is a percentage of the current frequency.
Remote command:
[[SENSe:]SWEep:SPACing on page 647

Time Domain Scan (On Off)

Turns the time domain scan on and off.
For more information see chapter 4.1.3.2, "Time Domain Scans in the Frequency
Domain", on page 154.
Note that time domain scans are available with option R&S ESR-K53.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:MODE on page 635

Adjust Axis
Adjusts the scale of the horizontal axis if the overall scan range is different than the
scan range defined by the scan subranges.
Remote command:
not supported

Insert Range Before / After

Inserts a new scan range before or after the currently selected range.
Except for the start and stop frequencies, the configuration of the new scan range is
the same as the one that has been selected previously. The selected range is highligh-
ted in orange.
Remote command:
The suffix at SCAN<range> of the commands listed in chapter 10.3.6.2, "Scan Table",
on page 644 defines the ranges.

Delete Range
Deletes the currently selected scan range.
Remote command:
not supported

Range 1 to 10
Configures the currently selected scan range.
You can use and configure up to 10 individual scan ranges. For each range you can
customize the following parameters.
● Range Start / Range Stop
● Frequency Stepsize
● Resolution Bandwidth
● Meas Time
● Auto Ranging
● RF Attenuation
● Preamplifier

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 200

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Measurement Settings

● Receiver Input
For more information see chapter 4.1.3.3, "The Scan Table", on page 154.
Remote command:
See chapter 10.3.6.2, "Scan Table", on page 644
RF input:
INPut:TYPE on page 641

Prev / Next Range

Selects the scan range to the left or right of the currently selected scan range.
Remote command:
not supported

4.3.7.3 Peak Search

The "Peak Search" tab in the "Test Automation" dialog box contains functionality to
control the peak search.

Peak Search Mode (Peaks Subranges)......................................................................201

No Of Peaks................................................................................................................202
No of Subranges / Peaks per Subrange..................................................................... 202
Peak Excursion........................................................................................................... 202
Margin......................................................................................................................... 202
Select Limit Line..........................................................................................................202

Peak Search Mode (Peaks Subranges)

Selects the peak search mode.
"Peaks" Looks for a particular number of peaks over the complete scan range.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 201

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Measurement Settings

"Subranges" Divides the scan range into smaller subranges and looks for a partic-
ular number of peaks in each subrange.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:METHod on page 649

No Of Peaks
Defines the number of peaks the R&S ESR looks for during a peak search.
The range is from 1 to 500 peaks.
The number of peaks only takes effect if the peak search mode is "Peaks".
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges on page 650

No of Subranges / Peaks per Subrange

Defines the number of subranges for a subrange peak search and the number of
peaks that the R&S ESR looks for in each subrange.
Note that the maximum number of peaks is 500. Thus, the maximum number of peaks
per subrange depends on the number of subranges you have defined.
These parameters only take effect if the peak search mode is "Subranges".
Remote command:
Number of subranges:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges on page 650
Peaks per subrange:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges:PCOunt on page 650

Peak Excursion
Defines the relative signal level to determine a peak during a peak search.
For more information see chapter 4.1.4, "Peak List and Data Reduction", on page 156.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion on page 648

Margin
Defines an additional level margin relative to a limit line that is considered during a
peak search.
For more information see chapter 4.1.4, "Peak List and Data Reduction", on page 156.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:MARGin on page 649

Select Limit Line

Applies one or more limit lines for the peak search.
For more information on limit lines see chapter 4.4.3, "(Limit) Lines", on page 218.
"Assign to Assigns the limit line to one or more traces.
Trace"
"Deselect all
Traces"

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 202

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Measurement Settings

"Limitcheck Turns the limit check on and off.

(On Off)"

4.3.7.4 Peak Lists

The peak list dialog box is available for the prescan results and the final measurement
results. Both dialog boxes contain the same elements.

Peak List..................................................................................................................... 203

Insert Frequency......................................................................................................... 203
Delete Frequency........................................................................................................204
Sort by Delta Limit.......................................................................................................204
Symbols (On Off)........................................................................................................ 204
Peak List Export.......................................................................................................... 204

Peak List
Contains information about the peaks that were found during the peak search.
● Trace / Detector
Shows the number of trace that the peak is on and the detector with which the
peak has been measured.
● Frequency
Shows the frequency of the peak level.
● Level
Shows the signal level of the peak. The unit depends on the one you have
selected.
● Delta Limit
Shows the distance of the peak to a limit line. The delta limit is only calculated if
you have activated a limit line and have assigned it to one more traces.

Insert Frequency
Adds a new frequency to the peak list that is considered in the next scan.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:ADD on page 648

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 203

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Measurement Settings

Delete Frequency
Deletes the currently selected peak list table row (grey highlighting).
Remote command:
not supported

Sort by Delta Limit

Sort the entries of the peak list according to the delta limit results.
The delta limit is the distance of a peak to a limit line, if one has been assigned.
Remote command:
not supported

Symbols (On Off)

Turns the labels on the peak position in the diagram on and off.
The peak labels have a different color and shape depending on the trace they are on.
Trace 1, for example, has red crosses as the peak label. By default they are on.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:SYMBol on page 651

Peak List Export

Opens a dialog box to export and save the contents of the peak list in ASCII format to
a *.dat file.
The file consists of a header and the results of the scan or the final measurement.
● The header is a list of general instrument settings and characteristics. It consists of
three columns, each column separated by a semicolon: <parame-
ter>;<value>;<unit>.
● The results are split into several data sections, one for each active trace. The data
section begins with the entry Trace <x> [Final]:, followed by the trace char-
actersistics and the peak list data itself.
For a description of the data see chapter 5.3.1.6, "ASCII File Export Format",
on page 409 .
By default, decimal places are separated by a point in the exported list. If required, you
can use a comma instead of a point as the decimal separator.
Remote command:
Export the peak list of the scan results:
MMEMory:STORe:PEAKlist on page 652
Export the peak list of the final measurement:
MMEMory:STORe:FINal on page 651
Select the decimal separator:
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 820

4.3.7.5 Trace / Final Meas

The Trace / Final Meas tab in the Test Automation dialog box contains functionality to
configure the traces for the scan and the final measurement.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 204

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Measurement Settings

Final Measurement Time............................................................................................ 205

Interactive Mode..........................................................................................................205
Trace 1 to 6................................................................................................................. 205

Final Measurement Time

Defines the measurement time for the final measurement.
For more information see chapter 4.2.2, "Measurement Time", on page 175.

Interactive Mode
Turns interactive final measurements on and off.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FMEasurement:AUTO on page 612

Trace 1 to 6
Selects the characteristics of each trace.
In addition to the trace mode, you can select a detector for the scan and the final mea-
surement. For more information see
● chapter 4.1.3, "Scans", on page 152
● chapter 4.1.5, "Final Measurement", on page 158
● chapter 4.2.4, "Trace Modes", on page 180
● chapter 4.2.3, "Detectors", on page 176
Note: When you select detector type "None" for the final measurement, the R&S ESR
ignores peaks found on the corresponding trace during the final measurement.
Remote command:
Trace mode:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE on page 652
Scan detector:
[SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion] on page 652
Final measurement detector:
[SENSe:]DETector<t>:FMEasurement on page 611

4.3.7.6 LISN Settings

The "LISN Settings" tab in the "Test Automation" dialog box contains functionality to
control line impedance networks.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 205

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Measurement Settings

LISN Type................................................................................................................... 206

Prescan Phase............................................................................................................206
Final Test Phase......................................................................................................... 206
150 kHz Highpass Filter.............................................................................................. 207

LISN Type
Selects the V-network to be controlled via the user port.
For more information see chapter 4.2.6, "V-Networks Control (LISN)", on page 182.
Remote command:
For the scan:
INPut:LISN[:TYPE] on page 656
For the final measurement:
[SENSe:]FMEasurement:LISN[:TYPE] on page 654

Prescan Phase
Selects the phase of the network you want to control during the scan.
During the scan, you can control more than one phase at a time.
For more information see chapter 4.2.6, "V-Networks Control (LISN)", on page 182.
Remote command:
INPut:LISN:PHASe on page 655

Final Test Phase

Selects the phase of the network you want to control during the final measurement.
During the final measurement you can control more than one phase.
For more information see chapter 4.2.6, "V-Networks Control (LISN)", on page 182.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FMEasurement:LISN:PHASe on page 654

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 206

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Analysis Functions

150 kHz Highpass Filter

Turns the highpass filter avaiable with the R&S ENV216 network on and off.
For more information see chapter 4.2.6, "V-Networks Control (LISN)", on page 182.
Remote command:
Highpass filter for the scan:
INPut:LISN:FILTer:HPAS[:STATe] on page 655
Highpass filter for the final measurement:
[SENSe:]FMEasurement:LISN:FILTer:HPAS[:STATe] on page 654

4.4 Common Analysis Functions

4.4.1 Trace Configuration

The TRACE key is used to configure the data acquisition for measurement and the
analysis of the measurement data.
The R&S ESR is capable of displaying up to six different traces at a time in a diagram.
A trace consists of a maximum of 691 displayed measurement points on the horizontal
axis (frequency or time). If more measured values than measurement points are availa-
ble, several measured values are combined in one displayed measurement point.
The trace functions include the following:
● Display mode of the trace
For details on trace modes see chapter 4.2.4, "Trace Modes", on page 180.
● Evaluation of individual measurement points of a trace. For details on detectors
see chapter 4.2.3, "Detectors", on page 176.

To open the Trace menu

● Press the TRACE key.
The "Trace" menu is displayed.

Further information
● chapter 4.2.4, "Trace Modes", on page 180
● chapter 4.2.3, "Detectors", on page 176
● chapter 5.3.1.6, "ASCII File Export Format", on page 409

Tasks
● chapter 5.3.1.2, "Configuring Traces", on page 405
● chapter 5.3.1.3, "Specifying the Trace Settings", on page 406
The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Trace" menu. It is possible that
your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 207

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Analysis Functions

with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is provided in the
corresponding softkey description.
Trace 1 - 6...................................................................................................................208
More Traces................................................................................................................ 208
Copy Trace..................................................................................................................208
Trace Wizard...............................................................................................................208
ASCII Trace Export..................................................................................................... 208
Decim Sep...................................................................................................................209

Trace 1 - 6
Opens a submenu to select the trace mode and detector (for both scan and final mea-
surement).
For more information see chapter 4.2.3, "Detectors", on page 176 and chapter 4.2.4,
"Trace Modes", on page 180.
Note: When you select detector type "None" for the final measurement, the R&S ESR
ignores peaks found on the corresponding trace during the final measurement.
Remote command:
Selecting the trace mode:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE on page 652
Selecting the detector for the scan:
[SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion] on page 823
Selecting the detector for the final measurement:
[SENSe:]DETector<t>:FMEasurement on page 611

More Traces
Opens a submenu to select one of the traces not currently displayed in the main menu.

Copy Trace
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of the trace memory in which the cur-
rently selected trace will be copied.
Remote command:
TRACe<n>:COPY on page 824

Trace Wizard
Opens the "Trace Wizard" dialog box.
For more information see chapter 4.3.7.5, "Trace / Final Meas", on page 204.

ASCII Trace Export

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 208

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Analysis Functions

The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a data sec-
tion containing the trace data. For details on an ASCII file see chapter 5.3.1.6, "ASCII
File Export Format", on page 409.
This format can be processed by spreadsheet calculation programs, e.g. MS-Excel. It
is necessary to define ';' as a separator for the data import. Different language versions
of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point. It is there-
fore possible to select between separators '.' (decimal point) and ',' (comma) using the
"Decim Sep" softkey (see "Decim Sep" on page 209).
If the spectrogram display is selected when you perform this function, the entire histo-
gram buffer with all frames is exported to a file. The data corresponding to a particular
frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was
recorded. For large history buffers the export operation may take some time.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:TRACes on page 615
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 820
MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe on page 821
MMEMory:STORe:SGRam on page 621

Decim Sep
Selects the decimal separator with floating-point numerals for the ASCII Trace export
to support evaluation programs (e.g. MS-Excel) in different languages. The values '.'
(decimal point) and ',' (comma) can be set.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 820

4.4.2 Markers

4.4.2.1 Controlling Markers

The markers are used for marking points on traces, reading out measurement results
and for selecting a display section quickly. The R&S ESR provides 16 markers per
trace.

Fig. 4-9: Marker types

All markers can be used either as markers or delta markers. The marker that can be
moved by the user is defined in the following as the active marker. Temporary markers
are used in addition to the markers and delta markers to evaluate the measurement
results. They disappear when the associated function is deactivated.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 209

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Analysis Functions

The measurement results of the active marker (also called marker values) are dis-
played in the marker field, which is located at the upper right corner of the diagram, or
in a separate table beneath the diagram. The marker information includes the follow-
ing:
● marker type (M1 in the example)
● trace in square brackets ([1] in the example)
● level (-33.09 dBm in the example)
● marker location (3 GHz in the example)

Fig. 4-10: Marker values

The MKR key is used to select and position the absolute and relative measurement
markers (markers and delta markers). In addition, the functions for the frequency coun-
ter, a fixed reference point for relative measurement markers, and for enlargement of
the measurement area are assigned to this key.

To open the Marker menu

● Press the MKR key.
The "Marker" menu is displayed. If no marker is active, marker 1 is activated and a
peak search on the trace is carried out. Otherwise, the edit dialog box for the last
activated marker is opened and the current frequency/time value is displayed.

Further information
● "Displayed Marker Information" on page 420
● chapter 4.4.2.2, "Positioning Markers", on page 214.

Tasks
● "Basic Marker Functions" on page 418

Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 210

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Analysis Functions

Marker 1 is always the reference marker for relative measurements. If activated, mark-
ers 2 to 16 are delta markers that refer to marker 1. These markers can be converted
into markers with absolute value display using the "Marker Norm/Delta" softkey. If
marker 1 is the active marker, pressing the "Marker Norm/Delta" softkey switches on
an additional delta marker.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 664
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 665
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y on page 665
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 670
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X on page 671
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative? on page 672
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y on page 672

More Markers
Opens a sub-menu to select one of up to 16 available markers. See "Marker 1 / Marker
2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta" on page 210.

Marker to Trace
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of the trace on which the marker is to be
placed.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe on page 665
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:TRACe on page 671

Marker Wizard
Opens a configuration dialog for markers. The marker wizard allows you to configure
and activate up to 16 different markers in one dialog. The first 8 markers are displayed
on one tab, the last 8 markers on a second tab. For each marker, the following settings
are available:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 211

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Analysis Functions

"Selected/ When you press the "Selected" or "State" field the corresponding
State" marker is activated and the marker row is highlighted.
"Normal/Delta" Defines whether it is a normal marker or delta marker. For delta
markers you can define a reference marker.
"Ref. Marker" Reference marker for delta markers. The marker values for the delta
marker are indicated relative to the specified reference marker.
The reference marker can either be another active marker, or a fixed
reference marker ("FXD", see "Ref Fixed" on page 429).
"Trace" Trace for which the marker is to be set.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 664
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 670
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe on page 665
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:TRACe on page 671
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MREF on page 837

All Marker Off ← Marker Wizard

Switches all markers off. It also switches off all functions and displays that are associ-
ated with the markers/delta markers.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF on page 661

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 212

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Analysis Functions

All Marker Off

Switches all markers off. It also switches off all functions and displays that are associ-
ated with the markers/delta markers.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF on page 661

Marker Table
Defines how the marker information is displayed.
For more information, see Displayed Marker Information.
"On" Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath
the diagram.
"Off" Displays the marker information within the diagram area.
"Aut" (Default) The marker table is displayed automatically if more than 2
markers are active, and removed if only 1 or 2 markers are active.
This helps keep the information in the display clear.
Remote command:
DISPlay:MTABle on page 836

Marker Info (On Off)

Turns the numerical marker information in the diagram area on and off.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MINFo:STATe on page 660

Tune to Marker
Defines the marker frequency as the new center frequency.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer on page 657

Marker Track
Turns marker frequency tracking on and off.
If on, the R&S ESR changes the center frequency to the marker frequency when you
change the marker position.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUPled[:STATe] on page 657

Settings Coupled
Couples or decouples the receiver settings to the scan range settings when you use
"Marker Tracking".
If on, the R&S ESR changes the receiver settings according to the scan range the
marker frequency is currently in.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SCOupled[:STATe] on page 658

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 213

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Analysis Functions

4.4.2.2 Positioning Markers

The MKR ➙ key is used for search functions of measurement markers, assignment of
the marker frequency as center frequency, restriction of the search area and character-
ization of maxima and minima. For details on markers in general, see chapter 4.4.2.1,
"Controlling Markers", on page 209.

To open the Marker To menu

● Press the MKR -> key.
The "Marker To" menu is displayed. If no marker is active, marker 1 will be activa-
ted and a peak search on the trace carried out. Otherwise, the edit dialog box for
the last activated marker is opened and the current frequency/time value is dis-
played.

Further information
● "Effect of Different Peak Excursion Settings (Example)" on page 424

Tasks
● "Searching for a Maximum" on page 423
● "Searching for a Minimum" on page 423
● "Specifying the Search Limits" on page 423
● "Specifying the Search Range" on page 423
● "Examining a Signal at the Center in Detail" on page 423
● "Specifying the Suitable Peak Excursion" on page 424

Select Marker (No)

Opens a submenu to select one of 16 markers and define whether the marker is a nor-
mal or a delta marker (see "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker
Norm/Delta" on page 210). "(No)" indicates the number of the currently active marker.

Peak
Sets the active marker/delta marker to the highest maximum of the trace.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 662
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 668

Next Peak
Sets the active marker/delta marker to the next maximum of the selected trace.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 661
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 668

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 214

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Analysis Functions

Min
Sets the active marker/delta marker to the minimum of the selected trace.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 663
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 669

Next Min
Sets the active marker/delta marker to the next minimum of the selected trace.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT on page 663
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT on page 669

Next Mode
Selects the mode of the Next Peak or Next Min softkey.
Three settings are available:
"<" Sets the active marker/delta marker to the next maximum/minimum
left to the marker of the selected trace.
"abs" Sets the active marker/delta marker to the next lower maximum/
higher minimum of the selected trace.
">" Sets the active marker/delta marker to the next maximum/minimum
right to the marker of the selected trace.
Remote command:
Next Peak:
CALC:MARK:MAX:LEFT (<): CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT
on page 661
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT on page 667
CALC:MARK:MAX:RIGH (>): CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt
on page 662
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt on page 668
CALC:DELT:MAX:NEXT (abs): CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT
on page 661
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 668
Next Min:
CALC:MARK:MIN:LEFT (>): CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:LEFT
on page 663
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT on page 669
CALC:MARK:MIN:RIGH (>): CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt
on page 664
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:RIGHt on page 670
CALC:MARK:MIN:NEXT (abs): CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT
on page 663
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT on page 669

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 215

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Analysis Functions

Search Limits
Opens a submenu to set the limits for maximum or minimum search in the x and y
direction.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 660

Left Limit ← Search Limits

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the lower limit (left vertical line: S1 for
span > 0; T1 for zero span). The search is performed between the lines of the left and
right limit (see also Right Limit softkey).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT on page 659

Right Limit ← Search Limits

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the upper limit (left vertical line: S2 for
span > 0; T2 for zero span). The search is performed between the lines of the left and
right limit (see also Left Limit softkey). If no value is set, the upper limit corresponds to
the stop frequency.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHT on page 659

Threshold ← Search Limits

Opens an edit dialog box to define the threshold line. The threshold line represents the
lower level limit for a "Peak" search and the upper level limit for a "Min" search.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe on page 836
CALCulate<n>:THReshold on page 835

Use Zoom Limits ← Search Limits

Restricts the marker search to the zoomed area.
Note that the marker zoom is only available in Spectrum mode.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:ZOOM on page 834

Search Lim Off ← Search Limits

Deactivates all limits of the search range.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 660
CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe on page 836

Peak Excursion
Opens an edit dialog box for level measurements to enter the minimum level value by
which a signal must rise or fall so that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum
by the search functions. Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed; the resolution is 0.1
dB. The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion on page 648

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 216

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Analysis Functions

4.4.2.3 Markers in Spectrograms

In addition to the marker functionality described above, spectrograms support the fol-
lowing marker positioning functionality.
Search Mode...............................................................................................................217
└ Next Mode X................................................................................................. 217
└ Next Mode Y................................................................................................. 217
└ Marker Search Type..................................................................................... 217
└ Select Search Area....................................................................................... 218

Search Mode
Opens a submenu to select the marker search mode.

Next Mode X ← Search Mode

Sets the search mode for the marker peak search if a search in the x-direction is
active. Three modes are available:
"<" Sets the active marker/delta marker to the next maximum/minimum
left of the marker of the selected trace.
"abs" Sets the active marker/delta marker to the next lower maximum/
higher minimum of the selected trace.
">" Sets the active marker/delta marker to the next maximum/minimum
right of the marker of the selected trace.
Remote command:
See chapter 10.3.1.8, "Spectrogram Control", on page 618

Next Mode Y ← Search Mode

Sets the search mode for the marker peak search if a search in the y direction is
active. Three modes are available:
"up" Places the active marker or deltamarker to the next peak value above
the current marker position.
"abs" Places the active marker or deltamarker to the next peak either to the
left or to the right of the current position.
"dn" Places the active marker or deltamarker to the next peak value below
the current marker position.
Remote command:
See chapter 10.3.1.8, "Spectrogram Control", on page 618

Marker Search Type ← Search Mode

Opens a dialog box to select the marker search direction.
● X Search
Performs a search in the currently selected frame.
● Y Search
Performs a search on the marker frequency (span > 0) or time (span = 0) over all
captured frames.
● XY Search
Performs a search in the frequency domain (span >0) or time domain (span=0) and
over all captured frames at the same time.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 217

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Analysis Functions

An XY Search is possible for searches that are independent on direction (< and >)

Select Search Area ← Search Mode

Opens a dialog box to specify the search area.
● Visible
Performs a search in the visible Spectrogram area only.
Note that if the Spectrogram is not visible for any reason (e.g. if the Spectrum Ana-
lyzer is in full screen mode), the search area is the data stored in the memory.
● Memory
Performs a search over all captured frames that are stored in the memory of the
R&S ESR
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:SARea on page 623

4.4.3 (Limit) Lines

The LINES key is used to configure limit and display lines.

To open the Lines menu

● Press the LINES key.
The "Lines" menu and the "Select Limit Line" dialog box are displayed. For details on
the "Select Limit Line" dialog box refer to chapter 4.4.3.5, "Selecting a Limit Line",
on page 225.

Menu and softkey description

● chapter 4.4.3.1, "Softkeys of the Lines Menu", on page 218

Further information
● chapter 4.4.3.2, "Display Lines", on page 223
● chapter 4.4.3.3, "Limit Lines (Frequency/Time Lines)", on page 223

4.4.3.1 Softkeys of the Lines Menu

The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Lines" menu.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 218

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Analysis Functions

(Lines are only available for RF measurements.)

Further information
● chapter 4.4.3.2, "Display Lines", on page 223
● chapter 4.4.3.3, "Limit Lines (Frequency/Time Lines)", on page 223

Tasks
● chapter 4.4.3.4, "Working with Lines", on page 224
● chapter 4.4.3.5, "Selecting a Limit Line", on page 225
● chapter 4.4.3.6, "Creating a New Limit Line", on page 226
● chapter 4.4.3.7, "Editing an Existing Limit Line", on page 228
● chapter 4.4.3.8, "Creating a New Limit Line Based upon an Existing Limit Line",
on page 228
● chapter 4.4.3.9, "Activating/Deactivating a Limit Line", on page 229
Select Traces to check................................................................................................219
Deselect All................................................................................................................. 220
New............................................................................................................................. 220
└ Edit Name..................................................................................................... 220
└ Edit Comment............................................................................................... 220
└ Edit Margin....................................................................................................220
└ Edit Value......................................................................................................220
└ Insert Value...................................................................................................220
└ Delete Value................................................................................................. 221
└ Save Limit Line............................................................................................. 221
Edit.............................................................................................................................. 221
Copy to........................................................................................................................221
Delete..........................................................................................................................221
X Offset....................................................................................................................... 221
Y Offset....................................................................................................................... 221
Display Lines...............................................................................................................222
└ Display Line 1 / Display Line 2......................................................................222
└ Frequency Line 1 / Frequency Line 2 .......................................................... 222
└ Time Line 1 / Time Line 2............................................................................. 222
└ Tuned Frequency (On Off)............................................................................223

Select Traces to check

Opens a dialog box to activate the selected limit line for a trace. One limit line can be
activated for several traces simultaneously. For details see also chapter 4.4.3.9, "Acti-
vating/Deactivating a Limit Line", on page 229.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:TRACe on page 677
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:STATe on page 688

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 219

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Analysis Functions

Deselect All
Deactivates the selected limit line for all assigned traces. For details see also chap-
ter 4.4.3.9, "Activating/Deactivating a Limit Line", on page 229.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:STATe on page 688

New
Opens the "Edit Limit Line" dialog box and a submenu to define a new limit line. For
details see also chapter 4.4.3.3, "Limit Lines (Frequency/Time Lines)", on page 223
and chapter 4.4.3.5, "Selecting a Limit Line", on page 225.

Edit Name ← New

Sets the focus on the "Name" field to enter or change the limit line name. All names
must be compatible with the Windows conventions for file names. The limit line data
are stored under this name. The instrument stores all limit lines with LIM as extension.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:MODE on page 681

Edit Comment ← New

Sets the focus on the "Comment" field to enter or change a comment for the limit line.
The text must not exceed 40 characters.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:COMMent on page 675

Edit Margin ← New

Sets the focus on the "Margin" field to enter or change a margin for the limit line. The
default setting is 0 dB (i.e. no margin).

Edit Value ← New

Opens an edit dialog box to change an existing x or y value, depending on the selected
column. The softkey is only available if an existing value is selected.
The desired data points are entered in ascending order (two repeated frequencies/time
values are permitted).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol[:DATA] on page 678
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer[:DATA] on page 684
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer[:DATA] on page 680

Insert Value ← New

Creates an empty line above the selected data point to enter a new data point.
It is also possible to add a data point at the end of the list, if the focus is set below the
last entry line of the list.
The data points are entered in ascending order (two repeated frequencies/time values
are permitted). If the entered values are not in accordance with the ascending order
rule, an error message is displayed and the values are discarded.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 220

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Analysis Functions

Delete Value ← New

Deletes the selected data point (x and y value). All succeeding data points are shifted
up accordingly. This softkey is only available if an existing value is selected.

Save Limit Line ← New

Saves the currently edited limit line under the name defined in the "Name" field.

Edit
Opens a submenu to edit limit lines. For details see also chapter 4.4.3.3, "Limit Lines
(Frequency/Time Lines)", on page 223 and chapter 4.4.3.7, "Editing an Existing Limit
Line", on page 228.
The submenu contains the same commands as the "New" menu, see "New"
on page 220.
Remote command:
see "Using Display Lines" on page 830

Copy to
Copies the data of the selected limit line and displays it in the "Edit Limit Line" dialog
box. If the limit line is edited and saved under a new name, a new limit line can be
easily generated by parallel translation or editing of an existing limit line.
For details see also chapter 4.4.3.3, "Limit Lines (Frequency/Time Lines)",
on page 223 and chapter 4.4.3.8, "Creating a New Limit Line Based upon an Existing
Limit Line", on page 228.
The submenu contains the same commands as the "New" menu, see "New"
on page 220.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:COPY on page 676

Delete
Deletes the selected limit line.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:DELete on page 676

X Offset
Horizontally shifts a limit line that has been specified for relative frequencies or times
(x-axis). The softkey opens an edit dialog box in which the value for shifting can be
entered numerically or via the rotary knob.
Note: This softkey does not have any effect on limit lines that represent absolute val-
ues for the x-axis.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:OFFSet on page 679

Y Offset
Vertically shifts a limit line that has relative values for the y-axis (levels or linear units
such as volt). The softkey opens an edit dialog box in which the value for shifting can
be entered numerically or via the rotary knob.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 221

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Analysis Functions

Note: This softkey does not have any effect on limit lines that represent absolute val-
ues for the y-axis.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:OFFSet on page 682
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:OFFSet on page 685

Display Lines
Opens a submenu to enable, disable and set display lines. Which softkeys are availa-
ble depends on the display mode (frequency or time range).
For details see also chapter 4.4.3.2, "Display Lines", on page 223 and chapter 4.4.3.4,
"Working with Lines", on page 224.
The submenu contains the following functions:
● "Display Line 1 / Display Line 2" on page 222
● "Display Line 1 / Display Line 2" on page 222
● "Frequency Line 1 / Frequency Line 2 " on page 222
● "Frequency Line 1 / Frequency Line 2 " on page 222
● "Time Line 1 / Time Line 2" on page 222
● "Time Line 1 / Time Line 2" on page 222
● "Tuned Frequency (On Off)" on page 223

Display Line 1 / Display Line 2 ← Display Lines

Enables or disables the level lines 1/2 and opens an edit dialog box to enter the posi-
tion of the lines.
For details see also chapter 4.4.3.2, "Display Lines", on page 223 and chapter 4.4.3.4,
"Working with Lines", on page 224.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<k> on page 673
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<k>:STATe on page 673

Frequency Line 1 / Frequency Line 2 ← Display Lines

Enables or disables the frequency lines 1/2 (span > 0) and opens an edit dialog box to
enter the position of the lines.
For details see also chapter 4.4.3.2, "Display Lines", on page 223 and chapter 4.4.3.4,
"Working with Lines", on page 224.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:FLINe<k> on page 674
CALCulate<n>:FLINe<k>:STATe on page 674

Time Line 1 / Time Line 2 ← Display Lines

Enables or disables the time lines 1/2 (zero span) and opens an edit dialog box to
enter the position of the lines.
For details see also chapter 4.4.3.2, "Display Lines", on page 223 and chapter 4.4.3.4,
"Working with Lines", on page 224.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 222

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Analysis Functions

Note that time lines are only available in Spectrum mode.

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:TLINe<Line> on page 831
CALCulate<n>:TLINe<Line>:STATe on page 831

Tuned Frequency (On Off) ← Display Lines

Turns a frequency line coupled to the receiver frequency on and off.
The line that marks the receiver frequency is a green line labeled "TF".
Available for the Scan result display.
Remote command:
CALCulate:TFLine:STATe on page 674

4.4.3.2 Display Lines

Display lines help to evaluate a trace – as do markers. The function of a display line is
comparable to that of a ruler that can be shifted on the trace in order to mark absolute
values. They are used exclusively to visually mark relevant frequencies or points in
time (span = 0), as well as constant level values. It is not possible to check automati-
cally whether the points are below or above the marked level values.
For details on setting and switching the display lines on/off see chapter 4.4.3.4, "Work-
ing with Lines", on page 224.
Two different types of display lines are provided:
● Two horizontal level lines for marking levels – Display Line 1 and 2
The level lines are continuous horizontal lines across the entire width of a diagram
and can be shifted in y direction.
● Two vertical frequency or time lines for marking frequencies or points in time – Fre-
quency/Time Line 1 and 2
The frequency or time lines are continuous vertical lines across the entire height of
the diagram and can be shifted in x direction.

Lables
Each line is identified by one of the following abbreviations in the display:
● D1: Display Line 1
● D2: Display Line 2
● F1: Frequency Line 1
● F2: Frequency Line 2
● T1: Time Line 1
● T2: Time Line 2

4.4.3.3 Limit Lines (Frequency/Time Lines)

Limit lines are used to define amplitude curves or spectral distribution boundaries on
the display screen which are not to be exceeded. They indicate, for example, the upper

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 223

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Analysis Functions

limits for interference radiation or spurious waves which are allowed from a device
under test (DUT). For transmission of information in TDMA systems (e.g. GSM), the
amplitude of the bursts in a timeslot must adhere to a curve that falls within a specified
tolerance band. The lower and upper limits may each be specified by a limit line. Then,
the amplitude curve can be controlled either visually or automatically for any violations
of the upper or lower limits (GO/NOGO test).
The instrument supports limit lines with a maximum of 50 data points. 8 of the limit
lines stored in the instrument can be activated simultaneously. The number of limit
lines stored in the instrument is only limited by the capacity of the flash disk used.
Which softkeys are available depends on the display mode (frequency or time range).
For details see also chapter 4.4.3.5, "Selecting a Limit Line", on page 225.
Limit lines are compatible with the current measurement settings, if the following
applies:
● The x unit of the limit line has to be identical to the current setting.
● The y unit of the limit line has to be identical to the current setting with the excep-
tion of dB based units; all dB based units are compatible with each other.
At the time of entry, the R&S ESR immediately checks that all limit lines are in accord-
ance with the following guidelines:
● The frequencies/times for each data point must be entered in ascending order,
however, for any single frequency/time, two data points may be entered (vertical
segment of a limit line).
● The data points are allocated in order of ascending frequency/time. Gaps are not
allowed. If gaps are desired, two separate limit lines must be defined and then both
enabled.
● The entered frequencies/times need not necessarily be selectable in R&S ESR. A
limit line may also exceed the specified frequency or time range. The minimum fre-
quency for a data point is -200 GHz, the maximum frequency is 200 GHz. For the
time range representation, negative times may also be entered. The allowed range
is -1000 s to +1000 s.

4.4.3.4 Working with Lines

If a line is switched on, the softkey is highlighted.

Switching a line on or off

1. Press the Display Lines softkey.

2. Press the softkey for the required line, e.g. Display Line 1 / Display Line 2.
An edit dialog box is opened to enter the position of the line. If the line was
switched off, it is switched on. If it was switched on, it remains switched on.

3. If another softkey is pressed, the edit dialog box for the line is closed, but the line
remains switched on (softkey with highlighted background).

4. When you press the Display Line 1 / Display Line 2 softkey for the second time, the
edit dialog box for the line is opened again.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 224

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Analysis Functions

5. When you press the Display Line 1 / Display Line 2 softkey the third time, the line
is switched off (softkey without highlighted background).

4.4.3.5 Selecting a Limit Line

● To display the "Select Limit Line" dialog box, press the LINES key.
All limit lines saved in the default directory and all subdirectories are displayed. For
each limit line, the following information is given:

"Unit" unit of the y-axis

"Traces" selected traces to check

"Show" limit line displayed in the measurement diagram or hidden

"Compatible" compatibility of the limit line to the current measurement settings

"Offset" user-definable X- and Y-offset for the limit line

● To display only the limit lines that are compatible, activate the "Show compatible"
option. For details on compatibility refer to chapter 4.4.3.3, "Limit Lines (Frequency/
Time Lines)", on page 223.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 225

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Analysis Functions

4.4.3.6 Creating a New Limit Line

Press the New softkey to define a new limit line.

The "Edit Limit Line" dialog box is displayed. For more details on limit lines refer also to
chapter 4.4.3.3, "Limit Lines (Frequency/Time Lines)", on page 223. The following set-
tings can be defined:

Setting Description

Name The name under which the limit line is to be stored in the main directory.
To save the limit line in an existing subdirectory, enter the relative path. A new
subdirectory can only be created using the FILE key (for details refer to "Save
File / Recall File" on page 540.

Comment Optional description

Threshold Absolute threshold value that works as a lower limit for the relative limit values
(only for relative scaling of the y-axis).

Margin A fixed distance to the limit line.

Margins are not as strict as limits and belong to the valid value range, but viola-
tion is also indicated in the display.

Position Position of data point

Value Value of data point

X-Axis:

Span setting ● "Hz" for span > 0 Hz

● "s" for zero span

Scale mode ● Absolute: The frequencies or times are interpreted as absolute physical
units.
● Relative: In the data point table, the frequencies are referred to the cur-
rently set center frequency. In the zero span mode, the left boundary of the
diagram constitutes the reference.
Relative scaling is always suitable if masks for bursts are to be defined in
zero span or if masks for modulated signals are required for span > 0 Hz.

Scale ● Linear
● Logarithmic

Y-Axis:

Scale unit Unit of the y-axis

Scale mode ● Absolute: The limit values refer to absolute levels or voltages.
● Relative: The limit values refer to the reference level (Ref Level). Limit val-
ues with the unit dB are always relative values.

Limit type ● Upper limit

● Lower limit

In addition, the following functions are available for the limit line:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 226

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Analysis Functions

Defining a threshold
If the scaling of the y-axis is relative, you can define an absolute threshold value that
works as a lower limit for the relative limit values (see figure below).
► Enter a value in the "Threshold" field of the "Edit Limit Line" dialog box.

The function is especially useful for mobile radio applications provided the limit values
are defined in relation to the carrier power as long as they are above an absolute limit
value.

Defining a margin
A margin is similar to a limit, but less strict and it still belongs to the valid data range. It
can be used as a warning that the limit is almost reached. The margin is not indicated
by a separate line in the display.
► Enter a value in the "Margin" field of the "Edit limit Line" dialog box.
If the limit line is defined as an upper limit, the margin is below the limit line. If the
limit line is defined as a lower limit, the margin is above the limit line.

Entering a new data point

1. Press the "Insert value" button in the dialog, or select an existing data point in the
table and press the Insert Value softkey.

2. Enter the new position (x) and value (y) in the edit dialog box.

Changing a data point

1. Press on the data point to be changed in the table.

2. Enter the new position (x) and value (y) in the edit dialog box.

Deleting a data point

1. Press on the data point to be deleted in the table.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 227

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Analysis Functions

2. Press the "Delete" button in the dialog.

Shifting a limit line horizontally

► Select the "Shift x" button and enter a shift width for the x value in the edit dialog
box.

Shifting a limit line vertically

► Select the "Shift y" button and enter a shift width for the y value in the edit dialog
box.

Saving the limit line settings

► Press the "Save" button in the dialog.
If an existing name is used, a message box is displayed. You have to confirm
before the limit line is overwritten.

4.4.3.7 Editing an Existing Limit Line

In the "Select Limit Line" dialog box, select the limit line you want to change. For
details see also chapter 4.4.3.5, "Selecting a Limit Line", on page 225.

Note that any changes to the special limit lines for spurious and SEM measurements
are automatically overwritten when the sweep list settings are changed.

1. Press the "Edit" on page 221 softkey.

2. Edit the data as described in chapter 4.4.3.6, "Creating a New Limit Line",
on page 226.

3. Save the limit line ( "Save Limit Line" on page 221 softkey).

4.4.3.8 Creating a New Limit Line Based upon an Existing Limit Line

1. In the "Select Limit Line" dialog box, select the limit line you want to use as a basis
for a new limit line. For details see also chapter 4.4.3.5, "Selecting a Limit Line",
on page 225.

2. Press the Copy to softkey to transfer the data of the limit line into the "Edit Limit
Line" dialog box.

3. Press the Edit Name softkey and enter a new name.

4. To shift the complete limit line parallel in the horizontal direction, select the "Shift x"
button and enter an x shift value. In this manner, a new limit line can be easily gen-
erated based upon an existing limit line which has been shifted horizontally.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 228

R&S®ESR Receiver Mode
Common Analysis Functions

5. To shift the complete limit line parallel in the vertical direction, select the "Shift y"
button and enter a y shift value. In this manner, a new limit line can be easily gen-
erated based upon an existing limit line which has been shifted vertically.

6. If required, edit the data as described in chapter 4.4.3.5, "Selecting a Limit Line",
on page 225.

7. Save the limit line ( Save Limit Line softkey).

4.4.3.9 Activating/Deactivating a Limit Line

Prerequisites:
The x- and y-units of limit line and current measurement setting have to be compatible.
For details refer to chapter 4.4.3.3, "Limit Lines (Frequency/Time Lines)", on page 223.
The limit line has to consist of 2 or more data points.

1. In the "Select Limit Line" dialog box, select the limit line you want to activate/deacti-
vate. For details see also chapter 4.4.3.5, "Selecting a Limit Line", on page 225.

2. To activate or deactivate a limit line for a trace, press the "Select Traces to check"
on page 219 softkey and select or deselect the trace(s) to which this limit line
applies.

3. To deactivate the limit line for all traces, press the "Deselect All" on page 220 soft-
key.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 229

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

5 Spectrum Measurements
You can also perform conventional spectrum analysis with the R&S ESR.
When you start the R&S ESR for the first time or after a preset, it starts in receiver
mode. If it is inactive, press the MODE key and select the "Spectrum" softkey in the
corresponding menu to enter the spectrum mode.
This chapter of the manual describes all functionality that is available in spectrum
mode.
● chapter 5.1, "Measurements", on page 230
This section describes how to configure and perform specific measurements that
are available in Spectrum mode.
Measurement examples are provided in the Quick Start Guide, chapter 5 "Basic
Measurement Examples" and the Operating Manual, chapter "Advanced Measure-
ment Examples".
● chapter 5.3, "Analysis", on page 396
This section decribes the tools that are available to analyze measurement results.
● chapter 5.2, "Configuration", on page 351
This section describes general measurement parameters. The general measure-
ment parameters apply to all measurements performed in Spectrum mode.

5.1 Measurements
In the Spectrum mode, the R&S ESR provides a variety of different measurement func-
tions.
The individual functions are described in detail in the following sections.

5.1.1 Power Measurements – MEAS Key

With its power measurement functions, the R&S ESR is able to measure all the neces-
sary parameters with high accuracy in a wide dynamic range.
A modulated carrier is almost always used (except e.g. SSB-AM) for high-frequency
transmission of information. Due to the information modulated upon the carrier, the lat-
ter covers a spectrum which is defined by the modulation, the transmission data rate
and the signal filtering. Within a transmission band each carrier is assigned a channel
taking into account these parameters. In order to ensure error-free transmission, each
transmitter must be conforming to the specified parameters. These include among oth-
ers:
● the output power
● the occupied bandwidth, i.e. the bandwidth which must contain a defined percent-
age of the power
● the power dissipation allowed in the adjacent channels

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 230

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

The MEAS key is used for complex measurement functions as power measurements,
occupied bandwidth, signal statistic, carrier to noise spacing, AM modulation depth,
third-order intercept point, harmonics and spurious emissions. For measurement
examples refer to the Quick Start Guide, "Basic Measurement Examples".

The following measurements can be performed:

● Channel power and adjacent-channel power with span > 0 and with a single or sev-
eral carriers ("CH Power ACLR" softkey, for details see chapter 5.1.1.2, "Measur-
ing Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power", on page 234)
● Carrier-to-noise ratio ("C/N C/NO" softkey, for details see chapter 5.1.1.3, "Measur-
ing the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio", on page 258)
● Occupied bandwidth ("OBW" softkey, for details see chapter 5.1.1.4, "Measuring
the Occupied Bandwidth", on page 261)
● Spectrum Emission Mask measurements ("Spectrum Emission Mask" softkey, for
details see chapter 5.1.1.5, "Measuring with Spectrum Emission Masks",
on page 265)
● Spurious Emissions measurements ("Spurious Emissions" softkey, for details see
chapter 5.1.1.6, "Measuring Spurious Emissions", on page 292)
● Power in zero span ("Time Domain Power" softkey, for details see chapter 5.1.1.7,
"Measuring the Power in Zero Span", on page 303).
● EMI Measurement softkey, for details see chapter 5.1.1.8, "Performing EMI Mea-
surements", on page 306
● CISPR APD softkey, for details see chapter 5.1.1.9, "CISPR APD Measurement
(Amplitude Probability Distribution)", on page 316
● Amplitude probability distribution ("APD" and "CCDF" softkeys, for details see
chapter 5.1.1.10, "Calculating Signal Amplitude Statistics", on page 321)
● 3rd order intercept ("TOI" softkey, for details see chapter 5.1.1.11, "Measuring the
Third Order Intercept Point (TOI)", on page 339)
● Modulation depth ("AM Mod Depth" softkey, for details see chapter 5.1.1.12, "Mea-
suring the AM Modulation Depth", on page 345)
● Harmonic Distortion measurements ("Harmonic Distortion" softkey, for details see
chapter 5.1.1.13, "Measuring Harmonic Distortion", on page 346)

To open the power measurement menu

● Press the MEAS key.
The measurement menu for spectrum analysis is displayed (see chapter 5.1.1.1,
"Softkeys of the Power Measurement Menu", on page 231).

5.1.1.1 Softkeys of the Power Measurement Menu

The following table shows all softkeys available in the power measurement menu. It is
possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is
only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is
provided in the corresponding softkey description.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 231

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Ch Power ACLR..........................................................................................................232
C/N, C/No (span > 0)...................................................................................................232
OBW (span > 0).......................................................................................................... 232
Spectrum Emission Mask............................................................................................232
Spurious Emissions.....................................................................................................233
Time Domain Power (zero span)................................................................................ 233
All Functions Off..........................................................................................................233
APD.............................................................................................................................233
CCDF.......................................................................................................................... 233
TOI.............................................................................................................................. 233
AM Mod Depth............................................................................................................ 233
Harmonic Distortion.....................................................................................................234
All Functions Off..........................................................................................................234

C/N, C/No (span > 0)

Opens a submenu to configure the carrier/noise ratio measurement. Measurements
without (C/N) and measurements with reference to the bandwidth (C/No) are possible.
For details see chapter 5.1.1.3, "Measuring the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio", on page 258.

OBW (span > 0)

Activates measurement of the occupied bandwidth according to the current configura-
tion and opens a submenu to configure the measurement. For details see chap-
ter 5.1.1.4, "Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth", on page 261.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect on page 689
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? on page 690
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] on page 694

Spectrum Emission Mask

Opens a submenu to configure the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement.
The Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurement defines a measurement that moni-
tors compliance with a spectral mask.
For details see chapter 5.1.1.5, "Measuring with Spectrum Emission Masks",
on page 265.
Remote command:
SENS:SWE:MODE ESP, see [SENSe:]SWEep:MODE on page 731

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 232

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Spurious Emissions
Opens a submenu to configure the Spurious Emissions measurement.
The Spurious Emissions measurement defines a measurement that monitors unwan-
ted RF products outside the assigned frequency band generated by an amplifier.
For details see chapter 5.1.1.6, "Measuring Spurious Emissions", on page 292.
Remote command:
SENS:SWE:MODE LIST, see [SENSe:]SWEep:MODE on page 731

Time Domain Power (zero span)

Activates the power measurement in zero span and opens a submenu to configure the
power measurement. For details see chapter 5.1.1.7, "Measuring the Power in Zero
Span", on page 303.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary[:STATe] on page 771

All Functions Off

Switches off all power measurement functions.

APD
Activates the function to measure the amplitude probability density (APD) and opens a
submenu.
For details see chapter 5.1.1.10, "Calculating Signal Amplitude Statistics",
on page 321.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:APD[:STATe] on page 762

CCDF
Activates the function to measure the complementary cumulative distribution function
(CCDF) and opens a submenu.
For details see chapter 5.1.1.10, "Calculating Signal Amplitude Statistics",
on page 321.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF[:STATe] on page 762

TOI
Opens a submenu and activates the measurement of the 3rd order intercept point.
For details see chapter 5.1.1.11, "Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point (TOI)",
on page 339.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI[:STATe] on page 760
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult? on page 761

AM Mod Depth
Opens a submenu and activates the measurement of the AM modulation depth. An
AM-modulated carrier is required on the screen to ensure correct operation.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 233

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

For details see chapter 5.1.1.12, "Measuring the AM Modulation Depth", on page 345.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth[:STATe] on page 755
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult? on page 755

Harmonic Distortion
Opens a submenu to determine the settings for harmonics measurement and activates
the harmonic distortion measurement.
For details see chapter 5.1.1.13, "Measuring Harmonic Distortion", on page 346.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics[:STATe] on page 759
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:DISTortion? on page 757
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:LIST? on page 757

All Functions Off

Switches off all power measurement functions.

5.1.1.2 Measuring Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power

Measuring the power in channels adjacent to the carrier or transmission channel is

useful to detect interference. The results are displayed as a bar chart for the individual
channels.
● About Channel Power Measurements.................................................................. 234
● Channel Power Measurement Results..................................................................238
● Configuring and Performing Channel Power Measurements................................240
● Softkeys for Channel and Adjacent-Channel Power Measurements.................... 244
● Predefined CP/ACLR Standards...........................................................................255
● Optimized Settings for CP/ACLR Test Parameters...............................................256

About Channel Power Measurements

Measuring channel power and adjacent channel power is one of the most important
tasks in the field of digital transmission for a signal analyzer with the necessary test
routines. While, theoretically, channel power could be measured at highest accuracy
with a power meter, its low selectivity means that it is not suitable for measuring adja-
cent channel power as an absolute value or relative to the transmit channel power. The
power in the adjacent channels can only be measured with a selective power meter.
A signal analyzer cannot be classified as a true power meter, because it displays the IF
envelope voltage. However, it is calibrated such as to correctly display the power of a
pure sine wave signal irrespective of the selected detector. This calibration cannot be
applied for non-sinusoidal signals. Assuming that the digitally modulated signal has a
Gaussian amplitude distribution, the signal power within the selected resolution band-
width can be obtained using correction factors. These correction factors are normally
used by the signal analyzer's internal power measurement routines in order to deter-
mine the signal power from IF envelope measurements. These factors apply if and only
if the assumption of a Gaussian amplitude distribution is correct.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 234

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Apart from this common method, the R&S ESR also has a true power detector, i.e. an
RMS detector. It correctly displays the power of the test signal within the selected reso-
lution bandwidth irrespective of the amplitude distribution, without additional correction
factors being required. The absolute measurement uncertainty of the R&S ESR is < 1.5
dB and a relative measurement uncertainty of < 0.5 dB (each with a confidence level of
95 %).

Measurement Methods
The channel power is defined as the integration of the power across the channel band-
width.
The Adjacent Channel Power Ratio (ACPR), also known as the Adjacent Channel
Leakage Power Ratio (ACLR), is defined as the ratio between the total power of the
adjacent channel to the carrier channel's power. An ACLR measurement with several
carrier (transmission) channels (TX channels) is also possible and is referred to as a
"multi-carrier ACLR measurement".
There are two possible methods for measuring channel and adjacent channel power
with a signal analyzer:
● IBW method (Integration Bandwidth Method)
● Zero-span method (Fast ACLR), i.e. using a channel filter
● IBW method.......................................................................................................... 235
● Fast ACLR.............................................................................................................236

IBW method
When measuring the channel power, the R&S ESR integrates the linear power which
corresponds to the levels of the pixels within the selected channel. The signal analyzer
uses a resolution bandwidth which is far smaller than the channel bandwidth. When
sweeping over the channel, the channel filter is formed by the passband characteristics
of the resolution bandwidth (see figure 5-1).

Fig. 5-1: Approximating the channel filter by sweeping with a small resolution bandwidth

The following steps are performed:

1. The linear power of all the trace pixels within the channel is calculated.
Pi = 10(Li/10)

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 235

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

where Pi = power of the trace pixel i

Li = displayed level of trace point i

2. The powers of all trace pixels within the channel are summed up and the sum is
divided by the number of trace pixels in the channel.

3. The result is multiplied by the quotient of the selected channel bandwidth and the
noise bandwidth of the resolution filter (RBW).

Since the power calculation is performed by integrating the trace within the channel
bandwidth, this method is called the IBW method (Integration Bandwidth method).

Fast ACLR
Using Fast ACLR, the R&S ESR sets the center frequency to the different channel cen-
ter frequencies consecutively and measures the power with the selected measurement
time (= sweep time/number of channels).
The RBW filters suitable for the selected standard and frequency offset are automati-
cally used (e.g. root raised cos with IS 136).
The RMS detector is used for obtaining correct power measurement results. Therefore
no software correction factors are required.

Measurement Repeatability
The repeatability of the results, especially in the narrow adjacent channels, strongly
depends on the measurement time for a given resolution bandwidth. A longer sweep
time may increase the probability that the measured value converges to the true value
of the adjacent channel power, but obviously increases measurement time.
The integrated bandwidth method (IBW) calculates channel power and ACLR from the
trace data obtained during a continuous sweep over the selected span. Most parts of
this sweep are neither part of the channel itself nor the defined adjacent channels.
Therefore, most of the samples taken during the sweeptime cannot be used for chan-
nel power or ACLR calculation.
To obtain a high repeatability with short measurement times, the R&S ESR offers a
"Fast ACLR" mode. In the Fast ACLR mode, the R&S ESR measures the power of
each channel at the defined channel bandwidth, while being tuned to the center fre-
quency of the channel in question. The digital implementation of the resolution band-
widths makes it possible to select filter characteristics that are precisely tailored to the
signal. In case of CDMA2000, the power in the useful channel is measured with a
bandwidth of 1.23 MHz and that of the adjacent channels with a bandwidth of 30 kHz.
Therefore the R&S ESR changes from one channel to the other and measures the
power at a bandwidth of 1.23 MHz or 30 kHz using the RMS detector. The power of the
frequency range between the channels of interest is not measured in Fast ACLR
mode, because it is not required for channel power or ACLR calculation. The measure-
ment time per channel is set with the sweep time. It is equal to the selected measure-
ment time divided by the selected number of channels.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 236

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Fig. 5-2: Measuring the channel power and adjacent channel power ratio for CDMA2000 1X signals
with zero span (Fast ACP)

Assuming a measurement with five channels (1 channel plus 2 lower and 2 upper adja-
cent channels) and a sweep time of 100 ms, a measurement time per channel of 20
ms is required. The number of effective samples taken into account for power calcula-
tion in one channel is the product of sweeptime in channel times the selected resolu-
tion bandwidth.
Assuming a sweeptime of 100 ms, there are (30 kHz / 4.19 MHz) * 100 ms * 10 kHz ≈
7 samples. Whereas in Fast ACLR mode, there are (100 ms / 5) * 30 kHz ≈ 600 sam-
ples. Comparing these numbers explains the increase of repeatability with a 95% confi-
dence level (2δ) from ± 2.8 dB to ± 0.34 dB for a sweeptime of 100 ms (as shown in
figure 5-3 and ).
For the same repeatability, the sweep time would have to be set to 8.5 s with the inte-
gration method. The figure 5-4 shows the standard deviation of the results as a func-
tion of the sweep time.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 237

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Fig. 5-3: Repeatability of adjacent channel power measurement on CDMA2000 standard signals if the
integration bandwidth method is used

The figure 5-4 shows the repeatability of power measurements in the transmit channel
and of relative power measurements in the adjacent channels as a function of sweep
time. The standard deviation of measurement results is calculated from 100 consecu-
tive measurements. Take scaling into account if comparing power values.

Fig. 5-4: Repeatability of adjacent channel power measurements on CDMA2000 signals in the fast
ACP mode

Channel Power Measurement Results

For channel or adjacent-channel power measurements, the individual channels are
indicated by different colored bars in the diagram. The height of each bar corresponds
to the measured power of that channel. In addition, the name of the channel ("Adj",
"Alt1", "TX1", etc. or a user-defined name) is indicated above the bar (separated by a
line which has no further meaning).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 238

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Results are provided for the TX channel and the number of defined adjacent channels
above and below the TX channel. If more than one TX channel is defined, the carrier
channel to which the relative adjacent-channel power values should be referenced
must be defined.
The measured power values for the TX and adjacent channels are also output as a
table in the second screen. Which powers are measured depends on the number of
configured channels, see "# of Adj Chan" on page 246.
For each channel, the following values are displayed:

Label Description

Channel Channel name as specified in the "Channel Settings" (see "Names" on page 249).

Bandwidth Configured channel bandwidth (see "Bandwidth" on page 247)

Offset Offset of the channel to the TX channel (Configured channel spacing, see "Spacing"
on page 248)

Power The measured power values for the TX and lower and upper adjacent channels. The
powers of the transmission channels are output in dBm or dBm/Hz, or in dBc, relative
(Lower/Upper)
to the specified reference TX channel.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 239

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Retrieving Results via Remote Control

All or specific channel power measurement results can be retrieved using the
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? command from a remote
computer.
Alternatively, the results can be output as channel power density, i.e. in reference to
the measurement bandwidth (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:
RESult:PHZ on page 716).
In addition, the TRACe<n>:DATA command queries the trace data. In case of channel
power measurements, the trace data is the power levels that have been measured for
each sweep point (max. 691).

Configuring and Performing Channel Power Measurements

Predefined standards contain the main measurement settings for standard measure-
ments. When such a standard is loaded, the required channel settings are automati-
cally set on the R&S ESR. However, the settings can be changed, and measurements
with user-defined configurations are also possible.
Once the channels have been set up, other instrument settings such as the used filter
bandwidths, frequency span and detector and trace settings can be optimized automat-
ically (see "Adjust Settings" on page 252).
For an overview of the softkeys and menus see "Softkeys for Channel and Adjacent-
Channel Power Measurements" on page 244.

Selecting a Predefined Standard

Predefined standards contain the main measurement settings for standard measure-
ments. When such a standard is loaded, the required channel settings are automati-
cally set on the R&S ESR.
The selected standard defines the following settings:
● "Bandwidth" on page 247
● "Spacing" on page 248
● Detector, see "Optimized Settings for CP/ACLR Test Parameters" on page 256
● Trace averaging, see "Average Mode" on page 402
● RBW, see "Optimized Settings for CP/ACLR Test Parameters" on page 256
● "Weighting Filter" on page 249

► Select a predefined standard via the CP/ACLR Standard softkey.

Setting up the Channels

Channel definition is the basis for measuring power levels in certain frequency ranges.
Usually, the power levels in one or more carrier (TX) channels and possibly the adja-
cent channels are of interest. Up to 18 carrier channels and up to 12 adjacent channels
can be defined.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 240

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

In the R&S ESR's display, only the first neighboring channel of the carrier (TX) channel
is labelled "Adj" (adjacent) channel; all others are labelled "Alt" (alternate) channels. In
this manual, "adjacent" refers to both adjacent and alternate channels.

When an ACLR measurement is started by pressing the "Ch Power ACLR" softkey, all
settings including the channel bandwidths and channel spacings are set according to
the selected standard and can be adjusted afterwards.
Channel setup consists of the following settings:
● The number of transmission (TX) and adjacent channels
● The bandwidth of each channel
● For multi-carrier ACLR measurements: which TX channel is used as a reference
("ACLR Reference")
● The spacing between the individual channels
● Optionally: the names of the channels displayed in the diagram and result table
● Optionally: the influence of individual channels on the total measurement result
("Weighting Filter")
● Optionally: limits for a limit check on the measured power levels

Changes to an existing standard can be stored as a user-defined standard, see "User-

Defined Configurations" on page 243.

► In the "Ch Power" menu, press Channel Setup, then press the Channel Setup soft-
key to configure the channels in the "Channel Setup" dialog box.

In the "Channel Setup" dialog box you define the channel settings for all channels,
independent of the defined number of used TX or adjacent channels.

● Defining Channel Bandwidths............................................................................... 241

● Defining Channel Spacings...................................................................................242
● Configuring a Limit Check..................................................................................... 243

Defining Channel Bandwidths

The transmission-channel bandwidth is normally defined by the transmission standard.
The correct bandwidth is set automatically for the selected standard (see "Optimized
Settings for CP/ACLR Test Parameters" on page 256).
For measurements that require channel bandwidths which deviate from those defined
in the selected standard, use the IBW method (see Fast ACLR (On/Off) softkey). With
the IBW method, the channel bandwidth borders are right and left of the channel center
frequency. Thus, you can visually check whether the entire power of the signal under
test is within the selected channel bandwidth.

► In the "Channel Setup" dialog box, select the "Bandwidth" tab to define the channel
bandwidths.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 241

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

The value entered for any TX channel is automatically also defined for all subse-
quent TX channels. Thus, only one value needs to be entered if all TX channels
have the same bandwidth.
The value entered for any ADJ or ALT channel is automatically also defined for all
alternate (ALT) channels. Thus, only one value needs to be entered if all adjacent
channels have the same bandwidth.

Defining Channel Spacings

Channel spacings are normally defined by the selected standard but can be changed.
If the spacings are not equal, the channel distribution according to the center frequency
is as follows:

Odd number of TX channels The middle TX channel is centered to center frequency.

Even number of TX channels The two TX channels in the middle are used to calculate the fre-
quency between those two channels. This frequency is aligned to
the center frequency.

► In the "Channel Setup" dialog box, select the "Spacing" tab to define the channel
spacings.
The value entered for any TX channel is automatically also defined for all subse-
quent TX channels. Thus, only one value needs to be entered if all TX channels
have the same spacing.
If the channel spacing for the adjacent or an alternate channel is changed, all
higher alternate channel spacings are multiplied by the same factor (new spacing
value/old spacing value). The lower adjacent-channel spacings remain unchanged.
Only one value needs to be entered for equal channel spacing.

Example: Defining channel spacing

In the default setting, the adjacent channels have the following spacing: 20 kHz
("ADJ"), 40 kHz ("ALT1"), 60 kHz ("ALT2"), 80 kHz ("ALT3"), 100 kHz ("ALT4"), …
If the spacing of the first adjacent channel ("ADJ") is set to 40 kHz, the spacing of all
other adjacent channels is multiplied by factor 2 to result in 80 kHz ("ALT1"), 120 kHz
("ALT2"), 160 kHz ("ALT3"), …
If, starting from the default setting, the spacing of the 5th adjacent channel ("ALT4") is
set to 150 kHz, the spacing of all higher adjacent channels is multiplied by factor 1.5 to
result in 180 kHz ("ALT5"), 210 kHz ("ALT6"), 240 kHz ("ALT7"), …

For the R&S ESR, the channel spacing is defined as the distance between the center
frequency of the adjacent channel and the center frequency of the transmission chan-
nel. The definition of the adjacent-channel spacing in standards IS95C and CDMA
2000 is different. These standards define the adjacent-channel spacing from the center
of the transmission channel to the closest border of the adjacent channel. This defini-
tion is also used for the R&S ESR if the standards marked with an asterisk *) are
selected.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 242

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Configuring a Limit Check

During an ACLR measurement, the power values can be checked whether they
exceed user-defined limits. A relative or absolute limit can be defined, or both. Both
limit types are considered, regardless whether the measured levels are absolute or rel-
ative values. The check of both limit values can be activated independently. If any
active limit value is exceeded, the measured value is displayed in red and marked by a
preceding asterisk in the result table.

To configure a limit check

1. In the "Channel Setup" dialog box, select the "Limits" tab to define a limit check.

2. For each channel, define a relative or absolute value that should not be exceeded.

3. Select the channels to be included in the limit check by activating the "Check"
option.

4. Activate limit checking for the selected channels by setting "Limit Checking" to On.

Performing a Channel Power Measurement

A channel power measurement is started automatically according to the currently
selected standard when you press the "Ch Power ACLR" softkey in the MEAS menu.

► To start a new measurement after changing the settings, press the RUN SINGLE
or RUN CONT hardkeys.
Alternatively, you can save your settings as a user standard (see "User-Defined
Configurations" on page 243), then select that standard and start the measure-
ment as usual by pressing the "Ch Power ACLR" softkey.

The configured measurement is performed (depending on the number of defined chan-

nels, see "# of Adj Chan" on page 246) and the results are displayed in the graphic
and the result table.

User-Defined Configurations
You can define measurement configurations independently of a predefinded standard
and save the current ACLR configuration as a "user standard" in an xml file. You can
then load the file and thus the settings again at a later time.
User-defined standards are not supported for "Fast ACLR" and Multi-Carrier ACLR
measurements.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 243

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Compatibility to R&S FSP

User standards created on an analyzer of the R&S FSP family are compatible to the
R&S ESR. User standards created on an R&S ESR, however, are not necessarily
compatible to the analyzers of the R&S FSP family and may not work there.

To store a user-defined configuration

1. Select the "User Standard" softkey in the "Ch Power" menu.

2. Press "Save".

3. Define a file name for the user standard and select its storage location.
By default, the xml file is stored in C:\R_S\Instr\acp_std\. However, you can
define any other storage location.

4. Press "Save".
The following parameter definitions are saved:
● "# of Adj Chan" on page 246
● Channel spacing and adjacent-channel spacing, see "Spacing" on page 248
● Channel bandwidth of transmission (Tx), adjacent (Adj) and alternate (Alt)
channels, see "Bandwidth" on page 247
● Resolution bandwidth, see "Res BW Auto" on page 370
● Video bandwidth, see "Video BW Auto" on page 371
● Detector, see "Detector" on page 400
● ACLR limits and their state, see "Limits" on page 250
● Sweep time and sweep time coupling, see "Sweep Time" on page 252
● Trace and power mode, see "Select Trace" on page 252 and "Power Mode"
on page 251

To load a user-defined configuration

► Press "User Standard > Load" and select the user standard file.

Softkeys for Channel and Adjacent-Channel Power Measurements

Ch Power ACLR..........................................................................................................245
└ CP/ACLR Standard.......................................................................................245
└ CP/ACLR Settings........................................................................................ 246
└ # of TX Chan.......................................................................................246
└ # of Adj Chan...................................................................................... 246
└ Channel Setup.................................................................................... 246
└ Bandwidth.................................................................................247
└ ACLR Reference............................................................ 248
└ Spacing.....................................................................................248
└ Names...................................................................................... 249
└ Weighting Filter.........................................................................249
└ Limits........................................................................................ 250
└ Limit Checking................................................................250
└ Relative Limit..................................................................251
└ Absolute Limit.................................................................251

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 244

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

└ Check............................................................................. 251
└ Chan Pwr/Hz.......................................................................................251
└ Power Mode........................................................................................251
└ Clear/Write................................................................................252
└ Max Hold.................................................................................. 252
└ Select Trace........................................................................................252
└ ACLR (Abs/Rel).................................................................................. 252
└ Adjust Settings....................................................................................252
└ Sweep Time.................................................................................................. 252
└ Fast ACLR (On/Off)...................................................................................... 253
└ Set CP Reference......................................................................................... 253
└ User Standard...............................................................................................253
└ Load....................................................................................................254
└ Save....................................................................................................254
└ Delete................................................................................................. 254
└ Noise Correction........................................................................................... 254
└ Adjust Ref Lvl................................................................................................255

Ch Power ACLR
Activates the active channel or adjacent-channel power measurement either for a sin-
gle carrier signal or for several carrier signals, depending on the current measurement
configuration, and opens a submenu to configure the channel power measurement.
With default settings the measurement is performed by integrating the powers at the
display points within the specified channels (IBW method).
If several TX cahnnels (carriers) are activated, the number of measured values is
increased to ensure that adjacent-channel powers are measured with adequate accu-
racy.
For general information on performing channel or adjacent-channel power measure-
ments, see chapter 5.1.1.2, "Measuring Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power",
on page 234.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect on page 689
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? on page 690
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] on page 694

CP/ACLR Standard ← Ch Power ACLR

Opens an edit dialog box to select the settings according to predefined standards. For
details on the available standards see "Predefined CP/ACLR Standards" on page 255.
By default no standard is set.
The selection of the standard influences the following parameters (see "Optimized Set-
tings for CP/ACLR Test Parameters" on page 256):
● channel spacing and adjacent-channel spacing
● channel bandwidth, adjacent-channel bandwidth, and type of filtering
● resolution bandwidth
● video bandwidth
● detector
● # of adjacent channels

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 245

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

● trace averaging (switched off)

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet on page 698

CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Opens a submenu to configure the channel power and adjacent channel power mea-
surement independently of the predefined standards (for details see also "Predefined
CP/ACLR Standards" on page 255 and "Optimized Settings for CP/ACLR Test Param-
eters" on page 256).

# of TX Chan ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of carrier signals to be taken into
account in channel and adjacent-channel power measurements. Values from 1 to 18
are allowed.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt on page 703

# of Adj Chan ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of adjacent channels to be considered in
the adjacent-channel power measurement. Values from 0 to 12 are allowed.
The following measurements are performed depending on the number of the channels:

0 Only the channel powers are measured.

1 The channel powers and the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel are measured.

2 The channel powers, the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel, and of the next higher
and lower channel (alternate channel 1) are measured.

3 The channel power, the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel, the power of the next
higher and lower channel (alternate channel 1), and of the next but one higher and lower adja-
cent channel (alternate channel 2) are measured.

… …

12 The channel power, the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel, and the power of the all
higher and lower channels (alternate channel 1 to 11) are measured.

Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs on page 700

Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Opens a dialog to define the channel settings for all channels, independant of the
defined number of used TX or adjacent channels.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 246

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

The dialog contains the following tabs:

● "Bandwidth" on page 247
● "Spacing" on page 248
● "Names" on page 249
● "Weighting Filter" on page 249
● "Limits" on page 250

Bandwidth ← Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Define the channel bandwidths for the transmission channels and the adjacent chan-
nels. "TX" is only available for the multi-carrier ACLR measurement. When you change
the bandwidth for one channel, the value is automatically also defined for all subse-
quent channels of the same type.
The transmission-channel bandwidth is normally defined by the transmission standard.
The correct bandwidth is set automatically for the selected standard (see "Optimized
Settings for CP/ACLR Test Parameters" on page 256).
● Measurements in zero span (see Fast ACLR (On/Off) softkey) are performed in the
zero span mode. The channel limits are indicated by vertical lines. For measure-
ments requiring channel bandwidths deviating from those defined in the selected
standard the IBW method is to be used.
● With the IBW method (see Fast ACLR (On/Off) softkey), the channel bandwidth
limits are marked by two vertical lines right and left of the channel center fre-
quency. Thus you can visually check whether the entire power of the signal under
test is within the selected channel bandwidth.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 247

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

If measuring according to the IBW method ("Fast ACLR Off"), the bandwidths of
the different adjacent channels are to be entered numerically. Since all adjacent
channels often have the same bandwidth, the other alternate channels are set to
the bandwidth of the adjacent channel when it is changed. Thus, only one value
needs to be entered in case of equal adjacent channel bandwidths.
For details on available channel filters see chapter 5.2.6.3, "Selecting the Appropriate
Filter Type", on page 375.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel<channel>]
on page 701
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ACHannel on page 700
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ALTernate<channel>
on page 700

ACLR Reference ← Bandwidth ← Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch

Power ACLR
Select the transmission channel to which the relative adjacent-channel power values
should be referenced.

TX Channel 1 Transmission channel 1 is used.

Min Power TX Channel The transmission channel with the lowest power is used as a refer-
ence channel.

Max Power TX Channel The transmission channel with the highest power is used as a refer-
ence channel.

Lowest & Highest Channel The outer left-hand transmission channel is the reference channel
for the lower adjacent channels, the outer right-hand transmission
channel that for the upper adjacent channels.

Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MANual on page 707
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO on page 706

Spacing ← Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Define the channel spacings for the TX channels and for the adjacent channels.
● TX channels (left column)

TX1-2 spacing between the first and the second carrier

TX2-3 spacing between the second and the third carrier

… …

The spacings between all adjacent TX channels can be defined separately. When you
change the spacing for one channel, the value is automatically also defined for all sub-
sequent TX channels in order to set up a system with equal TX channel spacing
quickly. For different spacings, a setup from top to bottom is necessary.
If the spacings are not equal, the channel distribution according to the center frequency
is as follows:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 248

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Odd number of TX channels The middle TX channel is centered to center frequency.

Even number of TX channels The two TX channels in the middle are used to calculate the fre-
quency between those two channels. This frequency is aligned to
the center frequency.

● Adjacent channels (right column)

Since all the adjacent channels often have the same distance to each other, the
modification of the adjacent-channel spacing (ADJ) causes a change in all higher
adjacent-channel spacings (ALT1, ALT2, …): they are all multiplied by the same
factor (new spacing value/old spacing value). Thus only one value needs to be
entered in case of equal channel spacing. A modification of a higher adjacent-
channel spacing (ALT1, ALT2, …) causes a change by the same factor in all higher
adjacent-channel spacings, while the lower adjacent-channel spacings remain
unchanged.
Example:
In the default setting, the adjacent channels have the following spacing: 20 kHz
("ADJ"), 40 kHz ("ALT1"), 60 kHz ("ALT2"), 80 kHz ("ALT3"), 100 kHz ("ALT4"), …
If the spacing of the first adjacent channel ("ADJ") is set to 40 kHz, the spacing of
all other adjacent channels is multiplied by factor 2 to result in 80 kHz ("ALT1"),
120 kHz ("ALT2"), 160 kHz ("ALT3"), …
If, starting from the default setting, the spacing of the 5th adjacent channel ("ALT4")
is set to 150 kHz, the spacing of all higher adjacent channels is multiplied by factor
1.5 to result in 180 kHz ("ALT5"), 210 kHz ("ALT6"), 240 kHz ("ALT7"), …
If a ACLR or MC-ACLR measurement is started, all settings according to the stand-
ard including the channel bandwidths and channel spacings are set and can be
adjusted afterwards.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<channel> on page 703
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel] on page 702
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<channel> on page 703

Names ← Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Define user-specific channel names for each channel. The names defined here are dis-
played in the result diagram and result table.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ACHannel on page 701
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ALTernate<channel> on page 702
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:CHANnel<channel> on page 702

Weighting Filter ← Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Define weighting filters for all channels. Weighting filters are not available for all sup-
ported standards and cannot always be defined manually where they are available.
The dialog contains the following fields:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 249

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Field Description

Channel ● TX 1-18: TX channels

● ADJ: Adjacent channel
● ALT1-11: Alternate channels

Active Activates/Deactivates the weighting filter for the selected and any subsequent channels of
the same type

Alpha Defines the alpha value for the weighting filter for the selected and any subsequent chan-
nels of the same type

Remote command:
POW:ACH:FILT:CHAN1 ON, see [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:
CHANnel<channel> on page 705
Activates the weighting filter for TX channel 1.
POW:ACH:FILT:ALPH:CHAN1 0,35 see [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:
ALPHa:CHANnel<channel> on page 705
Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for TX channel 1 to 0,35.
POW:ACH:FILT:ACH ON see [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:
ACHannel on page 705
Activates the weighting filter for the adjacent channel.
POW:ACH:FILT:ALPH:ACH 0,35 see [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:
ALPHa:ACHannel on page 704
Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the adjacent channel to 0,35.
POW:ACH:FILT:ALT1 ON see [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:
ALTernate<channel> on page 705
Activates the alpha value for the weighting filter for the alternate channel 1.
POW:ACH:FILT:ALPH:ALT1 0,35 see [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:
ALPHa:ALTernate<channel> on page 704
Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the alternate channel 1 to 0,35.

Limits ← Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Activate and define the limits for the ACLR measurement.

Limit Checking ← Limits ← Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power

ACLR
Activate or deactivate limit checking for the ACLR measurement.
The following rules apply for the limits:
● A separate limit can be defined for each adjacent channel. The limit applies to both
the upper and the lower adjacent channel.
● A relative and/or absolute limit can be defined. The check of both limit values can
be activated independently.
● The R&S ESR checks adherence to the limits irrespective of whether the limits are
absolute or relative or whether the measurement is carried out with absolute or rel-

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 250

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

ative levels. If both limits are active and if the higher of both limit values is excee-
ded, the measured value is marked by a preceding asterisk.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe] on page 715
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult on page 710
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<channel>[:RELative]
on page 713

Relative Limit ← Limits ← Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power

ACLR
Defines a limit relative to the carrier signal.
Remote command:
CALC:LIM:ACP ON, see CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe]
on page 715
CALC:LIM:ACP:<adjacent-channel> 0dBc,0dBc
CALC:LIM:ACP:<adjacent-channel>:STAT ON

Absolute Limit ← Limits ← Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power

ACLR
Defines an absolute limit.
Remote command:
CALC:LIM:ACP ON, see CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe]
on page 715
CALC:LIM:ACP:<adjacent-channel>:ABS -10dBm,-10dBm
CALC:LIM:ACP:<adjacent-channel>:ABS:STAT ON, see CALCulate<n>:
LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe on page 708

Check ← Limits ← Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Activate or deactivate the limit to be considered during a limit check. The check of both
limit values can be activated independently.

Chan Pwr/Hz ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

If deactivated, the channel power is displayed in dBm. If activated, the channel power
density is displayed instead. Thus, the absolute unit of the channel power is switched
from dBm to dBm/Hz. The channel power density in dBm/Hz corresponds to the power
inside a bandwidth of 1 Hz and is calculated as follows:
"channel power density = channel power – log10(channel bandwidth)"
By means of this function it is possible e.g. to measure the signal/noise power density
or use the additional functions "ACLR (Abs/Rel)" on page 252 and "ACLR Reference"
on page 248 to obtain the signal to noise ratio.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult:PHZ on page 716

Power Mode ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Opens a submenu to select the power mode.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 251

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Clear/Write ← Power Mode ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

If this mode is activated, the channel power and the adjacent channel powers are cal-
culated directly from the current trace (default mode).
Remote command:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:MODE WRIT, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
POWer:MODE on page 694

Max Hold ← Power Mode ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

If this mode is activated, the power values are calculated from the current trace and
compared with the previous power value using a maximum algorithm. The higher value
is retained. If activated, the enhancement label "Pwr Max" is displayed.
Remote command:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:MODE MAXH, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
POWer:MODE on page 694

Select Trace ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the trace number on which the CP/ACLR measure-
ment is to be performed. Only activated traces can be selected.
For details on trace modes see chapter 4.2.4, "Trace Modes", on page 180.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:TRACe on page 695

ACLR (Abs/Rel) ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Switches between absolute and relative power measurement in the adjacent channels.

Abs The absolute power in the adjacent channels is displayed in the unit of the y-axis, e.g. in dBm,
dBµV.

Rel The level of the adjacent channels is displayed relative to the level of the transmission channel
in dBc.

Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE on page 716

Adjust Settings ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Automatically optimizes all instrument settings for the selected channel configuration
(channel bandwidth, channel spacing) within a specific frequency range (channel band-
width). The adjustment is carried out only once. If necessary, the instrument settings
can be changed later.
For details on the settings of span, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, detector
and trace averaging see "Optimized Settings for CP/ACLR Test Parameters"
on page 256.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet on page 695

Sweep Time ← Ch Power ACLR

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time. With the RMS detector, a longer
sweep time increases the stability of the measurement results.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 252

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

The function of this softkey is identical to the Sweeptime Manual softkey in the "Band-
width" menu.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME on page 805

Fast ACLR (On/Off) ← Ch Power ACLR

Switches between the IBW method ("Fast ACLR Off") and the zero span method ("Fast
ACLR On").
When switched on, the R&S ESR sets the center frequency consecutively to the differ-
ent channel center frequencies and measures the power with the selected measure-
ment time (= sweep time/number of channels). The RBW filters suitable for the
selected standard and frequency offset are automatically used (e.g. root raised cos
with IS 136). For details on available channel filters see chapter 5.2.6.3, "Selecting the
Appropriate Filter Type", on page 375.
The RMS detector is used for obtaining correct power measurement results. Therefore
this requires no software correction factors.
Measured values are output as a list. The powers of the transmission channels are out-
put in dBm, the powers of the adjacent channels in dBm.
The sweep time is selected depending on the desired reproducibility of results. Repro-
ducibility increases with sweep time since power measurement is then performed over
a longer time period. As a general approach, it can be assumed that approx. 500 non-
correlated measured values are required for a reproducibility of 0.5 dB (99 % of the
measurements are within 0.5 dB of the true measured value). This holds true for white
noise. The measured values are considered as non-correlated if their time interval cor-
responds to the reciprocal of the measured bandwidth.
With IS 136 the measurement bandwidth is approx. 25 kHz, i.e. measured values at an
interval of 40 µs are considered as non-correlated. A measurement time of 40 ms is
thus required per channel for 1000 measured values. This is the default sweep time
which the R&S ESR sets in coupled mode. Approx. 5000 measured values are
required for a reproducibility of 0.1 dB (99 %), i.e. the measurement time is to be
increased to 200 ms.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:HSPeed on page 717

Set CP Reference ← Ch Power ACLR

Defines the currently measured channel power as the reference value if channel power
measurement is activated. The reference value is displayed in the "Tx1 (Ref) Power"
field; the default value is 0 dBm.
The softkey is available only for multi carrier ACLR measurements.
In adjacent-channel power measurement with one or several carrier signals, the power
is always referenced to a transmission channel, i.e. no value is displayed for "Tx1 (Ref)
Power".
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE on page 706

User Standard ← Ch Power ACLR

Opens a submenu to configure customized standards.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 253

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Load ← User Standard ← Ch Power ACLR

Opens a dialog to select and load a user defined ACLR standard.
Remote command:
Querying available standards:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:CATalog?
on page 699
Loading a standard:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet on page 698

Save ← User Standard ← Ch Power ACLR

Saves the current ACLR configuration in an xml file in order for you to use it again at a
later time. You can define the drive, path and file name in the corresponding dialog.
The default location is C:\R_S\Instr\acp_std\.
Note that the ACLR user standard is not supported by Fast ACLR and Multi Carrier
ACLR measurements.
If you create your own standard, you can customize the following parameters:
● number of adjacent channels
● channel bandwidth of transmission (Tx), adjacent (Adj) and alternate (Alt) channels
● channel spacings
● resolution and video bandwidth
● ACLR limits and their state
● sweep time and sweep time coupling
● detector
● trace mode
Remote command:
Configuring channels:
see "Configuring ACLR Channels" on page 699 and "Defining Weighting Filters"
on page 704
Saving custom channel configurations:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:SAVE on page 699

Delete ← User Standard ← Ch Power ACLR

Deletes the user standard that you select in the corresponding dialog box. Note that
the R&S ESR deletes the file without further notice.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:DELete on page 699

Noise Correction ← Ch Power ACLR

If activated, the results are corrected by the instrument's inherent noise, which increa-
ses the dynamic range.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 254

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

"ON" A reference measurement of the instrument's inherent noise is carried

out. The noise power measured is then subtracted from the power in
the channel that is being examined.
The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center
frequency, resolution bandwidth and level setting. Therefore, the cor-
rection function is disabled whenever one of these parameters is
changed. A disable message is displayed on the screen. Noise cor-
rection must be switched on again manually after the change.
"OFF" No noise correction is performed.
"AUTO" Noise correction is performed. After a parameter change, noise cor-
rection is restarted automatically and a new correction measurement
is performed.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection on page 717

Adjust Ref Lvl ← Ch Power ACLR

Adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power. This ensures that the set-
tings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal
level without overloading the R&S ESR or limiting the dynamic range by a too small
S/N ratio.
For details on manual settings see "Optimized Settings for CP/ACLR Test Parameters"
on page 256.
The reference level is not influenced by the selection of a standard. To achieve an opti-
mum dynamic range, the reference level has to be set in a way that places the signal
maximum close to the reference level without forcing an overload message. Since the
measurement bandwidth for channel power measurements is significantly lower than
the signal bandwidth, the signal path may be overloaded although the trace is still sig-
nificantly below the reference level.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel on page 696

Predefined CP/ACLR Standards

When using predefined standards for ACLR measurement, the test parameters for the
channel and adjacent-channel measurements are configured automatically. The availa-
ble standards are listed below.

Predefined standards are selected using the "CP/ACLR Standard" softkey or the
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES command.

Standard GUI-Parameter SCPI-Parameter

EUTRA/LTE Square EUTRA/LTE Square EUTRa

EUTRA/LTE Square/RRC EUTRA/LTE Square/RRC REUTRa

W-CDMA 3.84 MHz forward W-CDMA 3GPP FWD FW3G

W-CDMA 3.84 MHz reverse W-CDMA 3GPP REV RW3G

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 255

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Standard GUI-Parameter SCPI-Parameter

CDMA IS95A forward CDMA IS95A FWD F8CD | FIS95a

CDMA IS95A reverse CDMA IS95A REV R8CD | RIS95a

CDMA IS95C Class 0 forward*) CDMA IS95C Class 0 FWD FIS95c0

CDMA IS95C Class 0 reverse*) CDMA IS95C Class 0 REV RIS95c0

CDMA J-STD008 forward CDMA J-STD008 FWD F19C | FJ008

CDMA J-STD008 reverse CDMA J-STD008 REV R19C | RJ008

CDMA IS95C Class 1 forward*) CDMA IS95C Class 1 FWD FIS95c1

CDMA IS95C Class 1 reverse*) CDMA IS95C Class 1 REV RIS95c1

CDMA 2000 CDMA 2000 S2CD

TD-SCDMA forward TD SCDMA FWD FTCD | TCDMa

TD-SCDMA reverse TD SCDMA REV RTCD

WLAN 802.11A WLAN 802.11A AWLan

WLAN 802.11B WLAN 802.11B BWLan

WiMAX WiMAX WiMAX

WIBRO WIBRO WIBRO

GSM GSM GSM

RFID 14443 RFID 14443 RFID14443

TETRA TETRA TETRA

PDC PDC PDC

PHS PHS PHS

CDPD CDPD CDPD

APCO-25 Phase 2 APCO-25 P2 PAPCo25

Optimized Settings for CP/ACLR Test Parameters

The "Adjust Settings" softkey (see "Adjust Settings" on page 252) automatically optimi-
zes all instrument settings for the selected channel configuration, as described in the
following:
● Frequency span

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 256

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

The frequency span must at least cover the channels to be measured plus a mea-
surement margin of approx. 10 %.
If the frequency span is large in comparison to the channel bandwidth (or the adja-
cent-channel bandwidths) being examined, only a few points on the trace are avail-
able per channel. This reduces the accuracy of the waveform calculation for the
channel filter used, which has a negative effect on the measurement accuracy. It is
therefore strongly recommended that the formulas mentioned be taken into consid-
eration when selecting the frequency span.
For channel power measurements the Adjust Settings softkey sets the frequency
span as follows:
"(No. of transmission channels – 1) x transmission channel spacing + 2 x transmis-
sion channel bandwidth + measurement margin"
For adjacent-channel power measurements, the Adjust Settings softkey sets the
frequency span as a function of the number of transmission channels, the trans-
mission channel spacing, the adjacent-channel spacing, and the bandwidth of one
of adjacent-channels ADJ, ALT1 or ALT2, whichever is furthest away from the
transmission channels:
"(No. of transmission channels – 1) x transmission channel spacing + 2 x (adja-
cent-channel spacing + adjacent-channel bandwidth) + measurement margin"
The measurement margin is approx. 10 % of the value obtained by adding the
channel spacing and the channel bandwidth.
● Resolution bandwidth (RBW)
To ensure both, acceptable measurement speed and required selection (to sup-
press spectral components outside the channel to be measured, especially of the
adjacent channels), the resolution bandwidth must not be selected too small or too
large. As a general approach, the resolution bandwidth is to be set to values
between 1% and 4% of the channel bandwidth.
A larger resolution bandwidth can be selected if the spectrum within the channel to
be measured and around it has a flat characteristic. In the standard setting, e.g. for
standard IS95A REV at an adjacent channel bandwidth of 30 kHz, a resolution
bandwidth of 30 kHz is used. This yields correct results since the spectrum in the
neighborhood of the adjacent channels normally has a constant level.
With the exception of the IS95 CDMA standards, the Adjust Settings softkey sets
the resolution bandwidth (RBW) as a function of the channel bandwidth:
"RBW ≤ 1/40 of channel bandwidth"
The maximum possible resolution bandwidth (with respect to the requirement RBW
≤ 1/40) resulting from the available RBW steps (1, 3) is selected.
● Video bandwidth (VBW)
For a correct power measurement, the video signal must not be limited in band-
width. A restricted bandwidth of the logarithmic video signal would cause signal
averaging and thus result in a too low indication of the power (-2.51 dB at very low
video bandwidths). The video bandwidth should therefore be selected at least three
times the resolution bandwidth:
"VBW ≥ 3 x RBW"
The Adjust Settings softkey sets the video bandwidth (VBW) as a function of the
channel bandwidth (see formula above) and the smallest possible VBW with regard
to the available step size will be selected.
● Detector

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 257

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

The Adjust Settings softkey selects the RMS detector. This detector is selected
since it correctly indicates the power irrespective of the characteristics of the signal
to be measured. The whole IF envelope is used to calculate the power for each
measurement point. The IF envelope is digitized using a sampling frequency which
is at least five times the resolution bandwidth which has been selected. Based on
the sample values, the power is calculated for each measurement point using the
following formula:

where:
"si = linear digitized video voltage at the output of the A/D converter"
"N = number of A/D converter values per measurement point"
"PRMS = power represented by a measurement point"
When the power has been calculated, the power units are converted into decibels
and the value is displayed as a measurement point.
In principle, the sample detector would be possible as well. Due to the limited num-
ber of measurement points used to calculate the power in the channel, the sample
detector would yield less stable results.
● Trace averaging
The Adjust Settings softkey switches off this function. Averaging, which is often
performed to stabilize the measurement results, leads to a too low level indication
and should therefore be avoided. The reduction in the displayed power depends on
the number of averages and the signal characteristics in the channel to be mea-
sured.
● Reference level
The Adjust Settings softkey does not influence the reference level. It can be adjus-
ted separately using the "Adjust Ref Lvl" softkey (see "Adjust Ref Lvl"
on page 255).

5.1.1.3 Measuring the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio

The R&S ESR can easily determine the carrier-to-noise ratio, also normalized to a 1
Hz bandwidth.
The largest signal in the frequency span is the carrier. It is searched when the C/N or
C/NO function is activated (see "C/N, C/No" on page 260) and is marked using a fixed
reference marker ("FXD").
To determine the noise power, a channel at the defined center frequency is examined.
The bandwidth of the channel is defined by the "Channel Bandwidth" setting. The
power within this channel is integrated to obtain the noise power level. (If the carrier is
within this channel, an extra step is required to determine the correct noise power
level, see below.)
The noise power of the channel is subtracted from the maximum carrier signal level,
and in the case of a C/NO measurement, it is referred to a 1 Hz bandwidth.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 258

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

For this measurement, the RMS detector is activated.

The carrier-to-noise measurements are only available in the frequency domain (span
>0).

There are two methods to measure the carrier-to-noise ratio:

● The carrier is outside the examined channel: In this case, it is sufficient to switch
on the desired measurement function and to set the channel bandwidth. The car-
rier/noise ratio is displayed on the screen.
● The carrier is inside the examined channel: In this case, the measurement must be
performed in two steps:
– First, perform the reference measurement by switching on either the C/N or the
C/NO measurement and waiting for the end of the next measurement run. The
fixed reference marker is set to the maximum of the measured carrier signal.
– Then, switch off the carrier so that only the noise of the test setup is active in
the channel. The carrier-to-noise ratio is displayed after the subsequent mea-
surement has been completed.

The frequency span should be set to approximately 4 times the channel bandwidth in
order to measure the carrier-to-noise ratio correctly. This setting is defined automati-
cally by the "Adjust Settings" function.

To determine the carrier-to-noise ratio

1. Press the "C/N, C/NO" softkey to configure the carrier-to-noise ratio measurement.

2. To change the channel bandwidth to be examined, press the "Channel Bandwidth"

softkey.

3. To optimize the settings for the selected channel configuration, press the "Adjust
Settings" softkey.

4. To activate the measurements without reference to the bandwidth, press the "C/N"
softkey.
To activate the measurements with reference to the bandwidth, press the "C/NO"
softkey .

5. If the carrier signal is located within the examined channel bandwidth, switch off
the carrier signal so that only the noise is displayed in the channel and perform a
second measurement.
The carrier-to-noise ratio is displayed after the measurement has been completed.

Measurement results
As a result of the carrier-to-noise measurement the evaluated bandwidth and the cal-
culated C/N ratio are indicated beneath the diagram.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 259

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

You can also query the determined carrier-to-noise ratio via the remote command
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? CN or CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? CN0, see
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? on page 690.

Softkeys for Carrier-to-Noise Ratio Measurements

C/N, C/No....................................................................................................................260
└ C/N................................................................................................................260
└ C/No..............................................................................................................260
└ Channel Bandwidth ......................................................................................260
└ Adjust Settings ............................................................................................. 261

C/N, C/No
Opens a submenu to configure the carrier/noise ratio measurement. Measurements
without (C/N) and measurements with reference to the bandwidth (C/No) are possible.
Carrier-to-noise measurements are not available in zero span mode.
Note: Carrier-to-noise measurements are also available in the I/Q Analyzer, but only
for Spectrum displays (see "Display Config" on page 470).
For general information on performing carrier-to-noise ratio measurements see chap-
ter 5.1.1.3, "Measuring the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio", on page 258.

C/N ← C/N, C/No

Switches the measurement of the carrier/noise ratio on or off. If no marker is active,
marker 1 is activated.
The measurement is performed on the trace that marker 1 is assigned to. To shift
marker 1 and measure another trace, use the Marker to Trace softkey in the "Marker
To" menu.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect on page 689
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? on page 690
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] on page 694

C/No ← C/N, C/No

Switches the measurement of the carrier/noise ratio with reference to a 1 Hz bandwidth
on or off. If no marker is active, marker 1 is activated.
The measurement is performed on the trace that marker 1 is assigned to. To shift
marker 1 and measure another trace, use the Marker to Trace softkey in the "Marker
To" menu.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect on page 689
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? on page 690
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] on page 694

Channel Bandwidth ← C/N, C/No

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the measurement channel bandwidth for each chan-
nel.
The default setting is 14 kHz.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 260

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Note that in the I/Q Analyzer the channel bandwidth does not change the measure-
ment span or sampling rate; it merely defines the range for the carrier-to-noise analy-
sis.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs on page 700

Adjust Settings ← C/N, C/No

Enables the RMS detector (see also chapter 5.3.1.5, "Detector Overview",
on page 408) and adjusts the span to the selected channel bandwidth according to:
"4 x channel bandwidth + measurement margin"
The adjustment is performed once; if necessary, the setting can be changed later on.
Note: in the I/Q Analyzer, this function is not available. The channel bandwidth defines
the range for the carrier-to-noise analysis.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet on page 695

5.1.1.4 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth

An important characteristic of a modulated signal is its occupied bandwidth. In a radio

communications system for instance the occupied bandwidth must be limited to enable
distortion-free transmission in adjacent channels. The occupied bandwidth is defined
as the bandwidth containing a defined percentage of the total transmitted power. A per-
centage between 10 % and 99.9 % can be set.
The measurement principle is the following: The bandwidth containing 99% of the sig-
nal power is to be determined, for example. The routine first calculates the total power
of all displayed points of the trace. In the next step, the points from the right edge of
the trace are summed up until 0.5 % of the total power is reached. Auxiliary marker 1 is
positioned at the corresponding frequency. Then the points from the left edge of the
trace are summed up until 0.5 % of the power is reached. Auxiliary marker 2 is posi-
tioned at this point. 99 % of the power is now between the two markers. The distance
between the two frequency markers is the occupied bandwidth which is displayed in
the marker field.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 261

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

New: OBW now also possible within defined search limits - multi-carrier OBW
measurement in one sweep
The occupied bandwidth of the signal can be determined within defined search limits
instead of for the entire signal. Thus, only a single sweep is required to determine the
OBW for a multi-carrier signal. To do so, search limits are defined for an individual car-
rier and the OBW measurement is restricted to the frequency range contained within
those limits. Then the search limits are adapted for the next carrier and the OBW is
automatically re-calculated for the new range.

The OBW measurement uses the same search limits as defined for marker search
(see "Search Limits" on page 216). However, only the left and right limits are consid-
ered.

To ensure correct power measurement, especially for noise signals, and to obtain the
correct occupied bandwidth, the following prerequisites and settings are necessary:
● Only the signal to be measured is displayed on the screen. An additional signal
would falsify the measurement.
● RBW << occupied bandwidth
(approx. 1/20 of occupied bandwidth, for voice communication type 300 Hz or 1
kHz)
● VBW ≥ 3 x RBW
● RMS detector
● Span ≥ 2 to 3 x occupied bandwidth
Some of the measurement specifications (e.g. PDC, RCR STD-27B) require measure-
ment of the occupied bandwidth using a peak detector. The detector setting of the
R&S ESR has to be changed accordingly then.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 262

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

A remote control programming example is described in chapter 10.16.5, "Occupied

Bandwidth Measurement", on page 983.

To determine the occupied bandwidth

1. Press the OBW softkey to activate the measurement of the occupied bandwidth.
The corresponding submenu is displayed.

2. Press the "% Power Bandwidth" softkey to enter the percentage of power (see "%
Power Bandwidth (span > 0)" on page 264).

3. To change the channel bandwidth for the transmission channel, press the "Channel
Bandwidth" softkey (see "Channel Bandwidth (span > 0)" on page 264).

4. To optimize the settings for the selected channel configuration, press the Adjust
Settings softkey. For details see also "Optimized Settings for CP/ACLR Test
Parameters" on page 256.

5. To adjust the reference level to the measured total power after the first sweep,
press the Adjust Ref Lvl softkey.

Measurement results
As a result of the OBW measurement the occupied bandwidth ("Occ BW") is indicated
in the marker results. Furthermore, the marker at the center frequency and the tempo-
rary markers are indicated.

The OBW calculation is repeated if the Search Limits are changed, without performing
a new sweep. Thus, the OBW for a multi-carrier signal can be determined using only
one sweep.

The determined occupied bandwidth can also be queried using the remote command
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? OBW or CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? AOBW. While
the OBW parameter returns only the occupied bandwidth, the AOBW parameter also
returns the position and level of the temporary markers T1 and T2 used to calculate the
occupied bandwidth.

Softkeys for Occupied Bandwidth (OBW) Measurements

OBW............................................................................................................................263
└ % Power Bandwidth (span > 0).................................................................... 264
└ Channel Bandwidth (span > 0)..................................................................... 264
└ Adjust Ref Lvl (span > 0).............................................................................. 264
└ Adjust Settings.............................................................................................. 264

OBW
Activates measurement of the occupied bandwidth according to the current configura-
tion and opens a submenu to configure the measurement. The occupied bandwidth is
displayed in the marker display field and marked on the trace by temporary markers.
For details see chapter 5.1.1.4, "Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth", on page 261.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 263

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

This measurement is not available in zero span.

The measurement is performed on the trace with marker 1. In order to evaluate
another trace, marker 1 must be placed on another trace (see the Marker to Trace soft-
key in the "Marker" menu).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect on page 689
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? on page 690
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] on page 694

% Power Bandwidth (span > 0) ← OBW

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the percentage of total power in the displayed fre-
quency range which defines the occupied bandwidth. Values from 10% to 99.9% are
allowed.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:BANDwidth|BWIDth on page 719

Channel Bandwidth (span > 0) ← OBW

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the channel bandwidth for the transmission channel.
The specified channel bandwidth is used for optimization of the test parameters (for
details see "Optimized Settings for CP/ACLR Test Parameters" on page 256). The
default setting is 14 kHz.
For measurements in line with a specific transmission standard, the bandwidth speci-
fied by the standard for the transmission channel must be entered.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel<channel>]
on page 701

Adjust Ref Lvl (span > 0) ← OBW

Adjusts the reference level to the measured total power of the signal. the softkey is
activated after the first sweep with active measurement of the occupied bandwidth has
been completed and the total power of the signal is thus known.
Adjusting the reference level ensures that the signal path will not be overloaded and
the dynamic range not limited by too low a reference level. Since the measurement
bandwidth for channel power measurements is significantly lower than the signal band-
width, the signal path may be overloaded although the trace is distinctly below the ref-
erence level. If the measured channel power is equal to the reference level, the signal
path cannot be overloaded.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel on page 696

Adjust Settings ← OBW

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 264

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

For details on the settings of span, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, detector
and trace averaging see "Optimized Settings for CP/ACLR Test Parameters"
on page 256.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet on page 695

5.1.1.5 Measuring with Spectrum Emission Masks

The Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurement defines a measurement that moni-
tors compliance with a spectral mask. The SEM measurement is used to measure the
excess emissions of a TX channel that would interfere to other channels or to other
systems.
The SEM measurement of the base unit allows a flexible definition of all parameters in
the SEM measurement. It is performed using the Spectrum Emission Mask softkey in
the "Measurement" menu. Most parameters are defined in the "Sweep List" dialog box
(see "Sweep List dialog box" on page 267). After a preset, the sweep list contains a
set of default ranges and parameters. For each range, you can change the parame-
ters. For information on other SEM settings, see the description of the corresponding
softkeys ("Spectrum Emission Mask" on page 267).
If you want a parameter set to be available permanently, you can create an XML file for
this configuration and, if necessary, export this file to another application (for details
refer to "Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files" on page 284 and
"ASCII File Export Format (Spectrum Emission Mask)" on page 289).
Some predefined XML files are provided that contain ranges and parameters according
to the selected standard (see "Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask
Measurement" on page 281).
In order to improve the performance of the R&S ESR for spectrum emission mask
measurements, a "Fast SEM" mode is available. For details see "Fast Spectrum Emis-
sion Mask Measurements" on page 290.
Monitoring compliance of the spectrum is supported by a special limit check for SEM
measurements, see "Working with Limit Lines in SEM Measurements" on page 280.

A remote control programming example is described in chapter 10.16.12, "Spectrum

Emission Mask Measurement", on page 994.

Softkeys for Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurements....................................266

Result Evaluation........................................................................................................ 277
Ranges and Range Settings....................................................................................... 278
Working with Limit Lines in SEM Measurements........................................................ 280
Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement......................... 281

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 265

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files....................................... 284

ASCII File Export Format (Spectrum Emission Mask)................................................ 289
Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measurements...........................................................290

Softkeys for Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurements

Spectrum Emission Mask............................................................................................267
└ Sweep List.................................................................................................... 267
└ Sweep List dialog box.........................................................................267
└ Range Start / Range Stop........................................................ 268
└ Fast SEM..................................................................................268
└ Filter Type.................................................................................268
└ RBW......................................................................................... 268
└ VBW......................................................................................... 269
└ Sweep Time Mode....................................................................269
└ Sweep Time..............................................................................269
└ Ref. Level................................................................................. 269
└ RF Att. Mode............................................................................ 269
└ RF Attenuator........................................................................... 269
└ Preamp..................................................................................... 269
└ Transd. Factor.......................................................................... 269
└ Limit Check 1-4.........................................................................270
└ Abs Limit Start.......................................................................... 270
└ Abs Limit Stop.......................................................................... 270
└ Rel Limit Start........................................................................... 270
└ Rel Limit Stop........................................................................... 270
└ Close Sweep List................................................................................ 271
└ Insert before Range............................................................................ 271
└ Insert after Range............................................................................... 271
└ Delete Range......................................................................................271
└ Symmetric Setup................................................................................ 271
└ Edit Reference Range........................................................................ 272
└ List Evaluation...............................................................................................272
└ List Evaluation (On/Off)...................................................................... 273
└ Margin.................................................................................................273
└ Show Peaks........................................................................................273
└ Save Evaluation List........................................................................... 273
└ ASCII File Export...................................................................... 273
└ Decim Sep................................................................................ 274
└ Edit Reference Range...................................................................................274
└ Edit Power Classes.......................................................................................275
└ Used Power Classes.......................................................................... 275
└ PMin/PMax......................................................................................... 275
└ Sweep List.......................................................................................... 276
└ Add/Remove....................................................................................... 276
└ Load Standard.............................................................................................. 276
└ Save As Standard......................................................................................... 276
└ Meas Start/Stop............................................................................................ 276
└ Restore Standard Files................................................................................. 276

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 266

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Spectrum Emission Mask

Opens a submenu to configure the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement.
The Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurement defines a measurement that moni-
tors compliance with a spectral mask. The SEM measurement of the base unit allows a
flexible definition of all parameters in the SEM measurement.
For general information on performing SEM measurements, see chapter 5.1.1.5, "Mea-
suring with Spectrum Emission Masks", on page 265.

Remote command:
SENS:SWE:MODE ESP, see [SENSe:]SWEep:MODE on page 731

Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Opens a submenu to edit the sweep list and displays the "Sweep List" dialog box.

Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask

After a preset, the sweep list contains a set of default ranges and parameters. For
each range, you can change the parameters listed below. To insert or delete ranges,
use the "Insert Before Range", "Insert After Range", "Delete Range" softkeys. The
measurement results are not updated during editing but on closing the dialog box ("Edit
Sweep List/ Close Sweep List" softkey, see "Close Sweep List" on page 271).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 267

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

The changes of the sweep list are only kept until you load another parameter set (by
pressing PRESET or by loading an XML file). If you want a parameter set to be availa-
ble permanently, create an XML file for this configuration (for details refer to "Format
Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files" on page 284).
If you load one of the provided XML files ("Load Standard" softkey, see "Load Stand-
ard" on page 276), the sweep list contains ranges and parameters according to the
selected standard. For further details refer also to "Provided XML Files for the Spec-
trum Emission Mask Measurement" on page 281.
Note: If you edit the sweep list, always follow the rules and consider the limitations
described in "Ranges and Range Settings" on page 278.

Range Start / Range Stop ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum
Emission Mask
Sets the start frequency/stop frequency of the selected range. Follow the rules descri-
bed in "Ranges and Range Settings" on page 278.
In order to change the start/stop frequency of the first/last range, select the appropriate
span with the SPAN key. If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the
ranges, the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and
have a minimum span of 20 Hz. The first and last ranges are adapted to the given
span as long as the minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated.
Frequency values for each range have to be defined relative to the center frequency.
The reference range has to be centered on the center frequency. The minimum span
of the reference range is given by the current TX Bandwidth.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STARt on page 735
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STOP on page 735

Fast SEM ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask
Activates "Fast SEM" mode for all ranges in the sweep list. For details see "Fast Spec-
trum Emission Mask Measurements" on page 290.
Note: If "Fast SEM" mode is deactivated while Symmetric Setup mode is on, "Symmet-
rical Setup" mode is automatically also deactivated.
If "Fast SEM" mode is activated while "Symmetrical Setup" mode is on, not all range
settings can be set automatically.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:HighSPeed on page 732

Filter Type ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask
Sets the filter type for this range. For details on filters see also chapter 5.2.6.3, "Select-
ing the Appropriate Filter Type", on page 375.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:FILTer:TYPE on page 734

RBW ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask
Sets the RBW value for this range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth[:RESolution] on page 733

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 268

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

VBW ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask
Sets the VBW value for this range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth:VIDeo on page 733

Sweep Time Mode ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission
Mask
Activates or deactivates the auto mode for the sweep time.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO on page 740

Sweep Time ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask
Sets the sweep time value for the range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME on page 739

Ref. Level ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask
Sets the reference level for the range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:RLEVel on page 739

RF Att. Mode ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission
Mask
Activates or deactivates the auto mode for RF attenuation.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO on page 736

RF Attenuator ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission

Mask
Sets the attenuation value for that range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation on page 736

Preamp ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask
Switches the preamplifier on or off.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:GAIN:STATe on page 736

Transd. Factor ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission
Mask
Sets a transducer for the specified range. You can only choose a transducer that fulfills
the following conditions:
● The transducer overlaps or equals the span of the range.
● The x-axis is linear.
● The unit is dB.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:TRANsducer on page 740

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 269

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Limit Check 1-4 ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission
Mask
Sets the type of limit check for all ranges.
For details on limit checks see "Working with Limit Lines in SEM Measurements"
on page 280.
For details on limit checks see the base unit description "Working with Lines in SEM".
The limit state affects the availability of all limit settings ("Abs Limit Start" on page 270,
"Abs Limit Stop" on page 270, "Rel Limit Start" on page 270, "Rel Limit Stop"
on page 270).
Depending on the number of active power classes (see "Power Class" dialog box), the
number of limits that can be set varies. Up to four limits are possible. The sweep list is
extended accordingly.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:STATe on page 739
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:FAIL? on page 687

Abs Limit Start ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission
Mask
Sets an absolute limit value at the start frequency of the range [dBm].
This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accordingly (see "Limit Check
1-4" on page 270).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:ABSolute:STARt
on page 737

Abs Limit Stop ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission
Mask
Sets an absolute limit value at the stop frequency of the range [dBm].
This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accordingly (see "Limit Check
1-4" on page 270).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:ABSolute:STOP
on page 737

Rel Limit Start ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission
Mask
Sets a relative limit value at the start frequency of the range [dBc].
This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accordingly (see "Limit Check
1-4" on page 270).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:RELative:STARt
on page 738

Rel Limit Stop ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission
Mask
Sets a relative limit value at the stop frequency of the range [dBc].

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 270

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accordingly (see "Sweep List
dialog box" on page 267).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:RELative:STOP
on page 738

Close Sweep List ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Closes the "Sweep List" dialog box and updates the measurement results.

Insert before Range ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Inserts a new range to the left of the currently focused range. The range numbers of
the currently focused range and all higher ranges are increased accordingly. The maxi-
mum number of ranges is 20.
For further details refer to "Ranges and Range Settings" on page 278.
Remote command:
ESP:RANG3:INS BEF, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INSert
on page 737

Insert after Range ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Inserts a new range to the right of the currently focused range. The range numbers of
all higher ranges are increased accordingly. The maximum number of ranges is 20.
For further details refer to "Ranges and Range Settings" on page 278.
Remote command:
ESP:RANG1:INS AFT, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INSert
on page 737

Delete Range ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Deletes the currently focused range, if possible. The range numbers are updated
accordingly. For further details refer to "Ranges and Range Settings" on page 278.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:DELete on page 734

Symmetric Setup ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask

If activated, the current sweep list configuration is changed to define a symmetrical
setup regarding the reference range. The number of ranges to the left of the reference
range is reflected to the right, i.e. any missing ranges on the right are inserted, while
superfluous ranges are removed. The values in the ranges to the right of the reference
range are adapted symmetrically to those in the left ranges.
Any changes to the range settings in active "Symmetric Setup" mode lead to symmetri-
cal changes in the other ranges (where possible). In particular, this means:
● Inserting ranges: a symmetrical range is inserted on the other side of the reference
range
● Deleting ranges: the symmetrical range on the other side of the reference range is
also deleted
● Editing range settings: the settings in the symmetrical range are adapted accord-
ingly

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 271

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Note: If "Fast SEM" mode is deactivated while "Symmetric Setup" mode is on, "Sym
Setup" mode is automatically also deactivated.
If "Fast SEM" mode is activated while "Symmetric Setup" mode is on, not all range set-
tings can be set automatically.

Edit Reference Range ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Opens the "Reference Range" dialog box to edit the additional settings used for SEM
measurements.

Two different power reference types are supported:

● "Peak Power"
Measures the highest peak within the reference range.
● "Channel Power"
Measures the channel power within the reference range (integral bandwidth
method).
If the "Channel Power" reference power type is activated, the dialog box is exten-
ded to define additional settings:
● "Tx Bandwidth"
Defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power:
minimum span ≤ value ≤ span of reference range
● "RRC Filter State"
Activates or deactivates the use of an RRC filter.
● "RRC Filter Settings"
Sets the alpha value of the RRC filter. This window is only available if the RRC fil-
ter is activated.
For further details refer to "Ranges and Range Settings" on page 278.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RTYPe on page 742
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:BWID on page 741
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:FILTer[:RRC][:STATe] on page 742
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:FILTer[:RRC]:ALPHa on page 741

List Evaluation ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Opens a submenu to edit the list evaluation settings.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 272

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

List Evaluation (On/Off) ← List Evaluation ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Activates or deactivates the list evaluation.
Remote command:
Turning list evaluation on and off:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:AUTO on page 728
Querying list evaluation results:
TRACe<n>:DATA on page 696

Margin ← List Evaluation ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the margin used for the limit check/peak search.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:MARGin on page 649

Show Peaks ← List Evaluation ← Spectrum Emission Mask

In the diagram, marks all peaks with blue squares that have been listed during an
active list evaluation.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:PSHow on page 748

Save Evaluation List ← List Evaluation ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Opens the "ASCII File Export Name" dialog box to save the result in ASCII format to a
specified file and directory. For further details refer also to the "ASCII File Export" soft-
key ("ASCII File Export" on page 273).
Remote command:
MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIST on page 747

ASCII File Export ← Save Evaluation List ← List Evaluation ← Spectrum Emis-
sion Mask
Opens the "ASCII File Export Name" dialog box and saves the active peak list in ASCII
format to the specified file and directory.
The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a data sec-
tion containing the marker data. For details on an ASCII file see chapter 5.3.1.6, "ASCII
File Export Format", on page 409.
This format can be processed by spreadsheet calculation programs, e.g. MS-Excel. It
is necessary to define ';' as a separator for the data import. Different language versions
of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point. It is there-
fore possible to select between separators '.' (decimal point) and ',' (comma) using the
"Decim Sep" softkey (see "Decim Sep" on page 209).
An example of an output file for Spectrum Emission Mask measurements is given in
"ASCII File Export Format (Spectrum Emission Mask)" on page 289.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 820
MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIST on page 747

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 273

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Decim Sep ← Save Evaluation List ← List Evaluation ← Spectrum Emission

Mask
Selects the decimal separator with floating-point numerals for the ASCII Trace export
to support evaluation programs (e.g. MS-Excel) in different languages. The values '.'
(decimal point) and ',' (comma) can be set.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 820

Edit Reference Range ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Opens the "Reference Range" dialog box to edit the additional settings used for SEM
measurements.

Two different power reference types are supported:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 274

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Edit Power Classes ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Opens a dialog box to modify the power class settings.

Used Power Classes ← Edit Power Classes ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Choose the power classes to be used from this dropdown menu. It is only possible to
select either one of the defined power classes or all of the defined power classes
together.
Only power classes for which limits are defined are available for selection.
If "All" is selected, the power class that corresponds to the currently measured power
in the reference range is used. The limits assigned to that power class are applied (see
"PMin/PMax" on page 275).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>[:EXCLusive]
on page 744
To define all limits in one step:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:LIMit[:STATe]
on page 744

PMin/PMax ← Edit Power Classes ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Defines the level limits for each power class. The range always starts at -200 dBm (-
INF) and always stops at 200 dBm (+INF). These fields cannot be modified. If more
than one Power Class is defined, the value of "PMin" must be equal to the value of
"PMax" of the last Power Class and vice versa.
Note that the power level may be equal to the lower limit, but must be lower than the
upper limit:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 275

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Pmin≦P<Pmax
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:MINimum on page 745
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:MAXimum on page 745

Sweep List ← Edit Power Classes ← Spectrum Emission Mask

See "Sweep List" on page 267

Add/Remove ← Edit Power Classes ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Activates or deactivates power classes to be defined. Up to four power classes can be
defined. The number of active power classes affects the availability of the items of the
Used Power Classes dropdown menu.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>[:EXCLusive]
on page 744

Load Standard ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Opens a dialog box to select an XML file which includes the desired standard specifi-
cation. For details on the provided XML files refer to "Provided XML Files for the Spec-
trum Emission Mask Measurement" on page 281.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet[:STANdard] on page 730

Save As Standard ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Opens the "Save As Standard" dialog box, in which the currently used SEM settings
and parameters can be saved and exported into an *.xml file. Enter the name of the file
in the "File name" field. For details on the structure and contents of the XML file refer to
"Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files" on page 284.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet:STORe on page 730

Meas Start/Stop ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Aborts/restarts the current measurement and displays the status:
"Start" The measurement is currently running.
"Stop" The measurement has been stopped, or, in single sweep mode, the
end of the sweep has been reached.
Remote command:
ABORt on page 608
INITiate<n>:ESPectrum on page 731

Restore Standard Files ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Copies the XML files from the C:\R_S\instr\sem_backup folder to the C:
\R_S\instr\sem_std folder. Files of the same name are overwritten.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet:RESTore on page 730

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 276

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Result Evaluation
As a result of the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement, the measured signal levels,
the result of the limit check (mask monitoring) and the defined limit line are displayed in
a diagram (see also "Working with Limit Lines in SEM Measurements" on page 280).
Furthermore, the TX channel power "P" is indicated in relation to the defined power
class ranges.

Example:
For example, "P<31" is indicated if the lowest power class is defined from infinity to 31
and the power is currently 17 dBm.

In addition to the graphical results of the SEM measurement displayed in the diagram,
a result table is displayed to evaluate the limit check results (see also "Working with
Limit Lines in SEM Measurements" on page 280).
The following information is provided in the result table:

Label Description

General Information

Standard Loaded standard settings

Tx Power Tx channel power

Tx Bandwidth Tx channel bandwidth

RBW RBW for the Tx channel

Range results

Range Low Frequency range start for range the peak value belongs to

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 277

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Label Description

Range Up Frequency range stop for range the peak value belongs to

RBW RBW of the range

Frequency Frequency

Power Abs Absolute power level

Power Rel Power level relative to the TX channel power

ΔLimit Deviation of the power level from the defined limit

In which detail the data is displayed in the result table can be defined in the List Evalu-
ation menu. By default, one peak per range is displayed. However, you can change the
settings to display only peaks that exceed a threshold ("Margin").
In addition to listing the peaks in the list evaluation, detected peaks can be indicated by
blue squares in the diagram ("Show Peaks").

Furthermore, you can save the evaluation list to a file ("Save Evaluation List").

Retrieving Results via Remote Control

The measurement results of the spectrum emission mask test can be retrieved using
the CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:FAIL? command from a remote computer.
The power result for the reference range can be queried using
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? CPOW, the peak power for the reference range using
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? PPOW.
For details see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult?
on page 690.

Ranges and Range Settings

In the Spectrum Emission Mask measurements, a range defines a segment for which
you can define the following parameters separately:
● Start and stop frequency

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 278

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

● RBW
● VBW
● Sweep time
● Sweep points
● Reference level
● Attenuator settings
● Limit values
Via the sweep list, you define the ranges and their settings. For details on settings refer
to "Sweep List dialog box" on page 267.
For details on defining the limits (masks) see "Working with Limit Lines in SEM Mea-
surements" on page 280.
For details on defining the limits (masks) see the base unit description "Working with
Lines in SEM".
The following rules apply to ranges:
● The minimum span of a range is 20 Hz.
● The individual ranges must not overlap (but need not directly follow one another).
● The maximum number of ranges is 20.
● A minimum of three ranges is mandatory.
● The reference range cannot be deleted (it is marked in blue color).
● The reference range has to be centered on the center frequency.
● The minimum span of the reference range is given by the current TX Bandwidth.
● Frequency values for each range have to be defined relative to the center fre-
quency.
In order to change the start frequency of the first range or the stop frequency of the last
range, select the appropriate span with the SPAN key. If you set a span that is smaller
than the overall span of the ranges, the measurement includes only the ranges that lie
within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz. The first and last ranges
are adapted to the given span as long as the minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated.

Symmetrical ranges
You can easily define a sweep list with symmetrical range settings, i.e. the ranges to
the left and right of the center range are defined symmectrically. In the "Sweep List"
menu, select the "Symmetrical Setup" softkey to activate symmetrical setup mode. The
current sweep list configuration is changed to define a symmetrical setup regarding the
reference range. The number of ranges to the left of the reference range is reflected to
the right, i.e. any missing ranges on the right are inserted, while superfluous ranges
are removed. The values in the ranges to the right of the reference range are adapted
symmetrically to those in the left ranges.
For details see "Symmetric Setup" on page 271.
Symmetrical ranges fulfull the conditions required for "Fast SEM" mode (see "Fast
Spectrum Emission Mask Measurements" on page 290).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 279

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Working with Limit Lines in SEM Measurements

Using the R&S ESR, the spectrum emission mask is defined using limit lines. Limit
lines allow you to check the measured data against specified limit values. Generally, it
is possible to define limit lines for any measurement in Spectrum mode using the
LINES key. For SEM measurements, however, special limit lines are available via the
"Sweep List", and it is strongly recommended that you use only these limit line defini-
tions.
In the "Sweep List" you can define a limit line for each power class that varies its level
according to the specified frequency ranges. Distinguished limit lines
("_SEM_LINE_ABS<0...3>"/"_SEM_LINE_REL<0...3>") are automatically defined for
each power class according to the current "Sweep List" settings every time the settings
change.
The limit line defined for the current power class is indicated by a red line in the dis-
play, and the result of the limit check is indicated at the top of the diagram. Note that
only "Pass" or "Fail" is indicated; a "margin" function as for general limit lines is not
available.

The indicated limit line depends on the settings in the "Sweep List". Several types of
limit checks are possible:

Limit check type Pass/fail criteria Indicated limit line

Absolute Absolute power levels may not Defined by the "Abs Limit Start"/ "Abs Limit
exceed limit line Stop" values for each range

Relative Power deviations relative to the TX Defined by the "Rel Limit Start"/ "Rel Limit
channel power may not exceed limit Stop" values (relative to the center frequency)
line for each range

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 280

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Limit check type Pass/fail criteria Indicated limit line

Abs and Rel Only if the power exceeds both the The less strict (higher) limit line is displayed
absolute and the relative limits, the for each range.
check fails.

Abs or Rel If the power exceeds either the The stricter (lower) limit line is displayed for
absolute or the relative limits, the each range.
check fails.

The largest deviations of the power from the limit line for each range are displayed in
the evaluation list. Furthermore, the absolute powers for those values, as well as the
relative deviation from the TX channel power are displayed. Values that exceed the
limit are indicated in red and by an asterisk (*).

Although a margin functionality is not available for the limit check, a margin (threshold)
for the peak values to be displayed in the evaluation list can be defined in the list eval-
uation settings. For details see "Result Evaluation" on page 277.

Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement

You can change the settings manually or via XML files. The XML files offer a quick way
to change the configuration. A set of ready-made XML files for different standards is
already provided. For details see table 5-1. You can also create and use your own
XML files (for details see "Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files"
on page 284). All XML files are stored under "C:\r_s\instr\sem_std". Use the
"Load Standard" softkey for quick access to the available XML files (see "Load Stand-
ard" on page 276).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 281

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Table 5-1: Provided XML files

Path XML file name Displayed standard character-

istics*

cdma2000\DL default0.xml CDMA2000 BC0 DL

default1.xml CDMA2000 BC1 DL

cdma2000\UL default0.xml CDMA2000 BC0 UL

default1.xml CDMA2000 BC1 UL

WCDMA\3GPP\DL PowerClass_31_39.xml W-CDMA 3GPP (31,39)dBm DL

PowerClass_39_43.xml W-CDMA 3GPP (39,43)dBm DL

PowerClass_43_INF.xml W-CDMA 3GPP (43,INF)dBm

PowerClass_negINF_31.xml W-CDMA 3GPP (-INF,31)dBm

WIBRO\DL PowerClass_29_40.xml WiBro TTA (29,40)dBm DL

PowerClass_40_INF.xml WiBro TTA (40,INF)dBm DL

PowerClass_negINF_29.xml WiBro TTA (-INF,29)dBm DL

WIBRO\UL PowerClass_23_INF.xml WiBro TTA (23,INF)dBm UL

PowerClass_negINF_23.xml WiBro TTA (23,INF)dBm UL

WIMAX\DL\ETSI\…MHz (1.75 System_Type_E.xml WIMAX System Type E DL

MHz, 2.00 MHz, 3.5 MHz, 7.00
MHz, 14.00 MHz, 28 MHz)

System_Type_F.xml WIMAX System Type F DL

System_Type_G.xml WIMAX System Type G DL

WIMAX\DL\IEEE 10MHz.xml WIMAX 10MHz DL

20MHz.xml WIMAX 20MHz DL

WIMAX\UL\ETSI…MHz (1.75 System_Type_E.xml WIMAX System Type E UL

MHz, 2.00 MHz, 3.5 MHz, 7.00
MHz, 14.00 MHz, 28 MHz)

System_Type_F.xml WIMAX System Type F UL

System_Type_G.xml WIMAX System Type G UL

WIMAX\UL\IEEE 10MHz.xml WIMAX 10MHz UL

20MHz.xml WIMAX 20MHz UL

WLAN\802_11_TURBO ETSI.xml IEEE 802.11

IEEE.xml IEEE 802.11

WLAN\802_11a ETSI.xml IEEE 802.11a

IEEE.xml IEEE 802.11a

WLAN\802_11b IEEE.xml IEEE 802.11b

WLAN\802_11j_10MHz ETSI.xml IEEE.802.11j

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 282

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Path XML file name Displayed standard character-

istics*

IEEE.xml IEEE.802.11j

WLAN\802_11j_20MHz ETSI.xml IEEE 802.11j

IEEE.xml IEEE 802.11j

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryA\ BW_01_4_MHz__CFhigher1GHz.xm LTE Cat. A >1GHz DL

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryA\ BW_01_4_MHz__CFlower1GHz.xml LTE Cat. A <1GHz DL

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryA\ BW_03_0_MHz__CFhigher1GHz.xm LTE Cat. A >1GHz DL

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryA\ BW_03_0_MHz__CFlower1GHz.xml LTE Cat. A <1GHz DL

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryA\ BW_05_0_MHz__CFhigher1GHz.xm LTE Cat. A >1GHz DL

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryA\ BW_05_0_MHz__CFlower1GHz.xml LTE Cat. A <1GHz DL

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryA\ BW_10_0_MHz__Cfhigher1GHz.xml LTE Cat. A >1GHz DL

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryA\ BW_10_0_MHz__Cflower1GHz.xml LTE Cat. A >1GHz DL

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryA\ BW_15_0_MHz__CFhigher1GHz.xm LTE Cat. A >1GHz DL

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryA\ BW_15_0_MHz__CFlower1GHz.xml LTE Cat. A <1GHz DL

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryA\ BW_20_0_MHz__CFhigher1GHz.xm LTE Cat. A >1GHz DL

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryA\ BW_20_0_MHz__CFlower1GHz.xml LTE Cat. A <1GHz DL

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryB\ BW_01_4_MHz__CFhigher1GHz.xm LTE Cat. B >1GHz DL

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryB\ BW_01_4_MHz__CFlower1GHz.xml LTE Cat. B <1GHz DL

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryB\ BW_03_0_MHz__CFhigher1GHz.xm LTE Cat. B >1GHz DL

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryB\ BW_03_0_MHz__CFlower1GHz.xml LTE Cat. B <1GHz DL

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryB\ BW_05_0_MHz__CFhigher1GHz.xm LTE Cat. B >1GHz DL

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryB\ BW_05_0_MHz__CFlower1GHz.xml LTE Cat. B <1GHz DL

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryB\ BW_10_0_MHz__Cfhigher1GHz.xml LTE Cat. B >1GHz DL

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryB\ BW_10_0_MHz__Cflower1GHz.xml LTE Cat. B >1GHz DL

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryB\ BW_15_0_MHz__CFhigher1GHz.xm LTE Cat. B >1GHz DL

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryB\ BW_15_0_MHz__CFlower1GHz.xml LTE Cat. B <1GHz DL

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryB\ BW_20_0_MHz__CFhigher1GHz.xm LTE Cat. B >1GHz DL

EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryB\ BW_20_0_MHz__CFlower1GHz.xml LTE Cat. B <1GHz DL

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 283

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Path XML file name Displayed standard character-

istics*

EUTRA-LTE\UL\Standard\ BW_05_0_MHz.xml LTE UL

EUTRA-LTE\UL\Standard\ BW_10_0_MHz.xml LTE UL

EUTRA-LTE\UL\Standard\ BW_15_0_MHz.xml LTE UL

EUTRA-LTE\UL\Standard\ BW_20_0_MHz.xml LTE UL

*Used abbreviations:
BC: band class
UL: uplink
DL: downlink
TTA: Telecommunications Technology Association

Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files

The files for importing range settings are in XML format and therefore obey the rules of
the XML standard. Below, the child nodes, attributes, and structure defined for the data
import is described. Build your own XML files according to these conventions because
the R&S ESR can only interpret XML files of a known structure. For example files look
in the C:\r_s\instr\sem_std directory.

Fig. 5-5: Example Spectrum emission mask standard file (PowerClass_39_43.xml)

Be sure to follow the structure exactly as shown below or else the R&S ESR is not able
to interpret the XML file and error messages are shown on the screen. Therefore, we
recommend you make a copy of an existing file (see Save As Standard softkey) and
edit the copy of the file.
Alternatively, edit the settings using the "Spectrum Emission Mask" softkey and the
Sweep List dialog box and save the XML file with the Save As Standard softkey after-
wards. This way, no modifications have to be done in the XML file itself.

Basically, the file consists of three elements that can be defined:

● The "BaseFormat" element
● The "PowerClass" element

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 284

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

● The "Range" element

The "BaseFormat" element

It carries information about basic settings. In this element only the "ReferencePower"
child node has any effects on the measurement itself. The other attributes and child
nodes are used to display information about the Spectrum Emission Mask Standard on
the measurement screen. The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in
table 5-2.
In the example above (PowerClass_39_43.xml under
C:\r_s\instr\sem_std\WCDMA\3GPP, see figure 5-5), these attributes are defined
as follows:
● Standard="W-CDMA 3GPP"
● LinkDirection="DL"
● PowerClass="(39,43)dBm"

The "PowerClass" element

It is embedded in the "BaseFormat" element and contains settings information about
the power classes. Up to four different power classes can be defined. For details refer
to the "Sweep List" softkey ("Sweep List" on page 267) and the corresponding parame-
ter description. The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in table 5-3.

The "Range" element

This element is embedded in the "PowerClass" element. It contains the settings infor-
mation of the range. There have to be at least three defined ranges: one reference
range and at least one range to either side of the reference range. The maximum num-
ber of ranges is 20. Note that the R&S ESR uses the same ranges in each power
class. Therefore, the contents of the ranges of each defined power class have to be
identical to the first power class. An exception are the Start and Stop values of the two
Limit nodes that are used to determine the power class. Note also, that there are two
Limit nodes to be defined: one that gives the limit in absolute values and one in relative
values. Make sure units for the Start and Stop nodes are identical for each Limit node.
For details refer to the "Sweep List" softkey ("Sweep List" on page 267) and the corre-
sponding parameter description. The child nodes and attributes of this element are
shown in table 5-4.
The following tables show the child nodes and attributes of each element and show if a
child node or attribute is mandatory for the R&S ESR to interpret the file or not. Since
the hierarchy of the XML can not be seen in the tables, either view one of the default
files already stored on the R&S ESR in the "C:\r_s\instr\sem_std" directory or
check the structure as shown below.
Below, a basic example of the structure of the file is shown, containing all mandatory
attributes and child nodes. Note that the "PowerClass" element and the range element
are themselves elements of the "BaseFormat" element and are to be inserted where
noted. The separation is done here simply for reasons of a better overview. Also, no
example values are given here to allow a quick reference to the tables above. Italic font
shows the placeholders for the values.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 285

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

● The "BaseFormat" element is structured as follows:

– <RS_SEM_ACP_FileFormat Version=""1.0.0.0"">
<Name>"Standard"</Name>
<Instrument>
<Type>"Instrument Type"</Type>
<Application>"Application"</Application>
</Instrument>
<LinkDirection Name=""Name"">
<ReferencePower>
<Method>"Method"</Method>
</ReferencePower>
<PowerClass Index=""n"">


</PowerClass>
</LinkDirection>
</RS_SEM_ACP_File>
● The "PowerClass" element is structured as follows:
– <PowerClass Index=""n"">
<StartPower Unit=""dBm"" InclusiveFlag=""true"" Value=""StartPowerValue""/>
<StopPower Unit=""dBm"" InclusiveFlag=""false"" Value=""StopPowerValue""/>
<DefaultLimitFailMode>"Limit Fail Mode"</DefaultLimitFailMode>
<Range Index=""n"">


</Range>
…
</PowerClass>
● The "Range" element is structured as follows:
– <Range Index=""n"">
<Name=""Name"">
<ChannelType>"Channel Type"</Channel Type>
<WeightingFilter>
<Type>"FilterType"</Type>
<RollOffFactor>"Factor"</RollOffFactor>
<Bandwith>"Bandwidth"</Bandwidth>
</WeightingFilter>
<FrequencyRange>
<Start>"RangeStart"</Start>
<Stop>"RangeStop"</Stop>
</FrequencyRange>
<Limit>
<Start Unit=""Unit"" Value=""Value""/>
<Stop Unit=""Unit"" Value=""Value""/>
</Limit>
<Limit>
<Start Unit=""Unit"" Value=""Value""/>
<Stop Unit=""Unit"" Value=""Value""/>

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 286

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

</Limit>
<RBW Bandwidth=""Bandwidth"" Type=""FilterType""/>
<VBW Bandwidth=""Bandwidth""/>
<Detector>"Detector"</Detector>
<Sweep Mode=""SweepMode"" Time=""SweepTime""/>
<Amplitude>
<ReferenceLevel Unit=""dBm"" Value=""Value""/>
<RFAttenuation Mode=""Auto"" Unit=""dB"" Value=""Value""/>
<Preamplifier State=""State""/>
</Amplitude>
</Range>
Table 5-2: Attributes and child nodes of the BaseFormat element

Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand.

FileFormatVersion 1.0.0.0 Yes

Date YYYY-MM-DD Date in ISO 8601 format No

HH:MM:SS

Name <string> Name of the standard Yes

Instrument Type FSL Name of the instrument No

Application SA | K72 | K82 Name of the application No

LinkDirection Name Downlink | Uplink | Yes

None

ShortName DL | UL No

Reference- Yes
Power

Method TX Channel Power | Yes

TX Channel Peak
Power

Reference- <string> No
Channel

Table 5-3: Attributes and child nodes of the PowerClass element

Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand.

StartPower Value <power in dBm> The start power must be equal Yes
to the stop power of the previ-
ous power class. The Start-
Power value of the first range
is -200

Unit dBm Yes

InclusiveFlag true Yes

StopPower Value <power in dBm> The stop power must be equal Yes
to the start power of the next
power class. The StopPower
value of the last range is 200

Unit dBm

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 287

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand.

InclusiveFlag false Yes

DefaultLimitFailMode Absolute | Relative Yes

| Absolute and Rel-
ative | Absolute or
Relative

Table 5-4: Attributes and child nodes of the Range element (normal ranges)

Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand.

Index 0…19 Inde XE s are continuous Yes

and have to start with 0

Name <string> Name of the range Only if Referen-

ceChannel con-
tains a name and
the range is the
reference range

Short- <string> Short name of the range No

Name

ChannelType TX | Adjacent Yes

WeightingFilter Only if Referen-

cePower method
is TX Channel
Power and the
range is the ref-
erence range

Type RRC | CFilter Type of the weighting filter Yes

Roll Off Factor 0…1 Excess bandwidth of the fil- Only if the filter
ter type is RRC

Bandwidth <bandwidth in Hz> Filter bandwidth Only if the filter

type is RRC

FrequencyRange Yes

Start <frequency in Hz> Start value of the range Yes

Stop <frequency in Hz> Stop value of the range Yes

Limit dBm/Hz | dBm | A Range must contain Yes

dBc | dBr | dB exactly two limit nodes; one
of the limit nodes has to
have a relative unit (e.g.
dBc), the other one must
have an absolute unit (e.g.
dBm)

Start Value <numeric_value> Power limit at start fre- Yes

quency

Unit dBm/Hz | dBm | Sets the unit of the start

dBc | dBr | dB value

Stop Value <numeric_value> Power limit at stop fre-

quency

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 288

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand.

Unit dBm/Hz | dBm | Sets the unit of the stop

dBc | dBr | dB value

LimitFailMode Absolute | Relative If used, it has to be identical No

| Absolute and Rel- to DefaultLimitFailMode
ative | Absolute or
Relative

RBW Bandwidth <bandwidth in Hz> "RBW" on page 268 Yes

Type NORM | PULS | No

CFIL | RRC

VBW Bandwidth <bandwidth in Hz> "VBW" on page 269 Yes

Detector NEG | POS | If used, it has to be identical No

SAMP | RMS | in all ranges.
AVER | QUAS

Sweep Mode Manual | Auto "Sweep Time Mode" Yes

on page 269

Time <time in sec> "Sweep Time" on page 269 No

Amplitude No

ReferenceLevel Value <power in dBm> "Ref. Level" on page 269 Yes, if the Refer-
enceLevel child
node is used

Unit dBm Defines dBm as unit Yes, if the Refer-

enceLevel node
is used

RFAttenuation Mode Manual | Auto "RF Att. Mode" on page 269 Yes, if the Refer-
enceLevel child
node is used

Preamplifier ON | OFF "Preamp" on page 269 Yes

ASCII File Export Format (Spectrum Emission Mask)

The first part of the file lists information about the signal analyzer and the general
setup. For a detailed description refer to chapter 5.3.1.6, "ASCII File Export Format",
on page 409.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 289

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

File contents Description

RefType; CPOWER; reference range setup, for details see "Edit

Reference Range" on page 272
TxBandwidth;9540000;Hz
Filter State; ON;
Alpha;0.22;

PeaksPerRange;1; evaluation list information

Values;4;

0;-22500000;-9270000;1000000;2986455000;-74.762840 information about each peak:

270996094; <range number>;
-10.576210021972656;-45.762840270996094;PASS; <start frequency>;
1;-9270000;-4770000;100000;2991405000;-100.1769561 <stop frequency>;
7675781;
<resolution bandwidth of range>;
-35.990325927734375;-1.490325927734375;PASS
<frequency of peak>;
3;4770000;9270000;100000;3005445000;-100.17695617
675781; <absolute power in dBm of peak>;

-35.990325927734375;-1.490325927734375;PASS; <relative power in dBc of peak

4;9270000;22500000;1000000;3018225000;-74.7628402 (related to the channel power)>;

70996094; <distance to the limit line in dB
-10.576210021972656;-45.762840270996094;PASS; (positive value means above the limit)>;
<limit fail (pass = 0, fail =1)>;

Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measurements

In order to improve the performance of the R&S ESR for spectrum emission mask
measurements, a "Fast SEM" mode is available. If this mode is activated, several con-
secutive ranges with identical sweep settings are combined to one sweep internally,
which makes the measurement considerably more efficient. The displayed results
remain unchanged and still consist of several ranges. Thus, measurement settings that
apply only to the results, such as limits or transducer factors, can nevertheless be
defined individually for each range.

Prerequisites
"Fast SEM" mode is available if the following criteria apply:
● The frequency ranges are consecutive, without frequency gaps
● The following sweep settings are identical:
– "Filter Type", see "Filter Type" on page 268
– "RBW", see "RBW" on page 268
– "VBW", see "VBW" on page 269
– "Sweep Time Mode", see "Sweep Time Mode" on page 269
– "Ref Level", see "Ref. Level" on page 269
– "Rf Att. Mode", see "RF Att. Mode" on page 269
– "RF Attenuator", see "RF Att. Mode" on page 269
– "Preamp", see "Preamp" on page 269

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 290

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Activating Fast SEM mode

"Fast SEM" mode is activated in the sweep list (see "Fast SEM" on page 268) or using
a remote command. Activating the mode for one range automatically activates it for all
ranges in the sweep list.
In the provided XML files for the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement, "Fast SEM"
mode is activated by default.
SCPI command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:HighSPeed on page 732

Consequences
When the "Fast SEM" mode is activated, the ranges for which these criteria apply are
displayed as one single range. The sweep time is defined as the sum of the individual
sweep times, initially, but can be changed. When the "Fast SEM" mode is deactivated,
the originally defined individual sweep times are reset.

If "Symmetrical Setup" mode is active when "Fast SEM" mode is activated, not all
sweep list settings can be configured symmetrically automatically (see also "Symmetric
Setup" on page 271).

Any other changes to the sweep settings of the combined range are applied to each
included range and remain changed even after deactivating "Fast SEM" mode.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 291

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Example

Fig. 5-6: Sweep list using Fast SEM mode

In figure 5-6, a sweep list is shown for which Fast SEM is activated. The formerly 5
separately defined ranges are combined to 2 sweep ranges internally.

5.1.1.6 Measuring Spurious Emissions

The Spurious Emissions measurement defines a measurement that monitors unwan-

ted RF products outside the assigned frequency band generated by an amplifier. The
spurious emissions are usually measured across a wide frequency range. The Spuri-
ous Emissions measurement allows a flexible definition of all parameters. A result table
indicates the largest deviations of the absolute power from the limit line for each range,
and the results can be checked against defined limits automatically.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 292

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Spurious Emissions measurements are performed using the "Spurious Emissions"

softkey in the "Measurement" menu (see "Spurious Emissions" on page 298).
Most parameters are defined in the "Sweep List" dialog box (see "Sweep List dialog
box" on page 298). For information on other parameters, see the corresponding soft-
keys ("Spurious Emissions" on page 298).

Conditions for ranges

The following rules apply to ranges:
● The minimum span of a range is 20 Hz.
● The individual ranges must not overlap (but need not directly follow one another).
● The maximum number of ranges is 20.
● The maximum number of sweep points in all ranges is limited to 100001.
In order to change the start/stop frequency of the first/last range, select the appropriate
span with the SPAN key. If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the
ranges, the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and
have a minimum span of 20 Hz. The first and last ranges are adapted to the given
span as long as the minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 293

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Defining ranges by remote control

In Spurious Emissions measurements, there are no remote commands to insert new
ranges between existing ranges directly. However, you can delete or re-define the
existing ranges to create the required order.
A remote command example for defining parameters and ranges in spurious emissions
measurements can be found in chapter 7 "Remote Control – Programming Examples"
of the Operating manual on the CD-ROM.

Result Evaluation
In addition to the graphical results of the spurious measurement displayed in the dia-
gram, a result table can be displayed to evaluate the limit check results (see also
"Working with Limit Lines in Spurious Measurements" on page 295). Which data is
displayed in the evaluation list can be defined in the "List Evaluation" menu (see "List
Evaluation" on page 301).
The following information is provided in the evaluation list:

Column Description

Range Low Frequency range start for range the peak value
belongs to

Range Up Frequency range stop for range the peak value

belongs to

RBW RBW of the range

Frequency Frequency at the peak value

Power Abs Absolute power level at the peak value

ΔLimit Deviation of the absolute power level from the

defined limit for the peak value

By default, one peak per range is displayed. However, you can change the settings to:
● Display all peaks ("Details ON")
● Display a certain number of peaks per range ("Details ON" + "Peaks per Range")
● Display only peaks that exceed a threshold ("Margin")
In addition to listing the peaks in the list evaluation, detected peaks can be indicated by
blue squares in the diagram ("Show Peaks").

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 294

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Furthermore, you can save the evaluation list to a file ("Save Evaluation List").

Retrieving Results via Remote Control

The spurious measurement results can be retrieved using the CALC:PSE? command
from a remote computer (see CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch[:
IMMediate] for a detailed description).
In addition, the TRACe<n>:DATA command queries the trace data. In case of spurious
emission measurements, the trace data is the power levels that have been measured
for each sweep point (max. 691).

Working with Limit Lines in Spurious Measurements

Limit lines allow you to check the measured data against specified limit values. Gener-
ally, it is possible to define limit lines for any measurement in Spectrum mode using the
LINES key. For Spurious measurements, however, a special limit line is available via
the "Sweep List", and it is strongly recommended that you use only this limit line defini-
tion.
In the "Sweep List" you can define a limit line that varies its level according to the
specified frequency ranges. A distinguished limit line ("_SPURIOUS_LINE_ABS") is
automatically defined according to the current "Sweep List" settings every time the set-
tings change.
If a limit check is activated in the "Sweep List", the "_SPURIOUS_LINE_ABS" limit line
is indicated by a red line in the display, and the result of the limit check is indicated at
the top of the diagram. Note that only "Pass" or "Fail" is indicated; a "margin" function
as for general limit lines is not available. Also, only absolute limits can be checked, not
relative ones.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 295

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

As for general limit lines, the results of each limit line check are displayed (here:
"_SPURIOUS_LINE_ABS"), as well as the combined result for all defined limit lines
("Limit Check").

In addition to the limit line itself, the largest deviations of the absolute power from the
limit line for each range are displayed in the evaluation list if the limit check is activa-
ted. Values that exceed the limit are indicated in red and by an asterisk (*).

To define a limit check for spurious measurements

The limit check is defined in the "Sweep List" dialog box, see "Sweep List dialog box"
on page 298 for details.
1. Press the MEAS CONFIG key to open the main "Spurious" menu.

2. Press the "Sweep List" softkey to open the "Sweep List" dialog box.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 296

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

3. In the "Sweep List" dialog box, define the limit line for each range using the "Abs
Limit Start" and "Abs Limit Stop" settings.
The limit values are absolute values for the absolute power level.

4. Set the "Limit Check" setting to "Absolute" to activate the limit check.

5. Close the "Sweep List" dialog box.

The limit line and the result of the limit check are displayed in the diagram and the
result table displays the largest deviations from the limit for each range.

6. To reduce the number of displayed delta values, change the margin (threshold) for
peak detection in the list evaluation. By default, this value is very high (200 dB), so
that initially all peaks are detected.
In the "Spurious" menu, press "List Evaluation > Margin" and enter a value in dB.
Only delta values that exceed this margin are displayed in the result table.

Softkeys for Spurious Emissions Measurement

Spurious Emissions.....................................................................................................298
└ Sweep List.................................................................................................... 298
└ Sweep List dialog box.........................................................................298
└ Range Start / Range Stop........................................................ 298
└ Filter Type.................................................................................299
└ RBW......................................................................................... 299
└ VBW......................................................................................... 299
└ Sweep Time Mode....................................................................299
└ Sweep Time..............................................................................299
└ Detector.................................................................................... 299
└ Ref. Level................................................................................. 299
└ RF Att. Mode............................................................................ 299
└ RF Attenuator........................................................................... 299
└ Preamp..................................................................................... 300
└ Sweep Points............................................................................300
└ Stop After Sweep......................................................................300
└ Transd. Factor.......................................................................... 300
└ Limit Check 1-4.........................................................................300
└ Abs Limit Start.......................................................................... 300
└ Abs Limit Stop.......................................................................... 301
└ Close Sweep List................................................................................ 301
└ Insert before Range............................................................................ 301
└ Insert after Range............................................................................... 301
└ Delete Range......................................................................................301
└ Adjust Ref Lvl (span > 0).................................................................... 301
└ Adjust X-Axis...................................................................................... 301
└ List Evaluation...............................................................................................301
└ List Evaluation (On/Off)...................................................................... 302
└ Details On/Off..................................................................................... 302
└ Margin.................................................................................................302
└ Peaks per Range................................................................................ 302
└ Show Peaks........................................................................................302
└ Save Evaluation List........................................................................... 302

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 297

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

└ ASCII File Export...................................................................... 302

└ Decim Sep................................................................................ 303
└ Adjust Ref Lvl (span > 0).............................................................................. 303
└ Adjust X-Axis.................................................................................................303
└ Meas Start/Stop............................................................................................ 303

Spurious Emissions
Opens a submenu to configure the Spurious Emissions measurement and immediately
starts a measurement.
For general information on performing Spurious Emissions measurements see chap-
ter 5.1.1.6, "Measuring Spurious Emissions", on page 292.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:MODE on page 731

Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Opens a submenu to edit the sweep list and displays the "Sweep List" dialog box.
Note: If you edit the sweep list, always follow the rules described in chapter 5.1.1.6,
"Measuring Spurious Emissions", on page 292.

Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

After a preset, the sweep list contains a set of default ranges and parameters. For
each range, you can change the parameters listed below. To insert or delete ranges,
use the "Insert Before Range", "Insert After Range", "Delete Range" softkeys. The
measurement results are not updated during editing but on closing the dialog box.
For details and limitations regarding spurious emissions configuration, see chap-
ter 5.1.1.6, "Measuring Spurious Emissions", on page 292.

Range Start / Range Stop ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious
Emissions
Sets the start frequency/stop frequency of the selected range. Follow the rules descri-
bed in chapter 5.1.1.6, "Measuring Spurious Emissions", on page 292.
In order to change the start/stop frequency of the first/last range, select the appropriate
span with the SPAN key. If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the
ranges, the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and
have a minimum span of 20 Hz. The first and last ranges are adapted to the given
span as long as the minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated.
Frequency values for each range have to be defined relative to the center frequency.
The reference range has to be centered on the center frequency. The minimum span
of the reference range is given by the current TX Bandwidth.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STARt on page 723
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STOP on page 723

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 298

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Filter Type ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions
Sets the filter type for this range. For details on filters see also chapter 5.2.6.3, "Select-
ing the Appropriate Filter Type", on page 375.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:FILTer:TYPE on page 722

RBW ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Sets the RBW value for this range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth[:RESolution] on page 720

VBW ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Sets the VBW value for this range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth:VIDeo on page 721

Sweep Time Mode ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emis-
sions
Activates or deactivates the auto mode for the sweep time.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO on page 727

Sweep Time ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions
Sets the sweep time value for the range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME on page 727

Detector ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Sets the detector for the range. For details refer to chapter 5.3.1.5, "Detector Over-
view", on page 408.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:DETector on page 722

Ref. Level ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions
Sets the reference level for the range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:RLEVel on page 726

RF Att. Mode ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions
Activates or deactivates the auto mode for RF attenuation.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO on page 724

RF Attenuator ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Sets the attenuation value for that range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation on page 724

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 299

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Preamp ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Switches the preamplifier on or off.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:GAIN:STATe on page 724

Sweep Points ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions
Sets the number of sweep points for the specified range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:POINts on page 726

Stop After Sweep ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions
This command configures the sweep behavior.
"ON" The R&S ESR stops after one range is swept and continues only if
you confirm (a message box is displayed).
"OFF" The R&S ESR sweeps all ranges in one go.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BREak on page 721

Transd. Factor ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions
Sets a transducer for the specified range. You can only choose a transducer that fulfills
the following conditions:
● The transducer overlaps or equals the span of the range.
● The x-axis is linear.
● The unit is dB.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:TRANsducer on page 727

Limit Check 1-4 ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions
Sets the type of limit check for all ranges. Possible states are:

Absolute Checks the absolute limits defined.

None No limit check performed.

The limit settings are only available if limit check is activated ("Absolute"). If activated,
the limit line and the results of the check are indicated in the diagram.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STATe on page 725
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:FAIL? on page 687

Abs Limit Start ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions
Sets an absolute limit value at the start frequency of the range [dBm].
This parameter is only available if the limit check is set to "Absolute" (see "Limit Check
1-4" on page 300).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STARt on page 725

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 300

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Abs Limit Stop ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions
Sets an absolute limit value at the stop frequency of the range [dBm].
This parameter is only available if the limit check is set to "Absolute" (see "Limit Check
1-4" on page 300).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STOP on page 726

Close Sweep List ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Closes the "Sweep List" dialog box and updates the measurement results.

Insert before Range ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Insert after Range ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Delete Range ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Adjust Ref Lvl (span > 0) ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Adjusts the reference level to the measured total power of the signal. The softkey is
activated after the first sweep with active measurement of the occupied bandwidth has
been completed and the total power of the signal is thus known.
Adjusting the reference level ensures that the signal path will not be overloaded and
the dynamic range not limited by too low a reference level. Since the measurement
bandwidth for channel power measurements is significantly lower than the signal band-
width, the signal path may be overloaded although the trace is distinctly below the ref-
erence level. If the measured channel power is equal to the reference level, the signal
path cannot be overloaded.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel on page 696

Adjust X-Axis ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Adjusts the frequency axis of measurement diagram automatically so that the start fre-
quency matches the start frequency of the first sweep range, and the stop frequency of
the last sweep range.

List Evaluation ← Spurious Emissions

Opens a submenu to edit the list evaluation settings.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 301

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

For more information on list evaluation see "Result Evaluation" on page 294.

List Evaluation (On/Off) ← List Evaluation ← Spurious Emissions

Activates or deactivates the list evaluation.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:AUTO on page 728
TRACe<n>:DATA on page 696

Details On/Off ← List Evaluation ← Spurious Emissions

Configures the list contents.

On Displays the whole list contents.

Off Displays only the highest peaks (one peak per range).

Margin ← List Evaluation ← Spurious Emissions

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the margin used for the limit check/peak search.
Only peaks that exceed the limit and are larger than the specified margin are indicated
in the evaluation list.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:MARGin on page 649

Peaks per Range ← List Evaluation ← Spurious Emissions

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of peaks per range that are stored in the
list. Once the selected number of peaks has been reached, the peak search is stopped
in the current range and continued in the next range. The maximum value is 50.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges on page 729

Show Peaks ← List Evaluation ← Spurious Emissions

In the diagram, marks all peaks with blue squares that have been listed during an
active list evaluation.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:PSHow on page 728

Save Evaluation List ← List Evaluation ← Spurious Emissions

Opens the "ASCII File Export Name" dialog box and a submenu to save the result in
ASCII format to a specified file and directory.
Remote command:
MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIST on page 747

ASCII File Export ← Save Evaluation List ← List Evaluation ← Spurious Emis-
sions
Saves the evaluation list in ASCII format to a specified file and directory.
Remote command:
MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIST on page 747

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 302

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Decim Sep ← Save Evaluation List ← List Evaluation ← Spurious Emissions

Selects the decimal separator with floating-point numerals for the ASCII Trace export
to support evaluation programs (e.g. MS-Excel) in different languages. The values '.'
(decimal point) and ',' (comma) can be set.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 820

Adjust Ref Lvl (span > 0) ← Spurious Emissions

Adjust X-Axis ← Spurious Emissions

Adjusts the frequency axis of measurement diagram automatically so that the start fre-
quency matches the start frequency of the first sweep range, and the stop frequency of
the last sweep range.

Meas Start/Stop ← Spurious Emissions

5.1.1.7 Measuring the Power in Zero Span

Using the power measurement function, the R&S ESR determines the power of the
signal in zero span by summing up the power at the individual measurement points
and dividing the result by the number of measurement points. Thus it is possible to
measure the power of TDMA signals during transmission, for example, or during the
muting phase. Both the mean power and the RMS power can be measured.
For this measurement, the sample detector is activated.

Measurement results
Several different power results can be determined simultaneously:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 303

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Mode Description

Peak Peak value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment
thereof.

RMS RMS value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment
thereof.

Mean Mean value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment
thereof. The linear mean value of the equivalent voltages is calcula-
ted.
For example to measure the mean power during a GSM burst

Std Dev The standard deviation of the measurement points from the mean
value.

The result is displayed in the marker results, indicated by "Power" and the selected
power mode, e.g. "RMS". The measured values are updated after each sweep or aver-
aged over a user-defined number of sweeps (trace averaging).
You can query the measurement results with the commands described in "Retrieving
Measurement Results" on page 772.

Restricting the measurement range using limit lines

The range of the measured signal to be evaluated for the power measurement can be
restricted using limit lines. The left and right limit lines (S1, S2) define the evaluation
range and are indicated by vertical red lines in the diagram. If activated, the power
results are only calculated from the levels within the limit lines.
For example, if both the on and off phase of a burst signal are displayed, the measure-
ment range can be limited to the transmission or to the muting phase. The ratio
between signal and noise power of a TDMA signal for instance can be measured using
a measurement as a reference value and then varying the measurement range.

To measure the power in the time domain

1. Press the "Time Domain Power" softkey to activate the power measurement.

2. Select the type of power measurement using the "Peak","Mean","RMS" or "Std

Dev" softkeys.

3. To limit the power evaluation range, switch on the limits ("Limits (On/Off)" softkey)
and enter the limits using the "Left Limit" and "Right Limit" softkeys.

Softkeys for Time Domain Power Measurements

Time Domain Power....................................................................................................305
└ Peak..............................................................................................................305
└ RMS.............................................................................................................. 305
└ Mean............................................................................................................. 305
└ Std Dev......................................................................................................... 305
└ Limits (On/Off)...............................................................................................305
└ Left Limit....................................................................................................... 306
└ Right Limit..................................................................................................... 306

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 304

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Time Domain Power

Activates the power measurement in zero span and opens a submenu to configure the
power measurement. For more details see also chapter 5.1.1.7, "Measuring the Power
in Zero Span", on page 303.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary[:STATe] on page 771

Peak ← Time Domain Power

Activates the calculation of the peak value from the points of the displayed trace or a
segment thereof.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe] on page 776
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:RESult? on page 775

RMS ← Time Domain Power

Activates the calculation of the RMS value from the points of the displayed trace or a
segment thereof.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe] on page 778
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:RESult? on page 778

Mean ← Time Domain Power

Activates the calculation of the mean value from the points of the displayed trace or a
segment thereof. The linear mean value of the equivalent voltages is calculated.
This can be used for instance to measure the mean power during a GSM burst.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe] on page 774
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult? on page 773

Std Dev ← Time Domain Power

Activates the calculation of the standard deviation of measurement points from the
mean value and displays them as measured value. The measurement of the mean
power is automatically switched on at the same time.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation[:STATe]
on page 780
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:RESult?
on page 780

Limits (On/Off) ← Time Domain Power

Switches the limitation of the evaluation range on or off. Default setting is off.
If switched off, the evaluation range is not limited. If switched on, the evaluation range
is defined by the left and right limit. If only one limit is set, it corresponds to the left limit
and the right limit is defined by the stop frequency. If the second limit is also set, it
defines the right limit.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 660

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 305

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Left Limit ← Time Domain Power

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for line 1.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT on page 659

Right Limit ← Time Domain Power

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for line 2.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHT on page 659

5.1.1.8 Performing EMI Measurements

The R&S ESR features EMI measurement functionality in Spectrum mode. This func-
tionality is suitable for measurements according to EMS standards.
The EMI functionality is integrated into the measurement and marker functions that are
available in Spectrum mode.

Measurement Background
EMI measurements can be very time-consuming, especially if weighting detectors are
required by the standard. In addition, EMC standards specify various procedures to
locate local EMI maxima. Such procedures include movements of an absorbing clamp,
variations in the height of the test antenna or the rotation of the DUT.
Covering all test setups with one of the (slow) EMI weighting detectors over the
required frequency range would lead to unacceptable measurement times.
Splitting the measurement procedure into several stages eliminates this problem.
The first stage, or peak search, is used to get a rough idea about the location of peak
powers that may indicate interference over the required frequency range. You can use
a detector that allows for a fast sweep time, e.g. the peak detector.
During the second stage, or final evaluation, the analyzer performs the actual EMC
test, with detectors designed for and required by EMC standards. To keep measure-
ment times brief, the analyzer measures only those frequencies you have marked with
markers or delta markers. You can assign a different detector to every marker and thus
test a particular frequency easily for compliance.

Selecting a Detector
For more information on EMI detectors see chapter 4.2.3, "Detectors", on page 176.

Selecting the Measurement Bandwidth

For more information on the measurement bandwidth in EMI test setups see chap-
ter 4.2.1, "Measurement Bandwidth", on page 174.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 306

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Setting the Number of Sweep Points

The number of sweep points defines the number of measurement values collected dur-
ing one sweep. Thus, increasing the sweep points also increases the accuracy of the
results regarding the frequency resolution.
Because EMI measurements often cover a large frequency range you should define an
adequate number of sweep points, especially when performing the measurement on a
logarithmic axis. Like on a linear axis, the distance from one sweep point to the next is
calculated graphically on a logarithmic axis, and is not based on the frequency itself.
Thus, the frequency resolution between two sweep points deteriorates with higher fre-
quencies.

The resolution bandwidth should cover at least one sweep point (more is better). If this
condition is not met, signals or interferences could be missed during final evaluation of
narrowband interferers.

Example:
Linear axis:

In case of a linear axis, the distance between the sweep points is equal, e.g. 200 kHz.
Logarithmic axis:

In case of a logarithmic axis, the distance between sweep points is variable. In the
spectrum from 10 Hz to 100 Hz, the distance is a few Hz. Between 100 MHz and
1 GHz, the distance is several MHz.

The R&S ESR supports a maximum of 200000 sweep points. This number is based on
typical bands measured with a single resolution bandwidth. There are sufficient sweep
points to make sure that a signal is found when doing the final evaluation. Even when
covering 30 MHz to 1 GHz with logarithmic scaling and 120 kHz RBW.

Controlling V-Networks
For more information on Line Impedance Stability Networks see chapter 4.2.6, "V-Net-
works Control (LISN)", on page 182.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 307

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Using Transducer Factors

For more information on transducer factors see chapter 4.2.7, "Transducers",
on page 184.

Performing a Peak Search

The purpose of a peak search is to find signals with a high interference level quickly.
Usually the peak search is done with a fast detector like the peak or average detector.
The marker peak search is the basis for a possible final evaluation of interferences with
the detectors specific to EMI measurements.
You can control markers in the Marker Configuration dialog box or turn them on with
the "Marker <x>" softkey. The results of the peak search are summarized in the Marker
Table.
There are two ways to perform a peak search, automatic and manual.

Automatic peak search

By default, the automatic peak search starts as soon as you turn on the EMI measure-
ment marker. During the peak search, the application looks for the strongest peaks in
the frequency range you are measuring and positions a marker on those peaks. When
a limit line is assigned to the trace, the level difference between the trace and the limit
line determines the peak search. The number of peaks it will find during the search
depends on the number of markers you have turned on. You can use up to 16 markers
simultaneously.
The first marker is always on the most powerful peak while the last marker is always on
the least powerful peak. If the application finds a more powerful peak, it will move one
of the markers to that position and adjust the order of the other markers.
The application allows you to distribute markers among several traces. If you do so,
the marker with the lowest number assigned to a particular trace will be positioned on
the most powerful peak of the corresponding trace.

Manual peak search

If you turn the automatic peak search off, you can put the markers manually to any fre-
quency you need more information about. You can change the marker position with the
rotary knob, the cursor keys or position it to a particular frequency with the number
keys.
Setting markers is the same as setting markers in normal spectrum mode. For more
information see the manual of the base unit.

Searching for peaks over several traces

You can measure on six traces with a different weighting detector simultaneously.
In that case, the application searches for peaks on all traces separately, given that you
have assigned at least one marker to that trace.
A typical selection for EMI measurement is to use the peak and the average detector. If
the premeasurement is done, the application would look for peaks on the peak trace

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 308

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

and the average trace separately so that the distribution of narrowband and wideband
sources of interference can be taken into account.
For example, the frequency of the maximum determined with the average detector can
be used for the final measurement performed with this detector and the frequency
found in the premeasurement carried out with the peak detector is taken for the final
measurement using the quasipeak detector.

Measuring at the Marker Position

Finding peaks with the help of a peak search reduces data to be evaluated and thus
measurement time.
The R&S ESR performs the final evaluation automatically if the EMI measurement
marker is turned on. The measurement at the marker frequency starts immediately
after the marker has been set. The advantage of an immediate final evaluation is that it
eliminates the risk of measurement errors based on frequency drifts of the disturbance
signal.
The measurement at the marker frequency may have a different detector during the
peak search. This way, the measurement consumes much less time because detectors
with a long measurement time are needed only at the critical frequency.
The application also allows you to use multiple detectors for the final evaluation. The
advantage of multiple detection is that you will only need one test run to see if the
results comply with the limits specified in a standard. You can select and assign detec-
tors for EMI markers in the "Marker Configuration" on page 312 dialog box.
As EMC tests often require special measurement times, you can also specify a dwell
time for the measurement with the EMI markers.
The application shows the results in the Marker Table.

Defining a Dwell Time for the Final Measurement

The dwell time defines for how long the R&S ESR measures the signal at the frequen-
cies of the marker positions. Thus the dwell time defines the amount of data that is
included in the detection of the displayed results. As each detector needs a different
period of time to fully charge and discharge, the minimum dwell time should not be
shorter than the slowest detector in use.

Evaluating the Results

For more information on functionality to evaluate measurement results see chap-
ter 4.2.5, "AF Demodulation", on page 182 and chapter 4.4.3, "(Limit) Lines",
on page 218.

Configuration and Analysis

Measurement Configuration
The reference section contains an overview of all functions that are part of the chapter
and lists the associated elements of the user interface.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 309

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

For a list and description of supported detectors see chapter 4.2.3, "Detectors",
on page 176.

Filter Type
Opens a submenu to select the filter type.
When measuring Spurious Emissions, using this softkey automatically opens the
"Sweep List" dialog (see "Sweep List dialog box" on page 298).
The submenu contains the following softkeys:
● Normal (3 dB)
● CISPR (6 dB)
● MIL Std (6 dB)
Note that the 6 dB bandwidths are available only with option R&S FSV-K54.
● Channel
● RRC
● 5-Pole (not available for sweep type "FFT")
For detailed information on filters see chapter 5.2.6.3, "Selecting the Appropriate Filter
Type", on page 375 and chapter 5.2.6.4, "List of Available RRC and Channel Filters",
on page 376.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE on page 640

Res BW CISPR / CISPR (6 dB)

Selects the measurement bandwidth for commercial EMC standards according to
CISPR.
If you select the bandwidth with the "Res BW CISPR" softkey, the R&S ESR automati-
cally changes the filter type to a 6 dB bandwidth.
For more information see chapter 4.2.1, "Measurement Bandwidth", on page 174.
Remote command:
Filter type:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE on page 640
Filter bandwidth:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] on page 639

Res BW Mil Std / MIL Std (6 dB)

Selects the measurement bandwidths for military EMC standards.
If you select the bandwidth with the "Res BW Mil Std" softkey, the R&S ESR automati-
cally changes the filter type to a 6 dB bandwidth.
For more information see chapter 4.2.1, "Measurement Bandwidth", on page 174.
Remote command:
Filter type:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE on page 640
Filter bandwidth:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] on page 639

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 310

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Sweep Points
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of measured values collected during a
single measurement.
For more information see "Setting the Number of Sweep Points" on page 307.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:POINts on page 804

Freq (Lin Log)

Turns logarithmic scaling of the frequency axis on and off.
By default, the frequency axis has linear scaling. Logarithmic scaling of the frequency
axis, however, is common for EMI measurements over large frequency ranges as it
enhances the resolution of the lower frequencies. On the other hand, high frequencies
get more crowded and become harder to distinguish.
Because it shows the lower frequencies more clearly, logarithmic scaling is used for
tests that focus on those frequencies, for example acoustic tests and measurements.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X:SPACing on page 634

LISN Control
Opens a dialog box to control a LISN.

The dialog box contains the following elements.

● LISN
Selects the V-network that you have in use. The R&S FSV-K54 supports the fol-
lowing networks:
– R&S ESH3-Z5 and R&S ENV216 (two-line networks)
– R&S ESH-Z5, R&S ENV432 and R&S ENV4200 (four-line networks)
● Phase
Selects the phase to be measured. Phase N and L1 are included in all four LISN.
Phase L2 and L3 are only included in four-line networks.
You can select one phase for a measurement only.
● 150 kHz HP
Turns on a 150 kHz highpass filter. The filter is available for the ENV 216 network
only.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 311

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

For more information see chapter 4.2.6, "V-Networks Control (LISN)", on page 182.
Remote command:
LISN type:
INPut:LISN[:TYPE] on page 656
Phase:
INPut:LISN:PHASe on page 655
Highpass filter:
INPut:LISN:FILTer:HPAS[:STATe] on page 655

Peak Search
The reference section contains an overview of all functions that are part of the chapter
and lists the associated elements of the user interface.

Auto Peak Search

Turns the automatic marker peak search on and off.
For more information see "Performing a Peak Search" on page 308.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:PSEarch:AUTO
on page 751

Marker Configuration
To make the process of configuring markers as easy as possible, the R&S FSV-K54
features a "Marker Configuration" dialog box that contains all marker characteristics
necessary to perform successful EMI measurements.
The dialog box is made up out of two tabs. The first tab controls markers 1 to 8, the
second tab controls markers 9 to 16.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 312

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

● Selected
Selects one of the markers. The currently selected marker is highlighted in orange
color. The label indicates the marker type and its number.
● State
Turns the marker on and off.
● Type
Selects the marker type.
The first marker always is a normal marker (abbreviated 'N'). Normal markers
determine absolute signal levels. In the diagram area, they are drawn as a triangle
pointing up ( ).
If you add more markers, these will be delta markers by default (abbreviated 'D').
Delta markers show signal levels in relation to another (normal) marker, by default
in relation to the first marker. If necessary, you can still change the reference
marker in the "Ref" column. In the diagram area, delta markers are drawn as a tri-
angle pointing down ( ).
When performing EMI measurements however, you usually want to have absolute
marker readouts for all markers that you are using.
● Ref
Selects the reference marker for delta markers.
By default, the reference marker for all delta markers is the first marker.
This is active only for delta markers.
● Trace
Selects the trace number the marker is positioned on.
You can place markers on any of the active traces. The R&S FSV-K54 supports
the use of up to four traces.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 313

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

● Detector
Selects the detector for the final measurement.
For more information see chapter 4.2.3, "Detectors", on page 176.
● Auto Peak
Turns automatic peak search for all markers on and off.
For more information see "Performing a Peak Search" on page 308.
● Dwell Time
Sets the dwell time for all markers.
For more information see "Measuring at the Marker Position" on page 309.
● All Markers Off
Turns all markers off.
Remote command:
Reference marker:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MREF
Trace:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:TRACe on page 671
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe on page 665
Detector:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DETector on page 750
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DETector
on page 749
Auto peak:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:PSEarch:AUTO
on page 751
Dwell time:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DWELl on page 750
All marker off:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF on page 661
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:AOFF on page 667
See also the documentation of the base unit for information on how to remotely work
with markers in general.

Final Evaluation
The reference section contains an overview of all functions that are part of the chapter
and lists the associated elements of the user interface.

Dwell Time
Sets the dwell time for the EMI marker measurement.
For more information see "Measuring at the Marker Position" on page 309.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DWELl on page 750

Marker Table
If more than two markers have been activated, the application adds a marker table to
the display below the diagram area. The size of the table depends on the number of
markers that are active. It contains the following information for every marker.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 314

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

● Type
Shows the marker type. The marker type is either a normal marker (N) or delta
marker (D).
● Ref
Shows the reference marker. Applicable only for delta markers.
● Trace
Trace number the marker is positioned on. You can turn on a maximum of six
traces at the same time. Each trace has a different color.
● Frequency
Frequency of a peak that was detected during the peak search. For normal mark-
ers this is a absolute value, for delta markers this is a relative value. The corre-
sponding reference marker for delta markers is indicated in the "Ref" column.
● Level
Signal level at the marker position according to the trace detector. For normal
markers this is an absolute value, for delta markers this is a relative value. The cor-
responding reference marker for delta markers is indicated in the "Ref" column.
The unit for absolute markers depends on the selected unit. The unit for relative
markers is dB.
● Detector
Detector that has been assigned to the EMI measurement marker.
● ΔLimit
Shows the distance of the marker level to all active limit lines.
The order of results depends on the order in that you have loaded the limit lines
and is the same as the order in the status register.
The result is either a relative value in dB or three dashes (- - -). In case of three
dashes the marker is either
– on a different trace than the limit line or
– on a horizontal position that is not covered by the limit line.
The delta limit is shown only if you have assigned a detector to the measurement
marker.
● Result
Shows the signal level at the marker position according to the detector assigned to
the corresponding marker. The result is only displayed after the final measurement
is done. The overall measurement time depends on the dwell time.
If a limit line is active, the result can have three colors.
– green indicates that the marker has passed the limit check.
– yellow indicates that the marker is in the margins of the limit line.
– red and a star (*) indicate that the marker has failed the limit check.
For more information on limit lines see the documentation of the base unit.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 315

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

The result is shown only if you have assigned a detector to the measurement marker.
Remote command:
Detector:
ΔLimit:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<k>:DELTa?
on page 753
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<k>:
CONDition ? on page 753
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<k>:
DELTa? on page 752
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<k>:
CONDition ? on page 751
Result:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:RESult? on page 754
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:RESult?
on page 752

5.1.1.9 CISPR APD Measurement (Amplitude Probability Distribution)

The Amplitude Probability Distribution (APD) is a statistical measurement that shows

the "cumulative distribution of the probability of time that the amplitude of disturbance
exceeds a specified level" (CISPR 16-1-1, Amendement 1:2005). So, basically, the
measurement determines the likelihood that a disturbance is above a specified level at
a particular frequency (the measurement is usually performed on a fixed frequency).
The amplitude of the disturbance is expressed in terms of the corresponding field
strength or voltage at the receiver input.
The APD is measured at the output of the envelope detector. Therefore, the APD
yields the probability information over the entire disturbance envelope within the mea-
surement bandwidth and a particular period of time.
The APD function has the following advantages.
● It provides an alternative way to present peak and average measurements (for
example for microwave ovens in accordance with CISPR 11).
● It is able to calculate true average values.
● It shows high sensitivity and allows you to measure, for example, a single impulse.
● It allows you to measure unsteady levels.

APD vs CISPR APD

Note that the R&S ESR also provides an APD measurement for general purposes.
This general APD function does not comply with CISPR 16-1-1 in various aspects and
cannot be used for CISPR APD measurements.

The result display is made up out of a diagram and a table.

● The diagram contains a graphical representation of the measurement results (the
probability with which a particular amplitude occurs).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 316

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

The x-axis represents the amplitude, the y-axis the (cumulative) probability.
● The table contains the number of samples used in the calculation and, for each
trace, the following values:
– Average amplitude
– Peak amplitude
– Crest factor
● CISPR specifications vs R&S ESR specifications.................................................317
● Examples of CISPR APD...................................................................................... 318
● Softkeys for CISPR APD Measurements.............................................................. 320

CISPR specifications vs R&S ESR specifications

The following table compares the characteristics of the R&S ESR against the CISPR
specifications for APD measurements.

CISPR 16-1-1 R&S ESR

Dynamic range of the amplitude > 60 dB > 75 dB

Amplitude accuracy better than ±2.7 dB < 0.2 dB (typical)

Maximum measurement time ≥ 2 min 2 min (no dead time)

Minimum measurable probability 10-7 10-7

Amplitude level assignment min. 2 amplitude levels with a res- 691 levels with a resolution of
olution of 0.25 dB or better 0.145 dB

Sampling rate ≥10 MSamples 16 MSamples (with RBW = 1

MHz)
(using an RBW of 1 MHz)
4.0 MSamples (with RBW = 120
kHz)
0.26 MSamples (with RBW = 9
kHz
5.8 kSamples (with RBW = 200
Hz)

Display resolution of APD mea- < 0.25 dB Default: 0.145 dB for range = 100
surement data dB
Min. 0.00145 dB for range = 1 dB

● Use the intermittent measurement if the dead time is < 1 % of the total measure-
ment time.
● Measure the probabilities corresponding to all pre-assigned levels simultaneously.
● The R&S ESR records the probability of time for each of the 625 disturbance lev-
els.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 317

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Examples of CISPR APD

APD of the inherent noise of the R&S ESR

The following example shows the APD of the inherent noise of the R&S ESR (input ter-
minated by 50 Ω.
The example is based on the following configuration.

Center frequency 100 MHz

Span Zero span (0 Hz)

Unit dBm

Reference Level -30 dBm

Attenuation 20 dB

RBW 1 MHz (EMI)

VBW 10 MHz

Sweep time 100 ms

Detector Auto Peak

All other settings are in their default (preset) state.

The first picture shows the resulting noise characteristics in the time domain (zero
span). The x-axis shows the time. The y-axis shows the level of the "signal" in dBm.
Pmax is the highest level that has been measured, Pmin is the lowest level.

The second picture shows the corresponding CISPR APD function. Here, the x-axis
represents the disturbance levels in dBm. The scale of the axis is arbitrary. By default,
its range is a 100 of the unit you are working with. The end point of the x-axis repre-
sents the reference level.
The y-axis represents the statistical frequency that a particular level value will turn up
with. The y-axis is a logarithmic axis by default. Like the x-axis, its scale is arbitrary.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 318

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

As you can see, the probability that levels above Pmax will occur is zero. With falling
level values, the probability that a particular level occurs increases (until Pmin has been
reached). Because the noise has no spikes, the APD curve is falling (more or less)
smoothly.

APD of a pulse signal

The following example shows the APD of a pulse signal. The pulse period is 100 ms
and the pulse width is 1 ms, so the pulse is transmitted within 1 % of the time.
The example is based on the following configuration.

Center frequency 200 MHz

Span Zero span (0 Hz)

Unit dBm

Reference Level -10 dBm

Attenuation 20 dB

RBW 1 MHz (EMI)

VBW 10 MHz

Sweep time 100 ms

Detector Auto Peak

All other settings are in their default (preset) state.

Again, the first picture shows the resulting signal characteristics in the time domain
(zero span). The x-axis shows the time. The y-axis shows the level of the signal. Pmax
is the highest level that has been measured, Pmin is the lowest level (not shown com-
pletely).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 319

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

The second picture shows the corresponding CISPR APD function.

The probability of time at 10e-2 corresponds to the duty cycle of 1 %. The maximum
level of -20.145 dBm corresponds to the peak level that has been measured in spec-
trum mode.

Softkeys for CISPR APD Measurements

Functions to configure CISPR APD measurements described elsewhere:
● "Percent Marker" on page 331
● "Res BW Manual" on page 193
● "Scaling" on page 326
● "Adjust Settings" on page 329
Acquisition Time..........................................................................................................320

Acquisition Time
Defines the measurement time for CISPR APD measurements.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME on page 608

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 320

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

5.1.1.10 Calculating Signal Amplitude Statistics

To measure the amplitude distribution, the R&S ESR has simple measurement func-
tions to determine both the APD = Amplitude Probability Distribution and CCDF =
Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function.

To determine the amplitude distribution

► To activate and configure the measurement of the amplitude probability distribution
(APD), press the "APD" softkey (see "APD" on page 233).
To activate and configure the measurement of the complementary cumulative dis-
tribution (CCDF), press the "CCDF" softkey (see "CCDF" on page 233).

Only one of the signal statistic functions can be switched on at a time. When a statistic
function is switched on, the R&S ESR is set into zero span mode automatically. The
R&S ESR measures the statistics of the signal applied to the RF input with the defined
resolution bandwidth. To avoid affecting the peak amplitudes the video bandwidth is
automatically set to 10 times the resolution bandwidth. The sample detector is used for
detecting the video voltage.
About the Statistical Measurements............................................................................321
Result Evaluation........................................................................................................ 322
Softkeys for APD Measurements................................................................................ 325
Softkeys for CCDF Measurements............................................................................. 330
Defining Gated Triggering for APD and CCDF........................................................... 336

About the Statistical Measurements

Digital modulated signals are similar to white noise within the transmit channel, but are
different in their amplitude distribution. In order to transmit the modulated signal without
distortion all amplitudes of the signal have to be transmitted linearly, e.g. from the out-
put power amplifier. Most critical are the peak amplitude values. Degradation in trans-
mit quality caused by a transmitter two port network is dependent on the amplitude of
the peak values as well as on their probability.
If modulation types are used that do not have a constant zero span envelope, the
transmitter has to handle peak amplitudes that are greater than the average power.
This includes all modulation types that involve amplitude modulation, QPSK for exam-
ple. CDMA transmission modes in particular may have power peaks that are large
compared to the average power.
For signals of this kind, the transmitter must provide large reserves for the peak power
to prevent signal compression and thus an increase of the bit error rate at the receiver.
The peak power or the crest factor of a signal is therefore an important transmitter
design criterion. The crest factor is defined as the peak power/mean power ratio or,
logarithmically, as the peak level minus the average level of the signal. To reduce
power consumption and cut costs, transmitters are not designed for the largest power
that could ever occur, but for a power that has a specified probability of being excee-
ded (e.g. 0.01 %).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 321

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

The probability of amplitude values can be measured with the APD function (Amplitude
Probability Distribution). During a selectable measurement time all occurring amplitude
values are assigned to an amplitude range. The number of amplitude values in the
specific ranges is counted and the result is displayed as a histogram.
Alternatively, the Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF) can be dis-
played. It shows the probability that the mean signal power amplitude will be exceeded
in percent.

Bandwidth selection
When the amplitude distribution is measured, the resolution bandwidth must be set so
that the complete spectrum of the signal to be measured falls within the bandwidth.
This is the only way of ensuring that all the amplitudes will pass through the IF filter
without being distorted. If the selected resolution bandwidth is too small for a digitally
modulated signal, the amplitude distribution at the output of the IF filter becomes a
Gaussian distribution according to the central limit theorem and thus corresponds to a
white noise signal. The true amplitude distribution of the signal therefore cannot be
determined.

Selecting the number of samples

For statistics measurements with the R&S ESR, the number of samples to be mea-
sured is defined instead of the sweep time. Since only statistically independent sam-
ples contribute to statistics, the acquisition or sweep time is calculated automatically
and displayed in the channel bar (AQT). The samples are statistically independent if
the time difference is at least 1/RBW. The acquisition time AQT is, therefore,
expressed as follows:
AQT = NSamples/RBW

Statistic measurements on pulsed signals

Statistic measurements on pulsed signals can be performed using a gated trigger. An
external frame trigger is required as a time (frame) reference. For details see "Defining
Gated Triggering for APD and CCDF" on page 336.

Result Evaluation

Amplitude Probability Distribution (APD)

As a result of the APD function (Amplitude Probability Distribution), the probability of
measured amplitude values is displayed. During a selectable measurement time all
occurring amplitude values are assigned to an amplitude range. The number of ampli-
tude values in the specific ranges is counted and the result is displayed as a histo-
gram. Each bar of the histogram represents the percentage of measured amplitudes
within the specific amplitude range. The x-axis is scaled in absolute values in dBm.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 322

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Fig. 5-7: Amplitude probability distribution of white noise

In addition to the histogram, a result table is displayed containing the following informa-
tion:
● Number of samples used for calculation
● For each displayed trace:
– Mean amplitude
– Peak amplitude
– Crest factor

Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF)

The Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF) shows the probability
that the mean signal power amplitude will be exceeded in percent. The level above the
mean power is plotted along the x-axis of the graph. The origin of the axis corresponds
to the mean power level. The probability that a level will be exceeded is plotted along
the y-axis.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 323

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Fig. 5-8: CCDF of white noise

A red line indicates the ideal Gaussian distribution for the measured amplitude range
(white noise).

The displayed amplitude range is indicated as "Mean Pwr + <x dB>"

In addition to the histogram, a result table is displayed containing the following informa-
tion:
● Number of samples used for calculation
● For each displayed trace:

Mean Mean power

Peak Peak power

Crest Crest factor (peak power – mean power)

0,01 % Level values over 0,01 % above mean power

0,1 % Level values over 0,1 % above mean power

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 324

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

1% Level values over 1 % above mean power

10 % Level values over 10 % above mean power

Softkeys for APD Measurements

APD.............................................................................................................................325
└ Res BW.........................................................................................................325
└ # of Samples................................................................................................. 326
└ Scaling.......................................................................................................... 326
└ x-Axis Ref Level..................................................................................326
└ x-Axis Range...................................................................................... 326
└ Range Log 100 dB....................................................................326
└ Range Log 50 dB......................................................................327
└ Range Log 10 dB......................................................................327
└ Range Log 5 dB........................................................................327
└ Range Log 1 dB........................................................................327
└ Range Log Manual................................................................... 328
└ Range Linear %........................................................................328
└ Range Lin. Unit.........................................................................328
└ y-Axis Max Value................................................................................ 328
└ y-Axis Min Value................................................................................. 328
└ y-Unit % / Abs..................................................................................... 329
└ Default Settings.................................................................................. 329
└ Adjust Settings....................................................................................329
└ Gated Trigger (On/Off)..................................................................................329
└ Gate Ranges.................................................................................................329
└ Adjust Settings.............................................................................................. 330

APD
Activates the function to measure the amplitude probability density (APD) and opens a
submenu.
For general information on calculating signal statistics see chapter 5.1.1.10, "Calculat-
ing Signal Amplitude Statistics", on page 321.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:APD[:STATe] on page 762

Res BW ← APD
Opens an edit dialog box to set the resolution bandwidth directly.
For correct measurement of the signal statistics the resolution bandwidth has to be
wider than the signal bandwidth in order to measure the actual peaks of the signal
amplitude correctly. In order not to influence the peak amplitudes the video bandwidth
is automatically set to 10 MHz. The sample detector is used for detecting the video
voltage.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] on page 639

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 325

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

# of Samples ← APD
Opens an edit dialog box to set the number of power measurements that are taken into
account for the statistics.
Apart from the number of measurements the overall measurement time depends also
on the set resolution bandwidth as the resolution bandwidth directly influences the
sampling rate.
For details see "Selecting the number of samples" on page 322.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:NSAMples on page 763

Scaling ← APD
Opens a submenu to change the scaling parameters of x- and y-axis.

x-Axis Ref Level ← Scaling ← APD

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the currently active unit (dBm,
dBµV, etc). The function of this softkey is identical to the "Ref Level" softkey in the
"Amplitude" menu (see "Ref Level" on page 361).
For the APD function this value is mapped to the right diagram border. For the CCDF
function there is no direct representation of this value on the diagram as the x-axis is
scaled relatively to the measured mean power.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RLEVel on page 768

x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← APD

Opens the "Range" submenu to select a value for the level range to be covered by the
statistics measurement selected.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RANGe on page 767

Range Log 100 dB ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← APD

Sets the level display range to 100 dB.
Remote command:
Logarithmic scaling:
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC LOG, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:
SPACing on page 637
Display range:
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y 100DB, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]
on page 814

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 326

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Range Log 50 dB ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← APD

Sets the level display range to 50 dB.
Remote command:
Logarithmic scaling:
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC LOG, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:
SPACing on page 637
Display range:
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y 50DB, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]
on page 814

Range Log 10 dB ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← APD

Sets the level display range to 10 dB.
Remote command:
Logarithmic scaling:
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC LOG, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:
SPACing on page 637
Display range:
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y 10DB, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]
on page 814

Range Log 5 dB ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← APD

Sets the level display range to 5 dB.
Remote command:
Logarithmic scaling:
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC LOG, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:
SPACing on page 637
Display range:
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y 5DB, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]
on page 814

Range Log 1 dB ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← APD

Sets the level display range to 1 dB.
Remote command:
Logarithmic scaling:
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC LOG, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:
SPACing on page 637
Display range:
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y 1DB, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]
on page 814

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 327

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Range Log Manual ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← APD

Opens an edit dialog box to define the display range of a logarithmic level axis man-
ually.
Remote command:
Logarithmic scaling:
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC LOG, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:
SPACing on page 637
Display range:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe] on page 814

Range Linear % ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← APD

Selects linear scaling for the level axis in %.
The grid is divided into decadal sections.
Markers are displayed in the selected unit ("Unit" softkey). Delta markers are displayed
in % referenced to the voltage value at the position of marker 1. This is the default set-
ting for linear scaling.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LIN, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing
on page 637

Range Lin. Unit ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← APD

Selects linear scaling in dB for the level display range, i.e. the horizontal lines are
labeled in dB.
Markers are displayed in the selected unit ("Unit" softkey). Delta markers are displayed
in dB referenced to the power value at the position of marker 1.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LDB, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing
on page 637

y-Axis Max Value ← Scaling ← APD

Opens an edit dialog box to define the upper limit of the displayed probability range.
Values on the y-axis are normalized which means that the maximum value is 1.0. The
y-axis scaling is defined via the y-Unit % / Abs softkey. The distance between max and
min value must be at least one decade.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UPPer on page 769

y-Axis Min Value ← Scaling ← APD

Opens an edit dialog box to define the lower limit of the displayed probability range.
Values in the range 1e-9 < value < 0.1 are allowed. The y-axis scaling is defined via the
y-Unit % / Abs softkey. The distance between max and min value must be at least one
decade.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:LOWer on page 768

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 328

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

y-Unit % / Abs ← Scaling ← APD

Defines the scaling type of the y-axis. The default value is absolute scaling.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UNIT on page 768

Default Settings ← Scaling ← APD

Resets the x- and y-axis scalings to their preset values.

x-axis ref level: -10 dBm

x-axis range APD: 100 dB

x-axis range CISPR APD: 100 dB

x-axis range CCDF: 20 dB

y-axis upper limit: 1.0

y-axis lower limit: 1E-6

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:PRESet on page 766

Adjust Settings ← Scaling ← APD

Adjusts the level settings according to the measured difference between peak and min-
imum power for APD measurement or peak and mean power for CCDF measurement
in order to obtain maximum power resolution. Adjusts the reference level to the current
input signal. For details see also the Adjust Ref Lvl softkey.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO ONCE on page 767

Gated Trigger (On/Off) ← APD

Activates and deactivates the gating for statistics functions for the ACP and the CCDF
channel. The trigger source is changed to "EXTERN" if this function is switched on.
The gate ranges are defined using the "Gate Ranges" on page 329 softkey.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe on page 811
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce on page 812

Gate Ranges ← APD

Opens a dialog to configure up to 3 gate ranges for each trace.
For details on configuration, see "Defining Gated Triggering for APD and CCDF"
on page 336.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 329

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Remote command:
SWE:EGAT ON (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe on page 811)
Switches on the external gate mode.
SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:COMM "SlotA" (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>:
COMMent on page 764)
Adds a comment to trace 1.
SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STAT1 ON (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>[:
STATe<range>] on page 765)
Activates tracing for range 1 of trace 1.
SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STAR1 3ms (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>:
STARt<range> on page 765)
Sets the starting point for range 1 on trace 1 at 3 ms.
SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STop1 5ms (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>:
STOP<range> on page 766)
Sets the stopping point for range 1 on trace 1 at 5 ms.
SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:PER 5ms (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>: PERiod
on page 765)
Defines the period for gated triggering to 5 ms.

Adjust Settings ← APD

Softkeys for CCDF Measurements

CCDF.......................................................................................................................... 331
└ Percent Marker............................................................................................. 331
└ Res BW.........................................................................................................332
└ # of Samples................................................................................................. 332
└ Scaling.......................................................................................................... 332
└ x-Axis Ref Level..................................................................................332

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 330

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

└ x-Axis Range...................................................................................... 332

└ Range Log 100 dB....................................................................333
└ Range Log 50 dB......................................................................333
└ Range Log 10 dB......................................................................333
└ Range Log 5 dB........................................................................333
└ Range Log 1 dB........................................................................334
└ Range Log Manual................................................................... 334
└ Range Linear %........................................................................334
└ Range Lin. Unit.........................................................................334
└ y-Axis Max Value................................................................................ 334
└ y-Axis Min Value................................................................................. 335
└ y-Unit % / Abs..................................................................................... 335
└ Default Settings.................................................................................. 335
└ Adjust Settings....................................................................................335
└ Gated Trigger (On/Off)..................................................................................335
└ Gate Ranges.................................................................................................335
└ Adjust Settings.............................................................................................. 336

CCDF
Activates the function to measure the complementary cumulative distribution function
(CCDF) and opens a submenu.
After a CCDF measurement, the results are displayed in a table beneath the diagram.

Mean Mean power

Peak Peak power

Crest Crest factor (peak power – mean power)

0,01 % Level values over 0,01 % above mean power

0,1 % Level values over 0,1 % above mean power

1% Level values over 1 % above mean power

10 % Level values over 10 % above mean power

In addition, a red reference line indicating the calculated Gauss distribution is dis-
played.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF[:STATe] on page 762
Activates the CCDF measurement.
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF:X<Trace> on page 763
Reads out the level values for 1 % probability.

Percent Marker ← CCDF

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a probability value and to position marker 1. Thus,
the power which is exceeded with a given probability can be determined very easily. If
marker 1 is deactivated, it will be switched on automatically.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 331

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

As all markers, the percent marker can be moved simply by touching it with a finger or
mouse cursor and dragging it to the desired position.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y:PERCent on page 835

Res BW ← CCDF
Opens an edit dialog box to set the resolution bandwidth directly.
For correct measurement of the signal statistics the resolution bandwidth has to be
wider than the signal bandwidth in order to measure the actual peaks of the signal
amplitude correctly. In order not to influence the peak amplitudes the video bandwidth
is automatically set to 10 MHz. The sample detector is used for detecting the video
voltage.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] on page 639

# of Samples ← CCDF
Opens an edit dialog box to set the number of power measurements that are taken into
account for the statistics.
Apart from the number of measurements the overall measurement time depends also
on the set resolution bandwidth as the resolution bandwidth directly influences the
sampling rate.
For details see "Selecting the number of samples" on page 322.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:NSAMples on page 763

Scaling ← CCDF
Opens a submenu to change the scaling parameters of x- and y-axis.

x-Axis Ref Level ← Scaling ← CCDF

x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← CCDF

Opens the "Range" submenu to select a value for the level range to be covered by the
statistics measurement selected.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RANGe on page 767

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 332

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Range Log 100 dB ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← CCDF

Range Log 50 dB ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← CCDF

Range Log 10 dB ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← CCDF

Range Log 5 dB ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← CCDF

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 333

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Range Log 1 dB ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← CCDF

Range Log Manual ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← CCDF

Range Linear % ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← CCDF

Range Lin. Unit ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← CCDF

y-Axis Max Value ← Scaling ← CCDF

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 334

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

y-Axis Min Value ← Scaling ← CCDF

y-Unit % / Abs ← Scaling ← CCDF

Defines the scaling type of the y-axis. The default value is absolute scaling.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UNIT on page 768

Default Settings ← Scaling ← CCDF

Resets the x- and y-axis scalings to their preset values.

x-axis ref level: -10 dBm

x-axis range APD: 100 dB

x-axis range CISPR APD: 100 dB

x-axis range CCDF: 20 dB

y-axis upper limit: 1.0

y-axis lower limit: 1E-6

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:PRESet on page 766

Adjust Settings ← Scaling ← CCDF

Gated Trigger (On/Off) ← CCDF

Gate Ranges ← CCDF

Opens a dialog to configure up to 3 gate ranges for each trace.
For details on configuration, see "Defining Gated Triggering for APD and CCDF"
on page 336.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 335

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Adjust Settings ← CCDF

Defining Gated Triggering for APD and CCDF

Statistic measurements on pulsed signals can be performed using GATED TRIGGER.
An external frame trigger is required as a time (frame) reference.
The gate ranges define the part of the I/Q capture data taken into account for the sta-
tistics calculation. These ranges are defined relative to a reference point T=0. The gate
interval is repeated for each period until the end of the I/Q capture buffer.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 336

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

The reference point T=0 is defined by the external trigger event and the instrument's
trigger offset.
For each trace you can define up to 3 separate ranges of a single period to be traced.

Defining gated triggering

1. Press the "Gated Trigger" softkey to activate gated triggering (see "Gated Trigger
(On/Off)" on page 329).

2. Press the "Gate Ranges" softkey to open the "Gate Ranges" dialog (see "Gate
Ranges" on page 329).

3. Define the length of the period to be analyzed in the "Period" field.

Note: The period is the same for all traces. If you change the period for one trace,
it is automatically changed for all traces.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 337

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Make sure the defined period is not longer than the acquisition time of the current
measurement. Keep in mind that the acquisition time depends on the bandwidth
and the number of samples settings (see "Selecting the number of samples"
on page 322). The current acquisition time is indicated as "AQT" in the channel
bar.
4. Optionally, define a description of the trace in the "Comment" field.

5. Activate tracing for the range by selecting "On" in the "Range <number> Use" field
for the corresponding range and trace.
The start and stop time edit fields are ready for input.
Note: The time values have full numerical resolution and are only rounded for dis-
play.
6. Define the starting point of the range within the period.

7. Define the stopping point for the range within the period. Make sure the value for
the stopping time is smaller than the length of the period.

8. To define further ranges for the same period in the same trace, repeat steps 5- 7
for the same trace.
To define further ranges for the same period in a different trace, repeat steps 4- 7
for a different trace.

9. If necessary, activate the configured traces in the "Trace" menu.

Gated statistics configuration example

A statistics evaluation has to be done over the useful part of the signal between t3 and
t4. The period of the GSM signal is 4.61536 ms

t1: External positive trigger slope

t2: Begin of burst (after 25 µs)
t3: Begin of useful part, to be used for statistics (after 40 µs)

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 338

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

t4: End of useful part, to be used for statistics (after 578 µs)
t5: End of burst (after 602 µs)
The instrument has to be configured as follows:

Trigger Offset t2 – t1 = 25 µs now the gate ranges are relative to t2

Range1 Start t3 – t2 = 15 µs start of range 1 relative to t2

Range1 End t4 – t2 = 553 µs end of range 1 relative to t2

5.1.1.11 Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point (TOI)

In order to measure the third order intercept point (TOI), a two-tone signal with equal
carrier levels is expected at the R&S ESR input. Marker 1 and marker 2 (both normal
markers) are set to the maximum of the two signals. Marker 3 and marker 4 are placed
on the intermodulation products.
The R&S ESR calculates the third order intercept point from the level difference
between the first 2 markers and the markers 3 and 4 and displays it in the marker field.
The third order intercept point is measured using the "TOI" softkey, see "TOI"
on page 233.

About TOI Measurement

If several signals are applied to a transmission two-port device with nonlinear charac-
teristic, intermodulation products appear at its output at the sums and differences of
the signals. The nonlinear characteristic produces harmonics of the useful signals
which intermodulate at the characteristic. The intermodulation products of lower order
have a special effect since their level is largest and they are near the useful signals.
The intermodulation product of third order causes the highest interference. It is the
intermodulation product generated from one of the useful signals and the 2nd harmonic
of the second useful signal in case of two-tone modulation.
The frequencies of the intermodulation products are above and below the useful sig-
nals. The figure 5-9 shows intermodulation products PI1 and PI2 generated by the two
useful signals PU1 and PU2.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 339

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Fig. 5-9: Intermodulation products PU1 and PU2

The intermodulation product at fI2 is generated by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful
signal PU2 and signal PU1, the intermodulation product at fI1 by mixing the 2nd harmonic
of useful signal PU1 and signal PU2.

fi1 = 2 × fu1 – fu2 (6)

fi2 = 2 × fu2 – fu1 (7)

Dependency on level of useful signals

The level of the intermodulation products depends on the level of the useful signals. If
the two useful signals are increased by 1 dB, the level of the intermodulation products
increases by 3 dB, which means that spacing aD3 between intermodulation signals and
useful signals are reduced by 2 dB. This is illustrated in figure 5-10.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 340

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Fig. 5-10: Dependency of intermodulation level on useful signal level

The useful signals at the two-port output increase proportionally with the input level as
long as the two-port is in the linear range. A level change of 1 dB at the input causes a
level change of 1 dB at the output. Beyond a certain input level, the two-port goes into
compression and the output level stops increasing. The intermodulation products of the
third order increase three times as much as the useful signals. The intercept point is
the fictitious level where the two lines intersect. It cannot be measured directly since
the useful level is previously limited by the maximum two-port output power.

Calculation method
It can be calculated from the known line slopes and the measured spacing aD3 at a
given level according to the following formula:

aD 3
IP3   PN
2
The 3rd order intercept point (TOI), for example, is calculated for an intermodulation of
60 dB and an input level PU of -20 dBm according to the following formula:

60
IP3   (20dBm)  10dBm
2

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 341

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Intermodulation-free dynamic range

The "Intermodulation-free dynamic range", i.e. the level range in which no internal
intermodulation products are generated if two-tone signals are measured, is deter-
mined by the 3rd order intercept point, the phase noise and the thermal noise of the sig-
nal analyzer. At high signal levels, the range is determined by intermodulation prod-
ucts. At low signal levels, intermodulation products disappear below the noise floor, i.e.
the noise floor and the phase noise of the signal analyzer determine the range. The
noise floor and the phase noise depend on the resolution bandwidth that has been
selected. At the smallest resolution bandwidth, the noise floor and phase noise are at a
minimum and so the maximum range is obtained. However, a large increase in sweep
time is required for small resolution bandwidths. It is, therefore, best to select the larg-
est resolution bandwidth possible to obtain the range that is required. Since phase
noise decreases as the carrier-offset increases, its influence decreases with increasing
frequency offset from the useful signals.
The following diagrams illustrate the intermodulation-free dynamic range as a function
of the selected bandwidth and of the level at the input mixer (= signal level – set RF
attenuation) at different useful signal offsets.

Fig. 5-11: Intermodulation-free range of the R&S ESR as a function of level at the input mixer and the
set resolution bandwidth

(Useful signal offset = 1 MHz, DANL = -145 dBm/Hz, TOI = 15 dBm; typical values at 2
GHz)
The optimum mixer level, i.e. the level at which the intermodulation distance is at its
maximum, depends on the bandwidth. At a resolution bandwidth of 10 Hz, it is approx.
-35 dBm and at 1 kHz increases to approx. -30 dBm.
Phase noise has a considerable influence on the intermodulation-free range at carrier
offsets between 10 and 100 kHz ( figure 5-11). At greater bandwidths, the influence of
the phase noise is greater than it would be with small bandwidths. The optimum mixer
level at the bandwidths under consideration becomes almost independent of bandwidth
and is approx. -40 dBm.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 342

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Fig. 5-12: Intermodulation-free dynamic range of the R&S ESR as a function of level at the input
mixer and of the selected resolution bandwidth

(Useful signal offset = 10 to 100 kHz, DANL = -145 dBm/Hz, TOI = 15 dBm; typical val-
ues at 2 GHz).

If the intermodulation products of a DUT with a very high dynamic range are to be
measured and the resolution bandwidth to be used is therefore very small, it is best to
measure the levels of the useful signals and those of the intermodulation products sep-
arately using a small span. The measurement time will be reduced- in particular if the
offset of the useful signals is large. To find signals reliably when frequency span is
small, it is best to synchronize the signal sources and the R&S ESR.

Measurement Results
As a result of the TOI measurement, the following values are displayed in the marker
area of the diagram:

Label Description

TOI Third-order intercept point

M1 Maximum of first useful signal

M2 Maximum of second useful signal

M3 First intermodulation product

M4 Second intermodulation product

Remote command
The TOI can also be queried using the remote command CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult? on page 761.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 343

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Softkeys for TOI Measurements

TOI.............................................................................................................................. 344
└ Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta............ 344
└ Search Signals..............................................................................................344

TOI
Opens a submenu and activates the measurement of the 3rd order intercept point.
A two-tone signal with equal carrier levels is expected at the R&S ESR input. Marker 1
and marker 2 (both normal markers) are set to the maximum of the two signals. Marker
3 and marker 4 are placed on the intermodulation products.
The R&S ESR calculates the third order intercept point from the level difference
between the first 2 markers and the markers 3 and 4 and displays it in the marker field.
For general information on measuring the TOI see chapter 5.1.1.11, "Measuring the
Third Order Intercept Point (TOI)", on page 339.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI[:STATe] on page 760
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult? on page 761

Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta ← TOI

The "Marker X" softkey activates the corresponding marker and opens an edit dialog
box to enter a value for the marker to be set to. Pressing the softkey again deactivates
the selected marker.
If a marker value is changed using the rotary knob, the step size is defined via the
Stepsize Standard or Stepsize Sweep Points softkeys.
Marker 1 is always the reference marker for relative measurements. If activated, mark-
ers 2 to 16 are delta markers that refer to marker 1. These markers can be converted
into markers with absolute value display using the "Marker Norm/Delta" softkey. If
marker 1 is the active marker, pressing the "Marker Norm/Delta" softkey switches on
an additional delta marker.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 664
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 665
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y on page 665
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 670
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X on page 671
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative? on page 672
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y on page 672

Search Signals ← TOI

Activates all markers.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:SEARchsignal ONCE on page 760

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 344

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

5.1.1.12 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth

The AM modulation depth, also known as a modulation index, indicates by how much
the modulated signal varies around the carrier amplitude. It is defined as:
MDepth = peak signal amplitude / unmodulated carrier amplitude
So for MDepth = 0.5, for example, the carrier amplitude varies by 50% above and
below its unmodulated level, and for h = 1.0 it varies by 100%.
You can measure the modulation depth of a modulated signal using the AM Mod Depth
function.
When this function is activated, marker 1 is set to the peak level, which is considered
to be the carrier level. Deltamarkers 2 and 3 are automatically set symmetrically to the
carrier on the adjacent peak values of the trace. The markers can be adjusted man-
ually, if necessary.
The R&S ESR calculates the power at the marker positions from the measured levels.
The AM modulation depth is calculated as the ratio between the power values at the
reference marker and at the delta markers. If the powers of the two AM side bands are
unequal, the mean value of the two power values is used for AM modulation depth cal-
culation.

A remote control programming example is described in chapter 10.16.2.3, "Measuring

the AM Modulation Depth", on page 977 and a example of how to perform the mea-
surement manually in the R&S ESR Getting Started in chapter "Measurement Exam-
ples".

Measurement results
The AM modulation depth in percent is displayed as a result of the measurement, indi-
cated in the marker results as "MDepth".
It can also be queried using the remote command CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:
FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult? on page 755.

Softkeys for AM Modulation Depth Measurements

AM Mod Depth............................................................................................................ 345
└ Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta............ 346
└ Search Signals..............................................................................................346

AM Mod Depth
Activates the measurement of the AM modulation depth. An AM-modulated carrier is
required on the screen to ensure correct operation.
When this function is activated, marker 1 is set to the peak level, which is considered
to be the carrier level. Deltamarkers 2 and 3 are automatically set symmetrically to the
carrier on the adjacent peak values of the trace. An edit dialog box is displayed for del-
tamarker 2 in order to adjust the position manually.
When the position of deltamarker 2 is changed, deltamarker 3 is moved symmetrically
with respect to the reference marker 1.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 345

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

Deltamarker 3, on the other hand, can be moved for fine adjustment irrespective of
marker 2.
Marker 1 can also be moved manually for re-adjustment without affecting the position
of the deltamarkers.
For general information on measuring the AM modulation depth see chapter 5.1.1.12,
"Measuring the AM Modulation Depth", on page 345.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth[:STATe] on page 755
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult? on page 755

Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta ← AM Mod

Depth
The "Marker X" softkey activates the corresponding marker and opens an edit dialog
box to enter a value for the marker to be set to. Pressing the softkey again deactivates
the selected marker.
If a marker value is changed using the rotary knob, the step size is defined via the
Stepsize Standard or Stepsize Sweep Points softkeys.
Marker 1 is always the reference marker for relative measurements. If activated, mark-
ers 2 to 16 are delta markers that refer to marker 1. These markers can be converted
into markers with absolute value display using the "Marker Norm/Delta" softkey. If
marker 1 is the active marker, pressing the "Marker Norm/Delta" softkey switches on
an additional delta marker.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 664
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 665
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y on page 665
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 670
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X on page 671
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative? on page 672
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y on page 672

Search Signals ← AM Mod Depth

Activates all markers.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:SEARchsignal ONCE
on page 754

5.1.1.13 Measuring Harmonic Distortion

The harmonics and their distortion can be measured using the "Harmonic Distortion"
on page 234 function.
With this measurement it is possible to measure the harmonics e.g. from a VCO easily.
In addition the THD (total harmonic distortion) is calculated in % and dB.
With span > 0 Hz, an automatic search for the first harmonic is carried out within the
set frequency range. Also the level is adjusted. In zero span, the center frequency is
unchanged.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 346

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

As a result, the zero span sweeps on all harmonics are shown, as well as the RMS
values and the THD (total harmonic distortion).

About Harmonics Distortion Measurement

Measuring the harmonics of a signal is a frequent problem which can be solved best
using a signal analyzer. In general, every signal contains harmonics which are larger
than others. Harmonics are particularly critical regarding high-power transmitters such
as transceivers because large harmonics can interfere with other radio services.
Harmonics are generated by nonlinear characteristics. They can often be reduced by
low pass filters. Since the signal analyzer has a nonlinear characteristic, e.g. in its first
mixer, measures must be taken to ensure that harmonics produced in the signal ana-
lyzer do not cause spurious results. If necessary, the fundamental wave must be selec-
tively attenuated with respect to the other harmonics with a high pass filter.

Obtainable dynamic range

When harmonics are being measured, the obtainable dynamic range depends on the
second harmonic intercept of the signal analyzer. The second harmonic intercept is the
virtual input level at the RF input mixer at which the level of the 2nd harmonic becomes
equal to the level of the fundamental wave. In practice, however, applying a level of
this magnitude would damage the mixer. Nevertheless, the available dynamic range for
measuring the harmonic distance of a DUT can be calculated relatively easily using the
second harmonic intercept.
As shown in figure 5-13, the level of the 2nd harmonic drops by 20 dB if the level of the
fundamental wave is reduced by 10 dB.

Fig. 5-13: Extrapolation of the 1st and 2nd harmonics to the 2nd harmonic intercept at 40 dBm

The following formula for the obtainable harmonic distortion d2 in dB is derived from the
straight-line equations and the given intercept point:
d2 = S.H.I – PI (1)

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 347

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

where:

d2 = harmonic distortion

PI = mixer level/dBm

S.H.I. = second harmonic intercept

The mixer level is the RF level applied to the RF input minus the set RF attenuation.

The formula for the internally generated level P1 at the 2nd harmonic in dBm is:

P1 = 2 * PI – S.H.I. (2)

The lower measurement limit for the harmonic is the noise floor of the signal analyzer.
The harmonic of the measured DUT should – if sufficiently averaged by means of a
video filter – be at least 4 dB above the noise floor so that the measurement error due
to the input noise is less than 1 dB.
The following rules for measuring high harmonic ratios can be derived:
● Select the smallest possible IF bandwidth for a minimal noise floor.
● Select an RF attenuation which is high enough to just measure the harmonic ratio.
The maximum harmonic distortion is obtained if the level of the harmonic equals the
intrinsic noise level of the receiver. The level applied to the mixer, according to (2), is:

At a resolution bandwidth of 10 Hz (noise level -143 dBm, S.H.I. = 40 dBm), the opti-
mum mixer level is – 51.5 dBm. According to (1) a maximum measurable harmonic dis-
tortion of 91.5 dB minus a minimum S/N ratio of 4 dB is obtained.

If the harmonic emerges from noise sufficiently (approx. >15 dB), it is easy to check (by
changing the RF attenuation) whether the harmonics originate from the DUT or are
generated internally by the signal analyzer. If a harmonic originates from the DUT, its
level remains constant if the RF attenuation is increased by 10 dB. Only the displayed
noise is increased by 10 dB due to the additional attenuation. If the harmonic is exclu-
sively generated by the signal analyzer, the level of the harmonic is reduced by 20 dB
or is lost in noise. If both – the DUT and the signal analyzer – contribute to the har-
monic, the reduction in the harmonic level is correspondingly smaller.

High-Sensitivity Harmonics Measurements

If harmonics have very small levels, the resolution bandwidth required to measure
them must be reduced considerably. The sweep time is, therefore, also increased con-
siderably. In this case, the measurement of individual harmonics is carried out with the

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 348

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

R&S ESR set to a small span. Only the frequency range around the harmonics will
then be measured with a small resolution bandwidth.

Measurement Results
As a result of the harmonics distortion measurement, the zero span sweeps on all
detected harmonics are shown in the diagram, separated by red display lines. This pro-
vides a very good overview of the measurement.
In addition, a result table is displayed providing the following information:
● 1st harmonic frequency
● THD (total harmonic distortion), relative and absolute values
● For each detected harmonic:
– Frequency
– RBW
– Power
The results can also be queried using the remote commands:
THD: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:DISTortion?
on page 757
List of harmonics: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:LIST?
on page 757

Softkeys for Harmonic Distortion Measurements

Harmonic Distortion.....................................................................................................349
└ No. of Harmonics.......................................................................................... 350
└ Harmonic Sweep Time..................................................................................350
└ Harmonic RBW Auto.....................................................................................350
└ Adjust Settings.............................................................................................. 350

Harmonic Distortion
Opens a submenu to determine the settings for harmonics measurement and activates
the harmonic distortion measurement.
With this measurement you can measure the harmonics of a signal. In addition the
THD (total harmonic distortion) is calculated in % and dB.
With span > 0 Hz, an automatic search for the first harmonic is carried out within the
set frequency range. Also the level is adjusted. In zero span, the center frequency is
unchanged.
In the upper window, the zero span sweeps on all harmonics are shown, separated by
display lines. In the lower window, the mean RMS results are displayed in numerical
values. The THD values are displayed in the marker field.
For details see chapter 5.1.1.13, "Measuring Harmonic Distortion", on page 346.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics[:STATe] on page 759
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:DISTortion? on page 757
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:LIST? on page 757

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 349

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Measurements

No. of Harmonics ← Harmonic Distortion

Sets the number of harmonics that shall be measured. The range is from 1 to 26.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:NHARmonics on page 758

Harmonic Sweep Time ← Harmonic Distortion

For details refer to the Sweeptime Manual softkey in the "Bandwidth" menu.

Harmonic RBW Auto ← Harmonic Distortion

Enables/disables the automatic adjustment of the resolution bandwidth for filter types
Normal (3dB) (Gaussian) and 5-Pole filters. The automatic adjustment is carried out
according to:
"RBWn = RBW1 * n"
If RBWn is not available, the next higher value is used.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:BANDwidth:AUTO
on page 756

Adjust Settings ← Harmonic Distortion

Activates the frequency search in the frequency range that was set before starting the
harmonic measurement (if harmonic measurement was with span > 0) and adjusts the
level.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet on page 758

5.1.2 Measurement Configuration – MEAS CONFIG Key

The MEAS CONFIG key displays the submenu of the currently activated and running
measurement function, e.g. the submenu of "TOI" or "Harmonic Distortion" (see chap-
ter 5.1.1, "Power Measurements – MEAS Key", on page 230, for quick access to the
measurement configuration. If no measurement function is activated, this key has no
effect.

5.1.3 Performing Measurements – RUN SINGLE/RUN CONT Keys

The RUN SINGLE and RUN CONT keys are used to start measurement tasks.
● RUN SINGLE switches to single sweep mode and performs a single sweep, just as
the Single Sweep softkey in the "Sweep" menu does.
● RUN CONT switches to continuous sweep mode and starts sweeping, just as the
Continuous Sweep softkey in the "Sweep" menu does.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 350

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

5.2 Configuration
Basic measurement settings that are common to many measurement tasks are descri-
bed here. If you are performing a specific measurement task or using an operating
mode other than Spectrum mode, be sure to check the specific measurement or mode
description for settings that may deviate from these common settings.

5.2.1 Initializing the Configuration – PRESET Key

The PRESET key resets the instrument to the default setting and therefore provides a
defined initial state as a known starting point for measurements.

If the "local lockout" function is active in the remote control mode, the PRESET key is
disabled.

Further information
● chapter 5.2.1.2, "Initial Configuration", on page 352

Task
● chapter 5.2.1.1, "Presetting the Instrument", on page 351

5.2.1.1 Presetting the Instrument

1. Define the data set for the presetting:

a) To retrieve the originally provided settings file (see chapter 5.2.1.2, "Initial Con-
figuration", on page 352), deactivate the "Startup Recall" softkey in the "SAVE/
RCL" menu.
b) To retrieve a customized settings file, in the "File" menu, activate the "Startup
Recall" softkey, press the "Startup Recall Setup" softkey, and select the corre-
sponding file.
For details refer to chapter 9.1, "Saving and Recalling Settings Files –
SAVE/RCL Key", on page 538.

2. Press the PRESET key to perform a preset.

Remote: *RST or SYSTem:PRESet

After you use the PRESET function, the history of previous actions is deleted, i.e. any
actions performed previously cannot be undone or redone using the UNDO/REDO
keys.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 351

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

5.2.1.2 Initial Configuration

The initial configuration is selected such that the RF input is always protected against
overload, provided that the applied signal levels are in the allowed range for the instru-
ment.
The parameter set of the initial configuration can be customized using the "Startup
Recall" softkey in the "Save/Rcl" menu. For further information refer to chapter 9.1,
"Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key", on page 538.
Table 5-5: Initial configuration

Parameter Setting

mode Spectrum

sweep mode auto

center frequency fmax/2

center frequency step size 0.1 * span

span maximum possible (depends on instrument model)

RF attenuation 0 dB

reference level -10 dBm

level range 100 dB log

level unit dBm

sweep time auto

resolution bandwidth auto (3 MHz)

video bandwidth auto (3 MHz)

FFT filters off

span/RBW 100

RBW/VBW 1

sweep cont

trigger free run

trace 1 clr write

trace 2/3/4/5/6 blank

detector auto peak

frequency offset 0 Hz

reference level offset 0 dB

reference level position 100 %

grid abs

cal correction on

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 352

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

Parameter Setting

noise source off

input RF

5.2.2 Selecting the Frequency and Span – FREQ Key

The FREQ key is used to configure the frequency axis, to set the frequency offset and
the signal track function. You can configure the frequency axis either by the start and
stop frequency or the center frequency and the span.

To open the Frequency menu

● Press the FREQ key.
The "Frequency" menu is displayed. The "Frequency Center" edit dialog box is dis-
played.

Menu and softkey description

● chapter 5.2.2.1, "Softkeys of the Frequency Menu", on page 353

Tasks
● chapter 5.2.2.2, "Specifying the Frequency Axis by the Start and Stop Frequency",
on page 357
● chapter 5.2.2.3, "Specifying the Frequency Axis by the Center Frequency and the
Span", on page 357
● chapter 5.2.2.4, "Specifying the Step Size for the Arrow Keys and the Rotary
Knob", on page 357
● chapter 5.2.2.5, "Modifying the Frequency Axis by an Offset", on page 358
● chapter 5.2.2.6, "Tracking Signals (Span > 0)", on page 358

5.2.2.1 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu

The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the "Frequency" menu. It is
possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is
only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is
provided in the corresponding softkey description.
Center......................................................................................................................... 354
CF Stepsize.................................................................................................................354
└ 0.1*Span (span > 0)......................................................................................354
└ 0.1*RBW (span > 0)......................................................................................354
└ 0.5*Span (span > 0)......................................................................................355
└ 0.5*RBW (span > 0)......................................................................................355
└ x*Span (span > 0)......................................................................................... 355
└ x*RBW (span > 0)......................................................................................... 355
└ =Center......................................................................................................... 355
└ =Marker.........................................................................................................355

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 353

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

└ Manual.......................................................................................................... 356
Start.............................................................................................................................356
Stop.............................................................................................................................356
Frequency Offset.........................................................................................................356
Signal Track (span > 0)............................................................................................... 356
└ Track On/Off (span > 0)................................................................................ 357
└ Track BW (span > 0).....................................................................................357
└ Track Threshold (span > 0)...........................................................................357
└ Select Trace (span > 0)................................................................................ 357

Center
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency. The allowed range of values
for the center frequency depends on the frequency span.
span > 0: spanmin/2 ≤ fcenter ≤ fmax – spanmin/2
span = 0: 0 Hz ≤ fcenter ≤ fmax
fmax and spanmin are specified in the data sheet.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer on page 792

CF Stepsize
Opens a submenu to set the step size of the center frequency.
The step size defines the value by which the center frequency is increased or
decreased when the arrow keys are pressed. When you use the rotary knob the center
frequency changes in steps of 10% of the "Center Frequency Stepsize".
The step size can be set to a fraction of the span (span > 0) or a fraction of the resolu-
tion bandwidth (span = 0) or it can be set to a fixed value manually.
Apart from the =Center, =Marker and Manual softkeys, the other softkeys are dis-
played depending on the selected frequency span.

0.1*Span (span > 0) ← CF Stepsize

Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 % of the span.
Remote command:
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK SPAN, see [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK
on page 793
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 10PCT, see [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:
LINK:FACTor on page 794

0.1*RBW (span > 0) ← CF Stepsize

Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 % of the resolution bandwidth.
This is the default setting.
Remote command:
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK RBW, see [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK
on page 793
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 10PCT, see [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:
LINK:FACTor on page 794

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 354

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

0.5*Span (span > 0) ← CF Stepsize

Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 % of the span.
Remote command:
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK SPAN, see [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK
on page 793
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 50PCT, see [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:
LINK:FACTor on page 794

0.5*RBW (span > 0) ← CF Stepsize

Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 % of the resolution bandwidth.
Remote command:
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK RBW, see [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK
on page 793
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 50PCT, see [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:
LINK:FACTor on page 794

x*Span (span > 0) ← CF Stepsize

Opens an edit dialog box to set the step size for the center frequency as a percentage
(%) of the span.
Remote command:
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK SPAN, see [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK
on page 793
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 20PCT, see [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:
LINK on page 793

x*RBW (span > 0) ← CF Stepsize

Opens an edit dialog box to set the step size for the center frequency as a percentage
(%) of the resolution bandwidth. Values between 1 % and 100 % in steps of 1 % are
allowed. The default setting is 10 %.
Remote command:
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK RBW, see [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK
on page 793
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 20PCT, see [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:
LINK on page 793

=Center ← CF Stepsize
Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency and removes the coupling of the
step size to span or resolution bandwidth.
This function is especially useful for measurements of the signal harmonics. In this
case, each stroke of the arrow key selects the center frequency of another harmonic.

=Marker ← CF Stepsize
Sets the step size to the value of the current marker and removes the coupling of the
step size to span or resolution bandwidth.
This function is especially useful for measurements of the signal harmonics. In this
case, each stroke of the arrow key selects the center frequency of another harmonic.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 355

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

Manual ← CF Stepsize
Opens an edit dialog box to enter a fixed step size for the center frequency.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP on page 634

Start
Opens an edit dialog box to define the start frequency. The following range of values is
allowed:
fmin ≤ fstart ≤ fmax – spanmin
fmin, fmax and spanmin are specified in the data sheet.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt on page 795

Stop
Opens an edit dialog box to define the stop frequency. The following range of values
for the stop frequency is allowed:
fmin + spanmin ≤ fstop ≤ fmax
f min , f max and spanmin are specified in the data sheet.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP on page 795

Frequency Offset
Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency
range by the specified offset.
The softkey indicates the current frequency offset. The allowed values range from
-100 GHz to 100 GHz. The default setting is 0 Hz.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:OFFSet on page 794

Signal Track (span > 0)

Opens a submenu to define the signal tracking characteristics:
● search bandwidth
● threshold value
● trace
The search bandwidth and the threshold value are shown in the diagram by two verti-
cal lines and one horizontal line, which are labeled as "TRK". After each sweep the
center frequency is set to the maximum signal found within the searched bandwidth. If
no maximum signal above the set threshold value is found in the searched bandwidth,
the track mechanism stops.
The submenu contains the following softkeys:
● "Track On/Off (span > 0)" on page 357
● "Track BW (span > 0)" on page 357
● "Track Threshold (span > 0)" on page 357
● "Select Trace (span > 0)" on page 357

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 356

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

Track On/Off (span > 0) ← Signal Track (span > 0)

Switches the signal tracking on and off.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe] on page 796

Track BW (span > 0) ← Signal Track (span > 0)

Opens an edit dialog box to set the search bandwidth for signal tracking. The fre-
quency range is calculated as a function of the center frequency.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:BANDwidth|BWIDth
on page 796

Track Threshold (span > 0) ← Signal Track (span > 0)

Opens an edit dialog box to set the threshold value for signal tracking.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:THReshold on page 797

Select Trace (span > 0) ← Signal Track (span > 0)

Opens an edit dialog box to select the trace on which the signal is tracked.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:TRACe on page 797

5.2.2.2 Specifying the Frequency Axis by the Start and Stop Frequency

1. Press the Start softkey and enter a start frequency.

2. Press the Stop softkey and enter a stop frequency.

5.2.2.3 Specifying the Frequency Axis by the Center Frequency and the Span

1. Press the FREQ key and enter a center frequency in the "Frequency Center" edit
dialog box.

2. Press the SPAN key and enter the bandwidth you want to analyze.

Entering a value of 0 Hz causes a change to the zero span analysis mode.

5.2.2.4 Specifying the Step Size for the Arrow Keys and the Rotary Knob

1. Press the CF Stepsize softkey.

The available softkeys depend on the selected frequency span (zero span or
span > 0).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 357

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

2. To define the step size of the center frequency:

a) If span > 0:
Press "0.1*Span", "0.5*Span" or "x*Span" to define the step size for the center
frequency as percentage of the span (see CF Stepsize).
b) If span = 0:
Press "0.1*RBW", "0.5*RBW", or "x*RBW" to define the step size for the center
frequency as percentage of the resolution bandwidth (see CF Stepsize).
c) Press the =Center softkey to set the step size to the value of the center fre-
quency and remove the dependency of the step size to span or resolution
bandwidth.
d) Press the =Marker softkey to set the step size to the value of the marker and
remove the dependency of the step size to span or resolution bandwidth.
e) Press the Manual softkey and enter a fixed step size for the center frequency.

The step size assigned to arrow keys corresponds to the selected value.
The step size of the rotary knob is always 10 % of it.

5.2.2.5 Modifying the Frequency Axis by an Offset

● Press the Frequency Offset softkey and enter the offset to shift the displayed fre-
quency span.

5.2.2.6 Tracking Signals (Span > 0)

Note that signal tracking is available for frequency spans > 0.

● Press the Signal Track (span > 0) softkey to open the submenu and start and stop
signal tracking with specified parameters.
● Press the Track On/Off (span > 0) softkey to switch signal tracking on or off.
● Press the Track BW (span > 0) softkey and enter a bandwidth for signal tracking.
● Press the Track Threshold (span > 0) softkey and enter the threshold for signal
tracking.
● Press the Select Trace (span > 0) softkey and select the trace for signal tracking.

5.2.3 Setting the Frequency Span – SPAN Key

The SPAN key is used to set the frequency span to be analyzed.

To open the Span menu

● Press the SPAN key.
The "Span" menu is displayed. For span > 0 an edit dialog box to enter the fre-
quency is displayed. For zero span, an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time is
displayed.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 358

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

Menu and softkey description

● chapter 5.2.3.1, "Softkeys of the Span Menu", on page 359

Task
● chapter 5.2.3.2, "Specifying the Span (Alternatives)", on page 359

5.2.3.1 Softkeys of the Span Menu

The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the "Span" menu. It is possible
that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only
available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is pro-
vided in the corresponding softkey description.
Functions to configure the span described elsewhere:
● "Last Span" on page 190
● "Full Span" on page 189
Span Manual............................................................................................................... 359
Zero Span................................................................................................................... 359

Span Manual
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the frequency span. The center frequency remains
the same when you change the span.
The following range is allowed:
span = 0: 0 Hz
span >0: spanmin ≤ f span ≤ f max
fmax and spanmin are specified in the data sheet.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN on page 795

Zero Span
Sets the span to 0 Hz (zero span). The x-axis becomes the time axis with the grid lines
corresponding to 1/10 of the current sweep time ("SWT").
Remote command:
FREQ:SPAN 0Hz, see [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN on page 795

5.2.3.2 Specifying the Span (Alternatives)

1. To set the span, use the Span Manual, Full Span, Zero Span and Last Span soft-
keys.

2. To define a frequency range, use the Start and Stop softkeys of the "Frequency"
menu.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 359

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

3. In zero span, the span corresponds to the sweep time. In that case, press the
Sweeptime Manual softkey and enter a sweep time.

5.2.4 Setting the Level Display and Configuring the RF Input – AMPT Key

The AMPT key is used to set the reference level, the level range and unit, the scaling
and the RF attenuation.

To open the amplitude menu

● Press the AMPT key.
The "Amplitude" menu is displayed. The "Reference Level" dialog box is displayed.

Menu and softkey description

● chapter 5.2.4.1, "Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu", on page 360

Tasks
● chapter 5.2.4.2, "Specifying the Amplitude", on page 365

5.2.4.1 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu

The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Amplitude" menu. It is possible
that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only
available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is pro-
vided in the corresponding softkey description.
Functions to configure the amplitude described elsewhere:
● "RF Atten Manual" on page 190
● "10 dB Min" on page 191
● "dBx/MHz" on page 192
Ref Level..................................................................................................................... 361
Range..........................................................................................................................361
└ Range Log 100 dB........................................................................................ 361
└ Range Log 50 dB.......................................................................................... 361
└ Range Log 10 dB.......................................................................................... 362
└ Range Log 5 dB............................................................................................ 362
└ Range Log 1 dB............................................................................................ 362
└ Range Log Manual........................................................................................362
└ Range Linear %............................................................................................ 362
└ Range Lin. Unit............................................................................................. 363
Unit..............................................................................................................................363
Preamp On/Off............................................................................................................ 363
RF Atten Auto..............................................................................................................363
Ref Level Offset.......................................................................................................... 364
Ref Level Position....................................................................................................... 364
Grid Abs/Rel ...............................................................................................................364

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 360

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

Noise Correction......................................................................................................... 364

Input (AC/DC)..............................................................................................................365
Input 50 Ω/75 Ω ..........................................................................................................365

Ref Level
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit (dBm, dBµV,
etc).
The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distor-
tion of the measured value. Signal levels above this value will not be measured cor-
rectly, which is indicated by the "IFOVL" status display.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel on page 815

Range
Opens a submenu to define the display range of the level axis.
● Range Log 100 dB
● Range Log 50 dB
● Range Log 10 dB
● Range Log 5 dB
● Range Log 1 dB
● Range Log Manual
● Range Linear %
● Range Lin. Unit

Range Log 100 dB ← Range

Range Log 50 dB ← Range

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 361

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

Range Log 10 dB ← Range

Range Log 5 dB ← Range

Range Log 1 dB ← Range

Range Log Manual ← Range

Range Linear % ← Range

Selects linear scaling for the level axis in %.
The grid is divided into decadal sections.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 362

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

Markers are displayed in the selected unit ("Unit" softkey). Delta markers are displayed
in % referenced to the voltage value at the position of marker 1. This is the default set-
ting for linear scaling.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LIN, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing
on page 637

Range Lin. Unit ← Range

Unit
Opens the "Unit" submenu to select the unit for the level axis.
The default setting in spectrum mode is dBm.
If a transducer is switched on, the softkey is not available.
In general, the signal analyzer measures the signal voltage at the RF input. The level
display is calibrated in RMS values of an unmodulated sine wave signal. In the default
state, the level is displayed at a power of 1 mW (= dBm). Via the known input impe-
dance (50 Ω or 75 Ω), conversion to other units is possible. The following units are
available and directly convertible:
● dBm
● dBmV
● dBμV
● dBμA
● dBpW
● Volt
● Ampere
● Watt
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer on page 814

Preamp On/Off
Switches the preamplifier on and off.
Remote command:
INPut:GAIN:STATe on page 638

RF Atten Auto
Sets the RF attenuation automatically as a function of the selected reference level.
This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used. It is the default setting.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 363

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

When measuring spurious emissions, using this softkey automatically opens the
"Sweep List" dialog, see "Sweep List dialog box" on page 298.
Remote command:
INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO on page 816

Ref Level Offset

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset. This offset is added to the
measured level irrespective of the selected unit. The scaling of the y-axis is changed
accordingly. The setting range is ±200 dB in 0.1 dB steps.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet on page 815

Ref Level Position

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level position, i.e. the position of the
maximum AD converter value on the level axis. The setting range is from -200 to
+200 %, 0 % corresponding to the lower and 100 % to the upper limit of the diagram.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition on page 816

Grid Abs/Rel
Switches between absolute and relative scaling of the level axis (not available with
"Linear" range).
"Abs" Absolute scaling: The labeling of the level lines refers to the absolute
value of the reference level. Absolute scaling is the default setting.
"Rel" Relative scaling: The upper line of the grid is always at 0 dB. The
scaling is in dB whereas the reference level is always in the set unit
(for details on unit settings see the "Unit" softkey).
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:MODE on page 815

Noise Correction
If activated, the results are corrected by the instrument's inherent noise, which increa-
ses the dynamic range.
"ON" A reference measurement of the instrument's inherent noise is carried
out. The noise power measured is then subtracted from the power in
the channel that is being examined.
The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center
frequency, resolution bandwidth and level setting. Therefore, the cor-
rection function is disabled whenever one of these parameters is
changed. A disable message is displayed on the screen. Noise cor-
rection must be switched on again manually after the change.
"OFF" No noise correction is performed.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 364

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

"AUTO" Noise correction is performed. After a parameter change, noise cor-

rection is restarted automatically and a new correction measurement
is performed.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection on page 717

Input (AC/DC)
Toggles the RF input of the R&S ESR between AC and DC coupling.
Remote command:
INPut:COUPling on page 641

5.2.4.2 Specifying the Amplitude

1. Set the reference level, offset and position using the "Ref Level", "Ref Level Offset"
and "Ref Level Position" softkeys (see "Ref Level" on page 361, "Ref Level Offset"
on page 364 and "Ref Level Position" on page 364).

2. Select the level range and the unit for the level axis using the "Range" and "Unit"
softkeys (see "Range" on page 361 and "Unit" on page 363).

3. Set the scaling using the "Ref Level Position" and/or "Grid Abs/Rel" softkeys (see
"Ref Level Position" on page 364 and "Grid Abs/Rel " on page 364).

4. Set the attenuation using the "RF Atten Manual" or "RF Atten Auto" (see "RF Atten
Manual" on page 190 and "RF Atten Auto" on page 363.

5. Define the RF input coupling using the "Input (AC/DC)" softkey, or a reference
impedance using the "Input (50Ω/75Ω)" softkey (see "Input (AC/DC)" on page 196,
"Input 50 Ω/75 Ω " on page 193).

6. Activate or deactivate the RF Preamplifier using the "Preamp" softkey (see "Pre-
amp On/Off" on page 191).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 365

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

5.2.5 Defining Automatic Settings – AUTO SET Key

The "Auto Set" menu allows you define automatic settings for measurements quickly.

To open the Auto Set menu

● Press the AUTO SET key.
The "Auto Set" menu is displayed.

Menu and softkey description

● chapter 5.2.5.1, "Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu", on page 366

5.2.5.1 Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu

The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Auto Set" menu. It is possible
that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only
available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is pro-
vided in the corresponding softkey description.

Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measurements

When you select an auto adjust function a measurement is performed to determine the
optimal settings. If you select an auto adjust funtion for a triggered measurement, you
can select how the R&S ESR should behave:
● (default:) The measurement for adjustment waits for the next trigger
● The measurement for adjustment is performed without waiting for a trigger.
The trigger source is temporarily set to "Free Run". After the measurement is com-
pleted, the original trigger source is restored. The trigger level is adjusted as fol-
lows:
– For IF Power and RF Power triggers:
Trigger Level = Reference Level - 15 dB
– For Video trigger:
Trigger Level = 85 %
SCPI command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:TRIG on page 799

Auto All........................................................................................................................367
Auto Freq.................................................................................................................... 367
Auto Level................................................................................................................... 367
Settings....................................................................................................................... 367
└ Meas Time Manual....................................................................................... 367
└ Meas Time Auto............................................................................................367
└ Upper Level Hysteresis.................................................................................368
└ Lower Level Hysteresis.................................................................................368
Sweep Type................................................................................................................ 368
└ Sweep........................................................................................................... 368
└ FFT............................................................................................................... 368
└ Auto...............................................................................................................368

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 366

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

└ FFT Filter Mode............................................................................................ 369

└ Auto.................................................................................................... 369
└ Narrow................................................................................................ 369

Auto All
Performs all automatic settings.
● "Auto Freq" on page 367
● "Auto Level" on page 367
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:ALL on page 798

Auto Freq
Defines the center frequency and the reference level automatically by determining the
highest frequency level in the frequency span. This function uses the signal counter;
thus it is intended for use with sinusoidal signals.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:FREQuency on page 799

Auto Level
Defines the optimal reference level for the current measurement automatically.
The measurement time for automatic leveling can be defined using the Settings soft-
key.
You can define a threshold that the signal must exceed before the reference level is
adjusted, see "Upper Level Hysteresis" on page 368 and "Lower Level Hysteresis"
on page 368.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:LEVel on page 800

Settings
Opens a submenu to define settings for automatic leveling.
Possible settings are:
● "Meas Time Manual" on page 367
● "Meas Time Auto" on page 367

Meas Time Manual ← Settings

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the duration of the level measurement in seconds.
The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically
(see the "Auto Level" softkey, "Auto Level" on page 367). The default value is 1 ms.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation on page 798

Meas Time Auto ← Settings

The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically
(see the Auto Level softkey).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 367

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

Upper Level Hysteresis ← Settings

Defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is auto-
matically adjusted when the "Auto Level" function is performed.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:UPPer on page 798

Lower Level Hysteresis ← Settings

Defines a lower threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is auto-
matically adjusted when the "Auto Level" function is performed.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:LOWer on page 798

Sweep Type
Opens a submenu to define the sweep type.
Selecting the sweep type is not available for the I/Q analyzer.
In frequency sweep mode, the analyzer provides several possible methods of sweep-
ing:
● "Sweep" on page 368
● "FFT" on page 368 (not available with 5-Pole filters, channel filters or RRC filters,
see chapter 5.2.6.3, "Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type", on page 375)
● "Auto" on page 368

Sweep ← Sweep Type

Sets the Sweep Type to standard analog frequency sweep.
In the standard sweep mode, the local oscillator is set to provide the spectrum quasi
analog from the start to the stop frequency.
Remote command:
SWE:TYPE SWE, see [SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE on page 805

FFT ← Sweep Type

Sets the Sweep Type to FFT mode.
The FFT sweep mode samples on a defined frequency value and transforms it to the
spectrum by fast Fourier transformation (FFT).
FFT is not available when using 5-Pole filters, Channel filters or RRC filters. In this
case, sweep mode is used.
Remote command:
SWE:TYPE FFT, see [SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE on page 805

Auto ← Sweep Type

Automatically sets the fastest available Sweep Type for the current measurement. Auto
mode is set by default.
Remote command:
SWE:TYPE AUTO, see [SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE on page 805

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 368

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

FFT Filter Mode ← Sweep Type

Defines the filter mode to be used for FFT filters by defining the partial span size. The
partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis.

Auto ← FFT Filter Mode ← Sweep Type

The firmware determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to obtain the best mea-
surement results.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:FFT on page 801

Narrow ← FFT Filter Mode ← Sweep Type

For an RBW ≤ 10kHz, the FFT filters with the smaller partial span are used. This allows
you to perform measurements near a carrier with a reduced reference level due to a
narrower analog prefilter.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:FFT on page 801

5.2.6 Setting the Bandwidths and Sweep Time – BW Key

The BW key is used to set the resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth (VBW) and
sweep time (SWT). The values available for resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth
depend on the selected filter type. For details on channel filters see also chap-
ter 5.2.6.4, "List of Available RRC and Channel Filters", on page 376 .

To open the bandwidth menu

● Press the BW key.
The "Bandwidth" menu is displayed.

Menu and softkey description

● chapter 5.2.6.1, "Softkeys of the Bandwidth Menu", on page 369

Further information
● chapter 5.2.6.4, "List of Available RRC and Channel Filters", on page 376
● table 5-6

Tasks
● chapter 5.2.6.2, "Specifying the Bandwidth", on page 375
● chapter 5.2.6.3, "Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type", on page 375

5.2.6.1 Softkeys of the Bandwidth Menu

The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Bandwidth" menu. It is possible
that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only
available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is pro-
vided in the corresponding softkey description.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 369

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

For Spurious Emission Measurements, the settings are defined in the "Sweep List" dia-
log, see "Sweep List dialog box" on page 298.
Bandwidth settings are only available for RF measurements.

Res BW Manual.......................................................................................................... 370

Res BW Auto...............................................................................................................370
Video BW Manual....................................................................................................... 371
Video BW Auto............................................................................................................371
Sweeptime Manual......................................................................................................371
Sweeptime Auto.......................................................................................................... 372
Sweep Type................................................................................................................ 372
└ Sweep........................................................................................................... 372
└ FFT............................................................................................................... 372
└ Auto...............................................................................................................373
└ FFT Filter Mode............................................................................................ 373
└ Auto.................................................................................................... 373
└ Narrow................................................................................................ 373
Coupling Ratio.............................................................................................................373
└ RBW/VBW Sine [1/1].................................................................................... 373
└ RBW/VBW Pulse [.1].................................................................................... 373
└ RBW/VBW Noise [10]................................................................................... 374
└ RBW/VBW Manual........................................................................................374
└ Span/RBW Auto [100]...................................................................................374
└ Span/RBW Manual....................................................................................... 374
└ Default Coupling........................................................................................... 375
Filter Type................................................................................................................... 375

Res BW Manual
Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the resolution bandwidth. The available
resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet.
For details on the correlation between resolution bandwidth and filter type refer to
chapter 5.2.6.3, "Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type", on page 375.
Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth. For rotary knob or
UP/DNARROW key inputs, the bandwidth is adjusted in steps either upwards or down-
wards.
The manual input mode of the resolution bandwidth is indicated by a green bullet next
to the "RBW" display in the channel bar.
When measuring Spurious Emissions, using this softkey automatically opens the
"Sweep List" dialog (see "Sweep List dialog box" on page 298).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO on page 800
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] on page 639

Res BW Auto
Couples the resolution bandwidth to the selected span (for span > 0). If you change the
span, the resolution bandwidth is automatically adjusted.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 370

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

This setting is recommended if you need the ideal resolution bandwidth in relation to a
particular span.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO on page 800

Video BW Manual
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the video bandwidth. The available video bandwidths
are specified in the data sheet.
Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth. For rotary knob or
UP/DOWN key inputs, the bandwidth is adjusted in steps either upwards or down-
wards.
The manual input mode of the video bandwidth is indicated by a green bullet next to
the "VBW" display in the channel bar.
Note: RMS detector and VBW.
If an RMS detector is used, the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed. Thus,
duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS detector no longer occurs. How-
ever, the VBW is still considered when calculating the sweep time. This leads to a lon-
ger sweep time for small VBW values. Thus, you can reduce the VBW value to achieve
more stable trace curves even when using an RMS detector. Normally, if the RMS
detector is used the sweep time should be increased to get more stable trace curves.
For details on detectors see chapter 5.3.1.5, "Detector Overview", on page 408.
When measuring Spurious Emissions, using this softkey automatically opens the
"Sweep List" dialog (see "Sweep List dialog box" on page 298).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO on page 802
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo on page 801

Video BW Auto
Couples the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth. If you change the resolution
bandwidth, the video bandwidth is automatically adjusted.
This setting is recommended if a minimum sweep time is required for a selected reso-
lution bandwidth. Narrow video bandwidths result in longer sweep times due to the lon-
ger settling time. Wide bandwidths reduce the signal/noise ratio.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO on page 802

Sweeptime Manual
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time.

Sweep time

absolute max. sweep time value: 16000 s

absolute min. sweep time value: zero span: 1 μs

span > 0: depends on device model (refer to data sheet)

Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW. For details
refer to the data sheet.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 371

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time. For rotary knob
or UPARROW/DNARROW key inputs, the sweep time is adjusted in steps either
downwards or upwards.
The manual input mode of the sweep time is indicated by a green bullet next to the
"SWT" display in the channel bar. If the selected sweep time is too short for the
selected bandwidth and span, level measurement errors will occur due to a too short
settling time for the resolution or video filters. In this case, the R&S ESR displays the
error message "UNCAL" and marks the indicated sweep time with a red bullet.
When measuring Spurious Emissions, using this softkey automatically opens the
"Sweep List" dialog, see "Sweep List dialog box" on page 298.
Remote command:
SWE:TIME:AUTO OFF, see [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO on page 805
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME on page 805

Sweeptime Auto
Couples the sweep time to the span, video bandwidth (VBW) and resolution bandwidth
(RBW) (not available for zero span). If you change the span, resolution bandwidth or
video bandwidth, the sweep time is automatically adjusted.
The R&S ESR always selects the shortest sweep time that is possible without falsifying
the signal. The maximum level error is < 0.1 dB, compared to using a longer sweep
time.
When measuring Spurious Emissions, using this softkey automatically opens the
"Sweep List" dialog, see "Sweep List dialog box" on page 298.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO on page 805

Sweep ← Sweep Type

FFT ← Sweep Type

Sets the Sweep Type to FFT mode.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 372

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

The FFT sweep mode samples on a defined frequency value and transforms it to the
spectrum by fast Fourier transformation (FFT).
FFT is not available when using 5-Pole filters, Channel filters or RRC filters. In this
case, sweep mode is used.
Remote command:
SWE:TYPE FFT, see [SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE on page 805

Auto ← Sweep Type

Automatically sets the fastest available Sweep Type for the current measurement. Auto
mode is set by default.
Remote command:
SWE:TYPE AUTO, see [SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE on page 805

FFT Filter Mode ← Sweep Type

Defines the filter mode to be used for FFT filters by defining the partial span size. The
partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis.

Auto ← FFT Filter Mode ← Sweep Type

The firmware determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to obtain the best mea-
surement results.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:FFT on page 801

Narrow ← FFT Filter Mode ← Sweep Type

Coupling Ratio
Opens a submenu to select the coupling ratios for functions coupled to the bandwidth.

RBW/VBW Sine [1/1] ← Coupling Ratio

Sets the following coupling ratio:
"video bandwidth = resolution bandwidth"
This is the default setting for the coupling ratio resolution bandwidth/video bandwidth.
This is the coupling ratio recommended if sinusoidal signals are to be measured.
This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically (Video BW
Auto).
Remote command:
BAND:VID:RAT 1, see [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio
on page 802

RBW/VBW Pulse [.1] ← Coupling Ratio

Sets the following coupling ratio:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 373

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

"video bandwidth = 10 × resolution bandwidth or"

"video bandwidth = 10 MHz (= max. VBW)."
This coupling ratio is recommended whenever the amplitudes of pulsed signals are to
be measured correctly. The IF filter is exclusively responsible for pulse shaping. No
additional evaluation is performed by the video filter.
This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically (Video BW
Auto).
Remote command:
BAND:VID:RAT 10, see [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio
on page 802

RBW/VBW Noise [10] ← Coupling Ratio

Sets the following coupling ratio:
"video bandwidth = resolution bandwidth/10"
At this coupling ratio, noise and pulsed signals are suppressed in the video domain.
For noise signals, the average value is displayed.
This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically (Video BW
Auto).
Remote command:
BAND:VID:RAT 0.1, see [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio
on page 802

RBW/VBW Manual ← Coupling Ratio

Activates the manual input of the coupling ratio.
The resolution bandwidth/video bandwidth ratio can be set in the range 0.001 to 1000.
This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically (Video BW
Auto).
Remote command:
BAND:VID:RAT 10, see [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio
on page 802

Span/RBW Auto [100] ← Coupling Ratio

Sets the following coupling ratio:
"resolution bandwidth = span/100"
This coupling ratio is the default setting of the R&S ESR.
This setting takes effect if you define the resolution bandwidth automatically (Res BW
Auto).
Remote command:
BAND:VID:RAT 0.001, see [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio
on page 802

Span/RBW Manual ← Coupling Ratio

Activates the manual input of the coupling ratio.
This setting takes effect if you define the resolution bandwidth automatically (Res BW
Auto).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 374

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

The span/resolution bandwidth ratio can be set in the range 1 to 10000.

Remote command:
BAND:RAT 0.1, see [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio
on page 801

Default Coupling ← Coupling Ratio

Sets all coupled functions to the default state ("AUTO").
In addition, the ratio "RBW/VBW" is set to "SINE [1/1]" and the ratio "SPAN/RBW" to
100.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO on page 800
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO on page 802
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO on page 805

5.2.6.2 Specifying the Bandwidth

1. Set the resolution bandwidth using the Res BW Manual or Res BW Auto softkey.

2. Set the video bandwidth using the Video BW Manual or Video BW Auto softkey.

3. Set the sweep time using the Sweeptime Manual or Sweeptime Auto softkey.

4. Press the Filter Type softkey and select the appropriate filters.

5.2.6.3 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type

All resolution bandwidths are realized with digital filters.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 375

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

The video filters are responsible for smoothing the displayed trace. Using video band-
widths that are small compared to the resolution bandwidth, only the signal average is
displayed and noise peaks and pulsed signals are repressed. If pulsed signals are to
be measured, it is advisable to use a video bandwidth that is large compared to the
resolution bandwidth (VBW * 10 x RBW) for the amplitudes of pulses to be measured
correctly.
The following filter types are available:
● Normal (3dB) (Gaussian) filters
The Gaussian filters are set by default. The available bandwidths are specified in
the data sheet.
● CISPR (6 dB) filters
For more information see chapter 4.2.1, "Measurement Bandwidth", on page 174.
● MIL Std (6 dB) filters
For more information see chapter 4.2.1, "Measurement Bandwidth", on page 174.
● Channel filters
For details see chapter 5.2.6.4, "List of Available RRC and Channel Filters",
on page 376 .
Channel filters do not support FFT mode.
● RRC filters
For details see chapter 5.2.6.4, "List of Available RRC and Channel Filters",
on page 376 .
RRC filters do not support FFT mode.
● 5-Pole filters
The available bandwidths are specified in the data sheet.
5-Pole filters do not support FFT mode.

5.2.6.4 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters

For power measurement a number of especially steep-edged channel filters are availa-
ble (see the following table). The indicated filter bandwidth is the 3 dB bandwidth. For
RRC filters, the fixed roll-off factor (a) is also indicated.
Table 5-6: Filter types

Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application

100 Hz CFILter

200 Hz CFILter

300 Hz CFILter

500 Hz CFILter

1 kHz CFILter

1.5 kHz CFILter

2 kHz CFILter

2.4 kHz CFILter SSB

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 376

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application

2.7 kHz CFILter

3 kHz CFILter

3.4 kHz CFILter

4 kHz CFILter DAB, Satellite

4.5 kHz CFILter

5 kHz CFILter

6 kHz CFILter

6 kHz, a=0.2 RRC APCO

8.5 kHz CFILter ETS300 113 (12.5 kHz channels)

9 kHz CFILter AM Radio

10 kHz CFILter

12.5 kHz CFILter CDMAone

14 kHz CFILter ETS300 113 (20 kHz channels)

15 kHz CFILter

16 kHz CFILter ETS300 113 (25 kHz channels)

18 kHz, a=0.35 RRC TETRA

20 kHz CFILter

21 kHz CFILter PDC

24.3 kHz, a=0.35 RRC IS 136

25 kHz CFILter APCO 25-P2

30 kHz CFILter CDPD, CDMAone

50 kHz CFILter

100 kHz CFILter

150 kHz CFILter FM Radio

192 kHz CFILter PHS

200 kHz CFILter GSM

300 kHz CFILter

500 kHz CFILter J.83 (8-VSB DVB, USA); RF ID 14333

1 MHz CFILter CDMAone

1.228 MHz CFILter CDMAone

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 377

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application

1.28 MHz, a=0.22 RRC TD-SCDMA

1.5 MHz CFILter DAB

2 MHz CFILter

3 MHz CFILter

3.75 MHz CFILter

3.84 MHz, a=0.22 RRC W-CDMA 3GPP

4.096 MHz, a=0.22 RRC W-CDMA NTT DOCoMo

5 MHz CFILter

20 MHz CFILter

28 MHz CFILter

40 MHz CFILter

5.2.7 Configuring the Sweep Mode – SWEEP Key

The SWEEP key is used to configure the sweep mode. Continuous sweep or single
sweep is possible. The sweep time and the number of measured values are set.

To open the Sweep menu

● Press the SWEEP key.
The "Sweep" menu is displayed.

Menu and softkey description

● chapter 5.2.7.1, "Softkeys of the Sweep Menu", on page 378

Task
● chapter 5.2.7.2, "Specifying the Sweep Settings", on page 383

5.2.7.1 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu

The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Sweep" menu. It is possible that
your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available
with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is provided in the
corresponding softkey description.
Continuous Sweep...................................................................................................... 379
Single Sweep.............................................................................................................. 379
Continue Single Sweep...............................................................................................379
Sweeptime Manual......................................................................................................379
Sweeptime Auto.......................................................................................................... 380
Sweep Type................................................................................................................ 380
└ Sweep........................................................................................................... 380

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 378

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

└ FFT............................................................................................................... 381
└ Auto...............................................................................................................381
└ FFT Filter Mode............................................................................................ 381
└ Auto.................................................................................................... 381
└ Narrow................................................................................................ 381
Sweep Count...............................................................................................................381
Sweep Points.............................................................................................................. 382
Select Frame...............................................................................................................382
Continue Frame (On Off)............................................................................................ 382
Frame Count............................................................................................................... 383
Spectrogram Clear...................................................................................................... 383

Continuous Sweep
Sets the continuous sweep mode: the sweep takes place continuously according to the
trigger settings. This is the default setting.
The trace averaging is determined by the sweep count value (see the "Sweep Count"
softkey, "Sweep Count" on page 381).
Remote command:
INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 609

Single Sweep
Sets the single sweep mode: after triggering, starts the number of sweeps that are
defined by using the Sweep Count softkey. The measurement stops after the defined
number of sweeps has been performed.
Remote command:
INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 609

Continue Single Sweep

Repeats the number of sweeps set by using the Sweep Count softkey, without deleting
the trace of the last measurement.
This is particularly of interest when using the trace configurations "Average" or "Max
Hold" to take previously recorded measurements into account for averaging/maximum
search.
For details on trace configuration refer to chapter 5.3.1, "Trace Configuration",
on page 397.
Remote command:
INITiate<n>:CONMeas on page 803

Sweeptime Manual
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time.

Sweep time

absolute max. sweep time value: 16000 s

absolute min. sweep time value: zero span: 1 μs

span > 0: depends on device model (refer to data sheet)

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 379

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW. For details
refer to the data sheet.
Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time. For rotary knob
or UPARROW/DNARROW key inputs, the sweep time is adjusted in steps either
downwards or upwards.
The manual input mode of the sweep time is indicated by a green bullet next to the
"SWT" display in the channel bar. If the selected sweep time is too short for the
selected bandwidth and span, level measurement errors will occur due to a too short
settling time for the resolution or video filters. In this case, the R&S ESR displays the
error message "UNCAL" and marks the indicated sweep time with a red bullet.
When measuring Spurious Emissions, using this softkey automatically opens the
"Sweep List" dialog, see "Sweep List dialog box" on page 298.
Remote command:
SWE:TIME:AUTO OFF, see [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO on page 805
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME on page 805

Sweep ← Sweep Type

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 380

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

FFT ← Sweep Type

Auto ← Sweep Type

Automatically sets the fastest available Sweep Type for the current measurement. Auto
mode is set by default.
Remote command:
SWE:TYPE AUTO, see [SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE on page 805

FFT Filter Mode ← Sweep Type

Defines the filter mode to be used for FFT filters by defining the partial span size. The
partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis.

Auto ← FFT Filter Mode ← Sweep Type

The firmware determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to obtain the best mea-
surement results.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:FFT on page 801

Narrow ← FFT Filter Mode ← Sweep Type

Sweep Count
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of sweeps to be performed in the single
sweep mode. Values from 0 to 32767 are allowed. If the values 0 or 1 are set, one
sweep is performed. The sweep count is applied to all the traces in a diagram.
If the trace configurations "Average", "Max Hold" or "Min Hold" are set, the sweep
count value also determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures.
In continuous sweep mode, if sweep count = 0 (default), averaging is performed over
10 sweeps. For sweep count =1, no averaging, maxhold or minhold operations are per-
formed.
For details on trace configuration see chapter 5.3.1, "Trace Configuration",
on page 397.
Example:
● Press the TRACE key > Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6 softkey
> "Max Hold" on page 181 softkey.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 381

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

● Press the SWEEP key > "Sweep Count" softkey.

● In the "Average Sweep Count" dialog box, enter 10.
● Press the "Single Sweep" on page 379 softkey:
R&S ESR performs the "Max Hold" function over 10 sweeps.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt on page 804

Sweep Points
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of measured values to be collected dur-
ing one sweep.
● Entry via rotary knob:
– In the range from 101 to 1001, the sweep points are increased or decreased in
steps of 100 points.
– In the range from 1001 to 32001, the sweep points are increased or decreased
in steps of 1000 points.
● Entry via keypad:
All values in the defined range can be set.
The default value is 691 sweep points.
When measuring spurious emissions, using this softkey automatically opens the
"Sweep List" dialog, see "Sweep List dialog box" on page 298.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:POINts on page 804

Select Frame
For spectrogram measurements only.
Opens a dialog box to select a specific frame and loads the corresponding trace from
the memory.
Note that activating a marker or changing the position of the active marker automati-
cally selects the frame that belongs to that marker.
This softkey is available in single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:SELect on page 828

Continue Frame (On Off)

For spectrogram measurements only.
Determines whether the results of the last measurement are deleted before starting a
new measurement.
● On
Repeats the single sweep measurement without deleting the spectrogram results
of the last measurement. One of the following trace modes is to be used: Max
Hold, Min Hold, Average.
● Off
Deletes the last measurement results before performing a single sweep measure-
ment.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 382

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

This softkey is available in single sweep mode.

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CONT on page 827

Frame Count
For spectrogram measurements only.
Opens a dialog box to set the number of frames to be captured in a single sweep.
Therefore, the frame count defines the number of traces the R&S ESR plots in the
Spectrogram result display in a single sweep. The maximum number of possible
frames depends on the history depth (see CALCulate<n>:SGRam:HDEPth
on page 620).
The sweep count, on the other hand, determines how many sweeps are combined in
one frame in the Spectrogram, i.e. how many sweeps the R&S ESR performs to plot
one trace in the Spectrogram result display (see "Sweep Count" on page 381).
This softkey is available in single sweep mode.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:COUNt on page 827

Spectrogram Clear
For spectrogram measurements only.
Resets the Spectrogram result display and clears its history buffer.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CLEar[:IMMediate] on page 618

5.2.7.2 Specifying the Sweep Settings

1. Press the Sweep Count softkey and enter the sweep count.

2. Press the Sweeptime Manual or Sweeptime Auto softkey to set the sweep time.

3. Press the Sweep Type softkey to select the sweep type.

4. Press the Sweep Points softkey and enter the number of sweep points.

5. Press the Continuous Sweep or Single Sweep softkey to select the sweep mode.

6. Press the Continue Single Sweep softkey to repeat the single sweep.

5.2.8 Triggering the Sweep – TRIG Key

The TRIG key is used to select trigger mode, trigger threshold, trigger delay, trigger
polarity and for gated sweep the gate configuration.

To open the Trigger menu

● Press the TRIG key.
The "Trigger" menu is displayed.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 383

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

Menu and softkey description

● chapter 5.2.8.1, "Softkeys of the Trigger Menu", on page 384

Tasks
● chapter 5.2.8.2, "Specifying the Trigger Settings", on page 390
● chapter 5.2.8.3, "Using Gated Sweep Operation", on page 390

5.2.8.1 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu

The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Trigger" menu. It is possible
that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only
available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is pro-
vided in the corresponding softkey description.
Trg/Gate Source..........................................................................................................384
└ Free Run....................................................................................................... 385
└ External.........................................................................................................385
└ Video.............................................................................................................385
└ RF Power...................................................................................................... 385
└ IF Power/BB Power.......................................................................................386
└ Time.............................................................................................................. 386
Trg/Gate Level............................................................................................................ 386
Trg/Gate Polarity......................................................................................................... 387
Trigger Offset.............................................................................................................. 387
Repetition Interval....................................................................................................... 387
Trigger Hysteresis....................................................................................................... 388
Trigger Holdoff............................................................................................................ 388
Gated Trigger.............................................................................................................. 388
Gate Settings.............................................................................................................. 388
└ Gate Mode (Lvl/Edge)...................................................................................388
└ Gate Delay.................................................................................................... 389
└ Gate Length (Gate Mode Edge)....................................................................389
└ Trg/Gate Source........................................................................................... 389
└ Trg/Gate Level.............................................................................................. 389
└ Trg/Gate Polarity...........................................................................................389
└ Sweep Time.................................................................................................. 389
└ Res BW Manual............................................................................................ 390

Trg/Gate Source
Opens the "Trigger/Gate Source" dialog box to select the trigger/gate mode.
As gate modes, all modes except "Power Sensor" are available. For details see also
chapter 5.2.8.3, "Using Gated Sweep Operation", on page 390.
The default setting is "Free Run". If a trigger mode other than "Free Run" has been set,
the enhancement label "TRG" is displayed and the trigger source is indicated.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 384

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

Note: When triggering or gating is activated, the squelch funciton is automatically dis-
abled (see "Squelch" on page 431).
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 809
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce on page 812

Free Run ← Trg/Gate Source

The start of a sweep is not triggered. Once a measurement is completed, another is
started immediately.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR IMM, see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 809

External ← Trg/Gate Source

Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the "EXT TRIG/GATE IN" input connector on the
rear panel.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR EXT, see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 809
SWE:EGAT:SOUR EXT for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce
on page 812

Video ← Trg/Gate Source

Defines triggering by the displayed voltage.
A horizontal trigger line is shown in the diagram. It is used to set the trigger threshold
from 0 % to 100 % of the diagram height.
Video mode is only available in the time domain.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR VID, see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 809
SWE:EGAT:SOUR VID for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce
on page 812

RF Power ← Trg/Gate Source

Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the measurement
channel.
In RF Power trigger mode the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate
frequency. The detector threshold can be selected in a range between - 50 dBm and
-10 dBm at the input mixer. The resulting trigger level at the RF input lies within the
following range:
(-24dBm + RF Att ) ≤ Triggerlevel ≤ (+5dBm + RF Att), max. 30 dBm, for Preamp =
OFF
(-40dBm + RF Att ) ≤ Triggerlevel ≤ (-11dBm + RF Att), max. 30 dBm, for Preamp =
ON
with
500 MHz ≤ InputSignal ≤ 7 GHz
Note: If input values outside of this range occur (e.g. for fullspan measurements), the
sweep may be aborted and a message indicating the allowed input values is displayed
in the status bar.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 385

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

A Trigger Offset, Trg/Gate Polarity and Trigger Holdoff can be defined for the RF trig-
ger to improve the trigger stability, but no hysteresis.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR RFP, see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 809
SWE:EGAT:SOUR RFP for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce
on page 812

IF Power/BB Power ← Trg/Gate Source

Defines triggering of the measurement using the second intermediate frequency.
For this purpose, the R&S ESR uses a level detector at the second intermediate fre-
quency.
The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification. A refer-
ence level offset, if defined, is also considered.
For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet.
The bandwidth at the intermediate frequency depends on the RBW and sweep type:
Sweep mode:
● RBW > 500 kHz: 40 MHz, nominal
● RBW ≤ 500 kHz: 6 MHz, nominal
FFT mode:
● RBW > 20 kHz: 40 MHz, nominal
● RBW ≤ 20 kHz: 6 MHz, nominal
Note: Be aware that in auto sweep type mode, due to a possible change in sweep
types, the bandwidth may vary considerably for the same RBW setting.
The R&S ESR is triggered as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the selected
frequency (= start frequency in the frequency sweep).
Thus, the measurement of spurious emissions, e.g. for pulsed carriers, is possible
even if the carrier lies outside the selected frequency span.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR IFP, see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 809
SWE:EGAT:SOUR IFP for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce
on page 812

Time ← Trg/Gate Source

Opens an edit dialog box to define a repetition interval in which the measurement is
triggered. The shortest interval is 2 ms.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR TIMETRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 809

Trg/Gate Level
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the trigger/gate level.
For details see also chapter 5.2.8.3, "Using Gated Sweep Operation", on page 390.
In the trigger modes "Time" and "Power Sensor", this softkey is not available.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower on page 808
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo on page 808

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 386

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

Trg/Gate Polarity
Sets the polarity of the trigger/gate source.
The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal. The default set-
ting is "Pos". The setting applies to all trigger modes with the exception of the "Free
Run", "Power Sensor" and "Time" mode.
For details also see chapter 5.2.8.3, "Using Gated Sweep Operation", on page 390.
"Pos" Level triggering: the sweep is stopped by the logic "0" signal and
restarted by the logical "1" signal after the gate delay time has
elapsed.
"Neg" Edge triggering: the sweep is continued on a "0" to "1" transition for
the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe on page 809
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity on page 812

Trigger Offset
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the
start of the sweep.

offset > 0: Start of the sweep is delayed

offset < 0: Sweep starts earlier (pre-trigger)

Only possible for span = 0 (e.g. I/Q Analyzer mode) and gated trigger
switched off
Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time:
pretriggermax = sweep time

In the "External" or "IF Power" trigger mode, a common input signal is used for both
trigger and gate. Therefore, changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay (trig-
ger offset) as well.
Tip: To determine the trigger point in the sample (for "External" or "IF Power" trigger
mode), use the TRACe<n>:IQ:TPISample? command.
In the "Time" trigger mode, this softkey is not available.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME] on page 806

Repetition Interval
Opens an edit dialog box to define a repetition interval in which the measurement is
triggered. The shortest interval is 2 ms. This softkey is only available if the trigger
source "Time" is selected (see "Time" on page 386).
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:TIME:RINTerval on page 810

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 387

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

Trigger Hysteresis
Defines the value for the trigger hysteresis for "IF power" or "RF Power" trigger sour-
ces. The hysteresis in dB is the value the input signal must stay below the power trig-
ger level in order to allow a trigger to start the measurement. The range of the value is
between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HYSTeresis on page 807

Trigger Holdoff
Defines the value for the trigger holdoff. The holdoff value in s is the time which must
pass before triggering, in case another trigger event happens.
This softkey is only available if "IFPower", "RF Power" or "BBPower" is the selected
trigger source.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HOLDoff on page 807

Gated Trigger
Switches the sweep mode with gate on or off.
This softkey requires the following "Trigger Mode" (see "Trg/Gate Source"
on page 384):

span > 0 External or IF Power/BB PowerIF Power

span = 0 External or IF Power/BB PowerIF Power or Video

If a different mode is active, the IF Power/BB Power trigger mode is automatically

selected.
Note: When triggering or gating is activated, the squelch function is automatically dis-
abled (see "Squelch" on page 431).
If the gate is switched on, a gate signal applied to the rear panel connector "EXT TRIG-
GER/GATE" or the internal IF power detector controls the sweep of the analyzer.
In the trigger mode Time, this softkey is not available.
For details also see chapter 5.2.8.3, "Using Gated Sweep Operation", on page 390.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe on page 811
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce on page 812

Gate Settings
Opens a submenu to make all the settings required for gated sweep operation.
In the "Time" trigger mode, this softkey is not available.
For details also see chapter 5.2.8.3, "Using Gated Sweep Operation", on page 390.

Gate Mode (Lvl/Edge) ← Gate Settings

Sets the gate mode. As settings level-triggered or edge-triggered gate mode can be
selected.
For details also see chapter 5.2.8.3, "Using Gated Sweep Operation", on page 390.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 388

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

"Edge" Edge-triggered gate mode

"Lvl" Level-triggered gate mode
This mode is not supported when using R&S Power Sensors as
power triggers ("Trg/Gate Source" = Power Sensor or External).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE on page 813

Gate Delay ← Gate Settings

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the gate delay time between the gate signal and the
continuation of the sweep. The delay position on the time axis in relation to the sweep
is indicated by a line labeled "GD".
This is useful for e.g. taking into account a delay between the gate signal and the stabi-
lization of an RF carrier.
As a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate when selecting the "Exter-
nal" or "IF Power" trigger mode, changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay
(trigger offset) as well.
For details also see chapter 5.2.8.3, "Using Gated Sweep Operation", on page 390.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff on page 811

Gate Length (Gate Mode Edge) ← Gate Settings

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the gate length. The gate length in relation to the
sweep is indicated by a line labeled "GL".
The length of the gate signal defines if the sweep is to be interrupted. Only in the edge-
triggered mode the gate length can be set, while in the level-triggered the gate length
depends on the length of the gate signal.
For details also see chapter 5.2.8.3, "Using Gated Sweep Operation", on page 390.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth on page 812

Trg/Gate Source ← Gate Settings

See "Trg/Gate Source" on page 384.

Trg/Gate Level ← Gate Settings

See "Trg/Gate Level" on page 386.

Trg/Gate Polarity ← Gate Settings

See "Trg/Gate Polarity" on page 387.

Sweep Time ← Gate Settings

Opens an edit dialog box to change the sweep time in order to obtain a higher resolu-
tion for positioning gate delay and gate length. When leaving the "Gate Settings" sub-
menu, the original sweep time is retrieved.
For details also see chapter 5.2.8.3, "Using Gated Sweep Operation", on page 390.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 389

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

Res BW Manual ← Gate Settings

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the resolution bandwidth. The available
resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet.
For details on the correlation between resolution bandwidth and filter type refer to
chapter 5.2.6.3, "Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type", on page 375.
Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth. For rotary knob or
UP/DNARROW key inputs, the bandwidth is adjusted in steps either upwards or down-
wards.
The manual input mode of the resolution bandwidth is indicated by a green bullet next
to the "RBW" display in the channel bar.
When measuring Spurious Emissions, using this softkey automatically opens the
"Sweep List" dialog (see "Sweep List dialog box" on page 298).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO on page 800
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] on page 639

5.2.8.2 Specifying the Trigger Settings

1. Press the "Trg/Gate Source" softkey to select the trigger mode (for details see
"Trg/Gate Source" on page 384.

2. Press the Trg/Gate Level softkey to set the trigger level.

3. Press the Trigger Offset softkey to set the trigger offset. In addition, a Trigger Hys-
teresis and Trigger Holdoff can be defined via the corresponding softkeys.

For details on gated sweep operation, see chapter 5.2.8.3, "Using Gated Sweep Oper-
ation", on page 390.

5.2.8.3 Using Gated Sweep Operation

By using a gate in sweep mode and stopping the measurement while the gate signal is
inactive, the spectrum for pulsed RF carriers can be displayed without the superposi-
tion of frequency components generated during switching. Similarly, the spectrum can
also be examined for an inactive carrier. The sweep can be controlled by an external
gate or by the internal power trigger.
Gated sweep operation is also possible for span = 0. This enables – e.g. in burst sig-
nals – level variations of individual slots to be displayed versus time.

1. Press the Gate Settings softkey to define the settings of the gate mode.
At the center frequency a transition to zero span is made and the time parameters
gate delay and gate length are displayed as vertical lines to adjust them easily.
When quitting the Gate Settings submenu, the original span is retrieved so the
desired measurement can be performed with the accurately set gate.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 390

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

2. Setting the parameters gate delay and gate length highly accurate, press the
Sweep Time softkey to alter the x-axis in a way that the signal range concerned
(e.g. one full burst) is displayed.

3. Press the Gate Delay softkey to set the sampling time in a way that the desired
portion of the signal is shown.

4. Press the Gate Mode (Lvl/Edge) softkey to set the gate mode.

5. If the "Edge" gate mode has been selected, press the Gate Length (Gate Mode
Edge) softkey to set the sampling duration in a way that the desired portion of the
signal is shown.

6. Press the Trg/Gate Polarity softkey to set the polarity of the trigger source.

7. Press the Gated Trigger softkey to activate the gated sweep mode.
To indicate that a gate is used for the sweep, the enhancement label "GAT" is dis-
played on the screen. This label appears to the right of the window for which the
gate is configured.

Fig. 5-14: TDMA signal with GATE OFF

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 391

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

Fig. 5-15: Timing diagram for GATE, GATE DELAY and GATE LENGTH

Fig. 5-16: TDMA signal with GATE ON

5.2.9 Input/Output Configuration – INPUT/OUTPUT Key

The INPUT/OUTPUT key is used to configure input and output sources for measure-
ment functions.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 392

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

5.2.9.1 Softkeys of the Input/Output Menu

The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Input/Output" menu. It is possi-
ble that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only
available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is pro-
vided in the corresponding softkey description.
Input (AC/DC)..............................................................................................................393
Preselector (On Off).................................................................................................... 393
Noise Source...............................................................................................................393
Video Output............................................................................................................... 393
Trigger Out.................................................................................................................. 393
Probe Config............................................................................................................... 393

Input (AC/DC)
Toggles the RF input of the R&S ESR between AC and DC coupling.
Remote command:
INPut:COUPling on page 641

Preselector (On Off)

Turns the preselector on and off.
Remote command:
INPut:PRESelection:STATe on page 903

Noise Source
Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off. For details on con-
nectors refer to the R&S ESR Getting Started, "Front and Rear Panel" chapter.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:NSOurce on page 901

Video Output
Selects the type of output for the optional IF / Video output.
When you turn on the output, you can select to output either the intermediate fre-
quency or the video signal.
Note: Video output does not return valid values in IQ or FFT mode.
Remote command:
OUTP:IF VID , see OUTPut:IF[:SOURce] on page 902

Trigger Out
Sets the Trigger Out port to low or high. Thus, you can trigger an additional device via
the external trigger port, for example.
Remote command:
OUTPut:TRIGger on page 902

Probe Config
Opens an edit dialog box to activate and configure a connected probe which is to pro-
vide an input signal. It is only available if a probe is connected to the instrument's RF
INPUT and USB connectors.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 393

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

For details see chapter 5.2.9.2, "Using Active Probes for Input", on page 394.
Remote command:
PROBe[:STATe] on page 792
PROBe:SETup:MODE on page 791

5.2.9.2 Using Active Probes for Input

When the input from the device under test requires high impedance, an active probe
can be connected between the device and the R&S ESR.
The R&S ESR supports active probes from the R&S RT-ZS series when using the new
probe adapter RT-ZA9.
When the probe has been connected to and recognized by the R&S ESR, a pre-
defined "Generic Probe" transducer factor with 20 dB is automatically activated and the
unit of the spectrum analyzer is changed to dBμV. (The same applies after presetting
the instrument.) Then the system is ready to analyze circuit points that cannot be loa-
ded with the 50 Ω of the analyzer input, but require a higher impedance.
Optionally, the probe can be deactivated while remaining connected to the R&S ESR,
for instance to analyze the digital input from the probe without considering the trans-
ducer factor.
All RT probes (except for ZS10E) have a micro button. The action for the micro button
can be defined. Currently, either a single sweep or no action can be performed when
the button is pressed. By default, when you press the probe's micro button, the
R&S ESR is set to single sweep mode and a single sweep is performed. This allows
you to start a measurement whilst applying the probe to a certain pin on the board
under test.
When using RT probes, consider the following:
● Active probes require operating power from the instrument and have a proprietary
interface to the instrument.
● The probe is automatically recognized by the instrument, no adjustment is
required.
● Connections should be as short as possible to keep the usable bandwidth high.
● Observe the operating voltage range.
For more information on RT probes, refer to the probe's documentation.

Connecting Active Probes

In order to use active probes with an R&S ESR, an RT-ZA9 adapter is required. The
RT-ZA9 provides an interface between the probe's BNC socket and and the analyzer's
N-socket and provides the necessary supply voltages for the probe via the USB con-
nection. Using this adapter, the following probes are currently supported:
● R&S RT-ZS10
● RT-ZS10E
● RT-ZS20
● RT-ZS30

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 394

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Configuration

To connect an active probe, proceed as follows:

1. Connect the adapter to the RF Input connector on the R&S ESR.

2. Connect the adapter's USB cable to a USB connector on the R&S ESR.

3. Connect the probe to the adapter.

Once the probe and adapter have been connected to the R&S ESR correctly and the
analyzer has recognized the probe, the "Generic Probe" transducer is activated and
you can start a measurement.

To determine whether the probe has been connected properly and recognized by the
R&S ESR, use the remote control command PROB:SET:STAT? (see PROBe:SETup:
STATe? on page 791).

To perform a measurement with the probe

► Place the probe on the required position on the test equipment, then press the
micro button on the probe to perform a single sweep measurement.

Probe Configuration
Principally, the probe is automatically recognized by the instrument and no further
adjustment is required. However, you can switch off the probe while leaving it connec-
ted, and you can configure which action is to be performed when the probe's micro but-
ton is pressed.
To display the "Probe Configuration" dialog box, select the INPUT/OUTPUT key and
then the "Probe Config" softkey.
The following settings are available:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 395

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

State............................................................................................................................396
Name...........................................................................................................................396
Serial Number............................................................................................................. 396
Part number................................................................................................................ 396
Micro Button Action..................................................................................................... 396

State
Activates a connected probe. Use this command to switch off the probe and measure
the digital input without considering the transducer factor of the probe.
Remote command:
PROBe[:STATe] on page 792

Name
Indicates the name of the connected probe.
Remote command:
PROBe:SETup:NAME? on page 791

Serial Number
Indicates the serial number of the connected probe.
Remote command:
PROBe:ID:SRNumber? on page 791

Part number
Indicates the material part number of the connected probe.
Remote command:
PROBe:ID:PARTnumber? on page 791

Micro Button Action

Defines which action is taken when the probe's micro button is pressed.
"RunSingle" A single sweep is performed.
"No Action" No action is taken.
Remote command:
PROBe:SETup:MODE on page 791

5.3 Analysis
General methods and basic settings to display and analyze measurements. If you are
performing a specific measurement task or using an operating mode other than Spec-
trum mode, be sure to check the specific measurement or mode description for set-
tings and functions that may deviate from these general ones.
● Trace Configuration...............................................................................................397
● Spectrogram..........................................................................................................412
● Markers................................................................................................................. 416
● Lines......................................................................................................................439

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 396

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

5.3.1 Trace Configuration

The TRACE key is used to configure the data acquisition for measurement and the
analysis of the measurement data.
The R&S ESR is capable of displaying up to six different traces at a time in a diagram.
A trace consists of a maximum of 691 displayed measurement points on the horizontal
axis (frequency or time). If more measured values than measurement points are availa-
ble, several measured values are combined in one displayed measurement point.
The trace functions include the following:
● Display mode of the trace
For details on trace modes see chapter 4.2.4, "Trace Modes", on page 180.
● Evaluation of the trace as a whole
For details on averaging see chapter 5.3.1.4, "Description of the Averaging
Method", on page 407.
● Evaluation of individual measurement points of a trace. For details on detectors
see chapter 5.3.1.5, "Detector Overview", on page 408.

To open the Trace menu

● Press the TRACE key.
The "Trace" menu is displayed. The "Trace Configuration" dialog box is displayed.

Menu and softkey description

● chapter 5.3.1.1, "Softkeys of the Trace Menu", on page 397

Further information
● chapter 4.2.4, "Trace Modes", on page 180
● chapter 5.3.1.5, "Detector Overview", on page 408
● chapter 5.3.1.6, "ASCII File Export Format", on page 409

Tasks
● chapter 5.3.1.2, "Configuring Traces", on page 405
● chapter 5.3.1.3, "Specifying the Trace Settings", on page 406

5.3.1.1 Softkeys of the Trace Menu

The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Trace" menu. It is possible that
your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available
with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is provided in the
corresponding softkey description.
Functions to configure traces described elsewhere:
● "More Traces" on page 208
● "Copy Trace" on page 208
● "Trace Wizard" on page 208

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 397

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

● "ASCII Trace Export" on page 208

● "Decim Sep" on page 209

Functions to configure traces exclusive in Spectrum mode

Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6...................................................... 398
└ Clear Write.................................................................................................... 398
└ Max Hold.......................................................................................................399
└ Min Hold........................................................................................................399
└ Average.........................................................................................................399
└ View.............................................................................................................. 399
└ Blank............................................................................................................. 400
└ Hold/Cont...................................................................................................... 400
└ Detector........................................................................................................ 400
└ Auto Select......................................................................................... 400
└ Auto Peak........................................................................................... 401
└ Positive Peak...................................................................................... 401
└ Negative Peak.................................................................................... 401
└ Sample................................................................................................401
└ RMS....................................................................................................401
└ Average.............................................................................................. 402
└ Quasipeak...........................................................................................402
└ CISPR Average.................................................................................. 402
└ RMS Average..................................................................................... 402
Average Mode.............................................................................................................402
└ Lin................................................................................................................. 402
└ Log................................................................................................................ 403
└ Power............................................................................................................403
Trace Math.................................................................................................................. 403
Trace Math Mode........................................................................................................ 404
└ Lin................................................................................................................. 404
└ Log................................................................................................................ 404
└ Power............................................................................................................404
Trace Math Position.................................................................................................... 404
Trace Math Off............................................................................................................ 404

Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Selects the active trace (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) and opens the "Trace Mode" submenu for the
selected trace.
In the default state, trace 1 is in Clear Write mode. The other traces are turned off. For
details see chapter 4.2.4, "Trace Modes", on page 180.
Tip: To configure several traces in one step, use the functionality of the Trace Configu-
ration dialog box. To access the dialog box, press the Trace Wizard softkey.
Remote command:
Selected via numeric suffix of:TRACe<1...6> commands

Clear Write ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Overwrite mode: the trace is overwritten by each sweep. This is the default setting.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 398

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

All available detectors can be selected.

Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE WRIT, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE
on page 652

Max Hold ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed. The R&S ESR
saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the
previous one.
This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals. The signal spectrum
is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of enve-
lope.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE MAXH, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE
on page 652

Min Hold ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed. The
R&S ESR saves the smallest of the previously stored/currently measured values in the
trace memory.
This mode is useful e.g. for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visi-
ble. Noise, interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW
signal is recognized by its constant level.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE MINH, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE
on page 652

Average ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

The average is formed over several sweeps. The Sweep Count determines the number
of averaging procedures.
All available detectors can be selected. If the detector is automatically selected, the
sample detector is used (see chapter 5.3.1.5, "Detector Overview", on page 408).
This mode is not available for statistics measurements.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE AVER, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE
on page 652

View ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed.
Note: If a trace is frozen, the instrument settings, apart from level range and reference
level (see below), can be changed without impact on the displayed trace. The fact that
the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the
icon on the tab label.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 399

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

If the level range or reference level is changed, the R&S ESR automatically adapts the
measured data to the changed display range. This allows an amplitude zoom to be
made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE VIEW, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE
on page 652

Blank ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Hides the selected trace.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC OFF, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe] on page 820

Hold/Cont ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Switches the reset of the traces in Min Hold, Max Hold and Average mode after some
specific parameter changes have been made on and off. The default setting is off.
Normally, the measurement is started anew after parameter changes, before the mea-
surement results are evaluated (e.g. using a marker). In all cases that require a new
measurement after parameter changes, the trace is reset automatically to avoid false
results (e.g. with span changes). For applications that require no reset after parameter
changes, the automatic reset can be switched off.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE:HCONtinuous on page 819

Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Opens a submenu to select the detector manually, or activate automatic selection.
Note: When measuring spurious emissions, using this softkey automatically opens the
Sweep List dialog, see "Sweep List dialog box" on page 298.
If a detector was selected manually, the "MAN" indicator is highlighted.
If "AUTO" is selected, the detector is defined automatically, depending on the selected
trace mode:

Trace mode Detector

Clear Write Auto Peak

Max Hold Positive Peak

Min Hold Negative Peak

Average Sample Peak

View –

Blank –

Auto Select ← Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Selects the best detector for the selected trace and filter mode. This is the default set-
ting.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 400

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

Trace mode Detector

Clear/Write Auto Peak

Average Sample

Max Hold Max Peak

Min Hold Min Peak

Remote command:
[SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]:AUTO on page 823

Auto Peak ← Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Selects the "Auto Peak" detector.
The "Auto Peak" detector determines the maximum and minimum value within a mea-
surement point. The Auto Peak detector is not available for SEM measurements.
Remote command:
DET APE, see [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]
on page 823

Positive Peak ← Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Selects the "Positive Peak" detector.
Remote command:
DET POS, see [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]
on page 823

Negative Peak ← Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Selects the "Negative Peak" detector.
Remote command:
DET NEG, see [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]
on page 823

Sample ← Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Selects the "Sample" detector.
Remote command:
DET SAMP, see [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]
on page 823

RMS ← Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Selects the "RMS" detector.
Remote command:
DET RMS, see [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]
on page 823

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 401

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

Average ← Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Selects the "Average" detector.
Remote command:
DET AVER, see [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]
on page 823

Quasipeak ← Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Selects the "Quasipeak" detector.
Remote command:
DET QPE, see [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]
on page 823

CISPR Average ← Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Selects the "CISPR Average" detector.
Remote command:
DET CAV, see [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]
on page 823

RMS Average ← Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Selects the "RMS Average" detector.
Remote command:
DET CRMS, see [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]
on page 823

Average Mode
Opens a submenu to select the averaging method for the average trace mode. The fol-
lowing methods are available:
● Lin
● Log
● Power
Logarithmic averaging is recommended to display signals with a low signal to noise
ratio. While positive peak values are decreased in logarithmic averaging due to the
characteristics involved, it is also true that negative peaks are increased relative to the
average value. If the distorted amplitude distribution is averaged, a value is obtained
that is smaller than the actual average value. The difference is -2.5 dB.
This low average value is usually corrected in noise power measurements by a 2.5 dB
factor. Therefore the R&S ESR offers the selection of linear averaging. The trace data
is converted to linear values prior to averaging, then averaged and reconverted to loga-
rithmic values. After these conversions the data is displayed on the screen. The aver-
age value is always correctly displayed irrespective of the signal characteristic.
In case of stationary sinusoidal signals both logarithmic and linear averaging has the
same results.

Lin ← Average Mode

Activates linear averaging. Linear averaging means that the power level values are
converted into linear units prior to averaging. After the averaging, the data is converted
back into its original unit.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 402

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

This softkey takes effect if the grid is set to a linear scale (see "Range Linear" softkey,
"Range Linear %" on page 328). In this case, the averaging is done in two ways
(depending on the set unit – see "Unit" softkey):
● The unit is set to either W or dBm: the data is converted into W prior to averaging,
i.e. averaging is done in W.
● The unit is set to either V, A, dBmV, dBµV, dBµA or dBpW: the data is converted
into V prior to averaging, i.e. averaging is done in V.
Remote command:
SENS:AVER1:TYPE LIN, see [SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE on page 822

Log ← Average Mode

Activates logarithmic averaging.
This averaging method only takes effect if the grid is set to a logarithmic scale
("Range" softkey), i.e. the unit of the data is dBm. In this case the values are averaged
in dBm. Otherwise (i.e. with linear scaling), the behavior is the same as with linear
averaging (see Lin softkey). For further information on logarithmic scaling refer to the
"Average Mode" softkey.
Remote command:
SENS:AVER1:TYPE VID, see [SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE on page 822

Power ← Average Mode

Activates linear power averaging.
The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to averaging. After the aver-
aging, the data is converted back into its original unit.
Unlike the linear mode, the averaging is always done in W.
Remote command:
SENS:AVER1:TYPE POW, see [SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE on page 822

Trace Math
Opens the "Trace Mathematics" dialog box to define which trace is subtracted from
trace 1. The result is displayed in trace 1 and refers to the zero point defined with the
Trace Math Position softkey. The following subtractions can be performed:

"T1"->"T1"-"T2" Subtracts trace 2 from trace 1.

"T1"->"T1"-"T3" Subtracts trace 3 from trace 1

"T1"->"T1"-"T4" Subtracts trace 4 from trace 1

"T1"->"T1"-"T5" Subtracts trace 5 from trace 1

"T1"->"T1"-"T6" Subtracts trace 6 from trace 1

To switch off the trace math, use the Trace Math Off softkey.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MATH[:EXPression][:DEFine] on page 817
CALCulate<n>:MATH:STATe on page 819

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 403

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

Trace Math Mode

Opens a submenu to select the mode for the trace math calculations.

Lin ← Trace Math Mode

Activates linear subtraction, which means that the power level values are converted
into linear units prior to subtraction. After the subtraction, the data is converted back
into its original unit.
This softkey takes effect if the grid is set to a linear scale (see Range softkey). In this
case, subtraction is done in two ways (depending on the set unit – see Unit softkey):
● The unit is set to either W or dBm: the data is converted into W prior to subtraction,
i.e. averaging is done in W.
● The unit is set to either V, A, dBmV, dBµV, dBµA or dBpW: the data is converted
into V prior to subtraction, i.e. subtraction is done in V.
Remote command:
CALC:MATH:MODE LIN, see CALCulate<n>:MATH:MODE on page 818

Log ← Trace Math Mode

Activates logarithmic subtraction.
This subtraction method only takes effect if the grid is set to a logarithmic scale (see
Range softkey), i.e. the unit of the data is dBm. In this case the values are subtracted
in dBm. Otherwise (i.e. with linear scaling) the behavior is the same as with linear sub-
traction (see Lin softkey). For further information on logarithmic scaling refer to the
Average Mode softkey.
Remote command:
CALC:MATH:MODE LOG, see CALCulate<n>:MATH:MODE on page 818

Power ← Trace Math Mode

Activates linear power subtraction.
The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to subtraction. After the sub-
traction, the data is converted back into its original unit.
Unlike the linear mode, the subtraction is always done in W.
Remote command:
CALC:MATH:MODE POW, see CALCulate<n>:MATH:MODE on page 818

Trace Math Position

Opens an edit dialog box to define the zero point in % of the diagram height. The range
of values extends from -100 % to +200 %.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MATH:POSition on page 818

Trace Math Off

Deactivates any previously selected trace math functions.
Remote command:
CALC:MATH:STAT OFF, see CALCulate<n>:MATH:STATe on page 819

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 404

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

5.3.1.2 Configuring Traces

1. To open the trace wizard, press the TRACE key and then the "Trace Wizard" soft-
key (see "Trace Wizard" on page 208).
Tip: Context-sensitive menus for traces. Traces have context-sensitive menus. If
you right-click on a trace in the display or a trace setting in the information channel
bar (or touch it for about 1 second), a menu is displayed which corresponds to the
softkey functions available for traces. This is useful, for example, when the softkey
display is hidden.
If a menu entry contains an arrow to the right of it, a submenu is available for that
entry.
To close the menu, press the ESC key or click in the display outside of the menu.

2. For each trace you can define the following settings:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 405

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

Display Mode ● Clear Write

● Max Hold
● Min Hold
● Average
● View
● Blank
For details see chapter 4.2.4, "Trace Modes", on page 180.

Detector Auto Select Activates automatic detector selection (see Auto Select softkey). If
activated, the "Trace Detector" setting is ignored.

Trace Detector Defines a specific trace detector. If one of the following settings is
defined, the "Detector Auto Select" option is deactivated.
● "Auto Select" on page 400
● "Auto Peak" on page 401
● "Positive Peak" on page 401
● "Negative Peak" on page 401
● "Sample" on page 401
● "RMS" on page 401
● "Average" on page 402

3. To configure several traces to predefined display modes in one step, press the but-
ton for the required function:

Preset All Traces Trace 1: Clear Write

Trace 2-6: Blank

Select Max | Avg | Min Trace 1: Max Hold

Trace 2: Average
Trace 3: Min Hold
Trace 4-6: Blank

Select Max | ClrWrite | Min Trace 1: Max Hold

Trace 2: Clear Write
Trace 3: Min Hold
Trace 4-6: Blank

For details see chapter 4.2.4, "Trace Modes", on page 180.

5.3.1.3 Specifying the Trace Settings

1. To configure one or more traces, see chapter 5.3.1.2, "Configuring Traces",

on page 405.

2. To select the trace mode for the selected trace, press the softkey for the corre-
sponding trace (for details see chapter 4.2.4, "Trace Modes", on page 180).

3. To select a detector, press the Auto Select softkey for automatic detector selection,
or press the Detector softkey (for details see chapter 5.3.1.5, "Detector Overview",
on page 408).

4. To change the sweep count setting, which also determines trace averaging, press
the Sweep Count softkey.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 406

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

5. To deactivate the reset of the traces in "Min Hold" and "Max Hold" mode after
some specific parameter changes, press the Trace Math softkey.

6. To copy a trace into another trace memory, press the Copy Trace softkey.
Upon copying, the contents of the selected memory are overwritten and the new
contents are displayed in the View mode.

7. To export the active trace in ASCII format:

a) Press the "More" softkey.
b) If necessary, press the Decim Sep softkey to change the decimal separator
with floating-point numerals.
c) Press the ASCII File Export softkey to enter the ASCII file export name.
The active trace is saved in ASCII format on the harddisk on or an external
storage device.

5.3.1.4 Description of the Averaging Method

Averaging is carried out over the measurement points derived from the measurement
samples. Several measured values may be combined in a measurement point. This
means that with linear level display the average is formed over linear amplitude values.
The sweep mode (continuous or single sweep, for details see chapter 5.2.7, "Configur-
ing the Sweep Mode – SWEEP Key", on page 378) and running averaging apply to the
average display analogously. In principle, two methods for calculating the average are
used: continuous averaging and averaging over the selected number of sweeps.
● sweep count > 1
Depending on the relation of the following two parameters, two different situations
exist:
n = number of sweeps performed since measurement start
c = sweep count (number of sweeps forming one statistics cycle)
– n≤c
In single sweep or continuous sweep mode during the first statistics cycle,
averaging over the selected number of sweeps is performed. The average
trace "n" is calculated at each measurement point according to:

Fig. 5-17: Equation 1

with Avg = average trace; Curr = current trace

Until the first statistics cycle is completed (n < c), a preliminary average is dis-
played which represents the arithmetic mean value over all measured sweeps.
With n increasing, the displayed trace is increasingly smoothed since there are
more single sweeps for averaging.
When the first statistics cycle is completed (n = c), the average trace is saved
in the trace memory.
– n>c

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 407

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

In continuous sweep mode after the first statistics cycle, continuous averaging
is performed. The average trace "n" is calculated at each measurement point
according to:

Fig. 5-18: Equation 2

with Avg = average trace; Curr = current trace

In single sweep mode, the same formula is valid if the Continue Single Sweep
softkey is pressed.
● sweep count = 0
In continuous sweep mode, a continuous average is calculated according to fig-
ure 5-18 with c = 10:

Fig. 5-19: Equation 3

with Avg = average trace; Curr = current trace

Due to the weighting between the current trace and the average trace, past values
have practically no influence on the displayed trace after about ten sweeps. With
this setting, signal noise is effectively reduced without need for restarting the aver-
aging process after a change of the signal.
● sweep count = 1
The current trace is displayed. No averaging is performed. This is a special case of
figure 5-17 with n = 0.

5.3.1.5 Detector Overview

The measurement detector for the individual display modes can be selected directly by
the user or set automatically by the R&S ESR. The detector activated for the specific
trace is indicated in the corresponding trace display field by an abbreviation.
For more information on available detectors see chapter 4.2.3, "Detectors",
on page 176.
All detectors work in parallel in the background, which means that the measurement
speed is independent of the detector combination used for different traces.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 408

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

Number of measured values

During a frequency sweep, the R&S ESR increments the first local oscillator in steps
that are smaller than approximately 1/10 of the bandwidth. This ensures that the oscil-
lator step speed is conform to the hardware settling times and does not affect the pre-
cision of the measured power.
The number of measured values taken during a sweep is independent of the number of
oscillator steps. It is always selected as a multiple or a fraction of 691 (= default num-
ber of trace points displayed on the screen). Choosing less then 691 measured values
(e.g. 125 or 251) will lead to an interpolated measurement curve, choosing more than
691 points (e.g. 1001, 2001 …) will result in several measured values being overlaid at
the same frequency position.

RMS detector and VBW

If the RMS detector is selected, the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed.
Thus, duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS detector no longer occurs.
However, the VBW is still considered when calculating the sweep time. This leads to a
longer sweep time for small VBW values. Thus, you can reduce the VBW value to ach-
ieve more stable trace curves even when using an RMS detector. Normally, if the RMS
detector is used the sweep time should be increased to get more stable trace curves.

5.3.1.6 ASCII File Export Format

The data of the file header consist of three columns, each separated by a semicolon:
parameter name; numeric value; basic unit. The data section starts with the keyword
"Trace <n>" (<n> = number of stored trace), followed by the measured data in one or
several columns (depending on measurement) which are also separated by a semico-
lon.

Exporting a single trace vs exporting all traces

Note that the file containing the trace data has a slightly different structure when you
export all traces compared to exporting a single trace only. The differences are indica-
ted in the tables below.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 409

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

Blue font: Information provided when you export a single trace

Green font: Information provided when you export all traces
Black font: Information provided regardless of the export mode

Header
Type; <instrument_model>; Instrument model
Version;1.00; Firmware version
Date;01. Jan 3000; Date of data set storage
Mode;Receiver; Application
Start;150000.000000;Hz Start frequency of the scan
Stop;100000000.000000;Hz; Stop frequency of the scan
X-Axis;LIN; Scale of the x-axis
Detector;Average; Detector type
X-Unit;Hz; Unit of the x-axis
Y-Unit;dBµV; Unit of the y-axis
Scan Count;1; Scan count
Transducer;;;;;;;; Transducer information

Data section (scan ranges)

Scan 1:
Start;150000.000000;Hz; Start frequency of the scan range
Stop;29998500.000000;Hz; Stop frequency of the scan range
Step;4500.000000;Hz; Frequency stepsize applied in the scan range
RBW;9000.000000;Hz; Measurement bandwidth applied in the scan range
Meas Time;0.001000;s; Measurement time in the scan range
Auto Ranging;OFF; State of the auto ranging feature
RF Att;10.000000;dB; Attenuation applied in the scan range

Auto Preamp;OFF;
Preamplifier information for the scan range
Preamp;0.000000;dB;

RF Input;1; RF input used in the scan range

Scan 2:
(…)

Data section (traces)

Trace 1:
Trace Mode;CLR/WRITE; Trace mode
Detector;MAX PEAK; Detector type
X-Unit;Hz; Unit of the x-axis
Y-Unit;Hz; Unit of the y-axis
Values;1343; Number of measurement points

150000.000000;3.541122;
String of results
154500.000000;5.776306;[...]

Trace 2:
(…)

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 410

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

Blue font: Information provided when you export a single trace

Green font: Information provided when you export all traces
Black font: Information provided regardless of the export mode

Header
Type; <instrument_model>; Instrument model
Version;1.00; Firmware version
Date;01. Jan 3000; Date of data set storage
Mode;Analyzer; Application
Center Freq;100000000.000000; Center frequency
Freq Offset;0.000000;Hz; Frequency offset
Span;10000000000.000000;Hz; Frequency span
X-Axis;LIN; Scale of the x-axis
Start;150000.000000:Hz; Start frequency
Stop;2500000.000000;Hz; Stop frequency
Ref Level;97.000000;dBµV; Reference level
Level Offset;0.000000;Hz; Reference level offset
Ref Position;100.000000;%; Reference position
Y-Axis;LOG; Scale of the y-axis
Level Range;100.000000;dB; Range of the y-axis
Rf Att;10.000000;dB; RF attenuation
RBW;3000000.000000;Hz; Resolution bandwidth
VBW;300000.000000;Hz; Video bandwidth
SWT;0.002000;s; Sweep time
Trace mode;CLR/WRITE; Trace mode
Detector;AUTOPEAK; Detector type
X-Unit;Hz; Unit of the x-axis
Y-Unit;Hz; Unit of the y-axis
Preamplifier;OFF; State of the preamplifier
Transducer;OFF; Transducer information
Sweep Count;0; Sweep / average count

Data section (traces)

Trace 1:
Trace Mode;CLR/WRITE; Trace mode
Detector;MAX PEAK; Detector type
X-Unit;Hz; Unit of the x-axis
Y-Unit;Hz; Unit of the y-axis
Preamplifier;OFF; State of the preamplifier
Transducer;OFF; Transducer information
Values;691; Number of measurement points

150000.000000;3.541122;
String of results
154500.000000;5.776306;[...]

Trace 2:
(…)

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 411

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

5.3.2 Spectrogram

The spectrogram is a graphical overview of changes in the frequency and amplitude

over time.
The spectrogram uses the configuration of the Spectrum mode and vice versa.
Note that not all measurements of the Spectrum mode support a spectrogram result
display.

Menus and softkeys

The main menu of the Spectrogram result display is part of the "Trace" menu in Spec-
trum mode. For more information see .
Some special functions supported by the spectrogram are available in the "Sweep"
menu in Spectrum mode. For more information see chapter 5.2.7.1, "Softkeys of the
Sweep Menu", on page 378.

5.3.2.1 Working with Spectrograms

Functions of the spectrogram described elsewhere:

● chapter 4.1.6, "Spectrogram", on page 159

General Information
This section provides some basic information about using the firmware application and
about performing measurements with the firmware application.

Screen Layout
The Spectrogram view is divided into two screens: the spectrum analyzer result display
(upper screen) and the spectrogram result display (lower screen).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 412

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

Fig. 5-20: Screen layout of the spectrogram result display

1 = Spectrum result display

2 = Spectrogram result display
3 = Frame indicator
4 = Time stamp / frame number
5 = Color map
6 = Marker
7 = Deltamarker
8 = Marker list

● Spectrum Analyzer result display (1 in figure 5-20)

This result display is the same as the Spectrum Analyzer with the x-axis represent-
ing the frequency span or time (span = 0) and the y-axis the power level. Configure
and use this display in the same way as you would in Spectrum Analyzer mode.
All traces are available and you can view those traces just like in the base unit (see
chapter 4.2.4, "Trace Modes", on page 180). The trace modes View and Blank are
not available for trace 1.
While performing a measurement the trace is updated continuously. You can also
restore the trace to a point that has already been recorded by selecting a specific
frame (see "Select Frame" on page 382). This is possible in Single Sweep mode or
if the sweep has been stopped.
● Spectrogram result display (2)
The data displayed in the Spectrogram is always based on the data of trace 1 in
the Spectrum Analyzer result display. The Spectrogram can handle measurements
in the frequency domain (span > 0) as well as measurements in the time domain
(span = 0)
The Spectrogram is a cartesian diagram. The x-axis shows the power distribution
of a measured signal over a specified frequency or time range. Different power lev-
els are displayed in different colors. The y-axis represents the time with the top of
the diagram being the current timeframe (the measurement runs from top to bot-
tom). Each line (or trace) of the y-axis represents one captured frame. The frames
are sorted in chronological order. One frame is equal to a certain number of sweep
points, depending on the dimension of the x-axis. If there are more measurement

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 413

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

values than measurement points, several measured values are combined in one
measurement point using the selected detector (see chapter 5.3.1.5, "Detector
Overview", on page 408). Frames are sorted in chronological order, beginning with
the most recently recorded frame or frame number 0 at the top of the diagram.
After that and below frame 0 is the frame recorded before the current frame (frame
-1) and so on until the maximum number of captured frames is reached. The maxi-
mum number of frames that you can capture is summarized in the table below (see
table 5-7. A marker in the form of an arrow (3) on the left and right border of the
Spectrogram indicates the currently selected frame.
The actual number of the currently selected frame is shown below the diagram (4).
If the time stamp is active, the R&S ESR shows the time stamp instead of the
frame number (see Time Stamp (On Off).
Below the diagram there is also a color map (5) that shows the power levels corre-
sponding to the displayed colors. The minimum value of the y-axis is on the left of
the color map. The maximum value is on the right of the map. You can also change
the color scheme in use (see Color Mapping. The colors corresponding to the
power levels, however, are always assigned automatically.
Markers and deltamarkers (6) (7) take the form of diamonds in the Spectrogram.
They are only displayed in the Spectrogram, if the marker position is inside the visi-
ble area of the spectrogram. If more than two markers are active, it is possible to
display a Marker Table at the bottom of the display (8).
Table 5-7: Correlation between number of sweep points and number of frames stored in the history
buffer

Sweep Points Max. History Depth

≤1250 20000

2001 12488

4001 6247

8.001 3124

16.001 1562

32.001 781

Markers and Marker Values

In the Spectrum Analyzer result display, the markers and their frequency and level val-
ues (1) are displayed in the marker field just like in the base unit (see chapter 4.4.2,
"Markers", on page 209). In addition to the base unit functionality, the frame number is
displayed to indicate the position of the marker in time (2).

In the Spectrogram result display, you can activate up to 16 markers or deltamarkers at

the same time. Any marker can be assigned to a different frame. Therefore, in addition
to the frequency (1) you can set the frame number (2) when activating a new marker. If
no frame number is specified, the marker is positioned on the currently selected frame.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 414

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

In the Spectrogram result display all markers are visible that are positioned on a visible
frame.
In the Spectrum Analyzer result display, only the markers positioned on the currently
selected frame are visible. In Continuous Sweep mode this means that only markers
positioned on frame 0 are visible. To view markers that are positioned on a frame other
than frame 0 in the Spectrum Analyzer result display, it is necessary to stop the mea-
surement and select the corresponding frame.

5.3.2.2 Softkeys of the Spectrogram Menu

Softkeys of the Spectrogram Menu

The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the "Spectrogram" menu. It is
possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is
only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is
delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
To display the "Spectrogram" menu, press the TRACE key and then select the "Spec-
togram" softkey.
Spectrogram................................................................................................................415
└ Spectrogram (On Off)................................................................................... 415
└ History Depth................................................................................................ 415
└ Color Mapping...............................................................................................416
└ Time Stamp (On Off).....................................................................................416
└ Clear Spectrogram........................................................................................416

Spectrogram
Opens the submenu for the spectrogram view.

Spectrogram (On Off) ← Spectrogram

Activates and deactivates the Spectrogram result display
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SGRam[:STATe] on page 828

History Depth ← Spectrogram

Sets the number of frames that the R&S ESR stores in its memory. The maximum
number of frames depends on the Sweep Points (see "General Information"
on page 412).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 415

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

If the memory is full, the R&S ESR deletes the oldest frames stored in the memory and
replaces them with the new data.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:HDEPth on page 620

Color Mapping ← Spectrogram

Displays the "Color Mapping" dialog box to configure the display of the spectrogram
(assignment of colors to power levels).
For more information see chapter 4.1.6.2, "Color Map", on page 160.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:COLor on page 826
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:LOWer on page 619
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:UPPer on page 619

Time Stamp (On Off) ← Spectrogram

Activates and deactivates the time stamp. The time stamp shows the system time
while the measurement is running. In single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped,
the time stamp shows the time and date of the end of the sweep.
When active, the time stamp replaces the display of the frame number.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp[:STATe] on page 828

Clear Spectrogram ← Spectrogram

Resets the Spectrogram result display and clears the history buffer.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CLEar[:IMMediate] on page 618

5.3.3 Markers

5.3.3.1 Controlling Markers

The markers are used for marking points on traces, reading out measurement results
and for selecting a display section quickly. The R&S ESR provides 16 markers per
trace.

To open the Marker menu

Further information
● "Displayed Marker Information" on page 420
● chapter 4.4.2.2, "Positioning Markers", on page 214.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 416

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

Tasks
● "Basic Marker Functions" on page 418

Softkeys of the Marker Menu

Functions to control markers described elsewhere:
● "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta" on page 210
● "Marker to Trace" on page 211
● "Marker Wizard" on page 211
● "All Marker Off" on page 212
● "Marker Table" on page 213
● "Marker Info (On Off)" on page 213

Functions to control markers exclusive in Spectrum mode

Marker Stepsize.......................................................................................................... 417
└ Stepsize Standard.........................................................................................417
└ Stepsize Sweep Points................................................................................. 417
Marker Zoom (span > 0)..............................................................................................418
Link Mkr1 and Delta1.................................................................................................. 418

Marker Stepsize
Opens a submenu to set the step size of all markers and delta markers.
Default value for the marker step size is Stepsize Sweep Points.

Stepsize Standard ← Marker Stepsize

Moves the marker or delta marker from one measurement point to the next, if the
marker or delta marker value is changed via the rotary knob ( "Marker 1 / Marker 2 /
Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta" softkeys, see "Marker 1 / Marker 2 /
Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta" on page 210). If more measured values
than measurement points exist, it is not possible to read out all measured values. In
this case, use the Stepsize Sweep Points softkey.
Remote command:
CALC:MARK:X:SSIZ STAN (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SSIZe
on page 834)

Stepsize Sweep Points ← Marker Stepsize

Moves the marker or delta marker from one measured value to the next, if the marker
or delta marker value is changed via the rotary knob ( "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 /
… Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta" softkeys, see "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / …
Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta" on page 210). If more measured values than mea-
surement points exist, every single measured value is accessible and its value is dis-
played in the marker field.
The number of measured values is defined in the ""Sweep"" menu via the Sweep
Points softkey.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 417

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

This functionality is not available for statistical measurements (APD and CCDF).
Remote command:
CALC:MARK:X:SSIZ POIN (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SSIZe
on page 834)

Marker Zoom (span > 0)

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a display range for the zoom. The area around
marker 1 is expanded accordingly and more details of the result can be seen. If no
marker is activated, marker 1 is switched on and set on the largest signal.
The following sweep is stopped at the position of the reference marker. The frequency
of the signal is counted and the measured frequency becomes the new center fre-
quency. The zoomed display range is then configured and the new settings are used
by the R&S ESR for further measurements.
If the display has not yet been switched to the new frequency display range and you
press the softkey, the procedure is aborted. If an instrument setting is changed during
this operation, the procedure is also aborted.
This function is not available in I/Q Analyzer mode.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:ZOOM on page 658

Link Mkr1 and Delta1

The delta marker 1 is linked to marker 1, so if the x-axis value of the marker 1 is
changed, the delta marker 1 will follow on the same x-position. The link is off by
default.
You can set the two markers on different traces to measure the difference (e.g.
between a max hold trace and a min hold trace or between a measurement and a ref-
erence trace).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:LINK on page 667

Basic Marker Functions

● To open the "Marker" menu, press the MKR key.
Marker 1 is activated and positioned on the maximum value of the trace as a nor-
mal marker. If several traces are displayed, the marker is set to the maximum value
(peak) of the trace which has the lowest number (1 to 3) and is not frozen (View
mode). In case a marker is already located there, the new marker is set to the fre-
quency of the next lowest level (next peak).
● To change marker settings quickly, right-click on the marker in the display (or touch
it for about 1 second). A context-sensitive menu is displayed which corresponds to
the softkey functions available for markers.
● To configure and activate several markers at once, select the "Marker Wizard" to
open a configuration dialog for all markers.
● To change to another trace, press the "Marker to Trace" softkey ("Marker to Trace"
on page 211) and enter the number of the trace on which the marker is to be
placed.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 418

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

The marker changes to the selected trace, but remains on the previous frequency
or time. If a trace is turned off, the corresponding markers and marker functions are
also deactivated.
● To switch to another marker, click on the marker label in the diagram. Alternatively,
select the corresponding softkey. If necessary, select the More Markers softkey
first to open a submenu that contains all marker numbers.
● To move the marker to a different position, click the marker label in the diagram
and then drag it to the new position. When a marker label is selected, a vertical line
is displayed which indicates the marker's current x-value.

● To switch on a delta marker, select the softkey for the corresponding marker, then
press the "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta"
("Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta" on page 210)
until "Delta" is highlighted.
The selected marker is switched on as a delta marker. The frequency and level of
the marker are displayed in relation to marker 1 in the marker field.
● To change the marker type of a marker, select the softkey for the corresponding
marker, then press the "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker
Norm/Delta" softkey ("Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker
Norm/Delta" on page 210).
For a normal marker, the frequency and level are displayed as absolute values in
the marker field. For a delta marker, the frequency and level of the marker are dis-
played in relation to marker 1 in the marker field.
● To switch off a marker, press the corresponding softkey again.
The marker is deactivated. Marker 1 becomes the active marker for entry. The fre-
quency and level of marker 1 are displayed in the marker field.
● To switch off all markers, press the All Marker Off softkey.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 419

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

● To change the stepsize between one measured value and the next when the
marker or delta marker value is changed via the rotary knob, press either the
Stepsize Standard softkey or the Stepsize Sweep Points softkey.
● To zoom into the display around a marker, press the "Marker Zoom (span > 0)"
on page 418 softkey and enter a span.
● To link the delta marker1 to marker1, so if the x-axis value of the marker 1 is
changed, the delta marker 1 follows on the same x-position, press the Link Mkr1
and Delta1 softkey.

Displayed Marker Information

The following additional information is displayed within the diagram grid or in a marker
table beneath the diagram. The marker table is displayed automatically if more than 2
markers are active. You can hide or show the table using the Marker Table softkey.

Marker information in Diagram Grid

The x and y axis positions of the last 2 markers or delta markers that were set, as well
as their index, are displayed within the diagram grid, if available. The value in the
square brackets after the index indicates the trace to which the marker is assigned.
(Example: M1[1) defines marker 1 on trace 1.) For more than 2 markers, a separate
marker table is displayed beneath the diagram.
If applicable, the active measurement function for the marker and its main results are
indicated, as well. The functions are indicated with the following abbreviations:

FXD Reference fixed marker active

PHNoise Phase noise measurement active

CNT Frequency counter active

TRK Signal track active

NOIse Noise measurement active

MDepth Measurement of the AM modulation depth active

TOI TOI measurement active

Occ BW Occupied bandwidth

Marker Information in Marker Table

No. Serial number

Type Marker type: N (normal), D (delta), T (temporary, internal)

Dgr Diagram number

Trc Trace to which the marker is assigned

Stimulus x-value of the marker

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 420

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

Response y-value of the marker

Func Activated marker or measurement function

Func.Result Result of the active marker or measurement function

5.3.3.2 Positioning Markers (MKR➙ Key)

The MKR➙ key is used for search functions of measurement markers, assignment of
the marker frequency as center frequency, restriction of the search area and character-
ization of maxima and minima. For details on markers in general, see chapter 5.3.3.1,
"Controlling Markers", on page 416.

To open the Marker To menu

● Press the MKR➙ key.
The "Marker To" menu is displayed. If no marker is active, marker 1 will be activa-
ted and a peak search on the trace carried out. Otherwise, the edit dialog box for
the last activated marker is opened and the current frequency/time value is dis-
played.

Menu and softkey description

● "Softkeys of the Marker To Menu" on page 421

Further information
● "Effect of Different Peak Excursion Settings (Example)" on page 424

Softkeys of the Marker To Menu

The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Marker To" menu. It is possible
that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only
available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is pro-
vided in the corresponding softkey description.
Functions to position markers decribed elsewhere:
● "Select Marker (No)" on page 214
● "Peak" on page 214
● "Next Peak" on page 214
● "Marker to Trace" on page 211

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 421

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

● "Min" on page 215

● "Next Min" on page 215
● "Next Mode" on page 215
● "Search Limits" on page 216
● "Peak Excursion" on page 216
● Spectrogram: chapter 4.4.2.3, "Markers in Spectrograms", on page 217

Functions to position markers exclusive in Spectrum mode

Center =Mkr Freq (span > 0).......................................................................................422
Ref Lvl =Mkr Lvl.......................................................................................................... 422
Auto Max Peak/Auto Min Peak................................................................................... 422
Exclude LO..................................................................................................................422

Center =Mkr Freq (span > 0)

Sets the center frequency to the current marker or delta marker frequency. A signal
can thus be set to as center frequency, for example to examine it in detail with a
smaller span.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer on page 657

Ref Lvl =Mkr Lvl

Sets the reference level to the current marker level.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:REFerence on page 832

Auto Max Peak/Auto Min Peak

Adds an automatic peak search action for marker 1 at the end of each particular
sweep. This function may be used during adjustments of a device under test to keep
track of the current peak marker position and level.
The current marker search limit settings (Left Limit, Right Limit, Threshold softkeys) are
taken into account.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:AUTO on page 833
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:AUTO on page 833

Exclude LO
Switches the frequency range limit for the marker search functions on or off.
"ON" The minimum frequency included in the peak search range is ≥ 5 ×
resolution bandwidth (RBW).
Due to the interference by the first local oscillator to the first inter-
mediate frequency at the input mixer, the LO is represented as a sig-
nal at 0 Hz. To avoid the peak marker jumping to the LO signal at 0
Hz, this frequency is excluded from the peak search.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 422

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

"OFF" No restriction to the search range. The frequency 0 Hz is included in

the marker search functions.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:LOEXclude on page 833

Searching for a Maximum

● To search for the highest maximum, press the Peak softkey.
● To define the search mode for the next maximum, use the Next Mode softkey.
● To start the search, press the Next Peak softkey.

You can define an automatic peak search action for marker 1 at the end of each partic-
ular sweep using the Auto Max Peak/Auto Min Peak softkey.

Searching for a Minimum

● To search for the minimum, press the Min softkey.
● To define the search mode for the next minimum, use the Next Mode softkey.
● To start the search, press the Next Min softkey.

You can define an automatic peak search action for marker 1 at the end of each partic-
ular sweep using the Auto Max Peak/Auto Min Peak softkey.

Specifying the Search Limits

● To define the lower limit, press the Left Limit softkey.
● To define the upper limit, press the Right Limit softkey.
● To define the threshold, press the Threshold softkey.
● To switch the search limits off, press the Search Lim Off softkey.

Specifying the Search Range

● Press the Exclude LO softkey to deactivate the "Exclude LO" mode in order to
include the frequency down to 0 Hz in the marker search functions.

Examining a Signal at the Center in Detail

1. Press the PRESET key to set the R&S ESR to the default setting.

2. Press the MKR -> key to open the "Marker To" menu.

3. Marker 1 is activated and set to the largest signal of the trace.

4. Press the Center =Mkr Freq (span > 0) softkey to set to the marker frequency.

5. The span is adapted in such a way that the minimum frequency (= 0 Hz) or the
maximum frequency is not exceeded.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 423

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

6. Press the Ref Lvl =Mkr Lvl softkey to set the reference level to the measured
marker level.

7. Press the SPAN key.

8. The edit dialog box to enter a frequency span is displayed.

9. Reduce the span, e.g. using the rotary knob.

Specifying the Suitable Peak Excursion

1. If the Peak Excursion softkey is used, the default value is sufficient, since, in this
mode, the next lower maximum or next higher minimum will always be detected.

2. If the < or > of the softkey Next Mode is used, the 6 dB level change set as a
default value may already be attained by the inherent noise of the instrument. To
avoid identifying noise peaks as maxima or minima, enter a peak excursion value
that is higher than the difference between the highest and the lowest value mea-
sured for the displayed inherent noise.

Effect of Different Peak Excursion Settings (Example)

The following figure shows a trace to be examined.

Fig. 5-21: Trace example

The following table lists the signals as indicated by the marker numbers in the diagram
above, as well as the minimum of the amplitude decrease to both sides of the signal:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 424

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

Signal # Min. amplitude decrease to both sides of the signal

1 30 dB

2 29.85 dB

3 7 dB

4 7 dB

The detected signals and their order are different depending on the peak excursion
setting and the peak search method (whether the next lower maximum or the next rela-
tive maximum is searched). The following results are obtained. All tests start with the
marker set to signal 1 by pressing the Peak softkey.
● 40 dB peak excursion
Result: With both methods apart from signal 1 no signal is detected, as the signal
level does not decrease by more than 30 dB to either side of any signal.

Next lower maximum Next relative maximum

Next Mode abs: signal 1 Next Mode <: signal 1

(no further signal detected) (no further signal detected)

Next Mode >: signal 1

(no further signal detected)

● 20 dB peak excursion
Result: With both methods apart from signal 1 signal 2 is detected, as the signal
level decreases at least by 29.85 dB to either side of this signal, which is now
greater than the peak excursion.

Next lower maximum Next relative maximum

Next Mode abs: signal 2 Next Mode <: signal 1

(no further signal detected)

Next Mode abs: signal 2 Next Mode >: signal 2

(no further signal detected)

Next Mode >: signal 2

(no further signal detected)

● 6 dB peak excursion
Result: With both methods all signals are detected.

Next lower maximum Next relative maximum

Next Mode abs: signal 2 Next Mode <: signal 3

Next Mode abs: signal 3 Next Mode >: signal 1

Next Mode abs: signal 4 Next Mode >: signal 2

Next Mode >: signal 4

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 425

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

5.3.3.3 Performing Peak Searches with Markers – PEAK SEARCH Key

The PEAK SEARCH key is used to perform a peak search with the currently active
marker. If no marker is active, marker 1 is activated in normal mode and set as the
peak.
If the selected diagram does not support markers, this key is ignored.

5.3.3.4 Measuring with Markers (MKR FUNC Key)

The MKR FUNC key provides various functions for markers, e.g.
● Phase Noise measurements
● Setting reference points
● Marker demodulation
● Defining Marker peak lists
● Signal counts
● Measuring the power for a band around the marker

To open the marker function menu

● Press the MKR FUNC key.
The "Mkr Func" (marker function) menu is displayed.

Menu and softkey description

● "Softkeys of the Marker Function Menu" on page 426

Further information
● "AF Demodulation" on page 436
● "Frequency Measurement with the Frequency Counter" on page 436
● "Measurement of Noise Density" on page 437
● "Measurement example for Phase Noise Auto Peak Search" on page 438

Tasks
● "Setting a Fixed Reference Point (Phase Noise Measurement)" on page 435
● "Setting the Demodulation Mode and Duration" on page 435
● "Performing Band Power Measurements" on page 438

Softkeys of the Marker Function Menu

The following table shows all softkeys available in the marker function menu. It is pos-
sible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is
only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is
provided in the corresponding softkey description.
Select Marker (No)...................................................................................................... 427
Signal Count................................................................................................................427
Noise Meas On/Off......................................................................................................428

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 426

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

Phase Noise................................................................................................................428
└ Phase Noise On/Off...................................................................................... 428
└ Ref Point Level..............................................................................................428
└ Ref Point Frequency (span > 0)/Ref Point Time (zero span)........................428
└ Peak Search................................................................................................. 429
└ Ph. Noise Auto Peak Search........................................................................ 429
└ Select Marker (No)........................................................................................429
Ref Fixed.....................................................................................................................429
└ Ref. Fixed On/Off.......................................................................................... 429
└ Ref Point Level..............................................................................................429
└ Ref Point Frequency (span > 0)/Ref Point Time (zero span)........................430
└ Peak Search................................................................................................. 430
Marker Demod............................................................................................................ 430
└ Mkr Demod On/Off........................................................................................430
└ AM.................................................................................................................430
└ FM.................................................................................................................430
└ Mkr Stop Time...............................................................................................430
└ Continuous Demod (span > 0)......................................................................431
└ Squelch......................................................................................................... 431
└ Squelch Level............................................................................................... 431
n dB down................................................................................................................... 431
Marker Peak List......................................................................................................... 432
└ Peak List On/Off............................................................................................432
└ Sort Mode Freq/Lvl....................................................................................... 432
└ Max Peak Count........................................................................................... 432
└ Peak Excursion............................................................................................. 433
└ Left Limit....................................................................................................... 433
└ Right Limit..................................................................................................... 433
└ Threshold...................................................................................................... 433
└ ASCII File Export.......................................................................................... 433
└ Decim Sep.................................................................................................... 434
└ Marker Number............................................................................................. 434
Band Power.................................................................................................................434
└ Select Marker (No)........................................................................................434
└ Band Power On/Off.......................................................................................434
└ Span..............................................................................................................434
└ Power............................................................................................................435
└ Density.......................................................................................................... 435

Select Marker (No)

Signal Count
Switches the frequency counter on or off, and opens an edit dialog box to define the
resolution of the frequency counter, if enabled. The frequency is counted at the posi-
tion of the reference marker (marker 1). If no marker is activate, marker 1 is switched
on and positioned on the largest signal.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 427

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

The sweep stops at the reference marker until the frequency counter has delivered a
result. The result is displayed in the marker field (see figure 4-9), labeled with [Tx
CNT].
For more information see "Frequency Measurement with the Frequency Counter"
on page 436.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt on page 840
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency? on page 841

Noise Meas On/Off

Switches the noise measurement for the active marker on or off. The corresponding
marker becomes the normal marker.
For more information on noise measurement see "Measurement of Noise Density"
on page 437.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] on page 842
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult on page 841

Phase Noise
This softkey opens a submenu that contains functionality to configure and perform
phase noise measurements.

Phase Noise On/Off ← Phase Noise

Switches the phase noise measurement with all active delta markers on and off. The
correction values for the bandwidth and the log amplifier are taken into account in the
measurement.
Marker 1 is activated, if necessary, and a peak search is performed. If marker 1 is acti-
vated, its position becomes the reference point for the measurement.
Deltamarker 2 is activated and can be used to read out the phase noise value at a
given frequency offset.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] on page 843
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult? on page 843

Ref Point Level ← Phase Noise

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a reference level value. All relative level values of the
delta markers refer to this reference level.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y on page 838

Ref Point Frequency (span > 0)/Ref Point Time (zero span) ← Phase Noise
Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency reference or time value. All relative fre-
quency or time values of the delta markers refer to this frequency reference. For phase
noise measurement, input of reference time is not possible.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X on page 838

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 428

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

Peak Search ← Phase Noise

Sets the maximum value of the selected trace as the reference point.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:MAXimum[:PEAK]
on page 837

Ph. Noise Auto Peak Search ← Phase Noise

Activates an automatic peak search for the reference fixed marker 1 at the end of each
particular sweep.
This function can be used to track a drifting source during a phase noise measure-
ment. The delta marker 2, which shows the phase noise measurement result, keeps
the delta frequency value. Therefore the phase noise measurement leads to reliable
results in a certain offset although the source is drifting. Only if the marker 2 reaches
the border of the span, the delta marker value is adjusted to be within the span. In
these cases, select a larger span.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:AUTO on page 842

Select Marker (No) ← Phase Noise

Ref Fixed
Opens a submenu to set all values of a reference point. Instead of using the current
values of the reference marker (marker 1) as reference point for the delta markers,
level and frequency or time are set to fixed values and used as reference point.

Ref. Fixed On/Off ← Ref Fixed

Switches the relative measurement to a fixed reference value on or off. The level and
frequency or time values of marker 1 immediately become the reference point, but can
be altered using the corresponding softkeys ("Ref Point Level" on page 428, "Ref Point
Frequency (span > 0)/Ref Point Time (zero span)" on page 428 and "Peak Search"
on page 429).
When set to ON, all delta markers which previously referenced marker 1 are automati-
cally set to reference the fixed marker.
The reference marker assignment can be changed using the "Marker Wizard" (see
"Marker Wizard" on page 211).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe] on page 839

Ref Point Level ← Ref Fixed

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 429

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

Ref Point Frequency (span > 0)/Ref Point Time (zero span) ← Ref Fixed
Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency reference or time value. All relative fre-
quency or time values of the delta markers refer to this frequency reference. For phase
noise measurement, input of reference time is not possible.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X on page 838

Peak Search ← Ref Fixed

Sets the maximum value of the selected trace as the reference point.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:MAXimum[:PEAK]
on page 837

Marker Demod
The marker demodulation function sends the AM data at the current marker frequency
(in a bandwidth corresponding to the RBW) to the audio output. The "Marker Demod"
softkey opens a submenu to set the demodulation output settings.
For more information see "AF Demodulation" on page 436.
Marker demodulation is not available for Spectrum Emission Mask measurements.

Mkr Demod On/Off ← Marker Demod

Switches the demodulation output on or off.
For more information see "AF Demodulation" on page 436.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe] on page 845

AM ← Marker Demod
Sets AM as the output demodulation mode. This is the default setting.
For more information see "AF Demodulation" on page 436.
Remote command:
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:DEM:SEL AM, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
DEModulation:SELect on page 845

FM ← Marker Demod
Sets FM as the output demodulation mode. Default setting is AM.
For more information see "AF Demodulation" on page 436.
Remote command:
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:DEM:SEL FM, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
DEModulation:SELect on page 845

Mkr Stop Time ← Marker Demod

Opens an edit dialog box to define how long demodulation should be output for span >
0.
For more information see "AF Demodulation" on page 436.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff on page 845

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 430

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

Continuous Demod (span > 0) ← Marker Demod

Switches the continuous demodulation on or off. If the sweep time is long enough, the
set frequency range can be monitored acoustically.
For more information see "AF Demodulation" on page 436.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:CONTinuous
on page 844

Squelch ← Marker Demod

Activates the squelch function, i.e. the audible AF is cut off below a defined threshold
level. Thus, you avoid hearing noise at the audio output when no signal is available.
The squelch function activates the video trigger function (see "Video" on page 385)
and deactivates any other trigger or gating settings. The squelch level and trigger level
are set to the same value.
The trigger source in the channel information bar is indicated as "SQL" for squelch.
The squelch level is indicated by a red line in the diagram.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe] on page 617

Squelch Level ← Marker Demod

Defines the level threshold below which the audible AF is cut off if squelching is
enabled. The video trigger level is set to the same value.
The squelch level is indicated by a red line in the diagram.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch:LEVel on page 617

n dB down
Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value to define the level spacing of the two tempo-
rary markers to the right and left of marker 1 (default setting: 3 dB). Activates the tem-
porary markers T1 and T2. The values of the temporary markers (T1, T2) and the
entered value (ndB) are displayed in the marker field.
If a positive value is entered, the markers T1 and T2 are placed below the active refer-
ence marker. If a negative value (e.g. for notch filter measurements) is entered, the
markers T1 and T2 are placed above the active reference marker. Marker T1 is placed
to the left and marker T2 to the right of the reference marker.
In the marker table, the following results are displayed:

Span setting Parameter name Description

span > 0 Bw frequency spacing of the two temporary markers

Q factor quality of the displayed bandwidth value (Bw)

span = 0 PWid pulse width between the two temporary markers

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 431

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

If it is not possible to form the frequency spacing for the n dB value (e.g. because of
noise display), dashes instead of a measured value are displayed.
Remote command:
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD:STAT ON, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
NDBDown:STATe on page 848
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD 3dB, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
NDBDown on page 846
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD:RES? , see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
NDBDown:RESult? on page 847
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:QFAC?, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
NDBDown:QFACtor on page 847
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD:FREQ? (span > 0), see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:
FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency? on page 846
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD:TIME? (span = 0), see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:
FUNCtion:NDBDown:TIME? on page 848

Marker Peak List

Opens the "Peak List" submenu to define criteria for the sort order and the contents of
the peak list. For each listed peak the frequency ("Stimulus") and level ("Response")
values are given. In addition, the peaks are indicated in the trace display. A maximum
of 50 entries are listed.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:COUNt? on page 850
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:X on page 852
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:Y? on page 853

Peak List On/Off ← Marker Peak List

Activates/deactivates the marker peak list. If activated, the peak list is displayed and
the peaks are indicated in the trace display.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:STAT on page 852

Sort Mode Freq/Lvl ← Marker Peak List

Defines the criteria for sorting:
"Freq" sorting in ascending order of frequency values (span > 0) or time val-
ues (span = 0)
"Lvl" sorting in ascending order of the level
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT on page 852

Max Peak Count ← Marker Peak List

Defines the maximum number of peaks to be determined and displayed.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:LIST:SIZE on page 851

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 432

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

Peak Excursion ← Marker Peak List

Opens an edit dialog box for level measurements to enter the minimum level value by
which a signal must rise or fall so that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum
by the search functions. Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed; the resolution is 0.1
dB. The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion on page 648

Left Limit ← Marker Peak List

Right Limit ← Marker Peak List

Threshold ← Marker Peak List

ASCII File Export ← Marker Peak List

Opens the "ASCII File Export Name" dialog box and saves the active peak list in ASCII
format to the specified file and directory.
The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a data sec-
tion containing the marker data. For details on an ASCII file see chapter 5.3.1.6, "ASCII
File Export Format", on page 409.
This format can be processed by spreadsheet calculation programs, e.g. MS-Excel. It
is necessary to define ';' as a separator for the data import. Different language versions
of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point. It is there-
fore possible to select between separators '.' (decimal point) and ',' (comma) using the
"Decim Sep" softkey (see "Decim Sep" on page 209).
An example of an output file for Spectrum Emission Mask measurements is given in
"ASCII File Export Format (Spectrum Emission Mask)" on page 289.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 820
MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIST on page 747

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 433

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

Decim Sep ← Marker Peak List

Marker Number ← Marker Peak List

If enabled, the determined peaks are indicated by their corresponding marker number
in the trace display.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:ANNotation:LABel:STATe
on page 849

Band Power
Opens a submenu to activate and configure a band power marker. Band power mark-
ers allow you to measure the integrated power for a defined span (band) around a
marker. The result can be displayed either as a power (dBm) or density (dBm/Hz). The
span is indicated by lines in the diagram.
Band power markers are only available for standard frequency measurements in Spec-
trum mode.
Note: Band Power markers are also available in the I/Q Analyzer, but only for Spec-
trum displays (see "Display Config" on page 470).
For more information see "Performing Band Power Measurements" on page 438.

Select Marker (No) ← Band Power

Band Power On/Off ← Band Power

Activates or deactivates the band power marker. When switched to on, if no marker is
active yet, marker 1 is activated. Otherwise, the currently active marker is used as a
band power marker (all other marker functions for this marker are deactivated). All
markers can be defined as band power markers, each with a different span.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] on page 855

Span ← Band Power

Defines the span (band) around the marker for which the power is measured. The span
is indicated by lines in the diagram.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN on page 855

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 434

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

Power ← Band Power

Selects the power mode for the band power marker, i.e. the result is displayed in dBm.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE on page 854
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult? on page 854

Density ← Band Power

Selects the density mode for the band power marker, i.e. the result is displayed in
dBm/Hz.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE on page 854
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult? on page 854

Setting a Fixed Reference Point (Phase Noise Measurement)

1. Press the Phase Noise softkey.

The submenu with the Phase Noise On/Off softkey switched on is displayed. The
level and frequency or time values of marker 1 immediately become the reference
point.

2. Setting the maximum of the selected trace as reference point, press the Peak
Search softkey.

3. To define the values for the reference point, proceed as follows:

a) Press the Ref Fixed softkey.
b) Press the Ref Point Level softkey and enter a reference level value.
c) If span > 0, press the Ref Point Frequency (span > 0)/Ref Point Time (zero
span) softkey and enter a frequency reference value.
d) If span = 0, press the "Ref Point Time" softkey and enter a reference time value
(see "Ref Point Frequency (span > 0)/Ref Point Time (zero span)"
on page 428).

Setting the Demodulation Mode and Duration

1. Press the Marker Demod softkey.

The submenu with the Mkr Demod On/Off softkey switched on is displayed.

2. To change the demodulation mode, press the AM or FM softkey.

3. For details see "AF Demodulation" on page 436.

4. To modify the demodulation time for span > 0, press the Mkr Stop Time softkey.

5. To change to continuous demodulation for span > 0, press the Continuous Demod
(span > 0) softkey.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 435

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

AF Demodulation
The R&S ESR provides demodulators for AM and FM signals. With these demodula-
tors, a displayed signal can be identified acoustically by using headphones.

Risk of hearing damage

For span > 0, the demodulation is not continuous. The frequency at which the demodu-
lation takes place is determined by the active marker. The demodulation bandwidth
corresponds to the RBW. If the level of the selected frequency is above the threshold
line, the sweep stops for the selected time (stop time) and the RF signal is demodula-
ted. For span = 0, the demodulation is continuously active irrespective of the stop time
set.

Frequency Measurement with the Frequency Counter

In order to accurately determine the frequency of a signal, the R&S ESR is equipped
with a frequency counter which measures the frequency of the RF signal at the inter-
mediate frequency. Using the measured IF, the R&S ESR calculates the frequency of
the RF input signal by applying the known frequency conversion factors.
The frequency measurement uncertainty depends only upon the accuracy of the fre-
quency reference used (external or internal reference). Although the R&S ESR always
operates synchronously irrespective of the set span, the frequency counter delivers a
more exact result than a measurement performed with a marker. This is due to the fol-
lowing:
● The marker measures only the position of the point on the trace and infers from
this value the signal frequency. The trace, however, contains only a limited number
of points. Depending upon the selected span, each point may contain many mea-
surement values, which therefore limits the frequency resolution.
● The resolution with which the frequency can be measured with a marker is depend-
ant on the selected resolution bandwidth, which in return affects the necessary
measurement time. For this reason, the bandwidth is normally defined as wide as
possible and the sweep time as short as possible. This results in a loss of fre-
quency resolution. For the measurement with the frequency counter, the sweep is
stopped at the reference marker, the frequency is counted with the desired resolu-
tion and then the sweep is allowed to continue.
In I/Q Analyzer mode (see chapter 6, "I/Q Analyzer", on page 468), the resolution
with which the frequency can be measured with a marker is always the filter band-
width, which is derived from the defined sample rate.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 436

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

Measurement of Noise Density

During noise measurement, the noise power density is measured at the position of the
marker. For span = 0, all points of the trace are used to determine the noise power
density. For span > 0, two points to the right and left of the marker are used for the
measurement to obtain a stable result.
The noise power density is indicated in the marker field. With logarithmic amplitude
units (dBm, dBmV, dBmµV, dBµA), the noise power density is output in dBm/Hz, i.e. as
level in 1 Hz bandwidth with reference to 1 mW. With linear amplitude units (V, A, W),
the noise voltage density is evaluated in µV/Hz, the noise current density in µA/Hz or
the noise power density in µW/Hz.
In the default setting, the R&S ESR uses the sample detector for the noise function.
With the sample detector, the trace can additionally be set to AVERAGE to stabilize
the measured values. With RMS detector used, trace averaging must not be used
since in this case it produces too low noise levels which cannot be corrected. Instead,
the sweep time can be increased to obtain stable measurement results.

Prerequisite settings
The following settings have to be made to ensure that the power density measurement
yields correct values:
● Detector: Sample or RMS
● Video bandwidth:
≤ 0.1 resolution bandwidth with sample detector
≥ 3 x resolution bandwidth with RMS detector
● Trace averaging:
With the sample detector, the trace can additionally be set to average to stabilize
the measured values. With RMS detector used, trace averaging must not be used
since in this case it produces too low noise levels which cannot be corrected.
Instead, the sweep time can be increased to obtain stable measurement results.

Correction factors
The R&S ESR uses the following correction factors to evaluate the noise density from
the marker level:
● Since the noise power is indicated with reference to 1 Hz bandwidth, the bandwidth
correction value is deducted from the marker level. It is 10 x lg (1 Hz/BWNoise),
where BWNoise is the noise or power bandwidth of the set resolution filter (RBW).
● RMS detector: With the exception of bandwidth correction, no further corrections
are required since this detector already indicates the power with every point of the
trace.
● Sample detector: As a result of video filter averaging and trace averaging, 1.05 dB
is added to the marker level. This is the difference between the average value and
the RMS value of white noise. With a logarithmic level axis, 1.45 dB is added addi-
tionally. Logarithmic averaging is thus fully taken into account which yields a value
that is 1.45 dB lower than that of linear averaging.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 437

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

● To allow a more stable noise display the adjacent (symmetric to the measurement
frequency) points of the trace are averaged.
● For span > 0, the measured values are averaged versus time (after a sweep).

The R&S ESR noise figure can be calculated from the measured power density level. It
is calculated by deducting the set RF attenuation (RF Att) from the displayed noise
level and adding 174 to the result.

Measurement example for Phase Noise Auto Peak Search

The phase noise of a CW signal at 100 MHz with 0 dBm level is to be measured at 800
kHz from the carrier.

1. PRESET
The R&S FSP is set to the default setting.

2. FREQ > "CENTER": 100 MHz

The center frequency is set to 100 MHz.

3. SPAN: 2 MHz
The span is set to 2 MHz.

4. AMPT: 0 dBm
The reference level is set to 0 dBm.

5. MKR FCTN > "MARKER 1"

Marker 1 is switched on and positioned at the maximum of the displayed trace.

6. "PHASE NOISE": 800 kHz

The phase noise measurement is switched on. The delta marker is positioned on
the main marker and the measured phase noise value is displayed in the marker
info field. The sample detector is used and the video bandwidth is set to 3 × RBW.
When the phase noise measurement function is enabled, the entry of the delta
marker frequency is activated. It can be entered directly.

Performing Band Power Measurements

Band power markers allow you to measure the integrated power (similar to ACP mea-
surements) for a defined span (band) around a marker. By default, 5 % of the current
span is used. The span is indicated by colored lines in the diagram. The result can be
displayed either as a power (dBm) or density (dBm/Hz).

Band power markers are only available for standard frequency measurements in Spec-
trum mode (not zero span, I/Q Analyzer etc.).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 438

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Analysis

All markers can be defined as band power markers, each with a different span. When a
band power marker is activated, if no marker is active yet, marker 1 is activated. Other-
wise, the currently active marker is used as a band power marker (all other marker
functions for this marker are deactivated).
If the detector mode for the marker trace is set to "AutoSelect", the RMS detector is
used.

1. In the MKR FUNC menu, press "Band Power".

2. In the "Band Power" menu, press "Span" and enter the width of the band around
the marker for which the power is to be measured.

3. To display the measurement result in dBm/Hz, press "Density". By default, the

result is displayed as a power in dBm.

4. Press "Band Power On" to activate the band power marker.

The measurement results are displayed as usual in the marker table or in the dia-
gram.

5.3.4 Lines

The LINES key is used to configure limit and display lines.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 439

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

To open the Lines menu

Menu and softkey description

● chapter 4.4.3.1, "Softkeys of the Lines Menu", on page 218

Further information
● chapter 4.4.3.2, "Display Lines", on page 223
● chapter 4.4.3.3, "Limit Lines (Frequency/Time Lines)", on page 223

5.4 Advanced Measurement Examples

This chapter explains how to operate the R&S ESR in spectrum mode using typical
measurements as examples. Additional background information on the settings is
given. For more detailed information on all available softkeys and the corresponding
instrument functions, see chapter 5, "Spectrum Measurements", on page 230.
● Test Setup.............................................................................................................440
● Measurement of Harmonics.................................................................................. 441
● Measuring the Spectra of Complex Signals.......................................................... 443
● Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise............................................................ 446
● Noise Measurements............................................................................................ 451
● Measurements on Modulated Signals...................................................................458

5.4.1 Test Setup

All of the following examples are based on the standard settings of the R&S ESR.
These are set with the PRESET key. A complete listing of the standard settings can be
found in chapter "Instrument Functions", section "Initializing the Configuration – PRE-
SET Key".

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 440

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

In the following examples, a signal generator is used as a signal source. The RF output
of the signal generator is connected to the RF input of R&S ESR.
If a 64 MHz signal is required for the test setup, as an alternative to the signal genera-
tor, the internal 64 MHz reference generator can be used:

1. Switch on the internal reference generator.

a) Press the SETUP key.
b) Press the "More" key.
c) Press the "Service" softkey.
d) Press the "Input RF/Cal" softkey, until "Cal" is highlighted.
The internal 64 MHz reference generator is now on. The R&S ESR's RF input
is switched off.

2. Switch on the RF input again for normal operation of the R&S ESR. Two ways are
possible:
a) Press the PRESET key.
or:
b) Press the SETUP key.
c) Press the "Service" softkey.
d) Press the "Input RF/Cal" softkey, until "RF" is highlighted.
The internal signal path of the R&S ESR is switched back to the RF input in order
to resume normal operation.

5.4.2 Measurement of Harmonics

Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S ESR SMU):

Frequency: 128 MHz

Level: - 25 dBm

Procedure on the R&S ESR:

1. Set the R&S ESR to its default state by pressing the PRESET key.

2. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz and the span to 100 kHz.

3. Switch on the marker by pressing the MKR key.

The marker is positioned on the trace maximum.

4. Set the measured signal frequency and the measured level as reference values.
a) Press the MKR FUNC key
b) Press the "Ref Fixed" softkey.
The position of the marker becomes the reference point. The reference point
level is indicated by a horizontal line, the reference point frequency with a verti-
cal line. At the same time, the delta marker 2 is switched on.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 441

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

Fig. 5-22: Fundamental wave and the frequency and level reference point

5. Make the step size for the center frequency equal to the signal frequency
a) Press the FREQ key.
b) Press the "CF-Stepsize" softkey and press the "= Marker" softkey in the sub-
menu.
The step size for the center frequency is now equal to the marker frequency.

6. Set the center frequency to the second harmonic of the signal.

a) Press the FREQ key.
b) Press the UPARROW key once.
The center frequency is set to the second harmonic.

7. Place the delta marker on the second harmonic.

a) Press the MKR -> key.
b) Press the "Peak" softkey.
The delta marker moves to the maximum of the second harmonic. The displayed
level result is relative to the reference point level (= fundamental wave level).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 442

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

Fig. 5-23: Measuring the level difference between the fundamental wave (= reference point level) and
the 2nd harmonic

The other harmonics are measured with steps 5 and 6, the center frequency being
incremented or decremented in steps of 128 MHz using the UPARROW or DNARROW
key.

5.4.3 Measuring the Spectra of Complex Signals

5.4.3.1 Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth

A basic feature of a signal analyzer is being able to separate the spectral components
of a mixture of signals. The resolution at which the individual components can be sepa-
rated is determined by the resolution bandwidth. Selecting a resolution bandwidth that
is too large may make it impossible to distinguish between spectral components, i.e.
they are displayed as a single component.
An RF sinusoidal signal is displayed by means of the passband characteristic of the
resolution filter (RBW) that has been set. Its specified bandwidth is the 3 dB bandwidth
of the filter.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 443

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

Two signals with the same amplitude can be resolved if the resolution bandwidth is
smaller than or equal to the frequency spacing of the signal. If the resolution bandwidth
is equal to the frequency spacing, the spectrum display screen shows a level drop of 3
dB precisely in the center of the two signals. Decreasing the resolution bandwidth
makes the level drop larger, which thus makes the individual signals clearer.
If there are large level differences between signals, the resolution is determined by
selectivity as well as by the resolution bandwidth that has been selected. The measure
of selectivity used for signal analyzers is the ratio of the 60 dB bandwidth to the 3 dB
bandwidth (= shape factor).
For the R&S ESR, the shape factor for bandwidths is < 5, i.e. the 60 dB bandwidth of
the 30 kHz filter is <150 kHz.
The higher spectral resolution with smaller bandwidths is won by longer sweep times
for the same span. The sweep time has to allow the resolution filters to settle during a
sweep at all signal levels and frequencies to be displayed.

5.4.3.2 Intermodulation Measurements

Measurement Example – Measuring the R&S ESR's Intrinsic Intermodulation

Test setup:

Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S ESR SMU):

Level Frequency

Signal generator 1 -4 dBm 999.7 MHz

Signal generator 2 -4 dBm 1000.3 MHz

Setting up the measurement

1. Set the R&S ESR to its default settings by pressing the PRESET key.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 444

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

The R&S ESR is in its default state.

2. Set center frequency to 1 GHz and the frequency span to 3 MHz.

3. Set the reference level to -10 dBm and RF attenuation to 0 dB.

4. Set the resolution bandwidth to 10 kHz.

The noise is reduced, the trace is smoothed further and the intermodulation prod-
ucts can be clearly seen.

5. Set the VBW to "1 kHz".

Measuring intermodulation using the 3rd order intercept (TOI)measurement func-

tion
1. Press the MEAS key and then the "TOI" softkey.
The R&S ESR activates four markers to measure the intermodulation distance.
Two markers are positioned on the useful signals and two on the intermodulation
products. The 3rd order intercept is calculated from the level difference between the
useful signals and the intermodulation products. It is then displayed on the screen:

Fig. 5-24: Result of intrinsic intermodulation measurement on the R&S ESR.

The 3rd order intercept (TOI) is displayed at the top right corner of the grid.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 445

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

2. The level of a signal analyzer's intrinsic intermodulation products depends on the

RF level of the useful signals at the input mixer. When the RF attenuation is added,
the mixer level is reduced and the intermodulation distance is increased. With an
additional RF attenuation of 10 dB, the levels of the intermodulation products are
reduced by 20 dB. The noise level is, however, increased by 10 dB.
Increase the RF attenuation to 20 dB to reduce intermodulation products.
The R&S ESR's intrinsic intermodulation products disappear below the noise floor.

5.4.4 Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise

The minimum signal level a signal analyzer can measure is limited by its intrinsic noise.
Small signals can be swamped by noise and therefore cannot be measured. For sig-
nals that are just above the intrinsic noise, the accuracy of the level measurement is
influenced by the intrinsic noise of the signal analyzer.
The displayed noise level of a signal analyzer depends on its noise figure, the selected
RF attenuation, the selected reference level, the selected resolution and video band-
width and the detector. The effect of the different parameters is explained in the follow-
ing.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 446

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

Impact of the RF attenuation setting

The sensitivity of a signal analyzer is directly influenced by the selected RF attenua-
tion. The highest sensitivity is obtained at a RF attenuation of 0 dB. The attenuation
can be set in 10 dB steps up to 70 dB. Each additional 10 dB step reduces the sensitiv-
ity by 10 dB, i.e. the displayed noise is increased by 10 dB.

Impact of the resolution bandwidth

The sensitivity of a signal analyzer also directly depends on the selected bandwidth.
The highest sensitivity is obtained at the smallest bandwidth (1 Hz). If the bandwidth is
increased, the reduction in sensitivity is proportional to the change in bandwidth. The
R&S ESR has bandwidth settings in 1, 2, 3, 5 sequence. Increasing the bandwidth by a
factor of 3 increases the displayed noise by approx. 5 dB (4.77 dB precisely). If the
bandwidth is increased by a factor of 10, the displayed noise increases by a factor of
10, i.e. 10 dB.

Impact of the video bandwidth

The displayed noise of a signal analyzer is also influenced by the selected video band-
width. If the video bandwidth is considerably smaller than the resolution bandwidth,
noise spikes are suppressed, i.e. the trace becomes much smoother. The level of a
sine wave signal is not influenced by the video bandwidth. A sine wave signal can
therefore be freed from noise by using a video bandwidth that is small compared with
the resolution bandwidth, and thus be measured more accurately.

Impact of the detector

Noise is evaluated differently by the different detectors. The noise display is therefore
influenced by the choice of detector. Sine wave signals are weighted in the same way
by all detectors, i.e. the level display for a sine wave RF signal does not depend on the
selected detector, provided that the signal-to-noise ratio is high enough. The measure-
ment accuracy for signals in the vicinity of intrinsic signal analyzer noise is also influ-
enced by the detector which has been selected. For details on the detectors of the
R&S ESR refer to chapter "Instrument Functions", section "Detector overview" or the
Online Help.

5.4.4.1 Measurement Example – Measuring Level at Low S/N Ratios

The example shows the different factors influencing the S/N ratio.

Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S ESR SMU):

Frequency: 128 MHz

Level: - 90 dBm

Procedure:

1. Set the R&S ESR to its default state by pressing the PRESET key.
The R&S ESR is in its default state.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 447

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

2. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz and the frequency span to 100 MHz:
a) Press the FREQ key and enter "128 MHz".
b) Press the SPAN key and enter "100 MHz".

Fig. 5-25: Sine wave signal with low S/N ratio. The signal is measured with the auto peak
detector and is completely hidden in the intrinsic noise of the R&S ESR.

3. To suppress noise spikes the trace can be averaged.

a) Press the TRACE key.
b) Press the "Trace Wizard" softkey.
The Trace Wizard dialog box opens.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 448

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

c) Select "Average" in the "Trace Mode" drop-down menu of the selected trace.
The traces of consecutive sweeps are averaged. To perform averaging, the
R&S ESR automatically switches on the sample detector. The RF signal, there-
fore, can be more clearly distinguished from noise.

Fig. 5-26: RF sine wave signal with low S/N ratio if the trace is averaged.

4. Instead of trace averaging, a video filter that is narrower than the resolution band-
width can be selected:
a) Press the TRACE key.
b) Press the "Trace Wizard" softkey.
The Trace Wizard dialog box opens.
c) Select "Clear Write" in the "Trace Mode" drop-down menu of the selected
trace.
d) Press the BW key.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 449

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

e) Press the "Video BW Manual" softkey and enter "10 kHz".

The RF signal can be more clearly distinguished from noise.

Fig. 5-27: RF sine wave signal with low S/N ratio if a smaller video bandwidth is selected.

5. By reducing the resolution bandwidth by a factor of 10, the noise is reduced by 10

dB:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 450

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

a) In the "Bandwidth" menu press the "Res BW Manual" softkey and enter "100
kHz".
The displayed noise is reduced by approx. 10 dB. The signal, therefore,
emerges from noise by about 10 dB. Compared to the previous setting, the
video bandwidth has remained the same, i.e. it has increased relative to the
smaller resolution bandwidth. The averaging effect of the video bandwidth is
therefore reduced. The trace will be noisier.

Fig. 5-28: Reference signal at a smaller resolution bandwidth

5.4.5 Noise Measurements

Noise measurements play an important role in signal analysis. Noise e.g. affects the
sensitivity of radio communication systems and their components.
Noise power is specified either as the total power in the transmission channel or as the
power referred to a bandwidth of 1 Hz. The sources of noise are, for example, amplifier
noise or noise generated by oscillators used for the frequency conversion of useful sig-
nals in receivers or transmitters. The noise at the output of an amplifier is determined
by its noise figure and gain.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 451

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

The noise of an oscillator is determined by phase noise near the oscillator frequency
and by thermal noise of the active elements far from the oscillator frequency. Phase
noise can mask weak signals near the oscillator frequency and make them impossible
to detect.

5.4.5.1 Measuring Noise Power Density

To measure noise power referred to a bandwidth of 1 Hz at a certain frequency, the

R&S ESR provides marker function. This marker function calculates the noise power
density from the measured marker level.

Measurement Example – Measuring the Intrinsic Noise Power Density of the

R&S ESR at 1 GHz and Calculating the R&S ESR's Noise Figure

Test setup:

► Connect no signal to the RF input; terminate RF input with 50 Ω.

Procedure:

1. Set the R&S ESR to its default state by pressing the PRESET key.
The R&S ESR is in its default state.

2. Set the center frequency to 1.234 GHz and the span to 1 MHz.
a) Press the FREQ key and enter "1.234 GHz".
b) Press the SPAN key and enter "1 MHz".

3. Switch on the marker and set the marker frequency to 1.234 GHz by pressing the
MKR key and entering "1.234 GHz".

4. Switch on the noise marker function by switching on the "Noise Meas" softkey.
a) Press the MKR FUNC key.
b) Switch the "Noise Meas" softkey to "On"
The R&S ESR displays the noise power at 1.234 GHz in dBm (1Hz).
Note: Since noise is random, a sufficiently long measurement time has to be
selected to obtain stable measurement results. This can be achieved by averaging
the trace or by selecting a very small video bandwidth relative to the resolution
bandwidth.
5. The measurement result is stabilized by averaging the trace.
a) Press the TRACE key.
b) Press the "Trace Wizard" softkey.
The Trace Wizard dialog box opens.
c) Select "Average" in the "Trace Mode" drop-down menu of the selected trace.
The R&S ESR performs sliding averaging over 10 traces from consecutive sweeps.
The measurement result becomes more stable.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 452

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

Conversion to other reference bandwidths

The result of the noise measurement can be referred to other bandwidths by simple
conversion. This is done by adding 10 × log (BW) to the measurement result, BW
being the new reference bandwidth.

Example:
A noise power of -150 dBm (1 Hz) is to be referred to a bandwidth of 1 kHz.
P[1kHz] = -150 + 10 × log (1000) = -150 +30 = -120 dBm (1 kHz)

Calculation method for noise power

If the noise marker is switched on, the R&S ESR automatically activates the sample
detector. The video bandwidth is set to 1/10 of the selected resolution bandwidth
(RBW).
To calculate the noise, the R&S ESR takes an average over 17 adjacent pixels (the
pixel on which the marker is positioned and 8 pixels to the left, 8 pixels to the right of
the marker). The measurement result is stabilized by video filtering and averaging over
17 pixels.
Since both video filtering and averaging over 17 trace points is performed in the log
display mode, the result would be 2.51 dB too low (difference between logarithmic
noise average and noise power). The R&S ESR, therefore, corrects the noise figure by
2.51 dB.
To standardize the measurement result to a bandwidth of 1 Hz, the result is also cor-
rected by -10 × log (RBWnoise), with RBWnoise being the power bandwidth of the
selected resolution filter (RBW).

Detector selection
The noise power density is measured in the default setting with the sample detector
and using averaging. Other detectors that can be used to perform a measurement giv-
ing true results are the average detector or the RMS detector. If the average detector is
used, the linear video voltage is averaged and displayed as a pixel. If the RMS detec-
tor is used, the squared video voltage is averaged and displayed as a pixel. The aver-
aging time depends on the selected sweep time (=SWT/501). An increase in the sweep
time gives a longer averaging time per pixel and thus stabilizes the measurement
result. The R&S ESR automatically corrects the measurement result of the noise
marker display depending on the selected detector (+1.05 dB for the average detector,
0 dΒ for the RMS detector). It is assumed that the video bandwidth is set to at least
three times the resolution bandwidth. While the average or RMS detector is being
switched on, the R&S ESR sets the video bandwidth to a suitable value.
The Pos Peak, Neg Peak, Auto Peak and Quasi Peak detectors are not suitable for
measuring noise power density.

Determining the noise figure

The noise figure of amplifiers or of the R&S ESR alone can be obtained from the noise
power display. Based on the known thermal noise power of a 50 Ω resistor at room

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 453

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

temperature (-174 dBm (1Hz)) and the measured noise power Pnoise the noise figure
(NF) is obtained as follows:
NF = Pnoise + 174 – g,

where g = gain of DUT in dB

Example:
The measured internal noise power of the R&S ESR at an attenuation of 0 dB is found
to be -143 dBm/1 Hz. The noise figure of the R&S ESR is obtained as follows
NF = -143 + 174 = 31 dB

If noise power is measured at the output of an amplifier, for example, the sum of the
internal noise power and the noise power at the output of the DUT is measured. The
noise power of the DUT can be obtained by subtracting the internal noise power from
the total power (subtraction of linear noise powers). By means of the following diagram,
the noise level of the DUT can be estimated from the level difference between the total
and the internal noise level.

Fig. 5-29: Correction factor for measured noise power as a function of the ratio of total power to the
intrinsic noise power of the signal analyzer

5.4.5.2 Measurement of Noise Power within a Transmission Channel

Noise in any bandwidth can be measured with the channel power measurement func-
tions. Thus the noise power in a communication channel can be determined, for exam-
ple. If the noise spectrum within the channel bandwidth is flat, the noise marker from
the previous example can be used to determine the noise power in the channel by con-
sidering the channel bandwidth. If, however, phase noise and noise that normally
increases towards the carrier is dominant in the channel to be measured, or if there are

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 454

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

discrete spurious signals in the channel, the channel power measurement method
must be used to obtain correct measurement results.

Measurement Example – Measuring the Intrinsic Noise of the R&S ESR at 1 GHz
in a 1.23 MHz Channel Bandwidth with the Channel Power Function

Test setup:

► Leave the RF input of the R&S ESR open-circuited or terminate it with 50 Ω.

Procedure:

1. Set the R&S ESR to its default state by pressing the PRESET key.
The R&S ESR is in its default state.

2. Set the center frequency to 1 GHz and the span to 1 MHz.

3. To obtain maximum sensitivity, set RF attenuation on the R&S ESR to 0 dB.

4. Set the "Sweep Type" to "Sweep".

5. Switch on and configure the channel power measurement.

a) Press the MEAS key.
b) Press the "Ch Power/ACLR" softkey.
The R&S ESR activates the channel or adjacent channel power measurement
according to the currently set configuration.
c) Press the "CP/ACLR Settings" softkey.
d) Press the "Channel Settings" softkey.
e) Press the "Channel Bandwidth" softkey and enter 1.23 MHz.
The R&S ESR displays the 1.23 MHz channel as two vertical lines which are
symmetrical to the center frequency.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 455

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

f) Press the "Adjust Settings" softkey.

The settings for the frequency span, the bandwidth (RBW and VBW) and the
detector are automatically set to the optimum values required for the measure-
ment.

Fig. 5-30: Measurement of the R&S ESR's intrinsic noise power in a 1.23 MHz channel band-
width.

6. Stabilize the measurement result by increasing the sweep time.

In the "Ch Power ACLR" menu, press the "Sweep Time" softkey and enter 1 s.
The trace becomes much smoother because of the RMS detector and the channel
power measurement display is much more stable.

5.4.5.3 Measuring Phase Noise

The R&S ESR has an easy-to-use marker function for phase noise measurements.
This marker function indicates the phase noise of an RF oscillator at any carrier in dBc
in a bandwidth of 1 Hz.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 456

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

Measurement Example – Measuring the Phase Noise of a Signal Generator at a

Carrier Offset of 10 kHz

Test setup:

Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S ESR SMU):

Frequency: 100 MHz

Level: 0 dBm

Procedure:

1. Set the R&S ESR to its default state by pressing the PRESET key.
R&S ESR is in its default state.

2. Set the center frequency to 100 MHz and the span to 50 kHz.
a) Press the FREQ key and enter "100 MHz".
b) Press the SPAN key and enter "50 kHz".

3. Set the R&S ESR's reference level to 0 dBm (=signal generator level) by pressing
the AMPT key and enter "0 dBm".

4. Enable phase noise measurement.

a) Press the MKR FUNC key.
b) Press the "Phase Noise" softkey.
The R&S ESR activates phase noise measurement. Marker 1 (=main marker)
and marker 2 (= delta marker) are positioned on the signal maximum. The posi-
tion of the marker is the reference (level and frequency) for the phase noise
measurement. A horizontal line represents the level of the reference point and
a vertical line the frequency of the reference point. The dialog box for the delta
marker is displayed so that the frequency offset at which the phase noise is to
be measured can be entered directly.

5. Set the frequency offset to 10 kHz for determining phase noise by entering "10
kHz".
The R&S ESR displays the phase noise at a frequency offset of 10 kHz. The mag-
nitude of the phase noise in dBc/Hz is displayed in the delta marker output field at
the top right of the screen (Phn2).

6. Stabilize the measurement result by activating trace averaging.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 457

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

Fig. 5-31: Measuring phase noise with the phase-noise marker function

The frequency offset can be varied by moving the marker with the rotary knob or by
entering a new frequency offset as a number.

5.4.6 Measurements on Modulated Signals

5.4.6.1 Measuring Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 458

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

width can be obtained using correction factors. These correction factors are normally
used by the signal analyzer's internal power measurement routines in order to deter-
mine the signal power from IF envelope measurements. These factors apply if and only
if the assumption of a Gaussian amplitude distribution is correct.
Apart from this common method, the R&S ESR also has a true power detector, i.e. an
RMS detector. It correctly displays the power of the test signal within the selected reso-
lution bandwidth irrespective of the amplitude distribution, without additional correction
factors being required. The absolute measurement uncertainty of the FSV is < 1.5 dB
and a relative measurement uncertainty of < 0.5 dB (each with a confidence level of 95
%).
There are two possible methods for measuring channel and adjacent channel power
with a signal analyzer:

1. IBW method (Integration Bandwidth Method)

The signal analyzer measures with a resolution bandwidth that is less than the
channel bandwidth and integrates the level values of the trace versus the channel
bandwidth. This method is described in "Measurement Example – Measuring the
Intrinsic Noise of the R&S ESR at 1 GHz in a 1.23 MHz Channel Bandwidth with
the Channel Power Function" on page 455.

2. Using a channel filter

For a detailed description, refer to the following section.

Measurements using a channel filter

In this case, the signal analyzer makes zero span measurements using an IF filter that
corresponds to the channel bandwidth. The power is measured at the output of the IF
filter. Until now, this method has not been used for signal analyzers, because channel
filters were not available and the resolution bandwidths, optimized for the sweep, did
not have a sufficient selectivity. The method was reserved for special receivers opti-
mized for a particular transmission method.
The R&S ESR has test routines for simple channel and adjacent channel power mea-
surements. These routines give quick results without any complex or tedious setting
procedures.

Measurement Example 1 – ACPR Measurement on an CDMA2000 Signal

Test setup:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 459

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S ESR SMU):

Frequency: 850 MHz

Level: 0 dBm

Modulation: CDMA2000

Procedure:

1. Set the R&S ESR to its default state by pressing the PRESET key.
The R&S ESR is in its default state.

2. Press the FREQ key and enter "850 MHz" as the center frequency.

3. Press the SPAN key and enter "4 MHz".

4. Set the reference level to +10 dBm by pressing the AMPT key and enter "10 dBm".

5. Configure the adjacent channel power for the CDMA2000 standard (more pre-
cisely: CDMA2000 1X).
a) Press the MEAS key.
b) Press the "Ch Power ACLR" softkey.
c) Press the "CP/ACLR Standard" softkey.
d) In the standards list, mark CDMA2000.
The R&S ESR sets the channel configuration according to the 2000 standard with
2 adjacent channels above and 2 below the transmit channel. The spectrum is dis-
played in the upper part of the screen, the numeric values of the results and the
channel configuration in the lower part of the screen. The various channels are rep-
resented by vertical lines on the graph.
The frequency span, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth and detector are
selected automatically to give correct results. To obtain stable results – especially
in the adjacent channels (30 kHz bandwidth) which are narrow in comparison with
the transmission channel bandwidth (1.23 MHz) – the RMS detector is used.

6. Set the optimal reference level and RF attenuation for the applied signal level by
pressing the "Adjust Ref Level" softkey.

7. Activate "Fast ACP" mode to increase the repeatability of results by pressing the
"Fast ACP" softkey (for details see below).
The R&S ESR sets the optimal RF attenuation and the reference level based on
the transmission channel power to obtain the maximum dynamic range. The fig-
ure 5-32 shows the result of the measurement.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 460

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

Fig. 5-32: Adjacent channel power measurement on a CDMA2000 1x signal

Measurement Example 2 – Measuring Adjacent Channel Power of a W-CDMA

Uplink Signal

Test setup:

Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S ESR SMU):

Frequency: 1950 MHz

Level: 4 dBm

Modulation: 3 GPP W-CDMA Reverse Link

Procedure:

1. Set the R&S ESR to its default state by pressing the PRESET key.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 461

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

The R&S ESR is in its default state.

2. Set the center frequency to 1950 MHz by pressing the FREQ key and entering
"1950 MHz".

3. Switch on the ACLR measurement for W-CDMA.

a) Press the MEAS key.
b) Press the "Ch Power ACLR" softkey.
c) Press the "CP/ACLR Standard" softkey.
d) In the standards list, select W-CDMA 3GPP REV.
The R&S ESR sets the channel configuration to the 3GPP W-CDMA standard
for mobiles with two adjacent channels above and below the transmit channel.
The frequency span, the resolution and video bandwidth and the detector are
automatically set to the correct values. The spectrum is displayed in the upper
part of the screen and the channel power, the level ratios of the adjacent chan-
nel powers and the channel configuration in the lower part of the screen. The
individual channels are displayed as vertical lines on the graph.

4. Set the optimum reference level and the RF attenuation for the applied signal level.
a) Press the "Adjust Ref Level" softkey.
The R&S ESR sets the optimum RF attenuation and the reference level for the
power in the transmission channel to obtain the maximum dynamic range. The
following figure shows the result of the measurement.

Fig. 5-33: Measuring the relative adjacent channel power on a W-CDMA uplink signal

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 462

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

5. Set up the adjacent channel power measurement with the fast ACLR mode.
a) Set "Fast ACLR" softkey to "On".
b) Press the "Adjust Ref Level" softkey.
The R&S ESR measures the power of the individual channels with zero span.
A root raised cosine filter with the parameters α = 0.22 and chip rate 3.84 Mcps
(= receive filter for 3GPP W-CDMA) is used as channel filter.

Fig. 5-34: Measuring the adjacent channel power of a W-CDMA signal with the fast ACLR mode

Optimum Level Setting for ACP Measurements on W-CDMA Signals

The dynamic range for ACPR measurements is limited by the thermal noise floor, the
phase noise and the intermodulation (spectral regrowth) of the signal analyzer. The
power values produced by the R&S ESR due to these factors accumulate linearly.
They depend on the applied level at the input mixer. The three factors are shown in the
figure below for the adjacent channel (5 MHz carrier offset).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 463

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

Fig. 5-35: The R&S ESR's dynamic range for adjacent channel power measurements on W-CDMA
uplink signals is a function of the mixer level.

The level of the W-CDMA signal at the input mixer is shown on the horizontal axis, i.e.
the measured signal level minus the selected RF attenuation. The individual compo-
nents which contribute to the power in the adjacent channel and the resulting relative
level (total ACPR) in the adjacent channel are displayed on the vertical axis. The opti-
mum mixer level is -18 dBm. The relative adjacent channel power (ACPR) at an opti-
mum mixer level is -77 dBc. Since, at a given signal level, the mixer level is set in 5 dB
steps with the 5 dB RF attenuator, the optimum 10 dB range spreads from -17 dBm to
-22 dBm. In this range, the obtainable dynamic range with noise correction is 77 dB.
To set the attenuation parameter manually, the following method is recommended:

► Set the RF attenuation so that the mixer level (= measured channel power – RF
attenuation) is between -16 dBm and -22 dBm.

This method is automated with the "Adjust Ref Level" function. Especially in remote
control mode, e.g. in production environments, it is best to correctly set the attenuation
parameters prior to the measurement, as the time required for automatic setting can be
saved.

To measure the R&S ESR's intrinsic dynamic range for W-CDMA adjacent channel
power measurements, a filter which suppresses the adjacent channel power is
required at the output of the transmitter. A SAW filter with a bandwidth of 4 MHz, for
example, can be used.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 464

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

5.4.6.2 Amplitude Distribution Measurements

If modulation types are used that do not have a constant zero span envelope, the
transmitter has to handle peak amplitudes that are greater than the average power.
This includes all modulation types that involve amplitude modulation –QPSK for exam-
ple. CDMA transmission modes in particular may have power peaks that are large
compared to the average power.
For signals of this kind, the transmitter must provide large reserves for the peak power
to prevent signal compression and thus an increase of the bit error rate at the receiver.
The peak power or the crest factor of a signal is therefore an important transmitter
design criterion. The crest factor is defined as the peak power/mean power ratio or,
logarithmically, as the peak level minus the average level of the signal.
To reduce power consumption and cut costs, transmitters are not designed for the larg-
est power that could ever occur, but for a power that has a specified probability of
being exceeded (e.g. 0.01 %).
To measure the amplitude distribution, the R&S ESR has simple measurement func-
tions to determine both the APD = Amplitude Probability Distribution and CCDF =
Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function.
In the APD display mode, the probability of occurrence of a certain level is plotted
against the level.
In the CCDF display mode, the probability that the mean signal power will be exceeded
is shown in percent.

Measurement Example – Measuring the APD and CCDF of White Noise Gener-
ated by the R&S ESR

1. Set the R&S ESR to its default state by pressing the PRESET key.
The R&S ESR is in its default state.

2. Configure the R&S ESR for APD measurement

a) Press the AMPT key and enter "-60 dBm".
The R&S ESR's intrinsic noise is displayed at the top of the screen.
b) Press the MEAS key.
c) Press the "More" softkey.
d) Press the "APD" softkey.
The R&S ESR sets the frequency span to 0 Hz and measures the amplitude
probability distribution (APD). The number of uncorrelated level measurements
used for the measurement is 100000. The mean power and the peak power are
displayed in dBm. The crest factor (peak power – mean power) is output as
well.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 465

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

Fig. 5-36: Amplitude probability distribution of white noise

3. Switch to the CCDF display mode.

a) Press the "UP" key.
b) Press the "CCDF" softkey.
The CCDF display mode is switched on.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 466

R&S®ESR Spectrum Measurements
Advanced Measurement Examples

Fig. 5-37: CCDF of white noise

The CCDF trace indicates the probability that a level will exceed the mean power. The
level above the mean power is plotted along the x-axis of the graph. The origin of the
axis corresponds to the mean power level. The probability that a level will be exceeded
is plotted along the y-axis.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 467

R&S®ESR I/Q Analyzer

6 I/Q Analyzer
The I/Q Analyzer provides functions to capture, visualize and evaluate I/Q data. These
functions include:
● capturing data from the RF input
● displaying I/Q data in various result types, e.g. separate Real/Imag diagrams or as
an I/Q-vector

Menu and softkey description

The "I/Q Analyzer" menu is displayed when you select the "I/Q Analyzer" softkey in the
MODE menu. The same menu is displayed when you press the MEAS or MEAS
CONFIG keys in "I/Q Analyzer" mode. For details see chapter 6.1, "Softkeys and
Parameters of the I/Q Analyzer Menu", on page 469.
The "Amplitude" menu, which is displayed when you select the AMPT key, is described
in see chapter 6.2, "Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode",
on page 474.
The "Input/Output" menu, which is displayed when you select the INPUT/OUTPUT key,
as well as the "Save/Recall" menu (SAVE/RCL key) contain the same functions in I/Q
Analyzer mode as in "Spectrum" mode (see chapter 5.2.9, "Input/Output Configuration
– INPUT/OUTPUT Key", on page 392).
The "Marker" menu is identical to the one in Spectrum mode for display modes "Magni-
tude","Real/Imag" and "Spectrum" (except for "Marker Zoom"), see "Display Config"
on page 470. For the other display modes this menu is not available.
The "Marker To" menu is identical to the one in Spectrum mode. For the "I/Q" display
mode, an additional function is available, see chapter 6.3, "Softkeys of the Marker To
Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode", on page 478.
The "Trace" menu is identical to the one in Spectrum mode, except in "I/Q Vector" dis-
play mode. In this case, only 1 trace is available and no detector can be selected (see
chapter 5.3.1.1, "Softkeys of the Trace Menu", on page 397).
The "Trigger" menu, which is displayed when you select the TRIG key, is described in
see chapter 6.4, "Softkeys of the Trigger Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode", on page 478.
The "Span", "BW", and "Lines" menus are not available in this mode. All other menus
are identical to those described for "Spectrum" mode (see chapter 5.2, "Configuration",
on page 351 and chapter 5.3, "Analysis", on page 396.

Remote Control
Measurements with the I/Q Analyzer can also be performed via remote control.
For more information see chapter 10.5, "Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode",
on page 857.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 468

R&S®ESR I/Q Analyzer
Softkeys and Parameters of the I/Q Analyzer Menu

Further information
● Some general information on working with I/Q data can be found in chapter 6.5,
"Working with I/Q Data", on page 482.

6.1 Softkeys and Parameters of the I/Q Analyzer Menu

This section describes the softkeys and parameters of the "I/Q Analyzer" submenu
which is displayed when you select the "I/Q Analyzer" softkey in the MODE menu. The
same menu is displayed when you press the MEAS or MEAS CONFIG keys in "I/Q
Analyzer" mode.
I/Q Analyzer................................................................................................................ 469
└ Signal Source................................................................................................469
└ Input Path........................................................................................... 469
└ Level............................................................................................................. 470
└ Reference Level..................................................................................470
└ Preamp On/Off....................................................................................470
└ Data Acquisition............................................................................................ 470
└ Sample Rate....................................................................................... 470
└ Filter BW............................................................................................. 470
└ Meas Time.......................................................................................... 470
└ Record Length.................................................................................... 470
└ Display Config...............................................................................................470
└ C/N, C/No......................................................................................................472
└ C/N......................................................................................................473
└ C/No....................................................................................................473
└ Channel Bandwidth ............................................................................473
└ Adjust Settings ...................................................................................473

I/Q Analyzer
Starts the I/Q Analyzer evaluation mode and opens the submenu for the I/Q analyzer,
which allows you to configure and display measurements of I/Q data, e.g. digital base-
band signals.
Remote command:
Starting I/Q Analyzer:
TRACe<n>:IQ[:STATe] on page 868
Selecting evaluation mode:
TRACe<n>:IQ:EVAL on page 868
Selecting the I/Q Analyzer display configuration
CALCulate<n>:FORMat on page 858

Signal Source ← I/Q Analyzer

Opens a dialog box to select the signal source.

Input Path ← Signal Source ← I/Q Analyzer

The input path is always "RF Radio Frequency".

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 469

R&S®ESR I/Q Analyzer
Softkeys and Parameters of the I/Q Analyzer Menu

Level ← I/Q Analyzer

Opens a dialog box to define the level settings.

Reference Level ← Level ← I/Q Analyzer

Specifies the reference level for the I/Q measurement.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue on page 859

Preamp On/Off ← Level ← I/Q Analyzer

Switches the preamplifier on and off.
Remote command:
INPut:GAIN:STATe on page 638

Data Acquisition ← I/Q Analyzer

Opens a dialog box to configure data acquisition in I/Q Analyzer mode.

Sample Rate ← Data Acquisition ← I/Q Analyzer

Defines the I/Q data sample rate of the R&S ESR.
Remote command:
TRACe<n>:IQ:SRATe on page 861

Filter BW ← Data Acquisition ← I/Q Analyzer

Displays the flat, usable bandwidth of the final I/Q data.
Remote command:
TRACe<n>:IQ:BWIDth on page 859

Meas Time ← Data Acquisition ← I/Q Analyzer

Defines the I/Q acquisition time. By default, the measurement time is calculated as the
number of I/Q samples ("Record Length") divided by the sample rate. If you change the
measurement time, the Record Length is automatically changed, as well.
For details on the maximum number of samples see also chapter 6.5, "Working with
I/Q Data", on page 482.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME on page 805

Record Length ← Data Acquisition ← I/Q Analyzer

Defines the number of I/Q samples to record. By default, the number of sweep points is
used. The record length is calculated as the measurement time multiplied by the sam-
ple rate. If you change the record length, the Meas Time is automatically changed, as
well.
Remote command:
TRACe<n>:IQ:RLENgth on page 860
TRACe<n>:IQ:SET on page 860

Display Config ← I/Q Analyzer

Opens a selection list to specify the result display configuration. The following displays
are available:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 470

R&S®ESR I/Q Analyzer
Softkeys and Parameters of the I/Q Analyzer Menu

"Magnitude" Shows the values in time domain

"Spectrum" Displays the frequency spectrum of the captured I/Q samples.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 471

R&S®ESR I/Q Analyzer
Softkeys and Parameters of the I/Q Analyzer Menu

"I/Q-Vector" Displays the captured samples in an I/Q-plot. The samples are con-
nected by a line.

"Real/Imag Displays the I and Q values in separate diagrams.

(I/Q)"

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:FORMat on page 858

C/N, C/No ← I/Q Analyzer

Opens a submenu to configure the carrier/noise ratio measurement. Measurements
without (C/N) and measurements with reference to the bandwidth (C/No) are possible.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 472

R&S®ESR I/Q Analyzer
Softkeys and Parameters of the I/Q Analyzer Menu

Carrier-to-noise measurements are not available in zero span mode.

Note: Carrier-to-noise measurements are also available in the I/Q Analyzer, but only
for Spectrum displays (see "Display Config" on page 470).
For general information on performing carrier-to-noise ratio measurements see chap-
ter 5.1.1.3, "Measuring the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio", on page 258.

C/N ← C/N, C/No ← I/Q Analyzer

C/No ← C/N, C/No ← I/Q Analyzer

Channel Bandwidth ← C/N, C/No ← I/Q Analyzer

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the measurement channel bandwidth for each chan-
nel.
The default setting is 14 kHz.
Note that in the I/Q Analyzer the channel bandwidth does not change the measure-
ment span or sampling rate; it merely defines the range for the carrier-to-noise analy-
sis.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs on page 700

Adjust Settings ← C/N, C/No ← I/Q Analyzer

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 473

R&S®ESR I/Q Analyzer
Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode

Note: in the I/Q Analyzer, this function is not available. The channel bandwidth defines
the range for the carrier-to-noise analysis.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet on page 695

6.2 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode

In I/Q Analyzer mode, the "Amplitude" menu, which is displayed when you select the
AMPT key, contains the following functions.

If the display configuration for the I/Q Analyzer is set to "I/Q Vector" or "Real/Imag (I/
Q)", the Range and Unit functions are not available.

Functions to configure the amplitude described elsewhere:

● "10 dB Min" on page 191
Ref Level..................................................................................................................... 474
Range..........................................................................................................................474
└ Range Log 100 dB........................................................................................ 475
└ Range Log 50 dB.......................................................................................... 475
└ Range Log 10 dB.......................................................................................... 475
└ Range Log 5 dB............................................................................................ 475
└ Range Log 1 dB............................................................................................ 476
└ Range Log Manual........................................................................................476
└ Range Linear %............................................................................................ 476
└ Range Lin. Unit............................................................................................. 476
Unit..............................................................................................................................476
Y-Axis Max.................................................................................................................. 477
Ref Level Offset.......................................................................................................... 477
Ref Level Position....................................................................................................... 477
Grid Abs/Rel ...............................................................................................................477

Range
Opens a submenu to define the display range of the level axis.
● Range Log 100 dB
● Range Log 50 dB
● Range Log 10 dB

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 474

R&S®ESR I/Q Analyzer
Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode

● Range Log 5 dB
● Range Log 1 dB
● Range Log Manual
● Range Linear %
● Range Lin. Unit

Range Log 100 dB ← Range

Range Log 50 dB ← Range

Range Log 10 dB ← Range

Range Log 5 dB ← Range

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 475

R&S®ESR I/Q Analyzer
Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode

Range Log 1 dB ← Range

Range Log Manual ← Range

Range Linear % ← Range

Range Lin. Unit ← Range

Unit
Opens the "Unit" submenu to select the unit for the level axis.
The default setting in spectrum mode is dBm.
If a transducer is switched on, the softkey is not available.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 476

R&S®ESR I/Q Analyzer
Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode

In general, the signal analyzer measures the signal voltage at the RF input. The level
display is calibrated in RMS values of an unmodulated sine wave signal. In the default
state, the level is displayed at a power of 1 mW (= dBm). Via the known input impe-
dance (50 Ω or 75 Ω), conversion to other units is possible. The following units are
available and directly convertible:
● dBm
● dBmV
● dBμV
● dBμA
● dBpW
● Volt
● Ampere
● Watt
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer on page 814

Y-Axis Max
Opens an edit dialog box to specify the maximum value of the y-axis in either direction
(in Volts). Thus, the y-axis scale starts at -<Y-AxisMax> and ends at +<Y-AxisMax>.
This command is only available if the display configuration for the I/Q Analyzer is set to
"I/Q Vector" or "Real/Imag (I/Q)", see "Display Config" on page 470.

Ref Level Offset

Ref Level Position

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 477

R&S®ESR I/Q Analyzer
Softkeys of the Marker To Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode

6.3 Softkeys of the Marker To Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode

In I/Q Analyzer mode, The "Marker To" menu is identical to the one in Spectrum mode
(see "Softkeys of the Marker To Menu" on page 421). For the "Real/Imag (I/Q)" display
mode, however, an additional function is available.

Search Settings
Opens a dialog box to define which data is used for marker search functions.
Note: The search settings apply to all markers, not only the currently selected one.
"Search Real" Marker search functions are performed on the real trace of the I/Q
measurement.
"Search Imag" Marker search functions are performed on the imaginary trace of the
I/Q measurement.
"Search Mag- Marker search functions are performed on the magnitude of the I and
nitude" Q data.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SEARch on page 858

6.4 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode

In I/Q Analyzer mode, the "Trigger" menu, which is displayed when you select the
TRIG key, contains the following functions:
Trg/Gate Source..........................................................................................................478
└ Free Run....................................................................................................... 479
└ External.........................................................................................................479
└ Video.............................................................................................................479
└ RF Power...................................................................................................... 479
└ IF Power/BB Power.......................................................................................480
└ Time.............................................................................................................. 480
Trigger Level............................................................................................................... 480
Trigger Polarity............................................................................................................481
Trigger Offset.............................................................................................................. 481
Repetition Interval....................................................................................................... 481
Trigger Hysteresis....................................................................................................... 482
Trigger Holdoff............................................................................................................ 482

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 478

R&S®ESR I/Q Analyzer
Softkeys of the Trigger Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode

Free Run ← Trg/Gate Source

The start of a sweep is not triggered. Once a measurement is completed, another is
started immediately.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR IMM, see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 809

External ← Trg/Gate Source

Video ← Trg/Gate Source

RF Power ← Trg/Gate Source

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 479

R&S®ESR I/Q Analyzer
Softkeys of the Trigger Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode

IF Power/BB Power ← Trg/Gate Source

Time ← Trg/Gate Source

Opens an edit dialog box to define a repetition interval in which the measurement is
triggered. The shortest interval is 2 ms.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR TIMETRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 809

Trigger Level
Defines the trigger level as a numeric value.
In the trigger mode "Time", this softkey is not available.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower on page 808
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo on page 808

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 480

R&S®ESR I/Q Analyzer
Softkeys of the Trigger Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode

Trigger Polarity
Sets the polarity of the trigger source.
The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal. The default set-
ting is "Pos". The setting applies to all modes with the exception of the "Free Run" and
"Time" mode.
"Pos" Level triggering: the sweep is stopped by the logic "0" signal and
restarted by the logical "1" signal after the gate delay time has
elapsed.
"Neg" Edge triggering: the sweep is continued on a "0" to "1" transition for
the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe on page 809
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity on page 812

Trigger Offset
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the
start of the sweep.

offset > 0: Start of the sweep is delayed

offset < 0: Sweep starts earlier (pre-trigger)

Only possible for span = 0 (e.g. I/Q Analyzer mode) and gated trigger
switched off
Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time:
pretriggermax = sweep time

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 481

R&S®ESR I/Q Analyzer
Working with I/Q Data

6.5 Working with I/Q Data

This section describes I/Q data processing of RF input, e.g. in the I/Q Analyzer.
The block diagram in figure 6-1 shows the analyzer hardware for active RF input from
the IF section to the processor.
The A/D converter samples the IF signal at a rate of 128 MHz. The digital signal is
down-converted to the complex baseband, lowpass-filtered, and the sample rate is
reduced. The continuously adjustable sample rates are realized using an optimal deci-
mation filter and subsequent resampling on the set sample rate.
The I/Q data is written to a single memory, the data acquisition is hardware-triggered.

Fig. 6-1: Block diagram illustrating the R&S ESR signal processing

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 482

R&S®ESR I/Q Analyzer
Working with I/Q Data

Maximum number of samples

The maximum number of samples for RF input is 200 MS.

6.5.1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth (RF Input)

Definitions
● Input sample rate (ISR): the sample rate of the useful data provided by the con-
nected instrument to the R&S ESR input
● (User, Output) Sample rate (SR): the sample rate that is defined by the user (e.g.
in the "Data Aquisition" dialog box in the "I/Q Analyzer" application) and which is
used as the basis for analysis or output
● Usable I/Q (Analysis) bandwidth: the bandwidth range in which the signal
remains undistorted in regard to amplitude characteristic and group delay; this
range can be used for accurate analysis by the R&S ESR
For the I/Q data acquisition, digital decimation filters are used internally. The passband
of these digital filters determines the maximum usable I/Q bandwidth. In consequence,
signals within the usable I/Q bandwidth (passband) remain unchanged, while signals
outside the usable I/Q bandwidth (passband) are suppressed. Usually, the suppressed
signals are noise, artifacts, and the second IF side band. If frequencies of interest to
you are also suppressed, you should try to increase the output sample rate, since this
increases the maximum usable I/Q bandwidth.

Relationship between sample rate and usable bandwidth

The diagram figure 6-2 shows the maximum usable I/Q bandwidths depending on the
user sample rates.
As a rule, the usable bandwidth is proportional to the output sample. Yet, when the I/Q
bandwidth reaches the bandwidth of the analog IF filter (at very high sample rates), the
curve breaks.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 483

R&S®ESR I/Q Analyzer
Working with I/Q Data

Fig. 6-2: Relation between maximum usable bandwidth and sample rate (RF input)

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 484

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Softkeys of the Tracking Generator Menu

7 Tracking Generator
Equipped with option R&S FSV-B9, an internal tracking generator emits a signal at the
exact input frequency of the analyzer during operation. The generated signal is sent to
the DUT, thus allowing the analyzer to control the input frequency of the device
directly.
When you equip the R&S ESR with option R&S FSV-B10, you are also able to control
various commercially available generators as a tracking generator.
Tracking generator control is available in "Spectrum" and "I/Q Analyzer" mode for fre-
quency, time or I/Q measurements. Special measurement functions are not available
with tracking generator control. The corresponding softkeys in the "Measurement"
menu are deactivated in this case.

Menu and softkey description

● chapter 7.1, "Softkeys of the Tracking Generator Menu", on page 485

Further information

7.1 Softkeys of the Tracking Generator Menu

The "Tracking Generator" menu is displayed when you press the INPUT/OUPUT key
and then "Tracking Generator".
This softkey is only available if the R&S FSV option Tracking Generator (B9) or Exter-
nal Tracking Generator (B10) or both are installed. The following table shows all soft-
keys available in the "Tracking Generator" menu.

As long as a tracking generator is active, the HOME key also displays the "Tracking
Generator" menu.

Source RF Internal (On/ Off)....................................................................................... 486

Source Power..............................................................................................................486
Source Cal.................................................................................................................. 486
└ Calibrate Transmission................................................................................. 486
└ Calibrate Reflection Short............................................................................. 486
└ Calibrate Reflection Open.............................................................................487
└ Normalize......................................................................................................487
└ Reference Value Position............................................................................. 487
└ Reference Value........................................................................................... 487
└ Recall............................................................................................................ 487
└ Save As Trd Factor....................................................................................... 488
Modulation...................................................................................................................488
└ External AM.................................................................................................. 488
└ External FM...................................................................................................488
└ External I/Q................................................................................................... 488

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 485

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Softkeys of the Tracking Generator Menu

└ Modulation OFF............................................................................................ 489

Power Sweep.............................................................................................................. 489
└ Power Sweep (On /Off).................................................................................489
└ Power Sweep Start....................................................................................... 489
└ Power Sweep Stop....................................................................................... 489
Source Config............................................................................................................. 490

Source RF Internal (On/ Off)

Switches the selected tracking generator on or off. Default setting is off. The currently
selected generator is indicated on the softkey.
Remote command:
OUTPut[:STATe] on page 871
Activates the internal tracking generator (B9).
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>[:STATe] on page 882
Activates the external tracking generator 1 (B10).

Source Power
Opens an edit dialog box to quickly change the output power of the currently selected
tracking generator, alternatively to the "Tracking Generator configuration" dialog box
(see "Source Config" on page 490 softkey).
The default output power is -20 dBm. The range is specified in the data sheet.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] on page 875

Source Cal
Opens a submenu to configure calibration for transmission and reflection measurement
for tracking generators. For details on the test setups see chapter 7.4.2, "Calibrating for
transmission and reflection measurement", on page 502.

Calibrate Transmission ← Source Cal

Starts a sweep that records a reference trace. This trace is used to calculate the differ-
ence for the normalized values.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:METHod on page 872
Selects the transmission method and starts the sweep to record a reference trace.

Calibrate Reflection Short ← Source Cal

Starts a sweep as a reference trace for short-circuit calibration.
If both calibrations (open circuit, short circuit) are carried out, the calibration curve is
calculated by averaging the two measurements and stored in the memory. The order of
the two calibration measurements is irrelevant.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:METHod on page 872
Selects the reflection method.
[SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] on page 871
Starts the sweep for short-circuit calibration.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 486

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Softkeys of the Tracking Generator Menu

Calibrate Reflection Open ← Source Cal

Starts a sweep as a reference trace for the open-circuit calibration.
If both calibrations (open circuit, short circuit) are carried out, the calibration curve is
calculated by averaging the two measurements and stored in the memory. The order of
the two calibration measurements is irrelevant.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:METHod on page 872
Selects the reflection method.
[SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] on page 871
Starts the sweep for open-circuit calibration.

Normalize ← Source Cal

Switches the normalization on or off. The softkey is only available if the memory con-
tains a reference trace. For details on normalization see chapter 7.4.5, "Normalization",
on page 503.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection[:STATe] on page 872

Reference Value Position ← Source Cal

Switches the reference line on or off. The reference line marks the reference position
at which the normalization result (calculated difference to a reference trace) is dis-
played. For details on the reference line see chapter 7.4.5, "Normalization",
on page 503.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition on page 816

Reference Value ← Source Cal

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a position value that shifts the reference line verti-
cally. By default, the reference line corresponds to a difference of 0 dB between the
currently measured trace and the reference trace.
If a 10 dB attenuation is inserted into the signal path between DUT and R&S ESR
input, for example after a source calibration, the measurement trace is moved down by
10 dB. Entering a reference value of -10 dB will also shift the reference line down by 10
dB and place the measurement trace on the reference line. The deviation from the
nominal power level can be displayed with higher resolution (e.g. 1 dB/div). The power
is still displayed in absolute values.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue on page 859

Recall ← Source Cal

Restores the settings that were used during source calibration. This can be useful if
instrument settings were changed after calibration (e.g. center frequency, frequency
deviation, reference level, etc).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:RECall on page 872

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 487

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Softkeys of the Tracking Generator Menu

Save As Trd Factor ← Source Cal

Uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor with up to 625
points. The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with
the specified name and the suffix.trd under "c:\r_s\instr\trd". The frequency
points are allocated in equidistant steps between start and stop frequency. The gener-
ated transducer factor can be further adapted using the "Transducer" softkey in the
"SETUP" menu.
The "Save As Trd Factor" softkey is only available if normalization is switched on.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:GENerator on page 877

Modulation
Opens a submenu to define modulation settings. This submenu contains the following
commands:
● "External AM" on page 488
● "External FM" on page 488
● "External I/Q" on page 488
● "Modulation OFF" on page 489

External AM ← Modulation
Activates an AM modulation of the tracking generator output signal.
The modulation signal is applied to the TG IN I/AM connector. An input voltage of 1 V
corresponds to 100 % amplitude modulation.
Switching on an external AM disables the active I/Q modulation.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:AM:STATe on page 873

External FM ← Modulation
Activates the FM modulation of the tracking generator output signal. The modulation
signal is applied to the TG IN Q/FM connector. Switching on an external FM disables
the active I/Q modulation.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:FM:STATe on page 874
SOURce<n>:FM:DEViation on page 874

External I/Q ← Modulation

Activates the external I/Q modulation of the tracking generator output signal. The sig-
nals for modulation are applied to the two input connectors TG IN I and TG IN Q at the
rear panel of the unit. The input voltage range is ±1 V into 50 Ω. Switching on an exter-
nal I/Q modulation disables the active AM or FM modulation.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:DM:STATe on page 873

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 488

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Softkeys of the Tracking Generator Menu

Modulation OFF ← Modulation

Deactivates external modulation of the tracking generator output signal.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:AM:STATe on page 873
SOURce<n>:DM:STATe on page 873
SOURce<n>:FM:STATe on page 874

Power Sweep
Opens a submenu to define power sweep settings.
This softkey is only available if the (internal) Tracking Generator option (B9) is instal-
led.
This submenu contains the following commands:
● "Power Sweep (On /Off)" on page 489
● "Power Sweep Start" on page 489
● "Power Sweep Stop" on page 489

Power Sweep (On /Off) ← Power Sweep

Activates or deactivates the power sweep. If the power sweep is on, the analyzer is set
to zero span mode (span = 0Hz). During the sweep time of the zero span, the power at
the internal tracking generator is changed linearly from start power to stop power. The
start and stop power for the power sweep are displayed in the diagram header ("INT
TG <start power>… <stop power>", see also chapter 7.5, "Displayed Information and
Errors", on page 509.
The start power can be set between -30 dBm and +0 dBm.
The stop value can also be be set between -30 dBm and +0 dBm and may be smaller
than the start value.
The difference between the start and stop values may not exceed 10 dB.
This softkey is only available if the (internal) Tracking Generator option (B9) is instal-
led.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:POWer:MODE on page 876

Power Sweep Start ← Power Sweep

Defines the start power of the power sweep.
The start power can be set between -30 dBm and +0 dBm.
The difference between the start and stop values may not exceed 10 dB.
This softkey is only available if the (internal) Tracking Generator option (B9) is instal-
led.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:POWer:STARt on page 876

Power Sweep Stop ← Power Sweep

Defines the stop power of the power sweep.
The stop power can be set between -30 dBm and +0 dBm.
The difference between the start and stop values may not exceed 10 dB.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 489

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Connecting External Tracking Generators

This softkey is only available if the (internal) Tracking Generator option (B9) is instal-
led.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:POWer:STOP on page 877

Source Config
Opens the "Tracking Generator Configuration" dialog, see chapter 7.3, "Configuring
Tracking Generators", on page 493.

7.2 Connecting External Tracking Generators

The external tracking generator is controlled either via a LAN connection or via the –
optional – second GPIB interface of the R&S ESR (= IEC2, supplied with the option).
Using GPIB, with some Rohde & Schwarz generators, additionally the TTL synchroni-
zation interface included in the AUX interface of the R&S ESR can be used.

Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than pure
GPIB control, because the frequency stepping of the R&S ESR is directly coupled with
the frequency stepping of the generator.

Therefore, the frequency sweep differs according to the capabilities of the employed
generator:
● For generators without a TTL interface, the generator frequency is set for each fre-
quency point via GPIB first, then the setting procedure has to be completed before
recording of measured values is possible.
● For generators with a TTL interface, a list of the frequencies to be set is entered
into the generator before the beginning of the first sweep. Then the sweep is star-
ted and the next frequency point is selected using the TTL handshake line TRIG-
GER. Recording measured values is only enabled when the generator signals the
end of the setting procedure via the BLANK signal. This method is considerably
faster than pure GPIB control.
The "Tracking Generator Configuration" dialog provides a list of the supported genera-
tors with the frequency and level range, as well as the capabilities used. The interface
settings are defined using the "Source Config" on page 490 softkey. For details see
chapter 7.3.2, "External Tracking Generator", on page 496.
In order to use the functions of the external tracking generator, an appropriate genera-
tor must be connected and configured correctly. If no external generator is selected, if
the GPIB or TCP/IP address is not correct, or the generator is not ready for operation,
an error message is displayed ("Ext. Generator GPIB Handshake Error!" or "Ext. Gen-
erator TCPIP Handshake Error!".
figure 7-1 illustrates the TTL connection using an SMU generator, for example.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 490

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Connecting External Tracking Generators

Fig. 7-1: TTL connection for an SMU generator

In order to enhance measurement accuracy, a common reference frequency should be

used for both the R&S ESR and the generator. If no independent 10 MHz reference
frequency is available, it is recommended that you connect the reference output of the
generator with the reference input of the R&S ESR and that you enable usage of the
external reference on the R&S ESR via "SETUP" >"Reference EXT".

7.2.1 Overview of Generators Supported by the R&S ESR

The R&S SMA and R&S SMU require the following firmware versions:
R&S SMA: V2.10.x or higher
R&S SMU: V1.10 or higher

Generator Interface Type Generator Min Generator Max Generator Min Generator Max
Freq Freq Power Power
dBm dBm

SMA01A TTL 9 kHz 3.0 GHz -145 +30

SMBV100A3 TTL 9 kHz 3.2 GHz -145 +30

SMBV100A6 TTL 9 kHz 6.0 GHz -145 +30

SMC100A1 TTL 9 kHz 1.1 GHz -120 +30

SMC100A3 TTL 9 kHz 3.2 GHz -145 +30

SME02 TTL 5 kHz 1.5 GHz -144 +16

SME03 TTL 5 kHz 3.0 GHz -144 +16

SME06 TTL 5 kHz 6.0 GHz -144 +16

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 491

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Connecting External Tracking Generators

Generator Interface Type Generator Min Generator Max Generator Min Generator Max
Freq Freq Power Power
dBm dBm

SMG GPIB 100 kHz 1.0 GHz -137 +13

SMGL GPIB 9 kHz 1.0 GHz -118 +30

SMGU GPIB 100 kHz 2.16 GHz -140 +13

SMH GPIB 100 kHz 2.0 GHz -140 +13

SMHU GPIB 100 kHz 4.32 GHz -140 +13

SMIQ02B TTL 300 kHz 2.2 GHz -144 +13

SMIQ02E GPIB 300 kHz 2.2 GHz -144 +13

SMIQ03B TTL 300 kHz 3.3 GHz -144 +13

SMIQ03E GPIB 300 kHz 3.3 GHz -144 +13

SMIQ04B TTL 300 kHz 4.4 GHz -144 +10

SMIQ06B TTL 300 kHz 6.4 GHz -144 +10

SML01 GPIB 9 kHz 1.1 GHz -140 +13

SML02 GPIB 9 kHz 2.2 GHz -140 +13

SML03 GPIB 9 kHz 3.3 GHz -140 +13

SMR20 TTL 1 GHz 20 GHz -130 2) +11 2)

SMR20B111) TTL 10 MHz 20 GHz -130 2) +13 2)

SMR27 TTL 1 GHz 27 GHz -130 2) +11 2)

SMR27B11 1) TTL 10 MHz 27 GHz -130 2) +12 2)

SMR30 TTL 1 GHz 30 GHz -130 2) +11 2)

SMR30B11 1) TTL 10 MHz 30 GHz -130 2) +12 2)

SMR40 TTL 1 GHz 40 GHz -130 2) +9 2)

SMR40B11 1) TTL 10 MHz 40 GHz -130 2) +12 2)

SMR50 TTL 1 GHz 50 GHz -130 2) +9 2)

SMR50B11 1) TTL 10 MHz 50 GHz -130 2) +12 2)

SMR60 TTL 1 GHz 60 GHz -130 2) +9 2)

SMR60B11 1) TTL 10 MHz 60 GHz -130 2) +12 2)

SMP02 TTL 10 MHz 20 GHz -130 3) +17 3)

SMP03 TTL 10 MHz 27 GHz -130 3) +13 3)

SMP04 TTL 10 MHz 40 GHz -130 3) +12 3)

SMP22 TTL 10 MHz 20 GHz -130 3) +20 3)

SMT02 GPIB 5.0 kHz 1.5 GHz -144 +13

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 492

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Configuring Tracking Generators

Generator Interface Type Generator Min Generator Max Generator Min Generator Max
Freq Freq Power Power
dBm dBm

SMT03 GPIB 5.0 kHz 3.0 GHz -144 +13

SMT06 GPIB 5.0 kHz 6.0 GHz -144 +13

SMV03 GPIB 9 kHz 3.3 GHz -140 +13

SMU200A TTL 100 kHz 2.2 GHz -145 +13

SMU02B31 TTL 100 kHz 2.2 GHz -145 +19

SMU03 TTL 100 kHz 3 GHz -145 +13

SMU03B31 TTL 100 kHz 3 GHz -145 +19

SMU04 TTL 100 kHz 4 GHz -145 +13

SMU04B31 TTL 100 kHz 4 GHz -145 +19

SMU06 TTL 100 kHz 6 GHz -145 +13

SMU06B31 TTL 100 kHz 6 GHz -145 +19

SMX GPIB 100 kHz 1.0 GHz -137 +13

SMY01 GPIB 9 kHz 1.04 GHz -140 +13

SMY02 GPIB 9 kHz 2.08 GHz -140 +13

HP8340A GPIB 10 MHz 26.5 GHz -110 10

HP8648 GPIB 9 kHz 4 GHz -136 10

HP ESG-A Ser- GPIB 250 kHz 4 GHz -136 20

ies 1000A,
2000A, 3000A,
4000A

HP ESG-D GPIB 250 kHz 3 GHz -136 +10

SERIES
E4432B

1) Requires the option SMR-B11 to be fitted.

2) Maximum/minimum power depends on presence of Option SMR-B15/-B17 and set
frequency range. For more details see SMR data sheet.
3) Maximum/minimum power depends on presence of Option SMP-B15/-B17 and set
frequency range. For more details see SMP data sheet.

7.3 Configuring Tracking Generators

The "Tracking Generator Configuration" dialog box is opened via the "Source Config"
softkey in the "Tracking Generator" menu.
This dialox box allows you to define measurement settings, as well as connection set-
tings for the optional external generators (option B10 only). Depending on which

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 493

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Configuring Tracking Generators

options are installed, the corresponding tabs for internal or external generators, or
both, are displayed.
● chapter 7.3.1, "Internal Tracking Generator", on page 494
● chapter 7.3.2, "External Tracking Generator", on page 496

7.3.1 Internal Tracking Generator

The internal tracking generator is configured in the "Internal" tab of the "tracking Gen-
erator Configuration" dialog box.
In the top half of the dialog box, the measurement configurations can be defined. In the
lower half of the dialog box, the capabilities of the internal tracking generator are dis-
played for reference only.

The configuration dialog box contains the following fields:

Select
Selects the internal tracking generator as the current tracking generator source. "Inter-
nal" is displayed as the source on the "Source RF" softkey. All tracking generator func-
tions are performed with the currently selected source.
Note: Note that the generator is not automatically activated when it is selected. To acti-
vate the currently selected generator, click the "Source RF On" softkey.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 494

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Configuring Tracking Generators

Source Power
The tracking generator output power. The default output power is -20 dBm. The range
is specified in the data sheet.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] on page 875

Power Offset
Constant level offset for the tracking generator. Values from -200 dB to +200 dB in 1
dB steps are allowed. The default setting is 0 dB. Offsets are indicated by the
enhancement label "LVL" in the diagram header (see also chapter 7.5, "Displayed
Information and Errors", on page 509).
With this offset, attenuators or amplifiers at the output connector of the tracking gener-
ator can be taken into account for the displayed output power values on screen or dur-
ing data entry, for example. Positive offsets apply to an amplifier and negative offsets
to an attenuator subsequent to the tracking generator.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet on page 875

Frequency Offset
Constant frequency offset between the output signal of the tracking generator and the
input frequency of the R&S ESR. Possible offsets are in a range of ±1 GHz in 0.1 Hz
steps.
The default setting is 0 Hz. Offsets <> 0 Hz are marked with the enhancement label
"FRQ" in the diagram header (see also chapter 7.5, "Displayed Information and
Errors", on page 509).
If a positive frequency offset is entered, the tracking generator generates an output sig-
nal above the receive frequency of the R&S ESR. In case of a negative frequency off-
set it generates a signal below the receive frequency of the R&S ESR. The output fre-
quency of the tracking generator is calculated as follows:
Tracking generator frequency = receive frequency + frequency offset.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:FREQuency:OFFSet on page 875

Result Frequency Start

For reference only: The start frequency for the generator, calculated from the config-
ured generator frequency and the start value defined for the analyzer.

Result Frequency Stop

For reference only: The stop frequency for the generator, calculated from the config-
ured generator frequency and the stop value defined for the analyzer.

Frequency Min.
For reference only: Lower frequency limit for the generator.

Frequency Max.
For reference only: Upper frequency limit for the generator.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 495

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Configuring Tracking Generators

Power Min.
For reference only: Lower power limit for the generator.

Power Max.
For reference only: Upper power limit for the generator.

7.3.2 External Tracking Generator

The external tracking generators are configured in the "External" tabs of the "Tracking
Generator Configuration" dialog box.
In the top section of the dialog box, the measurement configurations can be defined. In
the middle section, interface settings for the connection to the external generator are
defined. In the lower section of the dialog box, the capabilities of the external tracking
generator are displayed for reference only.

The configuration dialog box contains the following fields:

Select
Selects the specified external tracking generator as the current tracking generator
source. "External 1" or "External 2" is displayed as the source on the "Source RF" soft-
key. All tracking generator functions are performed with the currently selected source.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 496

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Configuring Tracking Generators

Note: Note that the generator is not automatically activated when it is selected. To acti-
vate the currently selected generator, click the "Source RF On" softkey.

Source Frequency Coupling

Enables or disables frequency coupling between the analyzer and the generator.
"Auto" Default setting: the frequencies are coupled (see "Generator Fre-
quency (Numerator/Denominator/Offset)" on page 497).
"Manual" The generator uses a fixed frequency, defined in the (Fixed) Genera-
tor Frequency field which is displayed when you select "Manual" cou-
pling.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency:COUPling[:STATe]
on page 878

(Fixed) Generator Frequency

Defines the fixed frequency to be used by the generator.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency on page 878

Source Power
The output power of the external tracking generator. The default output power is -20
dBm. The range is specified in the data sheet.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:POWer[:LEVel] on page 881

Generator Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/Offset)

The frequency used by the generator may differ from the input from the analyzer. The
RF frequency may be multiplied by a specified factor, or a frequency offset can be
added, or both.
Note: The input for the generator frequency is not validated, i.e. you can enter any val-
ues. However, if the allowed frequency ranges of the generator are exceeded, an error
message is displayed on the analyzer screen and the values for Start and Stop are
corrected to comply with the range limits.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 497

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Configuring Tracking Generators

The value range for the offset depends on the selected generator. The default setting
is 0 Hz. Offsets <> 0 Hz are marked with the enhancement label "FRQ" in the diagram
header (see also chapter 7.5, "Displayed Information and Errors", on page 509).
If a positive frequency offset is entered, the tracking generator generates an output sig-
nal above the receive frequency of the analyzer. For a negative frequency offset it gen-
erates a signal below the receive frequency of the analyzer.
The output frequency of the generator is calculated as follows:

Fig. 7-2: Output frequency of the generator

Note: Make sure that the frequencies resulting from the start and stop frequency of the
R&S ESR do not exceed the allowed generator range:
● If the start frequency lies below F MIN, the generator is only switched on when F
MIN is reached.
● If the stop frequency lies above F MAX, the generator is switched off. When the
generator is subsequently switched on using the "Source RF Internal (On/ Off)"
on page 486 softkey, the stop frequency is limited to F MAX.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 498

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Configuring Tracking Generators

● If the stop frequency lies below F MIN, the generator is switched off and an error
message is displayed.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:NUMerator
on page 879
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:DENominator
on page 879
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency:OFFSet<m> on page 880
Reverse sweep
The "Offset" setting can be used to sweep in the reverse direction. You can do this by
setting a "negative" offset in the tracking generator configuration.
Example for reverse sweep:
FAnalyzerStart= 100 MHz
FAnalyzerStop = 200 MHz
FOffset = -300 MHz
Numerator = Denominator = 1
→FGeneratorStart = 200 MHz
→FGeneratorStop = 100 MHz
If the offset is adjusted so that the sweep of the generator crosses the minimum gener-
ator frequency, a message is displayed in the status bar ("Reverse Sweep via min. Ext.
Generator Frequency!").
Example for reverse sweep via minimum frequency:
FAnalyzerStart= 100 MHz
FAnalyzerStop = 200 MHz
FOffset = -150 MHz
Fmin = 20 MHz
Numerator = Denominator = 1
→FGeneratorStart = 50 MHz
→FGeneratorStop = 50 MHz via Fmin

Result Frequency Start

For reference only: The start frequency for the generator, calculated from the config-
ured generator frequency and the start value defined for the analyzer.

Result Frequency Stop

For reference only: The stop frequency for the generator, calculated from the config-
ured generator frequency and the stop value defined for the analyzer.

Type
Generator type. See also chapter 7.2.1, "Overview of Generators Supported by the
R&S ESR", on page 491.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:TYPE on page 884

Interface
Type of interface connection used. The following interfaces are currently supported:
● TCP/IP
● GPIB

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 499

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Configuring Tracking Generators

For details on interfaces see the "Interfaces and Protocols" section in the R&S ESR
Getting Started.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:INTerface
on page 883

TTL Synchronization
If available for the specified generator type, this option activates TTL synchronization
for GPIB connections.
See also chapter 7.2, "Connecting External Tracking Generators", on page 490.
For Noise Figure measurements (K30) this setting currently has no effect.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:LINK on page 884

Address
For LAN connections: TCP/IP address.
For GPIB connections: GPIB address.
For more information on configuring interfaces see the "Interfaces and Protocols" sec-
tion in the R&S ESR Getting Started.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:LINK on page 884

Reference
Selects internal or external reference for the generator (default: internal).
Note: Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than
pure GPIB control, because the frequency stepping of the R&S ESR is directly coupled
with the frequency stepping of the generator.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:ROSCillator[:SOURce] on page 881

Edit Generator Setup File

Displays the setup file for the currently selected generator (see Type field) in read-only
mode in an editor.
Adding new generator types
Although the existing setup files are displayed in read-only mode in the editor, they can
be saved under a different name (using "File > SaveAs"). To add a new generator type
to the selection list in the Type field, edit the setup file for an existing generator as
required, then save the file with the extension ".gen" (select "Save as type: All Files
(*.*)"). After you close the configuration dialog and re-open it, a new generator is avail-
able in the Type list with the name of the saved setup file.
Be careful, however, to adhere to the required syntax and commands. Errors will only
be detected and displayed when you try to use the new generator (see also chap-
ter 7.5, "Displayed Information and Errors", on page 509).

Frequency Min.
For reference only: Lower frequency limit for the generator.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 500

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Tracking Generator Functions

Frequency Max.
For reference only: Upper frequency limit for the generator.

Power Min.
For reference only: Lower power limit for the generator.

Power Max.
For reference only: Upper power limit for the generator.

7.4 Tracking Generator Functions

The following functions are available if the optional Tracking Generator or the optional
External Tracking Generator is installed.
● Calibration mechanism..........................................................................................501
● Calibrating for transmission and reflection measurement..................................... 502
● Transmission measurement..................................................................................503
● Reflection measurement....................................................................................... 503
● Normalization........................................................................................................ 503
● Modulation (internal Tracking Generator only)......................................................507

7.4.1 Calibration mechanism

Calibration means calculating the difference between the currently measured power
and a reference curve, independent of the selected type of measurement (transmis-
sion/reflection). The hardware settings used for measuring the reference curve are
included in the reference dataset.
Even with normalization switched on, the instrument settings can be changed in a wide
area without stopping the normalization. This reduces the necessity to carry out a new
normalization to a minimum.
Therefore, the reference dataset (trace with n measured values, where n is the number
of Sweep Points) is stored internally as a table of n points (frequency/level).
Differences in level settings between the reference curve and the current instrument
settings are taken into account automatically. If the span is reduced, a linear interpola-
tion of the intermediate values is applied. If the span increases, the values at the left or
right border of the reference dataset are extrapolated to the current start or stop fre-
quency, i.e. the reference dataset is extended by constant values.
An enhancement label is used to mark the different levels of measurement accuracy.
This enhancement label is displayed at the right diagram border if normalization is
switched on and a deviation from the reference setting occurs. Three accuracy levels
are defined:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 501

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Tracking Generator Functions

Table 7-1: Measurement accuracy levels

Accuracy Enhancement label Reason/Limitation

high NOR No difference between reference setting and measurement

medium APX (approximation) Change of the following settings:

● coupling (RBW, VBW, SWT)
● reference level, RF attenuation
● start or stop frequency
● output level of tracking generator
● detector (max. peak, min. peak, sample, etc.)
● change of frequency:
max. 691 points within the set sweep limits (corresponds to a
doubling of the span)

– Aborted normalization More than 500 extrapolated points within the current sweep
limits (in case of span doubling)

At a reference level of -10 dBm and at a tracking generator output level of the same
value, the R&S ESR operates without overrange reserve. That means the R&S ESR is
in danger of being overloaded if a signal is applied whose amplitude is higher than the
reference line. In this case, either the message "OVLD" for overload or "IFOVL" for
exceeded display range (clipping of the trace at the upper diagram border = overrange)
is displayed in the status line.

Overloading can be avoided as follows:

● Reducing the output level of the tracking generator ( "Source Config" on page 490
softkey in the Tracking Generator menu)
● Increasing the reference level (Ref Level softkey in the "Amplitude" menu)

7.4.2 Calibrating for transmission and reflection measurement

Prerequisite: The instrument is in tracking generator measurement mode.

1. To enter the generator output level, press the "Source Power" on page 486 softkey.

2. To enter a constant level offset for the tracking generator, press the "Source Con-
fig" on page 490 softkey and enter a "Power Offset".

3. To open the submenu for calibration, press the "Source Cal" on page 486 softkey.

4. To record a reference trace for transmission measurement, press the "Calibrate

Transmission" on page 486 softkey.
The recording of the reference trace and the completion of the calibration sweep
are indicated by message bo XE s.

5. To record a reference trace for reflection measurement, press the "Calibrate

Reflection Short" on page 486 or "Calibrate Reflection Open" on page 487 softkey.
The recording of the reference trace and the completion of the calibration sweep
are indicated by message bo XE s.

6. To switch on the normalization, press the "Normalize" on page 487 softkey.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 502

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Tracking Generator Functions

7. To display the reference line, press the "Reference Value Position" on page 487
softkey.

8. To enter a value to shift the reference line, press the "Reference Value"
on page 487 softkey.

9. To restore the settings used for source calibration, press the "Recall" on page 487
softkey.

7.4.3 Transmission measurement

This measurement yields the transmission characteristics of a two-port network. The

internal or external tracking generator serves as a signal source. It is connected to the
input connector of the DUT. The input of the R&S ESR is fed from the output of the
DUT. A calibration can be carried out to compensate for the effects of the test setup
(e.g. frequency response of connecting cables).

Fig. 7-3: Test setup for transmission measurement

7.4.4 Reflection measurement

Scalar reflection measurements can be carried out by means of a reflection-coefficient

measurement bridge.

Fig. 7-4: Test setup for reflection measurement

7.4.5 Normalization

The "NORMALIZE" softkey switches normalization on or off. The softkey is only availa-
ble if the memory contains a correction trace.
You can shift the relative reference point within the grid using the "Reference Value
Position" on page 487 softkey. Thus, the trace can be shifted from the top grid margin
to the middle of the grid:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 503

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Tracking Generator Functions

Fig. 7-5: Normalized display

CORR ON, see [SENSe:]CORRection[:STATe] on page 872

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 504

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Tracking Generator Functions

Fig. 7-6: Normalized measurement, shifted with Reference Value Position= 50%

DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RPOS 10PCT, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:

SCALe]:RPOSition on page 816

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 505

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Tracking Generator Functions

Fig. 7-7: Measurement with Reference Value: +10dB and Reference Value Position = 50%

After the reference line has been shifted by entering +10 dB as the "Reference Value"
on page 487, deviations from the nominal value can be displayed with high resolution
(e.g. 2 dB/Div.). The absolute measured values are still displayed; in the above exam-
ple, 2 dB below nominal value (reference line) = 8 dB attenuation.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 506

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Tracking Generator Functions

Fig. 7-8: Measurement of a 10-dB attenuator pad with 2dB/Div

DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RVAL +10dB, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:

SCALe]:RVALue on page 859

7.4.6 Modulation (internal Tracking Generator only)

The time characteristics of the tracking generator output signal can be influenced by
means of external signals (input voltage range -1 V to +1 V).
Two BNC connectors at the rear panel are available as signal inputs. Their function
changes depending on the selected modulation:
● TG IN I/AMand
● TG IN Q/FM
The modulation modes can be combined with each other and with the frequency offset
function up to a certain degree. The following table shows which modulation modes are
possible at the same time and which ones can be combined with the frequency offset
function.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 507

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Tracking Generator Functions

Table 7-2: Simultaneous modes of modulation (tracking generator)

Modulation Frequency offset EXT AM EXT FM EXT I/Q

Frequency offset ● ● ●

EXT AM ● ●

EXT FM ● ●

EXT I/Q ●

● = can be combined

External AM
The "External AM" on page 488 softkey activates an AM modulation of the tracking
generator output signal.
The modulation signal is applied to the TG IN I/AM connector. An input voltage of 1 V
corresponds to 100% amplitude modulation.
Switching on an external AM disables the active I/Q modulation.

External FM
The "External FM" on page 488 softkey activates the FM modulation of the tracking
generator output signal.
The modulation frequency range is 1 kHz to 100 kHz, the deviation can be set in 1-
decade steps in the range of 100 Hz to 10 MHz at an input voltage of 1 V. The phase
deviation h should not exceed the value 100.
Phase deviation h = deviation/modulation frequency
The modulation signal is applied to the TG IN Q/FM connector.
Switching on an external FM disables the active I/Q modulation.

External IQ
The "External I/Q" on page 488 softkey activates the external I/Q modulation of the
tracking generator.
The signals for modulation are applied to the two input connectors TG IN I and TG IN
Q at the rear panel of the unit. The input voltage range is ±1 V into 50 Ω.
Switching on an external I/Q modulation disables the active external AM or FM.
Functional description of the quadrature modulator:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 508

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Displayed Information and Errors

Fig. 7-9: I/Q modulation

I/Q modulation is performed by means of the built-in quadrature modulator. The RF

signal is divided into two orthogonal I and Q components (in phase and quadrature
phase). Amplitude and phase are controlled in each path by the I and Q modulation
signal. By adding the two components an RF output signal is generated that can be
controlled in amplitude and phase.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:DM:STATe on page 873

7.5 Displayed Information and Errors

Diagram header
In Tracking Generator measurement mode, some additional information is displayed in
the diagram header.

Label Description

INT TG: <source power> Internal tracking generator active

INT TG: <start power>… <stop power> Internal tracking generator with power sweep active

EXT TG <1|2>: <source power> External tracking generator (1 or 2) active

LVL Power Offset (see chapter 7.3, "Configuring Tracking Genera-

tors", on page 493

FRQ Frequency Offset (see chapter 7.3, "Configuring Tracking Gen-

erators", on page 493

Measurement accuracy levels

NOR Normalization on;

No difference between reference setting and measurement

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 509

R&S®ESR Tracking Generator
Displayed Information and Errors

Label Description

APX (approximation) Normalization on;

Deviation from the reference setting occurs

- Aborted normalization

For details on measurement accuracy levels, see chapter 7.4.5, "Normalization",

on page 503.

Error and status messages

Message Description

"Ext. Generator GPIB Handshake Error!" / Connection to the generator is not possible,
e.g. due to a cable damage or loose connec-
"Ext. Generator TCPIP Handshake Error!" /
tion or wrong address.
"Ext. Generator TTL Handshake Error!"

"Ext. Generator Limits Exceeded!" The allowed frequency or power ranges for the
generator were exceeded.

"Reverse Sweep via min. Ext. Generator Frequency!" Reverse sweep is performed; frequencies are
reduced to the minimum frequency, then
increased again; see figure 7-2

"Ext. Generator File Syntax Error!" Syntax error in the generator setup file (see
"Edit Generator Setup File" on page 500

"Ext. Generator Command Error!" Missing or wrong command in the generator

setup file (see "Edit Generator Setup File"
on page 500

"Ext. Generator Visa Error!!" Error with Visa driver provided with installation
(very unlikely)

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 510

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Manual Operation – Local Menu

8 System Configuration

8.1 Manual Operation – Local Menu

When switched on, the instrument is always in the manual measurement mode and
can be operated via the front panel. As soon as the instrument receives a remote com-
mand, it is switched to the remote control mode.
In remote control mode, all keys of the instrument except the PRESET key are dis-
abled, see chapter 8.3, "Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key",
on page 513. The "LOCAL" softkey and the Display Update (On/Off) softkey are dis-
played. Depending on the setting of the Display Update (On/Off) softkey, the diagrams,
traces and display fields are displayed or hidden. For further details on the Display
Update (On/Off) softkey refer to chapter 8.3, "Instrument Setup and Interface Configu-
ration – SETUP Key", on page 513.
For details on remote control refer to chapter 10.1, "Remote Control - Basics",
on page 563.

If you select the "Local" softkey while a self-alignment or a self-test is still running
(which was started remotely), the instrument only returns to the manual operation state
when the alignment or test is completed.

The change to manual operation consists of:

● Enabling the Front Panel Keys
Returning to manual mode enables all inactive keys. The main softkey menu of the
current mode is displayed.
● Displaying the measurement diagrams again.
The diagrams, traces and display fields are displayed again.
● Generating the "OPERATION COMPLETE" message
If, at the time of pressing the "LOCAL" softkey, the synchronization mechanism via
*OPC, *OPC? or *WAI is active, the currently running measurement procedure is
aborted and synchronization is achieved by setting the corresponding bits in the
registers of the status reporting system.
● Setting Bit 6 (User Request) of the Event Status Register
With a corresponding configuration of the status reporting system, this bit immedi-
ately causes the generation of a service request (SRQ) to inform the control soft-
ware that the user wishes to return to front panel control. For example this can be
used to interrupt the control program and to correct instrument settings manually.
This bit is set each time the "LOCAL" softkey is pressed.

To return to manual operation

► Press the "LOCAL" softkey.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 511

R&S®ESR System Configuration
User-Defined Menu – USER key

The instrument switches from remote to manual operation, but only if the local lock-
out function has not been activated in the remote control mode.

8.2 User-Defined Menu – USER key

The USER key displays a user-defined menu. The softkeys displayed here can be
labelled and assigned to user-defined settings files as required.

To open the user-defined menu

► Press the USER key.

The "User" menu is displayed.

Softkeys of the "User" menu

The "User" menu contains 8 user-definable softkeys as well as a "User Preference
Setup" softkey that allows you to define them. Pressing one of the user-definable soft-
keys has the same effect as the Save File / Recall File function for a pre-defined set-
tings file. The definitions for these softkeys remain unchanged even after a reset func-
tion and after updating the firmware.

As opposed to recalling a settings file via the "Save/Recall" menu, when a saved set-
tings file is loaded using one of the user-definable softkeys, the only item to be loaded
is the current (measurement) settings - no trace settings, transducer or limit line config-
urations etc.

"User Preference Setup" softkey

Opens an "ApplicationManager" dialog to set up the user-defined softkeys.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 512

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

For each user-definable softkey (1–8), you can define a key label and assign a settings
file that is to be loaded when the softkey is selected.

SCPI command:
MMEMory:USER<Softkey> on page 957

To define the key label

1. Click into the table entry for the corresponding softkey.

2. Enter a label for the softkey.

3. Press ENTER.

To assign a settings file

1. Click into the table entry for the corresponding softkey.

2. In the file selection dialog, select a stored settings file to be recalled when the soft-
key is selected.

3. Click "Select".
The selected file is displayed in the "ApplicationManager" dialog.

To store the softkey settings

► Click "Save" to store the user-defined softkey definitions.

8.3 Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration –

SETUP Key
The SETUP key is used to set or display the default settings of the instrument: refer-
ence frequency, noise source, level correction values, date, time, LAN interface, firm-
ware update and enabling of options, information about instrument configuration and
service support functions. For further details refer also to the Quick Start Guide, chap-
ter 2 "Preparing for Use".

To open the Setup menu

► Press the SETUP key.

The "Setup" menu is displayed.

Menu and softkey description

● chapter 8.3.1, "Softkeys of the Setup Menu", on page 514

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 513

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

Further information
● chapter 8.3.3, "LXI Class C Functionality", on page 537

Tasks
● chapter 8.3.2, "Activating or Deactivating the LXI Class C Functionality",
on page 536

8.3.1 Softkeys of the Setup Menu

The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Setup" menu. It is possible that
your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available
with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in
the corresponding softkey description.
Reference Int/Ext........................................................................................................ 516
Handle missing Ext. Ref..............................................................................................516
└ Show Error Flag............................................................................................ 516
└ Auto select Reference...................................................................................516
Transducer.................................................................................................................. 516
└ Using transducer factors or transducer sets................................................. 517
└ Defining characteristics of a transducer factor..............................................517
└ Managing transducer sets.............................................................................519
Alignment.................................................................................................................... 520
└ Self Alignment...............................................................................................520
└ Show Align Results....................................................................................... 520
└ Touch Screen Alignment...............................................................................521
General Setup............................................................................................................. 521
└ Configure Network........................................................................................ 521
└ Network Address...........................................................................................521
└ Computer Name................................................................................. 521
└ IP Address.......................................................................................... 521
└ Subnet Mask.......................................................................................522
└ DHCP (On/Off)....................................................................................522
└ LXI.................................................................................................................522
└ Info......................................................................................................522
└ Password............................................................................................ 522
└ Description..........................................................................................523
└ LAN Reset.......................................................................................... 523
└ GPIB............................................................................................................. 523
└ GPIB Address..................................................................................... 523
└ ID String Factory.................................................................................523
└ ID String User..................................................................................... 523
└ Compatibility Mode............................................................................. 523
└ Mode Default............................................................................ 524
└ Mode R&S FSP........................................................................ 524
└ Mode R&S FSU........................................................................ 524
└ GPIB Language........................................................................ 524
└ IF Gain (Norm/Puls)..................................................................525

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 514

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

└ Sweep Repeat (On/Off)............................................................ 525

└ Coupling (FSx/HP)....................................................................525
└ REV String Factory...................................................................526
└ REV String User....................................................................... 526
└ Display Update (On/Off)..................................................................... 526
└ GPIB Terminator LFEOI/EOI.............................................................. 526
└ *IDN Format Leg./New........................................................................526
└ I/O Logging (On/Off)........................................................................... 527
└ Time+Date.................................................................................................... 527
└ Configure Monitor......................................................................................... 527
└ Soft Frontpanel............................................................................................. 527
Display Setup.............................................................................................................. 528
└ Tool Bar State (On/Off)................................................................................. 528
└ Status Bar..................................................................................................... 529
└ Screen Title (On/Off).....................................................................................529
└ Time+Date (On/Off)...................................................................................... 529
└ Time+Date Format (US/DE)......................................................................... 529
└ Print Logo (On/Off)........................................................................................529
└ Annotation (On/Off).......................................................................................529
└ Theme Selection........................................................................................... 529
└ Screen Colors............................................................................................... 530
└ Select Screen Color Set..................................................................... 530
└ Color (On/Off)..................................................................................... 530
└ Select Object...................................................................................... 530
└ Predefined Colors............................................................................... 530
└ User Defined Colors........................................................................... 531
└ Set to Default...................................................................................... 531
└ Print Colors................................................................................................... 531
└ Select Print Color Set......................................................................... 531
└ Color (On/Off)..................................................................................... 532
└ Display Pwr Save (On/Off)............................................................................532
System Info................................................................................................................. 532
└ Hardware Info............................................................................................... 532
└ Versions+Options......................................................................................... 532
└ System Messages.........................................................................................533
└ Clear All Messages....................................................................................... 533
Parameter Coupling.................................................................................................... 533
Firmware Update.........................................................................................................534
Option Licenses.......................................................................................................... 534
└ Install Option................................................................................................. 534
└ Install Option by XML....................................................................................534
Application Setup Recovery........................................................................................ 534
Preset Receiver...........................................................................................................535
Preset Spectrum......................................................................................................... 535
Service........................................................................................................................ 535
└ Input Source..................................................................................................535
└ RF....................................................................................................... 536
└ Calibration Frequency RF...................................................................536
└ Reset Password............................................................................................536
└ Selftest.......................................................................................................... 536

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 515

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

└ Selftest Results............................................................................................. 536

└ Password...................................................................................................... 536
└ Service Function........................................................................................... 536

Reference Int/Ext
Switches between the internal and external reference signal source. The default setting
is internal reference. It is important that the external reference signal is deactivated
when switching from external to internal reference to avoid interactions. When an
external reference is used, "EXT REF" is displayed in the status bar.
If the reference signal is missing after switching to an external reference, the message
"NO REF" is displayed to indicate that no synchronization is performed.
The R&S ESR can use the internal reference source or an external reference source
as frequency standard from which all internal oscillators are derived. A 10 MHz crystal
oscillator is used as internal reference source. In the external reference setting, all
internal oscillators of the R&S ESR are synchronized to the external reference fre-
quency, which can be set from 1–20 MHz in 100 kHz steps. For details on connectors
refer to the Quick Start Guide, chapter 1 "Front and Rear Panel".
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce on page 904

Handle missing Ext. Ref

If an external reference is selected but none is available, there are different ways the
instrument can react. This command opens a submenu to select the preferred method
of handling a missing external reference. By default, an error flag is displayed in the
status bar of the display.
The submenu contains the following commands:
● "Show Error Flag" on page 516
● "Auto select Reference" on page 516

Show Error Flag ← Handle missing Ext. Ref

If this option is selected, an error flag is displayed in the status bar of the display when
an external reference is selected but none is available.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce on page 904

Auto select Reference ← Handle missing Ext. Ref

If this option is selected, the instrument automatically switches back to the internal ref-
erence if no external reference is available. Note that you must re-activate the external
reference if it becomes available again at a later time.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce on page 904

Transducer
Opens a dialog box that contains functionality to work with transducer factors or trans-
ducer sets.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 516

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

Basically, the dialog box contains three elements.

● A list of available transducer factors or transducer sets.
The list shows the name of the transducer factor or set, its unit and its state.
● A button to filter the transducer factors that are displayed in the list.
The filter is available for transducer factor selection.
● A line that shows the comment of a transducer factor or set.
A comment is displayed only if one has been defined.
For more information on using transducer factors and sets see chapter 4.2.7, "Trans-
ducers", on page 184.
For more information on designing transducer factors and sets see
● "Defining characteristics of a transducer factor" on page 517
● "Managing transducer sets" on page 519

Using transducer factors or transducer sets ← Transducer

The "(Factor Set)" softkey selects if you want to use a transducer factor or set.
The label of the currently selected type of transducer is highlighted.
To actually include the transducer in the measurement, you first have to select one and
turn it on with the "Active (On Off)" softkey. When the transducer factor is active, all
amplitude settings and outputs take on the unit of the transducer factor. It will no longer
be possible to select another unit. An exception is in case the transducer has the unit
dB.
The name of the active transducer is displayed in the channel bar. To indicate the pro-
gress of the measurement, the diagram area also contains a green vertical line with the
label "TF".
Note that you can turn on up to eight transducer factors at the same time. If you want
to use more transducer factors in the same measurement, you have to combine them
in a transducer set.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect on page 922
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer[:STATe] on page 923
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:SELect on page 925
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET[:STATe] on page 926

Defining characteristics of a transducer factor ← Transducer

Before you can define the characteristics of a transducer factor, make sure that you
are actually using a transducer factor (➙"(Factor Set)" softkey).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 517

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

You can define the characteristics in several ways:

● Edit a transducer factor that already exists (➙"Edit" softkey).
● Create a new transducer factor (➙"New" softkey).
● Create a new transducer factor based on an existing one ➙("Copy To" softkey).
Each of the three options opens a dialog box that contains the functionality to charac-
terize a transducer factor.

1 = Name and comment of the transducer factor (➙"Edit Name" softkey)

2 = Unit of the transducer factor (➙"Edit Unit" softkey)
3 = Linear or logarithmic scaling of the frequency axis (➙"Edit Name" softkey)
4 = Table of data points and graphical preview of the transducer factor (➙"Edit Value" softkey)
5 = Button to insert a data point in the table (➙"Insert Value" softkey)
6 = Button to delete a data point from the table (➙"Delete Value" softkey)
7 = Button to shift all data points of the transducer factor horizontally by a certain amount
8 = Button to shift all data points of the transducer factor vertically by a certain amount
9 = Button to save and store the transducer factor on the internal hard disk of the R&S ESR (➙"Save Factor"
softkey)

Note that there are softkeys for several elements of the dialog box as mentioned in the
legend above.
A transducer factor may consist of up to 625 data points. Each data point is a pair of
values: the first value describes the frequency, the second value describes the level for
that frequency.
Frequencies have to be entered in ascending order and may not overlap.
When you save the transducer factor, the R&S ESR uses the name of the transducer
factor as the file name. The file type is *.tdf. If a transducer factor of the same name
already exists, the R&S ESR will ask before it overwrites the existing file.
The transducer factors and sets are stored in separate but fix directories on the internal
memory of the R&S ESR. You can create subdirectories for a more concise file struc-
ture and display their contents with the "Show Directories" softkey (you have to select
the directory first, though).
It is possible to delete a transducer factor at any time, if you do not need it anymore (➙
"Delete" softkey).
Dynamic range with active transducers

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 518

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

The shift of the trace caused by the transducer factor by a certain amount deteriorates
the dynamic range of the measurement results.
To restore the original dynamic range, you have to compensate for the transducer fac-
tor. You can do this by adjusting the reference level accordingly. If you turn on the
automatic adjustment of the reference level (➙"Ref Level Adjust (Man Auto)" softkey),
the R&S ESR restores the original dynamic range as best as possible by chagning the
reference level by the maximum level shift defined in the active transducer factor.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect on page 922
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent on page 921
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT on page 923
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SCALing on page 922
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA on page 921
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete on page 922
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ADJust:RLEVel[:STATe] on page 920

Managing transducer sets ← Transducer

Before you can define the contents of a transducer set, make sure that you are actually
using a transducer set (➙"(Factor Set)" softkey).
You can define the contents in several ways:
● Edit a transducer set that already exists (➙"Edit" softkey).
● Create a new transducer set (➙"New" softkey).
● Create a new transducer set based on an existing one (➙"Copy To" softkey).
Each of the three options opens a dialog box that contains the functionality to define a
transducer set.

1 = Name and comment of the transducer set

2 = Unit of the transducer set
3 = Button to turn the transducer break on and off

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 519

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

4 = Table of transducer set ranges and corresponding frequencies and transducer factors
5 = Start and stop frequency of the currently selected range
6 = List of transducer ranges

For more information on using and designing transducer sets see "Transducer sets"
on page 184.
Opening the dialog box also opens an additional softkey menu that contains functional-
ity that you need to design a transducer set.
This softkey menu provides the function to
● insert ranges up to a maximum of 10 (➙"Insert Range" softkey)
● delete ranges that already exist (➙"Delete Range" softkey)
● add up to eight transducer factors to a range (➙"Add Factor" softkey)
● replace a transducer factor that has been assigned with another one (➙"Change
Factor)" softkey)
● remove a transducer factor from the transducer set (➙"Remove Factor" softkey)
● save the contents of the transducer set (➙"Save Set" softkey)
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:SELect on page 925
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:COMMent on page 924
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:UNIT on page 926
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:BREak on page 924
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:RANGe<range> on page 925
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:DELete on page 925

Alignment
Opens a submenu with the available functions for recording, displaying and activating
the data for self alignment.
The correction data and characteristics required for the alignment are determined by
comparison of the results at different settings with the known characteristics of the
high-precision calibration signal source at 65.83 MHz. The correction data are stored
as a file on flash disk and can be displayed using the "Show Align Results"
on page 520 softkey.
The submenu contains the following commands:
● "Self Alignment" on page 520
● "Show Align Results" on page 520
● "Touch Screen Alignment" on page 521

Self Alignment ← Alignment

Starts the recording of correction data of the instrument. If the correction data acquisi-
tion has failed or if the correction values are deactivated, a corresponding message is
displayed in the status field.
As long as the self alignment data is collected the procedure can be cancelled using
the "Abort" button.
Remote command:
*CAL? on page 885

Show Align Results ← Alignment

Opens a dialog box that displays the correction data of the alignment:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 520

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

● date and time of last correction data record

● overall results of correction data record
● list of found correction values according to function/module
The results are classified as follows:

PASSED calibration successful without any restrictions

CHECK deviation of correction value larger than expected, correction could however be per-
formed

FAILED deviations of correction value too large, no correction was possible. The found cor-
rection data are not applicable.

Remote command:
CALibration:RESult? on page 905

Touch Screen Alignment ← Alignment

Displays a touch screen alignment dialog.
When the device is delivered, the touch screen is initially aligned. However, it may
become necessary to adjust the alignment later, e.g. after an image update or after
exchanging a hard disk. If you notice that touching a specific point on the screen does
not achieve the correct response, you may try adjusting the alignment, as well. .
Using a finger or any other pointing device, press the 4 markers on the screen.
The touch screen is aligned according to the executed pointing operations.

General Setup
Opens a submenu for all general settings such as IP address and LAN settings, date
and time, remote control (optional) and measurement display.

Configure Network ← General Setup

Opens the "Network Connections" dialog box to change the LAN settings. For details
refer to the Quick Start Guide, chapter 2 "Preparing for Use" and appendix B "LAN
Interface".

Network Address ← General Setup

Opens a submenu to configure the internet protocol properties and the computer
name.

Computer Name ← Network Address ← General Setup

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the computer name via the keypad. The naming con-
ventions of Windows apply. If too many characters and/or numbers are entered, in the
status line, an according message is displayed. For step-by-step instructions refer to
the Quick Start Guide, appendix B "LAN Interface".

IP Address ← Network Address ← General Setup

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the IP address via the keypad. The TCP/IP protocol
is preinstalled with the IP address 10.0.0.10. If the DHCP server is available ("DHCP
On"), the dialog box entry is read-only.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 521

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

The IP address consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Each block contains
3 numbers in maximum (e.g. 100.100.100.100), but also one or two numbers are
allowed in a block (as an example see the preinstalled address). For step-by-step
instructions refer to the Quick Start Guide, chapter 2 "Preparing for Use".

Subnet Mask ← Network Address ← General Setup

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the subnet mask via the keypad. The TCP/IP proto-
col is preinstalled with the subnet mask 255.255.255.0. If the DHCP server is available
("DHCP On"), the dialog box entry is read-only.
The subnet mask consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Each block con-
tains 3 numbers in maximum (e.g. 100.100.100.100), but also one or two numbers are
allowed in a block (as an example see the preinstalled address). For step-by-step
instructions refer to the Quick Start Guide, chapter 2 "Preparing for Use".

DHCP (On/Off) ← Network Address ← General Setup

Switches between DHCP server available (On) or not available (Off). If a DHCP server
is available in the network, the IP address and subnet mask of the instrument are
obtained automatically from the DHCP server. For further details refer to the Quick
Start Guide, chapter 2 "Preparing for Use".

LXI ← General Setup

Opens the LXI submenu containing the following softkeys:
● "Info" on page 522
● "Password" on page 522
● "Description" on page 523
● "LAN Reset" on page 523
LXI functionality is available only for user accounts with administrator rights.

Info ← LXI ← General Setup

Shows the current parameters of LXI class C, including the current version, class and
various computer parameters like the computer name or IP address.
While active, the dialog is not updated.
LXI functionality is available only for user accounts with administrator rights.
Remote command:
SYSTem:LXI:INFo? on page 960

Password ← LXI ← General Setup

Shows the currently set password. You can also change the current password using
this softkey.
The password is required to change settings via the web browser (e.g. IP parameter).
An empty password is not valid, i.e. you must enter a password.
By default, the password is LxiWebIfc.
LXI functionality is available only for user accounts with administrator rights.
Remote command:
SYSTem:LXI:PASSword on page 960

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 522

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

Description ← LXI ← General Setup

Opens a dialog box to view or change the LXI instrument description. This description
is used on some of the LXI web sites.
By default, the description is "Signal Analyzer".
LXI functionality is available only for user accounts with administrator rights.
Remote command:
SYSTem:LXI:MDEScription on page 960

LAN Reset ← LXI ← General Setup

Resets the LAN configuration to a state required by the LXI standard. For example, the
TCP/IP mode is set to DHCP and Dynamic DNS and ICMP Ping are enabled. In addi-
tion, the R&S ESR sets the password and the instrument description to their initial
states (see "Password" on page 522 and "Description" on page 523 softkeys).
Only user accounts with administrator rights can reset the LAN configuration.
Remote command:
SYSTem:LXI:LANReset on page 960

GPIB ← General Setup

Opens a submenu to set the parameters of the remote control interface.

GPIB Address ← GPIB ← General Setup

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the GPIB address. Values from 0 to 30 are allowed.
The default address is 20.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess on page 959

ID String Factory ← GPIB ← General Setup

Selects the default response to the *IDN? query.
Remote command:
SYSTem:IDENtify:FACTory on page 896

ID String User ← GPIB ← General Setup

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a user-defined response to the *IDN? query. Max. 36
characters are allowed.
Remote command:
SYSTem:IDENtify[:STRing] on page 896

Compatibility Mode ← GPIB ← General Setup

Sets the R&S ESR in a state compatible to previous R&S devices, enabling the usage
of existing external control applications. In particular, the number of measurement
points and available bandwidths are adjusted to those of other devices.
Furthermore, some special GPIB settings are available in order to emulate HP models
(see chapter 10.17, "GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and
8594E", on page 1009):
● "GPIB Language" on page 524
● "IF Gain (Norm/Puls)" on page 525

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 523

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

● "Sweep Repeat (On/Off)" on page 525

● "Coupling (FSx/HP)" on page 525
"Default" Standard R&S ESR operation, see "Mode Default" on page 524
"R&S FSP" Compatible to R&S FSP, see "Mode R&S FSP" on page 524
"R&S FSU" Compatible to R&S FSU, see "Mode R&S FSU" on page 524
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMPatible on page 891

Mode Default ← Compatibility Mode ← GPIB ← General Setup

Resets the number of measurement points and available bandwidths to default
R&S ESR values.
Remote command:
SYST:COMP DEF, see SYSTem:COMPatible on page 891

Mode R&S FSP ← Compatibility Mode ← GPIB ← General Setup

Sets the number of measurement points and available bandwidths as in R&S FSP
devices.
Remote command:
SYST:COMP FSP, see SYSTem:COMPatible on page 891

Mode R&S FSU ← Compatibility Mode ← GPIB ← General Setup

Sets the number of measurement points and available bandwidths as in R&S FSU
devices.
Remote command:
SYST:COMP FSU, see SYSTem:COMPatible on page 891

GPIB Language ← Compatibility Mode ← GPIB ← General Setup

Opens a list of selectable remote-control languages:

Language Comment

SCPI

71100C Compatible to 8566A/B

71200C Compatible to 8566A/B

71209A Compatible to 8566A/B

8560E

8561E

8562E

8563E

8564E

8565E

8566A Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules
regarding the command structure.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 524

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

Language Comment

8566B

8568A Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules
regarding the command structure.

8568A_DC Uses DC input coupling by default if supported by the instrument

8568B Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules
regarding the command structure.

8568B_DC Uses DC input coupling by default if supported by the instrument

8591E Compatible to 8594E

8594E Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules
regarding the command structure.

For details on the GPIB languages, see chapter 10.17, "GPIB Commands of HP Mod-
els 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E", on page 1009.
Remote command:
SYSTem:LANGuage on page 962

IF Gain (Norm/Puls) ← Compatibility Mode ← GPIB ← General Setup

Configures the internal IF gain settings in HP emulation mode due to the application
needs. This setting is only taken into account for resolution bandwidth < 300 kHz.

NORM Optimized for high dynamic range, overload limit is close to reference level.

PULS Optimized for pulsed signals, overload limit up to 10 dB above reference level.

This softkey is only available if a HP language is selected via the "GPIB Language"
softkey (see "GPIB Language" on page 524).
Remote command:
SYSTem:IFGain:MODE on page 963

Sweep Repeat (On/Off) ← Compatibility Mode ← GPIB ← General Setup

Controls a repeated sweep of the E1 and MKPK HI/HL HP model commands (for
details on the commands refer to "GPIB Language" on page 524). If the repeated
sweep is OFF, the marker is set without sweeping before.
Note: In single sweep mode, switch off this softkey before you set the marker via the
E1 and MKPK HI/HL commands in order to avoid sweeping again.
This softkey is only available if a HP language is selected via the "GPIB Language"
softkey (see "GPIB Language" on page 524).
Remote command:
SYSTem:RSW on page 962

Coupling (FSx/HP) ← Compatibility Mode ← GPIB ← General Setup

Controls the default coupling ratios in the HP emulation mode for:
● span and resolution bandwidth (Span/RBW) and
● resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth (RBW/VBW)

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 525

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

For FSP(=FSV), the standard parameter coupling of the instrument is used. As a

result, in most cases a shorter sweeptime is used than in case of HP.
This softkey is only available if a HP language is selected via the "GPIB Language"
softkey (see "GPIB Language" on page 524).
Remote command:
SYSTem:HPCoupling on page 963

REV String Factory ← Compatibility Mode ← GPIB ← General Setup

Selects the default response to the REV? query for the revision number (HP emulation
only, see chapter 10.17, "GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
and 8594E", on page 1009).
Remote command:
SYSTem:REVision:FACTory on page 961

REV String User ← Compatibility Mode ← GPIB ← General Setup

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a user-defined revision number in response to the
REV? query (HP emulation only, see chapter 10.17, "GPIB Commands of HP Models
856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E", on page 1009). Max. 36 characters are
allowed.
Remote command:
SYSTem:REVision[:STRing] on page 961

Display Update (On/Off) ← GPIB ← General Setup

Defines whether the instrument display is switched off when changing from manual
operation to remote control. In remote control mode, this softkey is displayed in the
local menu.
Remote command:
SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate on page 891

GPIB Terminator LFEOI/EOI ← GPIB ← General Setup

Changes the GPIB receive terminator.
According to the standard, the terminator in ASCII is <LF> and/or <EOI>. For binary
data transfers (e.g. trace data) from the control computer to the instrument, the binary
code used for <LF> might be included in the binary data block, and therefore should
not be interpreted as a terminator in this particular case. This can be avoided by
changing the receive terminator to EOI.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator on page 959

*IDN Format Leg./New ← GPIB ← General Setup

Defines the response format to the *IDN? remote command (see *IDN?
on page 886). This function is intended for re-use of existing control programs
together with the R&S ESR.
"Leg" Legacy format, compatible to the R&S FSP/FSU/FSQ family
e.g. Rohde&Schwarz,FSV-7,100005/007,1.61

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 526

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

"New" R&S ESR format

e.g. Rohde&Schwarz,FSV-7,1307.9002K07/100005,1.61
Remote command:
SYSTem:FORMat:IDENt on page 892

I/O Logging (On/Off) ← GPIB ← General Setup

Activates or deactivates the SCPI log function. All remote control commands received
by the R&S ESR are recorded in the following log file:
C:\R_S\Instr\scpilogging\ScpiLog.txt
Logging the commands may be extremely useful for debug purposes, e.g. in order to
find misspelled keywords in control programs.
Remote command:
SYSTem:CLOGging on page 890

Time+Date ← General Setup

Opens an edit dialog box to enter time and date for the internal real time clock. For
details refer to the Quick Start Guide, chapter 2 "Preparing for Use".
Remote command:
SYSTem:TIME on page 893
SYSTem:DATE on page 894

Configure Monitor ← General Setup

Determines and displays the configuration of a connected external monitor, if available.
In the configuration dialog box, you can switch from the internal monitor (laptop icon) to
the external monitor (monitor icon), or both (double monitor icon). For external, the
R&S ESR display is disabled (turns dark). The screen content formerly displayed on
the R&S ESR is displayed on the external screen.
For further details refer to the Quick Start Guide, chapter 2 "Preparing for Use".

Soft Frontpanel ← General Setup

Activates or deactivates the display of the instrument emulation.

deactivated Only the measurement screen is displayed. This is the setting for working at the
R&S ESR.

activated In addition to the measurement screen, the whole front panel is displayed, i.e. the
hardkeys and other hardware controls of the device are simulated on the screen.
This is the setting for working at a computer with Remote Desktop or at an external
monitor.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 527

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

Fig. 8-1: Soft Frontpanel

Alternatively to this softkey, you can use the F6 key.

Remote command:
SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel on page 894

Display Setup
Opens a submenu to define the display settings.
The following display settings are available:
● "Tool Bar State (On/Off)" on page 528
● "Screen Title (On/Off)" on page 529
● "Time+Date (On/Off)" on page 529
● "Time+Date Format (US/DE)" on page 529
● "Print Logo (On/Off)" on page 529
● "Annotation (On/Off)" on page 529
● "Theme Selection" on page 529
● "Screen Colors" on page 530
● "Print Colors" on page 531
● "Display Pwr Save (On/Off)" on page 532

Tool Bar State (On/Off) ← Display Setup

Displays or removes the tool bar above the diagram.
This setting is stored in instrument settings files.
Remote command:
DISPlay:TBAR[STATe] on page 950

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 528

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

Status Bar ← Display Setup

Displays or removes the status bar beneath the diagram.
The status bar indicates the global instrument settings, the instrument status and any
irregularities during measurement or display.
This setting is stored in instrument settings files.
Remote command:
DISPlay:SBAR[:STATe] on page 950

Screen Title (On/Off) ← Display Setup

Activates/deactivates the display of a diagram title (if available) and opens an edit dia-
log box to enter a new title for the active diagram. Max. 20 characters are allowed.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TEXT[:DATA] on page 953
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME on page 953

Time+Date (On/Off) ← Display Setup

Activates/deactivates the display of date and time beneath the diagram.
This setting is stored in instrument settings files.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME on page 953

Time+Date Format (US/DE) ← Display Setup

Switches the time and date display on the screen between US and German (DE).
This setting is stored in instrument settings files.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME:FORMat on page 954

Print Logo (On/Off) ← Display Setup

Activates/deactivates the display of the Rohde & Schwarz company logo in the upper
left corner.
Remote command:
DISPlay:LOGO on page 949

Annotation (On/Off) ← Display Setup

Activates/deactivates the display of the frequency information in the diagram footer.
For example to protect confidential data it can be useful to hide the frequency informa-
tion.
Remote command:
DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency on page 947

Theme Selection ← Display Setup

Opens a selection list of available themes for the screen display. The theme defines
the colors used for keys and screen elements, for example. The default theme is "Blue-
Ocean".
Remote command:
DISPlay:THEMe:SELect on page 951

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 529

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

Screen Colors ← Display Setup

Opens a submenu to configure the screen colors. For details on screen colors refer to
the Quick Start Guide, chapter 2 "Preparing for Use".
The submenu contains the following commands:
● "Select Screen Color Set" on page 530
● "Color (On/Off)" on page 530
● "Select Object" on page 530
● "Predefined Colors" on page 530
● "User Defined Colors" on page 531
● "Set to Default" on page 531
Remote command:
DISPlay:CMAP<item>:HSL on page 948

Select Screen Color Set ← Screen Colors ← Display Setup

Opens the "Select Screen Color Set" dialog box to select default or user defined color
settings.
If one of the default settings is selected ("Default Colors 1"/"2"), the default settings for
brightness, color tint and color saturation for all display screen elements are restored.
The default color schemes provide optimum visibility of all picture elements at an angle
of vision from above or below. Default setting is "Default Colors 1".
If "User Defined Colors" is selected, a user-defined color set can be defined. For step-
by-step instruction refer to the Quick Start Guide, chapter 2 "Preparing for Use".
Remote command:
DISPlay:CMAP<item>:DEFault on page 948

Color (On/Off) ← Screen Colors ← Display Setup

Switches from color display to black-and-white display and back. The default setting is
color display.

Select Object ← Screen Colors ← Display Setup

Opens the "Color Setup" dialog box to select the color settings for a selected object.
The "Selected Object" list is displayed to select the object. For setting the color the pre-
defined colors are displayed.
Remote command:
DISPlay:CMAP<item>:HSL on page 948
HCOPy:CMAP<item>:HSL on page 929

Predefined Colors ← Screen Colors ← Display Setup

In the "Color Setup" dialog box, displays the "Predefined Colors" (alternatively to the
"Predefined Colors" button). This softkey is only available if, in the "Select Color Set"
dialog box, the "User Defined Colors" option is selected or the "Color Setup" dialog box
is displayed. For further details refer to the Quick Start Guide, chapter 2 "Preparing for
Use".
Remote command:
DISPlay:CMAP<item>:PDEFined on page 948
HCOPy:CMAP<item>:PDEFined on page 930

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 530

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

User Defined Colors ← Screen Colors ← Display Setup

In the "Color Setup" dialog box, displays the "User Defined Colors" (alternatively to the
"User Defined Colors" button). This softkey is only available if, in the "Select Color Set"
dialog box, the "User Defined Colors" option is selected or the "Color Setup" dialog box
is displayed. For further details refer to the Quick Start Guide, chapter 2 "Preparing for
Use".
Remote command:
DISPlay:CMAP<item>:HSL on page 948
HCOPy:CMAP<item>:HSL on page 929

Set to Default ← Screen Colors ← Display Setup

Opens the "Set to Default" dialog box to select one of the factory default color settings.
Remote command:
DISPlay:CMAP<item>:DEFault on page 948
HCOPy:CMAP<item>:DEFault on page 929

Print Colors ← Display Setup

Opens a submenu to select the colors for the printout. To facilitate color selection, the
selected color combination is displayed when the menu is entered. The previous colors
are restored when the menu is exited. For details on screen colors refer to the Quick
Start Guide, chapter 2 "Preparing for Use".
The submenu contains the following commands:
● "Select Print Color Set" on page 531
● "Color (On/Off)" on page 532
● "Select Object" on page 555
● "Predefined Colors" on page 555
● "User Defined Colors" on page 555
● "Set to Default" on page 555
Remote command:
HCOPy:CMAP<item>:HSL on page 929

Select Print Color Set ← Print Colors ← Display Setup

Opens the "Select Print Color Set" dialog box to select the color settings for printout.

Screen Colors (Print) Selects the current screen colors for the printout. The background is
always printed in white and the grid in black.

Screen Colors (Hardcopy) Selects the current screen colors without any changes for a hard-
copy. The output format is set via the "Device Setup" on page 554
softkey in the "Print" menu.

Optimized Colors Selects an optimized color setting for the printout to improve the visi-
bility of the colors (default setting). Trace 1 is blue, trace 2 black,
trace 3 green, and the markers are turquoise. The background is
always printed in white and the grid in black.

User Defined Colors Enables the softkeys to define colors for the printout.

Remote command:
HCOPy:CMAP<item>:DEFault on page 929

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 531

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

Color (On/Off) ← Print Colors ← Display Setup

Switches from color printout to black-and-white printout and back. All colored areas are
printed in white and all colored lines in black. This improves the contrast. The default
setting is color printout, provided that the selected printer can produce color printouts.
Remote command:
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor on page 931

Display Pwr Save (On/Off) ← Display Setup

Switches the power-save mode for the display (On/Off) and opens an edit dialog box to
enter the time for the power-save function to respond. After the elapse of this time the
display is completely switched off, i.e. including backlighting. This mode is recommen-
ded when the instrument is exclusively operated in remote control.
For details on the power-save mode for the display refer to the Quick Start Guide,
chapter 2 "Preparing for Use".
Remote command:
DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe] on page 950
DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff on page 949

System Info
Opens a submenu to display detailed information on module data, device statistics and
system messages.
The submenu contains the following commands:
● "Hardware Info" on page 532
● "Versions+Options" on page 532
● "System Messages" on page 533
● "Clear All Messages" on page 533

Hardware Info ← System Info

Opens a dialog box that displays hardware information, e.g. on the frontend and moth-
erboard. Every listed component is described by its serial number, order number,
model information, hardware code, and hardware revision.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:HWINfo? on page 895

Versions+Options ← System Info

Opens a dialog box that displays a list of hardware and firmware information, including:

Label Description

Device ID Unique ID of the device

Instrument Firmware Installed firmware version

BIOS Installed BIOS version

CPLD CPLD version

MB-FPGA Motherboard FPGA version

Data Sheet Version Data sheet version of the basic device

<option> Installed hardware and firmware options

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 532

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

For details on options refer to the Quick Start Guide, chapter 2 "Checking the Supplied
Items".
Remote command:
*IDN? on page 886
*OPT? on page 887
SYSTem:DEVice:ID? on page 894

System Messages ← System Info

Opens the "System Messages" dialog box that displays the generated system mes-
sages in the order of their occurrence. The most recent messages are placed at the
top of the list. Messages that have occurred since the last display of system messages
menu are marked with an asterisk '*'. The following information is available:

No device-specific error code

Message brief description of the message

Component hardware messages: name of the affected module

software messages: name of the affected software

Date/Time date and time of the occurrence of the message

If the number of error messages exceeds the capacity of the error buffer, "Message
buffer overflow" is displayed. To delete messages see "Clear All Messages"
on page 533 softkey.
Remote command:
SYSTem:ERRor:LIST? on page 897

Clear All Messages ← System Info

Deletes all system messages. The softkey is only available if the "System Messages"
dialog box is displayed.
Remote command:
SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:ALL on page 896

Parameter Coupling
Opens a dialog box to couple or decouple various parameters.
If the coupling of a parameter is on, its value is transferred when you switch from
receiver into another operating mode and vice versa. Coupling of the following parame-
ters is supported.
● Frequency
● Span (start and stop frequencies)
● Marker frequency
● RF attenuation and unit
● 10 dB Minimum Attenuation
● Preamplifier state
● Preselector state
Note that the preselector is always on in receiver mode.
● Audio demodulation settings
● Bandwidth settings (including filter type)

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 533

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

● Limit lines
Limit lines are only transferred if they are compatible to the current diagram config-
uration.
Remote command:
See chapter 10.8.3, "Coupling Parameters", on page 897

Firmware Update
Opens the "Firmware Update" dialog box.
Enter the name of or browse for the firmware installation file and press the "Execute"
button. For details on installation refer to the Quick Start Guide, chapter 3 "Firmware
Update and Installation of Firmware Options".
Only user accounts with administrator rights can perform a firmware update.
Remote command:
SYSTem:FIRMware:UPDate on page 891

Option Licenses
Opens a submenu to install options. For details on options refer to the Quick Start
Guide, chapter 3 "Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware Options".
The submenu contains the following commands:
● "Install Option" on page 534
● "Install Option by XML" on page 534
Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to install options.

Install Option ← Option Licenses

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the license key for the option that you want to install.
If an option is about to expire, a message box is displayed to inform you. You can then
use this softkey to enter a new license key.
If an option has already expired, a message box appears for you to confirm. In this
case, all instrument functions are unavailable (including remote control) until the
R&S ESR is rebooted. You must then use the "Install Option" softkey to enter the new
license key.
For more information about the option in question refer to the System Info softkey in
the "Setup" menu.
Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to install options.

Install Option by XML ← Option Licenses

Opens an edit dialog to install an additional option to the R&S ESR using an XML file.
Enter or browse for the name of an XML file on the instrument that contains the option
key and press "Select".
Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to install options.

Application Setup Recovery

Controls instrument behavior when switching between measurement applications, e.g.
from "Spectrum" to "Analog Demod" and back.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 534

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

If this softkey is activated, the current instrument settings are stored when you switch
to a different application. When you switch back to the previous application, the corre-
sponding instrument settings are restored. Thus, the settings of the individual applica-
tions are independant of each other.
If the softkey is deactivated (default), only a few parameters of the current instrument
setting are passed between applications (e.g. center frequency, level settings).
Note that this setting is not deactivated during a preset operation, i.e. you must deacti-
vate it manually, if necessary.
Remote command:
SYSTem:APPLication:SRECovery[:STATe] on page 890

Preset Receiver
Selects the default settings defined for the Receiver mode to be restored when you
perform an instrument preset.
Remote command:
SYSTem:PRESet:COMPatible on page 892

Preset Spectrum
Selects the default settings defined for the Spectrum mode to be restored when you
perform an instrument preset.
Remote command:
SYSTem:PRESet:COMPatible on page 892

Service
Opens a submenu that contains additional functions for maintenance and/or trouble-
shooting.
NOTICE! Risk of incorrect operation due to Service functions. The service functions
are not necessary for normal measurement operation. However, incorrect use can
affect correct operation and/or data integrity of the R&S ESR.
Therefore, many of the functions can only be used after entering a password. They are
described in the instrument service manual.
The submenu contains the following commands:
● "Input Source" on page 535
● "Reset Password" on page 536
● "Selftest" on page 536
● "Selftest Results" on page 536
● "Password" on page 536
● "Service Function" on page 536
Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to use service functions.

Input Source ← Service

Opens a submenu to select the input source for measurement.
The submenu contains the following options:
● "RF" on page 536
● "Calibration Frequency RF" on page 536

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 535

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

RF ← Input Source ← Service

Switches the input of the R&S ESR to the RF input connector (normal position). This is
the default setting.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 906

Calibration Frequency RF ← Input Source ← Service

Opens an edit dialog box to set the generator frequency for the internal calibration.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:CFRequency on page 906

Reset Password ← Service

Deactivates all set passwords.
Remote command:
SYSTem:PASSword:RESet on page 909

Selftest ← Service
Initiates the self test of the instrument modules to identify a defective module in case of
failure. All modules are checked consecutively and the test result is displayed.
Remote command:
*TST? on page 889

Selftest Results ← Service

Opens the "Selftest Result" dialog box that contains the test results. In case of failure a
short description of the failed test, the defective module, the associated value range
and the corresponding test results are indicated.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:STESt:RESult? on page 907

Password ← Service
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the password. This ensures that the service func-
tions are only used by authorized personnel.
Remote command:
SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable] on page 909

Service Function ← Service

Opens the "Service Function" dialog box to start special service functions. For further
information refer to the service manual.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction on page 908

8.3.2 Activating or Deactivating the LXI Class C Functionality

1. In the Windows "Start" menu, select the "LXI" entry and press the ENTER key.
An LXI configuration dialog box is displayed.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 536

R&S®ESR System Configuration
Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

2. Press the "Rescan" button.

3. Press the "Save" button.

The instrument reboots and after the reboot LXI is active.

4. To deactivate the LXI Class C functionality perform step 1 and 2 again.

An LXI configuration dialog box is displayed.

5. Press the "Turn LXI Off" button.

8.3.3 LXI Class C Functionality

If the LXI Class C functionality is installed and enabled (default state is off; see chap-
ter 8.3.1, "Softkeys of the Setup Menu", on page 514), the instrument can be accessed
via any web browser (e.g. the Microsoft Internet Explorer) to perform the following
tasks:
● modifying network configurations
● modifying device configurations
● monitoring connections from the device to other devices
To change settings, in the web browser, open the "http://<instrument-hostname>" or
"http://<instrument-ip-address>" page. The password to change LAN configurations is
LxiWeb.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 537

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key

9 Data Management and Documentation

9.1 Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key

The SAVE/RCL key is used to store and recall an instrument configuration.
The "Save/Recall" menu enables the user to save or recall the configuration file from
the instrument’s internal storage, a memory stick or a network drive. The file can also
include various settings used by the options installed on the instrument. Measurement
results can also be stored; however, it is strongly recommended that you use the "Print
Screen" or "Trace Export" functions instead.

When recalling a saved configuration file, the following restrictions apply:

● Configuration files cannot be transferred from an R&S ESR with a larger frequency
range to one with a smaller frequency range
● Configuration files created on a R&S ESR with certain options in use will not work
on an R&S ESR without these options
● Files created with newer firmware versions may not work with a previous version

Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings

If a transducer file was in use when the save set was stored (with the save item "Cur-
rent Settings" only) it is anticipated that these transducer values should remain valid
after every recall of that save set. Thus, even if the transducer file is changed and the
original save set file is recalled later, the originally stored transducer values are recal-
led and applied to the measurement. In the "Transducer" dialog box, however, the
changed transducer file values are displayed as no updated transducer file was loa-
ded.
The same applies to limit line settings.

If you want to apply the changed transducer values after recalling the save set you
must force the application to reload the transducer file. To do so, simply open the "Edit
Transducer" dialog box and toggle the "X-Axis" option from "lin" to "log" and back. Due
to that change, the transducer file is automatically reloaded, and the changed trans-
ducer values are applied to the current measurement. Now you can create a new save
set with the updated transducer values.
Similarly, if you want to apply the changed limit values after recalling the save set you
must force the application to reload the limit file. To do so, simply open the "Edit Limit
Line" dialog box (see "Edit" on page 221) and toggle the "Y-Axis" unit. Due to that
change, the limit line file is automatically reloaded, and the changed limit values are
applied to the current measurement. Now a new save set with the updated limit values
can be created.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 538

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key

To open the Save/Recall menu

► Press the SAVE/RCL key.

The "Save/Recall" menu is displayed.

Menu and softkey description

● chapter 9.1.1, "Softkeys of the SAVE/RCL Menu", on page 539

Further information
● chapter 9.1.2, "File Selection Dialog Boxes", on page 545
● chapter 9.1.3, "Importing and Exporting I/Q Data", on page 548

9.1.1 Softkeys of the SAVE/RCL Menu

The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Save/Recall" menu.
Save............................................................................................................................ 540
└ Save File / Recall File................................................................................... 540
└ Select Path....................................................................................................540
└ Select File..................................................................................................... 540
└ Edit File Name.............................................................................................. 540
└ Edit Comment............................................................................................... 540
└ Select Items.................................................................................................. 540
└ Select Items........................................................................................ 540
└ Enable all Items.................................................................................. 541
└ Disable all Items................................................................................. 541
└ Delete File.....................................................................................................541
Recall.......................................................................................................................... 541
Startup Recall..............................................................................................................541
└ Startup Recall (On/Off)................................................................................. 542
└ Select Dataset...............................................................................................542
ScreenShot................................................................................................................. 542
Export..........................................................................................................................542
└ ASCII Trace Export....................................................................................... 542
└ Decim Sep.................................................................................................... 543
└ IQ Export.......................................................................................................543
Import.......................................................................................................................... 543
└ IQ Import....................................................................................................... 543
File Manager............................................................................................................... 543
└ Edit Path....................................................................................................... 543
└ New Folder....................................................................................................544
└ Copy..............................................................................................................544
└ Rename........................................................................................................ 544
└ Cut................................................................................................................ 544
└ Paste.............................................................................................................544
└ Delete............................................................................................................544
└ Sort Mode..................................................................................................... 544
└ Name.................................................................................................. 544

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 539

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key

└ Date.................................................................................................... 544
└ Extension............................................................................................ 544
└ Size.....................................................................................................544
└ File Lists (1/2)............................................................................................... 545
└ Current File List (1/2).................................................................................... 545
└ Network Drive............................................................................................... 545
└ Map Network Drive............................................................................. 545
└ Disconnect Network Drive.................................................................. 545

Save
Opens the "Save" dialog box to define which measurement settings and results to
store. To navigate in the dialog box and define/enter data, use the corresponding soft-
keys.
For details see also chapter 9.1.2, "File Selection Dialog Boxes", on page 545.

Save File / Recall File ← Save

Saves the settings file with the defined file name ("Save" dialog box), or recalls the
selected settings file ("Recall" dialog box).
You can assign stored settings files to user-definable softkeys in the "User" menu for
easy access, see chapter 8.2, "User-Defined Menu – USER key", on page 512 .
Remote command:
MMEMory:STORe<n>:STATe on page 918
MMEMory:STORe<n>:STATe:NEXT on page 918
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe on page 916

Select Path ← Save

Opens the directory list to select the drive and folder for the settings file to be stored or
loaded. The default path is C:\r_s\instr\user.

Select File ← Save

Sets the focus on the "Files" list.
Remote command:
MMEMory:CATalog? on page 910

Edit File Name ← Save

Sets the focus on the "File Name" field.

Edit Comment ← Save

Sets the focus on the "Comment" field to enter a comment for the settings file. Max. 60
characters are allowed.

Select Items ← Save

Displays the submenu for selecting the items to be stored or loaded.

Select Items ← Select Items ← Save

Sets the focus on the items list. Which items are available depends on the installed
options.
In the "Save" dialog box, all items that can be saved are displayed.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 540

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key

In the "Recall" dialog box, the items saved in the selected file are displayed.
Remote command:
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings on page 955
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL on page 956
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe[:ACTive] on page 956
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL on page 956

Enable all Items ← Select Items ← Save

Selects all items for saving or loading.
Remote command:
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL on page 955

Disable all Items ← Select Items ← Save

Selects none of the items for saving or loading.
Remote command:
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE on page 956

Delete File ← Save

Deletes the selected settings file.
Remote command:
MMEMory:CLEar:STATe 1, on page 915

Recall
Opens the "Recall" dialog box to load a settings file. To navigate in the dialog box, use
the corresponding softkeys.
For details see also chapter 9.1.2, "File Selection Dialog Boxes", on page 545.

Path Directory from which the settings file is loaded. The default path for user
settings files is C:\r_s\instr\user

Files List of stored settings files

File Name Name of settings file

Comment Comment of the settings file

[Items] Items saved in the settings file

Note: After you use the "Recall" function, the history of previous actions is deleted, i.e.
any actions performed previously cannot be undone or redone using the UNDO/REDO
keys.
Remote command:
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe on page 916

Startup Recall
Opens a submenu to activate or deactivate and set up the startup recall function.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 541

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key

Startup Recall (On/Off) ← Startup Recall

Activates or deactivates the startup recall function. If activated, the settings stored in
the file selected via the Select Dataset softkey are loaded when booting or for preset. If
deactivated, the default settings are loaded.
Remote command:
MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO on page 916

Select Dataset ← Startup Recall

Opens the "Startup Recall" dialog box to select the settings file for the startup recall
function.

ScreenShot
Saves the current measurement screen as a file (screenshot). This function can also
be performed via the "Screenshot" icon in the toolbar, if available.
Remote command:
HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>] on page 933

Export
Opens a submenu to configure data export.

ASCII Trace Export ← Export

Opens the "ASCII Trace Export Name" dialog box and saves the active trace in ASCII
format to the specified file and directory.
Tip: You can export a single trace ("ASCII Trace Export Trace (x)" softkey) or all traces
at the same time ("ASCII Trace Export All Traces"). When you use single trace export,
the R&S ESR exports the currently selected trace (indicated by the softkey label). Note
that the exported ASCII file has a slightly different structure compared to a single trace
export.
The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a data sec-
tion containing the trace data. For details on an ASCII file see chapter 5.3.1.6, "ASCII
File Export Format", on page 409.
This format can be processed by spreadsheet calculation programs, e.g. MS-Excel. It
is necessary to define ';' as a separator for the data import. Different language versions
of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point. It is there-
fore possible to select between separators '.' (decimal point) and ',' (comma) using the
"Decim Sep" softkey (see "Decim Sep" on page 209).
If the spectrogram display is selected when you perform this function, the entire histo-
gram buffer with all frames is exported to a file. The data corresponding to a particular
frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was
recorded. For large history buffers the export operation may take some time.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:TRACes on page 615
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 820
MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe on page 821
MMEMory:STORe:SGRam on page 621

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 542

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key

Decim Sep ← Export

IQ Export ← Export
Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be
stored. This function is only available in single sweep mode.
For details see chapter 9.1.3, "Importing and Exporting I/Q Data", on page 548.
Remote command:
MMEMory:STORe:IQ:STATe on page 918
MMEMory:STORe:IQ:COMM on page 917

Import
Provides functions to import data.

IQ Import ← Import
Opens a file selection dialog box to select an import file that contains IQ data. This
function is only available in single sweep mode.
For details see chapter 9.1.3, "Importing and Exporting I/Q Data", on page 548.
Remote command:
MMEMory:LOAD:IQ:STATe on page 859

File Manager
Opens the "File Manager" dialog box and a submenu to manage mass storage media
and files. In the upper left corner, the current drive is displayed. Below the folders and
subfolders of the current directory are displayed.
For details on navigation see also chapter 9.1.2, "File Selection Dialog Boxes",
on page 545.
The following tasks can be performed:
● copying files from flash disk to other media
● copying files into another directory
● renaming and deleting files

Edit Path ← File Manager

Opens the directory list to select the drive and folder for the file to be stored or loaded.
The default path is C:\r_s\instr\user.
Remote command:
MMEMory:MSIS on page 914
MMEMory:CDIRectory on page 911

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 543

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key

New Folder ← File Manager

Creates a new folder and opens an edit dialog box to enter name and path (absolute or
relative to the current directory) of the new folder.
Remote command:
MMEMory:MDIRectory on page 913

Copy ← File Manager

Copies the selected item to the clipboard. The item can be copied later using the Paste
softkey.
Remote command:
MMEMory:COPY on page 912

Rename ← File Manager

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a new file or folder name.
Remote command:
MMEMory:MOVE on page 913

Cut ← File Manager

Copies the selected file to the clipboard. If the file is later copied to a different directory
using the Paste softkey, it is deleted in the current directory.

Paste ← File Manager

Copies a file from the clipboard to the currently selected directory.

Delete ← File Manager

Deletes the selected item after confirmation.
Remote command:
MMEMory:DELete on page 913
MMEMory:RDIRectory on page 915

Sort Mode ← File Manager

Opens a submenu to select the sorting mode for the displayed files. The entry for the
next higher directory level ("..") and the folders are always located at the top of the list.

Name ← Sort Mode ← File Manager

Sorts the displayed files in alphabetical order of the file names.

Date ← Sort Mode ← File Manager

Sorts the displayed files in respect to the date.

Extension ← Sort Mode ← File Manager

Sorts the displayed files in respect to the extension.

Size ← Sort Mode ← File Manager

Sorts the displayed files in respect to the size.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 544

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key

File Lists (1/2) ← File Manager

Splits the screen to copy files from one directory to the other. The focus between the
two panes is switched using the FIELD RIGHT and FIELD LEFT keys.

Current File List (1/2) ← File Manager

Changes the focus to the selected file list.

Network Drive ← File Manager

Opens the "Map Network Drive" dialog box and submenu.

Map Network Drive ← Network Drive ← File Manager

Sets the focus on the "Drive" list.
Remote command:
MMEMory:NETWork:MAP on page 958
MMEMory:NETWork:USEDdrives? on page 959
MMEMory:NETWork:UNUSeddrives? on page 958

Disconnect Network Drive ← Network Drive ← File Manager

Opens the "Disconnect Network Drive" dialog box. In the "Drive" list, select the drive
you want to disconnect and confirm with "OK".
Remote command:
MMEMory:NETWork:DISConnect on page 958

9.1.2 File Selection Dialog Boxes

The "Save" and "Recall" dialog boxes are used to save and recall settings and data
files. The "File Manager" allows you to copy, delete or rename data files on the
R&S ESR. These and other file selection dialog boxes are very similar.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 545

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key

Drive
The data is stored on the internal flash disk or, if selected, on a memory stick or net-
work drive. The mass media are assigned to the volume names as follows:

Drive Designation Comment

C operating system, firmware and stored instrument for customer data

settings

A USB floppy drive if connected

D USB memory stick or USB CD-ROM if connected

E …Z additional USB mass storage devices or mounted if connected

LAN volumes

Path
The current path contains the drive and the complete file path to the currently selected
folder.
To set the focus on the "Path" list, press the Select Path/ Edit Path softkey.

Files
This list contains the files and folders contained in the currently selected path.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 546

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key

To set the focus on the "Files" list, press the Select File softkey.

File Name
The "File Name" field contains the name of the data file without the path or extension.
To set the focus on "File Name" field, press the Edit File Name softkey.
In the "Save" dialog box, the field already contains a suggestion for a new name: the
file name used in the last saving process is used, extended by an index. For example,
if the name last used was test_004, the new name test_005 is suggested, but only
if this name is not in use. You can change the suggested name as you like.
By default, the name of a settings file consists of a base name followed by an under-
score and three numbers, e.g. limit_lines_005. In the example, the base name is
limit_lines. The base name can contain characters, numbers and underscores.
The file extension dfl is added automatically.

Comment
The comment is optional and may contain a description for the data file.
To set the focus on the "Comment" field, press the Edit Comment softkey.

Items
When saving data files you can select which data and settings are stored; when recall-
ing such files, this field indicates which items were included during storage. In the "File
Manager", this field is not available.
Which items are available depends on the installed options. The following items may
be included:

Item Description

Current Settings Current measurement settings

All Transducers Transducer factors for all active transducers.

All Traces All active traces; R&S FSV-K30 only: also calibration data

All Limit Lines All limit lines (Note: information on which limit lines are active is stored with
the "Current Settings")

Spectrograms Spectrogram trace data (only available if spectrogram display is currently

active, R&S FSV-K14 only)

Noise - ENR Data in "ENR Settings" dialog box (R&S FSV-K30 only)

Noise - Loss Settings Data in "Loss Settings" dialog box (R&S FSV-K30 only)

Noise - Calibration data Results from calibration measurement (R&S FSV-K30 only)

K40 Results All current phase noise trace results (R&S FSV-K40 only)

WLAN Results Stores the trace and table results for WLAN measurements(R&S FSV-K91
only)

WLAN IQ Data Stores the measured I/Q data (R&S FSV-K91 only)

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 547

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key

Item Description

WLAN User Limits Stores any limit values modified in the table of results for WLAN measure-
ments (R&S FSV-K91 only)

WiMAX Results Stores the trace and table results for WiMAX measurements(R&S FSV-K93
only)

9.1.3 Importing and Exporting I/Q Data

In addition to instrument settings and displayed traces, also captured I/Q data can be
exported to a file on the R&S ESR. The stored data can then be imported again at a
later time, also by different applications, for further processing.
As opposed to storing trace data, which may be averaged or restricted to peak values,
I/Q data is stored as it was captured, without further processing. The data is stored as
complex values in 32-bit floating-point format. The I/Q data is stored in a packed format
with the file extension .iq.tar.
The IQ Import and IQ Export functions are available from the "Save/Recall" menu,
which is displayed when you press the SAVE/RCL key on the front panel.
They can also be performed remotely using the following commands:
MMEMory:STORe:IQ:STATe on page 918
MMEMory:LOAD:IQ:STATe on page 859

9.1.3.1 iq-tar File Format Specification

I/Q data is stored in a compressed format with the file extension .iq.tar.
An .iq.tar file contains I/Q data in binary format together with meta information that
describes the nature and the source of data, e.g. the sample rate. The objective of
the .iq.tar file format is to separate I/Q data from the meta information while still
having both inside one file. In addition, the file format allows you to preview the I/Q
data in a web browser, and allows you to include user-specific data.

Contained files
An iq-tar file must contain the following files:
● I/Q parameter XML file, e.g. xyz.xml
Contains meta information about the I/Q data (e.g. sample rate). The filename can
be defined freely, but there must be only one single I/Q parameter XML file inside
an iq-tar file.
● I/Q data binary file, e.g. xyz.complex.float32
Contains the binary I/Q data of all channels. There must be only one single I/Q
data binary file inside an iq-tar file.
Optionally, an iq-tar file can contain the following file:
● I/Q preview XSLT file, e.g. open_IqTar_xml_file_in_web_browser.xslt

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 548

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key

Contains a stylesheet to display the I/Q parameter XML file and a preview of the
I/Q data in a web browser.

I/Q Parameter XML File Specification

The content of the I/Q parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema
RsIqTar.xsd available at: http://www.rohde-schwarz.com/file/RsIqTar.xsd.
In particular, the order of the XML elements must be respected, i.e. iq-tar uses an
"ordered XML schema". For your own implementation of the iq-tar file format make
sure to validate your XML file against the given schema.
The following example shows an I/Q parameter XML file. The XML elements and attrib-
utes are explained in the following sections.

Sample I/Q parameter XML file: xyz.xml

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<?xml-stylesheet type="text/xsl"
href="open_IqTar_xml_file_in_web_browser.xslt"?>
<RS_IQ_TAR_FileFormat fileFormatVersion="1"
xsi:noNamespaceSchemaLocation="RsIqTar.xsd"
xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance">
<Name>FSV-K10</Name>
<Comment>Here is a comment</Comment>
<DateTime>2011-01-24T14:02:49</DateTime>
<Samples>68751</Samples>
<Clock unit="Hz">6.5e+006</Clock>
<Format>complex</Format>
<DataType>float32</DataType>
<ScalingFactor unit="V">1</ScalingFactor>
<NumberOfChannels>1</NumberOfChannels>
<DataFilename>xyz.complex.float32</DataFilename>
<UserData>
<UserDefinedElement>Example</UserDefinedElement>
</UserData>
<PreviewData>...</PreviewData>
</RS_IQ_TAR_FileFormat>

Element Description

RS_IQ_TAR_FileFormat The root element of the XML file. It must contain the attribute
fileFormatVersion that contains the number of the file format definition.
Currently, fileFormatVersion "2" is used.

Name Optional: describes the device or application that created the file.

Comment Optional: contains text that further describes the contents of the file.

DateTime Contains the date and time of the creation of the file. Its type is xs:dateTime
(see RsIqTar.xsd).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 549

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key

Element Description

Samples Contains the number of samples of the I/Q data. For multi-channel signals all
channels have the same number of samples. One sample can be:
● A complex number represented as a pair of I and Q values
● A complex number represented as a pair of magnitude and phase values
● A real number represented as a single real value
See also Format element.

Clock Contains the clock frequency in Hz, i.e. the sample rate of the I/Q data. A signal
generator typically outputs the I/Q data at a rate that equals the clock frequency.
If the I/Q data was captured with a signal analyzer, the signal analyzer used the
clock frequency as the sample rate. The attribute unit must be set to "Hz".

Format Specifies how the binary data is saved in the I/Q data binary file (see
DataFilename element). Every sample must be in the same format. The for-
mat can be one of the following:
● Complex: Complex number in cartesian format, i.e. I and Q values inter-
leaved. I and Q are unitless
● Real: Real number (unitless)
● Polar: Complex number in polar format, i.e. magnitude (unitless) and phase
(rad) values interleaved. Requires DataType = float32 or float64

DataType Specifies the binary format used for samples in the I/Q data binary file (see
DataFilename element and "I/Q Data Binary File" on page 552). The follow-
ing data types are allowed:
● int8: 8 bit signed integer data
● int16: 16 bit signed integer data
● int32: 32 bit signed integer data
● float32: 32 bit floating point data (IEEE 754)
● float64: 64 bit floating point data (IEEE 754)

ScalingFactor Optional: describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the
unit Volt. The binary I/Q data itself has no unit. To get an I/Q sample in the unit
Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value of the
ScalingFactor. For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied.
For multi-channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels.
The ScalingFactor must be > 0. If the ScalingFactor element is not
defined, a value of 1 V is assumed.

NumberOfChannels Optional: specifies the number of channels, e.g. of a MIMO signal, contained in
the I/Q data binary file. For multi-channels, the I/Q samples of the channels are
expected to be interleaved within the I/Q data file (see "I/Q Data Binary File"
on page 552). If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined, one channel
is assumed.

DataFilename Contains the filename of the I/Q data binary file that is part of the iq-tar file.
It is recommended that the filename uses the following convention:
<xyz>.<Format>.<Channels>ch.<Type>
● <xyz> = a valid Windows file name
● <Format> = complex, polar or real (see Format element)
● <Channels> = Number of channels (see NumberOfChannels element)
● <Type> = float32, float64, int8, int16, int32 or int64 (see DataType ele-
ment)
Examples:
● xyz.complex.1ch.float32
● xyz.polar.1ch.float64
● xyz.real.1ch.int16
● xyz.complex.16ch.int8

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 550

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key

Element Description

UserData Optional: contains user, application or device-specific XML data which is not
part of the iq-tar specification. This element can be used to store additional
information, e.g. the hardware configuration. It is recommended that you add
user data as XML content.

PreviewData Optional: contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the I/Q data.
The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an iq-tar file (e.g.
R&S ESR). For the definition of this element refer to the RsIqTar.xsd
schema. Note that the preview can be only displayed by current web browsers
that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet
open_IqTar_xml_file_in_web_browser.xslt is available.

Example: ScalingFactor
Data stored as int16 and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V
ScalingFactor = 1 V / maximum int16 value = 1 V / 215 = 3.0517578125e-5 V

Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFac-

tor

Minimum (negative) int16 value - 215 = - 32768 -1 V

Maximum (positive) int16 value 215-1= 32767 0.999969482421875 V

Example: PreviewData in XML

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 551

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key

...
<float>-94</float>
</ArrayOfFloat>
</Min>
<Max>
<ArrayOfFloat length="256">
<float>-25</float>
<float>1</float>
...
<float>1</float>
</ArrayOfFloat>
</Max>
</Spectrum>
</Channel>
</ArrayOfChannel>
</PreviewData>

I/Q Data Binary File

The I/Q data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified
in the XML file (see Format element and DataType element). To allow reading and
writing of streamed I/Q data all data is interleaved, i.e. complex values are interleaved
pairs of I and Q values and multi-channel signals contain interleaved (complex) sam-
ples for channel 1, channel 2, channel 3 etc.

Example: NumberOfChannels - Element ordering for complex cartesian data

Complex data: I[channel no][time index], Q[channel no][time index]

I[0][0], Q[0][0], // Channel 0, Complex sample 0

I[1][0], Q[1][0], // Channel 1, Complex sample 0
I[2][0], Q[2][0], // Channel 2, Complex sample 0

I[0][1], Q[0][1], // Channel 0, Complex sample 1

I[1][1], Q[1][1], // Channel 1, Complex sample 1
I[2][1], Q[2][1], // Channel 2, Complex sample 1

I[0][2], Q[0][2], // Channel 0, Complex sample 2

I[1][2], Q[1][2], // Channel 1, Complex sample 2
I[2][2], Q[2][2], // Channel 2, Complex sample 2

I[0][3], Q[0][3], // Channel 0, Complex sample 3

I[1][3], Q[1][3], // Channel 1, Complex sample 3
I[2][3], Q[2][3], // Channel 2, Complex sample 3

...

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 552

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Measurement Documentation – PRINT Key

9.2 Measurement Documentation – PRINT Key

The PRINT key is used to select and configure the printer and to customize the screen
printout. For detailed information on printer selection and installation refer to the
R&S ESR Getting Started.

To open the Print menu

► Press the PRINT key.

The "Print" menu is displayed.

Softkeys of the Print Menu

The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Print" menu. It is possible that
your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available
with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in
the corresponding softkey description.
Print Screen................................................................................................................ 553
Device Setup...............................................................................................................554
Device (1/2).................................................................................................................554
Colors..........................................................................................................................554
└ Select Print Color Set....................................................................................554
└ Color (On/Off)............................................................................................... 554
└ Select Object.................................................................................................555
└ Predefined Colors......................................................................................... 555
└ User Defined Colors......................................................................................555
└ Set to Default................................................................................................ 555
Comment.....................................................................................................................555
Install Printer............................................................................................................... 555
Report......................................................................................................................... 555

Print Screen
Starts to printout all test results displayed on the screen: diagrams, traces, markers,
marker lists, limit lines etc. Comments, title, date, and time are included at the bottom
margin of the printout. All displayed items belonging to the instrument software (soft-
keys, tables, dialog boxes) are not printed out.
The output is defined via the "Device Setup" on page 554 softkey. If the output is
saved in a file, the file name used in the last saving process is counted up to the next
unused name. If you use a file name that already exists, upon saving, a message is
displayed. Selecting "Yes" overwrites the existing file, selecting "No" aborts the saving
process. For further details on the file name and an example, refer to the "Save/
Recall" menu, "Edit File Name" on page 540 softkey.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 553

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Measurement Documentation – PRINT Key

Path Directory in which the file is stored. The default path is C:\r_s\instr\user

Files List of the existing files in the same format

File Name Name of the file

Remote command:
HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>] on page 933
HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]:NEXT on page 934
HCOPy:ITEM:ALL on page 932

Device Setup
Opens the "Hardcopy Setup" dialog box to define the output: image file, clipboard, or
the printer. The dialog box consists of two tabs which are selected via the "Device
(1/2)" on page 554 softkey.
For further information refer to the R&S ESR Getting Started.
Remote command:
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2> on page 931
HCOPy:DESTination<1|2> on page 930
HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation<1|2> on page 933
HCOPy:TDSTamp:STATe<1|2> on page 933
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt? on page 935
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT]? on page 935

Device (1/2)
Selects the tab of the device in the "Device Setup" dialog box. The analyzer is able to
manage two print settings independently of each other. For each device the print set-
ting is displayed on the corresponding tab of the "Device Setup" dialog box ( "Device
Setup" on page 554 softkey).
For further information refer to the R&S ESR Getting Started.

Colors
Opens a submenu to define the colors to be used. For details see "Print Colors"
on page 531 softkey of the "Setup" menu.
The submenu contains the following commands:
● "Select Print Color Set" on page 554
● "Color (On/Off)" on page 554
● "Select Object" on page 555
● "Predefined Colors" on page 555
● "User Defined Colors" on page 555
● "Set to Default" on page 555

Select Print Color Set ← Colors

For details see "Select Print Color Set" on page 531 softkey of the "Setup" menu.

Color (On/Off) ← Colors

For details see "Color (On/Off)" on page 530 softkey of the "Setup" menu.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 554

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Working with Test Reports

Select Object ← Colors

For details see "Select Object" on page 530 softkey of the "Setup" menu.

Predefined Colors ← Colors

For details see "Predefined Colors" on page 530 softkey of the "Setup" menu.

User Defined Colors ← Colors

For details see "User Defined Colors" on page 531 softkey of the "Setup" menu.

Set to Default ← Colors

For details see "Set to Default" on page 531 softkey of the "Setup" menu.

Comment
Opens dialog box to enter a comment. Max. 120 characters are allowed. 60 characters
fit in one line. In the first line, at any point a manual line-feed can be forced by entering
"@".
Date and time are inserted automatically. The comment is printed below the diagram
area, but not displayed on the screen. If a comment should not be printed, it must be
deleted.
For details on the alphanumeric entries refer to the R&S ESR Getting Started, "Basic
Operations".
Remote command:
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TEXT on page 933

Install Printer
Opens the "Printers and Faxes" window to install a new printer. All printers that are
already installed are displayed.
For further information refer to the R&S ESR Getting Started, appendix 1, "Printer
Interface".
Only user accounts with administrator rights can install a printer.

Report
Provides access to the test report tool. For more information see chapter 9.3, "Working
with Test Reports", on page 555.

9.3 Working with Test Reports

The R&S ESR features a test report generator. A test report is a document that sum-
marizes the results and configuration of measurements.
A test report is made up out of one or more datasets. Each dataset contains the results
and configuration of one measurement.
● Designing a Test Report Template....................................................................... 556
● Creating a Test Report..........................................................................................559

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 555

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Working with Test Reports

9.3.1 Designing a Test Report Template

The R&S ESR allows you to create test report templates, for example if you handle dif-
ferent measurement tasks that require different information or a different layout in the
test report. The following topics show you ways to customize your test reports and
save those settings in a template.
Selecting the Test Report Contents............................................................................ 556
Designing the Header of the Test Report....................................................................557
Defining the Contents of the Title Page...................................................................... 558
Managing Templates...................................................................................................559

Selecting the Test Report Contents

The "Configuration" tab selects the information that each dataset in the test report con-
tains. You can add or remove the items as required.

You can select to include the following types of information. (Note that the Spectrum
application does not support all elements.)
● Header
Adds a page header to the dataset.
For more information see "Designing the Header of the Test Report"
on page 557.
● Settings
Adds the general measurement configuration to the dataset (for example the fre-
quency range, the resolution bandwidth or the measurement time).
● Scan Table
Adds the configuration for each scan subrange as defined in the scan table to the
dataset. For more information see chapter 4.3.7.2, "Scan Table", on page 198.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 556

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Working with Test Reports

● Diagram
Adds a screenshot of the scan trace to the dataset.
● Final Results
Adds the (numerical) results of the final measurement to the dataset.
● Transducer Table
Adds the transducers that you are using for the measurement, and their character-
istics to the dataset.
For more information see "Transducer" on page 516.
● Scan Result List
Adds the numerical scan results to the dataset.
Note that the test report will show only the results of the first 50000 measurement
points. The rest is cut off.
● IF Analysis
Adds a screenshot of the IF analysis trace to the dataset.
● Spectrogram
Adds a screenshot of the spectrogram trace to the dataset.
● IF Analysis Spectrogram
Adds a screenshot of the IF analysis spectrogram trace to the dataset.
● Markers
Adds the marker information to the dataset.
● Date
Adds a time stamp to the dataset (system date and time).
● Page Count
Adds a page count to the dataset.
Remote command:
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect on page 936

Designing the Header of the Test Report

The "Header" tab selects the information displayed in the page header.
You can create page headers consisting of up to seven lines, plus one picture (for
example a company logo). Each of the seven lines consists of a title (which is printed
in bold characters) and a value (which is displayed next to the title, but in normal char-
acters). In addition, you can select how each line in the header is treated (the visibil-
ity).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 557

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Working with Test Reports

● Title
Defines a name for a variable that has different values depending on the measure-
ment (for example the name of the EUT). The firmware comes with some prede-
fined titles, but you can change and customize each title.
● Value
Defines the value of the variable defined by the title.
● Visibility
Selects if a line in the page header is displayed on every page in the report
("Always"), on the first page of a dataset ("Once") or not at all ("Never").
By default, all lines are displayed on all pages in the report.
Adding a logo
The page header may also contain a picture or logo. You can upload a picture with the
"..." symbol. The "..." symbol opens a dialog box to select a file.
Reports in rtf format support pictures in bmp or jpg format. Reports in pdf format sup-
port pictures in bmp, jpg and png format.
Similar to the alphanumeric lines in the header, you can select the visibility for the logo
as well. By default, the logo is not displayed in the report.
Remote command:
Title: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:TITLe on page 940
Value: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:TEXT on page 939
Visibility: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:CONTrol on page 938
Selection of logo: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO on page 940
Visibility of logo: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO:CONTrol on page 941

Defining the Contents of the Title Page

The "Title" tab defines the contents of the first page of the test report (title page).
You can define a title for the test report, which is printed in big and bold letters on the
first page, and a short description of the contents of the test report (or the name of the
author or something similar). This description is also part of the first test report page,
but is printed in normal letters.
In addition you can select the format of the test report (either DIN A4 or US letter size).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 558

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Working with Test Reports

Remote command:
Title: HCOPy:TREPort:TITLe on page 942
Description: HCOPy:TREPort:DESCription on page 941

Managing Templates
The "Templates" tab allows you manage test report templates.

● Load
Restores the selected test report configuration.
● Save
Saves the current test report configuration. Before you save the configuration as a
template, enter a name for the template in the corresponding field.
● Delete
Deletes the selected test report template.
The table shows all available templates, including the application it has been created in
(Receiver, Spectrum, I/Q Analyzer or Realtime).

9.3.2 Creating a Test Report

► In the "Test Report" softkey menu, press the "Save" button.

The R&S ESR opens the "Test Report Content Selection" dialog box that contains
all necessary functions to create a test report.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 559

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Working with Test Reports

Test report limitations

The size of the test report is limited to about 50.000 measurement points.
If the number of measurement points is greater than that value, only the first 50.000
values are written to the report. The rest will be left out.
Try to do an ASCII file export when you have more measurement points.

Configuring and Printing the Test Report....................................................................560

Adding and Removing Datasets..................................................................................561
Selecting Datasets for the Report............................................................................... 561

Configuring and Printing the Test Report

You can save the test report either as a pdf document or an rtf document in the corre-
sponding dropdown menu in the "Test Report Content Selection" dialog box.
The "Preview" button opens a preview version of the test report. Available for test
reports in pdf format.
The "Save" button saves the test report in the directory you have specified in the input
field next to the "Save" button. You can specify the directory with the "..." button or by
entering a path and filename into the input field.
Remote command:
Print report: HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>] on page 933
Report name and directory: MMEMory:NAME on page 914
Format: HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2> on page 931

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 560

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Working with Test Reports

Adding and Removing Datasets

Before you can print a test report, you have to fill it with data.
Data in case of the test report comes in datasets. Each dataset contains the results of
one measurement.
The "New" button or softkey creates a new test report. The last measurement result is
added to the report. If you create a new report, the datasets of the previous report are
lost.
The "Append" button or softkey adds a dataset to the current report.
The "Remove" button removes the selected dataset.
The "Remove Selection" removes all currently selected datasets.
Note that a test report has to contain at least one dataset.
When you add a dataset ("New" or "Append"), the R&S ESR opens a dialog box to
define the values of the header variables.

Enter descriptions of the variables as required.

For more information on changing the labels of the header see "Designing the Header
of the Test Report" on page 557
Remote command:
New report: HCOPy:TREPort:NEW on page 944
Add dataset: HCOPy:TREPort:APPend on page 944
Remove single dataset: HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove on page 944
Remove several datasets: HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove:SELected
on page 945

Selecting Datasets for the Report

When you add a dataset to the report, it is automatically included in the test report. You
can exclude a dataset from the test report without removing the data itself in the "Add"
column of the "Test Report Content Selection" dialog box: if a dataset is not checked in
that column, the data is still available, but not part of the test report.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 561

R&S®ESR Data Management and Documentation
Working with Test Reports

To make selecting datasets easier, the R&S ESR provides the "Select All" (selects all
datasets), "Deselect All" (selects no dataset) and "Invert Selection" (selects all cur-
rently deselected datasets and vice versa) buttons.
Remote command:
Select a single dataset: HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:SELect on page 945
Select all datasets: HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:SELect:ALL on page 945
Invert selection: HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:SELect:INVert on page 946
Select no dataset: HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:SELect:NONE on page 946

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 562

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

10 Remote Control
● Remote Control - Basics....................................................................................... 563
● Selecting the Operating Mode...............................................................................604
● Remote Commands in Receiver Mode................................................................. 605
● Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode................................................. 688
● Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode............................................................857
● Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator........................................870
● Common Commands............................................................................................ 885
● System Configuration............................................................................................889
● Data Management.................................................................................................909
● Using Transducers................................................................................................ 919
● Documentation......................................................................................................927
● Working with Test Reports.................................................................................... 936
● Display Configuration............................................................................................ 947
● Network Connection..............................................................................................957
● Status Register......................................................................................................963
● Remote Control – Programming Examples...........................................................967
● GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E............ 1009

10.1 Remote Control - Basics

This chapter provides basic information on operating an instrument via remote control.

The computer that is used for remote operation is called "controller" here.

10.1.1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols

The instrument supports different interfaces for remote control. The following table
gives an overview.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 563

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

Table 10-1: Remote control interfaces and protocols

Interface Protocols, VISA*) Remarks

address string

Local Area Protocols: A LAN connector is located on the rear panel of the instrument.
Network ● HiSLIP High-Speed The interface is based on TCP/IP and supports various proto-
(LAN) LAN Instrument cols.
Protocol (IVI-6.1)
TCPIP:: For a description of the protocols refer to:
host address:: ● HiSLIP Protocol
hislip0[:: ● "VXI-11 Protocol" on page 567
INSTR] ● Socket Communication
● VXI-11 ● "RSIB Protocol" on page 568
● socket communi- ● "Telnet Protocol" on page 569
cation (Raw Ether-
net, simple Telnet)
TCPIP::
host address[::
LAN device name]:
:<port>::SOCKET
Library: VISA or
socketcontroller
● RSIB
● simple telnet (Raw
Ethernet)
VISA*) address string:
TCPIP::host
address[::LAN device
name][::INSTR]

GPIB (IEC/ VISA*) address string: A GPIB bus interface according to the IEC 625.1/IEEE 488.1
IEEE Bus standard is located on the rear panel of the instrument.
GPIB::primary
Interface)
address[::INSTR] For a description of the interface refer to chapter 10.1.1.4,
"GPIB Interface (IEC 625/IEEE 418 Bus Interface)",
(no secondary address)
on page 569.

*)VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate
with instruments. A VISA installation on the controller is a prerequisite for remote control using the indica-
ted interfaces (see also chapter 10.1.1.1, "VISA Libraries", on page 565).

Within this interface description, the term GPIB is used as a synonym for the IEC/IEEE
bus interface.

SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments)

SCPI commands - messages - are used for remote control. Commands that are not
taken from the SCPI standard follow the SCPI syntax rules. The instrument supports
the SCPI version 1999. The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488.2 and aims
at the standardization of device-specific commands, error handling and the status reg-
isters. The tutorial "Automatic Measurement Control - A tutorial on SCPI and IEEE
488.2" from John M. Pieper (R&S order number 0002.3536.00) offers detailed informa-
tion on concepts and definitions of SCPI.
The requirements that the SCPI standard places on command syntax, error handling
and configuration of the status registers are explained in detail in the following sec-

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 564

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

tions. Tables provide a fast overview of the bit assignment in the status registers. The
tables are supplemented by a comprehensive description of the status registers.

10.1.1.1 VISA Libraries

VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to
communicate with instruments. The I/O channel (LAN or TCP/IP, USB, GPIB,...) is
selected at initialization time by means of the channel–specific address string ("VISA
resource string") indicated in table 10-1, or by an appropriately defined VISA alias
(short name). A VISA installation is a prerequisite for remote control using the VXI-11,
raw socket, RSIB or the newer HiSLIP protocol. The necessary VISA library is availa-
ble as a separate product. For details contact your local R&S sales representative.
For more information on VISA refer to the user documentation.

10.1.1.2 Messages

The messages transferred on the data lines are divided into the following categories:
● Interface messages
Interface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines, with the
attention line being active (LOW). They are used to communicate between the con-
troller and the instrument. Interface messages can only be sent by instruments that
have GPIB bus functionality. For details see the sections for the required interface.
● Instrument messages
Instrument messages are employed in the same way for all interfaces, if not indica-
ted otherwise in the description. Structure and syntax of the instrument messages
are described in chapter 10.1.4, "SCPI Command Structure", on page 574. A
detailed description of all messages available for the instrument is provided in the
chapter "Remote Control Commands".
There are different types of instrument messages, depending on the direction they
are sent:
– Commands
– Instrument responses

Commands
Commands (program messages) are messages the controller sends to the instrument.
They operate the instrument functions and request information. The commands are
subdivided according to two criteria:
● According to the effect they have on the instrument:
– Setting commands cause instrument settings such as a reset of the instru-
ment or setting the frequency.
– Queries cause data to be provided for remote control, e.g. for identification of
the instrument or polling a parameter value. Queries are formed by directly
appending a question mark to the command header.
● According to their definition in standards:
– Common commands: their function and syntax are precisely defined in stand-
ard IEEE 488.2. They are employed identically on all instruments (if implemen-

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 565

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

ted). They refer to functions such as management of the standardized status

registers, reset and self-test.
– Instrument control commands refer to functions depending on the features of
the instrument such as frequency settings. Many of these commands have also
been standardized by the SCPI committee. These commands are marked as
"SCPI confirmed" in the command reference chapters. Commands without this
SCPI label are device-specific; however, their syntax follows SCPI rules as per-
mitted by the standard.

Instrument responses
Instrument responses (response messages and service requests) are messages the
instrument sends to the controller after a query. They can contain measurement
results, instrument settings and information on the instrument status.

10.1.1.3 LAN Interface

To be integrated in a LAN, the instrument is equipped with a LAN interface, consisting

of a connector, a network interface card and protocols. The network card can be oper-
ated with a 10 MHz Ethernet IEEE 802.3 or a 100 MHz Ethernet IEEE 802.3u inter-
face. For remote control via a network, the PC and the instrument must be connected
via the LAN interface to a common network with TCP/IP network protocol. They are
connected using a commercial RJ45 cable (shielded or unshielded twisted pair cate-
gory 5). The TCP/IP network protocol and the associated network services are precon-
figured on the instrument. Software for instrument control and the VISA program library
must be installed on the controller.

VISA library
Instrument access via VXI-11 or RSIB protocols is usually achieved from high level
programming platforms using VISA as an intermediate abstraction layer. VISA encap-
sulates the low level VXI, RSIB or even GPIB function calls and thus makes the trans-
port interface transparent for the user. See chapter 10.1.1.1, "VISA Libraries",
on page 565 for details.

IP address
Only the IP address or a valid DNS host name is required to set up the connection.
The host address is part of the "VISA resource string" used by the programs to identify
and control the instrument.
The VISA resource string has the form:
TCPIP::host address[::LAN device name][::INSTR]
or
TCPIP::host address::port::SOCKET
where:
● TCPIP designates the network protocol used
● host address is the IP address or host name of the device

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 566

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

● LAN device name defines the protocol and the instance number of a sub-instru-
ment;
– inst0 selects the VXI-11 protocol (default)
– hislip0 selects the newer HiSLIP protocol
● INSTR indicates the instrument resource class (optional)
● port determines the used port number
● SOCKET indicates the raw network socket resource class

Example:
● Instrument has the IP address 192.1.2.3; the valid resource string using VXI-11
protocol is:
TCPIP::192.1.2.3::INSTR
● The instrument name is RSFSV; the valid resource string is:
TCPIP::RSFSV::INSTR
● A raw socket connection can be established using:
TCPIP::192.1.2.3::5025::SOCKET
● The DNS host name name is FSV-123456; the valid resource string using HiSLIP
is:
TCPIP::FSV-123456::hislip0

Identifying instruments in a network

If several instruments are connected to the network, each instrument has its own IP
address and associated resource string. The controller identifies these instruments by
means of the resource string.

For details on configuring the LAN connection, see "Setting Up a Network (LAN) Con-
nection" in the R&S ESR Getting Started.

VXI-11 Protocol
The VXI-11 standard is based on the ONC RPC (Open Network Computing Remote
Procedure Call) protocol which in turn relies on TCP/IP as the network/transport layer.
The TCP/IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured.
TCP/IP ensures connection-oriented communication, where the order of the
exchanged messages is adhered to and interrupted links are identified. With this proto-
col, messages cannot be lost.

HiSLIP Protocol
The HiSLIP (High Speed LAN Instrument Protocol) is the successor protocol for
VXI-11 for TCP-based instruments specified by the IVI foundation. The protocol uses
two TCP sockets for a single connection - one for fast data transfer, the other for non-
sequential control commands (e.g. Device Clear or SRQ).
HiSLIP has the following characteristics:
● High performance as with raw socket network connections

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 567

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

● Compatible IEEE 488.2 support for Message Exchange Protocol, Device Clear,
Serial Poll, Remote/Local, Trigger, and Service Request
● Uses a single IANA registered port (4880), which simplifies the configuration of fire-
walls
● Supports simultaneous access of multiple users by providing versatile locking
mechanisms
● Usable for IPv6 or IPv4 networks

Note that HiSLIP data is sent to the device using the "fire and forget" method with
immediate return, as opposed to VXI-11, where each operation is blocked until a
VXI-11 device handshake returns. Thus, a successful return of a VISA operation such
as viWrite() does not guarantee that the instrument has finished or started the
requested command, but is delivered to the TCP/IP buffers.

For more information see also the application note: 1MA208: Fast Remote Instrument
Control with HiSLIP.

Socket Communication
An alternative way for remote control of the software is to establish a simple network
communication using sockets. The socket communication, also referred to as "Raw
Ethernet communication", does not necessarily require a VISA installation on the
remote controller side. It is available by default on all operating systems.
The simplest way to establish socket communication is to use the built-in telnet pro-
gram. The telnet program is part of every operating system and supports a communi-
cation with the software on a command-by-command basis. For more convenience and
to enable automation by means of programs, user-defined sockets can be program-
med.
Socket connections are established on a specially defined port. The socket address is
a combination of the IP address or the host name of the instrument and the number of
the port configured for remote-control. All R&S ESR use port number 5025 for this pur-
pose. The port is configured for communication on a command-to-command basis and
for remote control from a program.

RSIB Protocol
The R&S defined RSIB protocol uses the TCP/IP protocol for communication with the
instrument. Remote control over RSIB is done on a message level basis using the
SCPI command set of the instrument. The RSIB protocol allows you to control the
instrument for example via Visual C++- and Visual Basic programs, via the Windows
applications Word and Excel, as well as via National Instruments LabView, LabWind-
ows/CVI, Agilent VEE and others. The control applications run on an external computer
in the network.

RSIB Interface Functions

The library functions are adapted to the interface functions of National Instruments for
GPIB programming. The functions supported by the libraries are listed in the following
table.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 568

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

Function Description

RSDLLibfind() Provides a handle for access to a device.

RSDLLibwrt() Sends a zero-terminated string to a device.

RSDLLilwrt() Sends a certain number of bytes to a device.

RSDLLibwrtf() Sends the contents of a file to a device.

RSDLLibrd() Reads data from a device into a string.

RSDLLilrd() Reads a certain number of bytes from a device.

RSDLLibrdf() Reads data from a device into a file.

RSDLLibtmo() Sets timeout for RSIB functions.

RSDLLibsre() Switches a device to the local or remote state.

RSDLLibloc() Temporarily switches a device to the local state.

RSDLLibeot() Enables/disables the END message for write operations.

RSDLLibrsp() Performs a serial poll and provides the status byte.

RSDLLibonl() Sets the device online/offline.

RSDLLTestSrq() Checks whether a device has generated an SRQ.

RSDLLWaitSrq() Waits until a device generates an SRQ.

RSDLLSwapBytes Swaps the byte sequence for binary numericdisplay (only required for
non-Intel platforms).

Telnet Protocol
As an alternative to remote control the instrument can use a simple telnet protocol (port
5025). Unlike using the VXI-11 protocol, no VISA installation is necessary on the
remote controller side. This protocol is sometimes also referred to as "socket communi-
cation" or "Raw Ethernet mode". To control the instrument, only a Telnet program is
required. The Telnet program is part of every operating system.

10.1.1.4 GPIB Interface (IEC 625/IEEE 418 Bus Interface)

To be able to control the instrument via the GPIB bus, the instrument and the controller
must be linked by a GPIB bus cable. A GPIB bus card, the card drivers and the pro-
gram libraries for the programming language used must be provided in the controller.
The controller must address the instrument with the GPIB bus address (see "GPIB
Instrument Address" on page 572).

Notes and Conditions

In connection with the GPIB interface, note the following:
● Up to 15 instruments can be connected
● The total cable length is restricted to a maximum of 15 m or 2 m times the number
of devices, whichever is less; the cable lenth between two instruments should not
exceed 2 m.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 569

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

● A wired "OR"-connection is used if several instruments are connected in parallel.

● Any connected IEC-bus cables should be terminated by an instrument or controller.

GPIB Interface Messages

Interface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines, with the atten-
tion line (ATN) being active (LOW). They are used for communication between the
controller and the instrument and can only be sent by a computer which has the func-
tion of a GPIB bus controller. GPIB interface messages can be further subdivided into:
● Universal commands: act on all instruments connected to the GPIB bus without
previous addressing
● Addressed commands: only act on instruments previously addressed as listeners
The following figure provides an overview of the available communication lines used by
the GPIB interface.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 570

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

Fig. 10-1: Communication lines used by the GPIB interface

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 571

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

Universal Commands
Universal commands are encoded in the range 10 through 1F hex. They affect all
instruments connected to the bus and do not require addressing.

Command Effect on the instrument

DCL (Device Clear) Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the com-
mand processing software to a defined initial state. Does not change the
instrument settings.

IFC (Interface Clear) *) Resets the interfaces to the default setting.

LLO (Local Lockout) The LOC/IEC ADDR key is disabled.

SPE (Serial Poll Enable) Ready for serial poll.

SPD (Serial Poll Disable) End of serial poll.

PPU (Parallel Poll Unconfig- End of the parallel-poll state.

ure)

*) IFC is not a real universal command, it is sent via a separate line; however, it also affects all instruments
connected to the bus and does not require addressing

Addressed Commands
Addressed commands are encoded in the range 00 through 0F hex. They only affect
instruments addressed as listeners.

Command Effect on the instrument

GET (Group Execute Trigger) Triggers a previously active instrument function (e.g. a sweep).
The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at
the external trigger signal input.

GTL (Go to Local) Transition to the "local" state (manual control).

Transition to the "remote" state (remote control).

PPC (Parallel Poll Configure) Configures the instrument for parallel poll.

SDC (Selected Device Clear) Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the
command processing software to a defined initial state. Does not
change the instrument setting.

GPIB Instrument Address

In order to operate the instrument via remote control, it must be addressed using the
GPIB address. The remote control address is factory-set to 20, but it can be changed if
it does not fit in the network environment. For remote control, addresses 0 through 30
are allowed. The GPIB address is maintained after a reset of the instrument settings.

Setting the GPIB address

1. On the R&S ESR, press the SETUP key.

2. Press the "General Setup" softkey.

3. Press the "GPIB" softkey.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 572

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

The submenu for setting the parameters of the remote control interface is dis-
played.

4. Press the "GPIB Address" softkey.

The edit dialog box for the GPIB address is displayed.

5. Enter a value between 0 and 30.

Remote command: SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 18

10.1.2 Starting a Remote Control Session

When you switch on the instrument, it is always in manual operation state ("local"
state) and can be operated via the front panel.

Starting remote control

1. Send an addressed command (GTR - Go to Remote) from a controller to the instru-
ment.
The instrument is switched to remote control ("remote" state). Operation via the
front panel is disabled. Only the "Local" softkey is displayed to return to manual
operation. The instrument remains in the remote state until it is reset to the manual
state via the instrument or via remote control interfaces. Switching from manual
operation to remote control and vice versa does not affect the other instrument set-
tings.

2. During program execution, send the SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate ON command to

activate the display of results.
The changes in the device settings and the recorded measurement values are dis-
played on the instrument screen.

3. To obtain optimum performance during remote control, send the

SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate OFF command to hide the display of results and dia-
grams again (default setting in remote control).

4. To prevent unintentional return to manual operation, disable the keys of the instru-
ment using the universal command LLO.
Switching to manual mode is only possible via remote control then. This function is
only available for the GPIB interface.

5. To enable the keys of the R&S ESR again, switch the instrument to local mode
(GTL - Go to Local), i.e. deactivate the REN line of the remote control interface.

If the instrument is operated exclusively in remote control, it is recommended that you

switch on the power-save mode for the display. For more details on this mode refer to
the R&S ESR Getting Started.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 573

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

10.1.3 Returning to Manual Operation

Before you switch back to manual operation, all remote command processing must be
completed. Otherwise, the instrument will switch back to remote control immediately.

► Press the "Local" softkey or the PRESET key, or use the following GPIB command:
status = viGpibControlREN(vi, VI_GPIB_REN_ADDRESS_GTL)

10.1.4 SCPI Command Structure

SCPI commands consist of a so-called header and, in most cases, one or more param-
eters. The header and the parameters are separated by a "white space" (ASCII code 0
to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank). The headers may consist of several mnemonics
(keywords). Queries are formed by appending a question mark directly to the header.
The commands can be either device-specific or device-independent (common com-
mands). Common and device-specific commands differ in their syntax.

10.1.4.1 Syntax for Common Commands

Common (=device-independent) commands consist of a header preceded by an aster-

isk (*) and possibly one or more parameters.
Examples:

*RST RESET Resets the instrument.

*ESE EVENT STATUS ENABLE Sets the bits of the event status enable
registers.

*ESR? EVENT STATUS QUERY Queries the contents of the event status
register.

*IDN? IDENTIFICATION QUERY Queries the instrument identification

string.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 574

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

10.1.4.2 Syntax for Device-Specific Commands

Not all commands used in the following examples are necessarily implemented in the
instrument.
For demonstration purposes only, assume the existence of the following commands for
this section:
● DISPlay[:WINDow<1...4>]:MAXimize <Boolean>
● FORMat:READings:DATA <type>[,<length>]
● HCOPy:DEVice:COLor <Boolean>
● HCOPy:DEVice:CMAP:COLor:RGB <red>,<green>,<blue>
● HCOPy[:IMMediate]
● HCOPy:ITEM:ALL
● HCOPy:ITEM:LABel <string>
● HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant[<N>]
● HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait
● HCOPy:PAGE:SCALe <numeric value>
● MMEMory:COPY <file_source>,<file_destination>
● SENSE:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <numeric_value>
● SENSe:FREQuency:STOP <numeric value>
● SENSe:LIST:FREQuency <numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>}

Long and short form

The mnemonics feature a long form and a short form. The short form is marked by
upper case letters, the long form corresponds to the complete word. Either the short
form or the long form can be entered; other abbreviations are not permitted.

Example:
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor ON is equivalent to HCOP:DEV:COL ON.

Case-insensitivity
Upper case and lower case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the
manual, the instrument itself is case-insensitive.

Numeric suffixes
If a command can be applied to multiple instances of an object, e.g. specific channels
or sources, the required instances can be specified by a suffix added to the command.
Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets (<1...4>, <n>, <i>) and are replaced
by a single value in the command. Entries without a suffix are interpreted as having the
suffix 1.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 575

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

Example:
Definition: HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant[<N>]
Command: HCOP:PAGE:DIM:QUAD2
This command refers to the quadrant 2.

Different numbering in remote control

For remote control, the suffix may differ from the number of the corresponding selec-
tion used in manual operation. SCPI prescribes that suffix counting starts with 1. Suffix
1 is the default state and used when no specific suffix is specified.
Some standards define a fixed numbering, starting with 0. If the numbering differs in
manual operation and remote control, it is indicated for the corresponding command.

Optional mnemonics
Some command systems permit certain mnemonics to be inserted into the header or
omitted. These mnemonics are marked by square brackets in the description. The
instrument must recognize the long command to comply with the SCPI standard. Some
commands are considerably shortened by these optional mnemonics.

Example:
Definition: HCOPy[:IMMediate]
Command: HCOP:IMM is equivalent to HCOP

Optional mnemonics with numeric suffixes

Do not omit an optional mnemonic if it includes a numeric suffix that is relevant for the
effect of the command.
Example:
Definition:DISPlay[:WINDow<1...4>]:MAXimize <Boolean>
Command: DISP:MAX ON refers to window 1.
In order to refer to a window other than 1, you must include the optional WINDow
parameter with the suffix for the required window.
DISP:WIND2:MAX ON refers to window 2.

Parameters
Parameters must be separated from the header by a "white space". If several parame-
ters are specified in a command, they are separated by a comma (,). For a description
of the parameter types, refer to chapter 10.1.4.3, "SCPI Parameters", on page 577.

Example:
Definition:HCOPy:DEVice:CMAP:COLor:RGB <red>,<green>,<blue>
Command:HCOP:DEV:CMAP:COL:RGB 3,32,44

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 576

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

Special characters

| Parameters
A vertical stroke in parameter definitions indicates alternative possibilities in the sense of "or". The
effect of the command differs, depending on which parameter is used.
Example:
Definition:HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait
Command HCOP:PAGE:ORI LAND specifies landscape orientation
Command HCOP:PAGE:ORI PORT specifies portrait orientation
Mnemonics
A selection of mnemonics with an identical effect exists for several commands. These mnemonics are
indicated in the same line; they are separated by a vertical stroke. Only one of these mnemonics
needs to be included in the header of the command. The effect of the command is independent of
which of the mnemonics is used.
Example:
DefinitionSENSE:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <numeric_value>
The two following commands with identical meaning can be created:
SENS:BAND:RES 1
SENS:BWID:RES 1

[] Mnemonics in square brackets are optional and may be inserted into the header or omitted.
Example: HCOPy[:IMMediate]
HCOP:IMM is equivalent to HCOP

{} Parameters in curly brackets are optional and can be inserted once or several times, or omitted.
Example: SENSe:LIST:FREQuency <numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>}
The following are valid commands:
SENS:LIST:FREQ 10
SENS:LIST:FREQ 10,20
SENS:LIST:FREQ 10,20,30,40

10.1.4.3 SCPI Parameters

Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters. The

parameters must be separated from the header by a "white space" (ASCII code 0 to 9,
11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank). Allowed parameters are:
● Numeric values
● Special numeric values
● Boolean parameters
● Text
● Character strings
● Block data
The parameters required for each command and the allowed range of values are
specified in the command description.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 577

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

Numeric values
Numeric values can be entered in any form, i.e. with sign, decimal point and exponent.
Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down. The man-
tissa may comprise up to 255 characters, the exponent must lie inside the value range
-32000 to 32000. The exponent is introduced by an "E" or "e". Entry of the exponent
alone is not allowed. In the case of physical quantities, the unit can be entered.
Allowed unit prefixes are G (giga), MA (mega), MOHM and MHZ are also allowed), K
(kilo), M (milli), U (micro) and N (nano). If the unit is missing, the basic unit is used.
Example: SENS:FREQ:STOP 1.5GHz = SENS:FREQ:STOP 1.5E9

Units
For physical quantities, the unit can be entered. Allowed unit prefixes are:
● G (giga)
● MA (mega), MOHM, MHZ
● K (kilo)
● M (milli)
● U (micro)
● N (nano)
If the unit is missing, the basic unit is used.

Example:
SENSe:FREQ:STOP 1.5GHz = SENSe:FREQ:STOP 1.5E9

Some settings allow relative values to be stated in percent. According to SCPI, this unit
is represented by the PCT string.

Example:
HCOP:PAGE:SCAL 90PCT

Special numeric values

The texts listed below are interpreted as special numeric values. In the case of a
query, the numeric value is provided.
● MIN/MAX
MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value.
● DEF
DEFault denotes a preset value which has been stored in the EPROM. This value
conforms to the default setting, as it is called by the *RST command.
● UP/DOWN
UP, DOWN increases or reduces the numeric value by one step. The step width
can be specified via an allocated step command for each parameter which can be
set via UP, DOWN.
● INF/NINF

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 578

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

INFinity, Negative INFinity (NINF) represent the numeric values 9.9E37 or -9.9E37,
respectively. INF and NINF are only sent as instrument responses.
● NAN
Not A Number (NAN) represents the value 9.91E37. NAN is only sent as a instru-
ment response. This value is not defined. Possible causes are the division of zero
by zero, the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of missing
values.

Example:
Setting command: SENSe:LIST:FREQ MAXimum
Query: SENS:LIST:FREQ?, Response: 3.5E9

Queries for special numeric values

The numeric values associated to MAXimum/MINimum/DEFault can be queried by
adding the corresponding mnemonics to the command. They must be entered follow-
ing the quotation mark.
Example: SENSe:LIST:FREQ? MAXimum
Returns the maximum numeric value as a result.

Boolean Parameters
Boolean parameters represent two states. The "ON" state (logically true) is represen-
ted by "ON" or a numeric value 1. The "OFF" state (logically untrue) is represented by
"OFF" or the numeric value 0. The numeric values are provided as the response for a
query.

Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:DEV:COL ON
Query: HCOPy:DEV:COL?
Response: 1

Text parameters
Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for mnemonics, i.e. they can be entered
using a short or long form. Like any parameter, they have to be separated from the
header by a white space. In the case of a query, the short form of the text is provided.

Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape
Query: HCOP:PAGE:ORI?
Response: LAND

Character strings
Strings must always be entered in quotation marks (' or ").

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 579

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

Example:
HCOP:ITEM:LABel "Test1" or HCOP:ITEM:LABel 'Test1'

Block data
Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data. A
command using a block data parameter has the following structure:

Example:
FORMat:READings:DATA #45168xxxxxxxx
The ASCII character # introduces the data block. The next number indicates how many
of the following digits describe the length of the data block. In the example the 4 follow-
ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes. The data bytes follow. During the trans-
mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are
transmitted.
#0 specifies a data block of indefinite length. The use of the indefinite format requires a
NL^END message to terminate the data block. This format is useful when the length of
the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation
of the data into blocks of definite length.

10.1.4.4 Overview of Syntax Elements

The following table provides an overview of the syntax elements:

: The colon separates the mnemonics of a command. In a command line the separating semico-
lon marks the uppermost command level.

; The semicolon separates two commands of a command line. It does not alter the path.

, The comma separates several parameters of a command.

? The question mark forms a query.

* The asterisk marks a common command.

'' Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it (both single and double quotation marks are
possible).
"

# The hash symbol introduces binary, octal, hexadecimal and block data.
● Binary: #B10110
● Octal: #O7612
● Hexa: #HF3A7
● Block: #21312

A "white space" (ASCII-Code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank) separates the header from the
parameters.

10.1.4.5 Structure of a command line

A command line may consist of one or several commands. It is terminated by one of

the following:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 580

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

● a <New Line>
● a <New Line> with EOI
● an EOI together with the last data byte
Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon ";". If the
next command belongs to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a
colon.

Example:
MMEM:COPY "Test1","MeasurementXY";:HCOP:ITEM ALL
This command line contains two commands. The first command belongs to the MMEM
system, the second command belongs to the HCOP system.

If the successive commands belong to the same system, having one or several levels
in common, the command line can be abbreviated. To this end, the second command
after the semicolon starts with the level that lies below the common levels. The colon
following the semicolon must be omitted in this case.

Example:
HCOP:ITEM ALL;:HCOP:IMM
This command line contains two commands. Both commands are part of the HCOP
command system, i.e. they have one level in common.
When abbreviating the command line, the second command begins with the level
below HCOP. The colon after the semicolon is omitted. The abbreviated form of the
command line reads as follows:
HCOP:ITEM ALL;IMM

A new command line always begins with the complete path.

Example:
HCOP:ITEM ALL
HCOP:IMM

10.1.4.6 Responses to Queries

A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise. It is
formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command. According to
SCPI, the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard
IEEE 488.2.
● The requested parameter is transmitted without a header.
Example: HCOP:PAGE:ORI?, Response: LAND
● Maximum values, minimum values and all other quantities that are requested via a
special text parameter are returned as numeric values.
Example: SENSe:FREQuency:STOP? MAX, Response: 3.5E9

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 581

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

● Numeric values are output without a unit. Physical quantities are referred to the
basic units or to the units set using the Unit command. The response 3.5E9 in
the previous example stands for 3.5 GHz.
● Truth values (Boolean values) are returned as 0 (for OFF) and 1 (for ON).
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:DEV:COL ON
Query: HCOPy:DEV:COL?
Response: 1
● Text (character data) is returned in a short form.
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape
Query: HCOP:PAGE:ORI?
Response: LAND

10.1.5 Command Sequence and Synchronization

IEEE 488.2 defines a distinction between overlapped and sequential commands:

● A sequential command is one which finishes executing before the next command
starts executing. Commands that are processed quickly are usually implemented
as sequential commands.
● An overlapping command is one which does not automatically finish executing
before the next command starts executing. Usually, overlapping commands take
longer to process and allow the program to do other tasks while being executed. If
overlapping commands do have to be executed in a defined order, e.g. in order to
avoid wrong measurement results, they must be serviced sequentially. This is
called synchronization between the controller and the instrument.
Setting commands within one command line, even though they may be implemented
as sequential commands, are not necessarily serviced in the order in which they have
been received. In order to make sure that commands are actually carried out in a cer-
tain order, each command must be sent in a separate command line.

Example: Commands and queries in one message

The response to a query combined in a program message with commands that affect
the queried value is not predictable.
The following commands always return the specified result:
:FREQ:STAR 1GHZ;SPAN 100 :FREQ:STAR?
Result:
1000000000 (1 GHz)
Whereas the result for the following commands is not specified by SCPI:
:FREQ:STAR 1GHz;STAR?;SPAN 1000000
The result could be the value of STARt before the command was sent since the instru-
ment might defer executing the individual commands until a program message termi-
nator is received. The result could also be 1 GHz if the instrument executes commands
as they are received.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 582

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

As a general rule, send commands and queries in different program messages.

Example: Overlapping command with *OPC

The instrument implements INITiate[:IMMediate] as an overlapped command.
Assuming that INITiate[:IMMediate] takes longer to execute than *OPC, sending
the following command sequence results in initiating a sweep and, after some time,
setting the OPC bit in the ESR:
INIT; *OPC.
Sending the following commands still initiates a sweep:
INIT; *OPC; *CLS
However, since the operation is still pending when the instrument executes *CLS, forc-
ing it into the "Operation Complete Command Idle" State (OCIS), *OPC is effectively
skipped. The OPC bit is not set until the instrument executes another *OPC command.

The following list includes the commands for which a synchronization via *OPC,
*OPC? or *WAI is mandatory:

Command Purpose

INIT start measurement

INIT:CONM continue measurement

CALC:MARK:FUNC:ZOOM zoom frequency range around marker 1

CALC:STAT:SCAL:AUTO ONCE optimize level settings for signal statistic measurement functions

[SENS:]POW:ACH:PRES:RLEV optimize level settings for adjacent channel power measure-

ments

10.1.5.1 Preventing Overlapping Execution

To prevent an overlapping execution of commands, one of the commands *OPC,

*OPC? or *WAI can be used. All three commands cause a certain action only to be
carried out after the hardware has been set. By suitable programming, the controller
can be forced to wait for the corresponding action to occur.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 583

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

Table 10-2: Synchronization using OPC, OPC? and *WAI

Com- Action Programming the controller

mand

*OPC Sets the Operation Complete bit in the ESR ● Setting bit 0 in the ESE
after all previous commands have been exe- ● Setting bit 5 in the SRE
cuted. ● Waiting for service request (SRQ)

*OPC? Stops command processing until 1 is Sending *OPC? directly after the command
returned. This is only the case after the Oper- whose processing should be terminated
ation Complete bit has been set in the ESR. before other commands can be executed.
This bit indicates that the previous setting has
been completed.

*WAI Stops further command processing until all Sending *WAI directly after the command
commands sent before *WAI have been exe- whose processing should be terminated
cuted. before other commands are executed.

Command synchronization using WAI or OPC? appended to an overlapped com-

mand is a good choice if the overlapped command takes only little time to process. The
two synchronization techniques simply block overlapped execution of the command.
For time consuming overlapped commands it is usually desirable to allow the controller
or the instrument to do other useful work while waiting for command execution. Use
one of the following methods:

*OPC with a service request

1. Set the OPC mask bit (bit no. 0) in the ESE: *ESE 1

2. Set bit no. 5 in the SRE: *SRE 32 to enable ESB service request.

3. Send the overlapped command with *OPC

4. Wait for a service request

The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished.

*OPC? with a service request

1. Set bit no. 4 in the SRE: *SRE 16 to enable MAV service request.

2. Send the overlapped command with *OPC?

3. Wait for a service request

The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished.

Event Status Register (ESE)

1. Set the OPC mask bit (bit no. 0) in the ESE: *ESE 1

2. Send the overlapped command without OPC, OPC? or *WAI

3. Poll the operation complete state periodically (by means of a timer) using the
sequence: *OPC; *ESR?
A return value (LSB) of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 584

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

*OPC? with short timeout

1. Send the overlapped command without *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI

2. Poll the operation complete state periodically (by means of a timer) using the
sequence: <short timeout>; *OPC?

3. A return value (LSB) of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished. In
case of a timeout, the operation is ongoing.

4. Reset timeout to former value

5. Clear the error queue with SYStem:ERRor? to remove the "-410, Query interrup-
ted" entries.

Using several threads in the controller application

As an alternative, provided the programming environment of the controller application
supports threads, separate threads can be used for the application GUI and for control-
ling the instrument(s) via SCPI.
A thread waiting for a *OPC? thus will not block the GUI or the communication with
other instruments.

10.1.6 Status Reporting System

The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the
instrument, and on errors which have occurred. This information is stored in the status
registers and in the error queue. Both can be queried via GPIB bus or LAN interface
(STATus... commands).

10.1.6.1 Hierarchy of Status Registers

● STB, SRE
The STatus Byte (STB) register and its associated mask register Service Request
Enable (SRE) form the highest level of the status reporting system. The STB pro-
vides a rough overview of the instrument status, collecting the information of the
lower-level registers.
● ESR, SCPI registers
The STB receives its information from the following registers:
– The Event Status Register (ESR) with the associated mask register standard
Event Status Enable (ESE)
– The STATus:OPERation and STATus:QUEStionable registers which are
defined by SCPI and contain detailed information on the instrument
● IST, PPE
The IST flag ("Individual STatus"), like the SRQ, combines the entire instrument
status in a single bit. The PPE fulfills the same function for the IST flag as the SRE
for the service request.
● Output buffer

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 585

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

The output buffer contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller. It
is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in
the STB and thus is represented in the overview.
All status registers have the same internal structure.

SRE, ESE
The service request enable register SRE can be used as ENABle part of the STB if the
STB is structured according to SCPI. By analogy, the ESE can be used as the ENABle
part of the ESR.

10.1.6.2 Structure of a SCPI Status Register

Each standard SCPI register consists of 5 parts. Each part has a width of 16 bits and
has different functions. The individual bits are independent of each other, i.e. each
hardware status is assigned a bit number which is valid for all five parts. Bit 15 (the
most significant bit) is set to zero for all parts. Thus the contents of the register parts
can be processed by the controller as positive integers.

Fig. 10-2: The status-register model

Description of the five status register parts

The five parts of a SCPI register have different properties and functions:
● CONDition
The CONDition part is written into directly by the hardware or the sum bit of the
next lower register. Its contents reflect the current instrument status. This register
part can only be read, but not written into or cleared. Its contents are not affected
by reading.
● PTRansition / NTRansition
The two transition register parts define which state transition of the CONDition
part (none, 0 to 1, 1 to 0 or both) is stored in the EVENt part.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 586

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

The Positive-TRansition part acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the

CONDition part is changed from 0 to 1, the associated PTR bit decides whether
the EVENt bit is set to 1.
– PTR bit =1: the EVENt bit is set.
– PTR bit =0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This part can be written into and read as required. Its contents are not affected by
reading.
The Negative-TRansition part also acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the
CONDition part is changed from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit decides whether
the EVENt bit is set to 1.
– NTR bit =1: the EVENt bit is set.
– NTR bit =0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This part can be written into and read as required. Its contents are not affected by
reading.
● EVENt
The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last reading, it
is the "memory" of the condition part. It only indicates events passed on by the
transition filters. It is permanently updated by the instrument. This part can only be
read by the user. Reading the register clears it. This part is often equated with the
entire register.
● ENABle
The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to the
sum bit (see below). Each bit of the EVENt part is "ANDed" with the associated
ENABle bit (symbol '&'). The results of all logical operations of this part are passed
on to the sum bit via an "OR" function (symbol '+').
ENABle bit = 0: the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit
ENABle bit = 1: if the associated EVENt bit is "1", the sum bit is set to "1" as well.
This part can be written into and read by the user as required. Its contents are not
affected by reading.

Sum bit
The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each register. The result
is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher-order register.
The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register. Thus an event
can lead to a service request throughout all levels of the hierarchy.

10.1.6.3 Contents of the Status Register

This chapter provides information on the contents of each status register the meaning
for all bits that are used available for each operating mode.

Status Registers in Receiver Mode

This chapter contains the description of the registers and bits specific to spectrum
mode.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 587

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

Fig. 10-3: Overview of status registers in receiver mode

Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE)

The STatus Byte (STB) is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It provides a rough over-
view of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower regis-
ters. A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status
byte.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 588

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

The STB can thus be compared with the CONDition part of an SCPI register and
assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy.
The STB is read using the command *STB? or a serial poll.
The STatus Byte (STB) is linked to the Service Request Enable (SRE) register.
Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE. Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored. If a bit is
set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1, a service
request (SRQ) is generated. The SRE can be set using the command *SRE and read
using the command *SRE?.
Table 10-3: Meaning of the bits used in the status byte

Bit No. Meaning

0...1 Not used

2 Error Queue not empty

The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue. If this bit is enabled by the SRE, each
entry of the error queue generates a service request. Thus an error can be recognized and
specified in greater detail by polling the error queue. The poll provides an informative error mes-
sage. This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems
involved with remote control.

3 QUEStionable status register summary bit

The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable status register and the associated
ENABle bit is set to 1. A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status, which can be speci-
fied in greater detail by querying the STATus:QUEStionable status register.

4 MAV bit (message available)

The bit is set if a message is available in the output queue which can be read. This bit can be
used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller.

5 ESB bit
Sum bit of the event status register. It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set
and enabled in the event status enable register. Setting of this bit indicates a serious error which
can be specified in greater detail by polling the event status register.

6 MSS bit (master status summary bit)

The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request. This is the case if one of the other bits
of this registers is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE.

7 STATus:OPERation status register summary bit

The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation status register and the associated
ENABle bit is set to 1. A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action. The
type of action can be determined by querying the STATus:OPERation status register.

IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE)

As with the SRQ, the IST flag combines the entire status information in a single bit. It
can be read by means of a parallel poll (see "Parallel Poll" on page 600) or using the
command *IST?.
The parallel poll enable register (PPE) determines which bits of the STB contribute to
the IST flag. The bits of the STB are "ANDed" with the corresponding bits of the PPE,
with bit 6 being used as well in contrast to the SRE. The IST flag results from the
"ORing" of all results. The PPE can be set using commands *PRE and read using com-
mand *PRE?.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 589

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

Event Status Register (ESR) and Event Status Enable Register (ESE)
The Event Status Register (ESR) is the source for the registers on the highest levels
and is similar to the EVENt part of a SCPI register. It is defined by IEEE 488.2. You
can read out the ESR with *ESR?.
The corresponding ENABle part of the ESR is the Event Status Enable mask register
(ESE). The ESE is directly linked to the ESR. You can control the ESE with *ESE.
Table 10-4: Meaning of the bits used in the event status register

Bit No. Meaning

0 Operation Complete
This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC exactly when all previous commands have been
executed.

1 Unused

2 Query Error
This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a
query, or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument
instead. The cause is often a query which is faulty and hence cannot be executed.

3 Device-dependent Error
This bit is set if a device-dependent error occurs.
The R&S ESR adds a number to the error queue. The number is either in the range between
-300 and -399 or greater than 0. If the number is positive, it indicates the error type in greater
detail.

4 Execution Error
This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct but cannot be performed for other
reasons. An error message with a number between -200 and -300, which denotes the error in
greater detail, is entered into the error queue.

5 Command Error
This bit is set if a remote command is undefined or has a incorrect syntax.
The R&S ESR adds a number to the error queue. The number is in the range between -100 and
-200 and indicates the error type in greater detail.

6 User Request
This bit is set when you press the "Local" softkey.

7 Power On (supply voltage on)

This bit is set when you turn on the instrument.

STATus:OPERation Register
The STATus:OPERation register contains information about actions the R&S ESR is
currently executing. It also contains information about the actions the R&S ESR has
executed since the last reading.
You can read out the state of the register with STATus:OPERation:CONDition? or
STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 590

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

Table 10-5: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:OPERation register

Bit No. Meaning

0 CALibrating
This bit is set as long as the instrument is performing a calibration.

1 to 7 Not used

8 HardCOPy in progress
This bit is set while the instrument is printing a hardcopy.

9 SCAN results available

This bit is set when a block of scan results is available.
Note that this function must be enabled by TRACe:FEED:CONTol ALWays.

10 Sweep Break
This bit is set when the end of a scan range is reached.
To proceed, you have to use the INITiate:CONMeas command.

11 Not used

12 Threshold signal active

13 to 14 Not used

15 This bit is always 0.

STATus:QUEStionable Register
The STATus:QUEStionable register contains information about states that may occur if
the R&S ESR is operated without meeting the specifications.
You can read out the state of the register with STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
and STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?.
Table 10-6: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable register

Bit No. Meaning

0-2 These bits are not used

3 POWer
This bit is set if a questionable power occurs (see "STATus:QUEStionable:POWer Register"
on page 594).

4 TEMPerature
This bit is set if a questionable temperature occurs.

5 FREQuency
The bit is set if a frequency is questionable (see "STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency Register"
on page 592).

6-7 Not used

8 CALibration
The bit is set if a measurement is performed unaligned ("UNCAL" display)

9 LIMit (device-specific)
This bit is set if a limit value is violated (see "STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register"
on page 592)

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 591

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

Bit No. Meaning

10 LMARgin (device-specific)
This bit is set if a margin is violated (see "STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin Register"
on page 593)

11 Not used

12 ACPLimit (device-specific)
This bit is set if a limit for the adjacent channel power measurement is violated (see "STA-
Tus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register" on page 598)

13 TRANsducer break
This bit is set if a transducer break occurs and indicates the next range.

14 Not used

15 This bit is always 0.

STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency Register
The STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register contains information about the condi-
tion of the local oscillator and the reference frequency.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:
CONDition? or STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?.
Table 10-7: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register

Bit No. Meaning

0 OVEN COLD
This bit is set if the reference oscillator has not yet attained its operating temperature. "OCXO"
is displayed.

1 LO UNLocked
This bit is set if the local oscillator no longer locks. "LOUNL" is displayed.

2 to 7 Unused

8 EXTernalREFerence
This bit is set if you have selected an external reference oscillator but did not connect a useable
external reference source.
In that case the synthesizer can not lock. The frequency in all probability is not accurate.

9 to 14 Unused

15 This bit is always 0.

STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register
The STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register contains information about the results of a
limit check when you are working with limit lines.
The number of LIMit registers depends on the number of measurement windows avail-
able in any operating mode.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:
CONDition? or STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>[:EVENt]?.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 592

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

Table 10-8: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register

Bit No. Meaning

0 LIMit 1 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 1 is violated.

1 LIMit 2 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 2 is violated.

2 LIMit 3 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 3 is violated.

3 LIMit 4 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 4 is violated.

4 LIMit 5 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 5 is violated.

5 LIMit 6 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 6 is violated.

6 LIMit 7 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 7 is violated.

7 LIMit 8 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 8 is violated.

8 to 14 Unused

15 This bit is always 0.

STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin Register
This register contains information about the observance of limit margins.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>:
CONDition? or STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>[:EVENt]?.
Table 10-9: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register

Bit No. Meaning

0 LMARgin 1 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 1 is violated.

1 LMARgin 2 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 2 is violated.

2 LMARgin 3 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 3 is violated.

3 LMARgin 4 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 4 is violated.

4 LMARgin 5 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 5 is violated.

5 LMARgin 6 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 6 is violated.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 593

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

Bit No. Meaning

6 LMARgin 7 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 7 is violated.

7 LMARgin 8 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 8 is violated.

8 to 14 Not used

15 This bit is always 0.

STATus:QUEStionable:POWer Register
The STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register contains information about possible over-
load situations that may occur during operation of the R&S ESR.
You can read out the registers with STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition? or
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]?.
Table 10-10: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register

Bit No. Meaning

0 OVERload
This bit is set if an overload occurs at the RF input.
The R&S ESR displays the enhancement label "OVLD".

1 UNDerload
This bit is set if an underload occurs at the RF input.
The R&S ESR displays the enhancement label "UNLD".

2 IF_OVerload
This bit is set if an overload occurs in the IF path.
The R&S ESR displays the enhancement label "IFOVL".

3 to 14 Unused

15 This bit is always 0.

STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer Register
The STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer register contains information about trans-
ducer breaks.
It indicates that a transducer break has been reached. It also indicates the next range
that is to be swept. You can continue the sweep with INITiate<n>:CONMeas.
You can read out the registers with STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:
CONDition? or STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer[:EVENt]? on page 965.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 594

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

Table 10-11: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer register

Bit No. Meaning

0 Range 1
This bit is set if subrange 1 has been reached.

1 Range 2
This bit is set if subrange 2 has been reached.

2 Range 3
This bit is set if subrange 3 has been reached.

3 Range 4
This bit is set if subrange 4 has been reached.

4 Range 5
This bit is set if subrange 5 has been reached.

5 Range 6
This bit is set if subrange 6 has been reached.

6 Range 7
This bit is set if subrange 7 has been reached.

7 Range 8
This bit is set if subrange 8 has been reached.

8 Range 9
This bit is set if subrange 9 has been reached.

9 Range 10
This bit is set if subrange 10 has been reached.

10 to 13 Unused

14 Subrange limit
This bit is set when the transducer is at the point of changeover from one subrange to another.

15 This bit is always 0.

Status Registers in Spectrum Mode

This chapter contains the description of the registers and bits specific to spectrum
mode. For a comprehensive description of the other status registers see "Status Regis-
ters in Receiver Mode" on page 587.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 595

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

Fig. 10-4: Overview of status registers in spectrum mode

STATus:OPERation Register
The STATus:OPERation register contains information on current activities of the
R&S ESR. It also contains information on activities that have been executed since the
last read out.
You can read out the register with STATus:OPERation:CONDition? or STATus:
OPERation[:EVENt]?.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 596

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

Table 10-12: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:OPERation register

Bit No. Meaning

0 CALibrating
This bit is set as long as the instrument is performing a calibration.

1-2 Not used

3 SWEeping
Sweep is being performed; identical to bit 4

4 MEASuring
Measurement is being performed; identical to bit 3

5 Waiting for TRIgger

Instrument is ready to trigger and waiting for trigger signal

6-7 Not used

8 HardCOPy in progress
This bit is set while the instrument is printing a hardcopy.

9 Not used

10 Stop after Range

This bit is set when a range in the sweep list has been completed if "Stop after Range" has
been activated.

11-14 Not used

15 This bit is always 0.

STATus:QUEStionable Register
The STATus:QUEStionable register contains information on instrument states that do
not meet the specifications.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? or
STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?.
Table 10-13: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable register

Bit No. Meaning

0-2 Unused

3 POWer
This bit is set if the measured power level is questionable.
The STATus:QUEStionable:POWer Register provides more information on the error type.

4 TEMPerature
This bit is set if the temperature is questionable.

5 FREQuency
This bit is set if there is anything wrong with the frequency of the local oscillator or the reference
frequency.
The STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency Register provides more information on the error type.

6-7 Unused

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 597

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

Bit No. Meaning

8 CALibration
This bit is set if the R&S ESR is unaligned ("UNCAL" display)

9 LIMit (device-specific)
This bit is set if a limit value is violated.
The STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register provides more information on the error type.

10 LMARgin (device-specific)
This bit is set if a margin is violated.
The STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin Register provides more information on the error type.

11 Not used

12 ACPLimit (device-specific)
This bit is set if a limit during ACLR measurements is violated.
The STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register provides more information on the error type.

13 - 14 Not used

15 This bit is always 0.

STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register
The STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register contains information about the results of
a limit check during ACLR measurements.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:
CONDition? or STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]?.
Table 10-14: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register

Bit No. Meaning

0 ADJ UPPer FAIL

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper adjacent channel

1 ADJ LOWer FAIL

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower adjacent channel.

2 ALT1 UPPer FAIL

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 1st alternate channel.

3 ALT1 LOWer FAIL

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 1st alternate channel.

4 ALT2 UPPer FAIL

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 2nd alternate channel.

5 ALT2 LOWer FAIL

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 2nd alternate channel.

6 ALT3 … 11 LOWer/UPPer FAIL

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in one of the lower or upper alternate channels 3 … 11.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 598

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

Bit No. Meaning

7 to 14 Unused

15 This bit is always 0.

10.1.6.4 Application of the Status Reporting System

The purpose of the status reporting system is to monitor the status of one or several
devices in a measuring system. To do this and react appropriately, the controller must
receive and evaluate the information of all devices. The following standard methods
are used:
● Service request (SRQ) initiated by the instrument
● Serial poll of all devices in the bus system, initiated by the controller in order to
find out who sent a SRQ and why
● Parallel poll of all devices
● Query of a specific instrument status by means of commands
● Query of the error queue

Service Request

Use of the command *OPC to generate an SRQ at the end of a sweep

1. CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "*ESE 1") 'Set bit 0 in the ESE (Operation
Complete)

2. CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "*SRE 32") 'Set bit 5 in the SRE (ESB)

3. CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "INIT;OPC") ' Generate an SRQ after

operation complete
After its settings have been completed, the instrument generates an SRQ.

The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own. Each
controller program should cause the instrument to initiate a service request if errors
occur. The program should react appropriately to the service request.
A detailed example for a service request routine can be found in chapter 10.16.1, "Ser-
vice Request", on page 968.

Serial Poll
In a serial poll, just as with command *STB, the status byte of an instrument is queried.
However, the query is realized via interface messages and is thus clearly faster.
The serial poll method is defined in IEEE 488.1 and used to be the only standard pos-
sibility for different instruments to poll the status byte. The method also works for
instruments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488.2.
The serial poll is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the state of several instru-
ments connected to the controller.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 599

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

Parallel Poll
In a parallel poll, up to eight instruments are simultaneously requested by the controller
using a single command to transmit 1 bit of information each on the data lines, i.e., to
set the data line allocated to each instrument to a logical "0" or "1".
In addition to the SRE register, which determines the conditions under which an SRQ
is generated, there is a Parallel Poll Enable register (PPE) which is ANDed with the
STB bit by bit, considering bit 6 as well. This register is ANDed with the STB bit by bit,
considering bit 6 as well. The results are ORed, the result is possibly inverted and then
sent as a response to the parallel poll of the controller. The result can also be queried
without parallel poll using the command *IST?.
The instrument first has to be set for the parallel poll using the command PPC. This
command allocates a data line to the instrument and determines whether the response
is to be inverted. The parallel poll itself is executed using PPE.
The parallel poll method is mainly used to find out quickly which one of the instruments
connected to the controller has sent a service request. To this effect, SRE and PPE
must be set to the same value.

Query of an instrument status

Each part of any status register can be read using queries. There are two types of
commands:
● The common commands *ESR?, *IDN?, *IST?, *STB? query the higher-level
registers.
● The commands of the STATus system query the SCPI registers
(STATus:QUEStionable...)
The returned value is always a decimal number that represents the bit pattern of the
queried register. This number is evaluated by the controller program.
Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on
the cause of the SRQ.

Decimal representation of a bit pattern

The STB and ESR registers contain 8 bits, the SCPI registers 16 bits. The contents of
a status register are specified and transferred as a single decimal number. To make
this possible, each bit is assigned a weighted value. The decimal number is calculated
as the sum of the weighted values of all bits in the register that are set to 1.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 600

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

Example:
The decimal value 40 = 32 + 8 indicates that bits no. 3 and 5 in the status register (e.g.
the QUEStionable status summary bit and the ESB bit in the STatus Byte ) are set.

Error Queue
Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue. The entries of
the error queue are detailed plain text error messages that can be looked up in the
Error Log or queried via remote control using SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? or
SYSTem:ERRor:ALL?. Each call of SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? provides one entry
from the error queue. If no error messages are stored there any more, the instrument
responds with 0, "No error".
The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the
entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers. Espe-
cially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regu-
larly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as
well.

10.1.6.5 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System

The following table contains the different commands and events causing the status
reporting system to be reset. None of the commands, except *RST and
SYSTem:PRESet, influence the functional instrument settings. In particular, DCL does
not change the instrument settings.
Table 10-15: Resetting the status reporting system

Event Switching on supply DCL, RST or STA- CLS

voltage SDC SYS- Tus:PRE-
Tem:PRE- Set
Power-On-Status- (Device
Set
Clear Clear,
Selected
Device
Effect 0 1
Clear)

Clear STB, ESR - yes - - - yes

Clear SRE, ESE - yes - - - -

Clear PPE - yes - - - -

Clear EVENt parts of the regis- - yes - - - yes

ters

Clear ENABle parts of all - yes - - yes -

OPERation and QUEStionable
registers;
Fill ENABle parts of all other
registers with "1".

Fill PTRansition parts with "1"; - yes - - yes -

Clear NTRansition parts

Clear error queue yes yes - - - yes

Clear output buffer yes yes yes 1) 1) 1)

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 601

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

Event Switching on supply DCL, RST or STA- CLS

voltage SDC SYS- Tus:PRE-
Tem:PRE- Set
Power-On-Status- (Device
Set
Clear Clear,
Selected
Device
Effect 0 1
Clear)

Clear command processing yes yes yes - - -

and input buffer

1) The first command in a command line that immediately follows a <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINA-
TOR> clears the output buffer.

10.1.7 General Programming Recommendations

Initial instrument status before changing settings

Manual operation is designed for maximum possible operating convenience. In con-
trast, the priority of remote control is the "predictability" of the instrument status. Thus,
when a command attempts to define incompatible settings, the command is ignored
and the instrument status remains unchanged, i.e. other settings are not automatically
adapted. Therefore, control programs should always define an initial instrument status
(e.g. using the *RST command) and then implement the required settings.

Command sequence
As a general rule, send commands and queries in different program messages. Other-
wise, the result of the query may vary depending on which operation is performed first
(see also Preventing Overlapping Execution).

Reacting to malfunctions
The service request is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its
own. Each controller program should instruct the instrument to initiate a service
request in case of malfunction. The program should react appropriately to the service
request.

Error queues
The error queue should be queried after every service request in the controller pro-
gram as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status regis-
ters. Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be
queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are
recorded there as well.

10.1.8 The IECWIN Tool

The R&S ESR is delivered with IECWIN installed, an auxiliary tool provided free of
charge by R&S. IECWIN is a program to send SCPI commands to a measuring instru-
ment either interactively or from a command script.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 602

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control - Basics

The R&S IECWIN32 tool is provided free of charge. The functionality may change in a
future version without notice.

IECWIN offers the following features:

● Connection to instrument via several interfaces/protocols (GPIB, VISA, named pipe
(if IECWIN is run on the instrument itself), RSIB)
● Interactive command entry
● Browsing available commands on the instrument
● Error checking following every command
● Execution of command scripts
● Storing binary data to a file
● Reading binary data from a file
● Generation of a log file
For command scripts, IECWIN offers the following features:
● Synchronization with the instrument on every command
● Checking expected result for query commands (as string or numeric value)
● Checking for expected errors codes
● Optional pause on error
● Nested command scripts
● Single step mode
● Conditional execution, based on the *IDN and *OPT strings

You can use the IECWIN to try out the programming examples provided in the
R&S ESR User Manuals.

Starting IECWIN
IECWIN is available from the Windows task bar on the R&S ESR, or by executing the
following file:
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSV\<version_number>\
iecwin32.exe
You can also copy the program to any Windows PC or laptop. Simply copy the
iecwin32.exe, iecwin.chm and rsib32.dll files from the location above to the
same folder on the target computer.
When the tool is started, a "Connection settings" dialog box is displayed. Define the
connection from the computer the IECWIN tool is installed on to the R&S ESR you
want to control. If you are using the tool directly on the R&S ESR, you can use an NT
Pipe (COM Parser) connection, which requires no further configuration. For help on
setting up other connection types, check the tool's online help (by clicking the "Help"
button in the dialog box).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 603

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Selecting the Operating Mode

The IECWIN offers an online help with extensive information on how to work with the
tool.

10.2 Selecting the Operating Mode

INSTrument:CREate[:NEW]............................................................................................ 604
INSTrument:DELete....................................................................................................... 604
INSTrument[:SELect]......................................................................................................605

INSTrument:CREate[:NEW] <ChannelType>, <ChannelName>

This command adds an additional spectrum display. You can add up to three additional
spectrum displays.
Also see
● INSTrument[:SELect] on page 605
● INSTrument:DELete on page 604
● Remote program example: chapter 10.16.16, "Usage of Four Spectrum Instances",
on page 1007
Parameters:
<ChannelType> SANalyzer
The channel type is always SANalyzer to indicate that you add
a new spectrum display.
<ChannelName> Sets the name of the additional spectrum display.
Spectrum 2 | Spectrum 3 | Spectrum 4
The names of the spectrum displays you add have to be
Spectrum 2 for the second spectrum display, Spectrum 3 for
the third and Spectrum 4 for the fourth.
Example: INST:CRE SAN, Spectrum 2
Adds a second spectrum display.

INSTrument:DELete <ChannelName>
This command deletes a spectrum display.
Also see
● INSTrument:CREate[:NEW] on page 604
● Remote program example: chapter 10.16.16, "Usage of Four Spectrum Instances",
on page 1007
Parameters:
<ChannelName> Selects the spectrum display you want to delete.
Spectrum 2 | Spectrum 3 | Spectrum 4
A spectrum display must exist in order to be able delete it.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 604

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Example: INST:DEL Spectrum 4

Deletes the fourth spectrum display.

INSTrument[:SELect] <Mode> | <ChannelName>

This command activates a new measurement channel with the defined channel type,
or selects an existing measurement channel with the specified name.
● INSTrument:CREate[:NEW] on page 604
● Remote program example: chapter 10.16.16, "Usage of Four Spectrum Instances",
on page 1007
Parameters:
<Mode> RECeiver
Receiver mode
RTIMe
Realtime mode
SANalyzer
Spectrum mode
Spectrum 2 | Spectrum 3 | Spectrum 4
Selects one of the additional spectrum displays. The first spec-
trum display is always active. You can select it with SANalyzer.
A spectrum display must exist in order to be able to select it.
*RST: RECeiver

10.3 Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

The following remote commands configure and perform EMI measurements. They are
available in receiver mode only.
● Measurements and Result Displays......................................................................605
● Defining the Frequency.........................................................................................634
● Configuring the Vertical Axis................................................................................. 636
● Selecting the Bandwidth........................................................................................639
● Controlling Inputs and Outputs..............................................................................641
● Test Automation....................................................................................................642
● Working with Markers............................................................................................657
● Limit Lines.............................................................................................................673

10.3.1 Measurements and Result Displays

● Display Configuration............................................................................................ 606

● Bargraph Control...................................................................................................606
● Scan Control......................................................................................................... 608
● Final Measurements and Automated Test Sequence Control.............................. 610
● Trace Data and Result Query............................................................................... 612

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 605

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

● Fixed Frequency Scans........................................................................................ 616

● Demodulating Analog Signals............................................................................... 617
● Spectrogram Control............................................................................................. 618

10.3.1.1 Display Configuration

CALCulate<n>:FEED..................................................................................................... 606

CALCulate<n>:FEED <ResultDisplay>
This command selects the result display.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...3
Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<ResultDisplay> 'NONE'
Removes the window selected with the suffix <n>.
'XTIM:SPECtrum'
Selects the IF analysis result display.
'XTIM:BARGraph'
Selects the bargraph.
Note that the Bargraph always has to be in window 1.
'XFRequency[:SPECtrum]'
Selects the scan result display.
'XFRequency:SGRam'
Selects the spectrogram result display.
Note that you can add a spectrogram only if you have already
turned on either Scan or IF Analysis. If you are displaying Scan
and IF Analysis simultaneously, the Spectrogram is unavailable.

10.3.1.2 Bargraph Control

DISPlay:BARGraph:LEVel:LOWer?................................................................................. 606
DISPlay:BARGraph:LEVel:UPPer?.................................................................................. 607
DISPlay:BARGraph:PHOLd[:STATe]................................................................................607
DISPlay:BARGraph:PHOLd:RESet.................................................................................. 607
DISPlay:BARGraph:TCOupling[:STATe]...........................................................................607
[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion]..........................................................................607
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME................................................................................................... 608

DISPlay:BARGraph:LEVel:LOWer?
This command queries the minimum level of the bargraph.
Example: :DISP:BARG:LEV:LOW?
Usage: Query only

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 606

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

DISPlay:BARGraph:LEVel:UPPer?
This command queries the maximum level of the bargraph.
Example: :DISP:BARG:LEV:UPP?
Usage: Query only

DISPlay:BARGraph:PHOLd[:STATe] <State>
This command switches the indication of the maxhold value of the bar graph measure-
ment on or off.
Parameters:
<State> ON
OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: DISP:BARG:PHOL ON
Manual operation: See "Bargraph Maxhold" on page 166

DISPlay:BARGraph:PHOLd:RESet
This command resets the maxhold value of the numeric indication of the bargraph
measurement.
Example: :DISP:BARG:PHOL:RES
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Maxhold Reset" on page 166

DISPlay:BARGraph:TCOupling[:STATe] <State>
This command couples or decouples the bargraph detector and scan trace detector.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: DISP:BARG:TCO ON
Couples the type and color of bargraph and scan trace.
Manual operation: See "Couple to Scan Trace" on page 171

[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] <Detector>, [<Detector>, <Detector>]

This command selects the detector for the bargraph measurement.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 607

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Parameters:
<Detector>, You can select up to three detectors, one for each active bar-
[<Detector>, graph.
<Detector>] AVERage
Selects the Average detector.
CAVerage
Selects the CISPR Average detector.
CRMS
Selects the CISPR RMS detector.
NEGative
Selects the Min Peak detector.
POSitive
Selects the Max Peak detector.
QPEak
Selects the Quasipeak detector.
RMS
Selects the RMS detector.
*RST: AVERage
Example: DET:REC POS,AVER,QPE
Selects the peak, average and quasipeak detectors.
Manual operation: See "Bargraph Detector" on page 171

[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME <Time>
This command defines the measurement or acquisition time for bargraph measure-
ments, scans and CISPR APD measurements.
Parameters:
<Time> Range: 10 µs to 100 s
Example: SWE:TIME 10s
Defines a measurement time of 10 s.
Manual operation: See "Measurement Time" on page 171
See "Acquisition Time" on page 320

10.3.1.3 Scan Control

ABORt ......................................................................................................................... 608

HOLD........................................................................................................................... 609
INITiate<n>:CONMeas................................................................................................... 609
INITiate<n>:CONTinuous................................................................................................609
INITiate<n>[:IMMediate]..................................................................................................610

ABORt
This command stops a measurement and resets the trigger system.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 608

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Example: ABOR;INIT:IMM
Aborts the measurement and restarts it.
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Stop Scan" on page 167
See "Stop Final Measurement" on page 170
See "Meas Start/Stop" on page 276

HOLD
This command interrupts a running scan measurement.
To resume the scan, use INITiate<n>[:IMMediate].
Example: HOLD
Interrupts the scan.
Manual operation: See "Hold Scan" on page 167
See "Continue at Rec Frequency" on page 167
See "Hold Final Measurement" on page 169

INITiate<n>:CONMeas
This command resumes a scan that was interrupted by a transducer stop at the current
reciever frequency.
If the scan was interrupted by the HOLD command, you have to resume it with
INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] on page 610.
Example: INIT2:CONT OFF
Selects single scan mode.
SWE:COUN 20
Forms an average over 20 scans.
INIT2;*WAI
Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 scans.
INIT2:CONM;*WAI
Continues the measurement (next 20 sequences) and waits for
the end.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Continue at Hold" on page 167

INITiate<n>:CONTinuous <State>
This command turns single measurements on and off.
The measurement starts immediately.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 609

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Parameters:
<State> ON
Continuous measurements.
OFF
Single measurements.
Example: INIT2:CONT OFF
Turns on a single measurement.
Manual operation: See "Continuous Bargraph / Single Bargraph" on page 165
See "Run Continuous / Run Single" on page 194
See "Continuous Sweep" on page 379
See "Single Sweep" on page 379

INITiate<n>[:IMMediate]
The command initiates a new measurement.
In case of a single measurement, the R&S ESR stops measuring when it has reached
the end frequency. When you start a continuous measurement, it stops only if you
abort it deliberately.
If you are using trace modes MAXHold, MINHold and AVERage, previous results are
reset when you restart the measurement.
In single sweep mode, you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with *OPC,
*OPC? or *WAI. In continuous sweep mode, synchronization to the end of the mea-
surement is not possible. Thus, it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep
mode in remote control, as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a sin-
gle sweep end synchronization.
Example: INIT2:CONT OFF
Selects single measurement mode.
SWE:COUN 20
Forms an average over 20 measurements.
INIT2;*WAI
Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the complete
measurement.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Continue at Rec Frequency" on page 167
See "Run Continuous / Run Single" on page 194

10.3.1.4 Final Measurements and Automated Test Sequence Control

INITiate<n>:EMITest...................................................................................................... 611
INITiate<n>:FMEasurement............................................................................................ 611
[SENSe:]DETector<t>:FMEasurement..............................................................................611
[SENSe:]FMEasurement:AUTO.......................................................................................612
[SENSe:]FMEasurement:TIME........................................................................................ 612

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 610

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

INITiate<n>:EMITest
This command initiates an automated test sequence.
The sequence consists of a scan, a peak search and a final measurement.
Example: INIT2:EMIT
Starts the test sequence.
Usage: Event

INITiate<n>:FMEasurement
This command initiates a final measurement based on the peak list.
Example: INIT2:FME
Starts the final measurement.
Usage: Event

[SENSe:]DETector<t>:FMEasurement <Detector>
This command selects the detector for the final measurement.
Parameters:
<Detector> AVERage
Selects the Average detector.
CAVerage
Selects the CISPR Average detector.
CRMS
Selects the CISPR RMS detector.
NEGative
Selects the Min Peak detector.
NONE
Ignores the peaks found on that trace during the final measure-
ment.
POSitive
Selects the Max Peak detector.
QPEak
Selects the Quasipeak detector.
RMS
Selects the RMS detector.
*RST: QPEak
Example: DET:FME POS
Manual operation: See "Trace 1 to 6" on page 205
See "Trace 1 - 6" on page 208

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 611

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

[SENSe:]FMEasurement:AUTO <State>
This command turns automatic final measurements on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON
Turns on automatic final measurement.
OFF
Turns on interactive final measurement.
*RST: ON
Example: FME:AUTO ON
Manual operation: See "Automatic Final" on page 169
See "Interactive Final" on page 169
See "Interactive Mode" on page 205

[SENSe:]FMEasurement:TIME <Time>
This command defines the time each frequency in the peak list is measured during the
final measurement.
Parameters:
<Time> *RST: 1s
Example: FME:TIME 1us
Defines a measurement time of 1 µs.

10.3.1.5 Trace Data and Result Query

This section contains information on the TRACe:DATA command and a detailed

description of the characteristics of that command. Basically, the command queries the
results of the current measurement. The command supports various SCPI parameters
in combination with the query. Each SCPI parameter returns a different aspect of the
measurement.
The format of the return values is either in ASCII or binary characters and depends on
the format you have set with FORMat[:DATA] on page 820.

Querying trace data

The SCPI parameters TRACE1 | ... | TRACE6 return the trace data for the correspond-
ing trace.

Example:
TRAC? TRACE1

The number of results depends on the currently selected number of sweep points. For
each sweep point, the command returns one level value. The unit depends on the
measurement and on the unit you have currently set.
The trace has to be active for the command to work.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 612

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Querying bargraph results

The SCPI parameters SINGLE and PHOLD return the results of the bargraph measure-
ment.
SINGLE returns the current bargraph results for each active bargraph detector.
The order of detectors is as shown in the user interface: maximum peak, minimum
peak, quasipeak, average, RMS. Inactive detectors are ignored.

Example:
TRAC? SINGLE

PHOLD returns the bargraph maxhold results for each active bargraph detector.
Each result is made up out of two values:
● Absolute level
● Frequency
The order of detectors is as shown in the user interface: maximum peak, minimum
peak, quasipeak, average, RMS. Inactive detectors are ignored.

Example:
TRAC? PHOLD

Querying scan characteristics

The SCPI parameter SCAN returns the scan characteristics while the scan is running.
The amount of returned results depends on the scan settings.
The type of returned data is as follows:
● 4 byte, trace status:
➙ bit 0 to 9 represent the subscan
➙ bit 10 represents the last block of a subscan
➙ bit 11 represents the last block of the last subscan
➙ bit 12 represents the last of all blocks (for multiple scans after the last scan)
● 4 byte, number n of measurement results contained in one trace
● 4 byte, bit 0 represents the state of trace 1 (0/1)
● 4 byte, bit 0 represents the state of trace 2 (0/1)
● 4 byte, bit 0 represents the state of trace 3 (0/1)
● 4 byte, bit 0 represents the state of trace 4 (0/1)
Note:
If more than 4 traces are active, the state of trace 5 and 6 is indicated by an addi-
tional bit (bit 8) in the UINT32 field of trace 1 and 2.
● n*4 byte, measurement results for trace 1; only if trace 1 is active
● n*4 byte, measurement results for trace 2; only if trace 2 is active
● n*4 byte, measurement results for trace 3; only if trace 3 is active

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 613

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

● n*4 byte, measurement results for trace 4; only if trace 4 is active

● n*4 byte, measurement results for trace 5; only if trace 5 is active
● n*4 byte, measurement results for trace 6; only if trace 6 is active
● n*1 byte, status information for each measurement result
➙ bit 2 represents overrange for trace 1 to trace 6
The data is always returned in binary format (FORM REAL,32).
Note that the SCAN parameter only works while the scan is actually running.

Example:
TRAC? SCAN

Querying results for a peak search

The SCPI parameters PLIST1 | ... | PLIST6 returns the results of a peak search for a
particular trace or detector (1 to 6).
Each result is made up out of three values:
● 4 byte, frequency
● 4 byte, absolute level
● 4 byte, Delta between absolute level and limit line value at corresponding fre-
quency
If no limit line is active, the delta value is set to 0.0
The trace has to be active for the command to work.

Example:
TRAC? PLIST3

Querying results for the final measurement

The SCPI parameters FINAL1 | ... | FINAL6 return the results of the final measure-
ment for a particular trace or detector (1 to 6).
Each result is made up out of three values:
● 4 byte, frequency
● 4 byte, absolute level
● 4 byte, Delta between absolute level and limit line value at corresponding fre-
quency
If no limit line is active, the delta value is set to 0.0
The trace has to be active for the command to work.

Querying the status of the measurement results

The SCPI parameter STATUS returns the status information for each measurement
result. Thus, the number of returned values depends on the number of measurement
results n. For each measurement result, the parameter queries 1 byte of status infor-
mation.
➙ bit 2 represents overrange for trace 1 to trace 6

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 614

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Note that the SCAN parameter only works while the scan is actually running.

Example:
TRAC? STATUS

Querying spectrogram data

The SCPI parameter SGRam returns the contents of the spectrogram.
For every frame (horizontal line) in the spectrogram, the command returns the power
levels that have been measured, one for each sweep or measurement point. The num-
ber of frames depends on the size of the history depth. The power level depends on
the unit you have currently set.

FORMat:DEXPort:TRACes <Selection>
This command selects the data to be included in a data export file.
Parameters:
<Selection> ALL
Selects all active traces for export to an ASCII file.
The <trace> parameter for the MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe
command is ignored.
SINGle
Only a single trace is selected for export, namely the one speci-
fied by the MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe command.
*RST: SINGle
Manual operation: See "ASCII Trace Export" on page 208

TRACe[:DATA] <ResultType>
This command queries current trace data and measurement results.
The data format depends on FORMat[:DATA].

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 615

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Query parameters:
<Trace> TRACE1 | ... | TRACE6
See "Querying trace data" on page 612.
FINAL1 | ... | FINAL6
See "Querying results for the final measurement" on page 614.
PLIST1 | ... | PLIST6
See "Querying results for a peak search" on page 614.
PHOLD
See "Querying bargraph results" on page 613.
SCAN
See "Querying scan characteristics" on page 613.
SGRam
See "Querying spectrogram data" on page 615
SINGLE
See "Querying bargraph results" on page 613.
STATUS
See "Querying scan characteristics" on page 613.
Return values:
<TraceData> For more information see tables below.
Example: TRAC? TRACE1
Queries the level for each trace point of trace 1.

10.3.1.6 Fixed Frequency Scans

Commands useful to configure the fixed frequency scans described elsewhere:

● [SENSe:]FREQuency:MODE on page 635
[SENSe:]SCAN:TDOMain............................................................................................... 616

[SENSe:]SCAN:TDOMain <Time>
This command defines the measurement time for fixed frequency scans.
Parameters:
<Time> Measurement time in seconds.
The range indicated eblow is the maximum range. The actual
range depends on the measurement time defined with [SENSe:
]SWEep:TIME on page 608.
Range: 10 ms to 10000 s
Example: SCAN:TDOM 100 s
Defines a measurement time of 100 s.
Manual operation: See "Fixed Frequency" on page 198

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 616

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

10.3.1.7 Demodulating Analog Signals

[SENSe:]DEMod............................................................................................................ 617
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch:LEVel.....................................................................................617
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe]................................................................................. 617

[SENSe:]DEMod <Demod>
This command turns analog demodulation at the receiver frequency on and off and
selects the type of analog demodulation.
Parameters:
<Demod> OFF
Turns demodulation off.
AM
Turns AM demodulation on.
FM
Turns FM demodulation on.
*RST: OFF
Example: DEM FM
Turns FM demodulation on.
Manual operation: See "Demod (On Off)" on page 171
See "AM / FM" on page 171

[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch:LEVel <Threshold>
This command defines the threshold for selective demodulation. Squelching must be
active for this command to work (see [SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe]).
All signals below the threshold are not demodulated.
This command in only available if the R&S ESR option B3 (Audio Demodulation) is
installed.
Parameters:
<Threshold> The threshold level as a percentage of the display height.
Range: 0 to 100
*RST: 60
Example: DEM:SQU:LEV 80
Sets the squelch level to 80% of the displayed signal.
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Squelch" on page 171
See "Squelch Level" on page 431

[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe] <State>
This command turns selective demodulation at the marker position on and off.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 617

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

A video trigger is automatically activated with the same level as the squelch level, any
other trigger or gate settings are deactivated.
This command in only available if the R&S ESR option B3 (Audio Demodulation) is
installed.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: DEM:SQU ON
Signals below the level threshold are not sent to the audio out-
put.
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Squelch" on page 171
See "Squelch" on page 431

10.3.1.8 Spectrogram Control

● Configuring Spectrograms.................................................................................... 618

● Using Markers....................................................................................................... 622
● Using Deltamarkers...............................................................................................628

Configuring Spectrograms
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CLEar[:IMMediate].......................................................................618
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:DEFault....................................................................... 619
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:LOWer.........................................................................619
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:SHAPe........................................................................ 619
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:UPPer..........................................................................619
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor[:STYLe]....................................................................... 619
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:HDEPth...................................................................................... 620
CALCulate:SGRam:TRACe.............................................................................................620
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp:DATA?.......................................................................... 621
MMEMory:STORe:SGRam............................................................................................. 621

CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CLEar[:IMMediate]
This command resets the Spectrogram result display and clears the history buffer.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
Example: CALC:SGR:CLE
Resets the result display and clears the memory.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Spectrogram Clear" on page 383
See "Clear Spectrogram" on page 416

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 618

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:DEFault
This command sets the color settings for the spectrogram result display to its default
state.
Usage: Event

DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:LOWer <Percentage>
This command sets the lower percentage boundary of the spectrogram.
Parameters:
<Percentage> Statistical frequency percentage.
Range: 0 to 66
*RST: 0
Default unit: %
Example: DISP:WIND:SGR:COL:LOW 10
Sets the start of the color map to 10%.
Manual operation: See "Color Mapping" on page 416

DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:SHAPe <Shape>
This command defines the shape and focus of the color curve for the spectrogram
result display.
Parameters:
<Shape> Shape of the color curve.
Range: -1 to 1
*RST: 0

DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:UPPer <Percentage>
This command sets the upper percentage boundary of the spectrogram.
Parameters:
<Percentage> Statistical frequency percentage.
Range: 0 to 66
*RST: 0
Default unit: %
Example: DISP:WIND:SGR:COL:UPP 95
Sets the start of the color map to 95%.
Manual operation: See "Color Mapping" on page 416

DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor[:STYLe] <ColorScheme>
This command sets the color scheme for the spectrogram.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 619

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Parameters:
<ColorScheme> HOT
Uses a color range from blue to red. Blue colors indicate low lev-
els, red colors indicate high ones.
COLD
Uses a color range from red to blue. Red colors indicate low lev-
els, blue colors indicate high ones.
RADar
Uses a color range from black over green to light turquoise with
shades of green in between. Dark colors indicate low levels, light
colors indicate high ones.
GRAYscale
Shows the results in shades of gray. Dark gray indicates low lev-
els, light gray indicates high ones.
*RST: HOT
Example: DISP:WIND:SGR:COL GRAY
Changes the color scheme of the spectrogram to black and
white.

CALCulate<n>:SGRam:HDEPth <HistoryDepth>
This command sets the number of frames to be stored in the R&S ESR's memory.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<HistoryDepth> The maximum number of frames depends on the number of
sweep points.
Range: 781 to 20000
Increment: 1
*RST: 3000
Example: CALC:SGR:HDEP 1500
Sets the history depth to 1500.
Manual operation: See "Frame Count" on page 383
See "History Depth" on page 415

CALCulate:SGRam:TRACe <Trace>
This command selects the trace the spectrogram is based on.
Parameters:
<Trace> Number of the trace. The range depends on the result display.
Scans support six traces, IF Analysis supports three traces.
Example: CALC:SGR:TRAC 2
Assigns trace two to the spectrogram.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 620

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Manual operation: See "Trace to Spectrogram" on page 173

CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp:DATA? <Mode>
This command queries the time stamp of the frames.
All available frame results are returned by TRACe<n>:DATA on page 696.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
Query parameters:
<Mode> CURRent
Returns the time stamp of the current frame.
ALL
Returns the time stamps of all frames. The result are sorted in
descending order, beginning with the current frame.
Return values:
<TimeStamp> The return values consist of four values for each frame.
The first value is the date of the measurement in seconds that
have passed since 01.01.1970 in seconds. For a better resolu-
tion the second value shows the additional milliseconds. This
value is also displayed on screen.
These numbers are appropiate for relative uses, but you can
also calculate the absolute date and time as displayed on the
screen.
The third and fourth value are reserved for future uses.
If the Spectrogram is empty, the command returns '0,0,0,0'
Example: CALC:SGR:TST ON
Activates the time stamp.
CALC:SGR:TST:DATA? ALL
Returns the time stamp of all frames sorted in a descending
order.
Usage: Query only

MMEMory:STORe:SGRam <File>
This command exports the spectrogram data to a ASCII file.
The file contains the data for every frame in the history buffer. The data corresponding
to a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that
frame was recorded.
Note that, depending on the size of the history buffer, the process of exporting the data
can take a while.
Parameters:
<File> string containing the file name of the destination file

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 621

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Example: MMEM:STOR:SGR
Copies the spectrogram data to a file.
Manual operation: See "ASCII Trace Export" on page 208

Using Markers
Commands useful to work with markers in the spectrogram described elsewhere:
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT on page 661
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 661
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 662
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt on page 662
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:LEFT on page 663
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT on page 663
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 663
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt on page 664

Command exclusive to position markers in the spectrogram:

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:FRAMe................................................................... 622
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:SARea....................................................................623
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]...............................................623
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]................................................624
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe................................................ 624
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow................................................. 625
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT...................................................625
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK].................................................626
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe................................................. 626
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow.................................................. 626
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT....................................................627
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]..................................................627

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:FRAMe <Frame> | <Time>

This command positions the marker on a particular frame.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 622

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Parameters:
<Frame> | <Time> <Frame> (if time stamp is off)
Defines the frame to place the marker on. The range is {0...num-
ber of recorded frames-1}
Note that in receiver mode, it is not possible to select a frame,
only a time.
<time> (if time stamp is on)
Defines the distance of the marker in seconds to the last mea-
sured frame (frame 0).
Example: CALC:MARK:SGR:FRAM -20
Sets the marker on the 20th frame before the present.
CALC:MARK2:SGR:FRAM 2 s
Sets second marker on the frame 2 seconds ago.

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:SARea <SearchArea>
This command defines the marker search area.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<SearchArea> VISible
Performs a search in the visible frames.
Note that VISible is ignored if Spectrogram is not visible for any
reason (e.g. if the Spectrum Analyzer is in full screen mode or
display update is inactive).
MEMory
Performs a search over all frames in the memory.
*RST: VISible
Example: CALC:DELT:SGR:SAR MEM
Performs a search over all frames in the memory.
Manual operation: See "Select Search Area" on page 218

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the specified marker on the current peak level of the spectro-
gram. The possible position depends on the marker search area.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
For more information, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:SARea on page 623.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 623

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK2:SGR:SAR VIS
CALC:MARK2:SGR:XY:MAX
Activates and positions marker 2 on the peak level in the visible
Spectrogram.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the specified marker on the current minimum level of the
spectrogram. The possible position depends on the marker search area.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
For more information, seeCALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:SARea on page 623 .
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK3:SGR:SAR VIS
CALC:MARK3:SGR:XY:MIN
Activates and positions marker 3 on the minimum level in the
visible Spectrogram.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe
This command positions the specified marker on the next peak level of the vertical
axis. The search includes only frames above the current marker position. It does not
change the horizontal position of the marker.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 624

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Example: CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MAX
Activates and positions marker 2 on the peak level of the y-axis.
CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MAX:ABV
Positions marker 2 on the next higher level found in the diagram
area above the current marker position.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow
This command positions the specified marker on the next peak level of the vertical
axis. The search includes only frames below the current marker position. It does not
change the horizontal position of the marker.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MAX
Activates and positions marker 2 on the peak level of the y-axis.
CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MAX:BEL
Positions marker 2 on the next higher level found in the diagram
area below the current marker position.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT
This command positions the specified marker on the next peak level of the vertical
axis. The search includes frames above and below the current marker position. It does
not change the horizontal position of the marker.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MAX
Activates and positions marker 2 on the peak level of the y-axis.
CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MAX:NEXT
Positions marker 2 on the next higher level.
Usage: Event

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 625

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the specified marker on the current peak level of the vertical
axis. The search is performed over all frames. It does not change the horizontal posi-
tion of the marker.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MAX
Activates and positions marker 2 on the peak level of the y-axis.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe
This command positions the specified marker on the next minimum level of the vertical
axis. The search includes only frames above the current marker position. It does not
change the horizontal position of the marker.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MIN
Activates and positions marker 2 on the minimum level of the y-
axis.
CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MIN:ABOV
Positions marker 2 on the next minimum level found in the dia-
gram area above the current marker position.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow
This command positions the specified marker on the next minimum level of the vertical
axis. The search includes only frames below the current marker position. It does not
change the horizontal position of the marker.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 626

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MIN
Activates and positions marker 2 on the minimum level of the y-
axis.
CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MAX:BEL
Positions marker 2 on the next minimum level found in the dia-
gram area below the current marker position.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT
This command positions the specified marker on the next minimum level of the vertical
axis. The search includes frames above and below the current marker position. It does
not change the horizontal position of the marker.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MIN
Activates and positions marker 2 on the minimum level of the y-
axis.
CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MIN:NEXT
Positions marker 2 on the next minimum level.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the specified marker on the current minimum level of the verti-
cal axis. The search is performed over all captured frames. It does not change the hori-
zontal position of the delta marker.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MIN
Activates and positions marker 2 on the minimum level of the y-
axis.
Usage: Event

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 627

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Command exclusive to position markers in the spectrogram:

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:FRAMe........................................................... 628
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:SARea............................................................629
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK].......................................629
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]........................................630
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe........................................ 630
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow......................................... 631
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT...........................................631
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK].........................................632
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe..........................................632
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow.......................................... 632
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT............................................633
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]..........................................633

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:FRAMe <Frame> | <Time>

This command positions the delta marker on a particular frame. The frame is relative to
the position of marker 1.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 628

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Parameters:
<Frame> | <Time> <Frame> (if time stamp is off)
Defines the distance of the deltamarker in frames and in relation
to the position of marker 1.
Note that in receiver mode, it is not possible to select a frame,
only a time.
<time> (if time stamp is on)
Defines the distance of the deltamarker in seconds and in rela-
tion to the position of marker 1. The reference is the time stamp
of marker 1.
Example: CALC:DELT4:SGR:FRAM -20
Sets fourth deltamarker 20 frames below marker 1.
CALC:DELT4:SGR:FRAM 2 s
Sets fourth deltamarker 2 seconds above the position of marker
1.

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:SARea <SearchArea>
This command defines the deltamarker search area.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<SearchArea> VISible
Performs a search in the visible frames.
Note that VISible is ignored if Spectrogram is not visible for any
reason (e.g. if the Spectrum Analyzer is in full screen mode or
display update is inactive).
MEMory
Performs a search over all frames in the memory.
*RST: VISible
Example: CALC:DELT:SGR:SAR MEM
Performs a search over all frames in the memory.

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the specified delta marker on the current peak level of the
spectrogram. The possible position depends on the deltamarker search area.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
For more information, see CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:SARea
on page 629.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 629

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:DELT2:SGR:SAR VIS
CALC:DELT2:SGR:XY:MAX
Activates and positions delta marker 2 on the peak level in the
visible Spectrogram.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the specified delta marker on the current minimum level of the
spectrogram. The possible position depends on the deltamarker search area.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
For more information, see CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:SARea
on page 629.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:DELT3:SGR:SAR VIS
CALC:DELT3:SGR:XY:MIN
Activates and positions delta marker 3 on the minimum level in
the visible Spectrogram.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe
This command positions the specified delta marker on the next peak level of the verti-
cal axis. The search includes only frames above the current marker position. It does
not change the horizontal position of the delta marker.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 630

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Example: CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MAX
Activates and positions delta marker 2 on the peak level of the y-
axis.
CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MAX:ABOV
Positions delta marker 2 on the next higher level found in the
diagram area above the current marker position.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow
This command positions the specified delta marker on the next peak level of the verti-
cal axis. The search includes only frames below the current marker position. It does
not change the horizontal position of the delta marker.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MAX
Activates and positions delta marker 2 on the peak level of the y-
axis.
CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MAX:BEL
Positions delta marker 2 on the next higher level found in the
diagram area below the current marker position.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT
This command positions the specified delta marker on the next peak level of the verti-
cal axis. The search includes frames above and below the current marker position. It
does not change the horizontal position of the delta marker.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MAX
Activates and positions delta marker 2 on the peak level of the y-
axis.
CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MAX:NEXT
Positions delta marker 2 on the next higher level.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 631

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the specified delta marker on the current peak level of the ver-
tical axis. The search is performed over all frames. It does not change the horizontal
position of the deltamarker.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MAX
Activates and positions delta marker 2 on the peak level of the y-
axis.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe
This command positions the specified delta marker on the next minimum level of the
vertical axis. The search includes only frames above the current marker position. It
does not change the horizontal position of the delta marker.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MIN
Activates and positions delta marker 2 on the minimum level of
the y-axis.
CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MIN:ABOV
Positions delta marker 2 on the next minimum level found in the
diagram area above the current marker position.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow
This command positions the specified delta marker on the next minimum level of the
vertical axis. The search includes only frames below the current marker position. It
does not change the horizontal position of the delta marker.
The command is available for the spectrogram.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 632

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MIN
Activates and positions delta marker 2 on the minimum level of
the y-axis.
CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MAX:BEL
Positions delta marker 2 on the next minimum level found in the
diagram area below the current marker position.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT
This command positions the specified delta marker on the next minimum level of the
vertical axis. The search includes frames above and below the current marker position.
It does not change the horizontal position of the delta marker.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MIN
Activates and positions delta marker 2 on the minimum level of
the y-axis.
CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MIN:NEXT
Positions delta marker 2 on the next minimum level.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the specified delta marker on the current minimum level of the
vertical axis. The search is performed over all captured frames. It does not change the
horizontal position of the delta marker.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 633

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Example: CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MIN
Activates and positions delta marker 2 on the minimum level of
the y-axis.
Usage: Event

10.3.2 Defining the Frequency

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X:SPACing.................................................................. 634
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer.........................................................................................634
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP............................................................................... 634
[SENSe:]FREQuency:MODE...........................................................................................635
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt...........................................................................................635
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP............................................................................................636

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X:SPACing <Scale>
This command selects the scale of the frequency axis.
Parameters:
<Scale> LINear
Linear scale of the frequency axis.
LOGarithmic
Logarithmic scale of the frequency axis.
*RST: LOGarithmic
Example: DISP:TRAC:X:SPAC LIN
Selects linear scale for the frequency axis.
Manual operation: See "Freq Axis (Lin Log)" on page 195
See "Freq (Lin Log)" on page 311

[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer <Frequency>
This command defines the receiver frequency for measurements in the frequency or
time domain.
Parameters:
<Frequency> 0 to fmax
Range: 0 Hz to fmax
*RST: fmax /2
Example: FREQ:CENT 100MHz
Defines a receiver frequency of 100 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Continue at Rec Frequency" on page 167
See "Receiver Frequency" on page 170

[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP <StepSize>
This command defines the center frequency step size.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 634

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Parameters:
<StepSize> Range: 1 to fmax
*RST: 0.1 x <span value>
Default unit: Hz
Example: FREQ:CENT:STEP 120 MHz
Manual operation: See "Stepsize" on page 188
See "Manual" on page 356

[SENSe:]FREQuency:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the scan mode.
Parameters:
<Mode> CW
Selects fixed frequency scans.
Define the frequency with [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer
on page 634.
SCAN
Selects the stepped scans in the frequency domain.
In the frequency domain, define the frequency with:
• [SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt on page 635
• [SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP on page 636
• [SENSe:]SCAN<range>:STARt on page 646
• [SENSe:]SCAN<range>:STOP on page 647
• [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN on page 795
• [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer on page 634
TDOMain
Selects time domain scans in the frequency domain. See SCAN
on how to define the frequency.
Time domain scans are available with options R&S ESR-B50
and R&S ESR-K53.
*RST: TDOMain
Example: FREQ:MODE TDOM
Selects time domain scans.
Manual operation: See "Fixed Frequency" on page 198
See "Time Domain Scan (On Off)" on page 200

[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt <Start>
This command defines the start frequency for scans in the frequency domain.
Parameters:
<Start> Range: 0 Hz to fmax
*RST: 0 Hz
Example: FREQ:STAR 20MHz
Manual operation: See "Start / Stop Frequency" on page 189

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 635

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP <Stop>
This command defines the stop frequency for scans in the time domain.
Parameters:
<Stop> Range: 0 Hz to fmax
*RST: fmax
Example: FREQ:STOP 20MHz
Manual operation: See "Start / Stop Frequency" on page 189

10.3.3 Configuring the Vertical Axis

CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer........................................................................................... 636
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:BOTTom..................................................... 636
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing.................................................................. 637
INPut:ATTenuation.........................................................................................................637
INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO...............................................................................................638
INPut:ATTenuation:PROTection[:STATe]......................................................................... 638
INPut:GAIN:AUTO......................................................................................................... 638
INPut:GAIN:STATe ....................................................................................................... 638
INPut:IMPedance...........................................................................................................639

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:BOTTom <Level>
This command defines the minimum level displayed on the vertical diagram axis.
Parameters:
<Level> Minimum displayed level. The unit depends on the one you have
selected.
Example: DISP:TRAC:Y:BOTT -20
The minimum grid level is set to -20 dBuV (pre-condition: the
default unit has not been changed)

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 636

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Manual operation: See "Grid Range / Grid Min Level" on page 192

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing <ScalingType>
This command selects the scaling of the y-axis.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<t> irrelevant
Parameters:
<ScalingType> LOGarithmic
Logarithmic scaling.
LINear
Linear scaling in %.
LDB
Linear scaling in dB.
*RST: LOGarithmic
Example: DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LIN
Select a linear scale.
Manual operation: See "Range Log 100 dB" on page 326
See "Range Log 50 dB" on page 327
See "Range Log 10 dB" on page 327
See "Range Log 5 dB" on page 327
See "Range Log 1 dB" on page 327
See "Range Log Manual" on page 328
See "Range Linear %" on page 328
See "Range Lin. Unit" on page 328

INPut:ATTenuation <Attenuation>
This command defines the attenuation level at the RF input.
To protect the input mixer, attenuation levels of 10 dB or less are possible only if you
have turned the input protection off with INPut:ATTenuation:PROTection[:
STATe].
Parameters:
<Attenuation> Range: 0 dB to 75 dB
Increment: 5 dB
*RST: 10 dB
Example: INP:ATT 40dB
Defines an attenuation level of 40 dB.
Manual operation: See "RF Atten Manual" on page 190

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 637

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO <State>
This command turns automatic configuration of the attenuation on and off.
If on, the R&S ESR selects an attenuation that results in a good signal-to-noise ratio
without overloading the receiver.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: INP:ATT:AUTO ON
Turns the auto ranging function on.
Manual operation: See "Auto Range (On Off)" on page 191

INPut:ATTenuation:PROTection[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the availability of attenuation levels of 10 dB or less on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: INP:ATT:PROT ON
Manual operation: See "10 dB Min" on page 191

INPut:GAIN:AUTO <State>
Turns automatic selection of the preamplifier state on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: :INP:GAIN:AUTO ON
Includes the preamplifier into the auto range function
Manual operation: See "Auto Preamp (On Off)" on page 191

INPut:GAIN:STATe <State>
This command turns the 20 dB preamplifier on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: INP:GAIN:STAT ON
Turns the preamplifier on.
Manual operation: See "Preamp On/Off" on page 191

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 638

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

INPut:IMPedance <Impedance>
This command selects the nominal input impedance.
75 Ω should be selected if the 50 Ω input impedance is transformed to a higher impe-
dance using a 75 Ω adapter of the RAZ type (= 25 Ω in series to the input impedance
of the instrument). The correction value in this case is 1.76 dB = 10 log (75Ω/50Ω).
Parameters:
<Impedance> 50 | 75
*RST: 50 Ω
Example: INP:IMP 75
Manual operation: See "Input 50 Ω/75 Ω " on page 193

10.3.4 Selecting the Bandwidth

[SENSe:]BANDwidth:IF...................................................................................................639
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]....................................................................... 639
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO..............................................................640
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE.............................................................. 640

[SENSe:]BANDwidth:IF <Bandwidth>
This command defines the resolution bandwidth for IF analysis.
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> Resolution filter bandwidth with a 6 dB bandwidth in the range
from 10 Hz to 100 kHz in steps of 1-3-10-....
The available bandwidths depend on the current frequency
span.
*RST: 3 kHz
Example: BAND:IF 10KHZ
Defines a resolution bandwidth of 10 kHz.
Manual operation: See "IF Analysis RBW" on page 194

[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <Bandwidth>
This command defines the resolution bandwidth.
The available bandwidths depend on the selected filter type. For more information see
chapter 4.2.1, "Measurement Bandwidth", on page 174.
A change of the resolution bandwidth automatically turns the coupling to the span off.
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> refer to data sheet
*RST: (AUTO is set to ON)

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 639

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Example: BAND 1 MHz

Sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz
Manual operation: See "Res BW Manual" on page 193
See "Res BW CISPR / CISPR (6 dB)" on page 310
See "Res BW Mil Std / MIL Std (6 dB)" on page 310
See "Res BW" on page 325
See "Res BW Manual" on page 370

[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO <State>
This command couples or decouples the resolution bandwidth to the selected fre-
quency.
The resolution bandwidth is coupled to the frequency only if you have selected the
Quasipeak, CISPR Average or CISPR RMS detector.
For more information see chapter 4.2.1, "Measurement Bandwidth", on page 174.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: BAND:AUTO OFF
Decouples the measurement bandwidth from the frequency
range.
Manual operation: See "CISPR RBW Uncoupled" on page 193

[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE <FilterType>
This command selects the type of resolution filter.
For detailed information on filters see chapter 5.2.6.3, "Selecting the Appropriate Filter
Type", on page 375 and chapter 5.2.6.4, "List of Available RRC and Channel Filters",
on page 376.
When changing the filter type, the next larger filter bandwidth is selected if the same
filter bandwidth is not available for the new filter type.
5 Pole filters are not available when using the sweep type "FFT".

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 640

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Parameters:
<FilterType> NORMal
Gaussian filters
CFILter
Channel filters
RRC
RRC filters
P5
5 Pole filters
CISPr (PULSe)
6 dB CISPR filter (commercial EMI standards)
Note: when the filter type is queried, the CISPR filter returns
'PULS'.
*RST: NORMal
Example: BAND:TYPE NORM
Manual operation: See "Filter Type" on page 194
See "Filter Type" on page 310
See "Res BW CISPR / CISPR (6 dB)" on page 310
See "Res BW Mil Std / MIL Std (6 dB)" on page 310

10.3.5 Controlling Inputs and Outputs

INPut:COUPling.............................................................................................................641
INPut:TYPE...................................................................................................................641

INPut:COUPling <CouplingType>
Toggles the RF input of the R&S ESR between AC and DC coupling.
Parameters:
<CouplingType> AC | DC
*RST: AC
Example: INP:COUP DC
Manual operation: See "Input (AC/DC)" on page 196

INPut:TYPE <Input>
The command selects the signal source.
Parameters:
<Input> INPUT1
Selects RF input 1.
INPUT2
Selects RF input 2.
*RST: INPUT1

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 641

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Example: INP:TYPE INPUT1

Selects RF input 1.
Manual operation: See "Input (1 2)" on page 196
See "Range 1 to 10" on page 200

10.3.6 Test Automation

● General Scan Configuration..................................................................................642

● Scan Table............................................................................................................644
● Peak Search..........................................................................................................648
● Peak Lists..............................................................................................................651
● Trace Configuration...............................................................................................652
● LISN Settings........................................................................................................ 653

10.3.6.1 General Scan Configuration

[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt.................................................................................................642
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt:CURRent..................................................................................642
TRACe<n>:FEED:CONTrol<t>........................................................................................ 643
TRACe<n>:POINts.........................................................................................................643

[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt <SweepCount>
This command defines the number of scans performed during a single sweep.
Parameters:
<SweepCount> Range: 0 to 32767
*RST: 0
Example: SWE:COUN 64
Sets the number of sweeps to 64.
INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single-sweep mode.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for its end.
Manual operation: See "Scan Count" on page 198

[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt:CURRent
This command queries the number of scans that have started in single scan mode with
more than one scan (SENSe:SWEep:COUNt > 1).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 642

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Example: SWE:COUNt 64
sets scan count to 64
INIT:CONT OFF
switches to single scan mode
INIT
starts a scan (without waiting for the scan end!)
SWE:COUN:CURR?
queries the number of started scans
Manual operation: See "Scan Count" on page 198

TRACe<n>:FEED:CONTrol<t> <Occasion>
This command turns block data transmission during a scan on and off.
The availability of data is reported in the STATus:OPERation-Register.
The block size depends on scan time and the upper limit defined by TRACe<n>:
POINts on page 643.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<t> Selects a trace.
Parameters:
<Occasion> ALWays
Block data transmission is on.
NEVer
Block data transmission is off.
*RST: NEVer
Example: TRAC:FEED:CONT ALW
Switches to single sweep mode.

TRACe<n>:POINts LIMit, <Points>

This command defines the maximum number of measurement pointsthat are transfer-
red in one block after using TRAC? SCAN.
The total amount of bytes which is transferred depends on the number of active traces.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Points> Range: 1 to 10000
*RST: 1000
Example: TRAC:POIN LIM, 8000
Transfers a maximum of 8000 measurement values per trace
with a single query.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 643

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

10.3.6.2 Scan Table

[SENSe:]SCAN<range>:BANDwidth:RESolution............................................................... 644
[SENSe:]SCAN<range>:INPut:ATTenuation..................................................................... 644
[SENSe:]SCAN<range>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO............................................................644
[SENSe:]SCAN<range>:INPut:GAIN:AUTO...................................................................... 645
[SENSe:]SCAN<range>:INPut:GAIN[:STATE]...................................................................645
[SENSe:]SCAN<range>:INPut:TYPE............................................................................... 645
[SENSe:]SCAN:RANGes[:COUNt]................................................................................... 646
[SENSe:]SCAN<range>:STARt....................................................................................... 646
[SENSe:]SCAN<range>:STEP........................................................................................ 646
[SENSe:]SCAN<range>:STOP........................................................................................ 647
[SENSe:]SCAN<range>:TIME......................................................................................... 647
[[SENSe:]SWEep:SPACing............................................................................................. 647

[SENSe:]SCAN<range>:BANDwidth:RESolution <Bandwidth>
This command defines the measurement bandwidth for a particular scan range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...10
Selects the scan range.
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> Range: 10 Hz to 10 MHz
*RST: 9 kHz
Example: SCAN4:BAND:RES 1MHz
Defines a measurement bandwidth of 1 MHz for the 4th scan
range.

[SENSe:]SCAN<range>:INPut:ATTenuation <Attenuation>
This command defines the attenuation level for a particular scan range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...10
Selects the scan range.
Parameters:
<Attenuation> dBmin to dBmax
Range: Att(min) to Att(max)
*RST: 10 dB
Example: SCAN4:INP:ATT 30dB
Defines an attenuation level of 30 dB for the 4th scan range.

[SENSe:]SCAN<range>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO <State>
This command turns auto ranging in a particular scan range on and off.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 644

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Suffix: .
<range> 1...10
Selects the scan range.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: SCAN4:INP:ATT:AUTO OFF
Turns off auto ranging in the 4th scan range.

[SENSe:]SCAN<range>:INPut:GAIN:AUTO <State>
This command includes the preamplifier in the autoranging function of the selected
receiver scan range.
Parameters:
<State> ON
OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: :SCAN1:INP:GAIN:AUTO ON
Includes the preamplifier in the autoranging function for scan
range 1

[SENSe:]SCAN<range>:INPut:GAIN[:STATE] <State>
This command turns the preamplifier in a particular scan range on and off.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...10
Selects the scan range.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: SCAN4:INP:GAIN:STAT ON
Turns on the preamplifier for the 4th scan range.

[SENSe:]SCAN<range>:INPut:TYPE <Input>
This command selects the signal source for a particular scan range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...10
Selects the scan range.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 645

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Parameters:
<Input> INPUT1
Selects RF input 1.
INPUT2
Selects RF input 2.
*RST: INPUT1
Example: SCAN4:INP:TYPE INPUT2
Selects RF input 2 as the signal source for the 4th scan range.

[SENSe:]SCAN:RANGes[:COUNt] <Ranges>
This command defines the number of scan ranges.
Parameters:
<Ranges> Number of ranges in the scan table.
If you enter the value "0", the R&S ESR ignores the configura-
tion of the scan table. instead, it performs the measurement
based on the current receiver configuration.
Range: 0 to 10
*RST: 0
Example: SCAN:RANG:COUN 4
Defines 4 scan ranges.

[SENSe:]SCAN<range>:STARt <Frequency>
This command defines the start frequency of a particular scan range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...10
Selects the scan range.
Parameters:
<Frequency> Range: fmin to fmax
*RST: 150 kHz
Example: SCAN4:STAR 30MHz
Defines a start frequency of 30 MHz for the 4th scan range.

[SENSe:]SCAN<range>:STEP <Frequency>
This command defines the frequency stepsize within a particular scan range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...10
Selects the scan range.
Parameters:
<Frequency> Range: fmin to fmax
*RST: 4 kHz

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 646

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Example: SCAN4:STEP 1MHz

Defines a step size of 1 MHz for the 4th scan range.

[SENSe:]SCAN<range>:STOP <Frequency>
This command defines the stop frequency of a particular scan range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...10
Selects the scan range.
Parameters:
<Frequency> Range: fmin to fmax
*RST: 30 MHz
Example: SCAN4:STOP 500MHz
Defines a stop frequency of 500 MHz for the 4th scan range.

[SENSe:]SCAN<range>:TIME <Time>
This command defines the measurement time for a particular scan range.
Note that for time domain scans (R&S ESR-K53), the available measurement time
range depends on the resolution bandwidth.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...10
Selects the scan range.
Parameters:
<Time> Range: 10 µs to 100 s
*RST: 1 ms
Example: SCAN4:TIME 1 ms
Defines a measurement time of 1 ms for the 4th scan range.

[[SENSe:]SWEep:SPACing <Spacing>
This command selects the frequency step mode.
Note that the command has no effect on the scale and display of the frequency axis.
Parameters:
<Spacing> LINear
Linear frequency steps with a fix stepsize.
LOGarithmic
Logarithmic frequency steps with the stepsize being a percent-
age of the current frequency.
AUTO
The stepsize is coupled to the resolution bandwidth to get the
best measurement results.
*RST: LINear

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 647

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Example: SWE:SPAC LOG

Selects logarithmic frequency steps.
Manual operation: See "Step Mode" on page 199

10.3.6.3 Peak Search

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion.........................................................................648
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:ADD...................................................................... 648
CALCulate:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:CLEar[:IMMediate]........................................................649
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch[:IMMediate]............................................................ 649
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:MARGin................................................................. 649
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:METHod................................................................ 649
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges........................................................... 650
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges:PCOunt............................................... 650

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion <Excursion>
This command defines the peak excursion
The peak excursion sets the requirements for a peak to be detected during a peak
search.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Excursion> The peak excursion is the distance to a trace maximum that
must be attained before a new maximum is recognized, or the
distance to a trace minimum that must be attained before a new
minimum is recognized
*RST: 6 dB
Example: CALC:MARK:PEXC 10dB
Defines peak excursion 10 dB.
Manual operation: See "Peak Excursion" on page 202
See "Peak Excursion" on page 216

CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:ADD <Frequency>
This command manually adds a particular frequency to the peak list, regardless if the
level threshold conditions have been fulfilled for that frequency.
Note that the frequency has to be in the displayed frequency range.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Frequency> Numeric value in Hz. The range depends on the measurement.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 648

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Example: CALC:PEAK:ADD 93MHz

Adds the frequency 93 MHz to the peak list.
Manual operation: See "Insert Frequency" on page 203

CALCulate:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:CLEar[:IMMediate]
This command deletes the contents of the peak list.
Example: CALC:PEAK:CLE
Deletes the contents of the peak list.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch[:IMMediate]
This command initiates a peak search and creates a peak list.
Example: CALC:PEAK
Initiates a peak search.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:MARGin <Margin>
This command defines a margin for the peak search.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Margin> Range: -200 dB to 200 dB
*RST: 6 dB
Example: CALC:PEAK:MARG 5 dB
Manual operation: See "Margin" on page 202
See "Margin" on page 273
See "Margin" on page 302

CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:METHod <Method>
This command selects the way the R&S ESR creates a peak list.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 649

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Parameters:
<Method> SUBRange
Divides the scan range into smaller subranges and looks for a
particular number of peaks in each subrange.
PEAK
Looks for a particular number of peaks over the complete scan
range.
*RST: PEAK
Example: CALC:PEAK:METH SUBR
Divides the scan range into smaller subranges for the peak
search.
Manual operation: See "Peak Search Mode (Peaks Subranges)" on page 201

CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges <Peaks> | <Subranges>

The effects of this command depend on the peak search mode that you have selected.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Peaks> If you have selected the "Peaks" search mode, the command
defines the number of peaks to look for during the peak search.
Range: 1 to 500
*RST: 50
<Subranges> If you have selected the Subranges search mode, the command
defines the number of subranges that the scan range is split
into.
Range: 1 to 50
*RST: 10
Example: CALC:PEAK:METH SUBR
CALC:PEAK:SUBR 25
Selects a subrange search and defines 25 subranges.
Manual operation: See "No Of Peaks" on page 202
See "No of Subranges / Peaks per Subrange" on page 202

CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges:PCOunt <Peaks>
This command defines the number of peaks to be found in each subrange.
Before you can use this command, you have to select the subrange peak search mode
with CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:METHod.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 650

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Parameters:
<Peaks> Number of peaks in one subrange.
Note that the maximum number of peaks is 500. Thus, the maxi-
mum number of peaks per subrange depends on the number of
subranges you have defined.
Range: 1 to depends on the number of subranges
*RST: 1
Example: CALC:PSE:METH SUBR
CALC:PSE:SUBR 20
CALC:PSE:SUBR:PCO 5
Looks for 5 peaks in each of 20 subranges.
Manual operation: See "No of Subranges / Peaks per Subrange" on page 202

10.3.6.4 Peak Lists

Commands useful to read peak lists described elsewhere:

● FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 820
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:SYMBol.......................................................................651
MMEMory:STORe:FINal................................................................................................. 651
MMEMory:STORe:PEAKlist............................................................................................ 652

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:SYMBol <Symbol>
This command turns the peak labels in the diagram on and off.
Parameters:
<Symbol> CROSs
Each peak is labelled by a symbol. The symbol and its color
depend on the trace the peak is on.
OFF
Peak labels are off.
*RST: OFF
Example: DISP:TRAC:SYMB CROS
Manual operation: See "Symbols (On Off)" on page 204

MMEMory:STORe:FINal <FileName>
This command exports the contents of the final measurement peak list to a file in ASCII
format.
Parameters:
<FileName> String containg the file name. The extension of the file is *.dat.
Example: :MMEM:STOR:FIN 'A:\TEST.DAT'
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Peak List Export" on page 204

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 651

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

MMEMory:STORe:PEAKlist <FileName>
This command exports the contents of a peak list to a file in ASCII format.
Parameters:
<FileName> String containg the file name. The extension of the file is *.dat.
Example: MMEM:STOR:PEAK 'D:\TEST.DAT'
Manual operation: See "Peak List Export" on page 204

10.3.6.5 Trace Configuration

Commands useful to configure traces and final measurements described elsewhere:

● [SENSe:]FMEasurement:AUTO on page 612
● [SENSe:]FMEasurement:TIME on page 612
● [SENSe:]DETector<t>:FMEasurement on page 611
[SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]..............................................................652
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE.........................................................................652

[SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion] <Detector>
This command selects the detector for the scan.
Suffix: .
<trace> 1...6
Selects the trace.
Parameters:
<Detector> NEGative | POSitive | RMS | AVERage | QPEak | CAVerage |
CRMS
*RST: APEak
Example: DET RMS
Selects the RMS detector.
Manual operation: See "Trace 1 to 6" on page 205

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE <Mode>
This command defines the type of display and the evaluation of the traces. WRITE cor-
responds to the Clr/Write mode of manual operation. The trace is switched off (=
BLANK in manual operation) with DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe].
The number of measurements for AVERage, MAXHold and MINHold is defined with
the [SENSe:]AVERage<n>:COUNt or [SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt commands. It should
be noted that synchronization to the end of the indicated number of measurements is
only possible in single sweep mode.
If calculation of average values is active, selection between logarithmic and linear aver-
aging is possible. For more detail see [SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE on page 822.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 652

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Suffix: .
<n> window; For applications that do not have more than 1 measure-
ment window, the suffix <n> is irrelevant.
<t> trace
Parameters:
<Mode> For more information on trace modes see chapter 4.2.4, "Trace
Modes", on page 180.
AVERage
Average trace mode.
BLANk
Blank trace.
MAXHold
Maximum value trace.
MINHold
Minimum value trace.
VIEW
Frozen trace.
WRITe
Clear write trace mode.
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switching to single sweep mode.
SWE:COUN 16
Sets the number of measurements to 16.
DISP:TRAC3:MODE MAXH
Switches on the calculation of the maximum peak for trace 3.
INIT;*WAI
Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps.
Manual operation: See "Clear Write" on page 180
See "Max Hold" on page 181
See "Min Hold" on page 181
See "View" on page 181
See "Trace 1 to 6" on page 205
See "Trace 1 - 6" on page 208
See "Average" on page 399

10.3.6.6 LISN Settings

[SENSe:]FMEasurement:LISN:FILTer:HPAS[:STATe]........................................................654
[SENSe:]FMEasurement:LISN:PHASe............................................................................. 654
[SENSe:]FMEasurement:LISN[:TYPE]..............................................................................654
INPut:LISN:FILTer:HPAS[:STATe]................................................................................... 655
INPut:LISN:PHASe.........................................................................................................655
INPut:LISN[:TYPE].........................................................................................................656

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 653

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

[SENSe:]FMEasurement:LISN:FILTer:HPAS[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the 150 kHz highpass filter of the ENV216 network for the final
measurement on and off.
The command is available for the R&S ENV216 network.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: FME:LISN:FILT:HPAS ON
Turns on the highpass filter.
Manual operation: See "150 kHz Highpass Filter" on page 207

[SENSe:]FMEasurement:LISN:PHASe <Phase>, [<Phase>]

This command selects the phase of the network used for the final measurement.
Parameters:
<Phase> L1
L2
Available for networks with four phases (R&S ESH2Z5,
R&S ENV4200 and R&S ENV432)
L3
Available for networks with four phases (R&S ESH2Z5,
R&S ENV4200 and R&S ENV432)
N
*RST: L1
Example: FME:LISN:PHAS L1,N
Manual operation: See "Final Test Phase" on page 206

[SENSe:]FMEasurement:LISN[:TYPE] <Type>
This command turns automatic control of the network used for the final measurement
on and off. It also selects the type of network in use.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 654

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Parameters:
<Type> ENV216
R&S ENV 216: two phases and highpass are controllable.
ENV432
R&S ENV 432: four phases are controllable.
ENV4200
R&S ENV 4200: four phases are controllable.
ESH2Z5
R&S ESH2-Z5: four phases and protective earth are controlla-
ble.
ESH3Z5
R&S ESH3-Z5: two phases and protective earth are controllable.
FOURphase
R&S ESH2-Z5: four phases and protective earth are controlla-
ble.
OFF
Turns off remote control of the LISN.
TWOPhase
R&S ESH3-Z5: two phases and protective earth are controllable.
*RST: OFF
Example: FME:LISN TWOP
Turns automatic control of the network on and selects the R&S
ESH3-Z5 network.
Manual operation: See "LISN Type" on page 206

INPut:LISN:FILTer:HPAS[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the 150 kHz highpass filter of the ENV216 network for the pre-
measurement on and off.
The command is available for the R&S ENV216 network.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: INP:LISN:FILT:HPAS ON
Turns on the highpass filter.
Manual operation: See "150 kHz Highpass Filter" on page 207
See "LISN Control" on page 311

INPut:LISN:PHASe <Phase>, [<Phase>]

This command selects the phase of the network used for the premeasurement.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 655

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Parameters:
<Phase> L1
L2
Available for networks with four phases (R&S ESH2Z5,
R&S ENV4200 and R&S ENV432)
L3
Available for networks with four phases (R&S ESH2Z5,
R&S ENV4200 and R&S ENV432)
N
*RST: L1
Example: INP:LISN:PHAS L1,L2
Selects phases L1 and L2 for the scan.
Manual operation: See "Prescan Phase" on page 206
See "LISN Control" on page 311

INPut:LISN[:TYPE] <Type>
This command turns automatic control of the network used for the premeasurement on
and off. It also selects the type of network in use.
Parameters:
<Type> ENV216
R&S ENV 216: two phases and highpass are controllable.
ENV432
R&S ENV 432: four phases are controllable.
ENV4200
R&S ENV 4200: four phases are controllable.
ESH2Z5
R&S ESH2-Z5: four phases and protective earth are controlla-
ble.
ESH3Z5
R&S ESH3-Z5: two phases and protective earth are controllable.
FOURphase
R&S ESH2-Z5: four phases and protective earth are controlla-
ble.
OFF
Turns off remote control of the LISN.
TWOPhase
R&S ESH3-Z5: two phases and protective earth are controllable.
*RST: OFF
Example: INP:LISN TWOP
Turns automatic control of the network on and selects the R&S
ESH3-Z5 network.
Manual operation: See "LISN Type" on page 206
See "LISN Control" on page 311

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 656

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

10.3.7 Working with Markers

● Configuring Marker Functionality.......................................................................... 657

● Using Markers....................................................................................................... 660
● Using Delta Markers..............................................................................................666

10.3.7.1 Configuring Marker Functionality

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUPled[:STATe]................................................................ 657
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer................................................................657
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CSTep................................................................. 658
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:ZOOM..................................................................658
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SCOupled[:STATe]...............................................................658
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT....................................................................659
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHT..................................................................659
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe]................................................................660
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MINFo:STATe..............................................................................660

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUPled[:STATe] <State>
This command couples or decouples the receiver frequency to the current marker fre-
quency.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:COUP ON
Couples the frequency to the marker frequency.
Manual operation: See "Marker Track" on page 213

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer
This command matches the center or receiver frequency to the frequency of a marker.
If you use the command in combination with a delta marker, that delta marker is turned
into a normal marker.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK2:FUNC:CENT
Sets the center frequency to the frequency of marker 2.
Manual operation: See "Tune to Marker" on page 213
See "Center =Mkr Freq (span > 0)" on page 422

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 657

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CSTep
This command matches the frequency step size to the current marker frequency.
The command turns delta markers into normal markers.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK3:FUNC:CST
Sets the center frequency to the same value as the frequency of
marker 3.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:ZOOM <Range>
This command defines the range to be zoomed around marker 1. Marker 1 is activated
first, if necessary.
The marker frequency becomes the new receiver or center frequency and the span is
adjusted according to the zoom factor.
Note that you should perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end
of the measurement. This is only possible for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<Range> <numeric_value>
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode
CALC:MARK:FUNC:ZOOM 1kHz;*WAI
Activates zooming and waits for its end.
Manual operation: See "Marker Zoom (span > 0)" on page 418

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SCOupled[:STATe] <State>
This command couples or decouples the marker frequency to the scan range settings.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: CALC:MARK:SCO ON
Couples the scan range settings to the marker frequency.
Manual operation: See "Settings Coupled" on page 213

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 658

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT <Limit>
This command sets the left limit of the marker search range.
If the power measurement in zero span is active, this command limits the evaluation
range to the trace.
Note: The function is only available if the search limit for marker and delta marker is
switched on (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe]).
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Limit> The value range depends on the span or sweep time.
The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for
time domain measurements.
Range: 0 to MAX
*RST: left diagram border
Example: CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON
Switches the search limit function on.
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:LEFT 10MHz
Sets the left limit of the search range to 10 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Left Limit" on page 216
See "Left Limit" on page 306

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHT <Limit>
This command sets the right limit of the marker search range.
If the power measurement in zero span is active, this command limits the evaluation
range to the trace.
Note: The function is only available if the search limit for marker and delta marker is
switched on ( CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe]).
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Limit> The value range depends on the span or sweep time.
The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for
time domain measurements.
Range: 0 to MAX
*RST: left diagram border

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 659

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Example: CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON
Switches the search limit function on.
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:RIGH 20MHz
Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Right Limit" on page 216
See "Right Limit" on page 306

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] <State>
This command turns marker search limits on and off.
If the power measurement in zero span is active, this command limits the evaluation
range on the trace.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> marker
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON
Switches on search limitation.
Manual operation: See "Search Limits" on page 216
See "Search Lim Off" on page 216
See "Limits (On/Off)" on page 305

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MINFo:STATe <State>
This command turns the marker info field in the diagram on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: DISP:MINF:STAT ON
Turns the marker info field on.
Manual operation: See "Marker Info (On Off)" on page 213

10.3.7.2 Using Markers

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF..................................................................................661
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT...................................................................661
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT.................................................................. 661
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]................................................................ 662
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt..................................................................662
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:LEFT....................................................................663
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT................................................................... 663

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 660

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK]................................................................. 663
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt...................................................................664
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe]...............................................................................664
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe................................................................................665
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X........................................................................................ 665
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y........................................................................................ 665

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF
This command all markers off, including delta markers and marker measurement func-
tions.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> depends on mode
irrelevant
Example: CALC:MARK:AOFF
Switches off all markers.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "All Marker Off" on page 212
See "Marker Configuration" on page 312

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT
This command positions a marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the left of the
current position (i.e. in descending X values).
If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent val-
ues < peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK2:MAX:LEFT
Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value to the left
of the current value.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Next Mode" on page 215

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT
This command positions the marker to the next smaller trace maximum.
If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent val-
ues < peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 661

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK2:MAX:NEXT
Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Next Peak" on page 214
See "Next Mode" on page 215

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the marker on the current trace maximum.
The corresponding marker is activated first or switched to the marker mode.
If no maximum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values < peak
excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> depends on mode
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK2:MAX
Positions marker 2 to the maximum value of the trace.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Peak" on page 214

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt
This command positions a marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the right of
the current value (i.e. in ascending X values).
If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent val-
ues < peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK2:MAX:RIGH
Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value to the right
of the current value.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Next Mode" on page 215

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 662

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:LEFT
This command positions a marker to the next higher trace minimum on the left of the
current value (i.e. in descending X direction).
If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK2:MIN
Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace.
CALC:MARK2:MIN:LEFT
Positions marker 2 to the next higher minimum value to the left
of the current value.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Next Mode" on page 215

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT
This command positions ae marker to the next higher trace minimum.
If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK2:MIN
Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace.
CALC:MARK2:MIN:NEXT
Positions marker 2 to the next higher maximum value.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Next Min" on page 215
See "Next Mode" on page 215

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the marker on the current trace minimum.
The corresponding marker is activated first or switched to marker mode, if necessary.
If no minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values < peak
excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 663

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

<m> depends on mode

Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK2:MIN
Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Min" on page 215

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt
This command positions a marker to the next higher trace minimum on the right of the
current value (i.e. in ascending X direction).
If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK2:MIN
Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace.
CALC:MARK2:MIN:RIGH
Positions marker 2 to the next higher minimum value to the right
of the current value.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Next Mode" on page 215

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] <State>
This command turns markers on and off.
If the corresponding marker number is currently active as a deltamarker, it is turned
into a normal marker.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> depends on mode
Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK3 ON
Switches on marker 3 or switches to marker mode.
Manual operation: See "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker
Norm/Delta" on page 210
See "Marker Wizard" on page 211

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 664

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe <Trace>
This command selects the trace a marker is positioned on.
The corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than "Blank".
If necessary, the corresponding marker is switched on prior to the assignment.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> depends on mode
Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<Trace> 1 ... 6
Trace number the marker is positioned on.
Example: CALC:MARK3:TRAC 2
Assigns marker 3 to trace 2.
Manual operation: See "Marker to Trace" on page 211
See "Marker Wizard" on page 211
See "Marker Configuration" on page 312

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X <Position>
This command positions a marker on a particular coordinate on the x-axis.
If marker 2, 3 or 4 is selected and used as delta marker, it is switched to marker mode.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<Position> Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x-axis.
The unit is either Hz (frequency domain) or s (time domain) or
dB (statistics).
Range: The range depends on the current x-axis range.
Example: CALC:MARK2:X 1.7MHz
Positions marker 2 to frequency 1.7 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker
Norm/Delta" on page 210

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y <MarkerPosition>
This command queries the measured value of a marker.
If necessary, the command activates the marker or turns a delta marker into a normal
marker.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 665

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
The unit of results depends on the result display and the unit you have selected.
In the default setting, the output is made depending on the unit determined with
CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer; only with linear level scaling the output is in %.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<MarkerPosition> Defines the vertical marker position in the persistence spectrum
result display.
Return values:
<Result> The measured value of the selected marker is returned.
In I/Q Analyzer mode, if the result display configuration "Real/
Imag (I/Q)" is selected, this query returns the Real (Q) value of
the marker first, then the Imag (I) value.
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK2 ON
Switches marker 2.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK2:Y?
Outputs the measured value of marker 2.
In I/Q Analyzer mode, for "Real/Imag (I/Q)", for example:
1.852719887E-011,0
Manual operation: See "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker
Norm/Delta" on page 210

10.3.7.3 Using Delta Markers

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:AOFF.......................................................................... 667
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:LINK........................................................................... 667
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT...........................................................667
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT.......................................................... 668
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]........................................................ 668
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt..........................................................668
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT............................................................669
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT........................................................... 669
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK]......................................................... 669
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:RIGHt...........................................................670
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MODE.........................................................................670
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe].......................................................................670
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:TRACe........................................................................ 671

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 666

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X................................................................................ 671
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative?.................................................................672
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y................................................................................ 672

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:AOFF
This command turns all active delta markers off.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:DELT:AOFF
Switches off all delta markers.
Manual operation: See "Marker Configuration" on page 312

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:LINK <State>
This command links delta marker 1 to marker 1.
If you change the horizontal position of the marker, so does the delta marker.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1
irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:DELT:LINK ON
Manual operation: See "Link Mkr1 and Delta1" on page 418

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT
This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the left
of the current value (i.e. descending X values). The corresponding delta marker is acti-
vated first, if necessary.
If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:DELT:MAX:LEFT
Sets delta marker 1 to the next smaller maximum value to the
left of the current value.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 667

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Manual operation: See "Next Mode" on page 215

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT
This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum. The cor-
responding delta marker is activated first, if necessary.
If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:DELT2:MAX:NEXT
Sets delta marker 2 to the next smaller maximum value.
Manual operation: See "Next Peak" on page 214
See "Next Mode" on page 215

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the delta marker to the current trace maximum. If necessary,
the corresponding delta marker is activated first.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:DELT3:MAX
Sets delta marker 3 to the maximum value of the associated
trace.
Manual operation: See "Peak" on page 214

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt
This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the
right of the current value (i.e. ascending X values). The corresponding delta marker is
activated first, if necessary.
If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:DELT:MAX:RIGH
Sets delta marker 1 to the next smaller maximum value to the
right of the current value.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 668

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Manual operation: See "Next Mode" on page 215

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT
This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum on the left
of the current value (i.e. descending X values). The corresponding delta marker is acti-
vated first, if necessary.
If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:DELT:MIN:LEFT
Sets delta marker 1 to the next higher minimum to the left of the
current value.
Manual operation: See "Next Mode" on page 215

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT
This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum. The corre-
sponding delta marker is activated first, if necessary.
If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:DELT2:MIN:NEXT
Sets delta marker 2 to the next higher minimum value.
Manual operation: See "Next Min" on page 215
See "Next Mode" on page 215

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the delta marker to the current trace minimum. The corre-
sponding delta marker is activated first, if necessary.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:DELT3:MIN
Sets delta marker 3 to the minimum value of the associated
trace.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 669

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Manual operation: See "Min" on page 215

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:RIGHt
This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum on the right
of the current value (i.e. ascending X values). The corresponding delta marker is acti-
vated first, if necessary.
If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:DELT:MIN:RIGH
Sets delta marker 1 to the next higher minimum value to the
right of the current value.
Manual operation: See "Next Mode" on page 215

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the delta marker mode.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<Mode> ABSolute
Delta marker position in absolute terms.
RELative
Delta marker position in relation to a reference marker.
*RST: REL
Example: CALC:DELT:MODE ABS
Absolute delta marker position.

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] <State>
This command turns delta markers on and off.
If the corresponding marker was a normal marker, it is turned into a delta marker.
No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 670

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:DELT1 ON
Switches marker 1 to delta marker mode.
Manual operation: See "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker
Norm/Delta" on page 210
See "Marker Wizard" on page 211

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:TRACe <TraceNumber>
This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on.
The corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than "Blank".
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<TraceNumber> 1 ... 6
Trace number the marker is positioned on.
Example: CALC:DELT3:TRAC 2
Assigns delta marker 3 to trace 2.
Manual operation: See "Marker to Trace" on page 211
See "Marker Wizard" on page 211
See "Marker Configuration" on page 312

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X <Position>
This command positions a delta marker on a particular coordinate on the x-axis.
The position is an absolute value.
You can enter a relative value, if you activate relative entry first with CALCulate<n>:
DELTamarker<m>:MODE.
If fixed reference is active, the position is relative to the fixed reference
(CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe] is ON). A query
always returns the absolute position.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<Position> 0 to maximum frequency or sweep time
Example: CALC:DELT:X?
Outputs the absolute frequency/time of delta marker 1.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 671

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Manual operation: See "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker

Norm/Delta" on page 210

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative?
This command queries the x-value of the selected delta marker relative to marker 1 or
to the reference position (for CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:STAT ON). The command acti-
vates the corresponding delta marker, if necessary.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:DELT3:X:REL?
Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or
relative to the reference position.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker
Norm/Delta" on page 210

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y
This command queries the measured value of a delta marker. The corresponding delta
marker is activated, if necessary. The output is always a relative value referred to
marker 1 or to the reference position (reference fixed active).
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
The unit of results depends on the result display and the unit you have selected.
Table 10-16: Base unit

Parameter, measuring function or result display Output unit

DBM | DBPW | DBUV | DBMV | DBUA dB (lin/log)

WATT | VOLT | AMPere dB (lin), % (log)

statistics function (APD or CCDF) on dimensionless output

Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 672

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Example: INIT:CONT OFF

Switches to single sweep mode.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for its end.
CALC:DELT2 ON
Switches on delta marker 2.
CALC:DELT2:Y?
Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2.
Manual operation: See "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker
Norm/Delta" on page 210

10.3.8 Limit Lines

● Using Display Lines...............................................................................................673

● Using Frequency Lines......................................................................................... 674
● Using Limit Lines...................................................................................................675

10.3.8.1 Using Display Lines

CALCulate<n>:DLINe<k>................................................................................................673
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<k>:STATe.....................................................................................673

CALCulate<n>:DLINe<k> <Position>
This command defines the (vertical) position of a display line.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<k> 1|2
Selects the display line.
Parameters:
<Position> The value range is variable.
The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer.
*RST: (state is OFF)
Example: CALC:DLIN -20dBm
Manual operation: See "Display Line 1 / Display Line 2" on page 222

CALCulate<n>:DLINe<k>:STATe <State>
This command turns a display line on and off.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<k> 1|2
Selects the display line.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 673

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:DLIN2:STAT OFF
Manual operation: See "Display Line 1 / Display Line 2" on page 222

10.3.8.2 Using Frequency Lines

CALCulate<n>:FLINe<k>................................................................................................674
CALCulate<n>:FLINe<k>:STATe.....................................................................................674
CALCulate:TFLine:STATe...............................................................................................674

CALCulate<n>:FLINe<k> <Frequency>
This command defines the position of a frequency line.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<k> 1|2
Selects the frequency line.
Parameters:
<Frequency> Range: 0 Hz to fmax
*RST: (STATe to OFF)
Example: CALC:FLIN2 120MHz
Manual operation: See "Frequency Line 1 / Frequency Line 2 " on page 222

CALCulate<n>:FLINe<k>:STATe <State>
This command turns a frequency line on and off.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<k> 1|2
Selects the frequency line.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:FLIN2:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Frequency Line 1 / Frequency Line 2 " on page 222

CALCulate:TFLine:STATe <State>
This command turns a frequency line coupled to the receiver frequency on and off.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 674

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
Example: CALC:TFL:STAT ON
Turns on the frequency line.
Manual operation: See "Tuned Frequency (On Off)" on page 223

10.3.8.3 Using Limit Lines

● Managing Limit Lines............................................................................................ 675

● Configuring Limit Lines..........................................................................................678
● Checking Limits.....................................................................................................687

Managing Limit Lines

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACTive?.................................................................................... 675
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:COMMent.................................................................................. 675
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:COPY........................................................................................676
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:DELete...................................................................................... 676
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:NAME....................................................................................... 676
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:TRACe...................................................................................... 677
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UNIT......................................................................................... 677

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACTive?
This command queries the names of all active limit lines.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> irrelevant
Return values:
<LimitLines> String containing the names of all active limit lines in alphabeti-
cal order.
Example: CALC:LIM:ACT?
Queries the names of all active limit lines.
Usage: Query only

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:COMMent <Comment>
This command defines a comment for the selected limit line in all windows.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<Comment> String containing the comment. The maximum number of char-
acters the string may contain is 40.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 675

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Example: CALC:LIM5:COMM 'Upper limit for spectrum'

Defines the comment for limit line 5.
Manual operation: See "Edit Comment" on page 220

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:COPY <Line>
This command copies a limit line.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<Line> 1 to 8
number of the new limit line
<name>
String containing the name of the limit line.
Example: CALC:LIM1:COPY 2
Copies limit line 1 to line 2.
CALC:LIM1:COPY 'FM2'
Copies limit line 1 to a new line named FM2.
Manual operation: See "Copy to" on page 221

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:DELete
This command deletes a limit line.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> Selects the limit line.
Example: CALC:LIM1:DEL
Deletes limit line 1.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Delete" on page 221

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:NAME <Name>
This command selects a limit line that already exists or defines a name for a new limit
line.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8 (NF: 1...6)
Selects the limit line.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 676

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Parameters:
<Name> String containing the limit line name.
*RST: REM1 to REM8 for lines 1 to 8
Example: CALC:LIM1:NAME 'FM1'
Assigns the name FM1 to limit line 1.

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:TRACe <TraceNumber>
This command links a limit line to one or more traces.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<TraceNumber> Range: 1 to 6
*RST: 1
Example: CALC:LIM2:TRAC 3
Assigns limit line 2 to trace 3.
Manual operation: See "Select Traces to check" on page 219

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 677

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Configuring Limit Lines

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol[:DATA].........................................................................678
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:DOMain....................................................................... 679
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:MODE......................................................................... 679
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:OFFSet........................................................................679
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:SHIFt...........................................................................680
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:SPACing...................................................................... 680
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer[:DATA]........................................................................... 680
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:MARGin......................................................................... 681
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:MODE............................................................................681
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:OFFSet.......................................................................... 682
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:SHIFt............................................................................. 682
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:SPACing........................................................................ 683
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:STATe............................................................................683
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:THReshold..................................................................... 683
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer[:DATA]............................................................................684
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:MARGin.......................................................................... 684
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:MODE.............................................................................685
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:OFFSet........................................................................... 685
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:SHIFt.............................................................................. 685
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:SPACing......................................................................... 686
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:STATe............................................................................ 686
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:THReshold...................................................................... 687

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol[:DATA] <LimitLinePoints>
This command defines the horizontal definition points of a lower limit line.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<k> 1...8
Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<LimitLinePoints> Variable number of x-axis values.
Note that the number of horizontal values has to be the same as
the number of vertical values set with CALCulate<n>:
LIMit<k>:LOWer[:DATA] or CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:
UPPer[:DATA]. If not, the R&S ESR either adds missing val-
ues or ignores surplus values.
The unit is Hz or s, depending on CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:
CONTrol:DOMain.
*RST: - (CALC:LIM is set to OFF)
Example: CALC:LIM2:CONT 1 MHz,30 MHz,100 MHz,300 MHz,1
GHz
Defines 5 reference values for the x-axis of limit line 2.
CALC:LIM2:CONT?
Outputs the reference values for the x-axis of limit line 2 separa-
ted by a comma.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 678

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Manual operation: See "Edit Value" on page 220

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:DOMain <SpanSetting>
This command selects the domain of the limit line.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<k> 1...8
Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<SpanSetting> FREQuency | TIME
*RST: FREQuency
Example: CALC:LIM2:CONT:DOM TIME
Defines zero span for the x-axis of limit line 2.

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the horizontal limit line scaling.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<k> 1...8
Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<Mode> ABSolute
Limit line is defined by absolute physical values (Hz or s).
RELative
Limit line is defined by relative values related to the center fre-
quency (frequency domain) or the left diagram border (time
domain).
*RST: ABSolute
Example: CALC:LIM2:CONT:MODE REL
Defines the x-axis of limit line 2 as relatively scaled.

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines an offset for a complete limit line.
Compared to shifting the limit line, an offset does not actually change the limit line defi-
nition points.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<k> 1...8
Selects the limit line.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 679

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Parameters:
<Offset> Numeric value that defines the offset.
The unit of the offset depends on the scale of the x-axis.
*RST: 0
Example: CALC:LIM2:CONT:OFFS 100us
Sets the X offset for limit line 2 (defined in zero span) to 100µs.
Manual operation: See "X Offset" on page 221

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:SHIFt <Distance>
This command moves a complete limit line horizontally.
Compared to defining an offset, this command actually changes the limit line definition
points by the value you define.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<k> Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<Distance> Numeric value that defines the distance of the shift.
The unit depends on the scale of the x-axis.
Example: CALC:LIM2:CONT:SHIF 50KHZ
Shifts all reference values of limit line 2 by 50 kHz.

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:SPACing <InterpolMode>
This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of limit lines
from frequency points.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<k> 1...8
Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<InterpolMode> LINear | LOGarithmic
*RST: LIN
Example: CALC:LIM:CONT:SPAC LIN

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer[:DATA] <LimitLinePoints>
This command defines the vertical definition points of a lower limit line.
If the measured values are smaller than the LOWer limit line, the limit check is violated.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 680

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

<k> 1...8
Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<LimitLinePoints> Variable number of x-axis values.
Note that the number of horizontal values has to be the same as
the number of vertical values set with CALCulate<n>:
LIMit<k>:CONTrol[:DATA]. If not, the R&S ESR either adds
missing values or ignores surplus values.
The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UNIT.
*RST: (LIMit:STATe is set to OFF)
Example: CALC:LIM2:LOW -30,-40,-10,-40,-30
Defines 5 lower limit values for limit line 2 in the preset unit.
CALC:LIM2:LOW?
Outputs the lower limit values of limit line 2 separated by a
comma.
Manual operation: See "Edit Value" on page 220

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:MARGin <Margin>
This command defines an area around a lower limit line where limit check violations
are still tolerated.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<Margin> Numeric value that defines the margin.
In spectrum mode, the unit is always dB.
*RST: 0
Example: CALC:LIM:LOW:MARG 10dB

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the vertical limit line scaling.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Selects the limit line.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 681

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Parameters:
<Mode> ABSolute
Limit line is defined by absolute physical values. The unit is vari-
able.
RELative
Limit line is defined by values relative to the reference level (dB).
*RST: ABSolute
Example: CALC:LIM:LOW:MODE REL
Defines the y-axis of limit line 2 as relative scaled.
Manual operation: See "Edit Name" on page 220

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines an offset for a complete lower limit line.
Compared to shifting the limit line, an offset does not actually change the limit line defi-
nition points.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<Offset> Numeric value that defines the offset.
*RST: 0
Example: CALC:LIM2:LOW:OFFS 3dB
Shifts limit line 2 by 3 dB upwards.
Manual operation: See "Y Offset" on page 221

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:SHIFt <Distance>
This command moves a complete lower limit line vertically.
Compared to defining an offset, this command actually changes the limit line definition
points by the value you define.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<Distance> Numeric value that defines the distance of the shift.
The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UNIT
on page 677.
Example: CALC:LIM3:LOW:SHIF 20DB
Shifts all Y values of limit line 3 by 20 dB.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 682

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:SPACing <InterpolType>
This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the lower limit line.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<InterpolType> LINear | LOGarithmic
*RST: LIN
Example: CALC:LIM:LOW:SPAC LIN

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:STATe <State>
This command turns a lower limit line on and off.
Before you can use this command, you have to select a limit line with
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:NAME.
The limit check is turned on separately. For more information see "Using Frequency
Lines" on page 830.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:LIM4:LOW:STAT ON
Switches on limit line 4 (lower limit).

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:THReshold <Threshold>
This command defines a threshold for relative limit lines.
The R&S ESR uses the threshold for the limit check, if the limit line violates the thresh-
old.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Selects the limit line.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 683

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Parameters:
<Threshold> Numeric value that defines the threshold.
The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UNIT.
*RST: -200 dBm
Example: CALC:LIM2:LOW:THR -35DBM
Defines an absolute threshold value for limit line 2.

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer[:DATA] <LimitLinePoints>
This command defines the vertical definition points of an upper limit line.
If the measured values exceed the UPPer limit line, the limit is violated.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<LimitLinePoints> Variable number of x-axis values.
Note that the number of horizontal values has to be the same as
the number of vertical values set with CALCulate<n>:
LIMit<k>:CONTrol[:DATA]. If not, the R&S ESR either adds
missing values or ignores surplus values.
The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UNIT.
*RST: (LIMit:STATe is set to OFF)
Example: CALC:LIM2:UPP -10,0,0,-10,-5
Defines 5 upper limit values for limit line 2 in the preset unit.
CALC:LIM2:UPP?
Outputs the upper limit values for limit line 2 separated by a
comma.
Manual operation: See "Edit Value" on page 220

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:MARGin <Margin>
This command defines an area around a upper limit line where limit check violations
are still tolerated.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<Margin> Numeric value that defines the margin.
In spectrum mode, the unit is always dB.
*RST: 0

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 684

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Example: CALC:LIM2:UPP:MARG 10dB

Defines the margin of limit line 2 to 10 dB below the limit value.

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the vertical limit line scaling.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<Mode> ABSolute
Limit line is defined by absolute physical values. The unit is vari-
able.
RELative
Limit line is defined by values relative to the reference level (dB).
*RST: ABSolute
Example: CALC:LIM2:UPP:MODE REL
Defines the y-axis of limit line 2 as relative scaled.

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines an offset for a complete upper limit line.
Compared to shifting the limit line, an offset does not actually change the limit line defi-
nition points.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<Offset> Numeric value that defines the offset.
*RST: 0
Example: CALC:LIM2:UPP:OFFS 3dB
Shifts limit line 2 by 3 dB upwards.
Manual operation: See "Y Offset" on page 221

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:SHIFt <Value>
This command moves a complete upper limit line vertically.
Compared to defining an offset, this command actually changes the limit line definition
points by the value you define.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 685

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<Distance> Numeric value that defines the distance of the shift.
The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UNIT
on page 677.
Example: CALC:LIM3:UPP:SHIF 20
Shifts all Y values of limit line 3 by 20 limit line units, e.g. dB.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:SPACing <InterpolType>
This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the upper limit line.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<InterpolType> LINear | LOGarithmic
*RST: LIN
Example: CALC:LIM:UPP:SPAC LIN

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:STATe <State>
This command turns a lower limit line on and off.
Before you can use this command, you have to select a limit line with
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:NAME.
The limit check is turned on separately. For more information see "Using Frequency
Lines" on page 830.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:LIM4:UPP:STAT ON
Switches on limit line 4 (upper limit).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 686

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Receiver Mode

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:THReshold <Threshold>
This command defines a threshold for relative limit lines.
The R&S ESR uses the threshold for the limit check, if the limit line violates the thresh-
old.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<Threshold> Numeric value that defines the threshold.
The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UNIT.
*RST: -200 dBm
Example: CALC:LIM2:UPP:THR -35DBM
Defines an absolute threshold value for limit line 2.

Checking Limits
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CLEar[:IMMediate]......................................................................687
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:FAIL?........................................................................................ 687
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:STATe.......................................................................................688

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CLEar[:IMMediate]
This command deletes the result of the current limit check for all limit lines in all win-
dows.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> irrelevant
Example: CALC:LIM:CLE
Deletes the result of the limit check.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:FAIL?
This command queries the result of a limit check.
Note that for SEM measurements, the limit line suffix <k> is irrelevant, as only one spe-
cific SEM limit line is checked for the currently relevant power class.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 687

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

<k> limit line

Return values:
<Result> 0
PASS
1
FAIL
Example: INIT;*WAI
Starts a new sweep and waits for its end.
CALC:LIM3:FAIL?
Queries the result of the check for limit line 3.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Limit Check 1-4" on page 270
See "Limit Check 1-4" on page 300

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:STATe <State>
This command turns the limit check on and off.
To query the limit check result, use CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:FAIL?.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:LIM:STAT ON
Switches on the limit check for limit line 1.
Manual operation: See "Select Traces to check" on page 219
See "Deselect All" on page 220

10.4 Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

The following remote commands configure and perform spectrum measurements.
They are available in spectrum analyzer mode only.
● Measurements and Result Displays......................................................................689
● Configuring Spectrum Measurements...................................................................792
● Analyzing Spectrum Measurements..................................................................... 817

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 688

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

10.4.1 Measurements and Result Displays

● Controlling Power Measurements......................................................................... 689

● Measuring Channel Power....................................................................................697
● Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth..................................................................... 718
● Measuring Spurious Emissions.............................................................................719
● Testing Against a Spectrum Emission Mask.........................................................729
● Performing EMI Measurements............................................................................ 748
● Measuring the Modulation Depth.......................................................................... 754
● Measuring the Harmonic Distortion.......................................................................756
● Measuring the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio................................................................... 760
● Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point............................................................760
● Measuring Statistics.............................................................................................. 762
● Measuring in the Time Domain............................................................................. 769
● Measuring the Pulse Power.................................................................................. 781
● Performing List Evaluations.................................................................................. 785
● Probe Configuration.............................................................................................. 790

10.4.1.1 Controlling Power Measurements

The following commands control power measurements (channel power, occupied

bandwidth etc.) in general.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect..................................................... 689
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult?.................................................... 690
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe].................................................... 694
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:MODE...................................................... 694
[SENSe:]POWer:TRACe.................................................................................................695
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet................................................................................ 695
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel.................................................................... 696
TRACe<n>:DATA...........................................................................................................696

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect <MeasType>
This command selects – and switches on – the specified power measurement type in
the window specified by the suffix <n>.
The channel spacings and channel bandwidths are configured in the SENSe:POWer
subsystem.
Note: If CPOWer is selected, the number of adjacent channels ( [SENSe:]POWer:
ACHannel:ACPairs) is set to 0. If ACPower is selected, the number of adjacent
channels is set to 1, unless adjacent-channel power measurement is switched on
already.
The channel/adjacent-channel power measurement is performed for the trace selected
with [SENSe:]POWer:TRACe.
The occupied bandwidth measurement is performed for the trace on which marker 1 is
positioned. To select another trace for the measurement, marker 1 is to be positioned
on the desired trace by means of CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 689

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<MeasType> ACPower | CPOWer | MCACpower | OBANdwidth | OBWidth |
CN | CNO
ACPower
Adjacent-channel power measurement with a single carrier sig-
nal
CPOWer
Channel power measurement with a single carrier signal (equiv-
alent to adjacent-channel power measurement with "NO. OF
ADJ CHAN" = 0)
MCACpower
Channel/adjacent-channel power measurement with several car-
rier signals
OBANdwidth | OBWidth
Measurement of occupied bandwidth
CN
Measurement of carrier-to-noise ratio
CN0
Measurement of carrier-to-noise ratio referenced to 1 Hz band-
width
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL ACP
Switches on adjacent-channel power measurement.
Manual operation: See "Ch Power ACLR" on page 232
See "OBW (span > 0)" on page 232
See "Ch Power ACLR" on page 245
See "C/N" on page 260
See "C/No" on page 260
See "OBW" on page 263

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? <ResultType>
This command queries the result of the performed power measurement in the window
specified by the suffix <n>. If necessary, the measurement is switched on prior to the
query.
The channel spacings and channel bandwidths are configured in the SENSe:POWer
subsystem.
To obtain a correct result, a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the
sweep must be performed before a query is output. Synchronization is possible only in
the single sweep mode.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 690

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

<m> Selects the marker.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 691

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Parameters:
<ResultType> ACPower | AOBW | CN | CN0 | CPOWer | PPOWer |
MCACpower | OBANdwidth | OBWidth | BANDwidth
ACPower
Adjacent-channel power measurement
Results are output in the following sequence, separated by com-
mas:
Power of transmission channel
Power of lower adjacent channel
Power of upper adjacent channel
Power of lower alternate channel 1
Power of upper alternate channel 1
Power of lower alternate channel 2
Power of upper alternate channel 2
The number of measured values returned depends on the num-
ber of adjacent/alternate channels selected with [SENSe:
]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs.
With logarithmic scaling (RANGE "LOG"), the power is output in
the currently selected level unit; with linear scaling (RANGE "LIN
dB" or "LIN %"), the power is output in W. If [SENSe:]POWer:
ACHannel:MODE is set to "REL", the adjacent/alternate-channel
power is output in dB.
AOBW (AllOccupiedBandWidth)
Returns the occupied bandwidth, as well as the position and
level of the temporary markers T1 and T2 used to calculate the
occupied bandwidth.
The syntax of the result is:
<Occupied bandwidth>,<T1 x-value>,<T1 y-value>,<T2 x-
value>,<T2 y-value>
CN
Measurement of carrier-to-noise ratio
The carrier-to-noise ratio in dB is returned.
CN0
Measurement of carrier-to-noise ratio referenced to 1 Hz band-
width.
The carrier-to-noise ratio in dB/Hz is returned.
CPOWer
Channel power measurement
In a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement, the query returns
the power result for the reference range, if this power reference
type is selected.
With logarithmic scaling (RANGE LOG), the channel power is
output in the currently selected level unit; with linear scaling
(RANGE LIN dB or LIN %), the channel power is output in W.
PPOWer
Power of the highest peak

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 692

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

In a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement, the query returns

the power result for the reference range, if this power reference
type is selected.
MCACpower
Channel/adjacent-channel power measurement with several car-
rier signals
Results are output in the following sequence, separated by com-
mas:
Power of carrier signal 1 to 18s in ascending order
Total power of all carrier signals
Power of lower adjacent channel
Power of upper adjacent channel
Power of lower alternate channel 1
Power of upper alternate channel 1
Power of lower alternate channel 2
Power of upper alternate channel 2
The number of measured values returned depends on the num-
ber of carrier signals and adjacent/alternate channels selected
with [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt and
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs.
If only one carrier signal is measured, the total value of all carrier
signals is not output.
With logarithmic scaling (RANGE LOG), the power is output in
dBm; with linear scaling (RANGE LIN dB or LIN %), the power is
output in W. If [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE is set to
"REL", the adjacent/alternate-channel power is output in dB.
OBANdwidth | OBWidth
Measurement of occupied bandwidth
The occupied bandwidth in Hz is returned.
Example: For an example of channel/adjacent-channel power mea-
surement see chapter 10.16.4, "Measuring the Channel and
Adjacent Channel Power", on page 980.
Example of occupied bandwidth measurement
POW:BAND 90PCT
Defines 90 % as the percentage of the power to be contained in
the bandwidth range to be measured.
INIT:CONT OFF
Switches over to single sweep mode.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end of the sweep.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? OBW
Queries the occupied bandwidth measured.
Manual operation: See "Ch Power ACLR" on page 232
See "OBW (span > 0)" on page 232
See "Ch Power ACLR" on page 245
See "C/N" on page 260
See "C/No" on page 260
See "OBW" on page 263

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 693

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] <State>
This command switches off the power measurement in the window specified by the
suffix <n>.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<State> OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW OFF
Switches off the power measurement.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Ch Power ACLR" on page 232
See "OBW (span > 0)" on page 232
See "Ch Power ACLR" on page 245
See "C/N" on page 260
See "C/No" on page 260
See "OBW" on page 263

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:MODE <Mode>
This commands defines the method by which the channel power values are calculated
from the current trace in the window specified by the suffix <n>.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<Mode> WRITe | MAXHold
WRITe
The channel power and the adjacent channel powers are calcu-
lated directly from the current trace
MAXHold
The power values are calculated from the current trace and
compared with the previous power value using a maximum algo-
rithm.
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:MODE MAXH
Sets the Maxhold channel power mode.
Manual operation: See "Clear/Write" on page 252
See "Max Hold" on page 252

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 694

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

[SENSe:]POWer:TRACe <TraceNumber>
This command assigns the channel/adjacent channel power measurement to the indi-
cated trace. The corresponding trace must be active, i.e. its state must be different
from blank.
Note:The measurement of the occupied bandwidth (OBW) is performed on the trace
on which marker 1 is positioned. To evaluate another trace, marker 1 must be posi-
tioned to another trace with CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe.
Parameters:
<TraceNumber> 1 to 6
Example: POW:TRAC 2
Assigns the measurement to trace 2.
Manual operation: See "Select Trace" on page 252

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet <Setting>
This command adjusts the frequency span, the measurement bandwidths and the
detector as required for the number of channels, the channel bandwidths and the chan-
nel spacings selected in the active power measurement. If necessary, adjacent-chan-
nel power measurement is switched on prior to the adjustment.
To obtain correct results, a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the
sweep must be performed after the adjustment. Synchronization is possible only in the
single sweep mode.
The result is queried with the CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:
RESult? command.
Parameters:
<Setting> ACPower | CPOWer | MCACpower | OBANdwidth | OBWidth |
CN | CN0
Example: POW:ACH:PRES ACP
Sets the frequency span, the measurement bandwidths and the
detector as required for the ACLR measurement.
INIT:CONT OFF
Switches over to single sweep mode.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end of the sweep.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? ACP
Queries the result of the adjacent-channel power measurement.
Manual operation: See "Adjust Settings" on page 252
See "Adjust Settings " on page 261

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 695

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel
This command adapts the reference level to the measured channel power and – if
required – switches on previously the adjacent channel power measurement. This
ensures that the signal path of the instrument is not overloaded. Since the measure-
ment bandwidth is significantly smaller than the signal bandwidth in channel power
measurements, the signal path can be overloaded although the trace is still signifi-
cantly below the reference level. If the measured channel power equals the reference
level, the signal path is not overloaded.
Subsequent commands have to be synchronized with *WAI, *OPC or *OPC? to the
end of the auto range process which would otherwise be aborted.
Example: POW:ACH:PRES:RLEV;*WAI
Adapts the reference level to the measured channel power.
Manual operation: See "Adjust Ref Lvl" on page 255
See "Adjust Ref Lvl (span > 0)" on page 264
See "Adjust Ref Lvl (span > 0)" on page 301
See "Adjust Ref Lvl (span > 0)" on page 303

TRACe<n>:DATA <Trace>, <Data> | <ResultType>

This command queries current trace data and measurement results.
If you use it as a setting command, it transfers trace data from an external source to
the R&S ESR.
The data format depends on FORMat[:DATA].
Parameters:
<Trace> Selects the trace to write data to.
TRACE1 | ... | TRACE6
<Data> Contains the data to transfer.
Query parameters:
<ResultType> Selects the type of result to be returned.
TRACE1 | ... | TRACE6
Returns the trace data for the corresponding trace.
LIST
Returns the results of the peak list evaluation for Spurious Emis-
sion and Spectrum Emission Mask measurements.
SPURious
Returns the peak list of Spurious Emission measurements.
Return values:
<TraceData> For more information see tables below.
Example: TRAC TRACE1,+A$
Transfers trace data ('+A$') to trace 1.
Example: TRAC? TRACE3
Queries the data of trace 3.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 696

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Manual operation: See "List Evaluation (On/Off)" on page 273

See "List Evaluation (On/Off)" on page 302
Table 10-17: Return values for TRACE1 to TRACE6 parameter

The trace data consists of a list of power levels that have been measured. The number of power levels in
the list depends on the currently selected number of sweep points. The unit depends on the measurement
and on the unit you have currently set.
If you are measuring with the auto peak detector, the command returns positive peak values only.
If you are working with the "Real/Imag (I/Q)" result display in I/Q Analyzer mode, the command returns two
values for each trace point, first the real parts of the signal, then the imaginary parts (I1,...,In, Q1,...,Qn).
For SEM or Spurious Emission measurement results, the x-values should be queried as well, as they are
not equi-distant (see TRACe<n>[:DATA]:X? on page 826).

Table 10-18: Return values for LIST parameter

For every measurement range you have defined (range 1...n), the command returns eight values in the fol-
lowing order.
<No>,<StartFreq>,<StopFreq>,<RBW>,<PeakFreq>,<PowerAbs>,<PowerRel>,<PowerDelta>,<Limit-
Check>,<Unused1>,<Unused2>
● <No>: range number
● <StartFreq>,<StopFreq>: start and stop frequency of the range
● <RBW>: resolution bandwidth
● <PeakFreq>: frequency of the peak in a range
● <PowerAbs>: absolute power of the peak in dBm
● <PowerRel>: power of the peak in relation to the channel power in dBc
● <PowerDelta>: distance from the peak to the limit line in dB, positive values indicate a failed limit
check
● <LimitCheck>: state of the limit check (0 = PASS, 1 = FAIL)
● <Unused1>,<Unused2>: reserved (0.0)

10.4.1.2 Measuring Channel Power

The following commands configure and perform channel power or ACLR measure-
ments.
● Managing Measurement Configurations............................................................... 697
● Configuring ACLR Channels................................................................................. 699
● Defining Weighting Filters..................................................................................... 704
● Selecting the Reference Channel......................................................................... 706
● Checking Limits.....................................................................................................707
● Analyzing Results..................................................................................................715
● Predefined CP/ACLR Standards...........................................................................718

Managing Measurement Configurations

The following commands control measurement configurations for ACLR measure-
ments.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet.................................................... 698
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:CATalog?................................. 699
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:DELete..................................... 699
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:SAVE....................................... 699

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 697

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet <Standard> |
<UserStandard>
This command selects the power measurement setting for a standard and switches on
the corresponding measurement, if required.
The configuration for a standard comprises of the parameters weighting filter, channel
bandwidth and spacing, resolution and video bandwidth, as well as detector and sweep
time.
The settings for standards IS95A and C differ as far as the calculation method of chan-
nel spacings is concerned. For IS95A and J-STD008 the spacing is calculated from the
center of the main channel to the center of the corresponding adjacent channel, for
IS95C from the center of the main channel to the nearest border of the adjacent chan-
nel.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Setting parameters:
<Standard> Note that predefined standards go without quotes, while user
standards have to be in quotes ('user standard').
<Predefined standard>
Predefind standard according to table in "Predefined CP/ACLR
Standards" on page 718.
'<string>'
User-defined standard with <string> being the name of the user
standard.
Return values:
<Standard> <Predefined standard> | USER | NONE
<Predefined standard>
Predefind standard according to table in "Predefined CP/ACLR
Standards" on page 718.
USER
User-defined standard is set
NONE
not yet defined
with <string> being the name of a user standard. Note that pre-
defined standards go without quotes, while user standards have
to be in quotes ('user standard').
For further details refer to "Predefined CP/ACLR Standards"
on page 718.
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES TETRA
Selects the standard setting for TETRA
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES 'my_aclr_standard'
Selects the user standard my_aclr_standard

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 698

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Manual operation: See "CP/ACLR Standard" on page 245

See "Load" on page 254

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:CATalog?
This command queries all available standards, including user standards.
The numeric suffix at MARKer is irrelevant.
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:STAN:CAT?
Queries the available standards.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Load" on page 254

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:DELete <Standard>
This command deletes an ACLR standard.
The numeric suffix at MARKer is irrelevant.
Parameters:
<Standard> Name of the standard you want to delete.
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:STAN:DEL 'CDMA2000'
Deletes the CDMA2000 standard.
Manual operation: See "Delete" on page 254

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:SAVE <Standard>
This command saves a cutomized ACLR standard.
The numeric suffix at MARKer is irrelevant.
Parameters:
<Standard> Specifies the name of the user standard.
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:STAN:SAVE 'CDMA2000'
Saves the user standard with the name CDMA2000.
Manual operation: See "Save" on page 254

Configuring ACLR Channels

The following commands configure channels for channel power and ACLR measure-
ments.
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs................................................................................700
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ACHannel................................................700
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ALTernate<channel>................................ 700
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel<channel>]................................701
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ACHannel...................................................................701
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ALTernate<channel>................................................... 702

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 699

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:CHANnel<channel>.....................................................702
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel]............................................................. 702
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<channel>............................................... 703
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<channel>................................................. 703
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt................................................................703

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs <ChannelPairs>
This command sets the number of adjacent channels (upper and lower channel in
pairs).The figure 0 stands for pure channel power measurement.
Parameters:
<ChannelPairs> 0 to 12
*RST: 1
Example: POW:ACH:ACP 3
Sets the number of adjacent channels to 3, i.e. the adjacent
channel and alternate adjacent channels 1 and 2 are switched
on.
Manual operation: See "# of Adj Chan" on page 246
See "Channel Bandwidth " on page 260

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ACHannel <Bandwidth>
This command defines the channel bandwidth of the adjacent channel of the radio
transmission system. If the bandwidth of the adjacent channel is changed, the band-
widths of all alternate adjacent channels are automatically set to the same value.
With [SENSe<source>:]POWer:HSPeed set to ON, steep-edged channel filters are
available. For further information on filters refer to chapter 5.2.6.4, "List of Available
RRC and Channel Filters", on page 376 .
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> 100 Hz to 40 GHz
*RST: 14 kHz
Example: POW:ACH:BWID:ACH 30 kHz
Sets the bandwidth of all adjacent channels to 30 kHz.
Manual operation: See "Bandwidth" on page 247

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ALTernate<channel>
<Bandwidth>
This command defines the channel bandwidth of the specified alternate adjacent chan-
nels of the radio transmission system. If the channel bandwidth of one alternate adja-
cent channel is changed (e.g. channel 3), the bandwidth of all subsequent alternate
adjacent channels (e.g. 4–11) is automatically set to the same value.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 700

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

With [SENSe<source>:]POWer:HSPeed set to ON, steep-edged channel filters are

available. For further information on filters refer to chapter 5.2.6.4, "List of Available
RRC and Channel Filters", on page 376 .
Suffix: .
<channel> 1...11
the alternate adjacent channel
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> 100 Hz to 40 GHz
*RST: 14 kHz
Example: POW:ACH:BWID:ALT2 30 kHz
Manual operation: See "Bandwidth" on page 247

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel<channel>]
<Bandwidth>
This command sets the channel bandwidth of the specified TX channel in the radio
communication system. The bandwidths of adjacent channels are not influenced by
this modification.
With [SENSe<source>:]POWer:HSPeed set to ON, steep-edged channel filters are
available. For further information on filters refer to chapter 5.2.6.4, "List of Available
RRC and Channel Filters", on page 376.
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> 100 Hz to 40 GHz
*RST: 14 kHz
Example: POW:ACH:BWID:CHAN2 30 kHz
Sets the bandwidth of the TX channel 2 to 30 kHz.
Manual operation: See "Bandwidth" on page 247
See "Channel Bandwidth (span > 0)" on page 264

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ACHannel <Name>
This command defines a name for the adjacent channel. The name is displayed in the
result diagram and the result table.
Parameters:
<Name> *RST: Adj
Example: POW:ACH:NAME:ACH 'XYZ'
Defines the name of the adjacent channel as 'XYZ'.
Manual operation: See "Names" on page 249

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 701

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ALTernate<channel> <Name>
This command defines a name for the specified alternate channel. The name is dis-
played in the result diagram and the result table.
Suffix: .
<channel> 1...11
the alternate channel
Parameters:
<Name> *RST: ALT<1...11>
Example: POW:ACH:NAME:ALT3 'XYZ'
Defines the name of the third alternate channel as 'XYZ'.
Manual operation: See "Names" on page 249

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:CHANnel<channel> <Name>
This command defines a name for the specified TX channel. The name is displayed in
the result diagram and the result table.
Suffix: .
<channel> 1...12
the TX channel
Parameters:
<Name> *RST: TX<1...12>
Example: POW:ACH:NAME:CHAN3 'XYZ'
Defines the name of the third transmission channel as 'XYZ'.
Manual operation: See "Names" on page 249

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel] <Spacing>
This command defines the spacing between the carrier signal and the adjacent chan-
nel (ADJ). The modification of the adjacent-channel spacing (ADJ) causes a change in
all higher adjacent-channel spacings (ALT1, ALT2, ...): they are all multiplied by the
same factor (new spacing value/old spacing value).
Parameters:
<Spacing> 100 Hz to 20 GHz
*RST: 14 kHz
Example: POW:ACH:SPAC 33kHz
Sets the spacing between the carrier signal and the adjacent
channel to 33 kHz, the alternate adjacent channel 1 to 66 kHz,
the alternate adjacent channel 2 to 99 kHz, and so on.
Manual operation: See "Spacing" on page 248

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 702

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<channel> <Spacing>
This command defines the spacing between the alternate adjacent channels and the
TX channel (ALT1, ALT2, ...). A modification of a higher adjacent-channel spacing cau-
ses a change by the same factor (new spacing value/old spacing value) in all higher
adjacent-channel spacings, while the lower adjacent-channel spacings remain
unchanged.
Suffix: .
<channel> 1...11
the alternate adjacent channel
Parameters:
<Spacing> 100 Hz to 20 GHz
*RST: 40 kHz (ALT1), 60 kHz (ALT2), 80 kHz (ALT3), ...
Example: POW:ACH:SPAC:ALT1 100 kHz
Sets the spacing between TX channel and alternate adjacent
channel 1 (ALT1) from 40 kHz to 100 kHz. In consequence, the
spacing between the TX channel and all higher alternate adja-
cent channels is increased by the factor 100/40 = 2.5: ALT2 =
150 kHz, ALT3 = 200 kHz, ALT4 = 250 kHz.
Manual operation: See "Spacing" on page 248

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<channel> <Spacing>
This command defines the channel spacing for the carrier signals.
Suffix: .
<channel> 1...11
the TX channel
Parameters:
<Spacing> 14 kHz to 20 GHz
*RST: 20 kHz
Example: POW:ACH:SPAC:CHAN 25kHz
Manual operation: See "Spacing" on page 248

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt <Number>
This command selects the number of carrier signals.
The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent-channel power
measurements with span > 0 (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:
SELect on page 689).
Parameters:
<Number> 1 to 18
*RST: 1
Example: POW:ACH:TXCH:COUN 3

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 703

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Manual operation: See "# of TX Chan" on page 246

Defining Weighting Filters

The following commands define weighting filters for ACLR measurements.
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ACHannel....................................................... 704
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa[:ALL]...............................................................704
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ALTernate<channel>........................................ 704
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:CHANnel<channel>..........................................705
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ACHannel......................................................705
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALTernate<channel>...................................... 705
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:CHANnel<channel>........................................ 705
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALL...............................................................706

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ACHannel <Alpha>
This command defines the roll-off factor for the weighting filter of the adjacent channel.
Parameters:
<Alpha> <numeric value>
*RST: 0,22
Example: POW:ACH:FILT:ALPH:ACH 0,35
Manual operation: See "Weighting Filter" on page 249

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa[:ALL] <Alpha>
This command defines the roll-off factor for the weighting filter of all channels.
Parameters:
<Alpha> <numeric value>
*RST: 0,22
Example: POW:ACH:FILT:ALPH:ALL 0,35

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ALTernate<channel> <Alpha>
This command defines the roll-off factor for the weighting filter of the specified alternate
channel.
Suffix: .
<channel> 1...11
the alternate channel
Parameters:
<Alpha> <numeric value>
*RST: 0,22
Example: POW:ACH:FILT:ALPH:ALT3 0,35
Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the alternate
channel 3 to 0,35.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 704

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Manual operation: See "Weighting Filter" on page 249

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:CHANnel<channel> <Alpha>
This command defines the roll-off factor for the weighting filter of the specified TX
channel.
Suffix: .
<channel> 1...11
the TX channel
Parameters:
<Alpha> <numeric value>
*RST: 0,22
Example: POW:ACH:FILT:ALPH:CHAN3 0,35
Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the TX channel 3
to 0,35.
Manual operation: See "Weighting Filter" on page 249

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ACHannel <State>
This command activates the weighting filter for the adjacent channel.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: POW:ACH:FILT:ACH ON
Manual operation: See "Weighting Filter" on page 249

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALTernate<channel> <State>
This command activates the weighting filter for the specified alternate channel.
Suffix: .
<channel> 1...11
the alternate adjacent channel
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: POW:ACH:FILT:ALT3 ON
Activates the weighting filter for alternate channel 3.
Manual operation: See "Weighting Filter" on page 249

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:CHANnel<channel> <State>
This command activates the weighting filter for the specified TX channel.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 705

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Suffix: .
<channel> 1...18
the TX channel
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: POW:ACH:FILT:CHA3 ON
Activates the weighting filter for TX channel 3.
Manual operation: See "Weighting Filter" on page 249

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALL <State>
This command activates the weighting filter for all channels.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: POW:ACH:FILT ON

Selecting the Reference Channel

The following commands define the reference channel for relative ACLR measure-
ments.
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE....................................................... 706
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO................................................706
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MANual............................................. 707

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE
This command sets the reference value to the currently measured channel power for
the relative measurement.
Example: POW:ACH:REF:AUTO ONCE
Manual operation: See "Set CP Reference" on page 253

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO <Channel>
This command activates the automatic selection of a transmission channel to be used
as a reference channel in relative adjacent-channel power measurements.
The transmission channel with the highest power, the transmission channel with the
lowest power, or the transmission channel nearest to the adjacent channels can be
defined as a reference channel.
The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent-channel power
measurements with span > 0 ( CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:
SELect on page 689).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 706

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Parameters:
<Channel> MINimum | MAXimum | LHIGhest
MINimum
Transmission channel with the lowest power
MAXimum
Transmission channel with the highest power
LHIGhest
Lowermost transmission channel for the lower adjacent chan-
nels, uppermost transmission channel for the upper adjacent
channels
Example: POW:ACH:REF:TXCH:AUTO MAX
The transmission channel with the highest power is used as a
reference channel.
Manual operation: See "ACLR Reference" on page 248

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MANual <ChannelNumber>
This command selects a transmission channel to be used as a reference channel in
relative adjacent-channel power measurements.
The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent-channel power
measurements with span > 0 ( CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:
SELect on page 689).
Parameters:
<ChannelNumber> 1 to 18
*RST: 1
Example: POW:ACH:REF:TXCH:MAN 3
Transmission channel 3 is used as a reference channel.
Manual operation: See "ACLR Reference" on page 248

Checking Limits
The following commands configure limit checks for channel power and ACLR measure-
ments.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute..................................................... 708
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe.......................................... 708
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]....................................................709
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe.........................................710
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult........................................................ 710
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<Channel>:ABSolute.....................................711
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<Channel>:ABSolute:STATe..........................712
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<channel>[:RELative].................................... 713
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<Channel>[:RELative]:STATe........................ 713
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<Channel>:RESult?...................................... 714
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe]...................................................................... 715

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 707

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute <LowerLimit>,
<UpperLimit>
This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower/upper adjacent channel
during adjacent-channel power measurement (Adjacent Channel Power).
Note that the absolute limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below
the relative limit value defined with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:
ACHannel[:RELative]. This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute
basic values of adjacent-channel power as defined in mobile radio standards.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<k> irrelevant
Parameters:
<LowerLimit>, first value: -200DBM to 200DBM; limit for the lower and the
<UpperLimit> upper adjacent channel
*RST: -200DBM
Example: CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS -35DBM, -35DBM
Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and
upper adjacent channel to -35 dBm.

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe <State>
This command activates the limit check for the adjacent channel when adjacent-chan-
nel power measurement (Adjacent Channel Power) is performed. Before the com-
mand, the limit check for the channel/adjacent-channel measurement must be globally
switched on using CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe].
The result can be queried with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:
RESult. It should be noted that a complete measurement must be performed between
switching on the limit check and the result query, since otherwise no correct results are
available.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<k> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 708

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH 30DB, 30DB

Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper
adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS -35DBM, -35DBM
Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and
upper adjacent channel to -35 dBm.
CALC:LIM:ACP ON
Switches on globally the limit check for the channel/adjacent-
channel measurement.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:REL:STAT ON
Switches on the check of the relative limit values for adjacent
channels.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS:STAT ON
Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the adjacent
channels.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES?
Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels.
Manual operation: See "Absolute Limit" on page 251

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative] <LowerLimit>,
<UpperLimit>
This command defines the relative limit of the upper/lower adjacent channel for adja-
cent-channel power measurements. The reference value for the relative limit value is
the measured channel power.
It should be noted that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon
as it is below the absolute limit value defined with the CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:
ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute command. This mechanism allows automatic check-
ing of the absolute basic values of adjacent-channel power as defined in mobile radio
standards.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<k> irrelevant
Parameters:
<LowerLimit>, 0 to 100dB; the value for the lower limit must be lower than the
<UpperLimit> value for the upper limit
*RST: 0 dB
Example: CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH 30DB, 30DB
Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper
adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 709

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe <State>
This command activates the limit check for the relative limit value of the adjacent chan-
nel when adjacent-channel power measurement is performed. Before this command,
the limit check must be activated using CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:
STATe].
The result can be queried with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:
RESult. Note that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on
the limit check and the result query, since otherwise no correct results are available.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<k> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH 30DB, 30DB
Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper
adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS -35DBM, -35DBM
Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and
upper adjacent channel to -35 dBm.
CALC:LIM:ACP ON
Switches on globally the limit check for the channel/adjacent
channel measurement.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:STAT ON
Switches on the check of the relative limit values for adjacent
channels.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS:STAT ON
Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the adjacent
channels.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES?
Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels.

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult
This command queries the result of the limit check for the upper/lower adjacent chan-
nel when adjacent channel power measurement is performed.
If the power measurement of the adjacent channel is switched off, the command pro-
duces a query error.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<k> irrelevant

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 710

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Return values:
Result The result is returned in the form <result>, <result> where
<result> = PASSED | FAILED, and where the first returned value
denotes the lower, the second denotes the upper adjacent chan-
nel.
Example: CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH 30DB, 30DB
Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper
adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS -35DBM, -35DBM
Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and
upper adjacent channel to -35 dB.
CALC:LIM:ACP ON
Switches on globally the limit check for the channel/adjacent
channel measurement.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:STAT ON
Switches on the limit check for the adjacent channels.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES?
Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels.
Manual operation: See "Limit Checking" on page 250

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<Channel>:ABSolute <LowerLimit>,
<UpperLimit>
This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower/upper alternate adjacent-
channel power measurement (Adjacent Channel Power).
Note that the absolute limit value for the limit check has no effect as soon as it is below
the relative limit value defined with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:
ACHannel[:RELative]. This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute
basic values defined in mobile radio standards for the power in adjacent channels.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<k> irrelevant
<Channel> 1...11
the alternate channel
Parameters:
<LowerLimit>, first value: -200DBM to 200DBM; limit for the lower and the
<UpperLimit> upper alternate adjacent channel
*RST: -200DBM
Example: CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:ABS -35DBM, -35DBM
Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and
upper second alternate adjacent channel to -35 dBm.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 711

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<Channel>:ABSolute:STATe
<State>
This command activates the limit check for the alternate adjacent channels for adja-
cent-channel power measurement (Adjacent Channel Power).
Before the command, the limit check must be globally switched on for the channel/
adjacent-channel power with the CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe]
command.
The result can be queried with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:
ALTernate<channel>[:RELative]. Note that a complete measurement must be
performed between switching on the limit check and the result query, since otherwise
no correct results are available.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<k> irrelevant
<Channel> 1...11
the alternate channel
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2 30DB, 30DB
Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper
second alternate adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel
power.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:ABS -35DBM, -35DBM
Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and
upper second alternate adjacent channel to -35 dBm.
CALC:LIM:ACP ON
Switches on globally the limit check for the channel/adjacent
channel measurement.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:STAT ON
Switches on the check of the relative limit values for the lower
and upper second alternative adjacent channels.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:ABS:STAT ON
Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the lower and
upper second alternative adjacent channels.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:RES?
Queries the limit check result in the second alternate adjacent
channels.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 712

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<channel>[:RELative] <LowerLimit>,
<UpperLimit>
This command defines the limit for the alternate adjacent channels for adjacent chan-
nel power measurements. The reference value for the relative limit value is the mea-
sured channel power.
Note that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below
the absolute limit defined with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:
ALTernate<Channel>:ABSolute. This mechanism allows automatic checking of
the absolute basic values of adjacent-channel power as defined in mobile radio stand-
ards.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<k> irrelevant
<Channel> 1...11
the alternate channel
Parameters:
<LowerLimit>, first value: 0 to 100dB; limit for the lower and the upper alternate
<UpperLimit> adjacent channel
*RST: 0 DB
Example: CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2 30DB, 30DB
Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper
second alternate adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel
power.
Manual operation: See "Limit Checking" on page 250

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<Channel>[:RELative]:STATe
<State>
This command activates the limit check for the alternate adjacent channels for adjacent
channel power measurements. Before the command, the limit check must be activated
using CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe].
The result can be queried with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:
ALTernate<channel>[:RELative]. Note that a complete measurement must be
performed between switching on the limit check and the result query, since otherwise
no correct results are obtained.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<k> irrelevant
<Channel> 1...11
the alternate channel

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 713

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2 30DB, 30DB
Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper
second alternate adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel
power.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:ABS -35DBM, -35DBM
Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and
upper second alternate adjacent channel to -35 dBm.
CALC:LIM:ACP ON
Switches on globally the limit check for the channel/adjacent
channel measurement.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:STAT ON
Switches on the check of the relative limit values for the lower
and upper second alternate adjacent channel.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:ABS:STAT ON
Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the lower and
upper second alternate adjacent channel.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:RES?
Queries the limit check result in the second alternate adjacent
channels.

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<Channel>:RESult?
This command queries the result of the limit check for the alternate adjacent channels
for adjacent channel power measurements.
If the power measurement of the adjacent channel is switched off, the command pro-
duces a query error.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<k> irrelevant
<Channel> 1...11
the alternate channel
Parameters:
The result is returned in the form <result>, <result> where
<result> = PASSED | FAILED and where the first (second)
returned value denotes the lower (upper) alternate adjacent
channel.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 714

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2 30DB, 30DB

Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper
second alternate adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel
power.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:ABS -35DBM, -35DBM
Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and
upper second alternate adjacent channel to -35 dBm.
CALC:LIM:ACP ON
Switches on globally the limit check for the channel/adjacent
channel measurement.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:STAT ON
Switches on the limit check for the lower and upper second adja-
cent channel.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:RES?
Queries the limit check result in the second alternate adjacent
channels.
Usage: Query only

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe] <State>
This command switches on and off the limit check for adjacent-channel power mea-
surements. The commands CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel[:
RELative]:STATe or CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:
ALTernate<Channel>[:RELative]:STATe must be used in addition to specify
whether the limit check is to be performed for the upper/lower adjacent channel or for
the alternate adjacent channels.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<k> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:LIM:ACP ON
Switches on the ACLR limit check.
Manual operation: See "Limit Checking" on page 250
See "Relative Limit" on page 251
See "Absolute Limit" on page 251

Analyzing Results
The following commands analyze and retrieve measurement results for ACLR mea-
surements.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 715

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult:PHZ.............................................. 716
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE.................................................................................. 716
[SENSe:]POWer:HSPeed............................................................................................... 717
[SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection........................................................................................ 717

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult:PHZ <State>
This command switches the query response of the power measurement results
between output of absolute values and output referred to the measurement bandwith.
The measurement results are output with the CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:
FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? command.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
ON
Results output: channel power density in dBm/Hz
OFF
Results output: channel power is displayed in dBm
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES:PHZ ON
Output of results referred to the channel bandwidth.
For details on a complete measurement example refer to
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult?
on page 690.
Manual operation: See "Chan Pwr/Hz" on page 251

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE <Mode>
This command switches between absolute and relative adjacent channel measure-
ment. The command is only available with span > 0 and if the number of adjacent
channels is greater than 0.
For the relative measurement the reference value is set to the currently measured
channel power using the command [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:
AUTO ONCE.
Parameters:
<Mode> ABSolute | RELative
ABSolute
absolute adjacent channel measurement
RELative
relative adjacent channel measurement
*RST: RELative

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 716

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: POW:ACH:MODE REL

Sets the adjacent channel measurement mode to relative.
Manual operation: See "ACLR (Abs/Rel)" on page 252

[SENSe:]POWer:HSPeed <State>
This command switches on or off the high-speed channel/adjacent channel power
measurement. The measurement itself is performed in zero span on the center fre-
quencies of the individual channels. The command automatically switches to zero span
and back.
Depending on the selected mobile radio standard, weighting filters with characteristic
or very steep-sided channel filters are used for band limitation.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: POW:HSP ON
Manual operation: See "Fast ACLR (On/Off)" on page 253

[SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection <Mode>
This command turns noise cancellation on and off.
If noise cancellation is on, the R&S ESR performs a reference measurement to deter-
mine its inherent noise and subtracts the result from the channel power measurement
result (first active trace only).
The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency, resolu-
tion bandwidth and level setting. Therefore, the correction function is disabled when-
ever one of these parameters is changed. A corresponding message is displayed on
the screen. Noise correction must be turned on again manually after the change.
Parameters:
<Mode> ON
Performs noise correction.
OFF
Performs no noise correction.
AUTO
Performs noise correction.
After a parameter change, noise correction is restarted automati-
cally and a new correction measurement is performed.
*RST: OFF
Example: POW:NCOR ON
Manual operation: See "Noise Correction" on page 254

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 717

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Predefined CP/ACLR Standards

Parameter Standard

W-CDMA 3GPP FWD W-CDMA 3.84 MHz forward

W-CDMA 3GPP REV W-CDMA 3.84 MHz reverse

CDMA IS95A FWD CDMA IS95A forward

CDMA IS95A REV CDMA IS95A reverse

CDMA IS95C Class 0 FWD CDMA IS95C Class 0 forward

CDMA IS95C Class 0 REV CDMA IS95C Class 0 reverse

CDMA J-STD008 FWD CDMA J-STD008 forward

CDMA J-STD008 REV CDMA J-STD008 reverse

CDMA IS95C Class 1 FWD CDMA IS95C Class 1 forward

CDMA IS95C Class 1 REV CDMA IS95C Class 1 reverse

CDMA 2000 CDMA 2000

TD SCDMA FWD TD-SCDMA forward

TD SCDMA REV TD-SCDMA reverse

WLAN 802.11A WLAN 802.11A

WLAN 802.11B WLAN 802.11B

WiMAX WiMAX

WIBRO WIBRO

RFID 14443 RFID 14443

EUTRa EUTRA/LTE Square

REUTra EUTRA/LTE Square/RRC

TETRA TETRA

PDC PDC

PHS PHS

CDPD CDPD

GSM GSM

10.4.1.3 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth

The following commands configure measurements of the occupied bandwidth.

Commands useful to measure the occupied bandwidth described elsewhere:
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? on page 690
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect on page 689
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] on page 694

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 718

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

● [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel<channel>]
on page 701
● [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet on page 695
● [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel on page 696
● TRACe<n>:DATA on page 696
[SENSe:]POWer:BANDwidth|BWIDth...............................................................................719

[SENSe:]POWer:BANDwidth|BWIDth <Percentage>
This command defines the percentage of the power with respect to the total power.
This value is the basis for the occupied bandwidth measurement (see [SENSe:
]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet on page 695).
Parameters:
<Percentage> 10 to 99.9PCT
*RST: 99PCT
Example: POW:BWID 95PCT
Manual operation: See "% Power Bandwidth (span > 0)" on page 264

10.4.1.4 Measuring Spurious Emissions

The following commands configure and perform spurious emission measurements.

● Controlling the Measurement................................................................................ 719
● Managing a Sweep List.........................................................................................720
● Configuring List Evaluation................................................................................... 728
● Retrieving Results................................................................................................. 729

Controlling the Measurement

Note that the spurious measurement must be initialized before you can start configur-
ing the sweep list or list evaluation.
Commands useful to retrieve results described elsewhere:
● [SENSe:]SWEep:MODE on page 731
INITiate<n>:SPURious................................................................................................... 719
MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPURious.................................................................................... 720

INITiate<n>:SPURious
This command initiates a Spurious Emissions measurement.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: INIT:SPUR
Starts a Spurious Emissions measurement.
Usage: Event

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 719

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPURious <FileName>
This command exports the marker peak list available for spurious emission measure-
ments to a file.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the path and name of the target file.
Example: MMEM:STOR:SPUR 'test'
Saves the current marker peak list in the file test.dat.
Usage: Event

Managing a Sweep List

The following commands configure the sweep list for spurious emission measure-
ments.
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth[:RESolution]....................................................720
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth:VIDeo.............................................................721
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BREak............................................................................. 721
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:COUNt.............................................................................721
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:DELete............................................................................ 722
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:DETector......................................................................... 722
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:FILTer:TYPE.................................................................... 722
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STARt......................................................... 723
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STOP..........................................................723
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation............................................................724
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO..................................................724
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:GAIN:STATe........................................................... 724
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STARt......................................................................725
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STATe..................................................................... 725
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STOP...................................................................... 726
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:POINts.............................................................................726
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:RLEVel............................................................................ 726
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME................................................................... 727
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO..........................................................727
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:TRANsducer.....................................................................727

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth[:RESolution] <Value>
This command sets the RBW value for the specified range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Value> Refer to the data sheet.
*RST: 30.0 kHz

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 720

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: LIST:RANG2:BAND:RES 5000

Sets the RBW for range 2 to 5 kHz.
Manual operation: See "RBW" on page 299

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth:VIDeo
This command sets the VBW value for the specified range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Value> Refer to the data sheet.
*RST: 10.0 MHz
Example: LIST:RANG1:BAND:VID 5000000
Sets the VBW for range 1 to 5 MHz.
Manual operation: See "VBW" on page 299

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BREak <State>
This command configures the sweep behavior.
The suffixes are irrelevant.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<State> ON
The R&S ESR stops after one range is swept and continues only
if you confirm (a message box is displayed).
OFF
The R&S ESR sweeps all ranges in one go.
*RST: OFF
Example: LIST:RANG:BRE ON
Configures a stop after each range.
Manual operation: See "Stop After Sweep" on page 300

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:COUNt
This command returns the number of defined ranges.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 721

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: LIST:RANG:COUNt?
Returns the number of defined ranges.

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:DELete
This command deletes the specified range. The range numbers are updated accord-
ingly. The reference range cannot be deleted. A minimum of three ranges is manda-
tory.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Example: LIST:RANG4:DEL
Deletes range 4.
Manual operation: See "Delete Range" on page 301

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:DETector <Detector>
This command sets the detector for the specified range. For details refer to "Detector"
on page 299.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Detector> NEGative | POSitive | SAMPle | RMS | AVERage
NEGative
minimum peak detector
POSitive
peak detector
SAMPle
sample detector
RMS
RMS detector
AVERage
average detector
*RST: RMS
Example: LIST:RANGe3:DET SAMP
Sets the sample detector for range 3.
Manual operation: See "Detector" on page 299

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:FILTer:TYPE <Type>
This command sets the filter type for the specified range.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 722

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Type> NORMal
Gaussian filters
CFILter
channel filters
RRC
RRC filters
P5
5 Pole filters
*RST: NORM
The available bandwidths of the filters are specified in the data
sheet.
Example: LIST:RANG1:FILT:TYPE RRC
Sets the RRC filter type for range 1.
Manual operation: See "Filter Type" on page 299

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STARt <Frequency>
This command sets the start frequency for the specified range.
In order to change the start/stop frequency of the first/last range, select the appropriate
span. If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges, the mea-
surement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum
span of 20 Hz. The first and last range are adapted to the given span as long as the
minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Frequency> see rules in chapter 4, "Ranges and settings"
*RST: -250.0 MHz (range 1), -2.52 MHz (range 2), 2.52
MHz (range 3)
Example: LIST:RANG1:STAR 100000000
Sets the start frequency for range 1 to 100 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Range Start / Range Stop" on page 298

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STOP <Frequency>
This command sets the stop frequency for the specified range. See also [SENSe:
]LIST:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STARt on page 723.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 723

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Frequency> see rules in chapter 4, "Ranges and settings"
*RST: -2.52 MHz (range 1), 2.52 MHz (range 2), 250.0
MHz (range 3)
Example: LIST:RANG3:STOP 10000000
Sets the stop frequency for range 2 to 10 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Range Start / Range Stop" on page 298

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation <Value>
This command sets the attenuation for the specified range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Value> Refer to the data sheet.
*RST: 0 dB
Example: LIST:RANG3:INP:ATT 10
Sets the attenuation of range 3 to 10 dB.
Manual operation: See "RF Attenuator" on page 299

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO <State>
This command activates or deactivates the automatic RF attenuation setting for the
specified range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: LIST:RANG2:INP:ATT:AUTO OFF
Deactivates the RF attenuation auto mode for range 2.
Manual operation: See "RF Att. Mode" on page 299

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:GAIN:STATe <State>
This command switches the preamplifier on or off for the specified range.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 724

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: LIST:RANG3:INP:GAIN:STATe ON
Switches the preamplifier for range 3 on or off.
Manual operation: See "Preamp" on page 300

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STARt <Limit>
This command sets an absolute limit value at the start frequency of the specified
range. Different from manual operation, this setting is independent of the defined limit
check type.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Limit> -400 to in 400 dBm
*RST: 13 dBm
Example: LIST:RANG1:LIM:ABS:STAR 10
Sets an absolute limit of 10 dBm at the start frequency of the
range.
Manual operation: See "Abs Limit Start" on page 300

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STATe
This command activates or deactivates the limit check for all ranges.
Suffix: .
<range> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: LIST:RANG3:LIM:STAT ON
Activates a limit check for all ranges.
Manual operation: See "Limit Check 1-4" on page 300

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 725

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STOP <Limit>
This command sets an absolute limit value at the stop frequency of the specified
range. Different from manual operation, this setting is independent of the defined limit
check type.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Limit> -400 to in 400 dBm
*RST: 13 dBm
Example: LIST:RANG1:LIM:STOP 20
Sets an absolute limit of 20 dBm at the stop frequency of the
range.
Manual operation: See "Abs Limit Stop" on page 301

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:POINts <Value>
This command sets the number of sweep points for the specified range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Value> For details on possible values refer to chapter 4, Sweep Points
softkey of the "Sweep" menu.
*RST: 691
Example: LIST:RANG3:POIN 601
Sets 601 sweep points for range 3.
Manual operation: See "Sweep Points" on page 300

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:RLEVel <Value>
This command sets the reference level for the specified range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Value> Refer to the data sheet.
*RST: -20 dBm
Example: LIST:RANG2:RLEV 0
Sets the reference level of range 2 to 0 dBm.
Manual operation: See "Ref. Level" on page 299

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 726

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME
This command sets the sweep time for the specified range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<SweepTime> Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to
VBW. For details refer to the data sheet.
*RST: 0.27 s
Example: LIST:RANG1:SWE:TIME 1
Sets the sweep time for range 1 to 1 s.
Manual operation: See "Sweep Time" on page 299

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO
This command activates or deactivates the automatic sweep time setting for the speci-
fied range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: LIST:RANG3:SWE:TIME:AUTO OFF
Deactivates the sweep time auto mode for range 3.
Manual operation: See "Sweep Time Mode" on page 299

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:TRANsducer <TransducerName>
This command sets a transducer for the specified range. You can only choose a trans-
ducer that fulfills the following conditions:
● The transducer overlaps or equals the span of the range.
● The x-axis is linear.
● The unit is dB.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<TransducerName> 'string' = name of the transducer
Example: SENS:LIST:RANG1:TRAN 'test'
Sets the transducer called "test" for range 1.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 727

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Manual operation: See "Transd. Factor" on page 300

Configuring List Evaluation

The following commands configure the list evaluation.
● CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:MARGin on page 649
● MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIST on page 747
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch[:IMMediate]............................................................ 728
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:AUTO.................................................................... 728
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:PSHow.................................................................. 728
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges........................................................... 729

CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch[:IMMediate]
This command switches the spurious limit check off.
If you want to read out the values peak values including the delta to a limit, you have to
switch on the limit again.
This command is only for FSP compatibility, and not necessary to use on the
R&S ESR.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: CALC:PSE
Starts to determine the list.

CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:AUTO <State>
This command activates or deactivates the list evaluation.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: CALC:ESP:PSE:AUTO OFF
Deactivates the list evaluation.
Manual operation: See "List Evaluation (On/Off)" on page 273
See "List Evaluation (On/Off)" on page 302

CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:PSHow
This command marks all peaks with blue squares in the diagram.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 728

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:ESP:PSE:PSH ON
Marks all peaks with blue squares.
Manual operation: See "Show Peaks" on page 302

CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges <NumberPeaks>
This command sets the number of peaks per range that are stored in the list. Once the
selected number of peaks has been reached, the peak search is stopped in the current
range and continued in the next range.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<NumberPeaks> 1 to 50
*RST: 25
Example: CALC:PSE:SUBR 10
Sets 10 peaks per range to be stored in the list.
Manual operation: See "Peaks per Range" on page 302

Retrieving Results
The following commands analyze and retrieve measurement results for spurious emis-
sion measurements.
● CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:FAIL? on page 687
● TRACe<n>:DATA on page 696

10.4.1.5 Testing Against a Spectrum Emission Mask

The following commands configure and perform spectrum emission mask (SEM) mea-
surements.
● Managing Measurement Configurations............................................................... 729
● Controlling the Measurement................................................................................ 731
● Managing a Sweep List.........................................................................................732
● Configuring the Reference Range.........................................................................741
● Configuring Power Classes...................................................................................742
● Configuring List Evaluation................................................................................... 746
● Retrieving Results................................................................................................. 748

Managing Measurement Configurations

The following commands control measurement configurations for SEM measurements.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 729

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:RESTore.................................................................. 730
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet[:STANdard]........................................................................ 730
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet:RESTore............................................................................730
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet:STORe.............................................................................. 730

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:RESTore
This command restores the predefined limit lines for the Spectrum Emission Mask
measurement. All modifications made to the predefined limit lines are lost and the fac-
tory-set values are restored.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
window
<k> irrelevant
Example: CALC:LIM:ESP:REST
Resets the limit lines for the Spectrum Emission Mask to the
default setting.

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet[:STANdard]
This command selects the specified XML file under C:\r_s\instr\sem_std. If the
file is stored in a subdirectory, include the relative path.
Example: ESP:PRES 'WCDMA\3GPP\DL\PowerClass_31_39.xml'
Selects the PowerClass_31_39.xml XML file in the C:
\R_S\instr\sem_std\WCDMA\3GPP\DL directory.
ESP:PRES?
W-CDMA 3GPP DL (31,39)dBm
The query returns information about the selected standard, the
link direction and the power class. If no standard has been
selected, the query returns None.
Manual operation: See "Load Standard" on page 276

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet:RESTore
This command copies the XML files from the C:\R_S\instr\sem_backup folder to
the C:\R_S\instr\sem_std folder. Files of the same name are overwritten.
Example: ESP:PRES:REST
Restores the originally provided XML files.
Manual operation: See "Restore Standard Files" on page 276

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet:STORe <FileName>
This command stores the current settings as presettings in the specified XML file under
C:\r_s\instr\sem_backup.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 730

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Parameters:
<FileName>
Example: ESP:PRES:STOR
'WCDMA\3GPP\DL\PowerClass_31_39.xml'
Stores the settins in the PowerClass_31_39.xml file in the C:
\R_S\instr\sem_std\WCDMA\3GPP\DL directory.
Manual operation: See "Save As Standard" on page 276

Controlling the Measurement

The following commands control the measurement itself.
INITiate<n>:ESPectrum.................................................................................................. 731
[SENSe:]SWEep:MODE................................................................................................. 731

INITiate<n>:ESPectrum
This command starts a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: INIT:ESP
Starts a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement.
Manual operation: See "Meas Start/Stop" on page 276

[SENSe:]SWEep:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the spurious emission and spectrum emission mask measure-
ments.
Parameters:
<Mode> AUTO | ESPectrum | LIST
AUTO
Switches to "Spectrum" measurement mode or stays in the cur-
rent mode if it is not ESP/LIST
ESPectrum
"Spectrum Emission Mask" measurement mode
LIST
"Spurious Emissions" measurement mode
*RST: AUTO
Example: SWE:MODE ESP
Sets the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement mode.
Manual operation: See "Spectrum Emission Mask" on page 232
See "Spurious Emissions" on page 233
See "Spectrum Emission Mask" on page 267
See "Spurious Emissions" on page 298

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 731

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Managing a Sweep List

The following commands define a sweep list for SEM measurements.
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:HighSPeed..................................................................................... 732
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth[:RESolution].......................................... 733
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth:VIDeo................................................... 733
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:COUNt................................................................... 734
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:DELete...................................................................734
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:FILTer:TYPE...........................................................734
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STARt................................................735
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STOP................................................ 735
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation.................................................. 736
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO........................................ 736
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:GAIN:STATe..................................................736
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INSert.................................................................... 737
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:ABSolute:STARt................................ 737
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:ABSolute:STOP.................................737
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:RELative:STARt.................................738
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:RELative:STOP................................. 738
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:STATe.............................................. 739
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:RLEVel...................................................................739
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME.......................................................... 739
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO................................................ 740
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:TRANsducer........................................................... 740

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:HighSPeed <State>
This command activates Fast SEM mode to accelerate spurious emission mask mea-
surements. For details see "Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measurements"
on page 290.
Note that in Fast SEM mode, the following parameters cannot be changed in all
ranges:
● Filter type, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:FILTer:TYPE
on page 734
● RBW, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth[:RESolution]
on page 733
● VBW, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth:VIDeo
on page 733
● Sweep Time Mode, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME:
AUTO on page 740
● Sweep Time, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME
on page 739
● Reference level, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:RLEVel
on page 739
● RF Att Mode, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:
ATTenuation:AUTO on page 736

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 732

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

● Rf Attenuation, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:

ATTenuation on page 736
● Preamp, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:GAIN:STATe
on page 736
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: ESP:HSP ON
Manual operation: See "Fast SEM" on page 268

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth[:RESolution] <Value>
This command sets the RBW value for the specified range.
Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if "Fast SEM" mode is activated
(see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:HighSPeed on page 732).
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Value> Refer to the data sheet.
*RST: 30.0 kHz
Example: ESP:RANG2:BAND:RES 5000
Sets the RBW for range 2 to 5 kHz.
Manual operation: See "RBW" on page 268

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth:VIDeo <Value>
This command sets the VBW value for the specified range.
Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if "Fast SEM" mode is activated
(see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:HighSPeed on page 732).
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Value> Refer to the data sheet.
*RST: 10.0 MHz
Example: ESP:RANG1:BAND:VID 5000000
Sets the VBW for range 1 to 5 MHz.
Manual operation: See "VBW" on page 269

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 733

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:COUNt
This command returns the number of defined ranges.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Example: ESP:RANG:COUNt?
Returns the number of defined ranges.

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:DELete
This command deletes the specified range. The range numbers are updated accord-
ingly. The reference range cannot be deleted. A minimum of three ranges is manda-
tory.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Example: ESP:RANG4:DEL
Deletes range 4.
Manual operation: See "Delete Range" on page 271

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:FILTer:TYPE <Type>
This command sets the filter type for the specified range.
Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if "Fast SEM" mode is activated
(see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:HighSPeed on page 732).
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Type> NORMal
Gaussian filters
CFILter
channel filters
RRC
RRC filters
P5
5 Pole filters
*RST: NORM
The available bandwidths of the filters are specified in the data
sheet.
Example: ESP:RANG1:FILT:TYPE RRC
Sets the RRC filter type for range 1.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 734

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Manual operation: See "Filter Type" on page 268

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STARt <Frequency>
This command sets the start frequency for the specified range.
In order to change the start/stop frequency of the first/last range, select the appropriate
span. If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges, the mea-
surement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum
span of 20 Hz. The first and last range are adapted to the given span as long as the
minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated.
Note the rules for the <Frequency> parameter specified in "Ranges and Range Set-
tings" on page 278.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Frequency> numeric value
*RST: -250.0 MHz (range 1), -2.52 MHz (range 2), 2.52
MHz (range 3)
Example: ESP:RANG1:STAR 100000000
Sets the start frequency for range 1 to 100 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Range Start / Range Stop" on page 268

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STOP <Frequency>
This command sets the stop frequency for the specified range. For further details refer
to the [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STARt command.
Note the rules for the <Frequency> parameter specified in "Ranges and Range Set-
tings" on page 278.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Frequency> numeric value
*RST: -2.52 MHz (range 1), 2.52 MHz (range 2), 250.0
MHz (range 3)
Example: ESP:RANG3:STOP 10000000
Sets the stop frequency for range 2 to 10 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Range Start / Range Stop" on page 268

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 735

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation <Value>
This command sets the attenuation for the specified range.
Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if "Fast SEM" mode is activated
(see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:HighSPeed on page 732).
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Value> Refer to the data sheet.
*RST: 0 dB
Example: ESP:RANG3:INP:ATT 10
Sets the attenuation of range 3 to 10 dB.
Manual operation: See "RF Attenuator" on page 269

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO <State>
This command activates or deactivates the automatic RF attenuation setting for the
specified range.
Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if "Fast SEM" mode is activated
(see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:HighSPeed on page 732).
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: ESP:RANG2:INP:ATT:AUTO OFF
Deactivates the RF attenuation auto mode for range 2.
Manual operation: See "RF Att. Mode" on page 269

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:GAIN:STATe <State>
This command switches the preamplifier on or off for the specified range.
Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if "Fast SEM" mode is activated
(see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:HighSPeed on page 732).
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 736

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: ESP:RANG3:INP:GAIN:STATe ON
Switches the preamplifier for range 3 on or off.
Manual operation: See "Preamp" on page 269

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INSert <Mode>
This command inserts a new range before or after the specified range. The range num-
bers are updated accordingly.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Mode> AFTer | BEFore
Example: ESP:RANG3:INS BEF
Inserts a new range before range 3.
ESP:RANG1:INS AFT
Inserts a new range after range 1.
Manual operation: See "Insert before Range" on page 271
See "Insert after Range" on page 271

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:ABSolute:STARt <Level>
This command sets an absolute limit value at the start frequency of the specified
range. Different from manual operation, this setting is independently of the defined limit
check type.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Level> -400 to in 400 dBm
*RST: 13 dBm
Example: ESP:RANG1:LIM:ABS:STAR 10
Sets an absolute limit of 10 dBm at the start frequency of the
range.
Manual operation: See "Abs Limit Start" on page 270

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:ABSolute:STOP <Level>
This command sets an absolute limit value at the stop frequency of the specified
range. Different from manual operation, this setting is independent of the defined limit
check type.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 737

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Level> -400 to in 400 dBm
*RST: 13 dBm
Example: ESP:RANG1:LIM:ABS:STOP 20
Sets an absolute limit of 20 dBm at the stop frequency of the
range.
Manual operation: See "Abs Limit Stop" on page 270

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:RELative:STARt <Limit>
This command sets a relative limit value at the start frequency of the specified range.
Different from manual operation, this setting is independent of the defined limit check
type.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Limit> -400 to in 400 dBc
*RST: -50 dBc
Example: ESP:RANG3:LIM:REL:STAR -20
Sets a relative limit of -20 dBc at the start frequency of the
range.
Manual operation: See "Rel Limit Start" on page 270

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:RELative:STOP <Limit>
This command sets a relative limit value at the stop frequency of the specified range.
Different from manual operation, this setting is independently of the defined limit check
type.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Limit> -400 to in 400 dBc
*RST: -50 dBc
Example: ESP:RANG3:LIM:REL:STOP 20
Sets a relative limit of 20 dBc at the stop frequency of the range.
Manual operation: See "Rel Limit Stop" on page 270

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 738

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:STATe <State>
This command sets the type of limit check for all ranges.
Suffix: .
<range> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ABSolute | RELative | AND | OR
ABSolute
Checks only the absolute limits defined.
RELative
Checks only the relative limits. Relative limits are defined as rel-
ative to the measured power in the reference range.
AND
Combines the absolute and relative limit. The limit check fails
when both limits are violated.
OR
Combines the absolute and relative limit. The limit check fails
when one of the limits is violated.
*RST: REL
Example: ESP:RANG3:LIM:STAT AND
Sets for all ranges the combined absolute/relative limit check.
Manual operation: See "Limit Check 1-4" on page 270

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:RLEVel <Value>
This command sets the reference level for the specified range.
Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if "Fast SEM" mode is activated
(see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:HighSPeed on page 732).
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Value> Refer to the data sheet.
*RST: -20 dBm
Example: ESP:RANG2:RLEV 0
Sets the reference level of range 2 to 0 dBm.
Manual operation: See "Ref. Level" on page 269

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME <SweepTime>
This command sets the sweep time for the specified range.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 739

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if "Fast SEM" mode is activated
(see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:HighSPeed on page 732).
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<SweepTime> Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to
VBW. For details refer to the data sheet.
*RST: 0.27 s
Example: ESP:RANG1:SWE:TIME 1
Sets the sweep time for range 1 to 1 s.
Manual operation: See "Sweep Time" on page 269

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO <State>
This command activates or deactivates the automatic sweep time setting for the speci-
fied range.
Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if "Fast SEM" mode is activated
(see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:HighSPeed on page 732).
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: ESP:RANG3:SWE:TIME:AUTO OFF
Deactivates the sweep time auto mode for range 3.
Manual operation: See "Sweep Time Mode" on page 269

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:TRANsducer <TransducerName>
This command sets a transducer for the specified range. You can only choose a trans-
ducer that fulfills the following conditions:
● The transducer overlaps or equals the span of the range.
● The x-axis is linear.
● The unit is dB.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<TransducerName> 'string' = name of the transducer

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 740

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: ESP:RANG1:TRAN 'test'

Sets the transducer called test for range 1.
Manual operation: See "Transd. Factor" on page 269

Configuring the Reference Range

The following commands define the reference range for the SEM sweep list.
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:BWID............................................................................................. 741
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:FILTer[:RRC]:ALPHa....................................................................... 741
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:FILTer[:RRC][:STATe]......................................................................742
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RRANge.........................................................................................742
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RTYPe........................................................................................... 742

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:BWID <Bandwidth>
This command defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power (refer-
ence range). This setting takes only effect if channel power is selected as power refer-
ence type (see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RTYPe on page 742).
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> minimum span ≤ value ≤ span of reference range
*RST: 3.84 MHz
Example: ESP:RTYP CPOW
Sets the power reference type to channel power.
ESP:BWID 1 MHZ
Sets the Tx bandwidth to 1 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Edit Reference Range" on page 272

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:FILTer[:RRC]:ALPHa <Value>
This command sets the alpha value of the RRC filter. This setting takes only effect if
channel power is selected as power reference type ( [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RTYPe
command) and if the RRC filter is activated ( [SENSe:]ESPectrum:FILTer[:
RRC][:STATe]command).
Parameters:
<Value> 0 to 1
*RST: 0.22
Example: ESP:RTYP CPOW
Sets the power reference type to channel power.
ESP:FILT ON
Activates the use of an RRC filter.
ESP:FILT:ALPH 0.5
Sets the alpha value of the RRC filter to 0.5.
Manual operation: See "Edit Reference Range" on page 272

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 741

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:FILTer[:RRC][:STATe] <State>
This command activates or deactivates the use of an RRC filter. This setting only takes
effect if channel power is selected as power reference type (see [SENSe:
]ESPectrum:RTYPe on page 742).
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: ESP:RTYP CPOW
Sets the power reference type to channel power.
ESP:FILT OFF
Deactivates the use of an RRC filter.
Manual operation: See "Edit Reference Range" on page 272

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RRANge
This command returns the current position (number) of the reference range.
Example: ESP:RRAN?
Returns the current position (number) of the reference range.

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RTYPe <Type>
This command sets the power reference type.
Parameters:
<Type> PEAK | CPOWer
PEAK
Measures the highest peak within the reference range.
CPOWer
Measures the channel power within the reference range (integral
bandwidth method).
*RST: CPOWer
Example: ESP:RTYP PEAK
Sets the peak power reference type.
Manual operation: See "Edit Reference Range" on page 272

Configuring Power Classes

The following commands define the power classes for SEM measurements.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:LIMits.......................................................................743
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:MODE......................................................................743
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:COUNt............................................. 744
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>[:EXCLusive]......................................744
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:LIMit[:STATe]....................................744

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 742

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:MAXimum........................................ 745
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:MINimum..........................................745
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:VALue......................................................................746

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:LIMits <Limits>
This command sets or queries up to 4 power classes in one step.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Limits> 1–3 numeric values between -200 and 200, separated by com-
mas
-200, <0-3 numeric values between -200 and 200, in ascending
order, separated by commas>, 200
Example: CALC:LIM:ESP:LIM -50,50,70
Defines the following power classes:
<-200, -50>
<-50, 50>
<50, 70>
<70, 200>
Query:
CALC:LIM:ESP:LIM?
Response:
-200,-50,50,70,200

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:MODE <Mode>
This command activates or deactivates the automatic selection of the limit line in the
Spectrum Emission Mask measurement.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
window
<k> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Mode> AUTO | MANUAL
AUTO
The limit line depends on the measured channel power.
MANUAL
One of the three specified limit lines is set.
*RST: AUTO
Example: CALC:LIM:ESP:MODE AUTO
Activates automatic selection of the limit line.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 743

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:COUNt <NoPowerClasses>
This command sets the number of power classes to be defined.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> irrelevant
<Class> irrelevant
Parameters:
<NoPowerClasses> 1 to 4
*RST: 1
Example: CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL:COUN 2
Two power classes can be defined.

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>[:EXCLusive] <State>
This command sets the power classes used in the spectrum emission mask measure-
ment. It is only possible to use power classes for which limits are defined. Also, either
only one power class at a time or all power classes together can be selected.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> irrelevant
<Class> 1...4
the power class to be evaluated
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL1 ON
Activates the first defined power class.
Manual operation: See "Used Power Classes" on page 275
See "Add/Remove" on page 276

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:LIMit[:STATe] <State>
This command defines which limits are evaluated in the measurement.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> irrelevant
<Class> 1...4
the power class to be evaluated

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 744

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Parameters:
<State> ABSolute | RELative | AND | OR
ABSolute
Evaluates only limit lines with absolute power values
RELative
Evaluates only limit lines with relative power values
AND
Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values. A
negative result is returned if both limits fail.
OR
Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values. A
negative result is returned if at least one limit failed.
*RST: REL
Example: CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL:LIM ABS
Manual operation: See "Used Power Classes" on page 275

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:MAXimum <Level>
This command sets the upper limit level for one power class. The unit is dBm. The limit
always ends at + 200 dBm, i.e. the upper limit of the last power class can not be set. If
more than one power class is in use, the upper limit must equal the lower limit of the
next power class.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> irrelevant
<Class> 1...4
the power class to be evaluated
Parameters:
<Level> <numeric value>
*RST: +200
Example: CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL1:MAX -40 dBm
Sets the maximum power value of the first power class to -40
dBm.
Manual operation: See "PMin/PMax" on page 275

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:MINimum <Level>
This command sets the minimum lower level limit for one power class. The unit is dBm.
The limit always start at – 200 dBm, i.e. the first lower limit can not be set. If more than
one power class is in use, the lower limit must equal the upper limit of the previous
power class.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 745

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

<k> irrelevant
<Class> 1...4
the power class to be evaluated
Parameters:
<Level> <numeric_value>
*RST: -200 for class1, otherwise +200
Example: CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL2:MIN -40 dBm
Sets the minimum power value of the second power class to -40
dBm.
Manual operation: See "PMin/PMax" on page 275

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:VALue <Power>
This command activates the manual limit line selection and specifies the expected
power as a value. Depending on the entered value, one of the predefined limit lines is
selected.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
window
<k> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Power> 33 | 28 | 0
33
P ≥ 33
28
28 < P < 33
0
P < 28
*RST: 0
Example: CALC:LIM:ESP:VAL 33
Activates manual selection of the limit line and selects the limit
line for P = 33.

Configuring List Evaluation

The following commands configure the list evaluation.
MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIST............................................................................................ 747
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:[IMMediate].......................................... 747
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:AUTO.................................................. 747
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:MARGin...............................................747
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:PSHow................................................ 748

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 746

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIST <FileName>
This command stores the current list evaluation results in a <file name>.dat file.
The file consists of a data section containing the list evaluation results.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<FileName> <file name>
Example: MMEM:STOR:LIST 'test'
Stores the current list evaluation results in the test.dat file.
Manual operation: See "Save Evaluation List" on page 273
See "ASCII File Export" on page 273
See "Save Evaluation List" on page 302
See "ASCII File Export" on page 302

CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:[IMMediate]
This command starts the list evaluation.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
Example: CALC:ESP:PSE
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:AUTO <State>
This command activates or deactivates the list evaluation.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: CALC:ESP:PSE:AUTO OFF
Deactivates the list evaluation.

CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:MARGin <Margin>
This command sets the margin used for the limit check/peak search.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<Margin> -200 to 200 dB
*RST: 200 dB

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 747

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: CALC:ESP:PSE:MARG 100

Sets the margin to 100 dB.

CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:PSHow <State>
This command marks all peaks with blue squares in the diagram.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:ESP:PSE:PSH ON
Marks all peaks with blue squares.
Manual operation: See "Show Peaks" on page 273

Retrieving Results
The following commands analyze and retrieve measurement results for SEM measure-
ments.
● CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:FAIL? on page 687
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? on page 690
● TRACe<n>:DATA on page 696

10.4.1.6 Performing EMI Measurements

The following commands configure and perform EMI measurements.

● Configuring the Measurement...............................................................................748
● Performing a Peak Search.................................................................................... 749
● Evaluating the Results.......................................................................................... 751

Configuring the Measurement

Commands useful to configure EMI measurements described elsewhere:
● DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X:SPACing on page 634
● INPut:LISN:FILTer:HPAS[:STATe] on page 655
● INPut:LISN:PHASe on page 655
● INPut:LISN[:TYPE] on page 656
● [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] on page 639
● [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE on page 640
● [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion] on page 652
● [SENSe:]SWEep:POINts on page 804

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 748

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Remote commands exclusive to EMI measurements:

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:STATe.......................................... 749

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:STATe <State>
This command turns the EMI measurement marker functionality on and off.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF

Performing a Peak Search

Commands useful to perform EMI measurements described elsewhere:
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:AOFF on page 667
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:TRACe on page 671
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF on page 661
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe on page 665

Remote commands exclusive to EMI measurements:

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DETector...............................749
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DETector.......................................750
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DWELl.......................................... 750
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:PSEarch:AUTO..............................751

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DETector <Detector>
This command selects the detector for a specific deltamarker during the final evalua-
tion.
If the deltamarker hasn't been active yet, the command also turns the deltamarker on.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> deltamarker

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 749

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Parameters:
<Detector> OFF
turns the deltamarker off
AVER
average detector
CAV
CISPR Average detector
CRMS
RMS Average detector
POS
maximum peak detector
QPE
quasipeak detector
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Marker Configuration" on page 312

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DETector <Detector>
This command selects the detector for a specific marker during the final measurement.
If the marker hasn't been active yet, the command also turns the marker on.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> marker
Parameters:
<Detector> OFF
turns the marker off
AVER
average detector
CAV
CISPR Average detector
CRMS
RMS Average detector
POS
maximum peak detector
QPE
quasipeak detector
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Marker Configuration" on page 312

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DWELl <Time>
This command defines the dwell time during the final measurement.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 750

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Time> Range: min value to max value
*RST: 1s
Default unit: seconds
Manual operation: See "Marker Configuration" on page 312
See "Dwell Time" on page 314

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:PSEarch:AUTO
This command initiates a marker peak search.
Instead of the syntax element PSEarch you can also use PEAKsearch.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Auto Peak Search" on page 312
See "Marker Configuration" on page 312

Evaluating the Results

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<k>:CONDition ?............. 751
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<k>:DELTa?................... 752
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:RESult?.................................752
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<k>:CONDition ?.....................753
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<k>:DELTa?........................... 753
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:RESult?........................................ 754

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<k>:
CONDition ? <Condition>
This command queries the condition of a deltamarker position in relation to a certain
limit line.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> 1...16
deltamarker
<k> 1...8
limit line

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 751

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Return values:
<Condition> 0
The deltamarker has passed the limit check.
1
The deltamarker is inside the margins of a limit line.
2
The deltamarker has failed the limit check.
Example: CALC:DELT2:FUNC:FME:LIM2:COND?
Queries the condition of deltamarker 2 in relation to limit line 2.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Marker Table" on page 314

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<k>:DELTa?
This command queries the vertical distance from the deltamarker position to the limit
line. The unit is dB.
If the deltamarker has been assigned to a different trace than the limit line, the com-
mand returns -200.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> 1...16
deltamarker
<k> 1...8
limit line
Return values:
<Amplitude> Vertical distance to the limit line in dB.
Example: CALC:DELT3:FUNC:FME:LIM2:DELT?
Queries the distance of deltamarker 3 to the second limit line.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Marker Table" on page 314

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:RESult? <Result>
This command queries the result of the EMI measurement at the deltamarker position.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> 1...16
marker
Return values:
<Result> Power level in dB related to the reference marker you have set
for that delta marker.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 752

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: CALC:DELT3:FUNC:FME:RES?
Queries the result of delta marker 3.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Marker Table" on page 314

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<k>:CONDition ?
<Condition>
This command queries the condition of a marker position in relation to a certain limit
line.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> 1...16
marker
<k> 1...8
limit line
Return values:
<Condition> 0
The marker has passed the limit check.
1
The marker is inside the margins of a limit line.
2
The marker has failed the limit check.
Example: CALC:MARK1:FUNC:FME:LIM2:COND?
Queries the condition of marker 1 in relation to limit line 2.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Marker Table" on page 314

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<k>:DELTa?
<Amplitude>
This command queries the vertical distance from the marker position to the limit line.
The unit is dB.
If the marker has been assigned to a different trace than the limit line, the command
returns -200.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> 1...16
marker
<k> 1...8
limit line

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 753

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Return values:
<Amplitude> Vertical distance to the limit line in dB.
Example: CALC:MARK3:FUNC:FME:LIM2:DELT?
Queries the distance of marker 3 to the second limit line.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Marker Table" on page 314

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:RESult? <Result>
This command queries the result of the EMI measurement at the marker position.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> 1...16
marker
Return values:
<Result> Power level. The unit depends on the one you have currently
set.
Example: CALC:MARK1:FUNC:FME:RES?
Queries the result of marker 1.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Marker Table" on page 314

10.4.1.7 Measuring the Modulation Depth

The following commands configure and perform AM modulation depth measurements.

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:SEARchsignal ONCE............................... 754
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult?...................................................755
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth[:STATe]...................................................755

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:SEARchsignal ONCE
This command initiates a search for the signals required for the AM depth measure-
ment.
Note that the command does not perform a new measurement, but looks for the sig-
nals on the current trace.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP:SEAR ONCE
Executes the search of an AM modulated signal at the currently
available trace.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 754

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Search Signals" on page 346

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult?
This command queries the results of the AM modulation depth measurement..
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK:X 10MHZ
Sets the reference marker (marker 1) to the carrier signal at 10
MHz.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP ON
Switches on the modulation depth measurement.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP:RES?
Outputs the measured value.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "AM Mod Depth" on page 233
See "AM Mod Depth" on page 345

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the AM Modulation Depth measurement on and off.
To work correctly, the measurement requires an AM modulated signal.
If necessary, the command positions marker 1 on the signal with the highest level.
The level value of marker 1 is regarded as the carrier level. On activating the function,
marker 2 and marker 3 are automatically set as delta markers symmetrically to the car-
rier to the adjacent maxima of the trace.
If the position of delta marker 2 is changed, delta marker 3 is moved symmetrically with
respect to the reference marker (marker 1). If the position of delta marker 3 is changed,
fine adjustment can be performed independently of delta marker 2.
The power at the marker positions is calculated from the measured levels.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 755

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

The AM modulation depth is calculated from the ratio of power values at the reference
marker and the delta markers. If the two AM sidebands differ in power, the average
value of the two power values is used for calculating the AM modulation depth.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:X 10MHZ
Sets the reference marker (marker 1) to the carrier signal at 10
MHz.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP ON
Switches on the modulation depth measurement.
CALC:DELT2:X 10KHZ
Sets delta markers 2 and 3 to the signals at 10 kHz from the car-
rier signal.
CALC:DELT3:X 9.999KHZ
Corrects the position of delta marker 3 relative to delta marker 2.
Manual operation: See "AM Mod Depth" on page 233
See "AM Mod Depth" on page 345

10.4.1.8 Measuring the Harmonic Distortion

The following commands configure and perform measurements to determine the har-
monic distortion of a signal.
Commands useful to retrieve results described elsewhere:
● TRACe<n>:DATA on page 696
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:BANDwidth:AUTO............................... 756
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:DISTortion?........................................ 757
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:LIST?.................................................757
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:NHARmonics...................................... 758
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet..............................................758
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics[:STATe]............................................. 759
UNIT:THD..................................................................................................................... 759

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:BANDwidth:AUTO <State>
This command selects the resolution bandwidth of the harmonic in respect to the band-
width of the first harmonic.
For details refer to "Harmonic RBW Auto" on page 350.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 756

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Parameters:
<State> OFF | ON
OFF
identical
ON
a multiple
*RST: ON
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:BAND:AUTO OFF
Deactivates the automatic bandwidth enlargement.
Manual operation: See "Harmonic RBW Auto" on page 350

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:DISTortion?
This command queries the total harmonic distortion of the signal.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
TOTal
Return values:
<Result> <Distortion_%>,<Distortion_dB>
Pair of values, one showing the THD in %, one in dB.
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:NHARM 3
Sets the number of harmonics to be measured to 3.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM ON
Activates the harmonic distortion measurement.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end of the sweep.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:DIST? TOT
Returns the total distortion in % and dB.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Harmonic Distortion" on page 234
See "Harmonic Distortion" on page 349

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:LIST?
This command queries the position of the harmonics.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 757

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<Harmonics> Returns one value for every harmonic.
The first value is the absolute power of the first harmonic. The
unit is variable. The other values are power levels relative to the
first harmonic. The unit for these is dB.
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:NHARM 3
Sets the number of harmonics to be measured to 3.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM ON
Activates the harmonic distortion measurement.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end of the sweep.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:LIST?
Returns the values for the 3 measured harmonics.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Harmonic Distortion" on page 234
See "Harmonic Distortion" on page 349

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:NHARmonics <NoHarmonics>
This command sets the number of harmonics to be measured.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<NoHarmonics> Range: 1 to 26
*RST: 10
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:NHARM 3
Sets the number of harmonics to be measured to 3.
Manual operation: See "No. of Harmonics" on page 350

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet
This command initiates a measurement to determine the ideal configuration for the har-
monic distortion measurement.
The method depends on the span.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 758

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

● Frequency domain (span > 0)

Frequency and level of the first harmonic are determined and used for the mea-
surement list.
● Time domain (span = 0)
The level of the first harmonic is determined. The frequency remains unchanged.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:PRES
Optimizes the device settings for the harmonic measurement.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Adjust Settings" on page 350

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the harmonic distortion measurement on and off.
Note the following:
● If you perform the measurement in the frequency domain, the search range for the
frequency of the first harmonic, whose power is determined, is defined by the last
span.
● If you perform the measurement in the time domain, the current center frequency is
used as the frequency of the first harmonic. Thus, the frequency search is
bypassed. The first harmonic frequency is set by a specific center frequency in
zero span before the harmonic measurement is started.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM ON
Activates the harmonic distortion measurement.
Manual operation: See "Harmonic Distortion" on page 234
See "Harmonic Distortion" on page 349

UNIT:THD <Mode>
This command selects the unit for THD measurements.
Parameters:
<Mode> DB | PCT
*RST: DB

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 759

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: UNIT:THD PCT

10.4.1.9 Measuring the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio

Commands useful to measure the C/N ratio described elsewhere:

● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? on page 690
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect on page 689
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] on page 694
● [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel<channel>]
on page 701
● [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet on page 695

10.4.1.10 Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point

The following commands configure and control measurements to determine the third
intercept point (TOI).
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:SEARchsignal ONCE...................................... 760
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI[:STATe]......................................................... 760
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult?......................................................... 761

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:SEARchsignal ONCE
This command initiates a search for signals in the current trace to determine the third
intercept point.
No new measurement is performed. Only the currently available trace selected for the
TOI measurement is used.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI:SEAR ONCE
Executes the search for 2 signals and their intermodulation prod-
uct at the currently available trace.
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Search Signals" on page 344

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI[:STATe] <State>
This command initiates a measurement to determine the third intercept point.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 760

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

A two-tone signal with equal carrier levels is expected at the RF input of the instru-
ment. Marker 1 and marker 2 (both normal markers) are set to the maximum of the two
signals. Delta marker 3 and delta marker 4 are positioned to the intermodulation prod-
ucts. The delta markers can be modified separately afterwards with CALCulate<n>:
DELTamarker<m>:X.
The third-order intercept is calculated from the level spacing between the normal mark-
ers and the delta markers.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI ON
Switches on the measurement of the third-order intercept.
Manual operation: See "TOI" on page 233
See "TOI" on page 344

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult?
This command queries the results for the third order intercept point measurement.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant
Return values:
<TOI> Third order intercept point.
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI ON
Switches the intercept measurement.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI:RES?
Outputs the measured value.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "TOI" on page 233
See "TOI" on page 344

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 761

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

10.4.1.11 Measuring Statistics

The following commands configure and perform statistics measurements.

● Configuring Statistical Measurements...................................................................762
● Retrieving Results................................................................................................. 763
● Using Gate Ranges for Statistical Measurements................................................ 764
● Scaling the Diagram..............................................................................................766

Configuring Statistical Measurements

The following commands configure the measurement.
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:APD[:STATe].......................................................................... 762
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF[:STATe]........................................................................ 762
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:NSAMples.............................................................................. 763

CALCulate<n>:STATistics:APD[:STATe] <State>
This command switches on or off the measurement of amplitude distribution (APD). On
activating this function, the CCDF measurement is switched off.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:STAT:APD ON
Switches on the APD measurement.
Manual operation: See "APD" on page 233
See "APD" on page 325

CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF[:STATe] <State>
This command switches on or off the measurement of the complementary cumulative
distribution function (CCDF). On activating this function, the APD measurement is
switched off.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:STAT:CCDF ON
Switches on the CCDF measurement.
Manual operation: See "CCDF" on page 233
See "CCDF" on page 331

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 762

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:STATistics:NSAMples <NoMeasPoints>
This command sets the number of measurement points to be acquired for the statisti-
cal measurement functions.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<NoMeasPoints> 100 to 1E9
*RST: 100000
Example: CALC:STAT:NSAM 500
Sets the number of measurement points to be acquired to 500.
Manual operation: See "# of Samples" on page 326

Retrieving Results
The following commands are required to retrieve the measurement results.
Commands useful to retrieve results described elsewhere:
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 665
● TRACe<n>:DATA on page 696
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF:X<Trace>......................................................................763
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:RESult<Trace>........................................................................764

CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF:X<Trace> <Probability>
This command queries the results of the complementary cumulative distribution func-
tion (CCDF) for the specified probability (corresponding to the "Percent Marker" in the
display, see "Percent Marker" on page 331).The suffix of X defines the trace number.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<Trace> 1...6
trace
Parameters:
<Probability> P0_01: Level value for 0.01 % probability
P0_1: Level value for 0.1 % probability
P1: Level value for 1 % probability
P10: Level value for 10 % probability
Example: CALC:STAT:CCDF:X1? P10
Returns the level values that are over 10 % above the mean
value.
Manual operation: See "CCDF" on page 331

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 763

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:STATistics:RESult<Trace> <ResultType>
This command reads out the results of statistical measurements of a recorded trace.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<Trace> 1...6
trace
Parameters:
<ResultType> MEAN | PEAK | CFACtor | ALL
MEAN
Average (=RMS) power in dBm measured during the measure-
ment time.
PEAK
Peak power in dBm measured during the measurement time.
CFACtor
Determined CREST factor (= ratio of peak power to average
power) in dB.
ALL
Results of all three measurements mentioned before, separated
by commas: <mean power>,<peak power>,<crest factor>
The required result is selected via the following parameters:
Example: CALC:STAT:RES2? ALL
Reads out the three measurement results of trace 2. Example of
answer string: 5.56,19.25,13.69 i.e. mean power: 5.56 dBm,
peak power 19.25 dBm, CREST factor 13.69 dB

Using Gate Ranges for Statistical Measurements

The following commands control gated statistical measurements.
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>:COMMent................................................................764
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>: PERiod...................................................................765
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>:STARt<range>......................................................... 765
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>[:STATe<range>].......................................................765
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>: STOP<range>.........................................................766

[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>:COMMent <Comment>
Defines a comment for one of the traces for gated triggering.
Suffix: .
<k> 1...6
trace
Parameters:
<Comment>
Example: SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:COMM "SlotA"

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 764

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Manual operation: See "Gate Ranges" on page 329

[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>: PERiod <Value>

This command defines the length of the period to be traced using gated triggering.
Suffix: .
<k> 1...6
trace
Parameters:
<Value> <numeric value>
*RST: 0s
Example: SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:PER 5ms
Defines the period for gated triggering to 5 ms.
Manual operation: See "Gate Ranges" on page 329

[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>:STARt<range> <Value>
This command defines the starting point for the range to be traced using gated trigger-
ing.
Suffix: .
<k> 1...6
trace
<range> 1...3
range
Parameters:
<Value> <numeric value>
*RST: OFF
Example: SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STAR1 3ms
Sets the Starting point for range 1 on trace 1 at 3 ms.
Manual operation: See "Gate Ranges" on page 329

[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>[:STATe<range>] <State>
This command activates or deactivates tracing for a specific range using gated trigger-
ing.
Suffix: .
<k> 1...6
trace
<range> 1...3
range

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 765

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STAT1 ON
Activates tracing for range 1 of trace 1.
Manual operation: See "Gate Ranges" on page 329

[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>: STOP<range> <Value>

This command defines the stopping point for the range to be traced using gated trig-
gering
Suffix: .
<k> 1...6
trace
<range> 1...3
range
Parameters:
<Value> <numeric value>
*RST: 1 μs
Example: SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STOP1 5ms
Sets the stopping point for range 1 on trace 1 at 5 ms.
Manual operation: See "Gate Ranges" on page 329

Scaling the Diagram

The following commands configure the diagram for statistical measurements.
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:PRESet.................................................................................. 766
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO ONCE............................................................... 767
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RANGe.................................................................... 767
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RLEVel.....................................................................768
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:LOWer..................................................................... 768
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UNIT........................................................................ 768
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UPPer...................................................................... 769

CALCulate<n>:STATistics:PRESet
This command resets the scaling of the X and Y axes in a statistical measurement.
The following values are set:

x-axis ref level: -20 dBm

x-axis range APD: 100 dB

x-axis range CCDF: 20 dB

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 766

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

y-axis upper limit: 1.0

y-axis lower limit: 1E-6

Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: CALC:STAT:PRES
Resets the scaling for statistical functions
Manual operation: See "Default Settings" on page 329

CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO ONCE
This command optimizes the level setting of the instrument depending on the mea-
sured peak power, in order to obtain maximum instrument sensitivity.
To obtain maximum resolution, the level range is set as a function of the measured
spacing between peak power and the minimum power for the APD measurement and
of the spacing between peak power and mean power for the CCDF measurement. In
addition, the probability scale for the number of test points is adapted.
Subsequent commands have to be synchronized with *WAI, *OPC or *OPC? to the
end of the auto range process which would otherwise be aborted.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: CALC:STAT:SCAL:AUTO ONCE;*WAI
Adapts the level setting for statistical measurements.
Manual operation: See "Adjust Settings" on page 329

CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RANGe <Value>
This command defines the level range for the x-axis of the measurement diagram. The
setting is identical to the level range setting defined with the DISPlay[:
WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe] command.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Value> 10dB to 200dB
*RST: 100dB
Example: CALC:STAT:SCAL:X:RANG 20dB
Manual operation: See "x-Axis Range" on page 326

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 767

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RLEVel <Value>
This command defines the reference level for the x-axis of the measurement diagram.
The setting is identical to the reference level setting using the DISPlay[:
WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel command.
With the reference level offset <> 0 the indicated value range of the reference level is
modified by the offset.
The unit depends on the setting performed with CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Value> -120dBm to 20dBm
*RST: -20dBm
Example: CALC:STAT:SCAL:X:RLEV -60dBm
Manual operation: See "x-Axis Ref Level" on page 326

CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:LOWer <Value>
This command defines the lower limit for the y-axis of the diagram in statistical mea-
surements. Since probabilities are specified on the y-axis, the entered numeric values
are dimensionless.
Suffix: .
<n> selects the screen
Parameters:
<Value> 1E-9 to 0.1
*RST: 1E-6
Example: CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:LOW 0.001
Manual operation: See "y-Axis Min Value" on page 328

CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UNIT <Unit>
This command defines the scaling type of the y-axis.
Suffix: .
<n> selects the screen
Parameters:
<Unit> PCT | ABS
*RST: ABS
Example: CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:UNIT PCT
Sets the percentage scale.
Manual operation: See "y-Unit % / Abs" on page 329

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 768

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UPPer <Value>
This command defines the upper limit for the y-axis of the diagram in statistical mea-
surements. Since probabilities are specified on the y-axis, the entered numeric values
are dimensionless.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Value> 1E-8 to 1.0
*RST: 1.0
Example: CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:UPP 0.01
Manual operation: See "y-Axis Max Value" on page 328

10.4.1.12 Measuring in the Time Domain

The following commands configure and perform time domain power measurements.

Configuring the Measurement

The following commands control measurement configurations for measurements of the
time domain power
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AOFF................................................... 769
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage..............................................769
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MODE.................................................. 770
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd................................................. 770
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:REFerence:AUTO ONCE........................771
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary[:STATe]................................................ 771

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AOFF
This command turns all time domain power measurements off.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AOFF
Switches off the functions for power measurement in zero span.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage <State>
This command turns averaging for the active power measurement in zero span on and
off.
Averaging is reset by switching it off and on again.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 769

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

The number of results required for the calculation of average is defined with [SENSe:
]AVERage<n>:COUNt.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AVER ON
Switches on the calculation of average.
AVER:COUN 200
Sets the measurement counter to 200.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MODE <Mode>
This command selects absolute or relative power measurement in zero span.
The reference power for relative measurement is defined with CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:REFerence:AUTO ONCE. If the reference power
is not defined, the value 0 dBm is used.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Mode> ABSolute | RELative
*RST: ABSolute
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MODE REL
Switches the power measurement in zero span to relative.

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd <State>
This command turns the peak hold function for the active power measurement in zero
span on and off.
If on, the measurement results show only the maximum power that has been mea-
sured for each sweep point.
The peak hold function is reset by switching it off and on again.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 770

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PHOL ON
Switches on the function.

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:REFerence:AUTO ONCE
This command sets the currently measured average value (CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe]) and RMS value
(CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe]) as reference
values for relative measurements in zero span.
If the measurement of RMS value and average is not activated, the reference value 0
dBm is used.
If the function CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage or
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd is switched on, the cur-
rent value is the accumulated measurement value at the time considered.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:REF:AUTO ONCE
Takes the currently measured power as reference value for the
relative power measurement in zero span.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary[:STATe] <State>
This command turns time domain power measurements on and off. This measurement
in only available in zero span.
Thus one or several measurements can be first selected and then switched on and off
together using this command.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:STAT ON

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 771

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Manual operation: See "Time Domain Power (zero span)" on page 233
See "Time Domain Power" on page 305

Retrieving Measurement Results

The following commands analyze and retrieve measurement results for time domain
power measurements.
Commands useful to retrieve results described elsewhere:
● TRACe<n>:DATA on page 696
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:AVERage:RESult?.......................772
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:PHOLd:RESult?.......................... 773
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult?...................................... 773
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe]...................................... 774
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:AVERage:RESult?...................... 774
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:PHOLd:RESult?..........................775
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:RESult?..................................... 775
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe]..................................... 776
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:AVERage:RESult?......................... 776
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:PHOLd:RESult?.............................777
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:RESult?........................................ 778
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe]........................................ 778
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:AVERage:RESult?................779
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:PHOLd:RESult?................... 779
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:RESult?...............................780
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation[:STATe]...............................780

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:AVERage:RESult?
This command queries the average mean time domain power. The query is only possi-
ble if averaging has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:
FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Return values:
<MeanPower> Mean power of the signal during the measurement time.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 772

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: INIT:CONT OFF

Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN ON
Switches on the function.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AVER ON
Switches on the average value calculation.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:AVER:RES?
Outputs the result.
Usage: Query only

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:PHOLd:RESult?
This command queries the maximum mean time domain power. The query is only pos-
sible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Return values:
<MeanPower> Mean power of the signal during the measurement time.
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN ON
Switches on the function.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PHOL ON
Switches on the peak value measurement.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:PHOL:RES?
Outputs the result.
Usage: Query only

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult?
This command queries the mean time domain power.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 773

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Return values:
<MeanPower> Mean power of the signal during the measurement time.
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN ON
Switches on the function.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:RES?
Outputs the result.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Mean" on page 305

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the measurement of the mean time domain power on and off.
Note: The measurement is performed on the trace marker 1 is positioned. In order to
evaluate another trace, marker 1 must be positioned on another trace with
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN ON
Switches on the function.
Manual operation: See "Mean" on page 305

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:AVERage:RESult?
This command queries the average positive peak time domain power. The query is
only possible if averaging has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 774

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

<m> Selects the marker.

Return values:
<PeakPower> Peak power of the signal during the measurement time.
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE ON
Switches on the function.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AVER ON
Switches on the calculation of average.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:AVER:RES?
Outputs the result.
Usage: Query only

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:PHOLd:RESult?
This command queries the maximum positive peak time domain power. The query is
only possible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Return values:
<PeakPower> Peak power of the signal during the measurement time.
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE ON
Switches on the function.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PHOL ON
Switches on the measurement of the peak value.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:PHOL:RES?
Outputs the result.
Usage: Query only

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:RESult?
This command queries the positive peak time domain power.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 775

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Return values:
<PeakPower> Peak power of the signal during the measurement time.
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE ON
Switches on the function.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:RES?
Outputs the result.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Peak" on page 305

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the measurement of the positive peak time domain power on and
off.
Note: The measurement is performed on the trace marker 1 is positioned. In order to
evaluate another trace, marker 1 must be positioned on another trace with
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE ON
Switches on the function.
Manual operation: See "Peak" on page 305

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:AVERage:RESult?
This command queries the average RMS time domain power. The query is only possi-
ble if averaging has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:
FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 776

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Return values:
<RMSPower> RMS power of the signal during the measurement time.
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS ON
Switches on the function.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AVER ON
Switches on the average value calculation.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:AVER:RES?
Outputs the result.
Usage: Query only

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:PHOLd:RESult?
This command queries the maximum RMS time domain power. The query is only pos-
sible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Return values:
<RMSPower> RMS power of the signal during the measurement time.
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS ON
Switches on the function.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PHOL ON
Switches on the peak value measurement.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:PHOL:RES?
Outputs the result.
Usage: Query only

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 777

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:RESult?
This command queries the RMS time domain power.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Return values:
<RMSPower> RMS power of the signal during the measurement time.
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS ON
Switches on the function.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:RES?
Outputs the result.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "RMS" on page 305

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the measurement of the RMS time domain power on and off.
Note: The measurement is performed on the trace marker 1 is positioned. In order to
evaluate another trace, marker 1 must be positioned on another trace with
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUM:RMS ON
Switches on the function.
Manual operation: See "RMS" on page 305

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 778

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:AVERage:RESult?
This command queries the average standard deviation of the time domain power. The
query is only possible if averaging has been activated previously using
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Return values:
<StandardDeviation> Standard deviation of the signal during the measurement time.
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV ON
Switches on the function.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AVER ON
Switches on the calculation of average.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:SDEV:RES?
Outputs the result.
Usage: Query only

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:PHOLd:RESult?
This command queries the maximum standard deviation of the time domain power.
The query is only possible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Return values:
<StandardDeviation> Standard deviation of the signal during the measurement time.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 779

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: INIT:CONT OFF

Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV ON
Switches on the function.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PHOL ON
Switches on the peak value measurement.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV:PHOL:RES?
Outputs the result.
Usage: Query only

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:RESult?
This command queries the standard deviation of the time domain power.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Return values:
<StandardDeviation> Standard deviation of the signal during the measurement time.
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV ON
Switches on the function.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV:RES?
Outputs the result.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Std Dev" on page 305

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the measurement of the standard deviation of the time domain
power on and off.
Note: The measurement is performed on the trace marker 1 is positioned. In order to
evaluate another trace, marker 1 must be positioned on another trace with
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 780

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

<m> Selects the marker.

Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV ON
Switches on the measurement of the standard deviation.
Manual operation: See "Std Dev" on page 305

10.4.1.13 Measuring the Pulse Power

The commands of this subsystem are used to determine the mean burst power or peak
burst power for a given number of signal bursts, and for outputting the results in a list.
Since all the settings required for a measurement are combined in a single command,
the measurement speed is considerably higher than when using individual commands.
For measuring the signal bursts, the gated sweep function is used in zero span. The
gate is controlled either by an external trigger signal or by the video signal. An individ-
ual trigger event is required for each burst to be measured. If an external trigger signal
is used, the threshold is fixed to TTL level, while with a video signal the threshold can
be set as desired.
The following graphics shows the relation between trigger time, trigger offset (for
delayed gate opening) and measurement time.

Depending on the settings made, the measurements are performed with the RMS
detector for RMS power or the PEAK detector for peak power. For all these measure-
ments, trace 1 of the selected system is used.
The commands of this subsystem can be used in two different ways:
● Setting up the instrument and at the same time querying the result list: This method
ensures the smallest delay between measurement and the output of the measured
values, but requires the control computer to wait actively for the response of the
instrument.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 781

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

● Setting up the instrument and querying the result list after synchronization to the
end of measurement: With this method the control computer can be used for other
activities while the instrument is performing the measurement at the cost of addi-
tional time needed for synchronization via service request.
[SENSe:]MPOWer:FTYPe...............................................................................................782
[SENSe:]MPOWer:RESult[:LIST]?................................................................................... 782
[SENSe:]MPOWer:RESult:MIN?...................................................................................... 783
[SENSe:]MPOWer[:SEQuence]....................................................................................... 783

[SENSe:]MPOWer:FTYPe <FilterType>
This command selects the filter type for pulse power measurements.
Parameters:
<FilterType> NORMal | CFILter | RRC
Example: SENSe:MPOWer:FTYPe CFILter

[SENSe:]MPOWer:RESult[:LIST]?
This command queries the results of the pulse power measurement.
This command may be used to obtain measurement results in an asynchronous way,
using the service request mechanism for synchronization to the end of the measure-
ment.
If there are no results, the command returns an error.
Parameters:
<PulsePower> List of pulse powers.
The number of values depends on the number of pulses you
have been measuring.
The unit is dBm.
Example: *ESE 1
*SRE 32
Configuration of status reporting systems for the generation of
an SRQ on operation complete
SENSe:MPOWer 935.2MHz,1MHz,434us,VIDEO,50PCT,
5us,MEAN,20;*OPC
Configuring and starting the measurement
…
Further actions of the control computer during measurement
On SRQ:
Response to service request
SENSe:MPOWer:RESult?
Usage: Query only

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 782

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

[SENSe:]MPOWer:RESult:MIN?
This command queries the lowest pulse power that has been measured during a pulse
power measurement.
If there are no results, the command returns an error.
Return values:
<PulsePower> Lowest power level of the pulse power measurement.
The unit is dBm.
Example: *ESE 1
*SRE 32
Configuration of status reporting systems for the generation of
an SRQ on operation complete
SENSe:MPOWer 935.2MHz,1MHz,434us,VIDEO,50PCT,
5us,MEAN,20;*OPC
Configuring and starting the measurement
…
Further actions of the control computer during measurement
On SRQ:
Response to service request
SENSe:MPOWer:RESult:MIN?
Usage: Query only

[SENSe:]MPOWer[:SEQuence] <Frequency>, <RBW>, <MeasTime>,

<TriggerSource>, <TriggerLevel>, <TriggerOffset>, <Detector>, <#OfPulses>
This command configures and initiates the pulse power measurement.
The R&S ESR caches all measurement parameters that you can set with this com-
mand. If you use the command repeatedly, the R&S ESR only changes those settings
that you have actually changed before initiating the measurement. Thus, measurement
times are kept as low as possible.
If you synchronize the measurement with *OPC, the R&S ESR produces a service
request when all frequencies have been measured and the number of individual mea-
surements has been performed.
Note that using the command as a query initiates the measurement and returns the
results if all frequencies have been measured. For more information on querying the
results see .
To reduce the setting time, the setup is performed simultaneously for all selected
parameters.
The query adapts the instrument settings, performs the defined number of measure-
ments and outputs the measurement results list.
This measurement is not compatible with other measurements, especially as far as
marker functions, adjacent-channel measurement or statistics are concerned. The cor-
responding functions are therefore automatically switched off. In return, incompatible
commands automatically deactivate the multi burst power function.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 783

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

The function is only available in the REMOTE operation. It is deactivated on switching

back to LOCAL.
Parameters:
<Frequency> Defines the pulse frequency.
Range: 0 Hz to fmax
<RBW> Defines the resolution bandwidth.
Range: 10 Hz to 10 MHz in steps of 1, 3, 10
<MeasTime> Defines the measurement time.
Range: 1 µs to 30 s
<TriggerSource> Selects a trigger source.
EXTernal
The trigger signal is fed from the "Ext. Trigger/Gate" input on the
rear of the unit.
VIDeo
The internal video signal is used as trigger signal.
<TriggerLevel> Defines a trigger level.
The trigger level is available for the video trigger. In that case,
the level is a percentage of the diagram height.
In case of an external trigger, the R&S ESR uses a fix TTL level.
Range: 0 PCT to 100 PCT
<TriggerOffset> Defines the trigger delay. The trigger delay is the time between
the detection of the trigger signal and the start of the measure-
ment.
Range: see data sheet
<Detector> Selects the detector and therefore the way the measurement is
evaluated.
MEAN
Calculates the RMS pulse power.
PEAK
Calculates the peak pulse power.
<#OfPulses> Defines the number of pulses included in the measurement.
Range: 1 to 32001
Return values:
<PowerLevel> Pulse power level.
The result is a list of floating point values separated by commas.
The unit is dBm.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 784

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: Sample setting:

SENSe:MPOWer 935.2MHz,1MHz,434us,VIDEO,50PCT,
5us,MEAN,20
Performs a measurement sequence with the following settings:
Frequency = 935.2 MHz,
Resolution bandwidth = 1 MHz
Measurement time = 434 µs
Trigger source = VIDEO
Trigger threshold = 50 %
Trigger offset = 5 µs
Type of measurement = MEAN power
No. of measurements = 20
Sample query:
SENSe:MPOWer? 935.2MHz, 1MHz, 434us, VIDEO,
50PCT, 5us, MEAN, 20
Performs the same measurement and in addition returns the
results list immediately after completion of the last measure-
ment.
Sample result:
18.3,18.6,18.1,18.0,17.9,18.3,18.6,18.1,18.0,17.9,18.3,18.6,18.
1,18.0,17.9,18.3,18.6,18.1,18.0,17.9

10.4.1.14 Performing List Evaluations

The commands of this subsystem are used for measuring the power at a list of fre-
quency points with different device settings. The measurement is always performed in
zero span. A new trigger event is required for each test point (exception: trigger "FREE
RUN").
The results are output as a list in the order of the entered frequency points. The num-
ber of results per test point depends on the number of concurrently active measure-
ments (peak/RMS/average). The number of frequencies is limited to 200 entries.
Selection of concurrently active measurements and setting of parameters that are con-
stant for the whole measurement is performed via a configuration command ([SENSe:
]LIST:POWer:SET). This also includes the setting for trigger and gate parameters.

Settings that are not directly included in commands of this subsystem can be config-
ured by sending the corresponding commands prior to the [SENSe:]LIST:... com-
mands.
Please note that changes to the trigger level have to be executed in zero span in order
to take effect for the [SENSe:]LIST:... commands.

The commands of this subsystem can be used in two different ways:

● Instrument setup, measurement and querying of the results in a single command
line. With this method, there is the least delay between the measurement and the
result output. However, it requires the control computer to wait for the response
from the instrument.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 785

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

● Instrument setup and querying of the result list at the end of the measurement:
With this method, the control computer may be used for other activities while the
measurement is being performed. However, more time is needed for synchroniza-
tion via service request.
[SENSe:]LIST:POWer:RESult?........................................................................................786
[SENSe:]LIST:POWer[:SEQuence].................................................................................. 787
[SENSe:]LIST:POWer:SET............................................................................................. 789
[SENSe:]LIST:POWer:STATe..........................................................................................790

[SENSe:]LIST:POWer:RESult?
This command queries the results of the list evaluation.
This command may be used to obtain measurement results in an asynchronous way,
using the service request mechanism for synchronization to the end of the measure-
ment.
If there are no results, the command returns an error.
Return values:
<PowerLevel> Power level for each frequency included in the measurement.
The command returns up to 3 power levels for each frequency,
depending on the number of evaluation modes you have turned
on with [SENSe:]LIST:POWer:SET on page 789.
The result is a list of floating point values separated by commas.
The unit depends on [SENSe:]LIST:POWer[:SEQuence].
Example: *ESE 1
*SRE 32
Configuration of the status reporting system for the generation of
an SRQ on operation complete
SENSe:LIST:POWer
935.2 MHz,-20dBm,10dB,OFF,NORM,1 MHz,3 MHz,
434us,0,
935.4 MHz,-20dBm,10dB,10dB,NORM,30 kHz,100 kHz,
434us,0,
935.6 MHz,-20dBm,10dB,20dB,NORM,30 kHz,100 kHz,
434us,0;
*OPC
Configuring and starting the measurement
...
Further actions of the control computer during measurement
On SRQ:
SENSe:LIST:POWer:RESult?
Response to service request
Usage: Query only

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 786

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

[SENSe:]LIST:POWer[:SEQuence]
<Frequency>,<RefLevel>,<RfAtt>,<ElAtt>,<FilterType>,<RBW>,<VBW>,<Meas
Time>,<TriggerLevel>
This command configures and initiates the List Evaluation measurement.
The list can contain up to 200 entries (frequencies). You can define a different instru-
ment setup for each frequency that is in the list.
If you synchronize the measurement with *OPC, the R&S ESR produces a service
request when all frequencies have been measured and the number of individual mea-
surements has been performed.
To reduce the setting time, all indicated parameters are set up simultaneously at each
test point.
The measurement is performed in zero span and therefore the span is set to 0 Hz. If
the span > 0 is set, the function is automatically switched off.
The measurement is not compatible with other measurements, especially as far as
marker, adjacent channel power measurement or statistics are concerned. The corre-
sponding commands thus automatically deactivate the function.
The function is only available in REMOTE operation. It is deactivated when switching
the instrument back to LOCAL.
Note that using the command as a query initiates the measurement and returns the
results if all frequencies have been measured. For more information on querying the
results see [SENSe:]LIST:POWer:RESult? on page 786 .
The following parameters are the settings for an individual frequency point. They are
repeated for each frequency point.
Setting parameters:
<Frequency> Defines the receive frequency. Each frequency corresponds to
one list entry.
Range: 0 Hz to fmax
<RefLevel> Defines the reference level for a list entry.
Range: -130 dBm to 30 dBm
Increment: 0.01 dBm
<RfAtt> Defines the RF attenuation for a list entry.
Range: 0 dB to 70 dB
Increment: 5 dB
<FilterType> Selects the filter type for a list entry. For more information see
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE
on page 640.
<RBW> Defines the resolution bandwidth for a list entry.
For the range of values refer to "Res BW Manual" on page 370.
Refer to chapter 5.2.6.3, "Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type",
on page 375 for possible combinations of filter type and filter
bandwidth for the <filter type> = CFILter and <filter type> =
RRC.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 787

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

<VBW> Defines the video bandwidth for a list entry.

The value is ignored for <filter type> = "CFILter" or "RRC"
Range: 1 Hz to 10 MHz in 1, 3, 10 steps
<MeasTime> Defines the measurement time for a list entry.
For details refer to "Sweeptime Manual" on page 371.
Range: 1 µs to 16000 s
<TriggerLevel> The trigger level must be 0.
Return values:
<PowerLevel> Power level for each frequency included in the measurement.
The command returns up to 3 power levels for each frequency,
depending on the number of evaluation modes you have turned
on with [SENSe:]LIST:POWer:SET on page 789.
The result is a list of floating point values separated by commas.
The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer.
Example: SENSe:LIST:POWer?
935.2 MHz,0 dBm,10 dB,OFF,NORM,1 MHz,3 MHz,
440us,0,
935.4 MHz,0dBm,10dB,10dB,NORM,30 kHz,100 kHz,
440us,0,
935.6 MHz,0dBm,10dB,20dB,NORM,30 kHz,100 kHz,
440us,0
Result list:
-28.3,-30.6,-38.1
Example: SENSe:LIST:POWer:SET ON,ON,ON,IMM,POS,0,0
Activates the power measurement of the peak, RMS and aver-
age values.
SENSe:LIST:POWer?
935.2 MHz,0dBm,10dB,OFF,NORM,1 MHz,3 MHz,440us,
0,
935.4 MHz,0dBm,10dB,10dB,NORM,30 kHz,100 kHz,
440us,0,
935.6 MHz,0dBm,10dB,20dB,NORM,30 kHz,100 kHz,
440us,0
Result list (3 results per frequency point):
-28.3, -29.6, 1.5, -30.6, -31.9, 0.9, -38.1, -40.0, 2.3

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 788

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: SENSe:LIST:POWer
935.2 MHz,0dBm,10dB,OFF,NORM,1 MHz,3 MHz,440us,
0,
935.4 MHz,0dBm,10dB,10dB,CFIL,30 kHz,100 kHz,
440us,0,
935.6 MHz,0dBm,10dB,20dB,CFIL,30 kHz,100 kHz,
440us,0
Performs a measurement sequence with the settings described
in table 10-19.
SENSe:LIST:POWer?
935.2 MHz,0dBm,10dB,OFF,NORM,1 MHz,3 MHz,440us,
0,
935.4 MHz,0dBm,10dB,10dB,CFIL,30 kHz,100 kHz,
440us,0,
935.6 MHz,0dBm,10dB,20dB,CFIL,30 kHz,100 kHz,
440us,0
Performs the same measurement and returns the result list
immediately after the last frequency point.
Table 10-19: Settings for power list example

Step Freq. Ref RF Att el Att Filter RBW VBW Meas TRG
Level type Time Level
[MHz] [dB] [dB]
(reserve
[dBm] [us]
d)

1 935.2 0 10 OFF Normal 1 MHz 3 MHz 440 0

2 935.4 0 10 10 Channel 30 kHz 100 kHz 440 0

3 935.6 0 10 20 Channel 30 kHz 100 kHz 440 0

[SENSe:]LIST:POWer:SET
<PeakPower>,<RMSPower>,<AVGPower>,<TriggerSource>,<TriggerSlope>,<T
riggerOffset>,<GateLength>
This command defines global List Evaluation parameters.
These parameters are valid for every frequency you want to measure.
The state of the first three parameters (<PeakPower>, <RMSPower> and <AVG-
Power>) define the number of results for each frequency in the list.
Note that you have to set the trigger level after sending this command.
Parameters:
<PeakPower> ON | OFF
Turns peak power evaluation on and off.
*RST: ON
<RMSPower> ON | OFF
Turns RMS power evaluation on and off.
*RST: OFF

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 789

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

<AVGPower> ON | OFF
Turns average power evaluation on and off.
*RST: OFF
<TriggerSource> IMMediate | EXTernal | VIDeo | IFPower | RFPower
Selects a trigger source.
For more information see "Trg/Gate Source" on page 384.
*RST: IMM
<TriggerSlope> NEGative | POSitive
Selects the trigger slope.
*RST: POS
<TriggerOffset> Defines the trigger delay. The trigger delay is the time between
the detection of the trigger signal and the start of the measure-
ment at the next frequency point.
Range: span = 0 Hz: (-sweep time) to 30 s; span > 10 Hz:
31.25 ns to 30 s
*RST: 0s
<GateLength> Defines the gate length for gated measurements.
Setting 0 seconds turns gated measurements off. Other values
activate the gated trigger function.
To perform gated measurements, the trigger source must be dif-
ferent from IMMediate.
Range: 31.25 ns to 30 s
*RST: 0s
Example: SENSe:LIST:POWer:SET ON,OFF,OFF,EXT,POS,10US,
434US

[SENSe:]LIST:POWer:STATe <State>
This command turns the List Evaluation off.
Parameters:
<State> OFF
Example: SENS:LIST:POW:STAT OFF

10.4.1.15 Probe Configuration

PROBe:ID:PARTnumber?...............................................................................................791
PROBe:ID:SRNumber?.................................................................................................. 791
PROBe:SETup:MODE....................................................................................................791
PROBe:SETup:NAME?.................................................................................................. 791
PROBe:SETup:STATe?..................................................................................................791
PROBe[:STATe]............................................................................................................ 792

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 790

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

PROBe:ID:PARTnumber?
This command returns the material part number of the connected probe.
Example: PROB:ID:PART?
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Part number" on page 396

PROBe:ID:SRNumber?
This command returns the serial number of the connected probe.
Example: PROB:ID:SRN?
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Serial Number" on page 396

PROBe:SETup:MODE <Mode>
This command defines which action is taken when the probe's micro button is pressed.
Parameters:
<Mode> RSINgle
A single sweep is performed.
NOACtion
No action is taken.
*RST: OFF
Example: PROB:SET:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Probe Config" on page 393
See "Micro Button Action" on page 396

PROBe:SETup:NAME?
This command returns the name of the connected probe.
Example: PROB:SET:NAME?
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Name" on page 396

PROBe:SETup:STATe?
This command queries whether a probe is connected to the instrument's RF INPUT
and USB connectors and was recognized by the R&S ESR.
Example: PROB:SET:STAT ON
Usage: Query only

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 791

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

PROBe[:STATe] <State>
This command activates a connected probe. Use this command to switch off the probe
and measure the digital input without considering the transducer factor of the probe.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: PROB:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Probe Config" on page 393
See "State" on page 396

10.4.2 Configuring Spectrum Measurements

● Frequency Settings............................................................................................... 792

● Automatic Measurement Configuration.................................................................797
● Bandwidth Settings............................................................................................... 800
● Sweep Configuration.............................................................................................803
● Trigger Configuration............................................................................................ 806
● Vertical Axis Configuration.................................................................................... 813

10.4.2.1 Frequency Settings

The following commands select the frequency characteristics the R&S ESR uses for
the measurement.

Defining Frequency Characteristics

Commands useful to define the frequency described elsewhere:
● [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP on page 634
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer.........................................................................................792
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO..................................................................... 793
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK....................................................................... 793
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor........................................................... 794
[SENSe:]FREQuency:MODE...........................................................................................794
[SENSe:]FREQuency:OFFSet......................................................................................... 794
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt...........................................................................................795
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP............................................................................................795
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN............................................................................................795
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL...................................................................................795

[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer <Frequency>
This command defines the center frequency (frequency domain) or measuring fre-
quency (time domain).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 792

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Parameters:
<Frequency> Range: 0 to fmax
*RST: fmax/2
Default unit: Hz
fmax is specified in the data sheet. min span is 10 Hz
(SEM and Spurious: min span = 20 Hz)
Example: FREQ:CENT 100 MHz
Manual operation: See "Center" on page 354

[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO <State>
This command couples the step size of the center frequency to the span (ON) or sets
the value of the center frequency entered via [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer (OFF).
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO ON
Activates the coupling of the step size to the span.

[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK <CouplingType>
This command couples and decouples the center frequency step size to the span or
the resolution bandwidth.
Parameters:
<CouplingType> SPAN
Couples the step size to the span. Available for measurements
in the frequency domain.
RBW
Couples the step size to the resolution bandwidth. Available for
measurements in the time domain.
OFF
Decouples the step size (manual input).
*RST: SPAN
Example: FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK SPAN
Manual operation: See "0.1*Span (span > 0)" on page 354
See "0.1*RBW (span > 0)" on page 354
See "0.5*Span (span > 0)" on page 355
See "0.5*RBW (span > 0)" on page 355
See "x*Span (span > 0)" on page 355
See "x*RBW (span > 0)" on page 355

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 793

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor <Factor>
This command defines a step size factor if the center frequency step size is coupled to
the span or the resolution bandwidth.
Parameters:
<Factor> Range: 1 to 100
*RST: 10
Default unit: PCT
Example: FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 20PCT
Manual operation: See "0.1*Span (span > 0)" on page 354
See "0.1*RBW (span > 0)" on page 354
See "0.5*Span (span > 0)" on page 355
See "0.5*RBW (span > 0)" on page 355

[SENSe:]FREQuency:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the frequency mode.
between span > 0 and zero span in the "Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Mode> CW
Selects the time domain (span = 0).
In the time domain, define the measurement frequency with
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer.
FIXed
Selects the time domain (span = 0).
In the time domain, define the measurement frequency with
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer.
SWEep
Selects the frequency domain (span > 0).
In the frequency domain, define the frequency characteristics
with the following commands:
• [SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt
• [SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP
• [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN
• [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer
*RST: SWEep
Example: FREQ:MODE SWE
Selects the frequency domain.
Usage: SCPI confirmed

[SENSe:]FREQuency:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines the frequency offset.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 794

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Parameters:
<Offset> Range: -100 GHz to 100 GHz
*RST: 0 Hz
Default unit: Hz
Example: FREQ:OFFS 1GHZ
Manual operation: See "Frequency Offset" on page 356

[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt <Frequency>
This command defines the start frequency for measurements in the frequency domain.
Parameters:
<Frequency> 0 to (fmax - min span)
*RST: 0
Example: FREQ:STAR 20MHz
Manual operation: See "Start" on page 356

[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP <Frequency>
This command defines the stop frequency for measurements in the frequency domain.
Parameters:
<Frequency> min span to fmax
*RST: fmax
Example: FREQ:STOP 2000 MHz
Manual operation: See "Stop" on page 356

[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN <Span>
This command defines the frequency span.
Parameters:
<Span> *RST: fmax
Example: FREQ:SPAN 10MHz
Manual operation: See "IF Span Manual" on page 189
See "Span Manual" on page 359
See "Zero Span" on page 359

[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL
This command sets the frequency span to its maximum.
Example: FREQ:SPAN:FULL
Manual operation: See "Full Span" on page 189

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 795

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Tracking Signals
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:BANDwidth|BWIDth.................................. 796
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe]................................................... 796
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:THReshold...............................................797
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:TRACe.................................................... 797

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:BANDwidth|BWIDth <Bandwidth>
This command defines the bandwidth around the center frequency that is included in
the signal tracking process.
Note that you have to turn on signal tracking before you can use the command
(CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe]).
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> 10 Hz to MAX (span)
*RST: (= span/10 on activating the function)
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:STR:BAND 1 MHZ
Sets the search bandwidth to 1 MHz.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:STR:BWID 1 MHZ
Alternative command for the same function.
Manual operation: See "Track BW (span > 0)" on page 357

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe] <State>
This command turns signal tracking on and off.
When signal tracking is on, the R&S ESR determines the maximum signal after each
frequency sweep. The center frequency is then set to the frequency of this signal.
Thus, the center frequency follows the frequency when you measure drifting signals.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:STR ON
Switches on the signal track function.
Manual operation: See "Track On/Off (span > 0)" on page 357

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 796

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:THReshold <Level>
This command defines a threshold above which the signal is tracked.
Note that you have to turn on signal tracking before you can use the command
(CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe]).
The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<Level> Range: -130 dBm to 30 dBm
*RST: -120 dBm
Default unit: dBm
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:STR:THR -50DBM
Sets the threshold for signal tracking to -50 dBm.
Manual operation: See "Track Threshold (span > 0)" on page 357

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:TRACe <TraceNumber>
This command defines the trace on which the signal is tracked.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<TraceNumber> Range: 1 to 6
*RST: 1
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:STR:TRAC 3
Defines trace 3 as the trace for signal tracking.
Manual operation: See "Select Trace (span > 0)" on page 357

10.4.2.2 Automatic Measurement Configuration

The following commands initiate and perform automatic test routines to configure the
current measurement.
[SENSe:]ADJust:ALL......................................................................................................798
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:LOWer.........................................................798
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:UPPer......................................................... 798
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation...................................................................798
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation:MODE........................................................ 799
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:TRIG...................................................................................799
[SENSe:]ADJust:FREQuency.......................................................................................... 799
[SENSe:]ADJust:LEVel................................................................................................... 800

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 797

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

[SENSe:]ADJust:ALL
This command determines the ideal frequency and level configuration for the current
measurement.
Example: ADJ:ALL
Manual operation: See "Auto All" on page 367

[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:LOWer <Threshold>
This command defines a lower threshold the signal must drop below before the refer-
ence level is automatically adjusted when the "Auto Level" function is performed.
For more information see [SENSe:]ADJust:LEVel).
Parameters:
<Threshold> Range: 0 to 200
*RST: +1 dB
Default unit: dB
Example: SENS:ADJ:CONF:HYST:LOW 2
Example: For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm, the reference level
will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm.
Manual operation: See "Lower Level Hysteresis" on page 368

[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:UPPer <Threshold>
This command defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed before the reference
level is automatically adjusted when the "Auto Level" function is performed.
For more information see [SENSe:]ADJust:LEVel).
Parameters:
<Threshold> Range: 0 to 200
*RST: +1 dB
Default unit: dB
Example: SENS:ADJ:CONF:HYST:UPP 2
For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm, the reference level
will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm.
Manual operation: See "Upper Level Hysteresis" on page 368

[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation <Duration>
This command defines the duration of the level measurement used to determine the
optimal reference level automatically (for SENS:ADJ:LEV ON).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 798

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Parameters:
<Duration> <numeric value> in seconds
Range: 0.001 to 16000.0
*RST: 0.001
Default unit: s
Example: ADJ:CONF:LEV:DUR:5
Manual operation: See "Meas Time Manual" on page 367

[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the way the R&S ESR determines the length of the measure-
ment that is performed while determining the ideal reference level.
Parameters:
<Mode> AUTO
Automatically determines the measurement length.
MANual
Manual definition of the measurement length.
*RST: AUTO
Example: ADJ:CONF:LEV:DUR:MODE MAN
Specifies manual definition of the measurement duration.
ADJ:CONF:LEV:DUR:5
Specifies the duration manually.

[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:TRIG <State>
This command defines the behaviour of the measurement when adjusting a setting
automatically (using SENS:ADJ:LEV ON, for example).
For more information see "Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measure-
ments" on page 366.
Parameters:
<State> ON
The measurement for automatic adjustment waits for the trigger.
OFF
The measurement for automatic adjustment is performed imme-
diately, without waiting for a trigger.
*RST: ON
Example: ADJ:CONF:TRIG OFF

[SENSe:]ADJust:FREQuency
This command defines the center frequency and the reference level automatically by
determining the highest level in the frequency span.
Example: ADJ:FREQ

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 799

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Manual operation: See "Auto Freq" on page 367

[SENSe:]ADJust:LEVel
This command automatically sets the optimal reference level for the current measure-
ment.
You can define a threshold that the signal must exceed before the reference level is
adjusted, see [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:UPPer and
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:LOWer.
Example: ADJ:LEV
Manual operation: See "Auto Level" on page 367

10.4.2.3 Bandwidth Settings

The following commands select the measurement filter bandwidths and characteristics.

Selecting the Resolution Bandwidth

Commands useful to configure the RBW described elsewhere:
● [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] on page 639
● [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE on page 640
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO..............................................................800
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:FFT.................................................................801
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio..............................................................801

[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO <State>
This command couples and decouples the resolution bandwidth to the span.
The automatic coupling adapts the resolution bandwidth to the current frequency span
according to the relationship between frequency span and resolution bandwidth.
Use [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio to define the ratio
RBW/span.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: BAND:AUTO OFF
Switches off the coupling of the resolution bandwidth to the
span.
Manual operation: See "Res BW Manual" on page 370
See "Res BW Auto" on page 370
See "Default Coupling" on page 375

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 800

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:FFT <FilterMode>
This command defines the filter mode of FFT filters by defining the partial span size.
The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis.
This command is only available for sweep type "FFT".
Parameters:
<FilterMode> AUTO
The firmware determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to
obtain the best measurement results.
NARRow
The FFT filters with the smaller partial span are used. This
allows you to perform measurements near a carrier with a
reduced reference level due to a narrower analog prefilter.
*RST: AUTO
Example: BAND:TYPE FFT
Select FFT filter.
Example: BAND:FFT NARR
Select narrow partial span for FFT filter.
Manual operation: See "Auto" on page 369
See "Narrow" on page 369

[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio <Ratio>
This command defines the ratio between the resolution bandwidth (Hz) and the span
(Hz).
Note that the ratio defined with the remote command (RBW/span) is reciprocal to that
of the manual operation (span/RBW).
Parameters:
<Ratio> Range: 0.0001 to 1
*RST: 0.01
Example: BAND:RAT 0.01
Manual operation: See "Span/RBW Manual" on page 374

Selecting the Video Bandwidth

[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo................................................................................ 801
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO.......................................................................802
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio.......................................................................802
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:TYPE....................................................................... 802

[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo <Bandwidth>
This command defines the video bandwidth. The available video bandwidths are speci-
fied in the data sheet.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 801

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Parameters:
<Bandwidth> refer to data sheet
*RST: (AUTO is set to ON)
Example: BAND:VID 10 kHz
Manual operation: See "Video BW Manual" on page 371

[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO <State>
This command couples and decouples the VBW to the RBW.
Use [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio to define the ratio VBW/RBW.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: BAND:VID:AUTO OFF
Manual operation: See "Video BW Manual" on page 371
See "Video BW Auto" on page 371
See "Default Coupling" on page 375

[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio <Ratio>
This command defines the ratio between video bandwidth (Hz) and resolution band-
width (Hz).
Note that the ratio defined with the remote command (VBW/RBW) is reciprocal to that
of the manual operation (RBW/VBW).
Parameters:
<Ratio> Range: 0.01 to 1000
*RST: 3
Example: BAND:VID:RAT 3
Sets the coupling of video bandwidth to video bandwidth =
3*resolution bandwidth
Manual operation: See "RBW/VBW Sine [1/1]" on page 373
See "RBW/VBW Pulse [.1]" on page 373
See "RBW/VBW Noise [10]" on page 374
See "RBW/VBW Manual" on page 374
See "Span/RBW Auto [100]" on page 374

[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:TYPE <Mode>
This command selects the position of the video filter in the signal path.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 802

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Parameters:
<Mode> LINear
The video filter is applied in front of the logarithmic amplifier.
In linear mode, measurements with a logarithmic level scale
result in flatter falling edges compared to logarithmic mode. The
reason is the conversion of linear power values into logarithmic
level values: if you halve the linear power, the logarithmic level
decreases by 3 dB.
LOGarithmic
The video filter is applied after the logarithmic amplifier.
*RST: LINear
Example: BAND:VID:TYPE LIN
Video filter ahead of the logarithmic amplifier

10.4.2.4 Sweep Configuration

Commands useful to configure the sweep described elsewhere:

● ABORt on page 608
● INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] on page 610
● INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 609
INITiate<n>:CONMeas................................................................................................... 803
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt.................................................................................................804
[SENSe:]SWEep:POINts.................................................................................................804
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME................................................................................................... 805
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO......................................................................................... 805
[SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE...................................................................................................805
[SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE:USED?.......................................................................................806

INITiate<n>:CONMeas
This command restarts a measurement that has been stopped in single sweep mode.
The measurement is restarted at the first sweep point.
As opposed to INITiate<n>[:IMMediate], this command does not reset traces in
maxhold, minhold or average mode. Therefore it can be used to continue measure-
ments using max hold or averaging functions.
In single sweep mode, you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with *OPC,
*OPC? or *WAI. In continuous sweep mode, synchronization to the end of the mea-
surement is not possible. Thus, it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep
mode in remote control, as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a sin-
gle sweep end synchronization.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 803

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: INIT:CONT OFF

Switches to single sweep mode.
DISP:WIND:TRAC:MODE AVER
Switches on trace averaging.
SWE:COUN 20
Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps.
INIT;*WAI
Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps.
INIT:CONM;*WAI
Continues the measurement (next 20 sequences) and waits for
the end.
Manual operation: See "Continue Single Sweep" on page 379

[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt <NumberSweeps>
This command defines the number of sweeps started with single sweep, which are
used for calculating the average or maximum value. If the values 0 or 1 are set, one
sweep is performed.
Parameters:
<NumberSweeps> 0 to 32767
*RST: 0 (GSM: 200, PHN:1)
Example: SWE:COUN 64
Sets the number of sweeps to 64.
INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for its end.
Manual operation: See "Sweep Count" on page 381

[SENSe:]SWEep:POINts <NumberPoints>
This command defines the number of measurement points to be collected during one
sweep.
Note: For Spurious Emissions measurements the maximum number of sweep points in
all ranges is limited to 100001.
Parameters:
<NumberPoints> Range: 101 to 32001
*RST: 691
Example: SWE:POIN 251
Manual operation: See "Sweep Points" on page 311
See "Sweep Points" on page 382

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 804

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME <Time>
This command defines the sweep time.
The range depends on the frequency span.
If this command is used in "Spectrum" mode, automatic coupling to resolution band-
width and video bandwidth is switched off.
Parameters:
<Time> refer to data sheet
*RST: (automatic)
Example: SWE:TIME 10s
Manual operation: See "Sweep Time" on page 252
See "Sweeptime Manual" on page 371
See "Meas Time" on page 470

[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO <State>
In realtime mode, this command automatically sets the sweep time to 32 ms.
In analyzer mode, this command controls the automatic coupling of the sweep time to
the frequency span and bandwidth settings. If [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME is used, auto-
matic coupling is switched off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: SWE:TIME:AUTO ON
Activates automatic sweep time.
Manual operation: See "Sweeptime Manual" on page 371
See "Sweeptime Auto" on page 372
See "Default Coupling" on page 375

[SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE <Type>
This command selects the sweep type.
Parameters:
<Type> SWE
Selects analog frequency sweeps.
AUTO
Automatically selects the sweep type (FFT or analog frequency
sweep).
FFT
Selects FFT sweeps.
*RST: AUTO

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 805

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: SWE:TYPE FFT

Selects FFT sweeps.
Manual operation: See "Sweep" on page 368
See "FFT" on page 368
See "Auto" on page 368

[SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE:USED?
This command queries the sweep type if you have turned on automatic selection of the
sweep type.
Return values:
<Type> SWE | FFT
SWE
Normal sweep
FFT
FFT mode
*RST: SWE
Example: SWE:TYPE:USED?
Usage: Query only

10.4.2.5 Trigger Configuration

The following commands configure triggered or gated measurements.

Triggering Measurements
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME]........................................................................ 806
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HOLDoff..................................................................... 807
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HYSTeresis.................................................................807
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal]...................................................................... 807
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower......................................................................... 808
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:RFPower........................................................................ 808
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo............................................................................ 808
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe.....................................................................................809
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce.................................................................................. 809
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:TIME:RINTerval........................................................................810

TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME] <Delay>
This command defines the length of the trigger delay.
A negative delay time (pretrigger) can be set in zero span only.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 806

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Parameters:
<Delay> Range: zero span: -sweeptime (see data sheet) to 30 s;
span: 0 to 30 s
*RST: 0s
Example: TRIG:HOLD 500us
Manual operation: See "Trigger Offset" on page 387

TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HOLDoff <Value>
This command sets the holding time before the next IF power trigger event.
Note: Using gating with gate mode "level" (see TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:TYPE
on page 867) and an IFP trigger (see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower
on page 808), the holdoff time for the IFP trigger is ignored for frequency sweep, FFT
sweep, zero span and IQ mode measurements.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Value> *RST: 150 ns
Example: TRIG:SOUR IFP
Sets the IF power trigger source.
TRIG:IFP:HOLD 200 ns
Sets the holding time to 200 ns.
Manual operation: See "Trigger Holdoff" on page 388

TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HYSTeresis <Value>
This command sets the limit that the hysteresis value for the IF power trigger has to fall
below in order to trigger the next measurement.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Value> *RST: 3 dB
Example: TRIG:SOUR IFP
Sets the IF power trigger source.
TRIG:IFP:HYST 10DB
Sets the hysteresis limit value.
Manual operation: See "Trigger Hysteresis" on page 388

TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal] <TriggerLevel>
This command sets the level of the external trigger source in Volt.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 807

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<TriggerLevel> Range: 0.5 V to 3.5 V
*RST: 1.4 V
Example: TRIG:LEV 2V

TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower <TriggerLevel>
This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be
exceeded to cause a trigger event. Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is
considered when the trigger level is analyzed. If defined, a reference level offset is also
considered.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<TriggerLevel> *RST: -20 dBm
Example: TRIG:LEV:IFP -30DBM
Manual operation: See "Trg/Gate Level" on page 386
See "Trigger Level" on page 480

TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:RFPower <TriggerLevel>
This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be
exceeded to cause a trigger event. Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is
considered when the trigger level is analyzed. If defined, a reference level offset is also
considered.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<TriggerLevel> *RST: -20 dBm
Example: TRIG:LEV:RFP -30dBm

TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo <Value>
This command sets the level of the video trigger source.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Value> 0 to 100 PCT
*RST: 50 PCT
Example: TRIG:LEV:VID 50PCT

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 808

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Manual operation: See "Video" on page 195

See "Trg/Gate Level" on page 386
See "Trigger Level" on page 480

TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe <Type>
This command selects the slope of the trigger signal. The selected trigger slope
applies to all trigger signal sources.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Type> POSitive | NEGative
*RST: POSitive
Example: TRIG:SLOP NEG
Manual operation: See "Trigger Polarity" on page 196
See "Trg/Gate Polarity" on page 387
See "Trigger Polarity" on page 481

TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce <Source>
This command selects the trigger source.
Note: Using gating with gate mode "level" ( TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:TYPE
on page 867/[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE) and an IFP trigger, the holdoff time for
the IFP trigger (see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME] on page 806) is
ignored for frequency sweep, FFT sweep, zero span and IQ mode measurements.
When triggering or gating is activated, the squelch function is automatically disabled
(see [SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe]).
For details on trigger modes refer to "Trg/Gate Source" on page 384.
For details on trigger modes refer to the "Trg/Gate Source" softkey in the base unit
description.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 809

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Parameters:
<Source> Note that the availability of the trigger source depends on the
measurement you are in.
EXTernal
Selects an external trigger.
IFPower
Selects the trigger on the second intermediate frequency.
IMMediate
Selects the free run mode (= no trigger).
MASK
Selects the frequency mask trigger.
TDTRigger
Selects the time domain trigger.
TIME
Selects the time trigger.
VIDeo
Selects the video trigger. The video trigger is available for time
domain measurements.
*RST: IMMediate
Example: TRIG:SOUR EXT
Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal
Manual operation: See "External" on page 195
See "Free Run" on page 195
See "Video" on page 195
See "Trg/Gate Source" on page 384
See "Free Run" on page 385
See "External" on page 385
See "Video" on page 385
See "RF Power" on page 385
See "IF Power/BB Power" on page 386
See "Time" on page 386

TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:TIME:RINTerval <Interval>
This command sets the repetition interval for the time trigger source.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Interval> 2.0 ms to 5000
*RST: 1.0
Example: TRIG:SOUR TIME
Selects the time trigger input for triggering.
TRIG:TIME:RINT 50
The sweep starts every 50 s.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 810

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Mode: All
Manual operation: See "Repetition Interval" on page 387

Gated Measurements
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe................................................................................................ 811
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff................................................................................... 811
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth.................................................................................... 812
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity................................................................................... 812
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce...................................................................................812
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE....................................................................................... 813

[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe <State>
This command switches on/off the sweep control by an external gate signal. If the
external gate is selected the trigger source is automatically switched to EXTernal as
well.
In case of measurement with external gate, the measured values are recorded as long
as the gate is opened. During a sweep the gate can be opened and closed several
times. The synchronization mechanisms with *OPC, *OPC? and *WAI remain com-
pletely unaffected.
The sweep end is detected when the required number of measurement points (691 in
"Spectrum" mode) has been recorded.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: SWE:EGAT ON
Switches on the external gate mode.
SWE:EGAT:TYPE EDGE
Switches on the edge-triggered mode.
SWE:EGAT:HOLD 100US
Sets the gate delay to 100 µs.
SWE:EGAT:LEN 500US
Sets the gate opening time to 500 µs.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for its end.
Manual operation: See "Gated Trigger (On/Off)" on page 329
See "Gate Ranges" on page 329
See "Gated Trigger" on page 388

[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff <DelayTime>
This command defines the delay time between the external gate signal and the contin-
uation of the sweep.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 811

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Note: Using gate mode "level" (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE on page 813)

and an IFP trigger (see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 809), the hold-
off time for the IFP trigger is ignored for frequency sweep, FFT sweep, zero span and
IQ mode measurements.
Parameters:
<DelayTime> 0 s to 30 s
*RST: 0s
Example: SWE:EGAT:HOLD 100us
Manual operation: See "Gate Delay" on page 389

[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth <TimeInterval>
This command defines a gate length.
Parameters:
<TimeInterval> 125 ns to 30 s
*RST: 400μs
Example: SWE:EGAT:LENG 10ms
Manual operation: See "Gate Length (Gate Mode Edge)" on page 389

[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity <Polarity>
This command determines the polarity of the external gate signal. The setting applies
both to the edge of an edge-triggered signal and the level of a level-triggered signal.
Parameters:
<Polarity> POSitive | NEGative
*RST: POSitive
Example: SWE:EGAT:POL POS
Manual operation: See "Trg/Gate Polarity" on page 387
See "Trigger Polarity" on page 481

[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce <Source>
This command selects the signal source for gated measurements.
If an IF power signal is used, the gate is opened as soon as a signal at > -20 dBm is
detected within the IF path bandwidth (10 MHz).
For details see the "Trg/Gate Source" on page 384 softkey.
Parameters:
<Source> EXTernal | IFPower | VIDeo | RFPower | PSEN
*RST: IFPower
Example: SWE:EGAT:SOUR IFP
Switches the gate source to IF power.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 812

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Manual operation: See "Gated Trigger (On/Off)" on page 329

See "Trg/Gate Source" on page 384
See "External" on page 385
See "Video" on page 385
See "RF Power" on page 385
See "IF Power/BB Power" on page 386
See "Gated Trigger" on page 388

[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE <Type>
This command sets the type of triggering by the external gate signal.
A delay between applying the gate signal and the start of recording measured values
can be defined, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff on page 811.
Parameters:
<Type> LEVel | EDGE
LEVel
The gate is level-triggered:
After detection of the gate signal, the gate remains open until the
gate signal disappears. The gate opening time cannot be
defined with the command [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff.
Note: Using gating with gate mode "level" and an IFP trigger
(see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 809), the
holdoff time for the IFP trigger is ignored for frequency sweep,
FFT sweep, zero span and IQ mode measurements.
EDGE
The gate is edge-triggered:
After detection of the set gate signal edge, the gate remains
open until the gate delay ([SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff)
has expired.
*RST: EDGE
Example: SWE:EGAT:TYPE EDGE
Manual operation: See "Gate Mode (Lvl/Edge)" on page 388

10.4.2.6 Vertical Axis Configuration

The following commands configure the characteristics of the vertical diagram axis.
Commands useful to configure the vertical axis described elsewhere:
● DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing on page 637
● INPut:ATTenuation on page 637
● INPut:COUPling on page 641
● INPut:GAIN:STATe on page 638
● INPut:IMPedance on page 639

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 813

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer........................................................................................... 814
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]................................................................... 814
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:MODE.........................................................815
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel....................................................... 815
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet........................................... 815
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition................................................... 816
INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO...............................................................................................816
UNIT<n>:POWer............................................................................................................816

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe] <Range>
This command defines the display range of the y-axis with logarithmic scaling.
The command works only for a logarithmic scaling. You can select the scaling with
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing on page 637.
Suffix: .
<n> window; For applications that do not have more than 1 measure-
ment window, the suffix <n> is irrelevant.
<t> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Range> Range: 10 to 200
*RST: 100
Default unit: dB
Example: DISP:TRAC:Y 110dB
Manual operation: See "Grid Range / Grid Min Level" on page 192
See "Range Log 100 dB" on page 326
See "Range Log 50 dB" on page 327
See "Range Log 10 dB" on page 327
See "Range Log 5 dB" on page 327
See "Range Log 1 dB" on page 327
See "Range Log Manual" on page 328

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 814

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the type of scaling of the y-axis.
When SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate is turned off, this command has no immediate
effect on the screen.
Suffix: .
<n> window; For applications that do not have more than 1 measure-
ment window, the suffix <n> is irrelevant.
<t> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Mode> ABSolute
absolute scaling of the y-axis
RELative
relative scaling of the y-axis
*RST: ABS
Example: DISP:TRAC:Y:MODE REL
Manual operation: See "Grid Abs/Rel " on page 364

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <ReferenceLevel>
This command defines the reference level.
With the reference level offset ≠ 0, the value range of the reference level is modified by
the offset.
The unit depends on the setting defined with CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant.
<t> irrelevant
Parameters:
<ReferenceLevel> The unit is variable.
Range: see datasheet
*RST: -10dBm
Example: DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV -60dBm
Manual operation: See "Ref Level" on page 361

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <Value>
This command defines a reference level offset.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant.
<t> irrelevant

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 815

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Parameters:
<Value> Range: -200 to 200
*RST: 0
Default unit: dB
Example: DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV:OFFS -10dB
Manual operation: See "Ref Level Offset" on page 364

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition <Position>
This command defines the position of the reference level on the display grid..
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<t> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Position> 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border, 100% corre-
sponds to the upper display border.
Range: 0 to 100
*RST: 100 PCT = frequency domain, 50 PCT = time
domain
Default unit: PCT
Example: DISP:TRAC:Y:RPOS 50PCT
Manual operation: See "Ref Level Position" on page 364
See "Reference Value Position" on page 487

INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO <State>
This command automatically couples the input attenuation to the reference level (state
ON) or switches the input attenuation to manual entry (state OFF).
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: INP:ATT:AUTO ON
Couples the attenuation set on the attenuator to the reference
level.
Manual operation: See "RF Atten Auto" on page 363

UNIT<n>:POWer <Unit>
This command selects the default unit.
The unit is the same for al measurementl windows.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 816

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

10.4.3 Analyzing Spectrum Measurements

● Trace Configuration...............................................................................................817
● Spectrogram..........................................................................................................826
● Limit Lines.............................................................................................................830
● Markers................................................................................................................. 831

10.4.3.1 Trace Configuration

Commands to configure trace described elsewhere:

● DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE on page 652

Commands exclusive in spectrum mode

CALCulate<n>:MATH[:EXPression][:DEFine]....................................................................817
CALCulate<n>:MATH:MODE.......................................................................................... 818
CALCulate<n>:MATH:POSition....................................................................................... 818
CALCulate<n>:MATH:STATe.......................................................................................... 819
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE:HCONtinuous....................................................819
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe].......................................................................820
FORMat[:DATA].............................................................................................................820
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator........................................................................................ 820
MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe.........................................................................................821
[SENSe:]AVERage<n>:COUNt........................................................................................821
[SENSe:]AVERage<n>[:STATe<Trace>].......................................................................... 822
[SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE..........................................................................................822
[SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]..............................................................823
[SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]:AUTO.................................................... 823
TRACe<n>:COPY.......................................................................................................... 824
TRACe<n>:DATA...........................................................................................................824
TRACe<n>[:DATA]:MEMory?.......................................................................................... 825
TRACe<n>[:DATA]:X?....................................................................................................826

CALCulate<n>:MATH[:EXPression][:DEFine] <Expression>
This command defines the mathematical expression for relating traces to trace1.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 817

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Parameters:
<Expression> (TRACe1-TRACe2) | (TRACe1-TRACe3) | (TRACe1-TRACe4) |
(TRACe1-TRACe5) | (TRACe1-TRACe6)
(TRACe1-TRACe2)
Subtracts trace 2 from trace 1.
(TRACe1-TRACe3)
Subtracts trace 3 from trace 1.
(TRACe1-TRACe4)
Subtracts trace 4 from trace 1.
(TRACe1-TRACe5)
Subtracts trace 5 from trace 1.
(TRACe1-TRACe6)
Subtracts trace 6 from trace 1.
Example: CALC1:MATH (TRACe1 – TRACe2)
Selects the subtraction of trace 2 from trace 1.
Manual operation: See "Trace Math" on page 403

CALCulate<n>:MATH:MODE <Method>
This command selects the method for the trace math calculations.
For details see "Trace Math Mode" on page 404.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Method> LINear | LOGarithmic | POWer
*RST: LOG
Example: CALC:MATH:MODE LIN
Selects linear averaging for trace math calculations.
Manual operation: See "Lin" on page 404
See "Log" on page 404
See "Power" on page 404

CALCulate<n>:MATH:POSition <Position>
This command defines the position of the result of the trace mathematics. The indica-
tion is in % of the screen height, with 100 % corresponding to the upper diagram bor-
der.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<Position> -100PCT to 200PCT
*RST: 50PCT

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 818

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: CALC:MATH:POS 50PCT

Sets the position to the horizontal diagram center.
Manual operation: See "Trace Math Position" on page 404

CALCulate<n>:MATH:STATe <State>
This command switches the mathematical relation of traces on or off.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MATH:STAT ON
Switches on the trace mathematics.
Manual operation: See "Trace Math" on page 403
See "Trace Math Off" on page 404

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE:HCONtinuous <State>
This command defines whether traces in Min Hold, Max Hold and Average mode (see
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE on page 652) are reset after a parameter
is changed.
Normally, the measurement is started anew after parameter changes, before the mea-
surement results are evaluated (e.g. using a marker). In all cases that require a new
measurement after parameter changes, the trace is reset automatically to avoid false
results (e.g. with span changes). For applications that require no reset after parameter
changes, the automatic reset can be switched off.
Suffix: .
<n> window; For applications that do not have more than 1 measure-
ment window, the suffix <n> is irrelevant.
<t> trace
Parameters:
<State> ON
The automatic reset is switched off.
OFF
After certain parameter changes the traces are reset.
*RST: OFF
Example: DISP:WIND:TRAC3:MODE:HCON ON
Switches off the reset function.
Manual operation: See "Hold/Cont" on page 400

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 819

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe] <State>
This command switches on or off the display of the corresponding trace. The other
measurements are not aborted but continue running in the background.
Suffix: .
<n> window; For applications that do not have more than 1 measure-
ment window, the suffix <n> is irrelevant.
<t> trace
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON for TRACe1, OFF for TRACe2 to 6
Example: DISP:TRAC3 ON
Manual operation: See "Blank" on page 181

FORMat[:DATA] <Format>
This command selects the data format for the data transmitted from the R&S ESR to
the controlling computer. It is used for the transmission of trace data. The data format
of trace data received by the instrument is automatically recognized, regardless of the
format which is programmed.
In the "Spectrum" mode, the format setting REAL, 32 is used for the binary transmis-
sion of trace data.
Parameters:
<Format> ASCii
ASCII data are transmitted in plain text, separated by commas.
REAL
REAL data are transmitted as 32-bit IEEE 754 floating-point
numbers in the "definite length block format".
*RST: ASCII
Example: FORM REAL,32
FORM ASC

FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator <Separator>
This command defines which decimal separator (decimal point or comma) is to be
used for outputting measurement data to the file in ASCII format. Different languages
of evaluation programs (e.g. MS-Excel) can thus be supported.
Parameters:
<Separator> POINt | COMMA
*RST: (factory setting is POINt; *RST does not affect set-
ting)
Example: FORM:DEXP:DSEP POIN
Sets the decimal point as separator.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 820

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Manual operation: See "Peak List Export" on page 204

See "ASCII Trace Export" on page 208
See "Decim Sep" on page 209
See "ASCII File Export" on page 273

MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe <Trace>, <FileName>

This command stores the selected trace in the specified window in a file with ASCII for-
mat. The file format is described in chapter 5.3.1.6, "ASCII File Export Format",
on page 409
The decimal separator (decimal point or comma) for floating-point numerals contained
in the file is defined with the FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator command (see
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 820).
Suffix: .
<n> window; For applications that do not have more than 1 measure-
ment window, the suffix <n> is irrelevant.
Parameters:
<Trace> 1 to 6
Selected a trace.
When you export all traces (FORMat:DEXPort:TRACes), this
paramater is not required.
<FileName> DOS file name
The file name includes indication of the path and the drive name.
Indication of the path complies with DOS conventions.
Example: MMEM:STOR:TRAC 3,'TEST.ASC'
Stores trace 3 in the file TEST.ASC.
Manual operation: See "ASCII Trace Export" on page 208

[SENSe:]AVERage<n>:COUNt <NoMeasurements>
This command defines the number of measurements which contribute to the average
value.
Note that continuous averaging is performed after the indicated number has been
reached in continuous sweep mode.
In single sweep mode, the sweep is stopped as soon as the indicated number of mea-
surements (sweeps) is reached. Synchronization to the end of the indicated number of
measurements is only possible in single sweep mode.
This command has the same effect as the [SENSe<source>:]SWEep:COUNt com-
mand. In both cases, the number of measurements is defined whether the average cal-
culation is active or not.
The number of measurements applies to all traces in the window.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 821

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Parameters:
<NoMeasurements> 0 to 32767
*RST: 0
Example: SWE:CONT OFF
Switching to single sweep mode.
AVER:COUN 16
Sets the number of measurements to 16.
AVER:STAT ON
Switches on the calculation of average.
INIT;*WAI
Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps.

[SENSe:]AVERage<n>[:STATe<Trace>] <State>
This command turns averaging for a particular trace in a particular window on and off.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<Trace> 1...6
Selects the trace.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: AVER OFF
Switches off the average calculation for trace 1.
AVER:STAT3 ON
Switches on the average calculation for trace 3.

[SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE <FunctionType>
This command selects the type of average function.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<FunctionType> VIDeo | LINear | POWer
VIDeo
The logarithmic power values are averaged.
LINear
The power values are averaged before they are converted to
logarithmic values.
POWer
The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to
averaging. After the averaging, the data is converted back into
its original unit.
*RST: VIDeo

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 822

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: AVER:TYPE LIN

Switches to linear average calculation.
Manual operation: See "Lin" on page 402
See "Log" on page 403
See "Power" on page 403

[SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion] <Function>
This command selects the detector for the data acquisition in the selected trace.
Suffix: .
<trace> 1...4
Selects the trace.
<trace> 1...6
trace
Parameters:
<Function> APEak | NEGative | POSitive | SAMPle | RMS | AVERage |
QPEak | CAVerage | CRMS
*RST: APEak
Example: DET POS
Sets the detector to "positive peak".
Manual operation: See "Trace 1 - 6" on page 208
See "Auto Peak" on page 401
See "Positive Peak" on page 401
See "Negative Peak" on page 401
See "Sample" on page 401
See "RMS" on page 401
See "Average" on page 402
See "Quasipeak" on page 402
See "CISPR Average" on page 402
See "RMS Average" on page 402

[SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]:AUTO <State>
This command either couples the detector to the current trace setting or turns coupling
off.
Suffix: .
<trace> 1...6
trace
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: DET:AUTO OFF
Manual operation: See "Auto Select" on page 400

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 823

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

TRACe<n>:COPY <TraceNumber>, <TraceNumber>

This command copies data from one trace to another.
Suffix: .
<n> window; For applications that do not have more than 1 measure-
ment window, the suffix <n> is irrelevant.
Parameters:
<TraceNumber>, TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | TRACE5 | TRACE6,
<TraceNumber> TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | TRACE5 | TRACE6
The first argument is the destination of the data to be copied, the
second argument describes the source.
Example: TRAC:COPY TRACE1,TRACE2
Manual operation: See "Copy Trace" on page 208

TRACe<n>:DATA <Trace>, <Data> | <ResultType>

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 824

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Table 10-20: Return values for TRACE1 to TRACE6 parameter

Table 10-21: Return values for LIST parameter

TRACe<n>[:DATA]:MEMory? <Trace>,<OffsSwPoint>,<NoOfSwPoints>
This command queries the previously acquired trace data for the specified trace from
the memory. As an offset and number of sweep points to be retrieved can be specified,
the trace data can be retrieved in smaller portions, making the command faster than
the TRAC:DATA? command. This is useful if only specific parts of the trace data are of
interest.
If no parameters are specified with the command, the entire trace data is retrieved; in
this case, the command is identical to TRAC:DATA? TRACE1
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
Query parameters:
<Trace> TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | TRACE5 | TRACE6
<OffsSwPoint> The offset in sweep points related to the start of the measure-
ment at which data retrieval is to start.
<NoOfSwPoints> Number of sweep points to be retrieved from the trace.
Example: TRAC:DATA:MEM? TRACE1,25,100
Retrieves 100 sweep points from trace 1, starting at sweep point
25.
Usage: Query only

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 825

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

TRACe<n>[:DATA]:X? <TraceNumber>
This command reads the x-values of the selected trace.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
window; For applications that have only one measurement
screen, the suffix is irrelevant.
Query parameters:
<TraceNumber> TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | TRACE5 | TRACE6
Trace number
Example: TRACe:DATA:X? TRACE1
Returns the x-values for trace 1.
Usage: Query only

10.4.3.2 Spectrogram

Configuring Spectrograms
Commands useful to work with markers in the spectrogram described elsewhere:
● CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CLEar[:IMMediate] on page 618
● CALCulate<n>:SGRam:HDEPth on page 620
● CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp:DATA? on page 621
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:COLor........................................................................................ 826
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CONT.........................................................................................827
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:COUNt........................................................................... 827
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:SELect........................................................................... 828
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp[:STATe]........................................................................ 828
CALCulate<n>:SGRam[:STATe]......................................................................................828

CALCulate<n>:SGRam:COLor <Color>
This command selects the color scheme of the spectrogram result display.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<Color> COLor
RGB colors
RADar
black - green - white
GRAYscale
black and white
*RST: COLor

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 826

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: CALC:SGR:COL GRAY

Selects black and white color scheme.
Manual operation: See "Color Mapping" on page 416

CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CONT <State>
This command determines whether the results of the last measurement are deleted
before starting a new measurement in single sweep mode.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Selects single sweep mode.
INIT;*WAI
Starts the sweep and waits for the end of the sweep.
CALC:SGR:CONT ON
Repeats the single sweep measurement without deleting the
results of the last measurement.
Manual operation: See "Continue Frame (On Off)" on page 382

CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:COUNt <Frames>
This command sets the number of frames to be recorded in a single sweep.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<Frames> The maximum number of frames depends on
the .CALCulate<n>:SGRam:HDEPth on page 620
Range: 1 to depends on history depth
Increment: 1
*RST: 1
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Selects single sweep mode.
CALC:SGR:FRAM:COUN 200
Sets the number of frames to 200.
Manual operation: See "Frame Count" on page 383

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 827

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:SELect <Frame>
This command selects a specific frame for further analysis. The command is available
only if no measurement is running or after a single sweep has ended.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<Frame> <frame_number> (if time stamp is off)
Selects the frame. The range is {0...number of recorded
frames-1}
<time> (if time stamp is on)
Time distance in seconds. It selects the frame that is x seconds
away from frame 0.
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Stop the continuous sweep.
CALC:SGR:FRAM:SEL -25
Selects frame number -25.
Manual operation: See "Select Frame" on page 382

CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp[:STATe] <State>
This command activates and deactivates the time stamp.
If the time stamp is active, some commands do not address frames as numbers, but as
(relative) time values:
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:FRAMe on page 628
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:FRAMe on page 622
● CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:SELect on page 828
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:SGR:TST ON
Activates the time stamp.
Manual operation: See "Time Stamp (On Off)" on page 416

CALCulate<n>:SGRam[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the spectrogram result display on and off.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 828

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:SGR ON
Activates the Spectrogram result display.
Manual operation: See "Spectrogram (On Off)" on page 415

Configuring the Color Map

Commands useful to work with markers in the spectrogram described elsewhere:
● DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:DEFault on page 619
● DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:LOWer on page 619
● DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:SHAPe on page 619
● DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:UPPer on page 619
● DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor[:STYLe] on page 619

Using Markers and Deltamarkers

Positioning Marker
Commands useful to work with markers in the spectrogram described elsewhere:
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT on page 661
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 661
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 662
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt on page 662
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:LEFT on page 663
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT on page 663
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 663
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt on page 664
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:FRAMe on page 622
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:SARea on page 623
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 623
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 624
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe on page 624
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow on page 625
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT on page 625
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 626
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe on page 626

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 829

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow on page 626

● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT on page 627
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 627

Using Deltamarkers
Commands useful to work with markers in the spectrogram described elsewhere:
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT on page 667
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 668
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 668
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt on page 668
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT on page 669
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT on page 669
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 669
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:RIGHt on page 670
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:FRAMe on page 628
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:SARea on page 629
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 629
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 630
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe on page 630
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow on page 631
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT on page 631
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 632
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe on page 632
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow on page 632
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT on page 633
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 633

10.4.3.3 Limit Lines

Using Display Lines

For commands that control display lines see chapter 10.3.8.1, "Using Display Lines",
on page 673.

Using Frequency Lines

For commands that control frequency lines see chapter 10.3.8.2, "Using Frequency
Lines", on page 674.

Using Time Lines

CALCulate<n>:TLINe<Line>........................................................................................... 831
CALCulate<n>:TLINe<Line>:STATe................................................................................ 831

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 830

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:TLINe<Line> <Time>
This command defines the position of a time line.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<Line> 1|2
Selects the time line.
Parameters:
<Time> Range: 0 to 30000000000
*RST: (STATe to OFF)
Default unit: s
Example: CALC:TLIN 10ms
Manual operation: See "Time Line 1 / Time Line 2" on page 222

CALCulate<n>:TLINe<Line>:STATe <State>
This command turns a time line on and off.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<Line> 1|2
Selects the time line.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:TLIN2:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Time Line 1 / Time Line 2" on page 222

Using Limit Lines

For commands that control limit lines see chapter 10.3.8.3, "Using Limit Lines",
on page 675.

10.4.3.4 Markers

● Using Markers....................................................................................................... 831

● Using Delta Markers..............................................................................................836
● Controlling Fixed Reference Markers....................................................................837
● Using Marker Functions........................................................................................ 840

Using Markers
Commands useful to control markers described elsewhere:
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF on page 661
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer on page 657

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 831

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CSTep on page 658

● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:ZOOM on page 658
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT on page 661
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 661
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 662
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt on page 662
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:LEFT on page 663
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT on page 663
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 663
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt on page 664
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 664
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe on page 665
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 665
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT on page 659
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHT on page 659
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 660
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y on page 665
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:REFerence........................................................... 832
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:LOEXclude.......................................................................... 833
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:AUTO..................................................................833
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:AUTO...................................................................833
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:ZOOM.................................................................. 834
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SSIZe.............................................................................. 834
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y:PERCent.......................................................................... 835
CALCulate<n>:THReshold..............................................................................................835
CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe................................................................................... 836
DISPlay:MTABle............................................................................................................ 836

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:REFerence
This command sets the reference level to the power measured by a marker.
If you use the command in combination with a delta marker, that delta marker is turned
into a normal marker.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK2:FUNC:REF
Sets the reference level to the level of marker 2.
Manual operation: See "Ref Lvl =Mkr Lvl" on page 422

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 832

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:LOEXclude <State>
This command turns the local oscillator suppression during a peak search on or off.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: CALC:MARK:LOEX ON
Manual operation: See "Exclude LO" on page 422

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:AUTO <State>
This command turns an automatic marker peak search for a trace maximum on and
off. The command performs the peak search after each sweep.
An automatic peak search may be used during adjustments of a device under test to
keep track of the actual peak marker position and level.
If no maximum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values < peak
excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:MAX:AUTO ON
Activates the automatic peak search function for marker 1 at the
end of each particular sweep.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Auto Max Peak/Auto Min Peak" on page 422

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:AUTO <State>
This command turns an automatic marker peak search for a trace maximum on and
off. The command performs the peak search after each sweep.
An automatic peak search may be used during adjustments of a device under test to
keep track of the actual peak marker position and level.
If no maximum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values < peak
excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 833

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:MIN:AUTO ON
Activates the automatic minimum value search function for
marker 1 at the end of each particular sweep.
Manual operation: See "Auto Max Peak/Auto Min Peak" on page 422

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:ZOOM <State>
This command sets the limits of the marker search range to the zoom area.
Note: The function is only available if the search limit for marker and delta marker is
switched on (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe]).
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:ZOOM ON
Switches the search limit function on.
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:RIGH 20MHz
Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Use Zoom Limits" on page 216

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SSIZe <StepSize>
This command defines the step size of the rotary knob for marker or delta marker value
changes. It only takes effect in manual operation.
The marker step size is unavailable for statistical measurements.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 834

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Parameters:
<StepSize> STANdard
step size corresponds to space between two pixels
POINts
step size corresponds to space between two measured values
*RST: POINts
Example: CALC:MARK:X:SSIZ STAN
Sets the measured value step size.
Manual operation: See "Stepsize Standard" on page 417
See "Stepsize Sweep Points" on page 417

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y:PERCent <Probability>
This command positions the selected marker to the given probability.
If you use the command in combination with a delta marker, that delta marker is turned
into a normal marker.
Note: The command is only available for CCDF measurements. You can query the
associated level value with CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<Probability> Range: 0 to 100
Default unit: PCT
Example: CALC1:MARK:Y:PERC 95PCT
Positions marker 1 to a probability of 95 %.
Manual operation: See "Percent Marker" on page 331

CALCulate<n>:THReshold <Threshold>
This command defines a threshold value for the marker peak search.
A threshold line is automatically turned on.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Threshold> The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer.
*RST: (STATe to OFF)
Example: CALC:THR -82DBM
Sets the threshold value to -82 dBm.
Manual operation: See "Threshold" on page 216

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 835

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe <State>
This command turns the threshold line for the marker peak search on and off.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:THR:STAT ON
Switches on the threshold line.
Manual operation: See "Threshold" on page 216
See "Search Lim Off" on page 216

DISPlay:MTABle <DisplayMode>
This command turns the marker table on and off.
Parameters:
<DisplayMode> ON
Marker table is displayed.
OFF
Marker table is not displayed.
AUTO
Marker table is only displayed if 2 or more markers are active.
*RST: AUTO
Example: To activate the table display:
DISP:MTAB ON
To query the current state of the marker table display:
DISP:MTAB?
Manual operation: See "Marker Table" on page 213

Using Delta Markers

Commands useful to control delta markers described elsewhere:
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:AOFF on page 667
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:LINK on page 667
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT on page 667
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 668
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 668
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt on page 668
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT on page 669
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT on page 669
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 669

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 836

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:RIGHt on page 670

● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MODE on page 670
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 670
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:TRACe on page 671
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X on page 671
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative? on page 672
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y on page 672
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MREF......................................................................... 837

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MREF <RefMarkerNo>
This command defines the reference marker for a delta marker other than marker 1.
The reference may be another marker or the fixed reference.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<RefMarkerNo> 1 ... 16
Selects markers 1 to 16 as the reference.
FIXed
Selects the fixed reference as the reference.
Example: CALC:DELT3:MREF 2
Specifies that the values of delta marker 3 are relative to marker
2.
Manual operation: See "Marker Wizard" on page 211

Controlling Fixed Reference Markers

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:MAXimum[:PEAK].................... 837
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X............................................ 838
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y............................................ 838
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y:OFFSet................................ 839
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe].............................................. 839

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command moves the fixed reference marker to the peak power.
When measuring the phase noise, the command defines a new reference point level
for delta marker 2.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 837

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:MAX
Sets the reference point level for delta markers to the peak of
the selected trace.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Peak Search" on page 429

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X <Reference>
This command defines the horizontal position of the fixed delta marker reference point.
The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram.
When measuring the phase noise, the command defines the frequency reference for
delta marker 2.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<Reference> Numeric value that defines the horizontal position of the refer-
ence.
For frequency domain measurements, it is a frequency in Hz.
For time domain measurements, it is a point in time in s.
*RST: Fixed reference: OFF
Example: CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:X 128 MHz
Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Ref Point Frequency (span > 0)/Ref Point Time (zero
span)" on page 428

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y <RefPointLevel>
This command defines the vertical position of the fixed delta marker reference point.
The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram.
When measuring the phase noise, the command defines the level reference for delta
marker 2.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<RefPointLevel> Numeric value that defines the vertical position of the reference.
The unit and value range is variable.
*RST: Fixed reference: OFF
Example: CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y -10dBm
Sets the reference point level for delta markers to -10 dBm.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 838

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Manual operation: See "Ref Point Level" on page 428

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines a level offset for the fixed delta marker reference point.
When measuring the phase noise, the command defines an additional level offset for
delta marker 2.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<Offset> Level offset that is added to the display of all delta markers.
*RST: 0 dB
Example: CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y:OFFS 10dB
Sets the level offset for the measurement with fixed reference
value or the phase-noise measurement to 10 dB.

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe] <State>
This command switches the relative measurement to a fixed reference value on or off.
Marker 1 is activated previously and a peak search is performed, if necessary. If
marker 1 is activated, its position becomes the reference point for the measurement.
The reference point can then be modified with the CALCulate<n>:
DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X commands and CALCulate<n>:
DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y independently of the position of
marker 1 and of a trace. It applies to all delta markers as long as the function is active.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX ON
Switches on the measurement with fixed reference value for all
delta markers.
CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:X 128 MHZ
Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz.
CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y 30 DBM
Sets the reference level to +30 dBm.
Manual operation: See "Ref. Fixed On/Off" on page 429

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 839

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Using Marker Functions

The following commands control the measurements available as marker functions.
● Signal Count..........................................................................................................840
● Noise Density........................................................................................................ 841
● Phase Noise..........................................................................................................842
● Marker Demodulation............................................................................................844
● n dB Down Marker................................................................................................ 846
● Marker Peak List................................................................................................... 849
● Band Power...........................................................................................................854

Signal Count
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt................................................................................ 840
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency?............................................................841
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:RESolution............................................................... 841

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt <State>
This command turns the frequency counter at the marker position for marker 1 on and
off.
The count result is queried with CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency?.
The frequency counter works for one marker only. If you perform a frequency count
with another marker, the R&S ESR deactivates the frequency count of the first marker.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK ON
Switches on marker 1.
CALC:MARK:COUN ON
Switches on the frequency counter for marker 1.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK:COUN:FREQ?
Outputs the measured value.
Manual operation: See "Signal Count" on page 427

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 840

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency?
This command queries the result of the frequency counter for marker 1.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant
Return values:
<Frequency> Frequency at the marker position.
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK ON
Switches on marker 2.
CALC:MARK:COUN ON
Activates the frequency counter for marker 1.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK:COUN:FREQ?
Outputs the measured value of marker 1.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Signal Count" on page 427

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:RESolution <Resolution>
This command specifies the resolution of the frequency counter (marker 1).
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Resolution> 0.001 | 0.01 | 0.1 | 1 | 10 | 100 | 1000 | 10000 Hz
*RST: 0.1 Hz
Example: CALC:MARK:COUN:RES 1kHz
Sets the resolution of the frequency counter to 1 kHz.

Noise Density
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult.......................................................841
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe].....................................................842

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult
This command queries the result of the noise measurement.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 841

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK2 ON
Switches on marker 2.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NOIS ON
Switches on noise measurement.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK2:NOIS:RES?
Outputs the noise result of marker 2.
Manual operation: See "Noise Meas On/Off" on page 428

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the noise measurement for all markers on or off.
If on, the R&S ESR measures the noise power density at the marker position.
The result can be queried with CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:
RESult.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:NOIS ON
Switches on the noise measurement.
Manual operation: See "Noise Meas On/Off" on page 428

Phase Noise
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:AUTO.............................................. 842
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult?........................................... 843
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe]........................................... 843

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:AUTO <State>
This command turns an automatic peak search for the fixed reference marker at the
end of a sweep on and off.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 842

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO:AUTO ON
Activates an automatic peak search for the reference marker in
a phase-noise measurement.
Manual operation: See "Ph. Noise Auto Peak Search" on page 429

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult?
This command queries the result of the phase noise measurement.
If necessary, the command activates the measurement first..
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> 2
Marker 2 is always the deltamarker for phase noise measure-
ments.
Example: CALC:DELT2:FUNC:PNO:RES?
Outputs the result of phase-noise measurement of the delta-
marker 2.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Phase Noise On/Off" on page 428

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the phase noise measurement at the delta marker position on and
off.
The correction values for the bandwidth and the log amplifier are taken into account in
the measurement.
The reference marker for phase noise measurements is either a normal marker or a
fixed reference. If necessary, the command turns on the reference marker
A fixed reference point can be modified with the CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:
FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X and CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:
FIXed:RPOint:Y commands independent of the position of marker 1 and of a trace.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 843

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

<m> irrelevant
Note: marker 2 is always the deltamarker for phase noise mea-
surement results.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO ON
Switches on the phase-noise measurement with all delta mark-
ers.
CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:X 128 MHZ
Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz.
CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y 30 DBM
Sets the reference level to +30 dBm
Manual operation: See "Phase Noise On/Off" on page 428

Marker Demodulation
Commands useful to configure the marker demodulation described elsewhere:
● [SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch:LEVel on page 617
● [SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe] on page 617
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:CONTinuous................................... 844
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff..........................................845
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect............................................845
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe].......................................... 845

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:CONTinuous <State>
This command turns continuous demodulation of the signal at the marker position in
the frequency domain on and off.
Thus acoustic monitoring of the signals can be performed.
In the time domain continuous demodulation is always on.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC2:MARK3:FUNC:DEM:CONT ON
Switches on the continuous ' demodulation.
Manual operation: See "Continuous Demod (span > 0)" on page 431

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 844

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff <Duration>
This command defines for how long the the signal at the marker position is demodula-
ted.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<Duration> Range: 10 ms to 1000 s
*RST: Marker demodulation = OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:DEM:HOLD 3s
Manual operation: See "Mkr Stop Time" on page 430

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect <DemodMode>
This command selects the demodulation mode for the audio demodulator.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<DemodMode> AM | FM
*RST: AM
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:DEM:SEL FM
Manual operation: See "AM" on page 430
See "FM" on page 430

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the audio demodulator on and off when the measurement rea-
ches a marker position.
In the frequency domain, the hold time can be defined at the corresponding marker
position with CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff.
In the time domain continuous demodulation is always on.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 845

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: CALC:MARK3:FUNC:DEM ON
Switches on the demodulation for marker 3.
Manual operation: See "Mkr Demod On/Off" on page 430

n dB Down Marker
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown............................................................ 846
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency?........................................ 846
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:QFACtor...............................................847
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult?............................................... 847
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe................................................. 848
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:TIME?..................................................848

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown <Distance>
This command defines the distance of the n dB down markers to the reference marker.
The temporary markers T1 and T2 are positioned n dB below the active reference
marker. The frequency and time position of these markers can be queried with
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency? and
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:TIME?. The bandwidth between
the markers can be queried with CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:
RESult?.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Distance> Distance of the temporary markers to the reference marker in
dB.
*RST: 6dB
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD 3dB
Sets the level spacing to 3 dB.
Manual operation: See "n dB down" on page 431

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency?
This command queries the position of the n dB down markers on the x-axis when mea-
suring in the frequency domain.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 846

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Return values:
<Frequency> <frequency 1>
absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the left of the reference
marker in Hz
<frequency 2>
absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the right of the refer-
ence marker in Hz
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD ON
Switches on the n dB down function.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:FREQ?
Outputs the frequencies of the temporary markers.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "n dB down" on page 431

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:QFACtor
This command queries the Q factor (quality) of n dB down measurements.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD ON
Switches on the n dB down function.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:QFAC?
Queries the Q factor of the measured bandwidth.
Manual operation: See "n dB down" on page 431

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult?
This command queries the distance of the n dB down markers from each other.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 847

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Parameters:
<Distance> The result depends on the span.
In case of frequency domain measurements, the command
returns the bandwidth between the two n dB down markers in
Hz. In case of time domain measurements, the command
returns the pulse width between the two n dB down markers in
seconds.
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD ON
Switches on the n dB down function.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:RES?
Outputs the measured value.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "n dB down" on page 431

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe <State>
This command turns the n dB Down marker function on and off.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:STAT ON
Switches on the "N dB Down" function.
Manual operation: See "n dB down" on page 431

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:TIME?
This command queries the position of the n dB down markers on the x-axis when mea-
suring in the time domain.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> irrelevant

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 848

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Return values:
<Time> <time 1>
absolute position in time of the n dB marker to the left of the ref-
erence marker in seconds
<time 2>
absolute position in time of the n dB marker to the right of the
reference marker in seconds
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD ON
Switches on the n dB down function.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:TIME?
Outputs the time values of the temporary markers.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "n dB down" on page 431

Marker Peak List

Commands useful to perform a peak search described elsewhere:
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion on page 648
● MMEMory:STORe:PEAKlist on page 652
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:ANNotation:LABel:STATe.......................... 849
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:COUNt?...................................................850
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks[:IMMediate].............................................. 850
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:LIST:SIZE................................................ 851
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SEAR:AUTO............................................ 851
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT...................................................... 852
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:STAT.......................................................852
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:X............................................................. 852
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:Y?........................................................... 853

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:ANNotation:LABel:STATe <State>
This command turns labels for peaks found during a peak search on and off.
The labels correspond to the marker number in the marker peak list.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 849

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:ANN:LAB:STAT OFF

Removes the peak labels from the diagram
Manual operation: See "Marker Number" on page 434

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:COUNt?
This command queries the number of peaks that have been found during a peak
search.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> Selects the marker.
Return values:
<NumberOfPeaks>
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE 3
Searches the 3 highest maxima for trace 1
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:COUN?
Queries the number of maxima found
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Marker Peak List" on page 432

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks[:IMMediate] <NoMaxima>
This command initiates a peak search.
The results can be queried with:
● Position of a peak on the x-axis: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
FPEaks:X
● Position of a peak on the y-axis: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
FPEaks:Y?
● Number of peaks in the list: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:
COUNt?
The order the results are returned in is selected with CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:
FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT.
The trace the peaks search is performed on is selected with CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:TRACe.
Number of found maxima
The number of maxima found depends on the waveform and value set for the Peak
Excursion parameter (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion), however, a
maximum number of 200 maxima are determined. Only the signals which exceed their
surrounding values at least by the value indicated by the peak excursion parameter are
recognized as maxima. Therefore, the number of maxima found is not automatically
the same as the number of maxima desired.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 850

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<NoMaxima> Range: 1 to 200
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode
INIT;*WAI
Starts measurement and synchronizes to end
CALC:MARK:TRAC 1
Sets marker 1 to trace 1
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:SORT X
Sets the sort mode to increasing X values
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE 3;*WAI
Searches the 3 highest maxima for trace 1 and synchronizes to
end
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:COUN?
Queries the number of maxima found
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:Y?
Queries the level of maxima found
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:X?
Queries the frequencies (span <> 0) or time (span = 0) of max-
ima found.

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:LIST:SIZE <MaxNoPeaks>
This command defines the maximum number of peaks the marker peak list may con-
tain.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<MaxNoPeaks> Maximum number of peaks to be determined.
*RST: 50
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:LIST:SIZE 10
The marker peak list will contain a maximum of 10 peaks.
Manual operation: See "Max Peak Count" on page 432

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SEAR:AUTO <State>
This command turns the marker peak search on and off.
This command is retained for compatibility with R&S FSP only. Use CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:STAT instead.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 851

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:SEAR:AUTO ON
Activates marker peak search

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT <SortMode>
This command selects the order in which the results of a peak search are returned.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<SortMode> X
Sorts the peaks according to increasing position on the x-axis.
Y
Sorts the peaks according to decreasing position on the y-axis.
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:SORT Y
Sets the sort mode to decreasing y values
Manual operation: See "Sort Mode Freq/Lvl" on page 432

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:STAT <State>
This command turns a peak search on and off.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:STAT ON
Activates marker peak search
Manual operation: See "Peak List On/Off" on page 432

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:X
This command queries the position of the peaks on the x-axis.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 852

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT on page 852.
The number of peaks on the number that has been set with CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:COUNt?.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Return values:
<PeakPosition> Position of the peaks on the x-axis. The unit depends on the
measurement.
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:SORT Y
Sets the sort mode to decreasing y values
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE 3
Searches the 3 highest maxima for trace 1
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:COUN?
Queries the number of maxima found
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:X?
Queries the frequencies (span <> 0) or. time (span = 0) of the
maxima found
107.5E6,153.8E6,187.9E6
frequencies in increasing order
2.05E-3,2.37E-3, 3.71e-3
times in increasing order
Manual operation: See "Marker Peak List" on page 432

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:Y?
This command queries the position of the peaks on the y-axis.
The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT on page 852.
The number of peaks on the number that has been set with CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:COUNt?.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Return values:
<PeakPosition> Position of the peaks on the y-axis. The unit depends on the
measurement.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 853

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:SORT Y
Sets the sort mode to decreasing y values
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE 3
Searches the 3 highest maxima for trace 1
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:COUN?
Queries the number of maxima found
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:Y?
Queries the levels of the maxima found
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Marker Peak List" on page 432

Band Power
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE.................................................... 854
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult?..................................................854
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN.....................................................855
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe]..................................................855
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE............................................ 856
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult?..........................................856
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN............................................. 856
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe]..........................................857

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the way the results for a band power marker are displayed.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Mode> POWer
Result is displayed as a power in dBm.
DENSity
Result is displayed as a density in dBm/Hz.
*RST: POW
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:MODE DENS
Manual operation: See "Power" on page 435
See "Density" on page 435

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult?
This command queries the results of the band power measurement.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 854

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Return values:
<Power> Signal power over the marker bandwidth.
Example: Activate the band power marker:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:STAT ON
Select the density mode for the result:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:MODE DENS
Query the result:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:RES?
Response:
20dBm/Hz
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Power" on page 435
See "Density" on page 435

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN <Span>
This command defines the bandwidth around the marker position.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Span> Numeric value that defines the span in Hz.
The maximum span depends on the marker position and
R&S ESR model.
*RST: 5% of current span
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:SPAN 20
Manual operation: See "Span" on page 434

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] <State>
This command turns markers for band power measurements on and off.
If necessary, the command also turns on a marker. If a marker is already on, the cur-
rently active marker is used as the band power marker (all other marker functions for
this marker are deactivated).
For details see "Performing Band Power Measurements" on page 438.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 855

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Band Power On/Off" on page 434

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the way the results for a band power delta marker are dis-
played.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Mode> POWer
Result is displayed as a power in dBm.
DENSity
Result is displayed as a density in dBm/Hz.
*RST: POW
Example: CALC:DELT:BPOW:MODE DENS

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult?
This command queries the results of the band power measurement.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Return values:
<Power> Signal power over the delta marker bandwidth.
Example: Activate the delta band power marker:
CALC:DELT:BPOW:STAT ON
Select the density mode for the result:
CALC:DELT:BPOW:MODE DENS
Query the result:
CALC:DELT:BPOW:RES?
Response:
20dBm/Hz
Usage: Query only

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN <Span>
This command defines the bandwidth around the delta marker position. The span is
indicated by lines in the diagram.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 856

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode

<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Span> Numeric value that defines the span in Hz.
The maximum span depends on the marker position and
R&S ESR model.
*RST: 5% of current span
Example: CALC:DELT:BPOW:SPAN 20

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] <State>
This command turns delta markers for band power measurements on and off.
If neccessary, the command also turns on a reference marker.
For details see "Performing Band Power Measurements" on page 438.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
When switched to on, if no marker is active yet, marker 1 is acti-
vated. Otherwise, the currently active marker is used as a delta
band power marker (all other marker functions for this marker
are deactivated).
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:DELT:BPOW:STAT ON

10.5 Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode

10.5.1 Using the I/Q Analyzer

CALCulate<n>:FORMat..................................................................................................858
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SEARch.............................................................................. 858
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue...................................................... 859
MMEMory:LOAD:IQ:STATe............................................................................................ 859
TRACe<n>:IQ:BWIDth....................................................................................................859
TRACe<n>:IQ:RLENgth..................................................................................................860
TRACe<n>:IQ:SET.........................................................................................................860
TRACe<n>:IQ:SRATe.................................................................................................... 861
TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA...................................................................................................... 862
TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA:FORMat......................................................................................... 862
TRACe<n>:IQ:AVERage:COUNt..................................................................................... 864
TRACe<n>:IQ:AVERage[:STATe]....................................................................................864

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 857

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode

TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA:MEMory?....................................................................................... 865
TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe.................................................................................................... 866
TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:GAP............................................................................................ 866
TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:LENGth........................................................................................867
TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:NOFgateperiods............................................................................867
TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:TYPE...........................................................................................867
TRACe<n>:IQ:EVAL.......................................................................................................868
TRACe<n>:IQ[:STATe]................................................................................................... 868
TRACe<n>:IQ:TPISample?............................................................................................. 869

CALCulate<n>:FORMat <Format>
This command defines the display type of the IQ data.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Format> RIMag
IQ data
MAGNitude
Magnitude
FREQuency
Spectrum
VECTor
IQ-Vector
Manual operation: See "I/Q Analyzer" on page 469
See "Display Config" on page 470

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SEARch <MarkRealImag>
This command selects the trace type a marker search is performed on.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<MarkRealImag> REAL
Marker search functions are performed on the real trace of the
"I/Q" measurement.
IMAG
Marker search functions are performed on the imaginary trace of
the "I/Q" measurement.
MAGN
Marker search functions are performed on the magnitude of the I
and Q data.
*RST: REAL

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 858

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode

Example: CALC4:MARK:SEAR IMAG

Manual operation: See "Search Settings" on page 478

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue <Value>
The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<t> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Value> *RST: 0 dB, coupled to reference level
Example: DISP:TRAC:Y:RVAL -20dBm
Defines a reference position of -20 dBm.
Manual operation: See "Reference Level" on page 470
See "Reference Value" on page 487

MMEMory:LOAD:IQ:STATe 1, <FileName>
This command loads the I/Q data from the specified .iq.tar file.
Note: switch to single sweep mode (INIT:CONT OFF) before importing I/Q data as
otherwise the instrument will continue to measure data and display the current results
rather than the imported data.
Parameters:
<FileName> Complete file name including the path
Example: MMEM:LOAD:IQ:STAT 1, 'C:
\R_S\Instr\user\data.iq.tar'
Loads I/Q data from the specified file.
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "IQ Import" on page 543

TRACe<n>:IQ:BWIDth
This command queries the flat, usable filter bandwidth of the final I/Q data.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: TRAC:IQ:BWID?
Manual operation: See "Filter BW" on page 470

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 859

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode

TRACe<n>:IQ:RLENgth <NoOfSamples>
This command sets the record length for the acquired I/Q data. Increasing the record
length automatically also increases the measurement time.
Note: Alternatively, you can define the measurement time using the SENS:SWE:TIME
command.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<NoOfSamples> Number of measurement values to record.
Range: 1 ... 209715200(= 200*1024*1024);
*RST: 691
Example: TRAC:IQ:RLEN 256
Manual operation: See "Record Length" on page 470

TRACe<n>:IQ:SET NORM,<Placeholder>, <SampleRate>, <TriggerMode>,

<TriggerSlope>, <PretriggerSamp>, <NumberSamples>
This command defines the settings of the R&S ESR hardware for the measurement of
I/Q data. This allows setting the sample rate, trigger conditions and the record length.
If this command is omitted, the current instrument settings are used for the correspond-
ing parameters.
This command switches to IQ mode automatically (see also TRACe<n>:IQ[:STATe]
on page 868).
The trigger level can be set using the TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce command.
Note: When using the default settings with the TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA command, the
following minimum buffer sizes for the response data are recommended: ASCII format
10 kBytes, Binary format 2 kBytes.
Tip: To determine the trigger point in the sample (for "External" or "IF Power" trigger
mode), use the TRACe<n>:IQ:TPISample? on page 869 command.
Parameters:
NORM is not evaluated, but must be inserted
<Placeholder> numeric value
is not evaluated, but must be inserted
<TriggerMode> IMMediate | EXTernal | IFPower | BBPower | PSE
Selection of the trigger source used for the measurement.
For IMM mode, gating is automatically deactivated.
*RST: IMM
<TriggerSlope> POSitive | NEGative
Used trigger slope.
*RST: POS

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 860

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode

<PretriggerSamp> Defines the trigger offset in terms of pretrigger samples. Nega-

tive values correspond to a trigger delay.
This value also defines the interval between the trigger signal
and the gate edge in samples.
Range:
RF input without gating: 0 to (200 MS - 1)
RF input with gating: 0 to [(200 MS * SR/128 MHz)-1]
Range: 0 to (MaxPreTriggerSamples * 128 MHz/sample
rate).
*RST: 0
<NumberSamples> Number of measurement values to record (including the pretrig-
ger samples).
Range: 1 ... 209715200(= 200*1024*1024);
*RST: 128
Example: TRAC:IQ:SET NORM,10 MHz,32 MHz,EXT,POS,0,2048
Reads 2048 I/Q-values starting at the trigger point.
sample rate = 32 MHz
trigger = External
slope = Positive
TRAC:IQ:SET NORM,10 MHz,4 MHz,EXT,POS,1024,512
Reads 512 I/Q-values from 1024 measurement points before the
trigger point.
sample rate = 4 MHz
trigger = External
slope = Positive
Manual operation: See "Record Length" on page 470

TRACe<n>:IQ:SRATe <SampleRate>
This command sets the final user sample rate for the acquired I/Q data. Thus, the sam-
ple rate can be modified without affecting the other settings.
Note: The smaller the user sample rate, the smaller the usable I/Q bandwidth, see
TRACe<n>:IQ:BWIDth on page 859.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: TRAC:IQ:SRAT 4 MHZ
Manual operation: See "Sample Rate" on page 470

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 861

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode

TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA
This command starts a measurement with the settings defined via TRACe<n>:IQ:SET
and returns the list of measurement results (I/Q samples) immediately after they are
corrected in terms of frequency response. The number of measurement results
depends on the settings defined with TRACe<n>:IQ:SET, the output format depends
on the settings of the FORMat subsystem. The format of the data list is defined by the
command TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA:FORMat.
The command requires all response data to be read out completely before the instru-
ment accepts further commands.
The result values are scaled linearly in Volts and correspond to the voltage at the RF
or digital input of the instrument. The number of the returned values is 2 * the number
of samples.
Note: Using the command with the *RST values for the TRACe<n>:IQ:SET com-
mand, the following minimum buffer sizes for the response data are recommended:
ASCII format: 10 kBytes
Binary format: 2 kBytes
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: TRAC:IQ:STAT ON
Enables acquisition of I/Q data
TRAC:IQ:SET NORM,10MHz,32MHz,EXT,POS,0,4096
Measurement configuration:
Sample Rate = 32 MHz
Trigger Source = External
Trigger Slope = Positive
Pretrigger Samples = 0
Number of Samples = 4096
FORMat REAL,32
Selects format of response data
TRAC:IQ:DATA?
Starts measurement and reads results

TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA:FORMat <Format>
This command defines the transfer format of the I/Q data.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 862

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode

Fig. 10-5: IQ data formats

Note: 512k corresponds to 524288 samples

Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Format> COMPatible | IQBLock | IQPair
*RST: IQBL
For maximum performance, the formats "Compatible" or "IQPair"
should be used. Furthermore, for large amounts of data, the
data should be in binary format to improve performance.
For further details on formats refer to chapter 4.2.10, "Formats
for Returned Values: ASCII Format and Binary Format",
on page 186 .

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 863

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode

TRACe<n>:IQ:AVERage:COUNt <NumberSets>
This command defines the number of I/Q data sets that are to serve as a basis for
averaging.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<NumberSets> 0 to 32767
*RST: 0
Example: TRAC:IQ ON
Switches on acquisition of I/Q data.
TRAC:IQ:AVER ON
Enables averaging of the I/Q measurement data
TRAC:IQ:AVER:COUN 10
Selects averaging over 10 data sets
TRAC:IQ:DATA?
Starts the measurement and reads out the averaged data.
Usage: SCPI confirmed

TRACe<n>:IQ:AVERage[:STATe] <State>
The command enables averaging of the recorded I/Q data, provided that I/Q data
acquisition was previously enabled with TRACe<n>:IQ[:STATe] on page 868.
With I/Q data averaging enabled, the maximum amount of I/Q data is limited to 512kS
(524288 complex samples).
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: TRAC:IQ ON
Switches on acquisition of I/Q data.
TRAC:IQ:AVER ON
Enables averaging of the I/Q measurement data.
TRAC:IQ:AVER:COUN 10
Selects averaging over 10 data sets.
TRAC:IQ:DATA?
Starts the measurement and reads out the averaged data.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 864

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode

TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA:MEMory? <OffsetSamples>,<NoOfSamples>
This command reads out previously acquired (and frequency response corrected) I/Q
data from the memory. Furthermore, the offset related to the start of measurement and
the number of I/Q samples are given. Thus, a previously acquired data set can be read
out in smaller portions. If no parameters are given, all data is read from the memory.
The maximum amount of available data depends on the settings of the TRACe<n>:
IQ:SET command, the output format on the settings in the FORMat subsystem.
The returned values are scaled linear in unit Volt and correspond to the voltage at the
RF or digital input of the instrument.
The format of the output buffer corresponds to the TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA command.
The command requires all response data to be read out completely before the instru-
ment accepts further commands.
If no I/Q data is available in memory because the corresponding measurement was not
started, the command causes a query error.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<OffsetSamples> Offset of the values to be read, in relation to the start of the
acquired data.
Range: 0 to <# of samples> – 1, with <# of samples> being
the value set by the "TRACe:IQ:SET" command
*RST: 0
<NoOfSamples> Number of measurement values to be read.
Range: 1 to <# of samples> - <offset samples> with <# of
samples> being the value set by the
"TRACe:IQ:SET" command
*RST: <# of samples>

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 865

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode

Example: TRAC:IQ:STAT ON
Enables acquisition of I/Q data
TRAC:IQ:SET NORM,10MHz,32MHz,EXT,POS,100,4096
Measurement configuration:
Sample Rate = 32 MHz
Trigger Source = External
Trigger Slope = Positive
Pretrigger Samples = 100
Number of Samples = 4096
INIT;*WAI
Starts measurement and wait for sync
FORMat REAL,32
Determines output format
To read the results:
TRAC:IQ:DATA:MEM?
Reads all 4096 I/Q data
TRAC:IQ:DATA:MEM? 0,2048
Reads 2048 I/Q data starting at the beginning of data acquisition
TRAC:IQ:DATA:MEM? 2048,1024
Reads 1024 I/Q data from half of the recorded data
TRAC:IQ:DATA:MEM? 100,512
Reads 512 I/Q data starting at the trigger point (<Pretrigger
Samples> was 100)
Usage: Query only

TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe <State>
Activates or deactivates the gate function for IQ data measurements. This command is
only valid for TRAC:IQ ON and trigger modes "EXT" and "IFP". The gate trigger is
specified using TRACe<n>:IQ:SET on page 860. For details see chapter 10.5.2, "I/Q
Gating", on page 869.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: TRAC:IQ:EGAT: ON

TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:GAP <Samples>
Defines the interval between several gate periods in samples. For details see chap-
ter 10.5.2, "I/Q Gating", on page 869.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 866

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode

Parameters:
<Samples> <numeric value>
Max = MaxPreTriggerSamples * 128 MHz/sample rate
pretrigger samples defined by TRACe<n>:IQ:SET;
sample rate defined by TRACe<n>:IQ:SRATe)
Range: 1...Max (samples)
*RST: 100
Example: TRAC:IQ:EGAT:GAP 2

TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:LENGth <GateLength>
Defines the gate length in samples in edge mode. For details see chapter 10.5.2, "I/Q
Gating", on page 869.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<GateLength> <numeric value>
Max = MaxPreTriggerSamples * 128 MHz/sample rate
pretrigger samples defined by TRACe<n>:IQ:SET;
sample rate defined by TRACe<n>:IQ:SRATe)
Range: 1...Max (samples)
*RST: 100
Example: TRAC:IQ:EGAT:LENG 2000

TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:NOFgateperiods <Number>
Defines the number of gate periods after a trigger signal. For details see chap-
ter 10.5.2, "I/Q Gating", on page 869.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Number> 1...1023
*RST: 1
Example: TRAC:IQ:EGAT:NOF 2

TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:TYPE <Type>
Specifies the gate trigger type used for data collection. For details see chapter 10.5.2,
"I/Q Gating", on page 869.
Note: Using gating with gate mode "level" and an IFP trigger ( TRIGger<n>[:
SEQuence]:SOURce), the holdoff time for the IFP trigger (see TRIGger<n>[:
SEQuence]:IFPower:HOLDoff on page 807) is ignored.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 867

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode

Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Type> LEVel | EDGE
*RST: EDGE
Example: TRAC:IQ:EGAT:TYPE LEV

TRACe<n>:IQ:EVAL <State>
This command enables or disables the IQ data evaluation mode and is a prerequisite
for the IQ Analyzer functions.
Before this command can be executed, IQ data acquistion must be enabled (see
TRACe<n>:IQ[:STATe] on page 868). This command automatically disables the
IQ data evaluation mode to provide optimum performance for IQ-data acquisition.
If you start the IQ Analyzer manually by selecting the "IQ Analyzer" mode in the
R&S ESR, or use the CALCulate<n>:FORMat command, the IQ data evaluation
mode is automatically activated.
The maximum number of samples for RF input is 200 MS. For details see chapter 6.5,
"Working with I/Q Data", on page 482.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
ON
all functions of the IQ Analyzer are available
OFF
no traces or marker operations are available; IQ data can only
be captured, but with a better performance than in active IQ data
evaluation mode
*RST: OFF
Example: TRAC:IQ ON
Enables IQ data acquisition
TRAC:IQ:EVAL ON
Enables the IQ data evaluation mode.
Manual operation: See "I/Q Analyzer" on page 469

TRACe<n>:IQ[:STATe] <State>
This command switches the I/Q data acquisition on or off.
I/Q data acquisition is not compatible with other measurement functions. Therefore, all
other measurement functions are switched off as soon as the I/Q measurement func-
tion is switched on. The trace display is also switched off by this command. Therefore,
all traces are set to "BLANK".

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 868

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode

To switch trace display back on, use the TRACe<n>:IQ:EVAL command.

Note: to enable the evaluation functions of the IQ Analyzer, you must also execute the
command TRACe<n>:IQ:EVAL.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: TRAC:IQ ON
Switches on I/Q data acquisition
Manual operation: See "I/Q Analyzer" on page 469

TRACe<n>:IQ:TPISample?
This command determines the time offset of the trigger in the sample (trigger position
in sample = TPIS). This value can only be determined in triggered measurements
using external or IFPower triggers, otherwise the value is 0. The value is not user-
definable.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: TRAC:IQ:TPIS?
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Trigger Offset" on page 387

10.5.2 I/Q Gating

Sometimes in spectrum analysis, measurements are based on a certain length of time

called the gate area. With I/Q gating, you can define the gate area using the gate
length, the distance between the periods and the number of periods. The gate length
and the distance between the capture periods are specified in samples.

I/Q gating is only available using remote commands; manual configuration is not possi-
ble.

Using I/Q gating, the gate area can be defined using the following methods:
● Edge triggered recording
After a trigger signal, the gate period is defined by a gate length and a gate dis-
tance. All data in the gate period is recorded until the required number of samples
has been recorded.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 869

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator

SCPI command: TRACE:IQ:EGATE:TYPE EDGE, see TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:

TYPE on page 867
● Level triggered recording
After a trigger signal, all data is recorded in which the gate signal is set to 1, which
means it has exceeded a level. In this case, the gate signal can be generated by
the IFP trigger, for example: each time the IFP level is exceeded, the IFP trigger
signal is set to 1 and the samples in this area are recorded as gate samples.

The number of complex samples to be recorded prior to the trigger event can be
selected (see TRACe<n>:IQ:SET on page 860) for all available trigger sources,
except for "Free Run".
SCPI command: TRACE:IQ:EGATE:TYPE LEV, see TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:
TYPE on page 867

10.6 Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Genera-

tor
The following commands control the optional (internal or external) tracking generator.
● Controlling the Internal Tracking Generator.......................................................... 870
● Controlling the External Tracking Generator.........................................................877

10.6.1 Controlling the Internal Tracking Generator

OUTPut[:STATe]............................................................................................................871
[SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]........................................................................ 871
[SENSe:]CORRection:METHod....................................................................................... 872

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 870

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator

[SENSe:]CORRection:RECall..........................................................................................872
[SENSe:]CORRection[:STATe]........................................................................................ 872
SOURce<n>:AM:STATe................................................................................................. 873
SOURce<n>:DM:STATe................................................................................................. 873
SOURce<n>:FM:DEViation............................................................................................. 874
SOURce<n>:FM:STATe................................................................................................. 874
SOURce<n>:FREQuency:OFFSet................................................................................... 875
SOURce<n>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude].......................................................875
SOURce<n>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet............................................................. 875
SOURce<n>:POWer:MODE............................................................................................876
SOURce<n>:POWer:STARt............................................................................................ 876
SOURce<n>:POWer:STOP.............................................................................................877

OUTPut[:STATe] <State>
This command switches the selected tracking generator on or off.
The command is available with a tracking generator (option R&S FSV-B9).
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: OUTP1 ON
Switches on the external tracking generator 1.
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Source RF Internal (On/ Off)" on page 486

[SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] <MeasType>
This command initiates a reference measurement (calibration). The reference mea-
surement is the basis for the measurement normalization.
To obtain a correct reference measurement, a complete sweep with synchronization to
the end of the sweep must have been carried out. This is only possible in the single
sweep mode.
The command is available if a tracking generator is installed and has been turned on.
Parameters:
<MeasType> THRough
"TRANsmission" mode: calibration with direct connection
between tracking generator and device input
"REFLection" mode: calibration with short circuit at the input
OPEN
only allowed in "REFLection" mode: calibration with open input

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 871

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator

Example: INIT:CONT OFF

Selects single sweep operation
CORR:COLL THR;*WAI
Starts the measurement of reference data using direct connec-
tion between generator and device input and waits for the sweep
end.
Usage: Setting only
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Calibrate Reflection Short" on page 486
See "Calibrate Reflection Open" on page 487

[SENSe:]CORRection:METHod
This command selects the type of measurement to be performed with the tracking gen-
erator.
The command is available if a tracking generator is installed and has been turned on.
Parameters:
REFLection
Selects reflection measurements.
TRANsmission
Selects transmission measurements.
*RST: TRANsmission
Example: CORR:METH TRAN
Sets the type of measurement to "transmission".
Manual operation: See "Calibrate Transmission" on page 486
See "Calibrate Reflection Short" on page 486
See "Calibrate Reflection Open" on page 487

[SENSe:]CORRection:RECall
This command restores the measurement configuration used for calibration.
The command is available if a tracking generator is installed and has been turned on.
Example: CORR:REC
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Recall" on page 487

[SENSe:]CORRection[:STATe] <State>
This command turns correction of measurement results (normalization) on and off.
The command is available after you have defined a reference trace for the selected
measurement type with [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] on page 871.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 872

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator

The command is available if a tracking generator is installed and has been turned on.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CORR ON
Activates normalization.
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Normalize" on page 487

SOURce<n>:AM:STATe <State>
This command turns external amplitude modulation of the tracking generator on and
off.
External I/Q modulation is switched off, if active. This command is available with a
tracking generator (option R&S FSV-B9).
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR2:AM:STAT ON
Switches on the external amplitude modulation of the tracking
generator for screen B.
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "External AM" on page 488
See "Modulation OFF" on page 489

SOURce<n>:DM:STATe <State>
This command turns external I/Q modulation of the tracking generator on and off.
External AM and external FM are switched off, if active. This command is available
with a tracking generator (option R&S FSV-B9).
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 873

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator

Example: SOUR2:DM:STAT ON
Switches on the external I/Q modulation of the tracking genera-
tor for screen B.
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "External I/Q" on page 488
See "Modulation OFF" on page 489
See "External IQ" on page 508

SOURce<n>:FM:DEViation <Frequency>
This command defines the maximum frequency deviation at 1 V input voltage at the
FM input of the tracking generator.
This command is available with a tracking generator (option R&S FSV-B9).
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<Frequency> The possible value range is 100 Hz to 10 MHz in steps of 10 Hz.
Range: 100 Hz to 10 MHz
Increment: 10 Hz
*RST: 100 Hz
Example: SOUR1:FM:DEV 1 MHz
Sets the maximum frequency deviation of the tracking generator
for screen A to 1 MHz.
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "External FM" on page 488

SOURce<n>:FM:STATe <State>
This command turns external frequency modulation of the tracking generator on and
off.
External I/Q modulation is switched off, if active. This command is available with a
tracking generator (option R&S FSV-B9).
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR2:FM:STAT ON
Switches on the external frequency modulation of the tracking
generator for screen B.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 874

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator

Usage: SCPI confirmed

Manual operation: See "External FM" on page 488
See "Modulation OFF" on page 489

SOURce<n>:FREQuency:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines a frequency offset of the tracking generator. Frequency-con-
verting DUTs can be measured with this setting.
External I/Q modulation is switched off, if active. This command is available with a
tracking generator (option R&S FSV-B9).
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<Offset> Note that the values (start frequency – tracking frequency offset)
and (stop frequency – tracking frequency offset) are both > 1
kHz or both < –1 kHz.
Range: -200 MHz to 200 MHz
*RST: 0 Hz
Example: SOUR:FREQ:OFFS 10MHz
Defines a frequency offset of the tracking generator of 10 MHz.
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Frequency Offset" on page 495

SOURce<n>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] <Level>
This command defines the output level of the tracking generator.
Parameters:
<Level> Ouput level in dBm. The level range is specified in the data
sheet.
*RST: -20 dBm
Example: SOUR:POW -20dBm
Sets the tracking generator level to -20 dBm.
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Source Power" on page 486
See "Source Power" on page 495

SOURce<n>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines a level offset for the tracking generator level. Thus, for exam-
ple, attenuators or amplifiers at the output of the tracking generator can be taken into
account for the setting.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 875

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator

Parameters:
<Offset> Range: -200 dB to +200 dB
*RST: 0dB
Example: SOUR:POW:OFFS -10dB
Sets the level offset of the tracking generator to – 20 dBm.
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Power Offset" on page 495
See "Power Offset" on page 497

SOURce<n>:POWer:MODE <Mode>
This command turns the power sweep on and off.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<Mode> FIXed
Power sweep is off.
SWEep
Power sweep is on.
If the power sweep is on, the R&S ESR enters the time domain
(span = 0 Hz). During the sweep time, the power at the internal
tracking generator is changed linearly from start power to stop
power. The start and stop power for the power sweep are dis-
played in the diagram header ("INT TG <start power>… <stop
power>").
*RST: FIXed
Example: SOUR:POW:MODE SWE
Activates power sweep.
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Power Sweep (On /Off)" on page 489

SOURce<n>:POWer:STARt <Power>
This command defines the start power of the power sweep.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<Power> Range: -30 dBm to +5 dBm
*RST: 0 dBm
Example: SOUR:POW:STAR -20dBm

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 876

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator

Usage: SCPI confirmed

Manual operation: See "Power Sweep Start" on page 489

SOURce<n>:POWer:STOP <Power>
This command defines the stop power of the power sweep. The stop value can be
smaller than the start value.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<Power> Range: -30 dBm to +5 dBm
*RST: 0 dBm
Example: SOUR:POW:STOP -20dBm
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Power Sweep Stop" on page 489

10.6.2 Controlling the External Tracking Generator

[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:GENerator................................................................. 877
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency............................................................... 878
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency:COUPling[:STATe]................................... 878
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:DENominator............................. 879
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:NUMerator.................................879
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency:OFFSet<m>.............................................880
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency:SWEep[:STATe].......................................881
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:POWer[:LEVel]........................................................... 881
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:ROSCillator[:SOURce]................................................ 881
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>[:STATe]..................................................................... 882
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:ADDRess..........................883
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:INTerface.................................. 883
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:LINK..........................................884
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:TYPE........................................ 884

[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:GENerator <Name>
This command uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor
with up to 625 points. The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and
stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix.trd under c:\r_s\instr\trd.
The frequency points are allocated in equidistant steps between start and stop fre-
quency. The generated transducer factor can be further adapted using the commands
of the [SENSe<source>:]CORRection:TRANSducer subsystem (see [SENSe:
]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete on page 922).
This command is only available if the R&S ESR option B10 (External Tracking Genera-
tor) is installed and normalization is switched on.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 877

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator

Parameters:
<Name> '<name>
Example: CORR:TRAN:GEN 'SMU01'
Creates the transducer file C:\r_s\instr\trd\SMU01.trd.
Manual operation: See "Save As Trd Factor" on page 488

SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency <Frequency>
This command defines a fixed source frequency for the external tracking generator.
This command is requires the optional External Tracking Generator.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
window
<m> 1|2
tracking generator
Parameters:
<Frequency> Source frequency of the external tracking generator.
*RST: RST value
Example: SOUR:EXT2:FREQ 10MHz
Manual operation: See "(Fixed) Generator Frequency" on page 497

SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency:COUPling[:STATe] <State>
This command couples or decouples the analyzer and generator frequencies.
This command is requires the optional External Tracking Generator.
Suffix: .
<generator> 1|2
tracking generator
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
ON
OFF
The fixed frequency defined using SOURce<n>:
EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency is used as a source fre-
quency.
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR:EXT2:FREQ:COUP ON
Manual operation: See "Source Frequency Coupling" on page 497

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 878

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator

SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:DENominator <Value>
This command defines the denominator of the factor with which the analyzer frequency
is multiplied in order to obtain the transmit frequency of the selected generator.
This command is only valid for R&S ESR option External Tracking Generator
(R&S FSV-B10).
Select the multiplication factor such that the frequency range of the generator is not
exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the ana-
lyzer:

Numerator
FGenerator  FAnalyzer   FOffset
Deno min ator

Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<generator> 1|2
tracking generator
For Noise Figure measurements (K30): 1 only
Parameters:
<Value> <numeric value>
*RST: 1
Example: SOUR:EXT:FREQ:NUM 4"
"SOUR:EXT:FREQ:DEN 3"
Sets a multiplication factor of 4/3, i.e. the transmit frequency of
the generator is 4/3 times the analyzer frequency.
Mode: A, NF
Manual operation: See "Generator Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/Offset)"
on page 497

SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:NUMerator <Value>
This command defines the numerator of the factor with which the analyzer frequency is
multiplied in order to obtain the transmit frequency of the selected generator.
This command is only valid for R&S ESR option External Tracking Generator
(R&S FSV-B10).
Select the multiplication factor such that the frequency range of the generator is not
exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the ana-
lyzer:

Numerator
FGenerator  FAnalyzer   FOffset
Deno min ator

Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 879

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator

<generator> 1|2
tracking generator
For Noise Figure measurements (K30): 1 only
Parameters:
<Value> <numeric value>
*RST: 1
Example: SOUR:EXT:FREQ:NUM 4"
"SOUR:EXT:FREQ:DEN 3"
Sets a multiplication factor of 4/3, i.e. the transmit frequency of
the generator is 4/3 times the analyzer frequency.
Mode: A, NF
Manual operation: See "Generator Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/Offset)"
on page 497

SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency:OFFSet<m> <Offset>
This command defines the frequency offset of the selected generator with reference to
the receive frequency.
This command is only valid for R&S ESR option External Tracking Generator
(R&S FSV-B10).
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<generator> 1|2
tracking generator
For Noise Figure measurements (K30): 1 only
<m> 1|2
offset (for Noise Figure measurements (K30) only)
Parameters:
<Offset> <numeric value>, specified in Hz, kHz, MHz or GHz, rounded to
the nearest Hz
*RST: 0 Hz
Select the multiplication factor such that the frequency range of
the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied
to the start and stop frequency of the analyzer:

For Noise Figure measurements (R&S FSV-K30), the following

formula applies:
Generator Frequency = [(LO + Offset 1) * Factor 1 / Factor 2)] +
Offset 2
Example: SOUR:EXT:FREQ:OFFS 1GHZ
Sets a frequency offset of the generator transmit frequency com-
pared to the analyzer receive frequency of 1 GHz.
Mode: A, NF

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 880

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator

Manual operation: See "Generator Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/Offset)"

on page 497

SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency:SWEep[:STATe] <State>
This command activates or deactivates the frequency sweep for the selected genera-
tor.
This command is requires the optional External Tracking Generator.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<generator> 1|2
external generator
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR:EXT1:FREQ:SWE ON
Activates the frequency sweep for external generator 1.

SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:POWer[:LEVel] <Level>
This command sets the output power of the selected generator.
This command is only valid for R&S ESR option External Tracking Generator
(R&S FSV-B10).
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<generator> 1|2
tracking generator
For Noise Figure measurements (K30): 1 only
Parameters:
<Level> <numeric value>
*RST: -20 dBm
Example: SOUR:EXT:POW -30dBm
Sets the generator level to -30 dBm
Mode: A, NF
Manual operation: See "Source Power" on page 497

SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:ROSCillator[:SOURce] <Source>
This command controls selection of the reference oscillator for the external tracking
generator (requires option R&S FSV-B10).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 881

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator

If the external reference oscillator is selected, the reference signal must be connected
to the rear panel of the instrument.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<generator> 1|2
tracking generator
For Noise Figure measurements (K30): 1 only
Parameters:
<Source> INTernal
the internal reference is used
EXTernal
the external reference is used; if none is available, an error flag
is displayed in the status bar
EAUTo
the external reference is used as long as it is available, then the
instrument switches to the internal reference (Spectrum mode
only)
*RST: INT
Example: SOUR:EXT:ROSC EXT
Switches to external reference oscillator
Mode: A, NF
Manual operation: See "Reference" on page 500

SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>[:STATe] <State>
This command activates or deactivates the external generator indicated by the suffix
<generator>.
This command is requires the optional External Tracking Generator.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<generator> 1|2
external generator
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 882

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator

Example: SYST:COMM:RDEV:GEN1:TYPE 'SMP02'

Selects SMP02 as generator 1.
"SYST:COMM:RDEV:GEN1:LINK TTL"
Selects GPIB + TTL link as interface.
"SYST:COMM:RDEV:GEN1:ADDR 28"
Sets the generator address to 28.
"SOUR:EXT1:FREQ:SWE ON"
Activates the frequency sweep for generator 1.
"SOUR:EXT ON"
Activates the external generator
Manual operation: See "Source RF Internal (On/ Off)" on page 486

SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:ADDRess
<Number>
Changes the IEC/IEEE-bus address of the external tracking generator.
This command is only available if the R&S ESR option B10 (External Tracking Genera-
tor) is installed.
Suffix: .
<generator> 1|2
tracking generator
For Noise Figure measurements (K30): 1 only
Parameters:
<Number> Range: 0 to 30
*RST: 28
Example: SYST:COMM:GPIB:RDEV:GEN1:ADDR 15
Mode: A, NF

SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:INTerface <Type>
Defines the interface used for the connection to the external tracking generator.
This command is only available if the R&S ESR option B10 (External Tracking Genera-
tor) is installed.
Suffix: .
<generator> 1|2
tracking generator
For Noise Figure measurements (K30): 1 only
Parameters:
<Type> GPIB | TCPip
*RST: GPIB
Example: SYST:COMM:RDEV:GEN1:INT TCP
Mode: A, NF
Manual operation: See "Interface" on page 499

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 883

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator

SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:LINK <Type>
This command selects the link type of the external generator if the GPIB interface is
used.
The difference between the two GPIB operating modes is the execution speed. While,
during GPIB operation, each frequency to be set is transmitted to the generator sepa-
rately, a whole frequency list can be programmed in one go if the TTL interface is also
used. Frequency switching can then be performed per TTL handshake which results in
considerable speed advantages.
Notes: Only one of the two generators can be operated via the TTL interface at a time.
The other generator must be configured via GPIB.
For Noise Figure measurements (K30), TTL synchronization has no effect.
This command is only available if the R&S ESR option B10 (External Tracking Genera-
tor) is installed.
Suffix: .
<generator> 1|2
tracking generator
For Noise Figure measurements (K30): 1 only
Parameters:
<Type> GPIB | TTL
GPIB
GPIB connection without TTL synchronization (for all generators
of other manufacturers and some Rohde & Schwarz devices)
TTL
GPIB connection with TTL synchronization (if available; for most
Rohde&Schwarz devices)
*RST: GPIB
Example: SYST:COMM:RDEV:GEN:LINK TTL
Selects GPIB + TTL interface for generator operation.
Mode: A, NF
Manual operation: See "TTL Synchronization" on page 500
See "Address" on page 500

SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:TYPE <Name>
This command selects the type of external generator. For a list of the available genera-
tor types including the associated interface, see chapter 7.2.1, "Overview of Genera-
tors Supported by the R&S ESR", on page 491.
If no external generator type is currently configured, the query returns "NONE".
This command is only available if the R&S ESR option B10 (External Tracking Genera-
tor) is installed.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 884

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Common Commands

Suffix: .
<generator> 1|2
tracking generator
For Noise Figure measurements (K30): 1 only
Parameters:
<Name> Generator name | NONE
*RST: NONE
Example: SYST:COMM:RDEV:GEN2:TYPE 'SME02'
Selects SME02 as generator 2
Mode: A, NF
Manual operation: See "Type" on page 499

10.7 Common Commands

Common commands are described in the IEEE 488.2 (IEC 625-2) standard. These
commands have the same effect and are employed in the same way on different devi-
ces. The headers of these commands consist of "*" followed by three letters. Many
common commands are related to the Status Reporting System.
Available common commands:
*CAL?...........................................................................................................................885
*CLS.............................................................................................................................886
*ESE.............................................................................................................................886
*ESR?...........................................................................................................................886
*IDN?............................................................................................................................886
*IST?............................................................................................................................ 887
*OPC............................................................................................................................ 887
*OPT?...........................................................................................................................887
*PCB............................................................................................................................ 887
*PRE............................................................................................................................ 887
*PSC............................................................................................................................ 888
*RST.............................................................................................................................888
*SRE............................................................................................................................ 888
*STB?...........................................................................................................................888
*TRG............................................................................................................................ 888
*TST?........................................................................................................................... 889
*WAI.............................................................................................................................889

*CAL?
Calibration query
Initiates a calibration of the instrument and subsequently queries the calibration status.
Responses > 0 indicate errors.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 885

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Common Commands

Note: If you start a self-alignment remotely, then select the "Local" softkey while the
alignment is still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state
after the alignment is completed.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Self Alignment" on page 520

*CLS
Clear status
Sets the status byte (STB), the standard event register (ESR) and the EVENt part of
the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero. The command does not
alter the mask and transition parts of the registers. It clears the output buffer.
Usage: Setting only

*ESE <Value>
Event status enable
Sets the event status enable register to the specified value. The query returns the con-
tents of the event status enable register in decimal form.
Parameters:
<Value> Range: 0 to 255

*ESR?
Event status read
Returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form and subsequently
sets the register to zero.
Return values:
<Contents> Range: 0 to 255
Usage: Query only

*IDN?
Identification
Returns the instrument identification.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "*IDN Format Leg./New" on page 526
See "Versions+Options" on page 532

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 886

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Common Commands

*IST?
Individual status query
Returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form. The IST flag is the status bit
which is sent during a parallel poll.
Return values:
<ISTflag> 0|1
Usage: Query only

*OPC
Operation complete
Sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been execu-
ted. This bit can be used to initiate a service request. The query form writes a "1" into
the output buffer as soon as all preceding commands have been executed. This is
used for command synchronization.

*OPT?
Option identification query
Queries the options included in the instrument. For a list of all available options and
their description refer to the data sheet.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Versions+Options" on page 532

*PCB <Address>
Pass control back
Indicates the controller address to which remote control is returned after termination of
the triggered action.
Setting parameters:
<Address> Range: 0 to 30
Usage: Setting only

*PRE <Value>
Parallel poll register enable
Sets parallel poll enable register to the indicated value. The query returns the contents
of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form.
Parameters:
<Value> Range: 0 to 255

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 887

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Common Commands

*PSC <Action>
Power on status clear
Determines whether the contents of the ENABle registers are preserved or reset when
the instrument is switched on. Thus a service request can be triggered when the instru-
ment is switched on, if the status registers ESE and SRE are suitably configured. The
query reads out the contents of the "power-on-status-clear" flag.
Parameters:
<Action> 0|1
0
The contents of the status registers are preserved.
1
Resets the status registers.

*RST
Reset
Sets the instrument to a defined default status. The default settings are indicated in the
description of commands.
The command is equivalent to SYSTem:PRESet.
Usage: Setting only

*SRE <Contents>
Service request enable
Sets the service request enable register to the indicated value. This command deter-
mines under which conditions a service request is triggered.
Parameters:
<Contents> Contents of the service request enable register in decimal form.
Bit 6 (MSS mask bit) is always 0.
Range: 0 to 255

*STB?
Status byte query
Reads the contents of the status byte in decimal form.
Usage: Query only

*TRG
Trigger

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 888

R&S®ESR Remote Control
System Configuration

Triggers all actions waiting for a trigger event. In particular, *TRG generates a manual
trigger signal. This common command complements the commands of the TRIGger
subsystem.
Usage: Event

*TST?
Self-test query
Initiates self-tests of the instrument and returns an error code in decimal form (see Ser-
vice Manual supplied with the instrument). "0" indicates no errors occured.
Note: If you start a self-test remotely, then select the "Local" softkey while the test is
still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the test is
completed. In this case, the self-test cannot be aborted.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Selftest" on page 536

*WAI
Wait to continue
Prevents servicing of the subsequent commands until all preceding commands have
been executed and all signals have settled (see also command synchronization and
*OPC).
Usage: Event

10.8 System Configuration

● General System Configuration.............................................................................. 889
● Checking the System Configuration......................................................................894
● Coupling Parameters............................................................................................ 897
● Controlling In- and Ouputs.................................................................................... 901
● Configuring the Reference Frequency.................................................................. 903
● Calibrating the R&S ESR...................................................................................... 905
● Using Service Functions....................................................................................... 907

10.8.1 General System Configuration

SYSTem:APPLication:SRECovery[:STATe]...................................................................... 890
SYSTem:CLOGging....................................................................................................... 890
SYSTem:SHUTdown......................................................................................................891
SYSTem:COMPatible..................................................................................................... 891
SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate.............................................................................................. 891
SYSTem:FIRMware:UPDate........................................................................................... 891

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 889

R&S®ESR Remote Control
System Configuration

SYSTem:FORMat:IDENt.................................................................................................892
SYSTem:KLOCk............................................................................................................ 892
SYSTem:PRESet...........................................................................................................892
SYSTem:PRESet:COMPatible.........................................................................................892
SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume............................................................................................ 893
SYSTem:TIME...............................................................................................................893
SYSTem:TIME:TSTamp?................................................................................................893
SYSTem:VERSion?....................................................................................................... 893
SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel...............................................................................................894
SYSTem:DEVice:ID?......................................................................................................894
SYSTem:DATE..............................................................................................................894

SYSTem:APPLication:SRECovery[:STATe] <State>
Controls instrument behavior when switching between measurement applications, e.g.
from "Spectrum" to "Analog Demod" and back.
If activated, the current instrument settings are stored when you switch to a different
application. When you switch back to the previous application, the corresponding
instrument settings are restored. Thus, the settings of the individual applications are
independant of each other.
If deactivated (default), only a few parameters of the current instrument setting are
passed between applications (e.g. center frequency, level settings).
Note that although the default value is "OFF", this parameter is not reset using the
PRESET key. Thus it must be deactivated manually, if necessary.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF (not restored using the "PRESET" function)
Example: SYST:APPL:SREC ON
Manual operation: See "Application Setup Recovery" on page 534

SYSTem:CLOGging <State>
This command turns logging of remote commands on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON
Writes all remote commands that have been sent to a file.
The destination is C:
\R_S\instr\ScpiLogging\ScpiLog.txt.
OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "I/O Logging (On/Off)" on page 527

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 890

R&S®ESR Remote Control
System Configuration

SYSTem:SHUTdown
This command shuts down the instrument.
Usage: Event

SYSTem:COMPatible <Mode>
Sets the device in a state compatible to previous R&S signal analyzers, e.g. regarding
the number of sweep points.
Parameters:
<Mode> DEFault | FSU | FSP
Example: SYST:COMP FSP
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Compatibility Mode" on page 523
See "Mode Default" on page 524
See "Mode R&S FSP" on page 524
See "Mode R&S FSU" on page 524

SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate <State>
In remote control mode, this command switches on or off the instrument display. If
switched on, only the diagrams, traces and display fields are displayed and updated.
The best performance is obtained if the display output is switched off during remote
control.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: SYST:DISP:UPD ON
Manual operation: See "Display Update (On/Off)" on page 526

SYSTem:FIRMware:UPDate
This command starts a firmware update using the *.msi files in the selected directory.
The default path is D:\FW_UPDATE. The path is changed via the MMEMory:COMMent
command. To store the update files the MMEMory:DATA command is used.
Only user accounts with administrator rights can perform a firmware update.
Example: SYST:FIRM:UPD 'D:\FW_UPDATE'
Starts the firmware update from directory "D:\FW_UPDATE".
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Firmware Update" on page 534

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 891

R&S®ESR Remote Control
System Configuration

SYSTem:FORMat:IDENt
This command defines the response format to the *IDN? on page 886 command. This
function is intended for re-use of existing control programs together with the R&S ESR.
Parameters:
FSL | LEGacy | NEW
LEGacy
Format is compatible to the R&S FSP/FSU/FSQ family
NEW
R&S ESR format
FSL
Format is compatible to the R&S FSL family
*RST: not reset!
Example: SYST:FORM:IDEN LEG
Adapts the return value of *IDN? to the R&S FSP/FSU/FSQ fam-
ily.
Manual operation: See "*IDN Format Leg./New" on page 526

SYSTem:KLOCk <State>
This command activates the local lockout (remote control) or returns to the local mode.
Parameters:
<State> ON
LLO (local lockout)
OFF
GTL (go to local)
*RST: OFF
Example: SYST:KLOK ON
Activates LLO (remote control)

SYSTem:PRESet
This command initiates an instrument reset.
The effect of this command corresponds to that of the PRESET key with manual oper-
ation or to the *RST command. For details on preset settings refer to chapter 5.2.1,
"Initializing the Configuration – PRESET Key", on page 351.
Example: SYST:PRES
Usage: SCPI confirmed

SYSTem:PRESet:COMPatible <Mode>
This command selects the type of settings that are restored when you preset the
instrument.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 892

R&S®ESR Remote Control
System Configuration

Parameters:
<Mode> RECeiver
Restore the default settings defined for Receiver mode.
SANanalyzer
Restore the default settings defined for Spectrum mode.
Manual operation: See "Preset Receiver" on page 535
See "Preset Spectrum" on page 535

SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume <Volume>
This command defines the volume of the built-in loudspeaker for demodulated signals.
Parameters:
<Volume> Range: 0 to 1
*RST: 0.5
Example: SYST:SPE:VOL 0
Switches the loudspeaker to mute.

SYSTem:TIME <Time>
This command sets the internal clock. The sequence of entry is hour, minute, second.
Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to set the time.
Parameters:
<Time> 0 to 23, 0 to 59, 0 to 59
Example: SYST:TIME 12,30,30
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Time+Date" on page 527

SYSTem:TIME:TSTamp?
This command queries the time and date from the internal real time clock.
Return values:
<TimeStamp>
Example: SYST:TIME:TSTamp?
Usage: Query only

SYSTem:VERSion?
This command queries the number of the SCPI version, which is relevant for the instru-
ment.
This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Example: SYST:VERS?

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 893

R&S®ESR Remote Control
System Configuration

Usage: Query only

SCPI confirmed

SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel <State>
This command activates or deactivates the display of the front panel keys on the
screen.
With the display activated, the instrument can be operated on the screen using the
mouse by pressing the corresponding buttons.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: SYST:DISP:FPAN ON
Manual operation: See "Soft Frontpanel" on page 527

SYSTem:DEVice:ID?
Returns the unique ID of the R&S ESR instrument.
Example: SYST:DEV:ID?
1307.9002K07-100123-aZ
Usage: Query only
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Versions+Options" on page 532

SYSTem:DATE <Date>
This command is used to enter the date for the internal calendar.
The sequence of entry is year, month, day.
Only user accounts with administrator rights can set the date.
Parameters:
<Date> 1980 to 2099, 1 to 12, 1 to 31
Example: SYST:DATE 2000,6,1
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Time+Date" on page 527

10.8.2 Checking the System Configuration

DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:BIOSinfo?.................................................................................895
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:HWINfo?.................................................................................. 895
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:VERSinfo?................................................................................895
SYSTem:IDENtify:FACTory.............................................................................................896

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 894

R&S®ESR Remote Control
System Configuration

SYSTem:IDENtify[:STRing]............................................................................................. 896
SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:ALL............................................................................................ 896
SYSTem:ERRor:LIST?................................................................................................... 897
SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?................................................................................................897

DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:BIOSinfo?
This command queries the CPU board BIOS version.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Return values:
<Version> ASCII string containing the BIOS version, e.g. 47.11.
Example: DIAG:SERV:BIOS?
Returns the BIOS version.
Usage: Query only

DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:VERSinfo?
This command queries information about the hardware and software components.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 895

R&S®ESR Remote Control
System Configuration

Return values:
<Information> String containing the version of hardware and software compo-
nents including the types of licenses for installed firmware
options.
Usage: Query only
SCPI confirmed

SYSTem:IDENtify:FACTory
Resets the response to the *IDN? query to the default value, e.g. after a user string
was defined using the ID String User softkey.
Example: SYST:IDEN:FACT
*IDN?
Response:
Rohde&Schwarz,R&S ESR-7,
1307.9002K07/101768,1.05
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "ID String Factory" on page 523

SYSTem:IDENtify[:STRing] <String>
Sets the response to the *IDN? query to the defined string, e.g. after the default value
was reset using the ID String Factory softkey.
Parameters:
<String>
Example: Set the response to 'MyDevice':
SYST:IDEN:STR 'MyDevice'
Query the response:
SYST:IDEN:STR?
Response:
MyDevice
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "ID String User" on page 523

SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:ALL
This command deletes all entries in the table SYSTEM MESSAGES.
Example: SYST:ERR:CLE:ALL
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Clear All Messages" on page 533

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 896

R&S®ESR Remote Control
System Configuration

SYSTem:ERRor:LIST?
This command reads all system messages and returns a list of comma separated
strings. Each string corresponds to an entry in the table SYSTEM MESSAGES.
If the error list is empty, an empty string " is returned.
This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Example: SYST:ERR:LIST?
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "System Messages" on page 533

SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?
This command queries the earliest error queue entry and deletes it.
Positive error numbers indicate device-specific errors, negative error numbers are error
messages defined by SCPI. If the error queue is empty, the error number 0, "No error",
is returned.
This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Example: STAT:ERR?
Usage: Query only
SCPI confirmed

10.8.3 Coupling Parameters

INSTrument:COUPle:ATTenuation...................................................................................897
INSTrument:COUPle:BANDwidth.....................................................................................898
INSTrument:COUPle:CENTer......................................................................................... 898
INSTrument:COUPle:DEModulation.................................................................................898
INSTrument:COUPle:GAIN............................................................................................. 899
INSTrument:COUPle:LIMit.............................................................................................. 899
INSTrument:COUPle:MARKer.........................................................................................899
INSTrument:COUPle:PRESelector...................................................................................900
INSTrument:COUPle:PROT............................................................................................ 900
INSTrument:COUPle:SPAN............................................................................................ 900

INSTrument:COUPle:ATTenuation <State>
This command turns synchronization of the attenuation and unit between measure-
ment channels on and off.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 897

R&S®ESR Remote Control
System Configuration

Parameters:
<State> ALL | 1
Turns on synchronization.
NONE | 0
Turns off synchronization.
*RST: ALL
Example: INST:COUP:ATT ALL
Synchronizes the attenuation.

INSTrument:COUPle:BANDwidth <State>
This command turns synchronization of the resolution bandwidth (and filter type)
between measurement channels on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ALL | 1
Turns on synchronization.
NONE | 0
Turns on synchronization.
*RST: NONE
Example: INST:COUP:BWID ALL
Synchronizes the resolution bandwidth.

INSTrument:COUPle:CENTer <State>
This command turns synchronization of the frequency between measurement channels
on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ALL | 1
Turns on synchronization.
NONE | 0
Turns off synchronization.
*RST: ALL
Example: INST:COUP:CENT ALL
Synchronizes the receiver (or center) frequency.

INSTrument:COUPle:DEModulation <State>
This command turns synchronization of the audio demodulator configuration between
measurement channels on and off.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 898

R&S®ESR Remote Control
System Configuration

Parameters:
<State> ALL | 1
Turns on synchronization.
NONE | 0
Turns off synchronization.
*RST: NONE
Example: INST:COUP:DEM ALL
Synchronizes the audio demodulator configuration.

INSTrument:COUPle:GAIN <State>
This command turns synchronization of the preamplifier configuration between mea-
surement channels on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ALL | 1
Turns on synchronization.
NONE | 0
Turns off synchronization.
*RST: NONE
Example: INST:COUP:GAIN ALL
Synchronizes the preamplifier configuration.

INSTrument:COUPle:LIMit <State>
This command turns synchronization of limit lines between measurement channels on
and off.
Parameters:
<State> ALL | 1
Turns on synchronization.
Limit lines have to be compatible to the x-axis and y-axis config-
uration for successful synchronization.
NONE | 0
Turns off synchronization.
*RST: ALL
Example: INST:COUP:LIM ALL
Synchronizes the limit lines.

INSTrument:COUPle:MARKer <State>
This command turns synchronization of the marker frequency between measurement
channels on and off.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 899

R&S®ESR Remote Control
System Configuration

Parameters:
<State> ALL | 1
Turns on synchronization.
NONE | 0
Turns off synchronization.
*RST: NONE
Example: INST:COUP:MARK ALL
Synchronizes the receiver frequency and the marker frequency.

INSTrument:COUPle:PRESelector <State>
This command turns synchronization of the preselector state between measurement
channels on and off.
Note that it is not possible to turn the preselector off in receiver mode. Thus, the prese-
lector is always turned on when you enter receiver mode.
Parameters:
<State> ALL | 1
Turns on synchronization.
NONE | 0
Turns off synchronization.
*RST: ALL
Example: INST:COUP:PRES ALL
Synchronizes the preselector configuration.

INSTrument:COUPle:PROT <State>
This command turns synchronization of the input protection between measurement
channels on and off.
(➙ 10 dB Min)
Parameters:
<State> ALL | 1
Turns on synchronization.
NONE | 0
Turns off synchronization.
*RST: NONE
Example: INST:COUP:PROT ALL
Synchronizes the "10 dB Min" parameter.

INSTrument:COUPle:SPAN <State>
This command turns synchronization of the start and stop frequency between mea-
surement channels on and off.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 900

R&S®ESR Remote Control
System Configuration

Parameters:
<State> ALL | 1
Turns on synchronization.
NONE | 0
Turns off synchronization.
*RST: NONE
Example: INST:COUP:SPAN ALL
Synchronizes the start and stop frequency.

10.8.4 Controlling In- and Ouputs

DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:NSOurce.................................................................................. 901
INPut:UPORt?............................................................................................................... 901
INPut:UPORt:STATe...................................................................................................... 901
OUTPut:IF[:SOURce]..................................................................................................... 902
OUTPut:TRIGger........................................................................................................... 902
OUTPut:UPORt............................................................................................................. 902
OUTPut:UPORt:STATe.................................................................................................. 903
INPut:PRESelection:STATe............................................................................................ 903

DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:NSOurce <State>
This command switches the 28 V supply of the noise source on the front panel on or
off.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: DIAG:SERV:NSO ON
Manual operation: See "Noise Source" on page 393

INPut:UPORt?
This command queries the control lines of the user ports.
Example: INP:UPOR?
Usage: Query only

INPut:UPORt:STATe <State>
This command selects if the user port control lines are used as a input or as a output.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 901

R&S®ESR Remote Control
System Configuration

Parameters:
<State> ON
User port is used as a input.
OFF
User port is used as a output.
*RST: ON
Example: INP:UPOR:STAT ON

OUTPut:IF[:SOURce] <Source>
This command selects the source of the IF output.
Parameters:
<Source> IF
Outputs the intermediate frequency.
OFF
Turns off the output of a signal.
VIDeo
Outputs the video signal (200 mV).
*RST: IF
Example: OUTP:IF VID
Selects the video signal for the IF output connector.
Manual operation: See "Video Output" on page 393

OUTPut:TRIGger <PortLevel>
This command selects level of the Trigger Out port. Thus, you can trigger an additional
device via the external trigger port, for example.
Parameters:
<PortLevel> LOW | HIGH
*RST: LOW
Example: OUTP:TRIG HIGH
Manual operation: See "Trigger Out" on page 393

OUTPut:UPORt <Value>
This command defines the control lines of the user ports.
The assignment of the pin numbers to the bits is as follows:

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Pin N/A N/A 5 3 4 7 6 2

Bits 7 and 6 are not assigned to pins and must always be 0.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 902

R&S®ESR Remote Control
System Configuration

The user port is written to with the given binary pattern. If the user port is programmed
to input instead of output (see INPut:UPORt:STATe on page 901), the output value is
temporarily stored.
Parameters:
<Value> #B00000000 to #B00111111
Example: OUTP:UPOR #B00100100
Sets pins 5 and 7 to 5 V.

OUTPut:UPORt:STATe <State>
This command selects if the user port control lines are used as a input or as a output.
This command switches the control line of the user ports between INPut and OUTPut.
The user port is switched to OUTPut with parameter ON, to INPut with OFF.
Parameters:
<State> ON
User port is used as a input.
ON
User port is used as a output.
*RST: ON
Example: OUTP:UPOR:STAT ON

INPut:PRESelection:STATe <State>
This command turns the preselector on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: INP:PRES:STAT OFF
Turns off the preselector.
Manual operation: See "Preselector (On Off)" on page 393

10.8.5 Configuring the Reference Frequency

[SENSe:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency.....................................................................903
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce........................................................................................ 904
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce:EAUTo?........................................................................... 904

[SENSe:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency <Frequency>
This command defines the frequency of the external reference oscillator.
If the external reference oscillator is selected, the reference signal must be connected
to the rear panel of the instrument.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 903

R&S®ESR Remote Control
System Configuration

Parameters:
<Frequency> Range: 1 MHz to 20 MHz
Example: ROSC:EXT:FREQ 13
Sets the frequency to 13 MHz.
SOUR:EXT:ROSC:EXT:FREQ 13
Usage: SCPI confirmed

[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce <Source>
This command selects the reference oscillator.
If the external reference oscillator is selected, the reference signal must be connected
to the rear panel of the instrument.
Parameters:
<Source> INTernal
The internal reference is used (10 MHz)
EXTernal
The external reference is used; if none is available, an error flag
is displayed in the status bar
EAUTo
The external reference is used as long as it is available, then the
instrument switches to the internal reference
Example: ROSC:SOUR EXT
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Reference Int/Ext" on page 516
See "Show Error Flag" on page 516
See "Auto select Reference" on page 516

[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce:EAUTo?
This command queries the current reference type in case you have activated an auto-
matic switch to the internal reference if the external reference is missing.
Return values:
<Reference> INT
internal reference
EXT
external reference
Example: SENS:ROSC:SOUR:EAUT?
Queries the currently available reference type.
Usage: Query only

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 904

R&S®ESR Remote Control
System Configuration

10.8.6 Calibrating the R&S ESR

CALibration:ABORt........................................................................................................ 905
CALibration[:ALL]?......................................................................................................... 905
CALibration:RESult?.......................................................................................................905
CALibration:STATe........................................................................................................ 906
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:CFRequency.......................................................906
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut[:SELect].......................................................................... 906
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:STESt:RESult?......................................................................... 907
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:TEMPerature:FRONt?............................................................... 907

CALibration:ABORt
This command aborts the current calibration routine.
Example: CAL:ABORt
Aborts calibration.
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed

CALibration[:ALL]?
This command initiates a calibration routine and queries if calibration was successful.
During the acquisition of correction data the instrument does not accept any remote
control commands.
In order to recognize when the acquisition of correction data is completed, the MAV bit
in the status byte can be used. If the associated bit is set in the Service Request
Enable Register, the instrument generates a service request after the acquisition of
correction data has been completed.
Return values:
<CalibrationState> 0
The command returns a '0' if calibration was successful.
Example: *CLS
Resets the status management.
*SRE 16
Enables MAV bit in the Service Request Enable Register.
*CAL?
Starts the correction data recording, and then a service request
is generated.
Usage: Query only
SCPI confirmed

CALibration:RESult?
This command returns the results collected during calibration.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 905

R&S®ESR Remote Control
System Configuration

Return values:
<CalibrationData> String containing the calibration data.
Example: CAL:RES?
would return, e.g.
Total Calibration Status:
PASSED, Date (dd/mm/yyyy): 12/07/2004,
Time: 16:24:54,Runtime: 00.06
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Show Align Results" on page 520

CALibration:STATe <State>
This command includes or excludes calibration data in the actual measurement.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
Example: CAL:STAT OFF
Sets up the instrument to ignore the calibration data.
Usage: SCPI confirmed

DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:CFRequency <Frequency>
This command defines the frequency of the calibration signal.
Before you can use the command, you have to feed in a calibration signal with
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 906.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Frequency> Possible frequencies of the calibration signal are fix.
If you define a frequency that is not available, the R&S ESR
uses the next available frequency. Example: a frequency of
20 MHz is rounded up to the next available frequency
(21.33 MHz).
*RST: 64 MHz
Example: DIAG:SERV:INP:PULS:CFR 128 MHz
Defines a calibration signal frequency of 128 MHz.
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Calibration Frequency RF" on page 536

DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] <Signal>
This command selects the source of the signal.
You can feed in a signal from the RF input or the calibration signal.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 906

R&S®ESR Remote Control
System Configuration

Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Signal> RF
RF input
CALibration
Calibration
*RST: RF
Example: DIAG:SERV:INP CAL
Selects the calibration signal as the input signal
Manual operation: See "RF" on page 536

DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:STESt:RESult?
This command queries the self test results.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Results> String of data containing the results.
The rows of the self test result table are separated by commas.
Example: DIAG:SERV:STES:RES?
would return, e.g.:
"Total Selftest Status:
PASSED", "Date (dd/mm/yyyy): 09/07/2004 TIME:
16:24:54", "Runtime: 00:06", "...
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Selftest Results" on page 536

DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:TEMPerature:FRONt?
This command queries the temperature of the frontend.
Parameters:
<Temperature> Temperature of the frontend.
Example: DIAG:SERV:TEMP:FRON?
Usage: Query only

10.8.7 Using Service Functions

DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction................................................................................908
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction:LASTresult?............................................................. 908
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:DELete........................................................908

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 907

R&S®ESR Remote Control
System Configuration

DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:SAVE..........................................................909
SYSTem:PASSword:RESet............................................................................................ 909
SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable]....................................................................................... 909

DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction <ServiceFunction>
This command starts a service function.
The service functions are available after you have entered the level 1 or level 2 system
password.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<ServiceFunction> String containing the ID of the service function.
The ID of the service function is made up out of five numbers,
separated by a point.
• function group number
• board number
• function number
• parameter 1 (see the Service Manual)
• parameter 2 (see the Service Manual)
Example: DIAG:SERV:SFUN '2.0.2.12.1'
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Service Function" on page 536

DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction:LASTresult?
This command queries the results of the most recent service function you have used.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: DIAG:SERV:SFUN:LAST?
Usage: Query only

DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:DELete
This command deletes the results of the most recent service function you have used.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: DIAG:SERV:SFUN:RES:DEL
Usage: Event

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 908

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Data Management

DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:SAVE <FileName>
This command saves the results of the most recent service function you have used in a
file.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the file name.
Example: DIAG:SERV:SFUN:RES:SAVE "C:\diag"

SYSTem:PASSword:RESet
This command resets the service password.
Example: SYST:PASS:RES
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Reset Password" on page 536

SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable] <Password>
This command enables access to the service functions by means of the password.
Parameters:
<Password> <password>
Example: SYST:PASS XXXX
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Password" on page 536

10.9 Data Management

● Managing Data Files............................................................................................. 909
● Saving and Restoring Customized Data............................................................... 915

10.9.1 Managing Data Files

MMEMory:CATalog?...................................................................................................... 910
MMEMory:CATalog:LONG?............................................................................................ 910
MMEMory:CDIRectory....................................................................................................911
MMEMory:COMMent......................................................................................................911
MMEMory:COPY........................................................................................................... 912
MMEMory:DATA............................................................................................................ 912

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 909

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Data Management

MMEMory:DELete..........................................................................................................913
MMEMory:MDIRectory................................................................................................... 913
MMEMory:MOVE........................................................................................................... 913
MMEMory:MSIS.............................................................................................................914
MMEMory:NAME........................................................................................................... 914
MMEMory:RDIRectory....................................................................................................915

MMEMory:CATalog?
This command reads the indicated directory.
Query parameters:
<Path> <path>
DOS Path name
The path name should be conform to DOS conventions and may
also include the drive name. According to DOS convention, wild-
card characters can be entered in order to query e.g. a list of all
files of a certain type.
Return values:
Result List of file names in the form of strings separated by commas
Example: MMEM:CAT? 'C:\R_S\Instr\user\*.DFL'
Returns all files in C:\R_S\Instr\user with extension ".DFL"
MMEM:CAT? 'C:\R_S\Instr\user\SPOOL?.WMF'
Returns all files in C:\R_S\Instr\user whose names start with
SPOOL, have 6 letters and the extension ".WMF".
SPOOL1.WMF,SPOOL2.WMF,SPOOL3.WMF
Usage: Query only
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Select File" on page 540

MMEMory:CATalog:LONG?
Corresponds to MMEMory:CATalog? on page 910, but displays extended information
on the files contained in the current or specified directory.
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Query parameters:
<Path> <path>
DOS Path name
The path name should be in conformance with DOS conventions
and may also include the drive name.
Following this value, for each file, a string is listed according to
the following syntax:
"<File name>, <suffix>, <Length of file in
bytes>"

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 910

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Data Management

Return values:
Result <total number of bytes the directory contains>,"<File name1>,
<suffix1>, <Length of file 2 in bytes>","<File name 2>, <suffix2>,
<Length of file2 in bytes>",...,"<File name n>, <suffix n>,
<Length of file n in bytes>"
The response value consists of a list of strings, separated by
commas. It begins with the total number of bytes the directory
contains. Then the information for each file is returned.
The <suffix> may be:
– ASCii
– BINary
– STAT
Example: MMEM:CAT:LONG? 'C:\R_S\Instr\user
Returns all files in C:\R_S\Instr\user:
1776,3331993600, "autolog.txt,ASC,1520",
"autologin.reg,BIN,144", "no_autologin.reg,BIN,
112"
Query for the current directory:
MMEM:CDIR?
Response:
C:\R_S\Instr\user
MMEM:CAT:LONG?
Returns all files in C:\R_S\Instr\user.
Usage: Query only
SCPI confirmed

MMEMory:CDIRectory <Directory>
This command changes the current directory.
Parameters:
<Directory> <directory_name>
<directory_name>
DOS path name
In addition to the path name, the indication of the directory may
contain the drive name. The path name complies with the DOS
conventions.
Example: MMEM:CDIR 'C:\R_S\Instr\user'
Selects the directory C:\R_S\Instr\user.
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Edit Path" on page 543

MMEMory:COMMent <Comment>
This command defines a comment for the stored settings.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 911

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Data Management

Parameters:
<Comment>
Example: MMEMory:COMMent "ACP measurement with Standard
Tetra from 23.05."
MMEMory::MMEMory:STORe1:STATe 1, "ACP_T"
As a result, in the selection list for recall settings, the comment
"ACP measurement with Standard Tetra from
23.05." is added to the ACP entry.
Usage: SCPI confirmed

MMEMory:COPY <FileSource>,<FileDestination>
This command copies the files indicated in <file_source> to the destination directory
indicated with <file_destination> or to the destination file indicated by <file_destination>
if <file_source> is just a file.
Parameters:
<FileSource>,<FileDestination>
<file_source>,<file_destination> = <file_name>
<file_source>,<file_destination> = <file_name>
DOS file name
The indication of the file name may include the path and the
drive name. The file names and path information must be in
accordance with the DOS conventions.
Example: MMEM:COPY 'C:\R_S\Instr\user\SETUP.CFG','E:'
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Copy" on page 544

MMEMory:DATA <FileName>, [<Block>]

This command writes the block data contained in <block> into the file characterized by
<file_name>. The delimiter must be set to EOI to obtain error-free data transfer.
The associated query command reads the indicated file from the mass memory and
transfers it to the remote control computer. It should be noted that the buffer memory of
the control computer should be large enough to store the file. The setting of the delim-
iter is irrelevant in this case.
The command is useful for reading stored settings files or trace data from the instru-
ment or for transferring them to the instrument.
Parameters:
<FileName> '<file name>' (file name in single quotes)
selects the file to be transferred
<Block> binary data block with the following structure: #<digit for the
length of the length information><length information (number of
bytes) for the binary data><binary data>

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 912

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Data Management

Example: MMEM:DATA 'TEST01.HCP',#216 This is the file

where:
#2: the next 2 characters are the length indication
16: number of subsequent binary data bytes
This is the file: 16 bytes stored as binary data in the file
TEST01.HCP
MMEM:DATA? 'TEST01.HCP'
Transfers the file TEST01.HCP from the instrument to the con-
trol computer.
Usage: SCPI confirmed

MMEMory:DELete <FileName>
This command deletes the indicated files.
Parameters:
<FileName> <file_name> = DOS file name
The indication of the file name contains the path and, optionally,
the drive name. Indication of the path complies with DOS con-
ventions.
Example: MMEM:DEL 'TEST01.HCP'
The file TEST01.HCP is deleted.
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Delete" on page 544

MMEMory:MDIRectory <Directory>
This command creates a new directory. The file name includes indication of the path
and may also include the drive name. The path name complies with DOS conventions.
Parameters:
<Directory> <directory_name> = DOS path name
Example: MMEM:MDIR 'C:\R_S\Instr\user'
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "New Folder" on page 544

MMEMory:MOVE <FileSource>,<FileDestination>
This command renames existing files, if <file_destination> contains no path indication.
Otherwise the file is moved to the indicated path and stored under the file name speci-
fied there, if any.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 913

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Data Management

Parameters:
<FileSource>,<FileDestination>
<file_source>,<file_destination> = <file_name> = DOS file name
The file name includes indication of the path and may also
include the drive. The path name complies with DOS conven-
tions.
Example: MMEM:MOVE 'C:\TEST01.CFG','SETUP.CFG'
Renames TEST01.CFG in SETUP.CFG in directory C:\.
MMEM:MOVE 'C:\TEST01.CFG','C:\R_S\Instr\user
Moves TEST01.CFG from C:\ to C:\R_S\Instr\user.
MMEM:MOVE 'C:\TEST01.CFG','C:
\R_S\Instr\user\SETUP.CFG'
Moves TEST01.CFG from C:\ to C:\R_S\Instr\user and renames
the file in SETUP.CFG.
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Rename" on page 544

MMEMory:MSIS <Device>
This command changes to the drive indicated. The drive may be the internal hard disk
C:.
Parameters:
<Device> <device> = A: | C: … Z:
*RST: "C:
The path name complies with DOS conventions.
Example: MMEM:MSIS 'C:'
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Edit Path" on page 543

MMEMory:NAME <FileName>
This command defines a destination file for the printout started with the HCOPy[:
IMMediate<1|2>] on page 933 command. In this case the printer output must be
routed to a file as destination.
In receiver mode, the command also defines the name and directory of a test report.
Parameters:
<FileName> <file_name> = DOS file name
The file name includes indication of the path and may also
include the drive name. The file name and path information com-
ply with DOS conventions.
Example: MMEM:NAME 'C:\R_S\instr\user\PRINT1.BMP'
Selects the file name.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 914

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Data Management

Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Configuring and Printing the Test Report" on page 560

MMEMory:RDIRectory <Directory>
This command deletes the indicated directory. The directory name includes indication
of the path and may also include the drive name. The path name complies with DOS
conventions.
Parameters:
<Directory> <directory_name> = DOS path name
Example: MMEM:RDIR 'C:\TEST'
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Delete" on page 544

10.9.2 Saving and Restoring Customized Data

MMEMory:CLEar:ALL.....................................................................................................915
MMEMory:CLEar:STATe 1,.............................................................................................915
MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO..................................................................................................916
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe.................................................................................................916
MMEMory:STORe:IQ:COMM.......................................................................................... 917
MMEMory:STORe:IQ:STATe.......................................................................................... 918
MMEMory:STORe<n>:STATe......................................................................................... 918
MMEMory:STORe<n>:STATe:NEXT................................................................................918

MMEMory:CLEar:ALL
This command deletes all instrument configuration files in the current directory.
You can select the directory with MMEMory:CDIRectory on page 911. The default
directory is C:\R_S\instr\user.
Example: MMEM:CLE:ALL
Usage: Event

MMEMory:CLEar:STATe 1, <FileName>
This command deletes the instrument settings file selected by <file_name>. All associ-
ated files on the mass memory storage are cleared.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 915

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Data Management

Parameters:
<FileName> 1,<file_name>
with <file_name> = DOS file name without extension
The file name includes indication of the path and may also
include the drive. The path name complies with DOS conven-
tions.
Example: MMEM:CLE:STAT 1,'TEST'
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Delete File" on page 541

MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO <Mode>
This command defines which settings file is automatically loaded after the device is
switched on. The contents of the file are read after switching on the device and used to
define the new device state.
The settings file defined as auto recall set can also be restored by the *RST
on page 888 command.
Parameters:
<Mode> 1,'FACTORY' | 1,'<file_name>' | with <file_name>
1,'FACTORY'
deactivates the startup recall function
1,'<file_name>'
activates the startup recall function and defines the settings file
to be loaded
with <file_name>
DOS file name with or without extension
The file name includes indication of the path and may also
include the drive name. The path name complies with DOS con-
ventions.
Example: MMEM:LOAD:AUTO 1,'C:\R_S\Instr\user\TEST'
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Startup Recall (On/Off)" on page 542

MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1, <FileName>
This command restores and activates an instrument configuration stored in a *.dfl file.
Note that files with other formats cannot be loaded with this command.
The contents that are reloaded from the file are defined by the last selection made
either in the "Save/Recall" dialogs (manual operation) or through the
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM] commands (remote operation; the settings are identical in
both cases).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 916

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Data Management

By default, the selection is limited to the user settings ("User Settings" selection in the
dialogs, HWSettings in SCPI). The selection is not reset by PRESET or *RST.
As a consequence, the results of a SCPI script using the MMEMory:LOAD:STATe com-
mand without a previous MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM] command may vary, depending
on previous actions in the GUI or in previous scripts, even if the script starts with the
*RST command.
It is therefore recommended that you use the appropriate MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]
command before using MMEMory:LOAD:STATe.
Parameters:
1
<FileName> DOS file name with or without extension
The file name includes indication of the path and may also
include the drive name. The path name complies with DOS con-
ventions.
Example: MMEM:SEL:ALL
//Save all items (User Settings, All Traces, All Limit Lines) from
the R&S ESR.
MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,'C:\R_S\Instr\user\TEST01'
//Reloads all items
In the "Recall" dialog, select only "User Settings" and "All Limit
Lines".
MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,'C:\R_S\Instr\user\TEST01'
//Reloads user settings and all limit lines.
*RST
//Reset instrument.
MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,'C:\R_S\Instr\user\TEST01'
//Selected items are retained. Reloads user settings and all limit
lines.
Restart the instrument (using the ON/OFF key on the front
panel).
MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,'C:\R_S\Instr\user\TEST01'
// Selected items are set to default. Reloads only the user set-
tings.
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Save File / Recall File" on page 540
See "Recall" on page 541

MMEMory:STORe:IQ:COMM <Description>
Defines a description of the export file which is stored with the data and also displayed
in the file selection dialog box for I/Q data import and export.
Parameters:
<Description>

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 917

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Data Management

Example: MMEM:STOR:IQ:COMM 'Device test 1b'

Creates a description for the export file.
MMEM:STOR:IQ:STAT 1, 'C:
\R_S\Instr\user\data.iq.tar'
Stores I/Q data and the comment to the specified file.
Manual operation: See "IQ Export" on page 543

MMEMory:STORe:IQ:STATe 1, <FileName>
This command stores the complex I/Q data to the specified .iq.tar file in 32-bit float-
ing point format.
Parameters:
<FileName> Complete file name including the path
Example: MMEM:STOR:IQ:STAT 1, 'C:
\R_S\Instr\user\data.iq.tar'
Stores I/Q data to the specified file.
Manual operation: See "IQ Export" on page 543

MMEMory:STORe<n>:STATe <State>
This command stores the current device settings in a *.dfl file.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> 1,<file_name>
with <file_name>
DOS file name with or without extension
The file name includes the indication of the path and may also
include the drive name. The path name complies with DOS con-
ventions.
Example: MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,'Save'
Saves the current device settings in the file Save.dfl.
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Save File / Recall File" on page 540

MMEMory:STORe<n>:STATe:NEXT
This command stores the current device settings in a *.dfl file. The file name used in
the last saving process is automatically counted up to the next unused name.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 918

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Using Transducers

Example: MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,'Save'

Saves the current device settings in the file Save.dfl.
MMEM:STOR:STAT:NEXT
Saves the current device settings in the file Save_001.dfl
MMEM:STOR:STAT:NEXT
Saves the current device settings in the file Save_002.dfl
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Save File / Recall File" on page 540

10.10 Using Transducers

Before making any changes to a transducer factor or set, you have to select one by
name with [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect.
Compared to manual configuration of transducers, any changes made to a transducer
factor or set via remote control are saved after the corresponding command has been
sent.

Designing a transducer factor

//Select a transducer factor
CORR:TRAN:SEL 'Transducer1'
//Define a comment for the transducer factor
CORR:TRAN:COMM 'Correction values for device x'
//Define the transducer factor unit
CORR:TRAN:UNIT 'DB'
//Select the scale of the frequency axis
CORR:TRAN:SCAL LOG
//Define the data points of the transducer factor
CORR:TRAN:DATA 1MHZ,-10,10MHZ,-10,100MHZ,-15,1GHZ,-15
//Turn on the transducer
CORR:TRAN ON
//Automatically adjust the reference level
CORR:TRAN:ADJ:RLEV ON

Managing a transducer set

//Select or create a transducer set
CORR:TSET:SEL 'Transducer Set'
//Define a comment for the transducer set
CORR:TSET:COMM 'Transducer set example'
//Define a unit for the transducer set
CORR:TSET:UNIT 'DB'
//Turn the transducer break on
CORR:TSET:BRE ON
//Define the first transducer range

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 919

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Using Transducers

CORR:TSET:RANG1 150KHZ,1MHZ,'Transducer 1','Transducer 3'

CORR:TSET:RANG2 1MHZ,10MHZ,'Transducer 3','Transducer 4'
CORR:TSET:RANG3 10MHZ,30MHZ,'Transducer 3'
//Turn on the transducer set
CORR:TSET ON

[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ADJust:RLEVel[:STATe]............................................. 920
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ACTive?.................................................................... 920
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:CATalog?.................................................................. 921
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent..................................................................921
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA........................................................................921
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete......................................................................922
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SCALing....................................................................922
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect...................................................................... 922
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer[:STATe].....................................................................923
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT.........................................................................923
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:VIEW........................................................................ 923
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:BREak.................................................................................924
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:CATalog?............................................................................ 924
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:COMMent............................................................................ 924
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:DELete................................................................................925
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:RANGe<range>................................................................... 925
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:SELect................................................................................ 925
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET[:STATe]...............................................................................926
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:UNIT................................................................................... 926

[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ADJust:RLEVel[:STATe] <State>
This command turns automatic adjustment of the reference level regarding the trans-
ducer factor characteristics on and off.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer factor with
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect.
Parameters:
<State> ON
Automatically adjusts the reference level with respect to the
transducer factor characteristics.
OFF
Manual adjustment of the reference level with respect to the
transducer factor characteristics is necessary.
*RST: OFF
Example: See "Designing a transducer factor" on page 919.
Manual operation: See "Defining characteristics of a transducer factor"
on page 517

[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ACTive?
This command queries the currently active transducer factor.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 920

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Using Transducers

Parameters:
<TransducerFactor> String containing the name of the transducer factor.
If no transducer factor is active, the string is empty.
Example: CORR:TRAN:ACT?
Queries the ative transducer factor.
Usage: Query only

[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:CATalog?
This command queries all transducer factors stored on the R&S ESR.
Parameters:
<FileInformation> String containg the file information.
'<NameFileN>,<SizeFileN>'
<NameFileN>
Name of the file.
<SizeFileN>
Size of the file in bytes.
Return values:
<UsedDiskSpace> Size of all available files containing transducer factors in byte.
<FreeDiskSpace> Remaining disk space in bytes.
Example: CORR:TRAN:CAT?
would return, e.g.
1579,34482896896,'FACTOR1,823','FACTOR2,756'
Usage: Query only

[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent <Comment>
This command defines a comment for a transducer factor.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer factor with
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect on page 922.
Parameters:
<Comment> String containing the comment.
*RST: (empty comment)
Example: See "Designing a transducer factor" on page 919.
Manual operation: See "Defining characteristics of a transducer factor"
on page 517

[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA <Frequency>,<Level>
This command defines the shape of the transducer factor.
A transducer factor may contain up to 625 reference values. Each reference value is a
combination of a frequency and a level value.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 921

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Using Transducers

Before you can use this command, you have to select a transducer factor with
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect on page 922.
Parameters:
<Frequency> Numeric value in Hz.
The frequency values have to be in ascending order.
<Level> The unit depends on [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:
UNIT on page 923. By default, it is dB.
Example: See "Designing a transducer factor" on page 919.
Manual operation: See "Defining characteristics of a transducer factor"
on page 517

[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete
This command deletes a transducer factor.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer factor with
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect.
Example: CORR:TRAN:SEL 'Transducer 1'
CORR:TRAN:DEL
Deletes the selected transducer.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Defining characteristics of a transducer factor"
on page 517

[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SCALing <Scale>
This command selects the scale of the transducer factor.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer factor with
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect on page 922R&S ESR.
Parameters:
<Scale> LINear | LOGarithmic
*RST: LINear
Example: See "Designing a transducer factor" on page 919.
Manual operation: See "Defining characteristics of a transducer factor"
on page 517

[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect <FileName>
This command creates or selects a transducer factor.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 922

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Using Transducers

Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the name of the transducer factor.
If the name does not exist yet, the R&S ESR creates a trans-
ducer factor by that name.
Example: See "Designing a transducer factor" on page 919.
Manual operation: See "Using transducer factors or transducer sets" on page 517
See "Defining characteristics of a transducer factor"
on page 517

[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer[:STATe] <State>
This command turns a transducer factor on and off.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer factor with
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect.
You can turn on up to 8 transducer factors at the same time.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: See "Designing a transducer factor" on page 919.
Manual operation: See "Using transducer factors or transducer sets" on page 517

[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT <Unit>
This command selects the unit of a transducer factor.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer factor with
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect.
Parameters:
<Unit> String containing one of the following units:
DB | DBM | DBMV | DBUV | DBUV/M | DBUA DBUA/M | DBPW |
DBPT
*RST: DB
Example: See "Designing a transducer factor" on page 919.
Manual operation: See "Defining characteristics of a transducer factor"
on page 517

[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:VIEW <State>
This command includes or excludes a figure of a transducer factor in the diagram.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer factor with
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 923

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Using Transducers

Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CORR:TRAN:SEL 'FACTOR'
CORR:TRAN:VIEW ON
Selects and displays a transducer factor.

[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:BREak <State>
This command turns a transducer break on and off.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer set with [SENSe:
]CORRection:TSET:SELect.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: See "Managing a transducer set" on page 919.
Manual operation: See "Managing transducer sets" on page 519

[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:CATalog?
This command queries all transducer sets stored on the R&S ESR.
Return values:
<UsedDiskSpace> Size of all available files containing transducer factors in byte.
<FreeDiskSpace> Remaining disk space in bytes.
<FileInfo> String containing the file information.
'<NameFileN>,<SizeFileN>'
<NameFileN>
Name of the file.
<SizeFileN>
Size of the file in bytes.
Example: CORR:TSET:CAT?
would return, e.g.
3298,34482896896,'SET1,1520','SET2,1756'
Usage: Query only

[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:COMMent <Comment>
This command defines a comment for a transducer set.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer set with [SENSe:
]CORRection:TSET:SELect.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 924

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Using Transducers

Parameters:
<Comment> String containing the comment.
Example: See "Managing a transducer set" on page 919.
Manual operation: See "Managing transducer sets" on page 519

[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:DELete
This command deletes a transducer set.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer set with [SENSe:
]CORRection:TSET:SELect.
Example: CORR:TSET:SEL 'Transducer Set'
CORR:TSET:DEL
Deletes the transducer set.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Managing transducer sets" on page 519

[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:RANGe<range> <Frequency>, <Frequency>,

<FileName>
This command selects a set of transducer factors used for a particular frequency
range.
Ranges 1 to 10 must be sent in ascending order.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer set with [SENSe:
]CORRection:TSET:SELect.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...10
Selects the range.
Parameters:
<Frequency> Defines the start frequency of the frequency range.
<Frequency> Defines the stop frequency of the frequency range.
<FileName> String containing the name of the transducer factor.
Note that you can assign up to eight transducer factors to a par-
ticular frequency range. In that case, add a number of strings
containing the file name after the first one separated by comma.
Example: See "Managing a transducer set" on page 919.
Manual operation: See "Managing transducer sets" on page 519

[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:SELect <FileName>
This command creates or selects a transducer set.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 925

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Using Transducers

Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the name of the transducer set.
If the name does not exist yet, the R&S ESR creates a trans-
ducer set by that name.
Example: See "Managing a transducer set" on page 919.
Manual operation: See "Using transducer factors or transducer sets" on page 517
See "Managing transducer sets" on page 519

[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET[:STATe] <State>
This command turns a transducer set on and off.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer set with [SENSe:
]CORRection:TSET:SELect.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: See "Managing a transducer set" on page 919.
Manual operation: See "Using transducer factors or transducer sets" on page 517

[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:UNIT <Unit>
This command selects the unit of a transducer set.
Note that the unit of all transducer factors in a transducer set must be the same or in
relative terms (dB).
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer set with [SENSe:
]CORRection:TSET:SELect.
Parameters:
<Unit> String containg one of the following units:
DB | DBM | DBUV | DBUV_M | DBUA | DBUA_M | DBPW |
DBPT
*RST: DB
Example: See "Managing a transducer set" on page 919.
Manual operation: See "Managing transducer sets" on page 519

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 926

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Documentation

10.11 Documentation
Table 10-22: CMAP assignment

Suffix Description

CMAP1 Background

CMAP2 Grid

CMAP3* Common text

CMAP4* Check status OK

CMAP5* Check status error

CMAP6* Text special 1

CMAP7* Text special 2

CMAP8 Trace 1

CMAP9 Trace 2

CMAP10 Trace 3

CMAP11 Marker info text

CMAP12 Limit lines

CMAP13 Limit and margin check 'PASS'

CMAP14 Limit and margin check 'FAIL'

CMAP15* Softkey text

CMAP16* Softkey background

CMAP17* Selected field text

CMAP18* Selected field background

CMAP19* Softkey 3D bright part

CMAP20* Softkey 3D dark part

CMAP21* Softkey state 'On'

CMAP22* Softkey state 'Dialog Open'

CMAP23* Softkey text disabled

CMAP24 Logo

CMAP25 Trace 4

CMAP26 Grid (minor lines)

CMAP27 Marker

CMAP28 Display lines

CMAP29* Sweep count text

CMAP30 Limit and margin check 'Text'

CMAP31 Limit and margin check '\"Margin"\'

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 927

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Documentation

Suffix Description

CMAP32* Table overall (Title Text)

CMAP33* Table overall (Title background)

CMAP34* Table overall (Text)

CMAP35* Table overall (Background)

CMAP36* Table value (Title text)

CMAP37* Table value (Title background)

CMAP38* Table value (Text)

CMAP39* Table value (Background)

CMAP40 Trace 5

CMAP41 Trace 6

CMAP42 Bargraph Max Peak

CMAP43 Bargraph Min Peak

CMAP44 Bargraph Quasipeak

CMAP45 Bargraph Average

CMAP46 Bargraph RMS

CMAP47 Final measurement

CMAP48 Bargraph CISPR Average

CMAP49 Bargraph RMS Average

* these settings can only be defined via the theme, see chapter 10.13, "Display Configuration",
on page 947, and are thus ignored in the SCPI command

HCOPy:ABORt.............................................................................................................. 929
HCOPy:CMAP<item>:DEFault.........................................................................................929
HCOPy:CMAP<item>:HSL..............................................................................................929
HCOPy:CMAP<item>:PDEFined..................................................................................... 930
HCOPy:DESTination<1|2>.............................................................................................. 930
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor................................................................................................... 931
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2>.................................................................................... 931
HCOPy:ITEM:ALL.......................................................................................................... 932
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TABLe:STATe............................................................................. 932
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TEXT..........................................................................................933
HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation<1|2>..................................................................................... 933
HCOPy:TDSTamp:STATe<1|2>...................................................................................... 933
HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]............................................................................................... 933
HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]:NEXT......................................................................................934
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt?........................................................ 935
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT]?...................................................... 935
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect <1|2>.................................................................935

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 928

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Documentation

HCOPy:ABORt
This command aborts a running hardcopy output.
Example: HCOP:ABOR
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed

HCOPy:CMAP<item>:DEFault <ColorSet>
This command defines the color scheme for print jobs.
Suffix: .
<item> Selects the display item. For more information see table 10-22.
Parameters:
<ColorSet> 1|2|3|4
1
current screen colors with the background in white and the grid
in black.
2
optimized color set
3
user defined color set
4
current screen colors without any changes (setting for hardcop-
ies)
Example: HCOP:CMAP:DEF2
Selects the optimized color set for the color settings of a printout
or a hardcopy.
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Set to Default" on page 531
See "Select Print Color Set" on page 531

HCOPy:CMAP<item>:HSL
This command selects the color for various screen elements in print jobs.
The values set are not changed by *RST.
Suffix: .
<item> Selects the display item. For more information see table 10-22.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 929

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Documentation

Parameters:
hue | sat | lum
hue
tint
sat
saturation
lum
brightness
The value range is 0 to 1 for all parameters.
Example: HCOP:CMAP2:HSL 0.3,0.8,1.0
Changes the grid color
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Select Object" on page 530
See "User Defined Colors" on page 531
See "Print Colors" on page 531

HCOPy:DESTination<1|2> <Medium>
This command selects the destination of a print job.
The type of instrument is selected with SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:
SELect <1|2>, which automatically selects a default output medium. Therefore
HCOPY:DESTination should always be sent after setting the device type.
The suffix <1|2> selects the printing device.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 930

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Documentation

Parameters:
<Medium> 'MMEM'
Sends the hardcopy to a file.
You can select the file name with MMEMory:NAME
You can select the file format with HCOPy:DEVice:
LANGuage<1|2>.
'SYST:COMM:PRIN'
Sends the hardcopy to the printer.
You can select the printer with SYSTem:COMMunicate:
PRINter:SELect <1|2>.
'SYST:COMM:CLIP'
Sends the hardcopy to the clipboard.
The format should be WEMF.
*RST: SYST:COMM:CLIP
Example: SYST:COMM:PRIN:SEL2 'LASER on LPT1'
Selects the printer and output medium for device 2.
HCOP:DEST2 'SYST:COMM:PRIN'
Selects the printer interface as device 2.
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Device Setup" on page 554

HCOPy:DEVice:COLor <State>
This command turns color printing on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
ON
Color output
OFF
Black and white output
*RST: OFF
Example: HCOP:DEV:COL ON
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Color (On/Off)" on page 532

HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2> <Format>
This command selects the file format for a print job.
The suffix <1|2> selects the printing device.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 931

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Documentation

Parameters:
<Format> GDI
Graphics Device Interface:
Default format for the output to a printer configured under Win-
dows. Must be selected for the output to the printer interface.
Can be used for the output to a file. The printer driver configured
under Windows is used in this case and a printer-specific file for-
mat is thus generated.
(see also HCOPy:DESTination<1|2> command)
Available for HCOPy:MODE SCReen.
WMF | EWMF
WINDOWS Metafile and Enhanced Metafile Format:
Data formats for output files which can be integrated in corre-
sponding programs for documentation purposes at a later time.
WMF can only be used for output to a file and EWMF also for
the output to the clipboard.
(see also HCOPy:DESTination<1|2> command)
Available for HCOPy:MODE SCReen.
BMP | JPG | PNG
Data format for output to files only.
Available for HCOPy:MODE SCReen.
PDF | RTF
Selects the output format of the test report in Receiver mode.
Available for HCOPy:MODE REPort.
Example: HCOP:DEV:LANG WMF
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Device Setup" on page 554
See "Configuring and Printing the Test Report" on page 560

HCOPy:ITEM:ALL
This command includes all screen elements in the printout.
The screen elements include comments, title, time and date.
Example: HCOP:ITEM:ALL
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Print Screen" on page 553

HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TABLe:STATe <State>
This command turns printing of the currently active table on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 932

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Documentation

Example: HCOP:ITEM:WIND:TAB:STAT ON

HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TEXT <Comment>
This command defines a comment added to the printout.
Parameters:
<Comment> String containing the comment with a maximum of 100 charcat-
ers. The line feed is by means of the characters @.
Example: HCOP:ITEM:WIND:TEXT 'comment'
Manual operation: See "Comment" on page 555

HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation<1|2> <Orientation>
The command selects the format of the printout.
The command is only available if the output device is a printer (see HCOPy:
DESTination<1|2> on page 930).
Parameters:
<Orientation> LANDscape | PORTrait
*RST: PORT
Example: HCOP:PAGE:ORI LAND
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Device Setup" on page 554

HCOPy:TDSTamp:STATe<1|2> <State>
This command includes or excludes the time and date in the printout.
The suffix <1|2> selects the printing device.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: HCOP:TDST:STAT OFF
Manual operation: See "Device Setup" on page 554

HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]
This command initiates a print job.
If you are printing to a file, the file name depends on MMEMory:NAME.
The suffix <1|2> selects the printing device.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 933

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Documentation

The command also generates a measurement report when you have selected
HCOPy:MODE REPort. Note that you have to add at least one dataset to the report
with HCOPy:TREPort:NEW on page 944 or HCOPy:TREPort:APPend. Otherwise
creating the report results in an error.
Example: HCOP:DEV:LANG BMP
Selects the data format.
HCOP:DEST 'MMEM'
Directs the hardcopy to a file.
MMEM:NAME 'C:\R_S\instr\user\Print.bmp'
Selects the file name. If the file Print.bmp already exists, it is
replaced.
HCOP
Saves the hardcopy output into the file Print.bmp.
Example: HCOP:MODE REPort
HCOP:DEV:LANG PDF
HCOP:TREP:NEW
HCOP
Creates a measurement report (in pdf format).
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "ScreenShot" on page 542
See "Print Screen" on page 553
See "Configuring and Printing the Test Report" on page 560

HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]:NEXT
This command initiates a print job.
If you are printing to a file, the file name depends on MMEMory:NAME. This command
adds a consecutive number to the file name.
The suffix <1|2> selects the printing device.
Example: HCOP:DEV:LANG BMP
Selects the data format.
HCOP:DEST 'MMEM'
Directs the hardcopy to a file.
MMEM:NAME 'C:\R_S\instr\user\Print.bmp'
Selects the file name.
HCOP
Saves the hardcopy output into the file Print.bmp.
HCOP:NEXT
Saves the hardcopy output into the file Print_001.bmp.
HCOP:NEXT
Saves the hardcopy output into the file Print_002.bmp.
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Print Screen" on page 553

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 934

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Documentation

SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt?
This command queries the name of the first printer (in the list of printers) available
under Windows operating system.
The names of other installed printers can be queried with the SYSTem:COMMunicate:
PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT]? command.
If no printer is configured an empty string is output.
Parameters:
*RST: NONE
Example: SYST:COMM:PRIN:ENUM:FIRS?
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Device Setup" on page 554

SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT]?
This command queries the name of the next printer installed under Windows operating
system. After all available printer names have been output, an empty string enclosed
by quotation marks (") is output for the next query. Further queries are answered by a
query error.
The SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt? command should be
sent previously to return to the beginning of the printer list and query the name of the
first printer.
Example: SYST:COMM:PRIN:ENUM?
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Device Setup" on page 554

SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect <1|2> <PrinterName>

This command selects one of the printers configured under Windows operating sys-
tem, including the associated output destination.
The specified printer name must be a string (entered in quotes) as returned by the
commands
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt? or
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT]?
The HCOPy:DESTination<1|2> on page 930 command is used to select an output
medium other than the default one.
Parameters:
<PrinterName> "<printer_name>"
*RST: NONE
Example: SYST:COMM:PRIN:SEL "LASER on LPT1"

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 935

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Working with Test Reports

10.12 Working with Test Reports

● Designing a Test Report Template....................................................................... 936
● Creating a Test Report..........................................................................................943
● Deprecated Commands (Test Report).................................................................. 946

10.12.1 Designing a Test Report Template

● Selecting the Test Report Contents...................................................................... 936

● Designing the Header of the Test Report..............................................................938
● Defining the Contents of the Title Page................................................................ 941
● Managing Templates.............................................................................................942

10.12.1.1 Selecting the Test Report Contents

HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:DEFault.......................................................................................936
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect........................................................................................ 936

HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:DEFault
This command restores the default configuration of the test report regarding the infor-
mation that is part of the report (in the "Configuration" tab of the "Test Report Settings"
dialog box).
It also restores the default names of the header titles (in the "Header" tab of the "Test
Report Settings" dialog box).
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:DEF
Restores the default test report configuration.
Usage: Event

HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect <Item>,<Item>,<Item>,...
This command defines the type of information that a set of data is made up out of.
Parameters:
<Item> String containing the information you want to include or exclude
from the test report.
Note that the items, separated by commas, have to be written
into one string.
The available items depend on the application you are using.
See the tables below for a short description of each item.
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:SEL
'HEAD,SETT,MARK,SRES,DIAG,TDST,PAG'
Each dataset consists of the header information, the measure-
ment settings, marker information, the scan results, a screen-
shot of the scan trace, a time stamp and page numbers.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 936

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Working with Test Reports

Manual operation: See "Selecting the Test Report Contents" on page 556
Table 10-23: Available <items> in Receiver application

<Item> Description Default

DIAGram Screenshot of the scan results. x

FRESults Numerical results for the final measurement. x

HEADer Header made up of several lines of information that is (by x

default) displayed on each page of the test report.

IF Screenshot of the results for IF analysis.

IFSPectrogram Screenshot of the IF spectrogram.

MARKers Contents of the marker table.

PAGecount Page numbers. x

PRESults Contents of the peak list.

SCANtable Measurement configuration as defined in the scan table. x

SETTings Settings that have been used during a measurement. x

SPECtrogram Screenshot of the spectrogram.

SRESults Numerical results for the scan.

TDSTamp Date and time of the measurement. x

TRANsducer Characteristics of the transducer.

Table 10-24: Available <items> in Spectrum application

<Item> Description Default

DIAGram Screenshot of the scan results. x

HEADer Header made up of several lines of information that is (by x

default) displayed on each page of the test report.

PAGecount Page numbers. x

RESultlist Numerical measurement results.

SETTings Settings that have been used during a measurement. x

SPECtrogram Screenshot of the spectrogram.

HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:CONTrol <Repitition>
This command selects how often the items in the report header are displayed in the
document.
Suffix: .
<line> 1...7
Selects the header line.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 938

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Working with Test Reports

Parameters:
<Repitition> ALWays
The selected header line is displayed at the top of every page of
the report.
NEVer
The selected header line is displayed on no page of the report.
Note that a line that does not contain anything is still displayed in
the report as a blank line. If you select NEVer, the line is not dis-
played at all.
ONCE
The selected header line is displayed on the first page each
dataset.
*RST: ALWays
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:HEAD:LINE4:TITL ''
HCOP:TREP:ITEM:HEAD:LINE4:TEXT ''
Defines an empty string for line 4 of the report header. In the
default state (ALWays), the line would be still displayed as a
blank line.
HCOP:TREP:ITEM:HEAD:LINE4:CONT NEV
Removes line 4 from the header of the test report.
Manual operation: See "Designing the Header of the Test Report" on page 557

HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:TEXT <Description>
This command defines a descriptive text for one of the items part of the report header.
You can define up to 7 items in the header. Use HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:
LINE<line>:TITLe on page 940 to define custom titles for each item.
Use HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:CONTrol to select the circum-
stance under which each item is shown.
Suffix: .
<line> 1...7
Selects the header line.
Parameters:
<Description> String containing the description of one of the value fields of the
header.
By default, the value fields of the header items are empty.
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:HEAD:LINE3:TITL 'Device under
Test'
Renames the third header title into "Device under Test".
HCOP:TREP:ITEM:HEAD:LINE3:TEXT 'Some Device'
Manual operation: See "Designing the Header of the Test Report" on page 557

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 939

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Working with Test Reports

HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:TITLe <Title>
This command defines a custom name for one of the items part of the report header.
You can define up to 7 items in the header.
Use HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:TEXT to add a value to each
item.
Use HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:CONTrol to select the circum-
stance under which each item is shown.
Suffix: .
<line> 1...7
Selects the header line.
Parameters:
<Title> String containing the title of the header item.
The default titles are as follows:
• Line 1: "Heading"
• Line 2: "Meas Type"
• Line 3: "Equipment under Test"
• Line 4: "Manufacturer"
• Line 5: "OP Condition"
• Line 6: "Operator"
• Line 7: "Test Spec"
Make sure that the title string is not too long, because strings
that are too long could mess up the layout of the report.
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:HEAD:LINE3:TITL 'Device under
Test'
Renames the third header title into "Device under Test".
Manual operation: See "Designing the Header of the Test Report" on page 557

HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO <FileName>
This command selects a graphic (for example a company logo) that is shown at the top
of each page in the test report.
Use HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO:CONTrol on page 941 to select the circum-
stance under which the picture is shown.
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the location and name of the picture.
For reports in pdf format, you can use the following file types:
bmp, jpg, png.
For reports in rtf format, you can use the following file types:
bmp, jpg.
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:LOGO 'C:\aPicture.jpg'
Includes a picture at the top of each page of the report.
Manual operation: See "Designing the Header of the Test Report" on page 557

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 940

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Working with Test Reports

HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO:CONTrol <Repitition>
This command selects how often the logo is displayed in the document.
Parameters:
<Repitition> ALWays
The logo is displayed at the top of every page of the report.
NEVer
The logo is displayed on no page of the report.
ONCE
The logo is displayed on the first page of each dataset.
*RST: NEVer
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:LOGO 'c:\logo.png'
Selects a picture to be displayed in the report document.
HCOP:TREP:ITEM:LOGO:CONT ONCE
Displays the logo on the first page of each dataset.
Manual operation: See "Designing the Header of the Test Report" on page 557

10.12.1.3 Defining the Contents of the Title Page

HCOPy:TREPort:DESCription......................................................................................... 941
HCOPy:TREPort:PAGesize.............................................................................................941
HCOPy:TREPort:TITLe...................................................................................................942

HCOPy:TREPort:DESCription <Description>
This command defines the description of the test report as shown on its title page.
Parameters:
<Description> String containing the description of the test report.
Example: HCOP:TREP:DESC 'A short summary of the test
report.'
Adds a description to the test report.
Manual operation: See "Defining the Contents of the Title Page" on page 558

HCOPy:TREPort:PAGesize <Size>
This command selects the size of the test report document.
Parameters:
<Size> A4
Document pages have an A4 size.
US
Document pages have a US letter size.
*RST: A4
Example: HCOP:TREP:PAG A4
Selects the A4 size for the document.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 941

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Working with Test Reports

HCOPy:TREPort:TITLe <Title>
This command defines the title for the test report as shown on its title page.
Parameters:
<Title> String containing the title.
Example: HCOP:TREP:TITL 'My first test report'
Defines a title for a test report.
Manual operation: See "Defining the Contents of the Title Page" on page 558

10.12.1.4 Managing Templates

HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:CATalog?.....................................................................942
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:DELete........................................................................ 942
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:LOAD.......................................................................... 942
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:SAVE...........................................................................943

HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:CATalog?
This command queries the test report templates available on the system.
Return values:
<Templates> String containing the name of the templates as a comma sepa-
rated list.
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:TEMP:CAT?
would return, e.g.:
'TemplateX, TemplateY, TemplateZ'
Usage: Query only

HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:DELete <Template>
This command deletes a test report template.
Parameters:
<Template> String containing the name of the template.
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:TEMP:DEL 'myTemplate'
Deletes a test report template.
Usage: Event

HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:LOAD <Template>
This command loads a test report template.
Parameters:
<Template> String containing the name of the template.
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:TEMP:LOAD 'myTemplate'
Loads a test report template.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 942

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Working with Test Reports

Usage: Event

HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:SAVE <Template>
This command saves a test report template.
Parameters:
<Template> String containing the name of the template.
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:TEMP:SAVE 'myTemplate'
Saves a test report template.
Usage: Event

10.12.2 Creating a Test Report

● Configuring and Printing the Test Report..............................................................943

● Adding and Removing Datasets............................................................................944
● Selecting Datasets for the Report......................................................................... 945

10.12.2.1 Configuring and Printing the Test Report

Commands useful to configure and print the test report described elsewhere:
● HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2> on page 931
● HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>] on page 933
● MMEMory:NAME on page 914
HCOPy:MODE...............................................................................................................943

HCOPy:MODE <Mode>
Selects the output of the HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>] on page 933 command.
Parameters:
<Mode> SCReen
HCOPy:IMMediate prints the current screen contents.
REPort
HCOPy:IMMediate generates a measurement report.
*RST: SCReen
Example: HCOP:MODE REPort
HCOP
Creates a file containing the measurement report.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 943

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Working with Test Reports

10.12.2.2 Adding and Removing Datasets

HCOPy:TREPort:APPend............................................................................................... 944
HCOPy:TREPort:NEW................................................................................................... 944
HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove..................................................................................... 944
HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove:SELected.......................................................................945

HCOPy:TREPort:APPend
This command adds the current measurement results to the test report.
The saved data depends on the items you have selected with HCOPy:TREPort:
ITEM:SELect on page 936.
Example: Perform a measurement, then:
HCOP:TREP:NEW
Creates a new test report with the results of the first measure-
ment.
Perform another measurement, then:
HCOP:TREP:APP
Adds the results of the second measurement to the test report.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Adding and Removing Datasets" on page 561

HCOPy:TREPort:NEW
This command creates a new test report.
Creating a new test report deletes all previously saved datasets. The current measure-
ment results are added as the first dataset to the new report.
The R&S ESR saves the data selected with HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect
on page 936.
Example: HCOP:TREP:NEW
Creates a new test report.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Adding and Removing Datasets" on page 561

HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove <Dataset>
This command deletes one of the datasets that are currently part of a test report.
Parameters:
<Dataset> Index number of the dataset as shown in the "Test Report Con-
tent Selection" dialog box.
If the index number is greater than the number of available data-
sets, the command does nothing.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 944

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Working with Test Reports

Example: HCOP:TREP:TEST:REM 2
Deletes the second dataset from the current test report.
Manual operation: See "Adding and Removing Datasets" on page 561

HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove:SELected
This command deletes all selected datasets that are currently part of a test report.
Example: HCOP:TREP:TEST:SEL:NONE
Deselects all datasets.
HCOP:TREP:TEST:SEL 2,ON
HCOP:TREP:TEST:SEL 3,ON
Selects the second and third datasets.
HCOP:TREP:TEST:REM:SEL
Deletes the selected datasets (the second and third).
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Adding and Removing Datasets" on page 561

10.12.2.3 Selecting Datasets for the Report

HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:SELect....................................................................................... 945
HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:SELect:ALL.................................................................................945
HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:SELect:INVert............................................................................. 946
HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:SELect:NONE............................................................................. 946

HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:SELect <Dataset>, <State>

This command includes or excludes datasets from the test report.
Parameters:
<Dataset> Index number of the dataset as shown in the "Test Report Con-
tent Selection" dialog box.
If the index number is greater than the number of available data-
sets, the command does nothing.
<State> ON | OFF
Example: HCOP:TREP:TEST:SEL 2, OFF
Excludes the second dataset from the test report.
Manual operation: See "Selecting Datasets for the Report" on page 561

HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:SELect:ALL
This command includes all available datasets in a test report.
Example: HCOP:TREP:TEST:SEL:ALL
Includes all available datasets in the test report.
Usage: Event

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 945

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Working with Test Reports

Manual operation: See "Selecting Datasets for the Report" on page 561

HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:SELect:INVert
This command inverts the current selection of datasets to be included in the test report.
Datasets that have been included in the report before will no longer be part of the
report. Instead, the previously deselected datasets will be included.
Example: HCOP:TREP:TEST:SEL:INV
Inverts the selection of dataset to be included in a test report.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Selecting Datasets for the Report" on page 561

HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:SELect:NONE
This command excludes all datasets from the test report.
Example: HCOP:TREP:TEST:SEL:NONE
Removes all dataset from the test report.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Selecting Datasets for the Report" on page 561

10.12.3 Deprecated Commands (Test Report)

Following is a list of deprecated remote commands. The remote commands are still
supported to maintain compatibility to previous Rohde & Schwarz receivers (like the
R&S ESU), but it is strongly recommended to use the command system in the way it is
meant to be used in the R&S ESR.

Legacy command Replaced by Comment

HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect Items now selected by the command parameter.

STATe

HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect Items now selected by the command parameter.

DIAGram:STATe

HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect Items now selected by the command parameter.

FRESults:STATe

HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect Items now selected by the command parameter.

PAGecount:STATe

HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect Items now selected by the command parameter.

SCANtable:STATe

HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect Items now selected by the command parameter.

SRESults:STATe

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 946

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Display Configuration

Legacy command Replaced by Comment

HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect Items now selected by the command parameter.

TDSTamp:STATe

HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect Items now selected by the command parameter.

TRANsducer:STATe

10.13 Display Configuration

● Controlling Display Elements................................................................................ 947
● Selecting Items to Store and Restore................................................................... 954

10.13.1 Controlling Display Elements

DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency.....................................................................................947
DISPlay:CMAP<item>:DEFault........................................................................................948
DISPlay:CMAP<item>:HSL............................................................................................. 948
DISPlay:CMAP<item>:PDEFined.....................................................................................948
DISPlay:FORMat........................................................................................................... 949
DISPlay:LOGO.............................................................................................................. 949
DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff................................................................................................949
DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe]................................................................................................ 950
DISPlay:SBAR[:STATe].................................................................................................. 950
DISPlay:SKEYs[:STATe].................................................................................................950
DISPlay:TBAR[STATe]................................................................................................... 950
DISPlay:THEMe:CATalog?............................................................................................. 951
DISPlay:THEMe:SELect................................................................................................. 951
DISPlay:TOUChscreen:STATe........................................................................................ 951
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<m>]:SIZE................................................................ 951
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<m>]:SELect.............................................................952
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TEXT:STATe............................................................................... 953
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TEXT[:DATA]............................................................................... 953
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME...........................................................................................953
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME:FORMat..............................................................................954
INITiate<n>:DISPlay.......................................................................................................954

DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency <State>
This command switches the x-axis annotation on or off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: DISP:ANN:FREQ OFF
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Annotation (On/Off)" on page 529

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 947

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Display Configuration

DISPlay:CMAP<item>:DEFault <Setting>
This command resets the screen colors of all display items to their default settings.
Suffix: .
<item> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Setting> 1|2
Default settings DEFault1 and DEFault2
Example: DISP:CMAP:DEF2
Selects default setting 2 for setting the colors.
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Select Screen Color Set" on page 530
See "Set to Default" on page 531

DISPlay:CMAP<item>:HSL <ColorTable>
This command defines the color table of the instrument.
The set values are not changed by *RST.
Suffix: .
<item> Selects the display item. For more information see table 10-22.
Parameters:
<ColorTable> hue | sat | lum
hue
TINT
sat
SATURATION
lum
BRIGHTNESS
The value range is 0 to 1 for all parameters.
Example: DISP:CMAP2:HSL 0.3,0.8,1.0
Changes the grid color.
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Screen Colors" on page 530
See "Select Object" on page 530
See "User Defined Colors" on page 531

DISPlay:CMAP<item>:PDEFined <Color>
This command defines the color table of the instrument using predefined color values.
Each suffix of CMAP is assigned to one or several graphical elements which can be
modified by varying the corresponding color setting.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 948

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Display Configuration

The values set are not changed by *RST.

DISPlay:FORMat <Format>
This command switches the measurement result display between FULL SCREEN and
SPLIT SCREEN.
Parameters:
<Format> SINGle | SPLit
SPLit
Show 2 or more screens on the display
SINGle
Show only 1 screen on the display
*RST: SPL
Example: DISP:FORM SING

DISPlay:LOGO <State>
This command switches the company logo on the screen on or off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: DISP:LOGO OFF
Manual operation: See "Print Logo (On/Off)" on page 529

DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff <Minutes>
This command sets the holdoff time for the power-save mode of the display. The avail-
able value range is 1 to 60 minutes, the resolution 1 minute. The entry is dimension-
less.
Parameters:
<Minutes> 1 to 60
*RST: 15

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 949

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Display Configuration

Example: DISP:PSAV:HOLD 30
Manual operation: See "Display Pwr Save (On/Off)" on page 532

DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe] <State>
This command switches on or off the power-save mode of the display. With the power-
save mode activated the display including backlight is completely switched off after the
elapse of the response time (see DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff command).
This mode is recommended to protect the display, especially if the instrument is oper-
ated exclusively via remote control.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: DISP:PSAVe ON
Switches on the power-save mode.
Manual operation: See "Display Pwr Save (On/Off)" on page 532

DISPlay:SBAR[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the status bar in the display on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: DISP:SBAR OFF
Manual operation: See "Status Bar" on page 529

DISPlay:SKEYs[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the softkey bar in the display on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: DISP:SKEY OFF

DISPlay:TBAR[STATe] <State>
This command turns the toolbar in the display on or off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: DISP:TOOL ON

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 950

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Display Configuration

Manual operation: See "Tool Bar State (On/Off)" on page 528

DISPlay:THEMe:CATalog?
This command queries the available themes for the display.
Example: DISP:THEMe:CAT?
Usage: Query only

DISPlay:THEMe:SELect <Theme>
This command selects a theme for the screen display. The theme defines the colors
used for keys and screen elements, for example.
Parameters:
<Theme> String containing the name of the theme.
*RST: SPL
Example: DISP:THEM:SEL "OceanBlue"
Manual operation: See "Theme Selection" on page 529

DISPlay:TOUChscreen:STATe <State>
This command turns the touch screen functionality on, off, or partially on.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | FRAMe
ON
Touch screen function is active for entire screen
OFF
Touch screen is deactivated for entire screen
FRAMe
Touch screen is deactivated for the diagram area of the screen,
but active for the surrounding Softkeys, toolbars and menus.
*RST: ON
Example: DISP:TOUC:STAT ON

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<m>]:SIZE <Size>
This command configures the measurement display.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 951

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Display Configuration

Suffix: .
<n> 1|2
window;
Channel and adjacent-channel power measurements: Only "1" is
allowed as a suffix for the window.
Spectrum Emission Mask and Spurious Emissions measure-
ments:
selects the window that is displayed in full size (if no suffix is
defined, "1" is used):
1: diagram/result list
2: marker table
<m> 1|2
selects the item in the window to be displayed in full size:
1: diagram
2: result list
Parameters:
<Size> LARGe | SMALl
LARGe
Channel and adjacent-channel power measurements: diagram
in full screen.
Spectrum Emission Mask and Spurious Emissions measure-
ments: diagram or list in full screen, depending on the value of
the suffix.
SMALl
split screen (diagram and list and table)
*RST: SMALl
Example: DISP:SIZE LARG
Displays the measurement diagram in full screen size.
DISP:WIND1:SUBW2:SIZE LARG
Displays the result list in full screen size.
DISP:WIND2:SIZE LARG
Displays the marker table in full screen size.
Mode: all

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<m>]:SELect
This command selects which window (screen) is active for applications with more than
one measurement window. For measurements with additional subwindows (e.g. SEM,
ACLR), the subwindow can also be selected.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
window; For applications that do not have more than 1 measure-
ment window, the suffix <n> is irrelevant.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 952

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Display Configuration

<m> 1...2
1: graphic
2: table
For applications that do not have subwindows, the suffix <m> is
irrelevant.
Parameters:
*RST: 1
Example: DISP:WIND1:SEL
Sets the window 1 active.
DISP:WIND1:SUBW2:SEL
Sets the focus on the table of window 1.

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TEXT:STATe <State>
This command turns the display of the comment (screen title) on and off.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: DISP:TEXT:STAT ON
Switches on the title.

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TEXT[:DATA] <Comment>
This command defines a comment (max. 20 characters) which can be displayed in one
of the measurement windows.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
Parameters:
<Comment> *RST: (empty)
Example: DISP:WIND:TEXT 'Noise Measurement'
Defines the screen title.
Manual operation: See "Screen Title (On/Off)" on page 529

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME <State>
This command turns the display of date and time on and off.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 953

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Display Configuration

Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: DISP:TIME ON
Manual operation: See "Screen Title (On/Off)" on page 529
See "Time+Date (On/Off)" on page 529

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME:FORMat <Format>
This command selects the time and date display format.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Format> US | DE
*RST: DE
Example: DISP:TIME ON
Switches the screen display of date and time on.
DISP:TIME:FORM US
Switches the date and time format to US.
Manual operation: See "Time+Date Format (US/DE)" on page 529

INITiate<n>:DISPlay <State>
This command turns the display during a single sweep measurement on or off.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode
INIT:DISP OFF
Sets the display behavior to OFF
INIT;*WAI
Starts the measurement with display switched off.

10.13.2 Selecting Items to Store and Restore

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL......................................................................................... 955
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault................................................................................... 955
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings..............................................................................955
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL................................................................................956
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE..................................................................................... 956

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 954

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Display Configuration

MMEMory:SEL[:ITEM]:SGRam........................................................................................956
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe[:ACTive].......................................................................956
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL......................................................................956
MMEMory:USER<Softkey>............................................................................................. 957

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL
This command includes all data subsets in the list of device settings to be stored/
loaded.
Example: MMEM:SEL:ALL
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Enable all Items" on page 541

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault
This command includes the default list in the settings file to be stored/loaded. For
details on hardware settings refer to the MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings
on page 955 command.
Example: MMEM:SEL:DEFault

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings <State>
This command includes the hardware settings in the settings file to be stored/loaded.
The hardware settings include:
● current configuration of general device parameters (general setup)
● current setting of the measurement hardware including markers
● activated limit lines:
A settings file may include 8 limit lines at maximum. This number includes the activated
limit lines and, if available, the de-activated limit lines last used.
Therefore the combination of the non-activated restored limit lines depends on the
sequence of use with the MMEMory:LOAD:STATe on page 916 command.
● user-defined color setting
● configuration for the hardcopy output
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: MMEM:SEL:HWS ON
Manual operation: See "Select Items" on page 540

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 955

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Display Configuration

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL <State>
This command includes all limit lines (activated and de-activated) in the settings file to
be stored/loaded.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: MMEM:SEL:LIN:ALL ON
Manual operation: See "Select Items" on page 540

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE
This command excludes all items from the settings file to be stored/loaded.
Example: MMEM:SEL:NONE
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Disable all Items" on page 541

MMEMory:SEL[:ITEM]:SGRam <State>
This command includes or excludes spectrogram data when storing or restoring a con-
figuration file.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
Example: MMEM:SEL:SGR ON
Adds spectrogram data to the configuration file.

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe[:ACTive] <State>
This command includes the active traces in the settings file to be stored/loaded. Active
traces are all traces whose state is not blank.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF, i.e. no traces is stored
Example: MMEM:SEL:TRAC ON
Manual operation: See "Select Items" on page 540

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL <State>
This command includes all transducer factors and sets in the settings file to be stored/
loaded.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 956

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Network Connection

Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: MMEM:SEL:TRAN:ALL ON
Manual operation: See "Select Items" on page 540

MMEMory:USER<Softkey> <Filename>, <Label>

This command defines the settings file to be loaded when the specified user-definable
softkey is selected. The settings file must exist, otherwise an error occurs.
Suffix: .
<Softkey> 1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8
Number of the softkey in the "User" menu.
Parameters:
<Filename> string
This parameter defines the path and file name of the settings to
be loaded.
<Label> string
This parameter defines the label of the user-definable softkey.
*RST: User<Softkey_number>
Example: MMEM:USER1 'C:\MySaveSets\Set1','Set1'
Loads settings file Set1 when the "Set1" softkey in the "User"
menu is selected.
Example: MMEM:USER3 'C:\MySaveSets\Set3',''
Loads settings file Set3 when the "User3" softkey in the "User"
menu is selected.

10.14 Network Connection

● Configuring Network Connections.........................................................................957
● Emulating HP Instruments.................................................................................... 961

10.14.1 Configuring Network Connections

MMEMory:NETWork:DISConnect.................................................................................... 958
MMEMory:NETWork:MAP...............................................................................................958
MMEMory:NETWork:UNUSeddrives?.............................................................................. 958
MMEMory:NETWork:USEDdrives?.................................................................................. 959
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess............................................................... 959
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator..........................................................959
SYSTem:LXI:INFo?........................................................................................................960

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 957

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Network Connection

SYSTem:LXI:LANReset..................................................................................................960
SYSTem:LXI:MDEScription.............................................................................................960
SYSTem:LXI:PASSword................................................................................................. 960

MMEMory:NETWork:DISConnect <Drive>
This command disconnects the selected drive.
Parameters:
<Drive>
Example: MMEM:NETW:DISC 'T:'
Disconnects network drive T:
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Disconnect Network Drive" on page 545

MMEMory:NETWork:MAP <Drive>, <HostName> [, <UserName>, <Password>][,

<Reconnect>]
This command maps a drive to a server or server directory of the network.
Note that you have to allow sharing for a server or folder in Microsoft networks first.
Parameters:
<Drive> String containing the drive name or path of the directory you
want to map.
<HostName> String containing the host name of the computer or the IP
address and the share name of the drive.
'<\host name or IP address\share name>'
<UserName> String containing a user name in the network.
The user name is optional.
<Password> String containing the password corresponding to the <User-
Name>.
The password is optional.
<Reconnect> ON | OFF
ON
Reconnects at logon with the same user name.
OFF
Does not reconnect at logon.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Map Network Drive" on page 545

MMEMory:NETWork:UNUSeddrives?
This command lists all unused network drive names.
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 958

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Network Connection

Example: MMEM:NETW:UNUS?
Lists all unused network drive names.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Map Network Drive" on page 545

MMEMory:NETWork:USEDdrives? <ResultType>
This command lists all mapped network drives.
Query parameters:
<ResultType> ON
Lists all mapped network drives including the folder information.
OFF
Lists all mapped network drive names.
*RST: OFF
Example: MMEM:NETW:USED? ON
Lists all mapped network drives including the folder information.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Map Network Drive" on page 545

SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess <Address>
This command changes the GPIB address of the unit.
Parameters:
<Address> 0 to 30
*RST: (no influence on this parameter, factory default 20)
Example: SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 18
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "GPIB Address" on page 523

SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator <Terminator>
This command changes the GPIB receive terminator.
According to the standard the terminator in ASCII is <LF> and/or <EOI>. For binary
data transfers (e.g. trace data) from the control computer to the instrument, the binary
code (0AH) used for <LF> might be included in the binary data block, and therefore
should not be interpreted as a terminator in this particular case. This can be avoided by
changing the receive terminator to EOI.
Output of binary data from the instrument to the control computer does not require
such a terminator change.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 959

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Network Connection

Parameters:
<Terminator> LFEOI | EOI
*RST: (no influence on this parameter, factory default
LFEOI)
Example: SYST:COMM:GPIB:RTER EOI
Manual operation: See "GPIB Terminator LFEOI/EOI" on page 526

SYSTem:LXI:INFo?
This query returns the current parameters of the LXI class C.
Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to use LXI functionality.
Return values:
Return values <current version> | <LXI class> | <Computername> |
(example) <MAC adress> | <IP adress> | <Auto MDIX>
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Info" on page 522

SYSTem:LXI:LANReset
This command resets the LAN configuration to the values required by the LXI stand-
ard. In addition, the password is reset to its initial state aas well as the LXI instrument
description.
Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to use LXI functionality.
Example: SYST:LXI:LANR
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "LAN Reset" on page 523

SYSTem:LXI:MDEScription <String>
This command shows the LXI instrument description. Also, the instrument description
can be changed using this command.
Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to use LXI functionality.
Parameters:
<String>
Example: SYST:LXI:MDES
Manual operation: See "Description" on page 523

SYSTem:LXI:PASSword <Password>
This command shows or changes the LXI password.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 960

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Network Connection

Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to use LXI functionality.
Parameters:
<Password> <password>
Example: SYST:LXI:PASS
Manual operation: See "Password" on page 522

10.14.2 Emulating HP Instruments

SYSTem:REVision:FACTory........................................................................................... 961
SYSTem:REVision[:STRing]............................................................................................961
SYSTem:RSW...............................................................................................................962
SYSTem:LANGuage...................................................................................................... 962
SYSTem:HPCoupling..................................................................................................... 963
SYSTem:IFGain:MODE.................................................................................................. 963

SYSTem:REVision:FACTory
Resets the response to the REV? query to the default value, e.g. after a user string
was defined using the SYSTem:REVision[:STRing] command. (REV? query availa-
ble for HP emulation only, see chapter 10.17, "GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE,
8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E", on page 1009.)
Example: Define the system language:
SYST:LANG '8563E'
Set the response back to factory setting:
SYS:REV:FACT
Query the revision:
REV?
Response:
920528
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "REV String Factory" on page 526

SYSTem:REVision[:STRing] <Name>
Sets the response to the REV? queryto the defined string (HP emulation only, see
chapter 10.17, "GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and
8594E", on page 1009).
Parameters:
<Name>

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 961

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Network Connection

Example: Define the system language:

SYST:LANG '8563E'
Query the revision:
REV?
Response:
920528
Set the response to 'NewRevision':
SYST:REV:STR 'NewRevision'
Query the response:
SYST:REV:STR?
Response:
NewRevision
Manual operation: See "REV String User" on page 526

SYSTem:RSW <State>
Controls a repeated sweep of the E1 and MKPK HI/HL HP model commands (for
details on the commands refer to chapter 10.17, "GPIB Commands of HP Models
856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E", on page 1009). If the repeated sweep is OFF,
the marker is set without sweeping before.
This command is only available if a HP language is selected using SYSTem:LANGuage
.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: SYSTem:RSW ON
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Sweep Repeat (On/Off)" on page 525

SYSTem:LANGuage <Language>
This command defines the system language. Default is SCPI which defines the stand-
ard remote control behavior of the instrument. The other parameters are to simulate
the corresponding HP analyzer. The parameter "PSA89600" sets the device in a state
in which it can be used for IQ capturing from the 89600 vector signal analyzer soft-
ware.
Parameters:
<Language> "SCPI" | "8560E" | "8561E" | "8562E" | "8563E" | "8564E" |
"8565E" | "8566A" | "8566B" | "8568A" | "8568A_DC" | "8568B" |
"8568B_DC" | "8591E" | "8594E" | "71100C" | "71200C" |
"71209A" | "PSA89600"
*RST: SCPI
Example: SYST:LANG '8560E'
Sets the system language to 8560E to simulate the HP analyzer.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 962

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Status Register

Manual operation: See "GPIB Language" on page 524

SYSTem:HPCoupling <CouplingType>
Controls the default coupling ratios in the HP emulation mode for:
● span and resolution bandwidth (Span/RBW) and
● resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth (RBW/VBW)
For FSP (=FSV), the standard parameter coupling of the instrument is used. As a
result, in most cases a shorter sweeptime is used than in case of HP.
This command is only available if a HP language is selected using SYSTem:LANGuage
.
Parameters:
<CouplingType> HP | FSP
*RST: FSP
Example: SYSTem:HPC HP
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Coupling (FSx/HP)" on page 525

SYSTem:IFGain:MODE <Mode>
Configures the internal IF gain settings in HP emulation mode due to the application
needs. This setting is only taken into account for resolution bandwidth < 300 kHz and is
only available if a HP language is selected using SYSTem:LANGuage.
Parameters:
<Mode> NORM | PULS
NORM
Optimized for high dynamic range, overload limit is close to ref-
erence level.
PULS
Optimized for pulsed signals, overload limit up to 10 dB above
reference level.
*RST: NORM
Example: SYST:IFG:MODE PULS
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "IF Gain (Norm/Puls)" on page 525

10.15 Status Register

For more information on the contents of the status registers see the following sections.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 963

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Status Register

Status registers in receiver mode:

● "STATus:OPERation Register" on page 590
● "STATus:QUEStionable Register" on page 591
● "STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency Register" on page 592
● "STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register" on page 592
● "STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin Register" on page 593
● "STATus:QUEStionable:POWer Register" on page 594
● "STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer Register" on page 594
Status registers in spectrum mode:
● "STATus:OPERation Register" on page 596
● "STATus:QUEStionable Register" on page 597
● "STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register" on page 598
● "STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency Register" on page 592
● "STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register" on page 592
● "STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin Register" on page 593
● "STATus:QUEStionable:POWer Register" on page 594

10.15.1 General Status Register Commands

STATus:PRESet............................................................................................................ 964
STATus:QUEue[:NEXT?]?.............................................................................................. 964

STATus:PRESet
This command resets the edge detectors and ENABle parts of all registers to a defined
value. All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh, i.e. all transitions from 0 to 1 are detec-
ted. All NTRansition parts are set to 0, i.e. a transition from 1 to 0 in a CONDition bit is
not detected. The ENABle part of the STATus:OPERation and STATus:QUEStionable
registers are set to 0, i.e. all events in these registers are not passed on.
Example: STAT:PRES
Usage: SCPI confirmed

STATus:QUEue[:NEXT?]?
This command queries the earliest error queue entry and deletes it.
Positive error numbers indicate device-specific errors, negative error numbers are error
messages defined by SCPI. If the error queue is empty, the error number 0, "No error",
is returned. This command is identical to the SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? on page 897
command.
Example: STAT:QUES?
Usage: Query only
SCPI confirmed

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 964

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Status Register

10.15.2 Reading out the EVENt Part

For more information on the event part see chapter 10.1.6.2, "Structure of a SCPI Sta-
tus Register", on page 586.

STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer[:EVENt]?
These commands read out the EVENt section of the status register.
At the same time, the commands delete the contents of the EVENt section.
Usage: Query only

10.15.3 Reading Out the CONDition Part

For more information on the condition part see chapter 10.1.6.2, "Structure of a SCPI
Status Register", on page 586.

STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:CONDition?
These commands read out the CONDition section of the status register.
The commands do not delete the contents of the EVENt section.
Usage: Query only

10.15.4 Controlling the ENABle Part

For more information on the enable part see chapter 10.1.6.2, "Structure of a SCPI
Status Register", on page 586.

STATus:OPERation:ENABle <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:ENABle <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:ENABle <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>:ENABle <SumBit>

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 965

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Status Register

STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:ENABle <SumBit>
These commands control the ENABle part of a register.
The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to bere-
ported in the summary bit. If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit
transitions to true, a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the
next higher level.
Parameters:
<SumBit> Range: 0 to 65535

10.15.5 Controlling the Negative Transition Part

For more information on the positive transition part see chapter 10.1.6.2, "Structure of
a SCPI Status Register", on page 586.

STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:NTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:NTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>:NTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:NTRansition <SumBit>
These commands control the Negative TRansition part of a register.
Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis-
ter. The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt
register.
Parameters:
<SumBit> Range: 0 to 65535

10.15.6 Controlling the Positive Transition Part

For more information on the negative transition part see chapter 10.1.6.2, "Structure of
a SCPI Status Register", on page 586.

STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:PTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:PTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>:PTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:PTRansition <SumBit>
These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 966

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis-
ter. The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt
register.
Parameters:
<SumBit> Range: 0 to 65535

10.16 Remote Control – Programming Examples

In this chapter, more complex programming examples are given. In the R&S ESR Get-
ting Started, basic steps in remote control programming are provided.
The following programming examples have a hierarchical structure, i.e. subsequent
examples are based on previous ones. It is thus possible to compile an operational
program from the modules of the given examples very easily. VISUAL BASIC has been
used as programming language. However, the programs can be translated into other
languages.

In programming languages as C, C++ or programs as MATLAB, NI Interactive Control,

a backslash starts an escape sequence (e.g. "\n" is used to start a new line). In these
programming languages and programs, two backslashes instead of one must be used
in remote commands (for an example refer to the R&S ESR Getting Started.)

10.16.1 Service Request..........................................................................................................968

10.16.1.1 Initiate Service Request.............................................................................................. 968
10.16.1.2 Waiting for the Arrival of a Service Request............................................................... 969
10.16.1.3 Waiting Without Blocking the Keyboard and Mouse................................................... 970
10.16.1.4 Service Request Routine............................................................................................ 971
10.16.1.5 Reading Out the Output Buffer....................................................................................972
10.16.1.6 Reading Error Messages............................................................................................ 973
10.16.1.7 Evaluation of SCPI Status Registers...........................................................................973
10.16.1.8 Evaluation of Event Status Register............................................................................974
10.16.2 Using Marker and Delta Marker.................................................................................. 975
10.16.2.1 Shape Factor Measurement (using n dB down)..........................................................975
10.16.2.2 Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point..................................................................976
10.16.2.3 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth..........................................................................977
10.16.3 Limit Lines and Limit Test........................................................................................... 978
10.16.4 Measuring the Channel and Adjacent Channel Power............................................... 980
10.16.5 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement............................................................................ 983
10.16.6 Time Domain Power Measurement.............................................................................983

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 967

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

10.16.7 Fast Power Measurement on Power Ramps.............................................................. 984

10.16.7.1 Power Measurement with Multi-Summary Marker...................................................... 984
10.16.7.2 Multi-Burst Power Measurement.................................................................................986
10.16.8 Fast Level Measurement Using Frequency Lists........................................................ 988
10.16.9 Level Correction of Transducers................................................................................. 989
10.16.10 Measuring the Magnitude and Phase of a Signal....................................................... 990
10.16.11 Reading and Writing Files........................................................................................... 992
10.16.11.1 Reading a File from the Instrument.............................................................................992
10.16.11.2 Creating a File on the Instrument................................................................................993
10.16.12 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement.....................................................................994
10.16.12.1 Using Predefined Standard Wibro...............................................................................994
10.16.12.2 Defining 5 Ranges with all Parameters....................................................................... 995
10.16.13 Spurious Emissions Measurement..............................................................................998
10.16.14 Averaging I/Q Data....................................................................................................1000
10.16.15 Using IQ Gating.........................................................................................................1001
10.16.16 Usage of Four Spectrum Instances...........................................................................1007

10.16.1 Service Request

The service request routine requires an extended initialization of the instrument in

which the relevant bits of the transition and enable registers are set. In addition the ser-
vice request event must be enabled in the VISA session.

10.16.1.1 Initiate Service Request

REM ---- Example of initialization of the SRQ in the case

' of errors -------
PUBLIC SUB SetupSRQ()
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*CLS") 'Reset status reporting system
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*SRE 168") 'Enable service request for
'STAT:OPER, STAT:QUES and ESR
'register
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*ESE 60") 'Set event enable bit for
'command, execution, device-
'dependent and query error
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STAT:OPER:ENAB 32767")
'Set OPERation enable bit for
'all events
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STAT:OPER:PTR 32767")
'Set appropriate OPERation
'Ptransition bits

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 968

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STAT:QUES:ENAB 32767")

'Set questionable enable bits
'for all events
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STAT:QUES:PTR 32767")
'Set appropriate questionable
'Ptransition bits
CALL viEnableEvent(analyzer, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, VI_QUEUE, 0)
'Enable the event for service
'request
Status = viWaitOnEvent(analyzer, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, SRQWaitTimeout, VI_NULL,
VI_NULL)
IF (status = VI_SUCCESS) THEN CALL Srq
'If SRQ is recognized =>
'subroutine for evaluation
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************

10.16.1.2 Waiting for the Arrival of a Service Request

There are basically two methods of waiting for the arrival of a service request:

Blocking (user inputs not possible):

This method is appropriate if the waiting time until the event to be signaled by an SRQ
is short (shorter than the selected timeout), if no response to user inputs is required
during the waiting time, and if – as the main criterion – the event is absolutely certain to
occur.
Reason:
From the time the viWaitOnEvent() function is called until the occurrence of the expec-
ted event, it does not allow the program to respond to mouse clicks or key entries dur-
ing the waiting time. Moreover, it returns an error if the SRQ event does not occur
within the predefined timeout period.
The method is, therefore, in many cases not suitable for waiting for measurement
results, especially when using triggered measurements.
The following function calls are required:
Status = viWaitOnEvent(analyzer, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, SRQWaitTimeout, VI_NULL,
VI_NULL)
'Wait for service request user
'inputs are not possible during
'the waiting time!
IF (status = VI_SUCCESS) THEN CALL Srq
'If SRQ is recognized =>
'subroutine for evaluation

'--------- Sweep in first Spectrum Tab and query marker --------------------

Dim Status = mbSession.WaitOnEvent( _
MessageBasedSessionEventType.ServiceRequest, SRQWaitTimeout)

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 969

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

'Wait for service request user inputs are not possible

'during the waiting time!
If (Status.EventType() = MessageBasedSessionEventType.ServiceRequest) Then
'If SRQ is recognized => subroutine for evaluation
Srq()
End If

Non-blocking (user inputs possible):

This method is recommended if the waiting time until the event to be signaled by an
SRQ is long (longer than the selected timeout), and user inputs should be possible dur-
ing the waiting time, or if the event is not certain to occur. This method is, therefore, the
preferable choice for waiting for the end of measurements, i.e. the output of results,
especially in the case of triggered measurements.
The method necessitates a waiting loop that checks the status of the SRQ line at regu-
lar intervals and returns control to the operating system during the time the expected
event has not yet occurred. In this way, the system can respond to user inputs (mouse
clicks, key entries) during the waiting time.
It is advisable to employ the Hold() auxiliary function, which returns control to the oper-
ating system for a selectable waiting time (see section Waiting Without Blocking the
Keyboard and Mouse), so enabling user inputs during the waiting time.
result% = 0
For i = 1 To 10 'Abort after max. 10 loop
'iterations
Status = viWaitOnEvent(analyzer, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, VI_TMO_IMMEDIATE, VI_NULL,
VI_NULL)
'Check event queue
If (status = VI_SUCCESS) Then
result% = 1
CALL Srq 'If SRQ is recognized =>
'subroutine for evaluation
Else
CALL Hold(20) 'Call hold function with
'20 ms 'waiting time. User inputs
'are possible.
Endif
Next i
If result% = 0 Then
Debug.Print "Timeout Error; Program aborted"'Output error message
STOP 'Stop software
Endif

10.16.1.3 Waiting Without Blocking the Keyboard and Mouse

A frequent problem with remote control programs using Visual Basic is to insert waiting
times without blocking the keyboard and the mouse.
If the program is to respond to user inputs also during a waiting time, control over the
program events during this time must be returned to the operating system. In Visual

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 970

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

Basic, this is done by calling the DoEvents function. This function causes keyboard-or
mouse-triggered events to be executed by the associated elements. For example, it
allows the operation of buttons and input fields while the user waits for an instrument
setting to be completed.
The following programming example describes the Hold() function, which returns
control to the operating system for the period of the waiting time selectable in millisec-
onds.
Rem ***********************************************************************
Rem The waiting function below expects the transfer of the desired
Rem waiting time in milliseconds. The keyboard and the mouse remain
Rem operative during the waiting period, thus allowing desired elements
Rem to be controlled
Rem ***********************************************************************
Public Sub Hold(delayTime As Single)
Start = Timer 'Save timer count on calling the
'function
Do While Timer < Start + delayTime/1000 'Check timer count
DoEvents 'Return control to operating
'system to enable control of
'desired elements as long as
'timer has not elapsed
Loop
End Sub
Rem ***********************************************************************

The waiting procedure is activated simply by calling Hold(<Waiting time in

milliseconds>).

10.16.1.4 Service Request Routine

A service request is processed in the service request routine.

The variables userN% and userM% must be pre-assigned usefully!

REM ------------ Service request routine ----------------------------------

Public SUB Srq()
ON ERROR GOTO noDevice 'No user existing
CALL viReadSTB(analyzer, STB%) 'Serial poll, read status byte
IF STB% > 0 THEN 'This instrument has bits set in
'the STB
SRQFOUND% = 1
IF (STB% AND 16) > 0 THEN CALL Outputqueue
IF (STB% AND 4) > 0 THEN CALL ErrorQueueHandler
IF (STB% AND 8) > 0 THEN CALL Questionablestatus
IF (STB% AND 128) > 0 THEN CALL Operationstatus
IF (STB% AND 32) > 0 THEN CALL Esrread

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 971

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

END IF
noDevice:
END SUB 'End of SRQ routine
REM ***********************************************************************

REM ---------- Subroutine for evaluation Service Request Routine ----------

Public Sub Srq()

Try
Dim mySTB As Short = mbSession.ReadStatusByte()
'Serial poll, read status byte
Console.WriteLine("Reading Service Request Routine:" + mySTB.ToString())
If mySTB > 0 Then 'This instrument has bits set in the STB
If (mySTB And 16) > 0 Then Call Outputqueue()
If (mySTB And 4) > 0 Then Call ErrorQueueHandler()
If (mySTB And 8) > 0 Then Call Questionablestatus()
If (mySTB And 128) > 0 Then Call Operationstatus()
If (mySTB And 32) > 0 Then Call Esrread()
End If
Catch exp As Exception
Console.WriteLine(exp.Message)
End Try
End Sub 'End of SRQ routine

Reading out the status event registers, the output buffer and the error/event queue is
effected in subroutines.

10.16.1.5 Reading Out the Output Buffer

REM -------- Subroutine for the individual STB bits -----------------------

Public SUB Outputqueue() 'Reading the output buffer
result$ = SPACE$(100) 'Make space for response
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$)
Debug.Print "Contents of Output Queue:"; result$
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************

REM -------- Subroutine for the output queue -----------------------

Public Sub Outputqueue() 'Reading the output buffer
Try
Dim result As String = mbSession.ReadString()
Console.WriteLine("Contents of Output Queue:" + result)
Catch exp As Exception
Console.WriteLine(exp.Message)
End Try
End Sub

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 972

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

10.16.1.6 Reading Error Messages

REM -------- Subroutine for reading the error queue -----------------------

Public SUB ErrorQueueHandler()
ERROR$ = SPACE$(100) 'Make space for error variable
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SYSTEM:ERROR?")
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, ERROR$)
Debug.Print "Error Description:"; ERROR$
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************

REM -------- Subroutine for reading the error queue -----------------------

Sub ErrorQueueHandler()
Dim result As String
Dim hasErr As Boolean = True
Do
mbSession.Write("SYST:ERR?")
result = mbSession.ReadString()
Dim parts As String() = result.Split(",")
If parts(0) = 0 Then
hasErr = False
Console.WriteLine(result)
Else
Console.WriteLine(result)
End If
Loop While hasErr
End Sub

10.16.1.7 Evaluation of SCPI Status Registers

REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating Questionable Status Register ---------

Public SUB Questionablestatus()
Ques$ = SPACE$(20)
'Preallocate blanks to text
'variable
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt?")
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, Ques$)
Debug.Print "Questionable Status:"; Ques$
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************
REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating Operation Status Register ------------
Public SUB Operationstatus()
Oper$ = SPACE$(20) 'Preallocate blanks to text
'variable
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STATus:OPERation:EVENt?")
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, Oper$)
Debug.Print "Operation Status:"; Oper$
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 973

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating Questionable Status Register ---------

Public Sub Questionablestatus()
Dim myQSR As String = Nothing
Try
myQSR = mbSession.Query("STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt?") 'Read QSR
Console.WriteLine("Questionable Status:" + myQSR)
Catch exp As Exception
Console.WriteLine(exp.Message)
End Try
End Sub

REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating Operation Status Register ------------

Public Sub Operationstatus()
Dim myOSR As String = Nothing
Try
myOSR = mbSession.Query("STATus:OPERation:EVENt?") 'Read OSR
Console.WriteLine("Operation Status:" + myOSR)
Catch exp As Exception
Console.WriteLine(exp.Message)
End Try
End Sub

10.16.1.8 Evaluation of Event Status Register

REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating the Event Status Register ------------
Public SUB Esrread()
Esr$ = SPACE$(20) 'Preallocate blanks to text
'variable
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*ESR?") 'Read ESR
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, Esr$)
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 1) > 0 THEN Debug.Print "Operation complete"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 2) > 0 THEN Debug.Print "Request Control"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 4) > 0
THEN Debug.Print "Query Error"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 8) > 0
THEN Debug.Print "Device dependent error"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 16) > 0
THEN Debug.Print "Execution Error; Program aborted"'Output error message
STOP 'Stop software
END IF
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 32) > 0
THEN Debug.Print "Command Error; Program aborted"'Output error message
STOP 'Stop software
END IF
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 64) > 0 THEN Debug.Print "User request"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 128) > 0 THEN Debug.Print "Power on"END SUB
REM **********************************************************************

REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating the Event Status Register ------------
Public Sub Esrread()

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 974

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

Try
Dim myESR As Short = mbSession.Query("*ESR?") 'Read ESR
If (myESR And 1) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("Operation complete")
If (myESR And 2) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("Request Control")
If (myESR And 4) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("Query Error")
If (myESR And 8) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("Device dependent error")
If (myESR And 16) > 0 Then
Console.WriteLine("Execution Error; Program aborted") 'Output error message
Stop 'Stop software
End If
If (myESR And 32) > 0 Then
Console.WriteLine("Command Error; Program aborted") 'Output error message
Stop 'Stop software
End If
If (myESR And 64) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("User request")
If (myESR And 128) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("Power on")
Catch exp As Exception
Console.WriteLine(exp.Message)
End Try
End Sub

10.16.2 Using Marker and Delta Marker

10.16.2.1 Shape Factor Measurement (using n dB down)

The n-dB-down function of the R&S ESR is used twice to determine the shape factor of
a filter (ratio of bandwidths at 60 dB and 3 dB below the filter maximum).
The following example is again based on a signal with a level of -30 dBm at 100 MHz.
The shape factor is determined for the 30 kHz resolution bandwidth. The default setting
of the R&S ESR is used for measurements (SetupInstrument).
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub ShapeFactor()
result$ = Space$(100)
'--------- R&S FSV default setting ----------------------------------------
CALL SetupInstrument 'Default setting
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT:CONT OFF") 'Single sweep
'--------- Set frequency ---------------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "FREQ:SPAN 1 MHz")
'Span
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "BAND:RES 30 kHz")
'Resolution bandwidth
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync
'--------- Measure 60 dB value ---------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:PEXC 6 DB")
'Peak excursion
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:STAT ON")

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 975

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

'Marker1 on
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:TRAC 1")
'Assign marker1 to trace1
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:MAX") 'Set marker1 to 100 MHz
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD 45 dB")
'Read out bandwidth measured at
'45 dB
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:RES?")
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$)
result60 = Val(result$)
'--------- Measure 3 dB down value-----------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD 3 dB")
'Read out bandwidth measured at
'3 dB
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:RES?")
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$)
result3 = Val(result$)
'--------- Read out shape factor--------------------------------------------
Print "Shapefaktor 60 dB/3 dB:";result60/result3
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

10.16.2.2 Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point

The third order intercept point (TOI) is the (virtual) level of two adjacent useful signals
at which the intermodulation products of third order have the same level as the useful
signals.
The intermodulation product at fS2 is obtained by mixing the first harmonic of the useful
signal PN2 with signal PN1, the intermodulation product at fS1 by mixing the first har-
monic of the useful signal PN1 with signal PN2.

fs1 = 2 × fn1 – fn2 (1)

fs2 = 2 × fn2 – fn1 (2)

The following example is based on two adjacent signals with a level of -30 dBm at 100
MHz and 110 MHz. The intermodulation products lie at 90 MHz and 120 MHz accord-
ing to the above formula. The frequency is set so that the examined mixture products
are displayed in the diagram. Otherwise, the default setting of the R&S ESR is used for
measurements (SetupInstrument).
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub TOI()
result$ = Space$(100)
'--------- R&S FSV default setting ----------------------------------------
CALL SetupStatusReg 'Set status registers
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*RST") 'Reset instrument
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT:CONT OFF") 'Single sweep
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SYST:DISP:UPD ON")
'ON: display on'OFF: off

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 976

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

'--------- Set frequency ---------------------------------------------------

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "FREQ:STARt 85 MHz;STOP 125 MHz")
'Span
'--------- Set level -------------------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV -20 dBm")
'Reference level
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync
'--------- TOI measurement -------------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:PEXC 6 DB")
'Peak excursion
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI ON")
'Switch on TOI measurement
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI:RES?")
'and read out results
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$)
'--------- Read out result ------------------------------------------------
Print "TOI [dBm]:";result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

10.16.2.3 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth

The example below is based on an AM-modulated signal at 100 MHz with the following
characteristics:

Carrier signal level -30 dBm

AF frequency 100 kHz

Modulation depth 50 %

The default setting of the analyzer for measurements can be used for the measure-
ments described below (SetupInstrument).
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub AMMod()
result$ = Space$(100)
CALL SetupInstrument 'Default setting
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "BAND:RES 30 kHz") 'Set appropriate RBW
'--------- Peak search -----------------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT:CONT OFF") 'Single sweep
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:PEXC 6 DB")
'Peak excursion
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:STAT ON")
'Marker 1 on
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:TRAC 1")
'Assign marker1 to trace1
'--------- Measure modulation depth -----------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:MAX;FUNC:MDEP ON")
'Marker to Peak;

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 977

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP:RES?")

'Measure mod. depth
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$) 'Read out result
'--------- Read out result -------------------------------------------------
Print "AM Mod Depth [%]:";result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

10.16.3 Limit Lines and Limit Test

The example below shows the definition and use of a new limit line 5 for trace 1 with
the following characteristics:
● Upper limit line
● Absolute x-axis in the frequency range
● 7 reference values:
– 120 MHz/-70 dB,
– 126 MHz/-40 dB,
– 127 MHz/-40 dB,
– 128 MHz/-10 dB,
– 129 MHz/-40 dB,
– 130 MHz/-40 dB,
– 136 MHz/-70 dB
● Relative y-axis with unit dB
● Absolute threshold at –75 dBm
● No margin
The signal of the integrated calibration source (128 MHz, -30 dBm) is used to check
the limit test.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub LimitLine()
result$ = Space$(100)
'--------- R&S FSV default setting ----------------------------------------
CALL SetupInstrument 'Default setting
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "FREQUENCY:CENTER 128 MHz;Span 10 MHz")
'Span
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "Diag:Serv:Inp Cal")
'Cal signal on
'--------- Definition of limit lines ---------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:NAME 'TEST1'")
'Define name
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:COMM 'Upper limit'")
'Define comment
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:TRAC 1")
'Assign trace
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:CONT:DOM FREQ")
'Define x-axis range

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 978

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:CONT:MODE ABS")

'Define x-axis scaling
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:UNIT DB")
'Define y-axis unit
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:UPP:MODE REL")
'Define y-axis scaling
'--------- Definition of data points and threshold -------------------------
xlimit$ = "CALC:LIM5:CONT 120 MHZ,126 MHZ,127 MHZ,128 MHZ,129 MHZ,130 MHz,136 MHz"
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, xlimit$) 'Set values for x-axis
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:UPP -70,-40,-40,-20,-40,-40,-70")
'Set values for y-axis
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:UPP:THR -75 DBM")
'Set y threshold (only
'possible for relative
'y-axis)
'--------- Definition of margin or x/y offset-----------------------------
'A margin or an x/y offset can be defined here.
'----------- Activate and evaluate the limit line -------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:UPP:STAT ON")
'Activate line 5
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:STAT ON")
'Activate limit check
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:FAIL?")
'Query result of limit check
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$) 'Result: 1 (= FAIL)
'--------- Read out result -------------------------------------------------
Print "Limit Result Line 5: ";result$
'------ Evaluate limit line by means of status register -------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*CLS") 'Reset status register
'--------- Measure ---------------------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT;*OPC") 'Perform sweep with sync
CALL viEnableEvent(analyzer, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, VI_QUEUE, 0)
Status = viWaitOnEvent(analyzer, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, SRQWaitTimeout, VI_NULL, VI_NULL)
IF (status = VI_SUCCESS) THEN CALL Srq 'If SRQ is recognized =>
'subroutine for evaluation
'--------- Read out result -------------------------------------------------
IF (status% = 1) THEN
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STAT:QUES:LIM1:COND?")
'Read out STAT:QUES:LIMit
'register
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$)
IF ((Val(result$) And 16) <> 0) THEN
Print "Limit5 failed"ELSE
Print "Limit5 passed"END IF
END IF
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 979

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

10.16.4 Measuring the Channel and Adjacent Channel Power

In the following example, the channel and adjacent channel power is first measured on
a signal with a level of 0 dBm at 800 MHz to IS95. Then the channel and adjacent
channel power is measured on a GSM signal at 935.2 MHz with fast ACP measure-
ment (FAST ACP).
In addition, the limit test is activated.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub ACP()
result$ = Space$(100)
'--------- R&S FSV default setting ----------------------------------------
CALL SetupStatusReg 'Set status register
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*RST") 'Reset instrument
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT:CONT OFF") 'Single sweep
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SYST:DISP:UPD ON")
'ON: display on
'OFF: off
'--------- Set frequency ---------------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "FREQ:CENT 800 MHz")
'Set frequency
'--------- Set level -------------------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV 10 dBm")
'Reference level
'--------- Example 1: Configure CP/ACP for CDMA----------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL ACP")
'ACP measurement on
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES F8CDMA")
'Select CDMA800 FWD
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:ACP 2")
'Select 2 adjacent channels
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:PRES ACP")
'Optimize settings
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:PRES:RLEV")
'Optimize reference level
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:MODE ABS")
'Absolute measurement
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:HSP ON")
'Fast ACP measurement
'--------- Perform measurement and query results --------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? ACP")
'Query result CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$)
'--------- Read out result -------------------------------------------------
Print "Result (CP, ACP low, ACP up, Alt low, Alt up):"Print result$
'--------- Example 2: Configure CP/ACP manually for GSM--------------------
result$ = Space$(100)
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "FREQ:CENT 935.2 MHz")
'Set frequency
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL ACP")

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 980

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

'ACP measurement on
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:ACP 1")
'1 adjacent channel
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:BAND 200 KHZ")
'Channel bandw. 200 kHz
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:BAND:ACH 200 KHZ")
'Adjacent channel band-
'width 200 kHz
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:SPAC 200 KHZ")
'Channel spacing 200 kHz
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:PRES ACP")
'Optimize settings
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:PRES:RLEV")
'Optimize reference level
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:MODE ABS")
'Absolute measurement
'--------- Start measurement and query result ------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? ACP")
'Query result
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$)
'--------- Read out result -------------------------------------------------
Print "Result (CP, ACP low, ACP up):"Print result$
'--------- Active limit check ----------------------------------------------
result$ = Space$(100)
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH 30 DB, 30 DB")
'Set relative limit
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS -35 DBM,-35 DBM")
'Set absolute limit
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:STAT ON")
'Rel. limit check on
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS:STAT ON")
'Abs. limit check on
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM:ACP ON")
'Limit check on
'--------- Start measurement and query result ------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES?")
'Query result of limit check
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$)
'--------- Read out result -------------------------------------------------
Print "Result Limit Check:";result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

Example of channel/adjacent-channel power measurement

POW:ACH:ACP 3
Sets the number of adjacent/alternate channels to 3.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 981

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

POW:ACH:BAND 30 KHZ
Sets the bandwidth of the transmission channel to 30 kHz.
POW:ACH:BAND:ACH 40 KHZ
Sets the bandwidth of each adjacent channel to 40 kHz.
POW:ACH:BAND:ALT1 50 KHZ
Sets the bandwidth of each alternate channel to 50 kHz.
POW:ACH:BAND:ALT2 60 KHZ
Sets the bandwidth of alternate channel 2 to 60 kHz.
POW:ACH:SPAC 30 KHZ
Sets the spacing between the transmission channel and the adjacent channel to 30
kHz, the spacing between the transmission channel and alternate channel 1 to 60 kHz,
and the spacing between the transmission channel and alternate channel 2 to 90 kHz.
POW:ACH:SPAC:ALT1 100 KHZ
Sets the spacing between the alternate adjacent channels and the TX channel. For
details refer to [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<channel>
on page 703.
POW:ACH:SPAC:ALT2 140 KHZ
Sets the spacing between the transmission channel and alternate channel 2 to 140
kHz.
POW:ACH:MODE ABS
Switches on absolute power measurement.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL ACP
Switches on the adjacent-channel power measurement.
INIT:CONT OFF
Switches over to single sweep mode.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end of the sweep.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? ACP
Queries the result of adjacent-channel power measurement.
POW:ACH:REF:AUTO ONCE
Defines the measured channel power as the reference value for relative power mea-
surements.
If the channel power only is to be measured, all commands relating to adjacent/alter-
nate channel bandwidth and channel spacings are omitted. The number of adjacent/
alternate channels is set to 0 with [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs
on page 700.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 982

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

10.16.5 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement

In the following example, the bandwidth is to be found in which 95 % of the power of a

GSM signal is contained. Signal frequency is 935.2 MHz; channel bandwidth is 200
kHz.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub OBW()
result$ = Space$(100)
'--------- R&S FSV default setting ----------------------------------------
CALL SetupStatusReg 'Set status register
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*RST") 'Reset instrument
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT:CONT OFF") 'Single sweep
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SYST:DISP:UPD ON")
'ON: display on
'OFF: off
'--------- Configure R&S FSV for OBW for GSM------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "FREQ:CENT 935.2 MHz")
'Set frequency
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL OBW")
'OBW measurement on
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:BAND 200 KHZ")
'Channel bandw. 200 kHz
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:BWID 95PCT")
'Percentage of power
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:PRES OBW")
'Set frequency and optimize reference level
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:PRES:RLEV")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:NCOR OFF")
'Noise correction
'OFF: switch off
'ON: switch on
'--------- Perform measurement and query results ---------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? OBW")
'Query result
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$)
Print result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

10.16.6 Time Domain Power Measurement

In the following example, the mean carrier power of a signal with 300 kHz bandwidth at
100 MHz is to be determined. In addition, the peak power, the rms value and the
standard deviation are measured. To do this, the time-domain-power measurement
functions are used.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub TimeDomainPower()

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 983

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

result$ = Space$(100)
'--------- R&S FSV default setting ----------------------------------------
CALL SetupStatusReg 'Set status register
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*RST") 'Reset instrument
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT:CONT OFF") 'Single sweep
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SYST:DISP:UPD ON")
'ON: display on
'OFF: off
'--------- Configure R&S FSV for time domain power measurement ------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "FREQ:CENT 100 MHz;SPAN 0Hz")
'Set frequency
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "BAND:RES 300 kHz")
'Resolution bandwidth
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SWE:TIME 200US") 'Sweep time
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE ON")
'Peak measurement on
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN ON")
'Mean measurement on
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS ON")
'RMS measurement on
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV ON")
'Standard deviation on
'------------------- Perform measurement and query results ----------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync
'Query results:
query$ = "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:RES?;" 'Peak measurement
query$ = query$ + ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:RES?;"'Mean measurement
query$ = query$ + ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:RES?;"'RMS measurement
query$ = query$ + ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV:RES?"'Standard deviation
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, query$)
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$)
Print result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

10.16.7 Fast Power Measurement on Power Ramps

A frequent task in mobile radio tests is measurement of a DUT at various power control
levels at the highest possible speed. The R&S ESR offers two test functions for this
task, which can be used depending on the signal characteristics.
In the following, the two methods are presented by means of two examples.

10.16.7.1 Power Measurement with Multi-Summary Marker

The multi-summary marker function is suitable for measuring the power of a sequence
of pulses with the following characteristics:

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 984

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

● The pulses occur at identical time intervals, which is typical of GSM transmission in
slots, for example.
● The level of the first signal is reliably above threshold.
● The subsequent pulses may have any levels.
● The function uses the first pulse as a trigger signal. The power of the subsequent
pulses is determined exclusively via the timing pattern selected for the pulse
sequence. The function is, therefore, suitable for adjustments where the DUT out-
put power varies considerably and is not reliably above the trigger threshold.
● The measurement accuracy is determined by the ratio of pulse duration to total
measurement time; this should not be below 1:50.
● The function always uses TRACE 1.

Fig. 10-6: Block diagram illustrating signal processing in analyzer

In the example below, a GSM pulse sequence of 8 pulses is measured with an offset of
50 ms of the first pulse, 450 ms measurement time/pulse and 576.9 ms pulse period.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub MultiSumMarker()
result$ = Space$(200)
'--------- R&S FSV default setting---------------------------------------
CALL SetupStatusReg 'Configure status register
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*RST") 'Reset instrument
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT:CONT OFF") 'Single sweep mode
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SYST:DISP:UPD ON")
'ON: switch display on
'OFF: switch display off
'--------- Configure R&S FSV for power measurement in time domain ---------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "FREQ:CENT 935.2 MHz;SPAN 0Hz")
'Frequency setting
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV 10 dBm")
'Set reference level to 10 dB
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INP:ATT 30 dB") 'Set input attenuation to 30 dB
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "BAND:RES 1 MHz;VID 3 MHz")
'Bandwidth setting
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "DET RMS") 'Select RMS detector

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 985

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRIG:SOUR VID") 'Trigger source: video

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRIG:LEV:VID 50 PCT")
'Trigger threshold: 50 %
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SWE:TIME 50ms") 'Sweep time ≥ 1 frame
'--------- Perform measurement and query results --------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync
'Query results:
cmd$ = "CALC:MARK:FUNC:MSUM?"cmd$ = cmd$ + "50US," 'Offset of first pulse
cmd$ = cmd$ + "450US," 'Measurement time
cmd$ = cmd$ + "576.9US," 'Pulse period
cmd$ = cmd$ + "8" 'Number of bursts
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, cmd$)
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$) 'Read results
Print result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

10.16.7.2 Multi-Burst Power Measurement

The multi-burst power measurement function is suitable for measuring the power of a
sequence of pulses with the following characteristics:
● The pulses occur at variable time intervals.
● The levels of all pulses of the sequence are reliably above the trigger threshold, or
an external trigger signal is used.
● The function requires one trigger event per pulse. This means that if the video trig-
ger or the IF power trigger is used, the levels of all pulses must be above the trig-
ger threshold.
● The function is, therefore, particularly suitable for re-measuring DUTs already
adjusted and whose output power is within the specified range. The measurement
is optimized for minimum overhead relative to the actual measurement time.

Fig. 10-7: Block diagram illustrating signal processing in analyzer

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 986

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

Either the root-mean-square power or the peak power is measured, depending on

whether the RMS detector or the PEAK detector is selected. The function always uses
TRACE 1.
The following parameters are to be set for this measurement:
● Analyzer frequency
● Resolution bandwidth
● Measurement time per single pulse
● Trigger source
● Trigger threshold
● Trigger offset
● Type of power measurement (PEAK, MEAN)
● Number of pulses to be measured
During the measurement, each pulse is mapped into a pixel of the screen, i.e. any
change of the trace can be detected only at the left-hand edge of the screen. Maximum
measurement speed is as usual achieved with the display switched off.
In the example below, a GSM pulse sequence of 8 pulses is measured with 5 ms trig-
ger offset, 434 ms measurement time/pulse, video trigger with 50 % trigger threshold,
and peak detection:
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub MultiBurstPower()
result$ = Space$(200)
'--------- R&S FSV default setting ----------------------------------------
CALL SetupStatusReg 'Configure status register
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*RST") 'Reset instrument
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT:CONT OFF") 'Single sweep mode
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SYST:DISP:UPD OFF")
'OFF: display off
'--------- Perform measurement and query results ---------------------
cmd$ = "MPOW? "cmd$ = cmd$ + "935.2 MHZ," 'Center frequency
cmd$ = cmd$ + "1 MHZ," 'Resolution bandwidth
cmd$ = cmd$ + "434US," 'Measurement time
cmd$ = cmd$ + "VID," 'Trigger source
cmd$ = cmd$ + "50PCT," 'Trigger threshold
cmd$ = cmd$ + "1US," 'Trigger offset
cmd$ = cmd$ + "PEAK," 'Peak detector
cmd$ = cmd$ + "8" 'Number of bursts
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, cmd$)
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$) 'Read results
Print result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 987

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

10.16.8 Fast Level Measurement Using Frequency Lists

A typical task for the R&S ESR is power measurement at a number of frequency
points, e.g. at multiples of the fundamental (harmonics measurement), or at frequen-
cies defined by a mobile radio standard (e.g. spectrum due to transients at ± 200 kHz,
± 400 kHz, etc about the carrier frequency of a GSM signal). In many cases, different
level and/or bandwidth settings are required for the different frequency points to match
the channel spacing and meet the requirements of dynamic range.
Especially for this application, the R&S ESR offers a number of remote-control func-
tions (commands available in SENSe:LIST subsystem) that allow level measurement
based on a frequency list with different instrument settings assigned to different fre-
quencies. Not only the frequency list can be programmed, but also the measurement
types (PEAK, RMS, AVG) to be performed simultaneously can be selected.
The example below describes a harmonics measurement on a dual-band amplifier.
The harmonics level in general decreases as the frequency increases. To boost mea-
surement sensitivity, therefore, the reference level is lowered by 10 dB from the third
harmonic.
The following settings are used:

Reference level: 10.00 dBm up to first harmonic, 0 dBm from 2nd harmonic

RF attenuation: 20 dB

Electronic attenuation: 0 dB (OFF)

Filter type: NORMal

RBW: 1 MHz

VBW: 3 MHz

Measurement time: 300 ms

Trigger delay: 100 ms

Trigger: video, 45 %

Frequency Type

935.2 MHz GSM 900 fundamental

1805.2 MHz GSM 1800 fundamental

1870.4 MHz GSM 900 2nd harmonic

2805.6 MHz GSM 900 3rd harmonic

3610.4 MHz GSM 1800 2nd harmonic

3740.8 MHz GSM 900 4th harmonic

5815.6 MHz GSM 1800 3rd Harmonic

The frequencies are selected in ascending order to minimize system-inherent waiting

times resulting from frequency changes.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 988

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

At each frequency point the peak power and the rms power are measured. The peak
power and the rms power values are stored alternately in the results memory.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub FrequencyList()
result$ = Space$(500)
'--------- R&S FSV default setting ----------------------------------------
CALL SetupStatusReg 'Configure status register
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*RST") 'Reset instrument
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT:CONT OFF") 'Single sweep mode
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SYST:DISP:UPD OFF") 'Display off
'---------Configure R&S FSV for power measurement based on frequency list -
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRIG:LEV:IFP -20 dBm")
'Set IF power trigger level
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "LIST:POWer:SET ON,ON,OFF,IFP,POS,100us,0")
'--------- Perform measurement and query results ---------------------------
cmd$ = "LIST:POWer?"cmd$ = cmd$ + "935.2 MHZ, 10 dBm, 20 dB,OFF,NORM,1 MHz,3 MHz,
300 us, 0, "
cmd$ = cmd$ + "1805.2 MHZ, 10 dBm, 20 dB,OFF,NORM,1 MHz,3 MHz,300 us, 0, "
cmd$ = cmd$ + "1870.4 MHZ, 10 dBm, 20 dB,OFF,NORM,1 MHz,3 MHz,300 us, 0, "
cmd$ = cmd$ + "2805.6 MHZ, 0 dBm, 20 dB,OFF,NORM,1 MHz,3 MHz,300 us, 0, "
cmd$ = cmd$ + "3610.4 MHz, 10 dBm,20 dB,OFF,NORM,1 MHz,3 MHz,300 us, 0, "
cmd$ = cmd$ + "3740.8 MHz, 0 dBm, 20 dB, OFF, NORM, 1 MHz,3 MHz,300 us, 0, "
cmd$ = cmd$ + "5815.6 MHz, 0 dBm, 20 dB, OFF, NORM, 1 MHz, 3 MHz, 300 us, 0"
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, cmd$)
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$)
Print result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

10.16.9 Level Correction of Transducers

In more complex test systems, the frequency response of the test setup must be taken
into account in all power measurements to avoid any measurement errors being intro-
duced from sources other than the DUT.
The R&S ESR offers the possibility of defining a frequency-dependent attenuation cor-
rection factor (transducer factor).
In the example below, a factor with the following characteristics is defined:

Name: Transtest

Unit: dB

Scaling: lin

Comment: simulated cable correction

Frequency Level

10 MHz 0 dB

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 989

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

100 MHz 3 dB

1 GHz 7 dB

3 GHz 10 dB

The factor is defined and can be activated as required.

REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub TransducerFactor()
'--------- Define transducer factor ---------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CORR:TRAN:SEL 'TRANSTEST'")
'Define "Transtest"'transducer factor
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CORR:TRAN:UNIT 'DB'")
'Unit 'dB'
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CORR:TRAN:SCAL LIN")
'Linear frequency-axis
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CORR:TRAN:COMM 'Simulated cable correction'")
cmd$ = "CORR:TRAN:DATA" 'Enter frequency and level
cmd$ = cmd$ + "10 MHz, 0," 'values. Level values without
cmd$ = cmd$ + "100 MHz, 3," 'unit!
cmd$ = cmd$ + "1GHz, 7,"cmd$ = cmd$ + "3GHz, 10"
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer,cmd$) 'Enter frequency and level values
'--------- Activate transducer ---------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CORR:TRAN:STAT ON")
'Activate transducer factor
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

10.16.10 Measuring the Magnitude and Phase of a Signal

Due to the R&S ESR's internal architecture, it is capable of measuring and outputting
the magnitude and phase of a signal in addition to its power values. This opens up a
variety of possibilities for more in-depth analysis (FFT, demodulation, etc).
I/Q data is stored in memory areas each containing 512 k words. Hardware triggering
controls the memory.
The following example shows the steps necessary to collect data at a predefined sam-
pling rate and read it from the I/Q memory.

1. Data is output in the form of voltage values referred to the analyzer input. Data can
be read in binary or ASCII format.
● In binary format, the length information carried in the message header is evalu-
ated and used for calculating the x-axis values.
● In ASCII format, only a list of voltage values is output.

2. Binary data is read in three steps:

3. The number of digits carrying the length information is read.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 990

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

4. The length information itself is read.

5. The trace data is read.

This procedure is necessary with programming languages like Visual Basic which sup-
port only structures of identical data types (arrays), whereas the binary data format
uses different data types in the header and the data section.

The arrays for measured data are dimensioned in such a way that they can accommo-
date the I/Q data of the R&S ESR (2 × 512 k).

REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub ReadIQData()
'--------- Create variables -----------------------------------------------
Dim IData(131072) As Single 'Buffer for floating-point
'I data (= 512*1024 bytes)
Dim QData(131072) As Single 'Buffer for floating-point
'Q data (= 512*1024 bytes)
'Note:
'Visual Basic cannot read in
'data volumes larger than
'512 k words!
Dim digits As Byte 'No. of digits as length
Dim IQBytes As Long 'Length of trace data in bytes
Dim IQValues As Long 'No. of meas. values in buffer
Dim retCount As Integer 'Return count from read
asciiResult$ = Space$(6553600) 'Buffer for ASCII I/Q data
'(= 25*2*1024 bytes)
result$ = Space$(100) 'Buffer for simple results
'--------- Default setting ---------------------------------------
CALL SetupInstrument 'Default setting
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRAC:IQ:STAT ON")
'Activate I/Q data
'acquisition mode; must be
'done before TRAC:IQ:SET !
'Select number of test points
'(= 512 * 1024 – 512) at
'RBW 10 MHz, 'sample rate 32 MHz,
'trigger free run, pos. trigger
'edge and 0 s trigger delay.
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRAC:IQ:SET NORM,10 MHz,32 MHz,IMM,POS,0,130560")
'--------- Read-out in binary format----------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "FORMAT REAL,32")
'Set binary format
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRAC:IQ:DATA?")
'Measure + read out I/Q data
CALL viRead(analyzer, result$, 2, retCount)
'Read and store length for
digits = Val(Mid$(result$, 2, 1)) 'number of digits

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 991

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

result$ = Space$(100) 'Re-initialize buffer

CALL viRead(analyzer, result$, digits, retCount)
'Read and store length
IQBytes = Val(Left$(result$, digits))
IQBytes = IQBytes/2 'Divide no. per buffer in half
CALL viRead(analyzer, IData(0), IQBytes, retCount)
'Read I data in buffer
CALL viRead(analyzer, QData(0), IQBytes, retCount)
'Read Q data in buffer
CALL viRead(analyzer, result$, 1, retCount)
'Read in end character <NL>
'--------- Output of binary data as frequency/level pair -----------------
IQValues = IQBytes/4 'Single Precision = 4 Bytes
For i = 0 To IQValues – 1
Print "I-Value["; i; "] = "; IData(i)
Print "Q-Value["; i; "] = "; QData(i)
Next i
'--------- Read-out in ASCII format ----------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "FORMAT ASCII") 'Set ASCII format
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRAC:IQ:DATA?")
'Re-measure and read out
'I/Q data
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, asciiResult$)
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRAC:IQ:STAT OFF")
'Stop I/Q data aquisition
'mode if no further
'measurements are to be
'done
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

10.16.11 Reading and Writing Files

10.16.11.1 Reading a File from the Instrument

In the following example, the TEST1.R&S ESR.DFL file stored under C:

\R_S\Instr\user is read from the instrument and stored in the controller.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub ReadFile()
'--------- Generate variables ----------------------------------------------
Dim digits As Byte 'Number of digits of
'length information
Dim fileBytes As Long 'Length of file with trace data
'in bytes
result$ = Space$(100) 'Buffer for simple results
'--------- Default setting of status register ------------------------------
CALL SetupStatusReg 'Configure status register

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 992

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

'--------- Read out file ---------------------------------------------------

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "MMEM:DATA? 'C:\R_S\Instr\user\TEST1.R&S FSV.DFL'")
'Select file
CALL ilrd(analyzer, result$, 2) 'Read and store number of
digits = Val(Mid$(result$, 2, 1)) 'digits of length information
CALL ilrd(analyzer, result$, digits) 'Read and store length
fileBytes = Val(Left$(result$, digits)) 'information
FileBuffer$ = Space$(fileBytes) 'Buffer for file
CALL ilrd(analyzer, FileBuffer, fileBytes)
'Read file into buffer
CALL ilrd(analyzer, result$, 1) 'Read terminator <NL>
'--------- Store file to controller ---------------------------------------
Open "TEST1.R&S FSV.DFL" For Output As #1
Print #1, FileBuffer; '; to avoid linefeed at
'end of file
Close #1
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

10.16.11.2 Creating a File on the Instrument

In the following example, the TEST1.R&S ESR.DFL file available on the con-

troller is stored in the instrument under C:
\R_S\Instr\user\DUPLICAT.R&S ESR.DFL.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub WriteFile()
'--------- Generate variables ----------------------------------------------
FileBuffer$ = Space$(100000) 'Buffer for file
Dim digits As Long 'Number of digits of
'length information
Dim fileBytes As Long 'Length of file in bytes
fileSize$ = Space$(100) 'Length of file as a string
result$ = Space$(100) 'Buffer for simple results
'--------- Default setting of status register ------------------------------
CALL SetupStatusReg 'Configure status register
'--------- Prepare the definite length block data --------------------------
fileBytes = FileLen("H:\work\vb\TEST1.R&S FSV.DFL")
'Determine length of file
fileSize$ = Str$(fileBytes)
digits = Len(fileSize$) – 1 'Determine number of digits of
fileSize$ = Right$(fileSize$, digits) 'length information
FileBuffer$ = "#" + Right$(Str$(digits), 1) + fileSize$
'Store length information in
'file buffer
'--------- Read file from controller ---------------------------------------
Open "H:\work\vb\TEST1.R&S FSV.DFL" For Binary As #1
FileBuffer$ = FileBuffer$ + Left$(Input(fileBytes, #1), fileBytes)
Close #1
'--------- Write file ------------------------------------------------------

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 993

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SYST:COMM:GPIB:RTER EOI") 'Set receive

'terminator on the
'instrument
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "MMEM:DATA
'DUPLICAT.R&S FSV.DFL', " + FileBuffer$)
'Select file
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

10.16.12 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement

You can configure Spectrum Emission Mask measurements via XML files provided for
different standards or by defining ranges and parameters. For both ways an example is
given.

10.16.12.1 Using Predefined Standard Wibro

In the following example, the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement is configured

using a predefined standard XML file.
REM ************************************************************************
'--------- General settings of the instrument ------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*RST") 'Reset instrument
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT:CONT OFF") 'Switch to single sweep
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT:IMM;*WAI") 'Make sure no sweep is running
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:SWEep:MODE ESPectrum")
'Set measurement mode
Rem After preset 3 ranges are available where the middle one is
Rem the reference range for calculating the TX power
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:FREQuency:CENTer 2.2 GHz")
'Center frequency 2.2 GHz
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:DETector1 RMS")
'Set RMS detector
'--------- Setting up the gated trigger ------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:SWEep:EGATe ON")
'Switch on the external gate mode
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:SWEep:EGATe:SOURce EXTernal")
'Set enternal gate source
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff 0s")
'Set delay time to 0 s
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:SWEep:EGATe:LENGth 200 US")
'Set time interval
'--------- Setting the standard --------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:ESPectrum:PRESet:STANdard
'WIBRO\DL\PowerClass_29_40.xml'")
'Set WiBro standard
'--------- Measuring -------------------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep, wait for sweep
'end

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 994

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

'--------- Reading out results ---------------------------------------------

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":TRACe1:DATA? LIST")
'Query list results
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL?")
'Query result of limit check
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$)
REM ************************************************************************

10.16.12.2 Defining 5 Ranges with all Parameters

In the following example, the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement is configured by

defining ranges and parameters.
REM ************************************************************************
'--------- General settings of the instrument ------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*RST") 'Reset instrument
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT:CONT OFF") 'Switch to single sweep
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT:IMM;*WAI") 'Make sure no sweep is running
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:SWEep:MODE ESPectrum")
'Set measurement mode
Rem After preset 3 ranges are available where the middle one is
Rem the reference range for calculating the TX power
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:FREQuency:CENTer 2.2GHz")
'Center frequency 2.2 GHz
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:DETector1 RMS")
'Set RMS detector
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":TRIGger1:SEQuence:SOURce IMMediate")
'Trigger setup
'--------- Setting up the gated trigger ------------------------------------
Rem If a free run trigger is not appropriate a gated trigger can
Rem the be set up (just comment in the following lines).
Rem CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:SWEep:EGATe ON")
Rem Switch on the external gate mode
Rem CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:SWEep:EGATe:SOURce EXTernal")
Rem Set enternal gate source
Rem CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff 0s")
Rem Set delay time to 0 s
Rem CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:SWEep:EGATe:LENGth 200 US")
Rem Set time interval
'--------- Setting the span ------------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:FREQuency:SPAN 8 MHZ")
'Set the span to 8 MHz
'--------- Inserting new ranges --------------------------------------------
Rem Enlarge number of ranges to 5 by adding one at the end
Rem and one at the beginnig. This ensures that the reference range
Rem remains in the middle
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe2:INSert AFTer")
'Insert a range after range 2
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:INSert BEFore")
'Insert a range before range 1

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 995

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

'--------- Defining the limit check for all ranges -------------------------

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe:LIMit:STATe AND")
'Set check for absolute and 'relative limit
'--------- Defining the reference range settings ---------------------------
Rem The bandwith of the reference range limits the minimum span
Rem of the reference range definition later in the script.
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RTYPe CPOWer")
'Set power reference type
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:BWID 2 MHZ")
'Set bandwidth
'--------- Defining the settings of range 1 --------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:FREQuency:STARt -4 MHz")
'Set the start frequency
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:FREQuency:STOP -2 MHz")
'Set the stop frequency
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:BANDwidth:RESolution 1 MHZ")
'Set the resolution bandwidth
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:FILTer:TYPE CFILter")
'Set the channel filters
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:BANDwidth:VIDeo 3 MHZ")
'Set the video bandwidth to 3 MHz
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:SWEep:TIME 20 ms")
'Set the sweep time to 20 ms
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:RLEVel 5 DBM")
'Set the reference level to 5 dBm
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:INPut:ATTenuation 20 DB")
'Set the attenuation to 20 dB
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:LIMit:ABSolute:STARt -50")
'Set an absolute limit of -50 dBm
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:LIMit:ABSolute:STOP -50")
'Set an absolute limit of -50 dBm
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:LIMit:RELative:STARt -70")
'Set a relative limit of -70 dBc
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:LIMit:RELative:STOP -60")
'Set a relative limit of -60 dBc
'--------- Defining the settings of range 2 --------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe2:FREQuency:STARt -2 MHz")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe2:FREQuency:STOP -1 MHz")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe2:BANDwidth:RESolution
100 kHz")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe2:FILTer:TYPE NORM")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe2:BANDwidth:VIDeo 300 kHZ")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe2:SWEep:TIME 50 ms")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe2:RLEVel 10 DBM")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe2:INPut:ATTenuation 30 DB")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe2:LIMit:ABSolute:STARt
-40")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe2:LIMit:RELative:STARt
-60")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe2:LIMit:ABSolute:STOP -40")

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 996

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe2:LIMit:RELative:STOP -40")

'--------- Defining the settings of range 3 --------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe3:FREQuency:STARt -1 MHz")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe3:FREQuency:STOP 1 MHz")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe3:BANDwidth:RESolution
30 kHZ")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe3:FILTer:TYPE NORM")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe3:BANDwidth:VIDeo 100 kHZ")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe3:SWEep:TIME 5 ms")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe3:RLEVel 20 DBM")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe3:INPut:ATTenuation 30 DB")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe3:LIMit:ABSolute:STARt 200")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe3:LIMit:ABSolute:STOP 200")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe3:LIMit:RELative:STARt 200")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe3:LIMit:RELative:STOP 200")
'--------- Defining the settings of range 4 --------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe4:FREQuency:STARt 1 MHz")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe4:FREQuency:STOP 2 MHz")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe4:BANDwidth:RESolution
100 kHz")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe4:FILTer:TYPE NORM")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe4:BANDwidth:VIDeo 300 kHZ")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe4:SWEep:TIME 50 ms")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe4:RLEVel 10 DBM")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe4:INPut:ATTenuation 30 DB")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe4:LIMit:ABSolute:STARt
-40")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe4:LIMit:ABSolute:STOP -40")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe4:LIMit:RELative:STARt
-40")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe4:LIMit:RELative:STOP -60")
'--------- Defining the settings of range 5 --------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe5:FREQuency:STARt 2 MHz")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe5:FREQuency:STOP 4 MHz")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe5:BANDwidth:RESolution 1 MHZ")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe5:FILTer:TYPE CFILter")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe5:BANDwidth:VIDeo 3 MHZ")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe5:SWEep:TIME 20 ms")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe5:RLEVel 5 DBM")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe5:INPut:ATTenuation 20 DB")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe5:LIMit:ABSolute:STARt
-50")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe5:LIMit:ABSolute:STOP -50")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe5:LIMit:RELative:STARt -60")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe5:LIMit:RELative:STOP -70")
'--------- Measuring -------------------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep, wait for sweep
'end
'--------- Reading out results ---------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":TRACe1:DATA? LIST")

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 997

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

'Query list results

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL?")
'Query result of limit check
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$)
REM ************************************************************************

10.16.13 Spurious Emissions Measurement

In the following example, the Spurious Emissions measurement is configured by defin-

ing ranges and parameters.
REM ************************************************************************
'--------- General settings of the instrument ------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*RST") 'Reset instrument
Rem After preset 4 ranges are available. Range settings can be questioned
Rem independent from the set measurement mode.
'--------- Deleting all ranges ---------------------------------------------
Rem Delete all ranges to prepare for setting up a new measurement
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe4:DELete")
'Delete range 4
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe3:DELete")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe2:DELete")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:DELete")
'--------- Defining the start frequency for all ranges ---------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:FREQuency:STARt 1000000")
Rem Setting the start frequency of range 1 will create the ranges and
Rem every other range value will be set to the default value.
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe2:FREQuency:STARt 2000000")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe3:FREQuency:STARt 3000000")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe4:FREQuency:STARt 4000000")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe5:FREQuency:STARt 5000000")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe:COUNT?")
'Queries the number of defined
'ranges
'--------- Querying the parameters of range 1 ------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:FREQuency:STARt?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:FREQuency:STOP?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:FILTer:TYPE?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:BANDwidth:RESolution?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:BANDwidth:VIDeo?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:SWEep:TIME:AUTO?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:DETector?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:RLEVel?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:INPut:GAIN:STATe?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:BREak?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:TRANsducer?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:SWEep:TIME?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:INPut:ATTenuation?")

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 998

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:POINts?")

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:LIMit:STARt?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:LIMit:STOP?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:LIMit:STATe?")
'--------- Changing into the Spurious Emissions measurement mode -----------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:SWEEP:MODE LIST")
Rem In continuous sweep mode, editing the ranges is not allowed.
Rem You have to stop the measurement first.
Rem In single sweep mode, you can edit the ranges at the end of the sweep.
'--------- Single sweep version --------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT:CONT OFF") 'Switch to single sweep
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:FREQuency:STARt 500000")
'Change the start frequency
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep, wait for sweep
'end
'--------- Continuous sweep version ----------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT:CONT ON") 'Switch to continuous sweep
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "ABORt") 'Stop the measurement
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:FREQuency:STARt 500000")
'Change the start frequency
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":INITiate1:SPURious") 'Restart the measurement
'--------- Defining the range settings in single sweep mode ----------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT:CONT OFF") 'Switch to single sweep
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep, wait for sweep
'end
Rem Edit one range at a time. Make sure to edit the ranges in a correct
Rem order to prevent limit violations. Ranges cannot overlap.
Rem The best way is to start with range 1.
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:FREQuency:STARt 500000")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:FREQuency:STOP 550000")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:FILTer:TYPE NORM")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:BANDwidth:RESolution 3000000")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:BANDwidth:VIDeo 10000000")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:DETector RMS")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:RLEVel -10")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO ON")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:POINts 8001")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:INPut:GAIN:STATe OFF")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:BREak OFF")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:LIMit:STARt -20")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:LIMit:STOP -20")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:LIMit:STATe ON")
Rem Proceed with range 2.
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe2:FREQuency:STARt 1000000")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe2:FREQuency:STOP 200000000")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe2:FILTer:TYPE CFILter")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe2:BANDwidth:RESolution 5000000")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe2:DETector POS")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe2:RLEVel -20")

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 999

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe2:INPut:ATTenuation 0")

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe2:POINts 32001")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe2:INPut:GAIN:STATe ON")
Rem Proceed with range 3.
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe3:FREQuency:STARt 250000000")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe3:FREQuency:STOP 1000000000")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe3:FILTer:TYPE RRC")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe3:POINts 32001")
Rem Proceed with range 4.
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe4:FREQuency:STARt 1200000000")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe4:FREQuency:STOP 4000000000")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe4:FILTer:TYPE PULSe")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe4:POINts 251")
Rem Proceed with range 5.
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe5:FREQuency:STARt 5000000000")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe5:FREQuency:STOP 6000000000")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe5:POINts 7001")
'--------- Defining the limit check for all ranges -------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:LIMit:STATe ON")
'Activate the limit check
'--------- Setting the span to include all ranges --------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:FREQuency:STARt 500000")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:FREQuency:STOP 6000000000")
'--------- Measuring -------------------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep, wait for sweep
'end
'--------- Reading out results ---------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":TRACe1:DATA? LIST")
'Query list results
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":CALCulate1:PSEarch[:IMMediate]")
'Deactivate limit line and
'just look for peaks
Rem Or set margin to 200 in order to find all peaks
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":TRACe1:DATA? SPUR")
'Query just the peaks
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL?")
'Query result of limit check
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$)
REM ************************************************************************

10.16.14 Averaging I/Q Data

The R&S ESR has averaging capability also for I/Q measurements, i.e. I/Q data can be
averaged over several test runs. This is subject to the following conditions:
● An external trigger signal must be available for data measurement, and the trigger
signal must be phase-locked to the signal measured.
● The same reference-frequency signal must be used for the DUT and the
R&S ESR.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1000

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

● Internal I/Q data averaging is supported up to 512 k I/Q samples.

If all of the above conditions are fulfilled, no phase shift will occur between consecutive
test runs. Phase shift may falsify the measured average so that in extreme cases a
value of 0 is obtained.
The default setting of the instrument for data measurement without averaging has to be
changed as follows:
REM ************************************************************************
'--------- R&S FSV default setting ----------------------------------------
CALL SetupInstrument 'Default setting
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRAC:IQ:STAT ON")
'Activate I/Q data acquisition
'mode; this must be
'done before TRAC:IQ:SET!
'Select max. number of test points (= 512 * 1024) at 10 MHz RBW,
'32 MHz sampling rate, external
'trigger, pos. trigger edge and
'0 s trigger delay.
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRAC:IQ:SET NORM,10 MHz,32 MHz,EXT,POS,0,524288")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRAC:IQ:AVER ON") 'Switch on I/Q averaging
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRAC:IQ:AVER:COUN 10") 'Set 10 test runs
'--------- Read data in binary format --------------------------------------
…
REM ************************************************************************

10.16.15 Using IQ Gating

IQ gating refers to recording IQ samples in certain time intervals – the gate areas.
There are different modes to define the gate areas:
● Edge triggered recording
● Level triggered recording
For more information, see "IQ Gating" in the "Remote Commands" chapter under
"Trace:IQ" subsystem.

Measurement example: Level mode

With IQ gating in level mode, the area in which the gate signal is active is recorded. In
this example, the gate signal is generated by the IFP trigger. The figure 10-8 shows the
signal (triggered externally) in IQ mode. The following sample program records the sig-
nal in level mode with an external trigger.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1001

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

Fig. 10-8: Signal to be recorded in IQ mode

Used values
sample rate: 32 MHz
number of IQ samples: 128000
trigger mode: IFP

Program
:TRACe1:IQ ON

Trace:iq:set NORM,0,32000000,IFP,POS,0,128000

:TRIGger1:SEQuence:LEVel:IFPower -20

:TRACe1:IQ:EGATe ON

:TRACe1:IQ:EGATe:TYPE LEVel

Result
In figure 10-9, the recorded signal using IQ gating in level mode is displayed. Edges
are only visible around the IFP trigger point, otherwise only the signal level is recorded.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1002

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

Fig. 10-9: Recorded signal using IQ gating in level mode

Measurement example: Edge mode

In edge mode, the gate area is defined by:
● delay (pretrigger samples)
● length
● number of periods
● gap between the periods
The gate starting point can be defined using an IFP or external trigger.
The figure 10-10 shows the signal to be recorded in IQ mode.

Fig. 10-10: Signal to be recorded in IQ mode

Example 1: Signal only

The following sample program records the signal in edge mode and displays only the
signal, without gaps and noise.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1003

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

Used values
sample rate: 32 MHz
number of IQ samples: 128000
delay = 11020 samples
length =15500 samples
trigger mode: EXT

Program
:TRACe1:IQ ON

Trace:iq:set NORM,0,32000000,EXT,POS, 11020,128000

:TRACe1:IQ:EGATe ON

:TRACe1:IQ:EGATe:TYPE EDGE

:TRACe1:IQ:EGATe:LENGth 15500

Result

Fig. 10-11: Result: signal only (no gaps, no noise)

Example 2: Noise only

The following sample program records the signal in edge mode and displays only the
noise.

Used values
sample rate: 32 MHz
number of IQ samples: 128000
delay = 0 samples

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1004

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

length =9000 samples

trigger mode: EXT

Program
:TRACe1:IQ ON

Trace:iq:set NORM,0,32000000,EXT,POS, 0,128000

:TRACe1:IQ:EGATe ON

:TRACe1:IQ:EGATe:TYPE EDGE

:TRACe1:IQ:EGATe:LENGth 9000

Result

Fig. 10-12: Result: noise only

Measurement example: Periodic signal intervals in edge mode

The gate area can also be defined by a number of gate periods and the distance
between two periods (gap). In this example, a power ramp is recorded, triggered by the
IFP on the highest edge (see figure 10-13). As a result, only the levels of the individual
ramp areas of the first 3 periods are displayed (see figure 10-14).

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1005

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

Fig. 10-13: Periodic signal recording in edge mode

Used values:
sample rate: 3,2 MHz
number of IQ samples: 228000
trigger mode: IFP
length: 28800
number of periods: 3
gap: 3800 samples

Program
:TRACe1:IQ ON

trace:iq:set NORM,0,3200000,IFP,POS,0,228000

:TRIGger1:SEQuence:LEVel:IFPower -20

:TRACe1:IQ:EGATe ON

:TRACe1:IQ:EGATe:TYPE EDGE

:TRACe1:IQ:EGATe:LENGth 28800

:TRACe1:IQ:EGATe:NOF 3

:TRACe1:IQ:EGATe:GAP 3800

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1006

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

Result

Fig. 10-14: Result: periodic power ramp levels

10.16.16 Usage of Four Spectrum Instances

As of R&S ESR firmware version 1.50, you can open up to four tabs for spectrum
mode with the softkey "New Spectrum" in the "MODE" menu. The following remote
example shows how to set up four tabs with four different measurements on a WCDMA
signal.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub 4SpectrumTabs()
result$ = Space$(100)

'--------- R&S FSV default setting -----------------------------------------

CALL SetupStatusReg 'Set status registers
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"*RST") 'Reset instrument
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT:CONT OFF") 'Single sweep

'--------- Setup the first Spectrum tab (Spectrum Overview Measurement) ----
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT:CONT OFF") 'Single sweep
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SCAL:RLEV 10 dBm")'Reference level
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"FREQ:STARt 100MHz;STOP 6 GHz") 'Span

'--------- Setup the Spectrum 2 Tab (ACLR measurement) ---------------------

CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INST:CRE SAN,'Spectrum 2'") 'Create Tab 2

'--- After creation the tab is in standard preset setup ---

CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT:CONT OFF") 'Single sweep
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SCAL:RLEV 10 dBm")'Reference level
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"FREQ:CENT 2.1175GHz") 'different CF
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL ACP") 'select ACLR meas
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES FW3Gppcdma")
'select WCDMA BTS standard

'--------- Setup the Spectrum 3 Tab (OBW measurement) ----------------------

CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INST:CRE SAN,'Spectrum 3'") 'Create Tab 3

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1007

R&S®ESR Remote Control
Remote Control – Programming Examples

CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT:CONT OFF") 'Single sweep

CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SCAL:RLEV 10 dBm")'Reference level
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"FREQ:CENT 2.1175GHz") 'different CF
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL OBW") 'select OBW meas
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES FW3Gppcdma")
' select WCDMA BTS standard
'--------- Setup the Spectrum 4 Tab (CCDF measurement) ----------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INST:CRE SAN,'Spectrum 4'") 'Create Tab 4
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT:CONT OFF") 'Single sweep
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SCAL:RLEV 10 dBm")'Reference level
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"FREQ:CENT 2.1175GHz") 'different CF
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer," CALC:STAT:CCDF ON") 'select CCDF meas

'--------- Sweep in first Spectrum Tab and query marker --------------------

CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INST:SEL SAN") 'Select Tab 1
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK1:MAX") 'Marker to peak
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK1:X?") 'Query Marker x value
CALL InstrRead(analyzer,result$)
Print "Spectrum 1 Marker x [Hz]: ";result$
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK1:Y?") 'Query Marker y value
CALL InstrRead(analyzer,result$)
Print "Spectrum 1 Marker y [dBm]: ";result$
'--------- Sweep in Spectrum 2 Tab and query ACLR results ------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer," INST:SEL 'Spectrum 2'") 'Select Tab 2
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? ACP")'Query ACLR results
CALL InstrRead(analyzer,result$)
Print "Spectrum 2 ACRL results : ";result$

'--------- Sweep in Spectrum 3 Tab and query OBW results ------------------

CALL InstrWrite(analyzer," INST:SEL 'Spectrum 3'") 'Select Tab 3
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? OBW")'Query OBW results
CALL InstrRead(analyzer,result$)
Print "Spectrum 3 OBW results : ";result$

'--------- Sweep in Spectrum 4 Tab and query CCDF results -----------------

CALL InstrWrite(analyzer," INST:SEL 'Spectrum 4'") 'Select Tab 4
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:STAT:RES1? ALL")'Query CCDF results
CALL InstrRead(analyzer,result$)
Print "Spectrum 4 CCDF results : ";result$
'--------- Now the sweep part can be redone without the need of ------------
'--------- doing the setup of all 4 measurements again. .------------
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1008

R&S®ESR Remote Control
GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E

10.17 GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B,

8568A/B and 8594E
The R&S ESR analyzer family supports a subset of the GPIB commands of HP models
8560E, 8561E, 8562E, 8563E, 8564E, 8565E, 8566A, 8566B, 8568A, 8568B and
8594E.
Despite the differences in system architecture and device features, the supported com-
mands have been implemented in a way to ensure a sufficiently high degree of corre-
spondence with the original.
This includes the support of syntax rules for not only newer device families (B and E
models) but for the previous A family as well.
In many cases the selection of commands supported by the R&S ESR is sufficient to
run an existing GPIB program without adaptation.
After the introduction, this section includes the following topics:
● GPIB Languages.................................................................................................1009
● Command Set of Models 8560E, 8561E, 8562E, 8563E, 8564E, 8565E, 8566A/B,
8568A/B, 8591E, 8594E, 71100C, 71200C, and 71209A...................................1011
● Special Features of the Syntax Parsing Algorithms for 8566A and 8568A Models
............................................................................................................................ 1034
● Special Behavior of Commands..........................................................................1035
● Model-Dependent Default Settings..................................................................... 1036
● Data Output Formats...........................................................................................1037
● Trace Data Output Formats................................................................................ 1037
● Trace Data Input Formats................................................................................... 1038
● GPIB Status Reporting........................................................................................1038

10.17.1 GPIB Languages

The R&S ESR analyzer family supports a subset of the GPIB commands used by other
devices. Thus it can emulate other devices in order to use existing remote control pro-
grams.
In order to emulate device models that are not part of the selection list of the GPIB
"Language" setting, you can modify the identification string received in response to the
ID command ("Identification String" setting). Thus, any device model whose command
set is compatible with one of the supported device models can be emulated.

Supported languages

Language Comment

SCPI

71100C Compatible to 8566A/B

71200C Compatible to 8566A/B

71209A Compatible to 8566A/B

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1009

R&S®ESR Remote Control
GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E

Language Comment

8560E

8561E

8562E

8563E

8564E

8565E

8566A Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules
regarding the command structure.

8566B

8568A Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules
regarding the command structure.

8568A_DC Uses DC input coupling by default if supported by the instrument

8568B Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules
regarding the command structure.

8568B_DC Uses DC input coupling by default if supported by the instrument

8591E Compatible to 8594E

8594E Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules
regarding the command structure.

PSA89600

PSA

Notes:
● If you select a language other than "SCPI", the GPIB address is set to 18 if it was
20 before.
● The Start/stop frequency, reference level and number of sweep points are adapted
to the selected instrument model.
● When you switch between remote control languages, the following settings or
changes are made:
SCPI:
The instrument performs a PRESET.
8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8594E; FSEA, FSEB, FSEM; FSEK:
– The instrument performs a PRESET.
– The following instrument settings are changed:
Table 10-27: Instrument settings for emulation of 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8594E; FSEA, FSEB, FSEM;
FSEK instruments

Model # of Trace Start Freq. Stop Freq. Ref Level Input Coupling
Points

8566A/B 1001 2 GHz 22 GHz 0 dBm AC

8568A/B 1001 0 Hz 1.5 GHz 0 dBm AC

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1010

R&S®ESR Remote Control
GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E

Model # of Trace Start Freq. Stop Freq. Ref Level Input Coupling
Points

8560E 601 0 Hz 2.9 GHz 0 dBm AC

8561E 601 0 Hz 6.5 GHz 0 dBm AC

8562E 601 0 Hz 13.2 GHz 0 dBm AC

8563E 601 0 Hz 26.5 GHz 0 dBm AC

8564E 601 0 Hz 40 GHz 0 dBm AC

8565E 601 0 Hz 50 GHz 0 dBm AC

8594E 401 0 Hz 3 GHz 0 dBm AC

Note: The stop frequency indicated in the table may be limited to the corresponding
frequency of the R&S ESR, if required.

10.17.2 Command Set of Models 8560E, 8561E, 8562E, 8563E, 8564E,

DA 2) DA Display address available

GRAT 2) GRAT Graticule HP 856xE/ available

ON|OFF HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

I1 I1 HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A

I2 I2 HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A

ID ID Identify HP 8566A/ available

ID? HP 8568A/
HP 856xE/
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

INZ 1) INZ 75 Input Impedance HP 856xE/ available

INZ 50 HP 8566B/
INZ? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

IP IP Instrument preset HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A

KEYDEF KEYDEF Key definition HP 8566B/ available

HP 856xE/
HP 859xE

KEYEXEC KEYEXEC Key execute HP 8566B available

KS= KS= <numeric_value> Marker Frequency Coun- HP 8566A/ available

LIMF limit line frequency HP 856xE available

LIMIFAIL limit fail query HP 856xE available

LIMIPURGE purge limit line HP 856xE available

LIMIRCL recall limit line HP 856xE available

LIMIREL relative limit line HP 856xE available

LIMISAV save limit line HP 856xE available

LIMITEST limit line test HP 856xE available

LIML lower limit line value HP 856xE available

LIMM middle limit line value HP 856xE available

LIMTFL flat limit line segment HP 856xE available

MC1 MC1 Marker Count on HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A

MDS MDS Measurement data size HP 8566B available

MEAS Measurement status HP 856xE available

MF MF Marker Frequency HP 8566A/ available

MF? HP 8568A/
HP 856xE/
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

MINH1) MINH TRC Minimum Hold HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

MKA MKA <numeric_value> Marker Amplitude HP 856xE/ available

MKA? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

MKACT MKACT 1 Select the active marker HP 856xE/ not available

MKACT? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1022

R&S®ESR Remote Control
GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E

Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status

Models

MKBW 1) MKBW <numeric_value> N dB Down HP 856xE/ available

MKBW ON HP 8566B/
MKBW OFF HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

MKD MKD Delta Marker HP 856xE/ available

MKD <numeric_value> HP 8566B/
HZ|KHZ| HP 8568B/
MHZ|GHZ HP 8594E
MKD DN
MKD UP
MKD ON
MKD OFF
MKD?

MKDR MKDR <numeric_value> Delta Marker reverse HP 856xE/ available

HZ|KHZ| HP 8566B/
MHZ|GHZ| HP 8568B/
S|SC|MS|MSEC| HP 8594E
USMKDR?

MKDR? Delta Marker reverse available

query

MKF MKF <numeric_value> Set Marker Frequency HP 856xE/ available

HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ HP 8566B/
MKF? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

MKFC MKFC ON|OFF Frequency Counter HP 856xE/ available

on/off HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

MKFCR 1) MKFCR Frequency Counter Res- HP 856xE/ available

<numeric_value> olution HP 8566B/
HZ|KHZ| MHZ|GHZ HP 8568B/
MKFCR DN HP 8594E
MKFCR UP
MKFCR?

MKMIN MKMIN Marker -> Min HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1023

R&S®ESR Remote Control
GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E

Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status

Models

MKN MKN Normal Marker HP 856xE/ available

MKN <numeric_value> HP 8566B/
HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ HP 8568B/
MKN DN HP 8594E
MKN UP
MKN ON
MKN OFF
MKN?

MKNOISE MKNOISE ON|OFF Noise Measurement HP 856xE/ available

MKNOISE 1|0 HP 8566B/
MKNOISE? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

MKOFF MKOFF Marker off HP 856xE/ available

MKOFF ALL HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

MKP MKP <numeric_value> Marker position HP 856xE/ available

MKP? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

MKPK MKPK Marker Search HP 856xE/ available

MKPK HI HP 8566B/
MKPK NH HP 8568B/
MKPK NR HP 8594E
MKPK NL

MKPT MKPT Marker Peak Threshold HP 856xE/ available

MKPT HI HP 8566B/
MKPT NH HP 8568B/
MKPT NR HP 8594E
MKPT NL

MKPX MKPX <numeric_value> Peak Excursion HP 856xE/ available

DB HP 8566B/
MKPX DN HP 8568B/
MKPX UP HP 8594E
MKPX?

MKRL MKRL Ref Level = Marker HP 856xE/ available

Level HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1024

R&S®ESR Remote Control
GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E

Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status

Models

MKSP MKSP Deltamarker to span HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

MKSS MKSS CF Stepsize = Marker HP 856xE/ available

Freq HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

MKT MKT <numeric_value> MKF = fstart + MKT/ HP 856xE/ available

SWT*Span
S|MS|US|SC HP 8594E
MKT?

MKTRACE MKTRACE TRA|TRB| Marker to Trace HP 856xE/ available

TRC HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

MKTRACK MKTRACK ON|OFF Signal Track HP 856xE/ available

MKTRACK 1|0 HP 8566B/
MKTRACK? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

MKTYPE MKTYPE AMP Marker type HP 856xE/ available

MK TYPE? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

tions HP 8568A

PA PA <numeric_value>, Plot command HP 8566A/ available

<numeric_value HP 8568A

PD PD <numeric_value>, Plot command HP 8566A/ available

<numeric_value HP 8568A

PH_MKF Spot frequency in Hz HP 856xE available

PH_FMIN Min offset frequency to HP 856xE available

be measured

PH_FMAX Max offset frequency to HP 856xE available

be measured

PH_MKA Queries amplitude at the HP 856xE available

spot frequency

PH_DRIFT 0: for stable signals, 1: HP 856xE available

for drifty

PH_RLVL Reference level for the HP 856xE available

log plot

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1026

R&S®ESR Remote Control
GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E

Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status

Models

PH_SMTHV Trace smoothing HP 856xE available

PH_VBR Filtering HP 856xE available

PH_RMSPT Amount of data points to HP 856xE available

skip when doing the inte-
gration

PH_RMSFL Lower integration fre- HP 856xE available

quency in Hz

PH_RMSFU Upper integration fre- HP 856xE available

quency in Hz

HP 8568A

SADD add a limit line segment HP 856xE available

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1029

R&S®ESR Remote Control
GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E

Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status

Models

SAVES SAVES Save State Register HP 856xE/ available

<numeric_value> HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

SAVET SAVET TRA|TRB,<num- Save Trace HP856xE/ available

ber> HP8594E

SDEL delete limit line segment HP 856xE available

TBCL TBCL?

TCCL TCCL?

TACR TACR? Returns instantaneous not available

measurement results.
See TRACe<trace
#>:IMMediate:LEVel? for
full description.

TBCR TBCR?

TCCR TCCR?

TB TB Transfer B HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A

TDF TDF P Trace Data Format HP 856xE/ available

TDF M HP 8566B/
TDF B HP 8568B/
TDF A HP 8594E
TDF I

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1032

R&S®ESR Remote Control
GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E

Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status

Models

TH TH <numeric_value> Threshold HP 856xE/ available

DB|DM HP 8566B/
TH DN HP 8568B/
TH UP HP 8594E
TH ON
TH OFF
TH AUTO
TH?

THE THE ON| OFF Threshold Line enable HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

TIMEDSP 1) TIMEDSP ON|OFF Time Display HP 856xE/ available

TIMEDSP 1|0 HP 8566B/
TIMEDSP? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

TM TM FREE|VID|EXT| Trigger Mode HP 856xE/ available

LINE2) HP 8566B/
TM? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

TM LINE 2) TM LINE Trigger Line HP 8566B available

TRA TRA B Transfer A HP 856xE/ available

TRA A HP 8566B/
TRA I HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

TRB TRB B Transfer B HP 856xE/ available

TRB A HP 8566B/
TRB I HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

TRSTAT TRSTAT? Trace State Query HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

TS TS Take Sweep HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

UR 2) UR Plot Command HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1033

R&S®ESR Remote Control
GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E

Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status

Models

VARDEF VARDEF Variable definition, HP 8566B/ available

arrays are not supported HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

VAVG VAVG Video Averaging HP 856xE/ available

VAVG TRA|TRB|TRC HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

VB VB <numeric_value> Video Bandwidth HP 856xE/ available

HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ HP 8566B/
VB DN HP 8568B/
VB UP HP 8594E
VB AUTO
VB?

VBR 1) VBR <numeric_value> Video Bandwidth Ratio HP 856xE/ available

VBR DN HP 8566B/
VBR UP HP 8568B/
VBR? HP 8594E

VIEW VIEW TRA|TRB|TRC HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E

VTL VTL <numeric_value> Video Trigger Level HP 856xE/ not available

DB|DM HP 8594E
VTL DN
VTL UP
VTL?

1) HP 8594E only

2) Command is accepted without error message, but is ignored

10.17.3 Special Features of the Syntax Parsing Algorithms for 8566A and
8568A Models

The command syntax is very different for models A and B. Different names are
assigned to identical instrument functions, and the command structure likewise differs
considerably between models A and models B.
The command structure for models A is as follows:
<command>::= <command
code>[<SPC>][<data>|<step>][<SPC>][<delimiter>][<command
code>]…<delimiter>

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1034

R&S®ESR Remote Control
GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E

<data>::= <Value>[<SPC>][<units
code>][<SPC>][<delimiter>][<SPC>][<data>]…
<step>::= UP|DN
where
<command code> = see Table "Supported Commands"
<Value> = integer or floating-point numerical value
<units code> = DM | -DM | DB | HZ | KZ | MZ | GZ | MV | UV | SC | MS | US
<delimiter> = <CR> | <LF> | <,> | <;> | <ETX>
<SPC> = 3210

<ETX> = 310

Command sections given in [ ] are optional.

The R&S ESR GPIB hardware differs from that used in the HP analyzers. Therefore,
the following constraint exists:
<LF>| <EOI> are still used as delimiters since the GPIB hardware is able to identify
them. The other delimiters are identified and evaluated during syntax analysis.

10.17.4 Special Behavior of Commands

Command Known Differences

ABORT Does not automatically set the command complete bit (bit 4) in the status byte. An addi-
tional DONE is required for that purpose.

ANNOT Only frequency axis annotation is affected.

AT AT DN/UP: Step size

CAL The CAL commands do not automatically set the command complete bit (bit 4) in the sta-
tus byte. An additional DONE command is required for that purpose.

CF Default value, range, step size

CR Default ratio Span/RBW

CT Formula for coupled sweep time

CV Default ratio RBW/VBW

DET DET? returns SAMP instead of SMP on the R&S ESR.

DET not automatically set the command complete bit (bit 4) in the status byte. An addi-
tional DONE is required for that purpose.

ERR? Deletes the error bit in the status register but always returns a '0' in response.

FA Default value, range, step size

FB Default value, range, step size

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1035

R&S®ESR Remote Control
GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E

Command Known Differences

M2 Default value, range, step size

M3 Default value, range, step size

MKACT Only marker 1 is supported as the active marker.

MKBW Default value

MKPT Step size

MKPX Step size

OL? Storage of instrument settings:

80 characters are returned as information on the instrument settings.
The contents of the 80 characters returned does not correspond to the original data con-
tents of the 8566A/8568A family.

OL Readout of instrument settings:

The 80 characters read by means of OL? are accepted as information on the correspond-
ing instrument settings.
The contents of the 80 characters read does not correspond to the original data contents
of the 8566A/8568A family.

RB Default value, range, step size

RL Default value, step size

RLPOS Adapts the position of the reference level even if the tracking generator normalization is
not active.

RQS Supported bits:

1 (Units key pressed)
2 (End of Sweep)
3 (Device error)
4 (Command complete)
5 (Illegal command)

10.17.5 Model-Dependent Default Settings

If the GPIB language is switched over to an 85xx model, the GPIB address is automati-
cally switched over to 18 provided that the default address of the R&S ESR (20) is still
set. If a different value is set, this value is maintained. Upon return to SCPI, this
address remains unchanged.
The following table shows the default settings obtained after a change of the GPIB lan-
guage and for the commands IP, KST and RESET:

Model # of Trace Start Freq. Stop Freq. Ref Level Input Coupling
Points

8566A/B 1001 2 GHz 22 GHz 0 dBm AC

8568A/B 1001 0 Hz 1.5 GHz 0 dBm AC

8560E 601 0 Hz 2.9 GHz 0 dBm AC

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1036

R&S®ESR Remote Control
GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E

Model # of Trace Start Freq. Stop Freq. Ref Level Input Coupling
Points

8561E 601 0 Hz 6.5 GHz 0 dBm AC

8562E 601 0 Hz 13.2 GHz 0 dBm AC

8563E 601 0 Hz 26.5 GHz 0 dBm AC

8564E 601 0 Hz 40 GHz 0 dBm AC

8565E 601 0 Hz 50 GHz 0 dBm AC

8594E 401 0 Hz 3 GHz 0 dBm AC

Stop frequency
The stop frequency given in the table may be limited to the corresponding frequency
range of the R&S ESR.
Command LF sets the stop frequency for 8566A/B to a maximum value of 2 GHz.
Test points (trace points)
The number of trace points is switched over only upon transition to the REMOTE state.

10.17.6 Data Output Formats

In the case of the SCPI and IEEE488.2 standards, the output formats for numerical
data are flexible to a large extent. The output format for the HP units, by contrast, is
accurately defined with respect to the number of digits. The memory areas for reading
instrument data have therefore been adapted accordingly in the remote-control pro-
grams for instruments of this series.
Therefore, in response to a query, the R&S ESR returns data of the same structure as
that used by the original instruments; this applies in particular to the number of charac-
ters returned.
Two formats are currently supported when trace data is output: Display Units (com-
mand O1) and physical values (command O2, O3 or TDF P). As to the "Display Units"
format, the level data of the R&S ESR is converted to match the value range and the
resolution of the 8566/8568 series. Upon transition to the REMOTE state, the
R&S ESR is reconfigured such that the number of test points (trace points) corre-
sponds to that of the 85xx families (1001 for 8566A/B and 8568A/B, 601 for 8560E to
8565E, 401 for 8594E).

10.17.7 Trace Data Output Formats

All formats are supported for trace data output: display units (command O1), display
units in two byte binary data (command O2 or TDF B and MDS W), display units in one
byte binary data (command O4 or TDF B and MDS B) and physical values (commands
O3 or TDF P). With format "display units" the level data is converted into value range
and resolution of the 8566/8568 models. On transition to REMOTE state the number of

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1037

R&S®ESR Remote Control
GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E

trace points are reconfigured in order to be conform to the selected instrument model
(1001 for 8566A/B and 8568 A/B, 601 for 8560E to 8565E, 401 for 8594E).

10.17.8 Trace Data Input Formats

Trace data input is only supported for binary date (TDF B, TDF A, TDF I, MDS W, MDS
B).

10.17.9 GPIB Status Reporting

The assignment of status bits by commands R1, R2, R3, R4, RQS is supported.
The STB command and the serial poll respond with an 8-bit value with the following
assignment:

Bit enabled by RQS Description

0 not used (value 0)

1 Units key pressed

2 End of Sweep

3 Device Error

4 Command Complete

5 Illegal Command

6 Service Request

7 not used (value 0)

Bits 0 and 7 are not used and always have the value 0.
Please note that the R&S ESR reports any key pressed on the front panel rather than
only the unit keys if bit 1 was enabled.
Another difference is the behavior of bit 6 when using the STB? query. On the HP ana-
lyzers this bit monitors the state of the SRQ line on the bus. On the R&S ESR this is
not possible. Therefore this bit is set, as soon as one of the bits 1 to 5 is set. It won't be
reset by performing a serial poll.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1038

R&S®ESR Maintenance
Storing and Packing

11 Maintenance
The following chapter contains information on the maintenance of the R&S ESR. The
instrument does not need a periodic maintenance. What is necessary is essentially the
cleaning of the instrument. However, it is recommended to check the rated data from
time to time.
Follow the instructions in the service manual and the safety instructions when
exchanging modules or ordering spares. The order no. for spare parts is included in
the service manual. The service manual includes further information particularly on
troubleshooting, repair, exchange of modules (including battery exchange, adjustment
of the OCXO oscillator) and alignment.
The address of our support center and a list of all Rohde & Schwarz service centers
can be found at the beginning of this manual.

11.1 Storing and Packing

The storage temperature range of the instrument is given in the data sheet. If the
instrument is to be stored for a longer period of time, it must be protected against dust.
Repack the instrument as it was originally packed when transporting or shipping. The
two protective foam plastic parts prevent the control elements and connectors from
being damaged. The antistatic packing foil avoids any undesired electrostatic charging
to occur.
If you do not use the original packaging, provide for sufficient padding to prevent the
instrument from slipping inside the package. Wrap antistatic packing foil around the
instrument to protect it from electrostatic charging.

11.2 List of Available Power Cables

Table 11-1: List of power cables available

Stock No. Earthed-contact connector Preferably used in

DS 006.7013.00 BS1363: 1967' complying with Great Britain

IEC 83: 1975 standard B2

DS 006.7020.00 Type 12 complying with SEV-reg- Switzerland

ulation 1011.1059, standard sheet
S 24 507

DS 006.7036.00 Type 498/13 complying with USA/Canada

US-regulation UL 498, or with IEC
83

DS 006.7107.00 Type SAA3 10 A, 250 V, Australia

complying with AS C112-1964
Ap.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1039

R&S®ESR Maintenance
List of Available Power Cables

Stock No. Earthed-contact connector Preferably used in

DS 0025.2365.00 DIN 49 441, 10 A, 250 V, angular Europe (except Switzerland)

DS 0099.1456.00 DIN 49 441, 10 A, 250 V, straight

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1040

R&S®ESR Error Messages

12 Error Messages
Error messages are entered in the error/event queue of the status reporting system in
the remote control mode and can be queried with the command SYSTem:ERRor?. The
answer format of R&S ESR to the command is as follows:
<error code>, "<error text with queue query>;
<remote control command concerned>"
The indication of the remote control command with prefixed semicolon is optional.
Example:
The command "TEST:COMMAND" generates the following answer to the query SYS-
Tem:ERRor?
-113,"Undefined header;TEST:COMMAND"
There are two types of error messages:
● Error messages defined by SCPI are marked by negative error codes. These mes-
sages are defined and described in the SCPI standard and not listet here.
● Device-specific error messages use positive error codes. These messages are lis-
ted below.
The right-hand column in the following tables contains the error text in bold which is
entered in the error/event queue and can be read out by means of query
SYSTem:ERRor?. A short explanation of the error cause is given. The left-hand col-
umn contains the associated error code.
Additionally, option-specific warnings and error messages displayed in the status bar
are explained.
Table 12-1: Device-specific error messages

Error code Error text in the case of queue poll

Error explanation

1052 Frontend LO is Unlocked

This message is displayed when the phase regulation of the local oscillator fails in the RF
front-end.

1060 Trigger-Block Gate Delay Error- gate length < Gate Delay
This message is displayed when the gate signal length is not sufficient for the pull-in delay
with a predefined gate delay.

1064 Tracking LO is Unlocked

This message is displayed when the phase regulation of the local oscillator fails on the
tracking generator module.

2028 Hardcopy not possible during measurement sequence

This message is displayed when a printout is started during scan sequences that cannot
be interrupted. Such sequences are for example:
● Recording the system error correction data (alignment)
● Instrument self test
In such cases synchronization to the end of the scan sequence should be performed prior
to starting the printout.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1041

R&S®ESR Error Messages

Error code Error text in the case of queue poll

Error explanation

2033 Printer Not Available

This message is displayed when the selected printer is not included in the list of available
output devices. A possible cause is that the required printer driver is missing or incorrectly
installed.

2034 CPU Temperature is too high

This message is displayed when the temperature of the processor exceeds 70 °C.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1042

R&S®ESR Appendix: LAN Interface
Configuring the Network

13 Appendix: LAN Interface

In this appendix, additional information on the LAN interface is given. How to connect
the instrument to the network and configure the network protocols is described in chap-
ter 2.2.6, "Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection", on page 57.

Network restrictions and entering passwords

Only user accounts with administrator rights can configure LAN networks. For details
see chapter 2.2.5.3, "Login", on page 54.
In some of the following step-by-step instructions, user names and passwords must be
entered. This requires using the touchscreen and the on-screen keyboard, or a mouse
and an external keyboard (see chapter 2.4, "Basic Operations", on page 70 and chap-
ter 2.2.2, "Connecting USB Devices", on page 43.

13.1 Configuring the Network

After network support has been installed, data can be exchanged between the instru-
ment and other computers, and network printers can be used.
Network operation is only possible if you are authorized to access network resources.
Typical resources are file directories of other computers or even central printers.
Authorization is assigned by the network or server administrator.
The operation on the network includes the following administrative tasks:
● chapter 13.1.1, "Changing the Computer Name", on page 1044
● chapter 13.1.2, "Changing the Domain or Workgroup", on page 1044
● chapter 13.1.3, "Operating the Instrument Without a Network", on page 1045
● chapter 13.1.4, "Creating Users", on page 1045
● chapter 13.1.5, "Changing the User Password", on page 1046
● chapter 2.2.5.3, "Login", on page 54
● "The Automatic Login Function" on page 55
● chapter 13.1.8, "Mapping Network Drives", on page 1048
● chapter 13.1.9, "Sharing Directories (only with Microsoft Networks)", on page 1049

Connection to networks
Before connecting the instrument to the network or configuring the network, consult
your network administrator, particularly for large LAN installations. Errors may affect
the entire network.
Never connect your analyzer to a network unprotected against virus infection because
this may cause damage to the instrument software.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1043

R&S®ESR Appendix: LAN Interface
Configuring the Network

To integrate the instrument into your network, you can change the following system
properties:
● Computer name
● Domain
● Workgroup

13.1.1 Changing the Computer Name

1. Press the SETUP function key on the front panel of the R&S ESR.

2. Press the "General Setup" softkey.

3. Press the "Network Address" softkey.

The submenu is displayed.

4. Press the "Computer Name" softkey and enter the computer name.

5. If you enter an invalid name, the error "message out of range" is displayed in the
status line. The edit dialog box remains open, and you can start again.
If the settings are correct, the configuration is saved, and you are prompted to
restart the instrument.

6. Confirm the displayed message ("Yes" button) to restart the instrument.

13.1.2 Changing the Domain or Workgroup

Changing settings
Before you change other settings than described here, contact your network adminis-
trator.

1. Press the "Windows" key on the external keyboard or the CTRL + ESC key combi-
nation on your keyboard to access the operating system.

2. Select "Start > Control Panel > System and Security > System".

3. Scroll down to the "Computer name, domain, and workgroup settings" area.

4. Select "Change settings".

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1044

R&S®ESR Appendix: LAN Interface
Configuring the Network

5. Select "Change..."
The dialog box for computer name and domain changes is displayed.

6. Enter a "Domain" or "Workgroup."

7. Confirm the changes with "OK".

8. Confirm the prompt to restart the instrument.

13.1.3 Operating the Instrument Without a Network

To operate the instrument without a network connection either temporarily or perma-

nently, no special measures are necessary. Windows automatically detects the inter-
ruption of the network connection and does not set up the connection when the instru-
ment is switched on.
If you are not prompted to enter the user name and password, see "The Automatic
Login Function" on page 55.

13.1.4 Creating Users

After the software for the network has been installed, the instrument issues an error
message the next time it is switched on because there is no user named "instrument"
(= user ID for Windows automatic login) in the network. Thus, a matching user must be
created in Windows and in the network, the password must be adapted to the network
password, and the automatic login mechanism must then be deactivated.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1045

R&S®ESR Appendix: LAN Interface
Configuring the Network

The network administrator is responsible for creating new users in the network.
1. Press the "Windows" key on the external keyboard or the CTRL + ESC key combi-
nation on your keyboard to access the operating system.

2. Select "Start > Control Panel > User Accounts".

3. Select "Give other users access to this computer".

4. In the "User Accounts" dialog box, select "Add".

The "Add New User" dialog box is displayed.

5. Enter the name of the new user and the domain the user belongs to and select
"Next".

6. Define the level of access you want to allow the new user:
● Select "Standard" to create an account with limited rights.
● Select "Administrator" to create an account with administrator rights.
Note: Full firmware functionality requires administrator rights.
7. Select "Finish".
The new user is created.

13.1.5 Changing the User Password

After the new user has been created on the instrument, the password must be adapted
to the network password.
1. Press the "Windows" key on the external keyboard or the CTRL + ESC key combi-
nation on your keyboard to access the operating system.

2. Press CTRL + ALT + DELETE, then select "Change a password".

3. Enter the user account name.

4. Enter the old password.

5. Enter the new password in the upper text line and repeat it in the following line.

6. Press ENTER.
The new password is now active.

13.1.6 Logging on to the Network

At the same time you log on to the operating system, you are automatically logged on
to the network. As a prerequisite, the user name and the password must be identical
under Windows and on the network.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1046

R&S®ESR Appendix: LAN Interface
Configuring the Network

13.1.7 The Automatic Login Function

When shipped, the instrument is already configured to automatically log on under

Microsoft Windows using the default administrator account ("Instrument") and pass-
word.

Deactivating the automatic login function

To deactivate the automatic login function, perform the following steps:
1.

Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system of the
R&S ESR (see also chapter 2.2.5.4, "Accessing the Start Menu", on page 56).

2. In the "Start" menu, select "Run".

The "Run" dialog box is displayed.

3. Enter the command C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\NO_AUTOLOGIN.REG.

4. Press the ENTER key to confirm.

The automatic login function is deactivated. The next time you switch on the instru-
ment, you are prompted to enter your user name and password before the firm-
ware is started.

Adapting the automatic login function to a new password

2. In the line "DefaultPassword"="894129", replace the default password

(894129) by the new password which is to be used for automatic login.

3. Save the changes to the file.

Reactivating the automatic login function

1. In the "Start" menu, select "Run".
The "Run" dialog box is displayed.

2. Enter the command C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\AUTOLOGIN.REG.

3. Press the ENTER key to confirm.

The automatic login function is reactivated. It will be applied the next time the
instrument is rebooted.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1047

R&S®ESR Appendix: LAN Interface
Configuring the Network

Switching users when using the automatic login function

13.1.8 Mapping Network Drives

1. Press the SAVE/ RCL key on the front panel of the R&S ESR.

2. Press the "File Manager" softkey.

3. Press the "More" softkey.

4. Press the "Network Drive" softkey.

The "Map Network Drive" dialog box is displayed.

5. Press the "Drive" list to open the network drive list and select the drive you want to
map.
Alternatively:
● Press the "Map Network Drive" softkey to set the focus on the "Drive" list.
● Press ENTER to open the network drive list and select the drive you want to
map using the arrow keys.

6. To have the connection set up automatically each time the instrument is started, in
the "Map Network Drive" dialog box, activate the "Reconnect at logon" option.

7. To connect using a different user name, activate the "Connect using a different
user name" option.
The "Map Network Drive" dialog box is extended by the "User name" and "Pass-
word" fields.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1048

R&S®ESR Appendix: LAN Interface
Configuring the Network

8. Enter your user name and password.

9. Confirm with "OK".

The drive is displayed in the Explorer.
Note: Only networks that you authorized to access are connected.

Disconnecting network drives

1. Press the SAVE/ RCL key on the front panel of the R&S ESR.

2. Press the "File Manager" softkey.

3. Press the "More" softkey.

4. Press the "Network Drive" softkey.

5. Press the "Disconnect Network Drive" softkey.

The "Disconnect Network Drive" dialog box is displayed.

6. In the "Drive" list, select the drive you want to disconnect.

7. Confirm with "OK".

13.1.9 Sharing Directories (only with Microsoft Networks)

Sharing directories makes data available for other users. This is only possible in Micro-
soft networks. Sharing is a property of a file or directory.
1. Press the "Windows" key on the external keyboard or the CTRL + ESC key combi-
nation on your keyboard to access the operating system.

2. Open the "Windows Explorer".

3. Select the desired folder with the right mouse button.

4. In the context menu, select "Share with > Specific people".

5. Select the users on your network you want to allow access to the directory to.

6. Select "Share" to confirm the settings.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1049

R&S®ESR Appendix: LAN Interface
Operation with Windows Remote Desktop

7. Select "Done" to close the dialog box.

The drive is shared and can be accessed by the selected users.

13.2 Operation with Windows Remote Desktop

In production test and measurement, a common requirement is central monitoring of
the T&M instruments for remote maintenance and remote diagnostics. Equipped with
the Windows Remote Desktop software, the R&S ESR ideally meets requirements for
use in production. (The computer that is used for remote operation is called "controller"
here.)
● Access to the control functions via a virtual front panel (soft front panel)
● Printout of measurement results directly from the controller
● Storage of measured data on the controller's hard disk
The R&S ESR is connected via a LAN, in which case the Windows operating system
also supports a connection via a modem. This section describes the configuration of
the R&S ESR and the Remote Desktop Client of the controller. Details on how to set
up a modem connection are described in the Windows documentation.

13.2.1 Configuring the R&S ESR for Remote Operation

To avoid problems, use a fixed IP address.

When a DHCP server is used, a new IP address is assigned each time the instrument
is restarted. This address must first be determined on the instrument itself. Thus, using
a DHCP server is not suitable for remote operation of the R&S ESR via Remote Desk-
top.

1. Press the "Windows" key on the external keyboard or the CTRL + ESC key combi-
nation on your keyboard to access the operating system.

2. Select "Start > Control Panel > System and Security > System > Allow remote
access".

3. In the "System Properties" dialog box, in the "Remote" tab, select one of the "Allow
connections..." options, depending on your security requirements.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1050

R&S®ESR Appendix: LAN Interface
Operation with Windows Remote Desktop

4. Define which users are to be given access to the R&S ESR via Remote Desktop.
Note: The user account under which configuration is carried out is automatically
enabled for Remote Desktop.
a) Select the "Select Users" button.
b) Select the users or create new user accounts as described in chapter 13.1.4,
"Creating Users", on page 1045.
c) Select "OK" to confirm the settings.

5. The R&S ESR is now ready for connection setup with the Remote Desktop pro-
gram of the controller.

13.2.2 Configuring the Controller

Remote Desktop Client

The Windows Remote Desktop Client is part of the operating system and can be
accessed via "Start > All Programs > Accessories > Remote Desktop Connection".

1. Press the "Windows" key on the external keyboard or the CTRL + ESC key combi-
nation on your keyboard to access the operating system.

2. From the "Start" menu, select "All Programs > Accessories > Remote Desktop
Connection".
The "Remote Desktop Connection" dialog box is displayed.

3. Select the "Options >>" button.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1051

R&S®ESR Appendix: LAN Interface
Operation with Windows Remote Desktop

The dialog box is expanded to display the configuration data.

4. Open the "Experience" tab.

The settings on this tab are used to select and optimize the connection speed.

5. In the list, select the appropriate connection (for example: LAN (10 Mbps or
higher)).
Depending on your selection (and how powerful the connection is), the options are
activated or deactivated.

6. To improve the performance, you can deactivate the "Desktop background", "Show
contents of window while dragging" and "Menu and window animation" options.

7. Open the "Local Resources" tab for enabling printers, local drives and serial inter-
faces.

8. If you will need to access drives of the controller from the R&S ESR (e.g. in order
to store settings or to copy files from the controller to the R&S ESR), activate the
"Disk drives" option.
Windows will then map drives of the controller to the corresponding network drives.

9. To use printers connected to the controller while accessing them from the
R&S ESR, activate the "Printers" options. Do not change the remaining settings.

10. Open the "Display" tab.

The options for configuring the R&S ESR screen display are displayed.

11. Under "Remote desktop size", you can set the size of the R&S ESR window on the
desktop of the controller.

12. Under "Colors", do not change the settings.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1052

R&S®ESR Appendix: LAN Interface
Operation with a VNC Client

13. Set the "Display the connection bar when in full screen mode" option:

14. If activated, a bar showing the network address of the R&S ESR will appear at the
top edge of the screen. You can use this bar to reduce, minimize or close the win-
dow.

15. If deactivated, the only way you can return to the controller desktop from the
R&S ESR screen in full screen mode is to select "Disconnect" from the "Start"
menu.

13.3 Operation with a VNC Client

Virtual Network Computing (VNC) allows you to control the R&S ESR (the VNC server)
from a remote computer (the VNC client), for example to monitor the instruments in a
production line. The handling of a VNC system is similar to using the Windows Remote
Desktop, but VNC has some advantages compared to the Remote Desktop.
● You can view the contents of the instrument display on more than one client
● VNC clients are available for many operating systems. Thus, a VNC is independent
of the platform you are using.
● You can still control the instrument itself when a remote connection has been
established, and see what is happening on both the instrument display and the cli-
ent. With the display running, you can also change settings both on the instrument
and with the client simultaneously. (Using the Remote Desktop turns off the display
and viewing the display contents is only possible on the controlling computer.)
● The complete mini soft front panel is available on the client ("Alt-M" opens the mini
soft front panel).
● Monitoring real time measurements is possible with the VNC client (this does not
work with the Remote Desktop).

Using a web browser

If you are using a web browser (for example Microsoft Internet Explorer), enter the IP
address of the instrument and the port you are using for the connection into the
address bar to establish a connection (for example "192.0.2.0:5800").
The browser then opens an interface that allows you to control the instrument after you
have entered the password.
The default port is 5800 and the default password is 894129, but you can change this
on the VNC software that comes with the instrument if required.
Note that using a browser requires you to install Java in order to run properly.

Using a VNC client

Alternatively, you can install a VNC client on your computer (for example a program
like TightVNC) and use that to access the instrument. In that case, start the client and
enter the IP address of the instrument to establish a connection.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1053

R&S®ESR Appendix: LAN Interface
Starting and Terminating Remote Operation

13.4 Starting and Terminating Remote Operation

Setting up a connection to the R&S ESR

1. In the "Remote Desktop Connection" dialog box (see chapter 13.2, "Operation with
Windows Remote Desktop ", on page 1050), open the "General" tab.

2. In the "Computer" field, enter the IP address of the R&S ESR.

In the "User name" field, enter instrument to log in as an administrator, or Normal
User to log in as a standard user.
In the "Password" field, enter 894129.

3. To save the connection configuration for later use:

a) Select the "Save As" button.
The "Save As" dialog box is displayed.
b) Enter the name for the connection information (*.RDP).

4. To load an existing connection configuration:

a) Select the "Open" button.
The "Open" dialog box is displayed.
b) Select the *.RDP file.

5. Select the "Connect" button.

The connection is set up.

6. If the "Disk drives" option is activated on the "Local Resources" tab, a warning is
displayed indicating that the drives are enabled for access from the R&S ESR.
Select "OK" to confirm the warning.

7. After a few moments, the R&S ESR screen is displayed.

If a dark screen appears or a dark square appears in the upper left-hand corner of
the screen, you must restart the R&S ESR in order to see the modified screen res-
olution.

● Press the key combination ALT + F4.

● The R&S ESR firmware is shut down, which may take a few sec-
onds.
● On the desktop, double-tap the "Analyzer" icon.

The firmware restarts and then automatically opens the "Soft Front Panel", i.e. the
user interface on which all front panel controls and the rotary knob are mapped to
buttons.

8. To deactivate or activate the "Soft Front Panel", press the F6 key.

After the connection is established, the R&S ESR screen is displayed in the
"Remote Desktop" application window.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1054

R&S®ESR Appendix: LAN Interface
Deactivating the R&S ESR via Remote Operation

You can operate all keys and softkeys using the mouse. The rotary knob is simula-
ted using the knob buttons.
The Windows "Start" menu can be made available by expanding the "Remote
Desktop" window to full size.
During the connection with the controller, the login entry is displayed on the
R&S ESR screen.

Terminating Remote Desktop control

The connection can be terminated by the controller or by a user at the R&S ESR:
1. On the controller, close the "Remote Desktop" window.
The connection to the R&S ESR is terminated (any time is possible).

2. On the R&S ESR, a user logs on.

The connection to the controller is terminated as a result. A message is displayed
on the controller display indicating that another user has assumed control of the
instrument.

Restoring the connection to the R&S ESR

Follow the instructions above for setting up a connection to the R&S ESR. If the con-
nection is terminated and then restored, the R&S ESR remains in the same state.

13.5 Deactivating the R&S ESR via Remote Operation

1. Click the R&S ESR soft front panel and close the application with the key combina-
tion ALT + F4.

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1055

R&S®ESR Appendix: LAN Interface
Deactivating the R&S ESR via Remote Operation

2. Click the desktop and press the key combination ALT + F4.
A safety query is displayed to warn you that the instrument cannot be reactivated
via remote operation and asks you whether you want to continue the shutdown
process.

R&S®ESR Index

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1079

R&S®ESR Index

More Options
Softkey ........................................................................ 83 Activating .................................................................... 69
More Traces B30 ............................................................................. 40
softkey ...................................................................... 208 Identification (remote) ............................................... 887
MT (hardware setting) ....................................................... 72 Installed .................................................................... 532
Multi-carrier Licenses ...................................................................... 69
ACLR ........................................................................ 245 RF Preamplifier (B22) ............................... 191, 363, 470
multi-carrier ACLR measurement .................................... 235 Output
Multiple signals measurement ......................................... 107 Sample rate, definition .............................................. 483
Output buffer ................................................................... 585
N OVEN (status display) ....................................................... 77
Overlapping commands .................................................. 582
n dB down Preventing ................................................................. 584
marker function ......................................................... 431 overload
NAN ................................................................................. 578 tracking generator ..................................................... 501
NCor (enhancement label) ................................................ 74 Overwrite mode ....................................................... 180, 398
Negative Peak detector ................................................... 408 OVLD
Network ......................................................................... 1043 tracking generator ............................................. 501, 509
Automatic logon ...................................................... 1046 OVLD (status display) ....................................................... 77
Changing configuration ........................................... 1044
Changing user passwords ...................................... 1046 P
Connecting drives ................................................... 1048
Creating users ........................................................ 1045 Pa (enhancement label) .................................................... 74
Disconnecting drives ............................................... 1048 packing .......................................................................... 1039
Sharing directories .................................................. 1049 Paint
NINF ................................................................................ 578 Accessing ................................................................... 57
NOI (marker functions) .............................................. 76, 420 Parallel poll register enable
noise Remote ..................................................................... 887
correction .......................................................... 254, 364 Parameters
source, external ........................................................ 393 Block data ................................................................. 580
Noise source control Boolean ..................................................................... 579
Connector ................................................................... 30 Entering ...................................................................... 86
NOR SCPI ......................................................................... 577
tracking generator ............................................. 501, 509 Special numeric values ............................................. 578
normalization ........................................................... 487, 503 String ........................................................................ 580
tracking generator ..................................................... 509 Text ........................................................................... 579
NTRansition .................................................................... 586 Units .......................................................................... 578
Numeric parameters .......................................................... 86 Passwords
Numeric values Changing ................................................................ 1046
Special ...................................................................... 578 path ................................................................................. 540
Peak List On/Off
O softkey ...................................................................... 432
Peak search ............................................................ 308, 312
OBW PEAK SEARCH key ........................................................ 426
Multi-carrier signal .................................................... 262 PEAKSEARCH ................................................................ 214
Search limits ............................................................. 262 Ph. Noise Auto Peak Search
Occupied bandwidth ........................................................ 261 remote control ........................................................... 842
OCXO ................................................................................ 41 Phase ...................................................................... 182, 311
Connector ................................................................... 35 PHN (marker functions) ............................................. 75, 420
offset Ping ................................................................................... 66
frequency .................................................................. 356 PK (trace information) ....................................................... 75
gate signal ................................................................ 389 polarity
reference level .................................................. 364, 477 external trigger .......................................................... 481
Offset external trigger/gate .................................................. 387
Limit line .................................................................... 221 trigger edge ....................................................... 387, 481
Trigger .............................................................. 387, 481 Ports
Offset (hardware setting) ................................................... 73 User .......................................................................... 902
On-screen keyboard .......................................................... 80 Positive Peak detector .................................................... 408
Online help power
Working with ............................................................... 21 bandwidth percentage .............................................. 264
Operating system .............................................................. 53 Power
Login ........................................................................... 54 Mean ......................................................................... 305
service packs .............................................................. 54 remote control ........................................... 854, 855, 856
Operation complete Remote control ......................................................... 856
Remote ..................................................................... 887 softkey ...................................................................... 435
power cables ................................................................. 1039

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1080

R&S®ESR Index

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1085

R&S®ESR Index

Startup Recall (On/Off) ............................................. 542 Volt .................................................................... 363, 476

Startup Recall On/Off(remote control) ...................... 916 Watt .................................................................. 363, 476
Std Dev (remote control) ........................................... 780 Weight ADJ (On/Off) (remote control) ...................... 705
Stepsize Standard .................................................... 417 Weight TX (On/Off) (remote control) ......................... 705
Stepsize Standard (remote control) .......................... 834 Weighting Filter (remote control) .............. 704, 705, 706
Stepsize Sweep Points ............................................. 417 X * RBW .................................................................... 355
Stepsize Sweep Points (remote control) ................... 834 X * RBW (remote control) ................................. 793, 794
Stop .......................................................................... 356 X * Span .................................................................... 355
Stop (remote control) ................................................ 795 X * Span (remote control) ................................. 793, 794
Stop Frequency (remote control) .............................. 795 x Offset (remote control) ........................................... 679
Sweep Count ............................................................ 381 x-Axis Range .................................................... 326, 332
Sweep List (remote control) ..... 720, 721, 722, 723, 724, x-Axis Range (remote control) .................................. 767
725, 726, 727, 733, 734, 735, 736, 737, 738, 739, 740 x-Axis Ref Level ................................................ 326, 332
Sweep Points ............................................................ 382 x-Axis Ref Level (remote control) ............................. 768
Sweep Points (remote control) ................................. 804 x*Demod BW (K7) .................................................... 355
Sweep Rep (On/Off)(remote control) ........................ 962 y Offset (remote control) ........................................... 685
Sweep Time ...................................................... 252, 389 y-Axis Max Value .............................................. 328, 334
Sweeptime Auto (remote control) ............................. 805 y-Axis Max Value (remote control) ............................ 769
System Messages (remote control) .................. 896, 897 y-Axis Min Value ............................................... 328, 335
T1-T2 ->T1 ................................................................ 403 y-Unit %/Abs ..................................................... 329, 335
T1-T3 ->T1 ................................................................ 403 y-Unit %/Abs (remote control) ................................... 768
T1-T4 ->T1 ................................................................ 403 Zero Span ................................................................. 359
T1-T5 ->T1 ................................................................ 403 Zero Span (remote control) ....................................... 795
T1-T6 ->T1 ................................................................ 403 Softkey .............................................................................. 83
THD Unit %/DB (remote control) .............................. 759 *IDN Format Legacy ................................................. 526
Threshold .......................................................... 216, 433 = Marker (remote control) ......................................... 658
Threshold (remote control) ............................... 835, 836 Adjust Settings .......................................... 261, 350, 473
Time Domain Power (remote control) ....................... 771 Adjust X-Axis .................................................... 301, 303
Time Line 1 (remote control) ..................................... 831 Alignment .................................................................. 520
Time Line 2 (remote control) ..................................... 831 AM ............................................................................ 430
Time+Date (remote control) ...................... 891, 893, 894 AM Mod Depth .................................................. 233, 345
Trace 1 2 3 4 5 6 (remote control) ............................ 820 AM Mod Depth (remote control) ............................... 755
Trace Math ................................................................ 403 Annotation (On/Off) ................................................... 529
Trace Math (remote control) ..................... 817, 818, 819 Annotation On/Off (remote control) ........... 947, 949, 951
Trace Math Mode ...................................................... 404 APD .................................................................. 233, 325
Trace Math Mode (remote control) ........................... 818 Application Setup Recovery ...................................... 534
Trace Math Off .......................................................... 404 ASCII File Export ...................................................... 302
Trace Math Position .................................................. 404 AUTO ........................................................ 368, 373, 381
Trace Mode (remote control) ... 769, 770, 772, 773, 774, Auto Freq .................................................................. 367
775, 776, 777, 779, 815 Auto Level ................................................................. 367
Track BW (remote control) ........................................ 796 Auto select Reference .............................................. 516
Track On/Off (remote control) ................................... 796 Average .................................................................... 399
Track Threshold (remote control) ............................. 797 Average Mode .......................................................... 402
Tracking Generator ................................................... 393 Band Power (remote control) ............................ 855, 857
Trg/Gate Level .......................................................... 386 BB Power .......................................................... 386, 480
Trg/Gate Level (remote control) ................................ 808 Blank ................................................................. 181, 400
Trg/Gate Polarity Pos/Neg ........................................ 387 C/N .................................................................... 260, 473
Trg/Gate Polarity Pos/Neg (remote control) ..... 809, 812 C/N (remote control) ................................................. 694
Trg/Gate Source (remote control) ............. 807, 808, 812 C/N, C/No ................................................. 232, 260, 472
Trigger Holdoff (remote control) ................................ 806 C/No .................................................................. 260, 473
Trigger Out (Low/High)(remote control) .................... 902 C/No (remote control) ............................................... 694
Trigger Polarity ......................................................... 481 Calibrate Reflection Open (remote control) ...... 871, 872
Unit ................................................................... 363, 476 Calibrate Reflection Short (remote control) .............. 872
Unit (remote control) ......................................... 814, 816 Calibrate Transmission (remote control) ................... 872
Update Path (remote control) ................................... 891 Calibration Frequency RF ......................................... 536
Use Zoom Limits ....................................................... 216 CCDF ................................................................ 233, 331
Use Zoom Limits (remote control) ............................ 834 Center ....................................................................... 354
User Defined Colors ................................................. 555 Center (remote control) ............................................. 792
User Defined Colors (remote control) ....................... 929 CF Stepsize .............................................................. 354
User Pref Setup ........................................................ 512 Ch Power ACLR ............................................... 232, 245
Value (remote control) .............................. 678, 680, 684 Channel Bandwidth ........................................... 260, 473
Versions + Options (remote control) ......................... 895 Clear All Messages ................................................... 533
Versions+Options (remote control) ........................... 894 Clear Write ........................................................ 180, 398
Video ................................................................. 385, 479 Close Sweep List .............................................. 271, 301
Video BW Auto (remote control) ............................... 802 Color (On/Off) ................................................... 530, 532
Video BW Manual (remote control) ........................... 801 Colors ....................................................................... 530
Video Output ............................................................. 393 Compatibility Mode ................................................... 523

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1086

R&S®ESR Index

Computer Name ....................................................... 521 Input (AC/DC) ........................................... 196, 365, 393
Configure Monitor ..................................................... 527 Input (AC/DC)(remote control) .................................. 641
Cont Demod .............................................................. 431 Input 50 Ω/75 Ω ............................................... 193, 365
Continue Single Sweep ............................................ 379 Input Source ............................................................. 535
Continuous Sweep .................................................... 379 Insert Value ............................................................... 220
Copy to ..................................................................... 221 Install Option ............................................................. 534
Coupling (FSx/HP) .................................................... 525 Install Option by XML ................................................ 534
CP, ACP, MC-ACLR (remote control) ....................... 694 IP Address ................................................................ 521
CP/ACLR Standard (remote control) ........................ 698 IQ Export ................................................................... 543
Decim Sep (remote control) ...................................... 820 IQ Import ................................................................... 543
Default Colors 1 (remote control) .............................. 948 LAN Reset ................................................................ 523
Default Colors 2 (remote control) .............................. 948 Left Limit ................................................................... 306
Delete ....................................................................... 221 Limits On/Off ............................................................. 305
Delete (ACLR User Standard) .................................. 254 List Evaluation .......................................................... 301
Delete Value ............................................................. 221 List Evaluation On/Off ............................................... 302
Density (remote control) ........................... 854, 855, 856 Load (ACLR User Standard) ..................................... 254
Description ................................................................ 523 Log ............................................................................ 403
Deselect all ............................................................... 220 Logo (On/Off) ............................................................ 529
Details On/Off ........................................................... 302 Logo On/Off (remote control) .................................... 949
DHCP (On/Off) .......................................................... 522 LXI ............................................................................ 522
Display Line 1 ........................................................... 222 Margin ....................................................................... 302
Display Line 2 ........................................................... 222 Marker 1 to 4 (remote control) .................................. 665
Display lines .............................................................. 222 Marker Demod .......................................................... 430
Display Pwr Save ...................................................... 532 Marker Number ......................................................... 434
Display Pwr Save (remote control) ................... 949, 950 Marker Number (remote control) .............................. 849
Display Setup ............................................................ 528 Marker Peak List ....................................................... 432
Display Update (On/Off) ........................................... 526 Marker to Trace ........................................................ 211
Edit ............................................................................ 221 Marker to Trace (remote control) .............................. 665
Edit (remote control) ......................................... 681, 683 Marker Zoom ............................................................ 418
Edit Comment ........................................................... 220 Max Hold ........................................................... 181, 399
Edit Margin ................................................................ 220 Max Peak Count ....................................................... 432
Edit Name ................................................................. 220 May Peak Size (remote control) ............................... 851
Edit Value ................................................................. 220 Mean ......................................................................... 305
Exclude LO ............................................................... 422 Meas Start/Stop ........................................................ 303
Export (remote control) ..................................... 917, 918 Mech Atten Auto (remote control) ............................. 816
FFT ........................................................... 368, 372, 381 Min Hold ............................................................ 181, 399
FFT Filter Mode ........................................ 369, 373, 381 Mkr Demod On/Off .................................................... 430
Firmware Update ...................................................... 534 Mkr Stop Time .......................................................... 430
FM ............................................................................. 430 Mode Default ............................................................ 524
Frequency Line 1 ...................................................... 222 Mode R&S FSP ........................................................ 524
Frequency Line 2 ...................................................... 222 Mode R&S FSU ........................................................ 524
Frequency Offset (remote control) ............................ 794 Network Address ...................................................... 521
Full Span ................................................................... 189 New ........................................................................... 220
Gate Delay ................................................................ 389 New (remote control) ........................................ 681, 683
Gate Length .............................................................. 389 New Spectrum (remote control) ................................ 604
Gate Mode Lvl/Edge ................................................. 388 No. of Harmonics ...................................................... 350
Gate Settings ............................................................ 388 Normalize (remote control) ....................................... 872
Gated Trigger ............................................................ 388 OBW ................................................................. 232, 263
General Setup ........................................................... 521 OBW (remote control) ............................................... 694
GPIB ......................................................................... 523 Option Licenses ........................................................ 534
GPIB Address ........................................................... 523 Other LAN Settings ................................................... 521
GPIB Language ........................................................ 524 Password .......................................................... 522, 536
GPIB Terminator LFEOI/EOI .................................... 526 Peak .......................................................................... 305
Handle missing Ext. Ref ........................................... 516 Peak List (remote control) ......................................... 851
Hardware Info ........................................................... 532 Peak List On/Off ....................................................... 432
Harmonic Distortion .......................................... 234, 349 Peaks per Range ...................................................... 302
Harmonic RBW Auto ................................................. 350 Power (remote control) ............................. 854, 855, 856
Harmonic Sweep Time ............................................. 350 Preamp On/Off .......................................... 191, 363, 470
I/O Logging (On/Off) ................................................. 527 Preamp On/Off (remote control) ............................... 638
ID String Factory ....................................................... 523 Predefined Colors ..................................................... 530
ID String User ........................................................... 523 Predefined Colors (remote control) ........................... 948
IF Gain (Norm/Puls) .................................................. 525 Print Colors ............................................................... 531
IF Power ........................................................... 386, 480 Recall (remote control) ............................................. 872
IF Power Retrigger Holdoff (remote control) ............. 807 Ref Level ........................................................... 361, 474
IF Power Retrigger Hysteresis (remote control) ....... 807 Ref Level (remote control) ........................................ 815
Import (remote control) ............................................. 859 Reference Int/Ext ...................................................... 516
Info (LXI) ................................................................... 522 Res BW Auto ............................................................ 370

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1087

R&S®ESR Index

Z
zero span ........................................................................ 359
Zero span measurements ............................................... 113
Zoom ............................................................................... 418
Amplitude .......................................................... 181, 399

User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 10 1091

02 THU9 THV9 SL1 Servicehandbuch-Ma0700 CD
No ratings yet
02 THU9 THV9 SL1 Servicehandbuch-Ma0700 CD
284 pages
R&S ESIB Service Manual en 01
100% (1)
R&S ESIB Service Manual en 01
145 pages
ICTNPL413 Student Assessment (Word Version) TRG-DOC-09 Student Assessment Booklet-V-2.0-ICTNPL413
No ratings yet
ICTNPL413 Student Assessment (Word Version) TRG-DOC-09 Student Assessment Booklet-V-2.0-ICTNPL413
53 pages
Chemistry A Molecular Approach with MasteringChemistry 2nd Edition Tro Test Bank download
100% (1)
Chemistry A Molecular Approach with MasteringChemistry 2nd Edition Tro Test Bank download
62 pages
Tce901 Manual PDF
No ratings yet
Tce901 Manual PDF
410 pages
SMA100A-m
No ratings yet
SMA100A-m
701 pages
Primary Education Degree Dissertation Ideas
100% (2)
Primary Education Degree Dissertation Ideas
8 pages
R&S FSIQ26 Operating Manual
No ratings yet
R&S FSIQ26 Operating Manual
859 pages
FSV Service
100% (1)
FSV Service
235 pages
SG3000_3125_3400HV-MV-30 Preventive Maintenance Manual
No ratings yet
SG3000_3125_3400HV-MV-30 Preventive Maintenance Manual
65 pages
thesis__Copy___Copy_
No ratings yet
thesis__Copy___Copy_
21 pages
p.2 Scheme Literacy i Term
No ratings yet
p.2 Scheme Literacy i Term
21 pages
Sanction Letter
No ratings yet
Sanction Letter
5 pages
Systemverilog For Design and Verification: Engineer Explorer Series
100% (2)
Systemverilog For Design and Verification: Engineer Explorer Series
486 pages
PERSONALITY and WORK MOTIVATION
No ratings yet
PERSONALITY and WORK MOTIVATION
12 pages
Oscilloscope RTB UserManual En
No ratings yet
Oscilloscope RTB UserManual En
510 pages
FPC XXX Anl-En R&s Spectrum
No ratings yet
FPC XXX Anl-En R&s Spectrum
291 pages
Rohde & Schwarz - SMB100A Quick Start Guide
No ratings yet
Rohde & Schwarz - SMB100A Quick Start Guide
91 pages
Rohde & Schwarz RSNRP-ZK6.02
No ratings yet
Rohde & Schwarz RSNRP-ZK6.02
132 pages
On Tamil Militarism
No ratings yet
On Tamil Militarism
76 pages
Rohde & Schwarz - SMB100A Operating Manual
No ratings yet
Rohde & Schwarz - SMB100A Operating Manual
481 pages
Inglés Junior BBC London Volumen 3 Fascículo 25
No ratings yet
Inglés Junior BBC London Volumen 3 Fascículo 25
18 pages
SGT 100 A
No ratings yet
SGT 100 A
593 pages
Discussion: Exercise
No ratings yet
Discussion: Exercise
10 pages
Rosemount™ 5300-SIS Guided Wave Radar Level Transmitter-1
No ratings yet
Rosemount™ 5300-SIS Guided Wave Radar Level Transmitter-1
46 pages
Superbikes: Promotional Mix and Marketing Communication Strategies
No ratings yet
Superbikes: Promotional Mix and Marketing Communication Strategies
15 pages
RDOS Best Practice Guidelines For Design of Storage and Collection Space of Waste in MF Commercial and Mixed Use Buildings Final
No ratings yet
RDOS Best Practice Guidelines For Design of Storage and Collection Space of Waste in MF Commercial and Mixed Use Buildings Final
22 pages
1-Put A Period, Exclamation Mark, or A Question Mark After Each Sentence
No ratings yet
1-Put A Period, Exclamation Mark, or A Question Mark After Each Sentence
6 pages
ESCI OperatingManual en 03
No ratings yet
ESCI OperatingManual en 03
804 pages
Appendix A - Status Messages: Armed. Bad Snubber Fuse
No ratings yet
Appendix A - Status Messages: Armed. Bad Snubber Fuse
9 pages
MD Emc New Esd Gun Manual
No ratings yet
MD Emc New Esd Gun Manual
34 pages
Life On The Mississippi Excerpt
No ratings yet
Life On The Mississippi Excerpt
7 pages
A Study On Customer Attitude Towards Yamaha Sports Bike in Lucknow City
No ratings yet
A Study On Customer Attitude Towards Yamaha Sports Bike in Lucknow City
6 pages
SR NO 7 Tilt Inclinometer - Copy
No ratings yet
SR NO 7 Tilt Inclinometer - Copy
10 pages
Rs FSP Series
No ratings yet
Rs FSP Series
796 pages
001485895-An-01-En-rth1052mso R Srscope R Handh Osci500mhz
No ratings yet
001485895-An-01-En-rth1052mso R Srscope R Handh Osci500mhz
280 pages
RNMS3000 RDL User Manual
No ratings yet
RNMS3000 RDL User Manual
114 pages
Week 1-Module 1
No ratings yet
Week 1-Module 1
22 pages
Fs Up Service Manual v 5
No ratings yet
Fs Up Service Manual v 5
283 pages
Syllabus Renewal
No ratings yet
Syllabus Renewal
2 pages
[Dynatron]Declaration of Conformity Q6_CPU 쿨러
No ratings yet
[Dynatron]Declaration of Conformity Q6_CPU 쿨러
1 page
IMU Series - Product Introduction (v.3.0)
No ratings yet
IMU Series - Product Introduction (v.3.0)
42 pages
6183.2211.02-01_VCS-4G_6.0 GB5450 Compact CWP Operational Manual
No ratings yet
6183.2211.02-01_VCS-4G_6.0 GB5450 Compact CWP Operational Manual
235 pages
Thermoscientific Emcpro Plus: Multi-Function Solution For Conducted Immunity Testing (Emc)
No ratings yet
Thermoscientific Emcpro Plus: Multi-Function Solution For Conducted Immunity Testing (Emc)
8 pages
NG Sze Kay Priscilla 1
No ratings yet
NG Sze Kay Priscilla 1
1 page
Sb10en 60808 1.00
No ratings yet
Sb10en 60808 1.00
20 pages
5.LS_cable_1015_UL_E52853
100% (1)
5.LS_cable_1015_UL_E52853
3 pages
Rohde & Schwarz - SMB100A Service Manual
No ratings yet
Rohde & Schwarz - SMB100A Service Manual
223 pages
Esib 04 Complete
No ratings yet
Esib 04 Complete
782 pages
ZVL Operating en 09
No ratings yet
ZVL Operating en 09
625 pages
British Imperialism in India - Section 4
No ratings yet
British Imperialism in India - Section 4
17 pages
EX-IQ-BOXK04 OperatingManual en 06
No ratings yet
EX-IQ-BOXK04 OperatingManual en 06
418 pages
Thesis Statements
No ratings yet
Thesis Statements
3 pages
PCB - 01 - Signal Integrity Is in Your Future4
No ratings yet
PCB - 01 - Signal Integrity Is in Your Future4
53 pages
Vismaya (CV Resume)
No ratings yet
Vismaya (CV Resume)
3 pages
Culinary Competition
100% (1)
Culinary Competition
36 pages
Emergency Phone Tower: User's Manual
No ratings yet
Emergency Phone Tower: User's Manual
23 pages
Er9000en 21204 1.00
No ratings yet
Er9000en 21204 1.00
106 pages
FSH OperatingManual en FW260
No ratings yet
FSH OperatingManual en FW260
369 pages
ATP Series Manual 2v9
No ratings yet
ATP Series Manual 2v9
474 pages
ZVA ZVB ZVT Vector Network Analyzers Operating Manual
No ratings yet
ZVA ZVB ZVT Vector Network Analyzers Operating Manual
1,168 pages
FSH QuickStartGuide en FW260
No ratings yet
FSH QuickStartGuide en FW260
90 pages
RS SigGen 3GPP-FDD Operating PDF
No ratings yet
RS SigGen 3GPP-FDD Operating PDF
612 pages
Contents of Manuals For EMI Test Receiver R&Amp S ESCI
No ratings yet
Contents of Manuals For EMI Test Receiver R&Amp S ESCI
495 pages
元征钥匙匹配仪GIII或者X-PROG3使用说明书(1)
No ratings yet
元征钥匙匹配仪GIII或者X-PROG3使用说明书(1)
68 pages
Smiqb OperatingManual V2 en 11
No ratings yet
Smiqb OperatingManual V2 en 11
424 pages
R&S ViCom Interface For R&S TSM Instruments User Manual PDF
No ratings yet
R&S ViCom Interface For R&S TSM Instruments User Manual PDF
277 pages
WinIQSIM User Manual
No ratings yet
WinIQSIM User Manual
563 pages
Manual NRP z81 z85 z86 Rev 07
No ratings yet
Manual NRP z81 z85 z86 Rev 07
110 pages
FSC OperatingManual en FW222
No ratings yet
FSC OperatingManual en FW222
287 pages
Fsh4 Quickstart English
No ratings yet
Fsh4 Quickstart English
111 pages
FSH OperatingManual en FW250
No ratings yet
FSH OperatingManual en FW250
337 pages
DFR - 8300 1 en 4
No ratings yet
DFR - 8300 1 en 4
68 pages
Electronics For Industrial Applications: Operating Instructions RE 07602-B/01.2015
No ratings yet
Electronics For Industrial Applications: Operating Instructions RE 07602-B/01.2015
28 pages
1141A User and Service Guide
No ratings yet
1141A User and Service Guide
92 pages
CMU Opman 006 V5-20
No ratings yet
CMU Opman 006 V5-20
529 pages
Guia Ràpida FSH R&S
No ratings yet
Guia Ràpida FSH R&S
111 pages
6183.2105.02-01 - VCS-4G - 6.0 Architecture Manual
0% (1)
6183.2105.02-01 - VCS-4G - 6.0 Architecture Manual
148 pages
UserManual TSMW
No ratings yet
UserManual TSMW
94 pages
FSQ Operating Manual
No ratings yet
FSQ Operating Manual
847 pages
Titan Store Details
No ratings yet
Titan Store Details
142 pages
Rs Siggen Eutra Lte Operating Sharing
No ratings yet
Rs Siggen Eutra Lte Operating Sharing
558 pages
Floorings: Unit - Iv
100% (1)
Floorings: Unit - Iv
22 pages
SMU200A Operating Manual e
No ratings yet
SMU200A Operating Manual e
860 pages
R8618a M220
No ratings yet
R8618a M220
68 pages
Karnataka Professional Civil ..-1
No ratings yet
Karnataka Professional Civil ..-1
2 pages
Rohde-Schwarz UPV Audio Analyzer Manual
No ratings yet
Rohde-Schwarz UPV Audio Analyzer Manual
858 pages
SMJ100A Service Manual e
100% (1)
SMJ100A Service Manual e
258 pages
CMU200 Quickstart 06 V5-20
No ratings yet
CMU200 Quickstart 06 V5-20
83 pages
Manual Operating CMU200 Base PDF
No ratings yet
Manual Operating CMU200 Base PDF
529 pages
Analizador Wimax TSMW Operating Manual
No ratings yet
Analizador Wimax TSMW Operating Manual
82 pages
Question Bank Differential Calculus Questions Are Taken From 12 University Questions 2 Mark Questions
No ratings yet
Question Bank Differential Calculus Questions Are Taken From 12 University Questions 2 Mark Questions
17 pages
The Joy of Computing Using Python: Assignment 2
No ratings yet
The Joy of Computing Using Python: Assignment 2
5 pages
The Love Potion Spell Book
No ratings yet
The Love Potion Spell Book
25 pages
Service Manual SMBV100A
No ratings yet
Service Manual SMBV100A
231 pages
Safe Use of Smart Devices in Systems Important to Safety in Nuclear Power Plants
From Everand
Safe Use of Smart Devices in Systems Important to Safety in Nuclear Power Plants
IAEA
No ratings yet
Analog Dialogue Volume 46, Number 1: Analog Dialogue, #5
From Everand
Analog Dialogue Volume 46, Number 1: Analog Dialogue, #5
Analog Dialogue
5/5 (1)